City of Dallas PDF

SPECIAL PROVISIONS
AND
PROPOSAL FOR
ABLE NO. 3 STORM WATER PUMPING STATION

(PB06T513)
AND FOR
TRINITY WATERSHED MANAGEMENT DEPARTMENT
CONTRACT NO. TW12576
TRINITY WATERSHED MANAGEMENT DEPARTMENT

CITY OF DALLAS
DALLAS, TEXAS
VOLUME 3 OF 3
CONTRACT NO. ________
5 OF 19
6 OF 19
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLOOD CONTROL IMPROVEMENTS
ABLE NO. 3 STORM WATER PUMP STATION PB06T513
VOLUME 1 OF 3
1. ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
2. NOTICE TO BIDDERS
3. CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
4. SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SECTION A PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS & GENERAL
CONDITIONS
SECTION B TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SECTION C WATER UTILITIES SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5. BID PROPOSAL FORMS
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Division 01 Division 03)
VOLUME 2 OF 3
VOLUME 3 OF 3
2 OF 19
Table of Contents
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010
01011
01012
01039
01070
01100
01101
01102
01120
01150
01320
01340
01342
01370
01400
01500
01505
01532
01560
01561
01600
01640
01650
01700
01710
01720
01750
01760
01780
01800
01811
SUMMARY OF WORK
PROTECTING THE WORK FROM FLOODING
CONSTRUCTION WITHIN THE DALLAS FLOODWAY
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT (IAQ) DURING CONSTRUCTION
LEED REQUIREMENTS
INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROTECTION BEFORE OCCUPANCY
CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
SUBMITTALS
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
QUALITY ASSURANCE
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
TREE PROTECTION, REMOVAL, AND PRUNING
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND SPECIAL CONTROLS
RELOCATION OF AQUATIC RESOURCES
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
FACILITY STARTUP
CONTRACT CLOSE OUT
CLEANING
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
TESTING CONCRETE STRUCTURES FOR WATERTIGHTNESS
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
POST FINAL INSPECTION
OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION
SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
DIVISION 02 - SITE WORK

02072
02110
02200
02221
02223
02260
02270
02271
02272
02278
02373
02515
02630
02632
02634
02701
165477
DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING

SITE CLEARING
EARTHWORK
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
TRENCH AND EXCAVATION SYSTEM
TOPSOILING AND FINISHED GRADING
SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
STONE REVETMENT (RIP RAP)
ARTICULATING CONCRETE BLOCK SYSTEM
GEOTEXTILE - EROSION CONTROL
DRILLED PIERS
PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
IN-SITU CEMENT MORTAR LINING
PLANT-APPLIED CEMENT MORTAR LINING
WELD AFTER BACKFILL
PREFABRICATED TRENCH DRAIN SYSTEM
City of Dallas
ABLE No. 3 Storm Water Pumping Station
Table of Contents - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
02778
02930
02950
02975
GEOTEXTILES
SEEDING AND SODDING
LANDSCAPING
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03108
03208
03240
03308
03311
03348
03350
03450
FORMWORK
REINFORCEMENT
SYNTHETIC FIBER REINFORCEMENT
CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING
CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING
CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS
TESTING
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04050
04110
04155
04510
04810
COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY CONSTRUCTION

MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
MASONRY CLEANING
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05120
05131
05313
05400
05410
05505
05512
05521
05522
STRUCTURAL STEEL
STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM
METAL DECK
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING (ROOF TRUSSES)
METAL FABRICATIONS
METAL PAN STAIRS
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
ALUMINUM RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

06100
06160
ROUGH CARPENTRY
SHEATHING
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07115
07120
07131
07210
07271
07412
07417
07418
07542
07620
07710
07720
07841
165477
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
BUILDING INSULATION
SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS
METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES
ROOF ACCESSORIES
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
City of Dallas
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
07842
07920
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110
08305
08311
08331
08413
08451
08710
08800
08803
08911
08951
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

HEAVY-DUTY ACCESS DOORS
STANDARD ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
TRANSLUCENT LINEAR CHANNEL GLAZING SYSTEM
DOOR HARDWARE
GLAZING
FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
STRUCTURED-POLYCARBONATE-PANEL ASSEMBLIES
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09310
09512
09651
09653
09662
09905
09910
CERAMIC TILE
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
THIN-SET EPOXY TERRAZZO (TERR)
PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
PIPELINE COATING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10162
10213
10400
10432
10434
10523
10801
STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

FIXED LOUVERS
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
PANEL SIGNAGE
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11005
11060
11065
11076
11201
11210
11211
11213
11300
11980
EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PUMPING EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PUMPING EQUIPMENT: SUMP
PUMPING EQUIPMENT: SUBMERSIBLE NON-CLOG
SELF-CLEANING TRASHRACK SYSTEM
CONCRETE VOLUTE PUMPS
PARALLEL SHAFT GEAR REDUCERS
FIELD TEST OF CONCRETE VOLUTE PUMPS
OIL-WATER SEPERATION UNIT
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12845
165477
FOOT GRILLES
City of Dallas
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13115
13300
13302
13303
13305
13310
13312
13314
13316
13320
13325
13327
13345
13400
13405
13410
13500
13505
13515
13550
13851
GALVANIC ANODE CATHODIC PROTECTION

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - GENERAL PROVISIONS
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - TESTING
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - TRAINING
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - APPLICATION SERVICES
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - FLOW DEVICES
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - LEVEL DEVICES
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - PRESSURE DEVICES
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - TEMPERATURE DEVICES
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FIBER OPTIC DATA NETWORK
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS CONTROL PANELS
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - PANEL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - INSTRUMENT SUPPORT HARDWARE
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - INPUT-OUTPUT LIST
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - FIELD INSTRUMENT LIST
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINAL
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
EQUIPMENT
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - SECURITY SYSTEM
FIRE ALARM
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

14210
14305
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

BRIDGE CRANES
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15060
15061
15062
15064
15065
15070
15090
15100
15101
15104
15106
15114
15115
15120
15150
15160
15170
15175
15180
15400
15480
15500
15600
15700
165477
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PIPE: STEEL
PIPE: DUCTILE
PIPE: PLASTIC
PIPE: STAINLESS STEEL
PIPE: BAR WRAPPED CONCRETE CYLINDER (AWWA C303 MODIFIED)
PIPE AND CONDUIT SUPPORT SYSTEMS
VALVES: BASIC REQUIREMENTS
GATE VALVES
BALL VALVES
CHECK VALVES
MISCELLANEOUS VALVES
WATER CONTROL GATES
HVAC & PLUMBING: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
HVAC & PLUMBING: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
HVAC & PLUMBING: PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
HVAC & PLUMBING: VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SOUND CONTROL
HVAC & PLUMBING: IDENTIFICATION
HVAC & PLUMBING: INSULATION
PLUMBING: FIXTURES & EQUIPMENT
PLUMBING: DOMESTIC WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
HVAC: UNIT HEATING EQUIPMENT
HVAC: REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT
HVAC: EQUIPMENT
City of Dallas
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
15741
15800
15830
15900
15950
15995
HVAC: HEAT PUMP AIR TO AIR

HVAC: AIR DISTRIBUTION
HVAC: VENTILATION FANS
HVAC: CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
HVAC: TESTING AND BALANCING
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16000
16045
16060
16105
16110
16115
16120
16121
16140
16150
16151
16195
16196
16195
16261
16345
16346
16430
16430B
16461
16470
16475
16476
16480
16483
16487
16500
16600
16660
16661
16670
16720
16859
16995
165477
ELECTRICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS

ELECTRICAL SUPPORT HARDWARE
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
POWER SYSTEM STUDY
RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS
CABLE TRAY
WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM)
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
LIGHT SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
NEMA FRAME INDUCTION MOTORS, 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
LARGE INDUCTION MOTORS
POWER METERING AND PROTECTIVE RELAYS
LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs)
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (UPSS)
MEDIUM VOLTAGE METAL CLAD SWITCHGEAR
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SEALED DEADFRONT DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
PRIMARY SUBSTATION TRANSFORMER
PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
DISTRIBUTION DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PANELBOARDS
LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATSs)
LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
MEDIUM VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS)
ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (OEMs)
LIGHTING SYSTEM
UNDERGROUND SYSTEM
GROUNDING SYSTEM
MEDIUM VOLTAGE NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTOR
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING
ELECTRICAL COMMISSIONING
City of Dallas
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
The following specifications were prepared under my direction:

Division 01, Sections 02072, 02110, 02221, 02223, 02260, 02270, 02271, 02515, 02630,
02632, 02634, 09905, 09910, 10400, Division 11, , Section 13115, Section 14305,
Sections 15060, 15061, 15062, 15064, 15065, 15090, 15100, 15101, 15104, 15106,
15114, 15115,
ALBERT CHARLES PETRASEK, JR.

HDR ENGINEERING, INC.
TEXAS REGISTERED
ENGINEERING FIRM
F-754
The following specifications were prepared under my direction:

Sections 02200, 02278, 02373, Division 03 (except 03450), and Division 05
ZEEV SAGGI
HDR ENGINEERING, INC.
TEXAS REGISTERED
ENGINEERING FIRM
F-754
95% Review
4-28-2014
The following specifications in were prepared under my direction:

Sections 01532, 02930 and 02950.
REBECCA CAYE COOK

CAYE COOK & ASSOCIATES, INC.
TEXAS REGISTERED
ENGINEERING FIRM F-

Section 02975.
JAMES POLE
CAYE COOK & ASSOCIATES, INC.
TEXAS REGISTERED
ENGINEERING FIRM F-
95% Review
4-28-2014

Section 02272, Section 03450, Division 4, Division 6, Division 7, Division 8, Sections
09310, 09512, 10162, 10213, 10432, 10434, 10523, 10801, Division 12, and Section
14210.
FERNANDO J. ANDRADE
GSR ANDRADE ARCHITECTS
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014

Sections 15120, 15150, 15160, 15170, 15175, 15180, 15400, 15480, 15500, 15600,
15700, 15741, 15800, 15830, 15900, 15950, 15995
SEOK MIN KIM

CAMPOS ENGINEERING, INC.
TEXAS REGISTERED
ENGINEERING FIRM
F-1731
95% Review
4-28-2014
, 16720
SECTION 14210
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
A. Section includes electric traction passenger elevators.

1.2
7
8
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and
similar information.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SUMMARY
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each
landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other
construction, and locations of equipment.
2. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of
support, and maximum and average power demands.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
16
17
A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For elevator equipment, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.
18
19
20
21
B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and
machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service including
standby power generator, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being
provided.
22
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
23
24
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
25
26
B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having
jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.
27
28
29
C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to

Owner, in the form of a standard one-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial
maintenance service is concluded.
30
1.5
WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator
work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
31
32
33
34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
35
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kone EcoSpace
4000 lb. elevator or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Fujitec America, Inc.
2. Minnesota Elevator, Inc.
3. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
4. Otis Elevator Co.
5. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
165477
City of Dallas
14210 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
3
4
5
B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with
ICC A117.1.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
C. Seismic Performance: Elevator system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and shall comply with elevator safety requirements for
seismic risk Zone 2 or greater in ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
1. Affected peak velocity acceleration (Av) for Project's location is [less than 0.10 (seismic
risk Zones 0 and 1)] [greater than or equal to 0.10, but less than 0.20 (seismic risk Zone 2)]
[greater than or equal to 0.20 (seismic risk Zones 3 and 4)].
2. Provide earthquake equipment required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
3. Provide seismic switch required by ASCE/SEI 7.
4. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration short period (Sds) for Project is 0.115% g.
5. Project Seismic Design Category: A.
6. Elevator Component Importance Factor: 1.25.
2.3
ELEVATORS
18
19
20
A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwise indicated,
manufacturer's standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator systems and
as required for complete system.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
B. Elevator Description:
1. Elevator Number: 1.
2. Machine Location: Machine room adjacent to hoistway.
3. Machine Type: Gearless traction.
4. Rated Load: 4000 lb.
5. Rated Speed: 150 fpm.
6. Operation System: Selective-collective automatic operation.
7. Auxiliary Operations:
a. Emergency recall operation and emergency in-car operation.
b. Standby power operation.
c. Battery-powered lowering.
8. Security Feature: [Card-reader operation] [Keyswitch operation].
9. Car Enclosures:
a. Inside Width: 90 inches from side wall to side wall.
b. Inside Depth: 66 inches from back wall to front wall (return panels).
c. Inside Height: 96 inches to underside of ceiling.
d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
g. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
h. Ceiling: Luminous ceiling.
i. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches round satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at rear of car.
j. Floor prepared to receive resilient flooring (specified in Section 09651 "Resilient Floor
Tile").
10. Hoistway Entrances:
a. Width: 48 inches.
b. Height: 84 inches.
c. Type: Single-speed center opening.
d. Frames: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
e. Doors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
11. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
165477
City of Dallas
14210 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
12. Additional Requirements:

a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame
made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
b. Provide hooks for protective pads and one complete set of full-height protective pads.
2.4
TRACTION SYSTEMS
6
7
8
9
10
A. Elevator Machines: Variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines and solidstate power converters.
1. Limit total harmonic distortion of regenerated power to 5 percent per IEEE 519.
2. Provide means for absorbing regenerated power when elevator system is operating on
standby power.
11
B. Fluid for Hydraulic Buffers: If using hydraulic buffers, use only fire-resistant fluid.
12
13
14
C. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector sheaves
from the building structure. Comply with Section 05505 "Metal Fabrications" for materials and
fabrication.
15
16
D. Guides: Roller guides or polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides. Provide guides at top
and bottom of car and counterweight frames.
17
2.5
OPERATION SYSTEMS
18
19
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation systems as required to

provide type of operation indicated.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following
operational features for elevators where indicated:
1. Single-Car Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is returned to a
designated floor and parked with doors open. Car can be manually put in service on standby
power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel
located at machine room.
2. Single-Car Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails and car is at a floor, it remains at that
floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is between floors, it is lowered to the next floor
below, opens its doors, and shuts down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic
recharging system.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
C. Security Feature: Security feature shall not affect emergency firefighters' service.
1. Card-Reader Operation: System uses card readers at car-control stations to authorize calls.
Security system determines which landings and at what times calls require authorization by
card reader. [Allow space as indicated for card reader in car] [Provide stripe-swipe
card reader integral with each car-control station].
a. Security access system equipment is [specified in Section 13730 "Security Access."]
[not in the Contract.]
2. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches at
car-control stations.
39
2.6
DOOR REOPENING DEVICES
40
41
42
A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more
microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of
one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.
43
44
45
B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time,
through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to
close at reduced kinetic energy.
165477
City of Dallas
14210 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.7
2
3
4
5
A. General: Provide steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, with car roof,
access doors, power door operators, and ventilation.
1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where
required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
CAR ENCLOSURES
B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainlesssteel sheet.
2. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel
sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled coldrolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oilcanning.
3. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.
4. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
5. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or
other permanent rigid plastic.
6. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated.
2.8
HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
19
20
21
A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame

hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size and
profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
B. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factoryapplied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet.
3. Star of Life Symbol: Identify emergency elevators with star of life symbol, not less than 3
inches high, on both inside surfaces of hoistway door frames.
4. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel
sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled coldrolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oilcanning.
5. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges.
6. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
7. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.
36
2.9
SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
37
38
39
A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call
has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long-life lamps and acrylic or other
permanent, non-yellowing translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs.
40
41
42
43
B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car-control stations. Mount in

return panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, with text and graphics as required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
44
45
46
47
C. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible signal,
which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require handset use.
System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and
battery backup power supply.
165477
City of Dallas
14210 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in

each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone
communication service specified in [Section 13852 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm
System."] [Section 13853 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System."]
E. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated.
6
7
8
F. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings.
Provide the following:
1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.
9
10
G. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and
direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.
11
12
13
14
15
H. Standby Power Elevator Selector Switches: Provide switches, as required by

ASME A17.1/CSA B44, where indicated. Adjacent to switches, provide illuminated signal that
indicates when normal power supply has failed. For each elevator, provide illuminated signals
that indicate when they are operational and when they are at the designated emergency return
level with doors open.
16
17
18
I.
19
Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with
text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide one sign at each hall
push-button station unless otherwise indicated.
2.10 FINISH MATERIALS
20
21
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte
finish.
22
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.
23
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
24
D. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
25
E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
26
F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.
27
PART 3 - EXECUTION
28
3.1
INSTALLATION
29
30
A. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to

minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system.
31
B. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.
32
C. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch, up or down, regardless of load and travel direction.
33
34
D. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout.
35
36
37
38
39
E. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Locate hall push-button stations at location most convenient for approaching passengers.
Mount centerline of push button station at a maximum of 48 inches above finished floor.
2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.
3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor.
165477
City of Dallas
14210 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.2
2
3
4
5
A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use
(either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by
ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies.
3.3
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PROTECTION
A. Temporary Use: Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction
purposes:
1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car,
to protect finishes from damage.
2. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to
protect elevator and elevator equipment.
3. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service.
4. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of
correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required
repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
3.4
17
18
19
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
operate elevator.
3.5
20
21
22
23
MAINTENANCE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall
include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,
cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity.
END OF SECTION
24
25
165477
City of Dallas
14210 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 14305
BRIDGE CRANES
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
A. Section Includes:
1. Electric, top running bridge cranes.
2. Trolleys, hoists and accessories.
8
9
10
11
12
SUMMARY
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:

1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract.
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
3. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA).
2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA).
3. American Welding Society (AWS).
4. Crane Manufacturers Association of America, Inc. (CMAA):
a. 70, Standard Specifications for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes.
b. 74, Standard Specifications for Top Running and Under Running Single Girder Electric
Overhead Traveling Cranes Utilizing Under Running Trolley Hoist.
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
B. Qualifications:
1. Design of the overhead bridge crane shall be in general conformance to CMAA 74 and 70,
except as otherwise specified herein. All structural steel members of the handling system
shall be designed in accordance with AISC current edition and all welded construction shall
be in accordance with the standards of the AWS. Castings, forgings, stampings and other
similar items shall have a minimum factor of safety of 5.
2. Certification of Compliance with OSHA, Part 1910 subpart N, section 1910.179, Overhead
and Gantry Cranes shall also be submitted.
31
32
C. Permanently mark the capacity of the hoist, trolley and crane on each unit, in easy to read letters
and a prominent position.
33
D. Equipment of manufacturer's latest and proven design compatible with functions required.
34
35
E. Coordinate installation to assure proper operation within the confines dictated by structural,
equipment, mechanical and electrical installations.
36
37
F. Verify hook and lifting heights for each application to assure each system is completely
operational over range intended.
38
1.3
DEFINITIONS
39
40
A. Hook Height: The minimum acceptable distance in feet from bottom of hook in full raised
position to the nearest floor surface.
41
42
B. Lift Height: The distance in feet from the bottom of the hook in full raised position to the
surface of the lowest floor from which items may be hoisted.
165477
City of Dallas
BRIDGE CRANES
14305 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
C. Total Trolley Capacity: The ultimate load-carrying capacity of the trolley based on the ultimate
strength of the material used (with a 5:1 safety factor) and the bearing life.
3
4
D. Ultimate Load-Carrying Capacity: Live load, weights of all equipment and an allowance for
impact.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal
process.
2. See Section 11005.
3. Girder layout including supports, connections and appurtenances.
4. Load test results.
5. Certificate of compliance with OSHA, Part 1910, Subpart N, Section 1910.179.
6. Tabulation of crane rail stop load reactions on the structure.
7. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction,
dimensions, erection, and support locations.
8. Weight of equipment.
9. Complete motor and electrical data.
10. Description of shop prime and finish painting.
19
20
21
22
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. See Section 01342 for requirements for:
a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
b. The content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
23
1.5
24
25
WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturers standard one year warranty from the date of Substantial Completion as
defined in Division 0.
26
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
27
2.1
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Bridge cranes:
a. Proserv Crane Group.
b. ACCO Industries, Inc.
c. Whiting Corp.
d. Approved equal.
2. Crane Rails and Accessories:
a. LB Foster
b. Approved equal
3. Hoists:
a. Yale.
b. Approved equal.
4. Trolleys:
a. Yale.
b. Approved equal.
5. Electrification system:
a. Duct-o-wire
b. Approved equal
6. Pendant
165477
City of Dallas
BRIDGE CRANES
14305 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
7.
6
7
a. Duct-o-wire
b. Approved equal
Wireless radio system
a. Duct-o-wire
b. Approved equal
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01640.

2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
A. Performance and Configuration Requirements:

1. Bridge Crane:
a. Duty cycle rating: CMAA Class A
b. Operating speed: Variable, 25 FT/min to 75 FT/min
c. Type: Top-running, double girder, dual-drive electric, walk-way with handrail
d. Rated capacity: 30 tons
e. Span: See Drawings
f. Drive horsepower: 3 (each drive)
g. Power source: 480 VAC, 3 PH, 60 Hz
h. Crane overhead clearance: 3 IN minimum to nearest obstruction
i. Power cable: Conductor bars
j. Rail Type: 60 lb ASCE
2. Trolley and Hoist:
a. Type: Wire rope
b. Capacity: 30 ton
c. Trolley operating speed: 0 to 60 feet/min
d. Trolley Motor Hp: 3.5
e. Hoist operating speed: 0 to 10 feet/min
f. Hoist motor Hp: 25
g. Low hook elevation: Approximately 380.00
h. Power cable: Festoon type
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
B. Bridge Crane
1. Design load carrying parts, except structural members and gears, so that the calculated stress
in the material, based on rated load, shall not exceed 20 percent of the published average
ultimate strength of the material.
2. Comply with CMAA #70 and CMAA #74.
3. Runway Rails, Rail Pad and Clips:
a. Provide ASCE type rails as noted herein.
b. Rails shall be straight, parallel and level, of sufficient strength and rigidity to prevent
detrimental lateral or vertical deflection.
c. Rails shall be mounted on steel reinforced crane rail pads.
d. Rail clips shall be provided by the crane manufacturer. Clips shall be one-bolt friction
type. LB Foster 9119F/15-F or equal.
4. Girders and Walkway:
a. Structural steel from standard structural shapes.
b. Design girder to resist vertical, lateral and torsional forces and stresses as defined by
CMAA #74.
c. The maximum vertical deflection of the girder produced by the dead load, weight of the
trolley and hoist and the rated load shall not exceed 1/600 of the span.
d. Locate safety stops at each end of bridge girder to prevent overt ravel of trolley hoist.
e. Walkway shall be solid type, galvanized steel or aluminum with minimum two rail
handrail and toeboard. Coordinate location of walkway with access ladder in pump
station.
5. End Trucks:
165477
City of Dallas
BRIDGE CRANES
14305 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
a.
Carry crane bridge on end trucks sized to carry the rated load when it is lifted at one
end of the crane bridge.
b. End truck wheelbase minimum of 1/8 of the crane span.
c. Construct from structural channels welded and bolted into a rigid box section.
d. Assure proper alignment of axles.
e. Design so that drop of truck is limited to 1 IN in case of axle or wheel failure.
f. Equip motorized top-running cranes with rail sweeps which extend below the top of the
rail and project in front of the crane wheels.
6. Crane Wheels:
a. Top-running double flanged wheels of forged steel, cast-iron, cast carbon or alloy steel.
b. Support each wheel on roller bearings mounted on stationary axles suitable to take
radial and thrust loads.
c. Factory lubricate and seal bearings.
d. Wheels may be heat treated.
7. Crane Drives:
a. Provide each end truck with a helical gear motor reducer.
b. Motors integral with fully-enclosed oil splash lubricated gear reducers.
c. Support gear reduction shaft by precision ball or roller bearings.
d. Design motors and drives to supply the crane speed specified.
e. Permanently lubricate and seal motor ball-bearings.
8. Bearings: 5000 HRS ABMA L-10.
9. Gearing:
a. All gearing except the final reduction at the wheels shall run in oil or be splash
lubricated.
b. Comply with AGMA specifications for load ratings.
c. Gears not enclosed in gear boxes.
1) Safety guards.
2) Provisions for lubrication and inspection.
10. Bridge Brake:
a. Capable of stopping bridge within a distance in feet equal to 10 percent of full load
speed (in fpm) when traveling at full speed with full load.
11. Bumpers and Stops:
a. Provide bumpers with sufficient energy absorbing capacity to stop the crane when
traveling at full speed with full load.
b. Stops shall be provided by the crane manufacturer.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C. Trolley:
1. Electric motor driven.
2. Completely compatible with hoists and cranes specified.
3. Meet NEC standards according to classifications shown on Drawings.
4. Minimum ABMA L-10 bearing life of 5000 HRS based on 75 percent of the wheel load,
excluding impact.
5. Motors:
a. Operate at variable speed as scheduled.
b. Enclose internal gears in oil-tight housing.
c. Design motors to operate with 480 VAC, 3 PH, 60 Hz power supply.
d. TENV motor.
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
D. Hoists:
1. Electric wire rope hoists:
a. Provide low headroom models.
b. Hoist frames of welded heavy steel plate construction.
c. Oil-tight gear casing for oil bath lubrication of gears.
d. Construct rope drum and surrounding units to minimize abrading, crushing or jamming
of the rope during usage.
165477
City of Dallas
BRIDGE CRANES
14305 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
e.
f.
Drum diameter not less than 18 times the diameter of the rope used.
Assure that two complete wraps of rope remain on the drum after lowering the load
hook through its rated lift distance, unless a lower limit device is provided, in which
case provide a minimum of one complete wrap.
g. Double revving for hoists with total lift height greater than hook height.
h. Sheave and drum grooves: Smooth and free from surface irregularities which could
cause rope damage.
i. Provide running sheaves with means for lubrication.
j. Bearings:
1) Antifriction type.
2) Minimum ABMA L-10 life of 1250 HRS for Class H1, 2500 HRS for Class H2,
and 5000 HRS for Class H3, based on full rated speed and mean effective load K
of 0.65.
k. Mechanical load brake.
l. Lower limit switch to stop hoist when hook reaches its lower limit.
m. Motor:
1) Motor brake.
a) Internal disc magnetic type.
b) Rated for 150 percent of motor torque.
c) Delivers rapidly with minimal hook drift.
2) TENV motors operable on 480 VAC, 3 PH, 60 Hz power.
3) Meet specified area classification.
4) Permanently lubricate and seal motor ball-bearings.
5) Provide an upper limit switch to stop the hoist motor and apply the holding brake
when the hook reaches its upper limit.
n. Mark the hoist with the following information:
1) Name and address of manufacturer.
2) Manufacturer's unit identification number.
3) Rated load.
4) Voltage of AC or DC power supply and phase and frequency of AC power supply.
5) Rated amperage.
o. Hooks:
1) Forged steel.
2) Bottom hook free to swivel in the loaded condition without twisting the chain.
3) Gate or swing type latch hooks.
p. Automatic mechanical load brake which will prevent lowering of the load unless
manual power is applied to the hand chain.
q. Sleeve or antifriction type bearings.
r. Enclose gearing in sealed construction and provide life-time lubrication.
s. Load limit clutch to automatically prevent hoist from lifting loads greater than rated
capacity.
2.3
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
ACCESSORIES
A. Electrification and Controls:
1. Provide electrical power to the bridge, hoist and trolley as noted:
a. Runway (Hoist and Trolley)
1) Four bar conductor system.
b. Bridge
1) Festoon tagline system, include all components needed for a complete and operable
system.
2. Controls:
a. Main Panel:
165477
City of Dallas
BRIDGE CRANES
14305 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
b.
3) Wireless system shall be the primary means of crane, hoist and trolley control.
Should the wireless system fail, the pendant will be used for control. Provide a
selector switch on the control panel to select radio/pendant control.
2.4
29
30
31
1) Provide main control panel to house motor starters, magnetic reversing contactors,
low-voltage transformer and other items necessary for a complete and totally
functional conveying system.
2) Provide disconnect device mounted on crane with overcurrent protection for the
controllers.
Provide the following control stations for crane control:
1) Wireless radio system with controls for crane, hoist, and trolley.
a) NEMA 4X rated enclosure.
b) Provide pushbuttons to allow for 2 step, infinite variable speed for bridge and
trolley motors and 3 step, infinite variable speed for hoist motor.
2) Pendant pushbutton control station with reversing type contactors for crane, hoist
and trolley control
a) NEMA 4X rated enclosure.
b) Provide pushbuttons to allow for 2 step, infinite variable speed for bridge and
trolley motors and 3 step, infinite variable speed for hoist motor.
c) Suspend control pendant from trolley in a manner that will protect the
conductors against strain.
d) Clearly mark function of each button.
e) Suspend station in a manner that will protect the electrical conductors against
strain.
f) Control station shall be operable from 115 VAC power supply.
g) Ground control station to hoist.
h) Provide control cable lengths of 1 FT less than distance to nearest floor.
TOOLS
A. All special tools or fittings required for normal operation and maintenance of the bridge crane
and hoists shall be furnished with the equipment.
2.5
SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
32
33
34
A. At ferrous metal gears, bearing surfaces and other similar surfaces obviously not to be painted,
provided a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating as specified in Section
09905.
35
36
37
B. Surface preparation and shop painting shall be as specified in Sections 09905 and shall be part of
the work of this Section. Provide shop finish coating systems on items normally shop finished
painted, all as approved.
38
PART 3 - EXECUTION
39
3.1
INSTALLATION
40
A. Install runway rails with center-to-center distance and elevation within +1/8 IN.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. Warning Signs:
1. Maximum 10 FT intervals along rails with electrical conductors.
2. At stairs or ladders located 6 FT or less from the rail(s).
3. Warning sign legend and colors:
a. DANGER (red).
b. HIGH VOLTAGE (black).
c. 480 VAC (black).
165477
City of Dallas
BRIDGE CRANES
14305 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
d.
3.2
KEEP OFF (red).

A. Test each crane using 110 percent rated load.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
B. Employ and pay for services of equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) to:
1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications.
2. Supervise pre-startup adjustments and installation checks and all field tests.
3. Conduct initial startup of equipment and perform operational checks.
4. Provide a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed properly,
started up and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel for 8 HRS at jobsite on operation and maintenance of the hoist,
trolley, monorail and crane equipment.
12
C. See Section 01650 for additional information.
END OF SECTION
13
14
165477
City of Dallas
BRIDGE CRANES
14305 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
BRIDGE CRANES
14305 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15060
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
8
1. Process piping systems.
2. Utility piping systems.
3. Plumbing piping systems.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 - General Requirements
3. Section 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities
4. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings
5. Section 09910 Pipeline Coating
6. Section 10400 - Identification Devices
7. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements
8. Section 13440 - Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements
9. Section 13442 - Primary Elements and Transmitters
10. Section 15090 - Pipe Support Systems
11. Section 15100 - Valves: Basic Requirements
12. Section 15183 - Pipe, Duct and Equipment Insulation
1.2
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
a. M36, Corrugated Steel Culverts and Underdrains.
b. M190, Standard Specification for Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe
and Pipe Arches.
c. M252, Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Tubing.
d. M294, Interim Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe 12 to 24 Inch Diameter.
2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
b. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
c. B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings.
d. B16.22, Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings.
e. B16.26, Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
f. B36.19, Stainless Steel Pipe.
g. B40.100, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments.
4. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless.
b. A74, Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
c. A106, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service.
d. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe
Fittings.
165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
e.
5.
6.
165477
A182, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged
Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service.
f. A197, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron.
g. A234, Standard Specification for Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy
Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.
h. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service.
i. A312, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.
j. A518, Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron Castings.
k. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
l. A587, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-Carbon Steel Pipe
for the Chemical Industry.
m. A774, Standard Specification for As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel
Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures.
n. A778, Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubular Products.
o. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
p. C14, Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe.
q. C76, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer
Pipe.
r. C425, Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and
Fittings.
s. C443, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber
Gaskets.
t. C564, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
u. C700, Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength
and Perforated.
v. D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules
40, 80, and 120.
w. D2466, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 40.
x. D2467, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 80.
y. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion
Materials.
z. F439, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80.
aa. F441, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80.
American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. B300, Standard for Hypochlorites.
b. C200, Standard for Steel Water Pipe - 6 IN and Larger.
c. C207, Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 IN through 144
IN.
d. C208, Standard for Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings.
e. C220, Standard for Stainless Steel Pipe 1/2 In. (13Mm) & Larger.
f. C606, Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
g. C651, Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.
h. C800, Standard for Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings.
American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute
(AWWA/ANSI):
a. C110/A21.10, Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.
City of Dallas
15060 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
b.
C111/A21.11, Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings.
c. C115/A21.15, Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron
Threaded Flanges.
d. C151/A21.51, Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.
e. C153/A21.53, Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service.
7. Chlorine Institute, Inc. (CI):
a. Pamphlet 6, Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine.
8. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI):
a. 301, Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary
and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.
9. International Plumbing Code (IPC).
10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 54, National Fuel Gas Code.
b. 69, Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems.
11. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
17
18
B. Coordinate flange dimensions and drillings between piping, valves, and equipment.
1.3
19
20
21
22
23
24
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Piping Systems Organization and Definition:
1. Piping services are grouped into designated systems according to the chemical and physical
properties of the fluid conveyed, system pressure, piping size and system materials of
construction.
2. See PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES in PART 3.
1.4
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Specification Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
b. Copies of manufacturer's written directions regarding material handling, delivery,
storage and installation.
c. Separate schedule sheet for each piping system scheduled in this Specification Section
showing compliance of all system components.
1) Attach technical product data on gaskets, pipe, fittings, and other components.
3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:
a. Exterior yard piping drawings (minimum scale 1 IN equals 10 FT) with information
including:
1) Dimensions of piping lengths.
2) Invert or centerline elevations of piping crossings.
3) Acknowledgement of bury depth requirements.
4) Details of fittings, tapping locations, thrust blocks, restrained joint segments,
harnessed joint segments, hydrants, and related appurtenances.
5) Acknowledge designated valve or gate tag numbers, manhole numbers, instrument
tag numbers, pipe and line numbers.
6) Line slopes and vents.
b. Interior piping drawings (minimum scale 1/8 IN equals 1 FT) with information
including:
1) Dimensions of piping from column lines or wall surfaces.
2) Invert or centerline dimensions of piping.
3) Centerline elevation and size of intersecting ductwork, conduit/conduit racks, or
other potential interferences requiring coordination.
165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
c.
4) Location and type of pipe supports and anchors.

5) Locations of valves and valve actuator type.
6) Details of fittings, tapping locations, equipment connections, flexible expansion
joints, connections to equipment, and related appurtenances.
7) Acknowledgement of valve, equipment and instrument tag numbers.
8) Provisions for expansion and contraction.
9) Line slopes and air release vents.
10) Rough-in data for plumbing fixtures.
Schedule of interconnections to existing piping and method of connection.
10
11
12
13

1. See Specification Section 01340 for requirements for:
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
C. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Qualifications of lab performing disinfection analysis on water systems.
2. Test reports:
a. Copies of pressure test results on all piping systems.
b. Reports defining results of dielectric testing and corrective action taken.
c. Disinfection test report.
d. Notification of time and date of piping pressure tests.
21
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
22
23
24
A. Protect pipe coating during handling using methods recommended by manufacturer.

1. Use of bare cables, chains, hooks, metal bars or narrow skids in contact with coated pipe is
not permitted.
25
26
27
B. Prevent damage to pipe during transit.

1. Repair abrasions, scars, and blemishes.
2. If repair of satisfactory quality cannot be achieved, replace damaged material immediately.
28
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
29
2.1
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
acceptable:
1. Insulating unions:
a. "Dielectric" by Epco.
2. Dirt strainers (Y type):
a. Mueller (#351).
b. Sarco.
c. Armstrong.
3. Dielectric flange kit:
a. PSI.
b. Maloney.
c. Central Plastics.
4. Pipe saddles (for gage installation):
a. Dresser Style 91 (steel and ductile iron systems).
b. Dresser Style 194 (non-metallic systems).
5. Dismantling joints:
a. Smith-Blair.
b. Romac.
165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2

2.2
3
4
5
PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES

A. Piping system materials, fittings and appurtenances are subject to requirements of specific piping
specification schedules located at the end of PART 3 of this Section.
2.3
COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A. Insulating Components:
1. Dielectric flange kits:
a. Flat faced.
b. 1/8 IN thick dielectric gasket, phenolic, non-asbestos.
c. Suitable for 175 psi, 210 DegF.
d. 1/32 IN wall thickness bolt sleeves.
e. 1/8 IN thick phenolic insulating washers.
2. Dielectric unions:
a. Screwed end connections.
b. Rated at 175 psi, 210 DegF.
c. Provide dielectric gaskets suitable for continuous operation at union rated temperature
and pressure.
18
19
20
21
22
23
B. Gaskets (flange and push-on joint)

1. Type (full face or ring) as noted in the PIPING SCHEDULE at the end of this Section or as
noted in the narrow scope piping specifications.
2. Material as noted in the PIPING SCHEDULE at the end of this Section or as noted in the
narrow scope piping specifications.
3. NSF 61 approved (where required for potable water service).
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
C. Strainers (General Service):

1. Y-type.
2. Composition bronze.
3. Rated for test pressure and temperature of system in which they are installed.
4. 20 mesh Monel screen.
5. Threaded bronze plug in the blowoff outlet.
6. Threaded NPT end connections.
31
32
33
34
35
D. Reducers:
1. Furnish appropriate size reducers and reducing fittings to mate pipe to equipment
connections.
2. Connection size requirements may change from those shown on Drawings depending on
equipment furnished.
36
37
38
39
E. Protective Coating and Lining:

1. Include pipe, fittings, and appurtenances where coatings, linings, paint, tests and other items
are specified.
2. Field paint pipe in accordance with Specification Section 09905.
40
41
F. Underground Warning Tape:

1. See Specification Section 10400.
42
43
G. Pressure Gages:
1. See Specification Section 11005 and Specification Section 13442.
44
45
H. Galvanic Anode Cathodic Protection:

46
47
I.
165477
Valves:
City of Dallas
15060 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
J.
Dismantling Joints:
1. Materials:
a. Body: ASTM A53 carbon steel
b. Follower flange: ASTM A536 ductile iron
c. Gasket: Buna-N
d. Studs: ASTM Type 316 stainless steel.
e. Tie rods: ASTM Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Pressure Rating: Equal or greater to that of connecting piping, see Piping Schedule at the
end of this Section.
3. Coat all steel and ductile surfaces with manufacturers fusion bonded epoxy coating per
AWWA C213.
12
PART 3 - EXECUTION
13
3.1
EXTERIOR BURIED PIPING INSTALLATION
14
15
16
A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide a minimum of 4 FT and maximum of 6 FT

earth cover over exterior buried piping systems and appurtenances conveying water, fluids, or
solutions subject to freezing.
17
18
B. Enter and exit through structure walls, floors, and ceilings by using penetrations and seals
specified in Specification Section 01800 and as shown on Drawings.
19
20
21
C. When entering or leaving structures with buried mechanical joint piping, install joint within 2 FT
of point where pipe enters or leaves structure.
1. Install second joint not more than 6 FT nor less than 4 FT from first joint.
22
D. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion and contraction movement.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
E. Laying Pipe In Trench:

1. Excavate and backfill trench in accordance with Specification Section 02221.
2. Clean each pipe length thoroughly and inspect for compliance to specifications.
3. Grade trench bottom and excavate for pipe bell and lay pipe on trench bottom.
4. Install gasket or joint material according to manufacturer's directions after joints have been
thoroughly cleaned and examined.
5. Except for first two (2) joints, before making final connections of joints, install two (2) full
sections of pipe with earth tamped along side of pipe or final with bedding material placed.
6. Lay pipe in only suitable weather with good trench conditions.
a. Never lay pipe in water except where approved by Engineer.
7. Seal open end of line with watertight plug if pipe laying stopped.
8. Remove water in trench before removal of plug.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
F. Lining Up Push-On Joint Piping:

1. Lay piping on route lines shown on Drawings.
2. Deflect from straight alignments or grades by vertical or horizontal curves or offsets.
3. Observe maximum deflection values stated in manufacturer's written literature.
4. Provide special bends when specified or where required alignment exceeds allowable
deflections stipulated.
5. Install shorter lengths of pipe in such length and number that angular deflection of any joint,
as represented by specified maximum deflection, is not exceeded.
43
44
45
46
47
48
G. Anchorage and Blocking:

1. Provide reaction blocking, anchors, joint harnesses, or other acceptable means for
preventing movement of piping caused by forces in or on buried piping tees, wye branches,
plugs, or bends.
2. Place concrete blocking so that it extends from fitting into solid undisturbed earth wall.
a. Concrete blocks shall not cover pipe joints.
165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.
Provide bearing area of concrete in accordance with drawing detail.
H. Install underground hazard warning tape per Specification Section 10400.
I.
3.2
Install insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined together.
INTERIOR AND EXPOSED EXTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install piping in vertical and horizontal alignment as shown on Drawings.
6
7
8
9
10
11
B. Alignment of piping smaller than 4 IN may not be shown; however, install according to Drawing
intent and with clearance and allowance for:
1. Expansion and contraction.
2. Operation and access to equipment, doors, windows, hoists, moving equipment.
3. Headroom and walking space for working areas and aisles.
4. System drainage and air removal.
12
13
C. Enter and exit through structure walls, floor and ceilings using penetrations and seals specified
in Specification Section 01800 and as shown on the Drawings.
14
D. Install vertical piping runs plumb and horizontal piping runs parallel with structure walls.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
E. Pipe Support:
1. Use methods of piping support as shown on Drawings and as required in Specification
Section 15090.
2. Where pipes run parallel and at same elevation or grade, they may be grouped and
supported from common trapeze-type hanger, provided hanger rods are increased in size as
specified for total supported weight.
a. The pipe in the group requiring the least maximum distance between supports shall set
the distance between trapeze hangers.
3. Size pipe supports with consideration to specific gravity of liquid being piped.
24
25
F. Locate and size sleeves and castings required for piping system.
1. Arrange for chases, recesses, inserts or anchors at proper elevation and location.
26
27
G. Use reducing fittings throughout piping systems.

1. Bushings will not be allowed unless specifically approved.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
H. Equipment Drainage and Miscellaneous Piping:

1. Provide drip pans and piping at equipment where condensation may occur.
2. Hard pipe stuffing box leakage to nearest floor drain.
3. Avoid piping over electrical components such as motor control centers, panelboards, etc.
a. If piping must be so routed, utilize 16 GA, 316 stainless steel drip pan under piping and
over full length of electrical equipment.
b. Hard pipe drainage to nearest floor drain.
4. Collect system condensate at drip pockets, traps and blowoff valves.
5. Provide drainage for process piping at locations shown on Drawings in accordance with
Drawing details.
6. For applications defined above and for other miscellaneous piping which is not addressed by
a specific piping service category in PART 1, provide 304 stainless steel piping and fittings.
a. Size to handle application with 3/4 IN being minimum size provided.
41
42
43
44
45
I.
Unions:
1. Install in position which will permit valve or equipment to be removed without dismantling
adjacent piping.
2. Mechanical type couplings may serve as unions.
3. Additional flange unions are not required at flanged connections.
46
J.
Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion/contraction movement.
47
K. Anchorage and Blocking:

165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
1.
Block, anchor, or harness exposed piping subjected to forces in which joints are installed to
prevent separation of joints and transmission of stress into equipment or structural
components not designed to resist those stresses.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
L. Equipment Pipe Connections:

1. Equipment - General:
a. Exercise care in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on the opposite end of
pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket pressure at connection or would
cause unnecessary stresses to be transmitted to equipment flanges.
b. Where push-on joints are used in conjunction with flanged joints, final positioning of
push-on joints shall not be made until flange joints have been tightened without strain.
c. Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate which will result in uniform gasket compression
over entire area of joint.
1) Provide tightening torque in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
d. Support and match flange faces to uniform contact over their entire face area prior to
installation of any bolt between the piping flange and equipment connecting flange.
e. Permit piping connected to equipment to freely move in directions parallel to
longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in connection flange are tightened.
f. Align, level, and wedge equipment into place during fitting and alignment of
connecting piping.
g. Grout equipment into place prior to final bolting of piping but not before initial fitting
and alignment.
h. To provide maximum flexibility and ease of alignment, assemble connecting piping
with gaskets in place and minimum of four (4) bolts per joint installed and tightened.
1) Test alignment by loosening flange bolts to see if there is any change in
relationship of piping flange with equipment connecting flange.
2) Realign as necessary, install flange bolts and make equipment connection.
i. Provide utility connections to equipment shown on Drawings, scheduled or specified.
2. Plumbing and HVAC equipment:
a. Make piping connections to plumbing and HVAC equipment, including but not limited
to installation of fittings, strainers, pressure reducing valves, flow control valves and
relief valves provided with or as integral part of equipment.
b. Furnish and install sinks, fittings, strainers, pressure reducing valves, flow control
valves, pressure relief valves, and shock absorbers which are not specified to be
provided with or as integral part of equipment.
c. For each water supply piping connection to equipment, furnish and install union and
gate or angle valve.
1) Provide wheel handle stop valve at each laboratory sink water supply.
2) Minimum size: 1/2 IN.
d. Furnish and install "P" trap for each waste piping connection to equipment if waste is
connected directly to building sewer system.
1) Size trap as required by IPC.
e. Stub piping for equipment, sinks, lavatories, supply and drain fittings, key stops, "P"
traps, miscellaneous traps and miscellaneous brass through wall or floor and cap and
protect until such time when later installation is performed.
45
M. Provide insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined together.
46
47
N. Instrument Connections:
1. See drawing details.
48
3.3
49
50
CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING

A. Where connection between new work and existing work is made, use suitable and proper fittings
to suit conditions encountered.
165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
B. Perform connections with existing piping at time and under conditions which will least interfere
with service to customers affected by such operation.
C. Undertake connections in fashion which will disturb system as little as possible.
4
5
D. Provide suitable equipment and facilities to dewater, drain, and dispose of liquid removed
without damage to adjacent property.
6
7
E. Where connections to existing systems necessitate employment of past installation methods not
currently part of trade practice, utilize necessary special piping components.
8
9
F. Where connection involves potable water systems, provide disinfection methods as prescribed in
this Specification Section.
10
11
12
G. Once tie-in to each existing system is initiated, continue work continuously until tie-in is made
and tested.
3.4
ACCESS PROVISIONS
13
14
A. Provide access doors or panels in walls, floors, and ceilings to permit access to valves, piping
and piping appurtenances requiring service.
15
B. Size of access panels to allow inspection and removal of items served, minimum 10 x 14 IN size.
16
17
C. Fabricate door and frame of minimum 14 GA, stretcher leveled stock, cadmium plated or
galvanized after fabrication and fitted with screw driver lock of cam type.
18
D. Provide with key locks, keyed alike, in public use areas.
19
E. Furnish panels with prime coat of paint.
20
F. Style and type as required for material in which door installed.
21
22
G. Where door is installed in fire-rated construction, provide door bearing UL label required for
condition.
23
3.5
CATHODIC PROTECTION
24
25
A. Isolate, dielectrically, all piping from all other metals including reinforcing bars in concrete
slabs, other pipe lines, and miscellaneous metal.
26
27
B. Make all connections from wire or cable by Thermit Cadwelding accomplished by operators
experienced in this process.
28
29
C. Install all cables with a loop and overhead knot around each pipe and slack equal to at least 50
percent of the straight line length.
30
D. After cadwelding, coat all exposed metallic surfaces with hot applied tape.
31
3.6
32
33
HEAT TRACING
A. See Specification Section 16125 - Heat Tracing Cable.
3.7
PRESSURE GAGES
34
A. Provide at locations shown on the Drawings and specified.
35
B. See Specification Section 11005.
36
3.8
37
38
39

A. Pipe Testing - General:
1. Test piping systems as follows:
a. Test exposed, non-insulated piping systems upon completion of system.
165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
21
22
23
24
25
Test exposed, insulated piping systems upon completion of system but prior to
application of insulation.
c. Test concealed interior piping systems prior to concealment and, if system is insulated,
prior to application of insulation.
d. Test buried piping (insulated and non-insulated) prior to backfilling and, if insulated,
prior to application of insulation.
Utilize pressures, media and pressure test durations as specified in Piping Specification
Schedules.
Isolate equipment which may be damaged by the specified pressure test conditions.
Perform pressure test using calibrated pressure gages and calibrated volumetric measuring
equipment to determine leakage rates.
a. Select each gage so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper half of the
gage's range.
b. Notify the Engineer 24 HRS prior to each test.
Completely assemble and test new piping systems prior to connection to existing pipe
systems.
Acknowledge satisfactory performance of tests and inspections in writing to Engineer prior
to final acceptance.
Bear the cost of all testing and inspecting, locating and remedying of leaks and any
necessary retesting and re-examination.
B. Pressure Testing:
1. Testing medium: Unless otherwise specified in the Piping Specification Schedules, utilize
the following test media.
a. Process and plant air systems:
PIPE LINE SIZE
2 IN and smaller
2 IN and smaller
Greater than 2 IN
Greater than 2 IN
26
27
28
b.
SPECIFIED TEST PRESSURE

75 psi or less
Greater than 75 psi
3 psi or less
Greater than 3 psi
Liquid systems:
PIPE LINE SIZE (DIA)

Up to and including 48 IN
Above 48 IN
All sizes
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
2.
165477
TESTING MEDIUM
Air or water
Water
Air or water
Water
GRAVITY
OR PUMPED
Gravity
Gravity
Pumped
SPECIFIED TEST
PRESSURE
25 psig or less
25 psig or less
250 psig or less
TESTING
MEDIUM
Air or water
Water
Water
Allowable leakage rates:

a. Hazardous gas systems, all exposed piping systems, all pressure piping systems and all
buried, insulated piping systems which are hydrostatically pressure tested shall have
zero leakage at the specified test pressure throughout the duration of the test.
b. Hydrostatic exfiltration and infiltration for sanitary and storm water sewers
(groundwater level is below the top of pipe):
1) Leakage rate: 200 GAL per inch diameter per mile of pipe per day at average head
on test section of 3 FT.
2) Average head is defined from groundwater elevation to average pipe crown.
3) Acceptable test head leakage rate for heads greater than 3 FT: Acceptable leakage
rate (gallons per inch diameter per mile per day) = 115 x (actual test head to the 1/2
power).
c. Hydrostatic infiltration test for sanitary and storm water sewers (groundwater level is
above the top of pipe):
City of Dallas
15060 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
d.
e.
f.
1) Allowable leakage rate: 200 GAL per inch diameter per mile of pipe per day when
depth of groundwater over top of pipe is 2 to 6 FT.
2) Leakage rate at heads greater than 6 FT: Allowable leakage rate (gallons per inch
diameter per mile of pipe per day) = 82 x (actual head to the 1/2 power).
Large diameter (above 48 IN) gravity plant piping systems shall have a maximum
exfiltration of 25 gpd per inch-mile.
Non-hazardous gas and air systems which are tested with air shall have a maximum
pressure drop of 5 percent of the specified test pressure throughout the duration of the
test.
For low pressure (less than 25 psig) air testing, the acceptable time for loss of 1 psig of
air pressure shall be:
PIPE SIZE (IN DIA)
4
6
8
10
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
42
48
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
3.
165477
TIME, MINUTES/100 FT
0.3
0.7
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.1
2.4
3.0
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.3
7.6
Hydrostatic pressure testing methodology:

a. General:
1) All joints, including welds, are to be left exposed for examination during the test.
2) Provide additional temporary supports for piping systems designed for vapor or gas
to support the weight of the test water.
3) Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints for additional pressure load under
test.
4) Isolate equipment in piping system with rated pressure lower than pipe test
pressure.
5) Do not paint or insulate exposed piping until successful performance of pressure
test.
b. Soil, waste, drain and vent systems:
1) Test at completion of installation of each stack or section of piping by filling
system with water and checking joints and fittings for leaks.
2) Eliminate leaks before proceeding with work or concealing piping.
3) Minimum test heights shall be 10 FT above highest stack inlet.
c. Larger diameter (above 36 IN) gravity plant piping:
1) Plug downstream end of segment to be tested.
a) Provide bracing as required.
2) Fill segment and upstream structure to normal operating level as per hydraulic
profile.
3) Allow 24 HRS for absorption losses.
a) Refill to original level.
4) Provide reservoir to maintain constant head over duration of test.
5) Record reservoir water volume at beginning and end of test.
City of Dallas
15060 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
4.
15
16
17
18
19
20
Air testing methodology:

a. General:
1) Assure air is ambient temperature.
b. Low pressure air testing:
1) Place plugs in line and inflate to 25 psig.
2) Check pneumatic plugs for proper sealing.
3) Introduce low pressure air into sealed line segment until air pressure reaches 4 psig
greater than ground water that may be over the pipe.
a) Use test gage conforming to ASME B40.100 with 0 to 15 psi scale and
accuracy of 1 percent of full range.
4) Allow 2 minutes for air pressure to stabilize.
5) After stabilization period (3.5 psig minimum pressure in pipe) discontinue air
supply to line segment.
6) Record pressure at beginning and end of test.
C. Dielectric Testing Methods and Criteria:

1. Provide electrical check between metallic non-ferrous pipe or appurtenances and ferrous
elements of construction to assure discontinuity has been maintained.
2. Wherever electrical contact is demonstrated by such test, locate the point or points of
continuity and correct the condition.
3.9
CLEANING, DISINFECTION AND PURGING
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
A. Cleaning:
1. Clean interior of piping systems thoroughly before installing.
2. Maintain pipe in clean condition during installation.
3. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact surfaces and then properly
dress and make joint.
4. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal cuttings, dirt, or other
foreign materials which may have entered the system.
5. At completion of work and prior to Final Acceptance, thoroughly clean work installed under
these Specifications.
a. Clean equipment, fixtures, pipe, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and
sludge which may have accumulated by operation of system, from testing, or from
other causes.
b. Repair any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of building, its finish, or
furnishings, due to failure to properly clean piping system, without cost to Owner.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
B. Disinfection of Potable Water Systems:

1. After favorable performance of pressure test and prior to Final Acceptance, thoroughly flush
entire potable water piping system including supply, source and any appurtenant devices
and perform disinfection as prescribed.
2. Perform work, including preventative measures during construction, in full compliance with
AWWA C651.
3. Perform disinfection using sodium hypochlorite complying with AWWA B300.
4. Flush each segment of system to provide flushing velocity of not less than 2.5 FT per
second.
5. Drain flushing water to sanitary sewer.
a. Do not drain flushing water to receiving stream.
6. Use continuous feed method of application.
a. Tag system during disinfection procedure to prevent use.
7. After required contact period, flush system to remove traces of heavily chlorinated water.
8. After final flushing and before placing water in service, obtain an independent laboratory
approved by the Owner to collect samples and test for bacteriological quality.
a. Repeat entire disinfection procedures until satisfactory results are obtained.
165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
9.
Secure and deliver to Owner, satisfactory bacteriological reports on samples taken from
system.
a. Ensure sampling and testing procedures are in full compliance to AWWA C651, local
water purveyor and applicable requirements of State of Texas.
3.10 LOCATION OF BURIED OBSTACLES
A. Furnish exact location and description of buried utilities encountered and thrust block placement.
7
8
B. Reference items to definitive reference point locations such as found property corners, entrances
to buildings, existing structure lines, fire hydrants and related fixed structures.
9
10
C. Include such information as location, elevation, coverage, supports and additional pertinent
information.
11
D. Incorporate information on "As-Recorded" Drawings.
12
3.11 PIPE INSULATION
13
14
A. Insulate pipe and pipe fittings in accordance with Specification Section 15183.
3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE
15
Symbol
SW
Storm
Water2
System No.
1
CA
UW
Compressed Air
Utility Water3
2
3
PW
Potable Water
SS
DRN
GLO
Sanitary Sewer
Drain
Gear Lube Oil
Main Pump Pipeline
Vents
DWU 24-inch
Pipeline
Replacement
5
6
7
VT
PW
16
Service
1Buried
8
9
Construction
Exposed and
Buried
Exposed
Exposed
Buried and
Exposed
Buried
Exposed
Exposed
Buried and
Exposed
Buried and
Exposed
Size Range
(inch
diameter)
Pipe Material
Buried Joint
Restraint
Notes1
24 to 114
Carbon Steel
0.25 to 2
0.5 to 12
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Copper, Ductile
Iron, PVC
PVC
PVC
Stainless Steel
Ductile Iron and
Stainless Steel
N/a
N/a
Concrete Cylinder
0.5 to 12
4 to 12
1.5-4
1.5 to 8
18
24
A
B
B
N/a
A
pipe joint restraint notes:
17
A = Restrain all joints
18
B = Restrain joints where noted/indicated on the Drawings
19
C= Restrained joints not required.

N/a = Not applicable.
20
21
2See
drawings and detailed system descriptions below for installation locations/material transition locations.
22
23
3Utility
165477
water piping is defined as all piping downstream of the main 10 RPZ in the electrical room basement.
City of Dallas
15060 - 13
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
A. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 1

1. General:
a. Piping symbol and service:
1) SW- Storm Water
b. Design requirements:
1) Operating Pressure: 25 psig
2) Test Pressure: 100 psig
3) Testing Duration: 4 hours
2. System components:
a. Pipe Size: 24 to 114 IN Diameter
1) Buried and exposed service
a) Materials: Carbon steel per 15061
b) Reference: AWWA C200
c) Lining:
(1) Coal tar epoxy per Section 15061 or,
(2) Cement mortar per 02630 and 02632
d) Exterior Coating:
(1) Buried:
(a) Coal tar epoxy per Section 15061or ,
(b) Polyurethane per 09910
(2) Exposed 108-inch and 114-inch diameter yard piping:
(a) Coal tar epoxy or,
(b) Polyurethane per Section 15061 and 09910 with field applied topcoat
per 09905
(3) Exposed 24-inch diameter piping in vaults: Factory prime coat and field
finish epoxy coating per 09905
e) Fittings: See Section 15061
f) Joints
(1) Buried: Welded per Section 15060
(2) Exposed: Flanged, AWWA Class D per Section 15061
g) Flange gaskets: See Section 15061
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
B. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 2

1. General:
1) CA Compressed Air
1) Operating Pressure: 100 to 215 psig
3) Test Duration: 6 hours
a. Exposed service:
1) Material: Type 316 stainless steel, Sch 10S
2) Reference: See Section 15065
3) Lining: None
4) Exterior Coating: None
5) Fittings: See Section 15065
6) Joints:
a) Pipe to pipe connections:
(1) Pressed connection
(2) Threaded
b) Pipe to valve/accessory connections:
(1) Flanged
(2) Threaded
165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 14
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
7) Gaskets: Manufacturers standard suitable for operating temperature and pressure
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
C. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 3

1. General:
1) UW Utility Water
1) Operating Pressure: 60-80 psig
a. Exposed service:
1) Material: Type 316L stainless steel, Schedule 10S.
2) Reference: Section 15065
3) Lining: None.
4) Coating: None.
6) Joints: Flanged (AWWA Class D) or grooved type mechanical joint coupling per
15065.
7) Gaskets: Full face, 1/8 IN thick, SBR rubber, Garlock Style 22 or equal
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
D. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 4

1. General:
1) PW Potable Water
a. Exposed service: See Plumbing Specifications
b. Buried service:
1) Material: AWWA C900 PVC, DR14
2) Reference: See Section 15064
3) Lining: none
4) Exterior Coating: none
6) Joints: Restrained bell and spigot push on type per Section 15064
7) Gaskets: See Section 15064
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
E. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 5

1. General:
1) SS Sanitary Sewer
1) Operating Pressure: atmospheric
2) Test Pressure: See Section 15060
a. Buried service:
1) Material:
a) Under slab: See Plumbing Specifications
b) Yard Areas: SDR 21 PVC
2) Reference: See plumbing sections and Section 15064
3) Lining: none
4) Exterior Coating: none
165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 15
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
5) Fittings: See plumbing sections and Section 15064

6) Joints: See plumbing sections and Section 15064
7) Gaskets: See plumbing sections and Section 15064
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
F. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 6

1. General:
1) DRN Drain
a. Exposed service:
1) Material: Schedule 80 PVC
3) Lining: None.
4) Coating: None.
6) Joints: Solvent weld per Section 15064
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
G. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 7

1. General:
1) GLO: Gear Lube Oil
a. Exposed service:
3) Lining: None.
4) Coating: None.
6) Joints: Flanged (AWWA Class D) per 15065.
7) Gaskets: Full face, 1/8 IN thick, PTFE, Garlock Gylon 3500 or equal
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
H. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 8

1. General:
1) VT - Vent
a. Pipe Size: 18 IN Diameter
1) Buried service
a) Materials: Ductile iron per Section 15062
b) Reference: Section 15062
c) Lining: Cement mortar per 15062
d) Exterior Coating: See Section 15062
f) Restrained Joints: Lock-joint piping per 15062
165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 16
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
b.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
I.
g) Flanges: AWWA Class D per Section 15062

h) Gaskets: See Section 15062
Exposed service:
3) Lining: None.
4) Finish/Coating:
a) Pump Station Building Interior: None
b) Pump Station Building Exterior: Polished per 15065
6) Joints: Flanged (AWWA Class D) per 15065.
7) Gaskets: Full face, 1/8 IN thick, SBR rubber, Garlock Style 22 or equal
SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 9

1. General:
1) PW Potable Water
2. System Components:
a. Pipe Size: 24 IN Diameter
1) Exposed and buried service
a) Materials: Concrete cylinder per Section 15070
b) Reference: Section 15070
c) Lining: See Section 15070
d) Exterior Coating: See Section 15070
f) Restrained Joints: Welded and bonded per 15070
g) Gaskets: See Section 15070
END OF SECTION
34
35
165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 17
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
15060 - 18
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15061
PIPE: STEEL
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
1. Steel pipe, fittings, and appurtenances.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
SUMMARY

3. Section 02630 In-Situ Cement Mortar Lining
4. Section 02632 Plant-Applied Cement Mortar Lining
5. Section 02634 Weld After Backfill
6. Section 09905 - Paint and Protective Coatings
7. Section 09910 Pipeline Coating
8. Section 13315 Galvanic Anode Cathodic Protection
9. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements
1.2
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. B1.1, Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form).
b. B1.2, Gages and Gaging for Unified Inch Screw Threads.
c. B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
d. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
e. B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings.
f. B16.11, Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded.
g. B31.1, Power Piping.
h. B31.3, Process Piping.
i. B31.9, Building Services Piping.
j. Section IX, Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders,
Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators.
2. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
a. PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages.
b. SP 5/NACE No. 1, White Metal Blast Cleaning.
c. SP 6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
d. SP 7/NACE No. 4, Brush-off Blast Cleaning.
e. SP 10/NACE No. 2, Near-White Blast Cleaning.
f. SP 12/NACE No. 5, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard
Materials by High and Ultrahigh Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating.
a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless.
c. A181, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping.
d. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High
Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.
e. A194, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: STEEL
15061 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
f.
4.
5.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
A234, Standard Specification for Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy
Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.
g. A283, Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel
Plates.
h. A370, Standard Text Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
i. A572, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel.
j. B6, Standard Specification for Zinc.
k. B695, Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and
Steel.
l. E709, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing
m. E1444, Standard Practice for Magnetic Particle Testing
American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C200, Standard for Steel Water Pipe - 6 IN and Larger.
b. C203, Standard for Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel water Pipeline Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied.
c. C206, Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.
d. C207, Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 IN through
144 IN.
e. C208, Standard for Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings.
f. C604, Installation of Steel Water Pipe 4 IN (100mm) and Larger
g. C606, Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
h. M11, Steel Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation.
Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE):
a. AMS-QQ-P-416, Cadmium Plating Electro deposited.
B. Qualifications:
1. Application of lining and coating materials including preparation of surfaces, priming, and
lining and coating of pipe, fittings, and specials, in shop, repairs of any damage to lining or
coating occurring during shipment or any other time, and field lining and coating of ends
where linings or coatings have been held back for welded field joints, shall be done by
established and recognized pipe company acceptable to Engineer. All pipe and fittings shall
be manufactured in the Continental U.S.A.
2. Use only certified welders meeting procedures and performance outlined in ASME Section
IX, AWWA C200 Section 3.3.3 and other codes and requirements per local building and
utility requirements.
3. Manufacturers shall be certified under S.P.F.A. or I.S.O. quality certification program for
steel pipe and accessory manufacturing.
4. Finished pipe shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Piping manufacturing
operations shall be performed under the control of the pipe manufacturer.
5. The pipe manufacturer shall not have less than 5 years successful experience manufacturing
pipe of the particular size and type indicated.
1.3
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
process.
3. Factory test reports and mill certificates.
4. Coating manufacturer's qualifications.
5. Welders certificates.
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: STEEL
15061 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Pipe shall be handled in such a manner as to protect the pipe and coating from damage.
B. Coated pipe shall not be shipped or installed until coating has developed full cure.
4
5
6
7
C. During coating application, storage, loading, transportation, unloading, laying and installation,
every precaution shall be taken to protect and prevent damage to pipe, lining, and coating.
Forklift equipment shall be only allowed at the manufacturers facility. This equipment shall
have all bearing surfaces padded with suitable padding material.
D. Temporary internal bracing shall be installed.
9
10
11
12
13
14
E. In the field, handle pipe with slings and spreader bars only. Forklift attachments to loaders shall
not be allowed. Web slings shall be a minimum of 12-inch wide and of a type that shall not
damage the coating. Metal chains, cable, tongs, forklifts or other equipment likely to damage
the coating shall not be permitted. Dragging or skidding of pipe on grade or in the trench shall
not be permitted. All pipe lengths in excess of 20 feet shall be lifted at the quarter points from
each end.
15
16
17
18
19
F. Provide transportation vehicles with padded bolsters between each layer of pipe and heavy
padding under load ties. Bolsters shall be curved to fit the outside of the pipe and 12 inches
wide, minimum. All pipe contact locations shall be heavily padded with carpet during shipment
to the project site and from the storage yard to the point of installation. Use only nylon tie-down
straps or padded bonding to protect the pipe.
20
21
22
23
24
25
G. Pipe shall not be stored on rocks, gravel, or other hard materials that might damage the coating.
Provide padded 12-inch wide skids and chucks, sand bags, select loamy or sand berms,
positioned approximately one quarter point from the pipe cutback ends, where possible, to
minimize coating damage. Pipe shall not be laid on asphalt or gravel without suitable padding at
all contact points. Maintain plastic end caps on all pipe and specials in good condition until the
pipe is ready to be installed in the trench.
26
27
28
H. Pipe shall be inspected by the Contractor for damage upon delivery at the project site. All
damage to the pipe, lining, or coating shall be repaired as specified herein or the damaged
section shall be replaced at the sole expense of the Contractor.
29
30
31
32
I.
No metal tools or heavy objects shall be permitted to come into contact unnecessarily with the
finished coating. Workmen shall not be permitted to walk on the coating except when absolutely
necessary and approved by the Engineer. When permitted, shoes with rubber or composition
soles and heels or other suitable footwear that does not damage the coating shall be used.
33
34
35
36
J.
Long-term Exposure:
1. Protect pipe from UV degradation. Method of protection subject to approval by Owner or
Owners Representative.
2. Long-term exposure is defined as the time exposed to UV source is 90 days and longer.
37
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
38
2.1
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
acceptable:
1. Pipe and fittings:
a. Hanson Pipe
b. Northwest Pipe
c. American Spiral Weld
d. Ameron International
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: STEEL
15061 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
28
29
Flanged adaptors:
a. Smith Blair (Style 913 (steel)).
b. Dresser (Style 128 (steel)).
Insulating couplings:
a. Smith Blair (Style 416).
b. Dresser (Style 39).
Reducing couplings:
Transition coupling:
Compression sleeve coupling:
a. Smith Blair (Style 411 (steel)).
b. Dresser (Style 38 (steel)).
Flange gaskets:
a. Garlock Sealing Technologies
1) Blue-Guard 3000 (nitrile)
2) Style 22 (rubber)
b. Thermoseal, Inc.
1) Klingersil 4430 (nitrile)
c. Gasket Resources, Inc.
1) Durlon 8500 (nitrile)
Anti-Seize Compound:
a. Nickel Anti-Seize Compound 725, A.W. Chesterton Co.
b. Permatex Nickel Anti-Seize Compound, ITW Devcon
c. Loctite Nickel Anti-Seize Compound, Henkel Corp.

2.2
MATERIALS
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
A. Fabricated Steel Pipe

1. Pipe Steel
a. Meet general material requirements of AWWA C200
b. Be of continuous casting
c. Be suitable for field welding
d. Be homogeneous
e. Be fully kilned
f. Be fine austenitic grain size
g. Minimum yield strength of 42,000 psi.
2. Fittings
3. Flanges
b. Steel shall be ASTM A283, Grade C or D, ASTM A181, Grade 1
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
B. Mill Type Steel Pipe

1. ASTM A53, Type E or S.
2. Fittings:
a. ASTM A234
b. ASTM B16.3, ASME B16.5, ASME B16.11
3. Flanges
a. ASME B16.5
b. Flat-faced
c. Slip-on flanges
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: STEEL
15061 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
d.
Flange class shall be as required for the operating pressures specified in Section 15060
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
C. Flange Nuts and Bolts:

1. Meet general requirements of AWWA C207
2. Threaded per ASME B1.1
3. Exposed:
a. Internal design pressure less than 150 psig:
1) Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade B
2) Nuts: ASTM A563, Grade A
b. Internal design pressure greater than 150 psig:
1) Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B7
2) Nuts: ASTM A194, Grade 2H
c. Apply anti-seize.
4. Buried: Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B7.
Apply anti-seize compound to all hardware.
5. Flange bolts shall be long enough that a maximum of three threads are exposed beyond the
nut.
17
18
19
D. Gaskets
1. 24 IN DIA and smaller: Full face, 1/8 IN thick, nitrile.
2. Larger than 24 IN DIA: Ring type, 1/8 IN thick, nitrile.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
E. Coatings and Linings (Provide as noted in the Pipe Schedule 15060)

1. Coatings
a. Galvanizing
1) Hot-dip galvanize exposed piping as scheduled in Section 15060 and specified per
ASTM B6.
b. Field Painting
1) See Section 09905.
c. Coal Tar Epoxy
1) Meet the requirements of USACE Formula C-200a and conform to SSPC Paint 16
manufactured with Type 1 pitch.
2) System requirements:
a) Primer coat: Epoxy zinc-rich primer 19B; 3 mils dry film thickness (DFT)
minimum
b) Top coats: Two coats coal tar epoxy; 16 mils DFT minimum total coating
thickness
3) Coal tar shall be applied within 96 hours of primer application. If coal tar
application is performed after 96 hours of primer cure time, the surface shall be
abraded and re-coated with a thin coat of primer prior to coal tar epoxy application.
4) Component mixing and application shall follow manufacturers requirements and
recommendations.
d. Polyurethane
2. Linings
a. Coal Tar Epoxy
1) Meet the requirements of USACE Formula C-200a and conform to SSPC Paint 16
manufactured with Type 1 pitch.
2) System requirements:
a) Primer coat: Epoxy zinc-rich primer 19B; 3 mils dry film thickness (DFT)
minimum
b) Top coats: Two coats coal tar epoxy; 16 mils DFT minimum total coating
thickness
3) Coal tar shall be applied within 96 hours of primer application. If coal tar
application is performed after 96 hours of primer cure time, the surface shall be
abraded and re-coated with a thin coat of primer prior to coal tar epoxy application.
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: STEEL
15061 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
b.
2.3
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
4) Component mixing and application shall follow manufacturers requirements and

recommendations.
Cement Mortar
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Couplings:
1. Flanged adaptors:
a. Steel or carbon steel body sleeve, flange, followers and Grade 30 rubber gaskets.
b. Provide units specified in Article 2.1.
c. Flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges.
d. Entire assembly to be rated for test pressure specified in Section 15060 for each
respective application.
2. Compression sleeve coupling:
a. Steel sleeve, followers Grade 30 and rubber gaskets.
e. Provide field coating for buried couplings per AWWA C203.
2.4
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Fabricated Pipe:
1. Piping shall be made from steel plates rolled into cylinders with not more than two
longitudinal butt-welded seams, or shall be spirally formed and butt-welded.
2. Buried Pipe Design
a. Design for the net thickness shall be based on trench conditions and the design pressure
using the following parameters and AWWA M11:
1) Live Load: AASHTO HS-20
2) Trench Depth: As shown on the Drawings
3) Soil Density: 120 lbs/cubic foot
4) Deflection Lag Factor (D1): 1.0
5) Coefficient (K) = 0.10
6) Maximum Calculated Deflection:
a) Dx = 3 percent (for epoxy coated and lined pipe)
7) Soil Reaction Modulus (E) < 1,000 psi (typical embedment); 3,000 psi (flowable
fill)
8) Working and surge (transient) pressure as specified in Section 15060.
b. Wall thicknesses shall be as follows (Maximum minus tolerance for thickness shall be
0.005 inches):
1) 108-inch and 114-inch diameter pipe: 0.625 inches minimum.
2) 48-inch diameter pipe: 0.3125 inches minimum
4) Thickness shall be such that fiber stress shall not exceed 50 percent of the
minimum yield strength of the steel for working pressure and 75 percent of the
minimum yield strength of the steel at the maximum pressure.
3. Exposed Pipe Design
a. Wall thicknesses shall be as follows:
1) 108-inch and 114-inch diameter pipe: 0.625 inches minimum.
4) Thickness shall be such that fiber stress shall not exceed 50 percent of the
minimum yield strength of the steel for working pressure and 75 percent of the
minimum yield strength of the steel at the maximum pressure.
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: STEEL
15061 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
4.
5.
6.
7.
Inside pipe diameter, including lining, shall be a minimum of the nominal pipe diameter
specified, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
Pipe for buried service shall be principally furnished in maximum 50 FT net laying lengths.
Provisions for Thrust for Buried Pipe
a. Thrust shall be resisted at fittings using restrained joints.
b. Restrained joints shall be welded.
c. Joints shall be restrained where indicated on the Drawings or indicated in Section
15060.
Pipe segments and assemblies shall be shop fabricated with end types as scheduled in
Section 15060 and as specified herein.
a. Flanged
1) Welded neck or slip-on to meet the service noted
2) Flat face per AWWA C207, Class as indicated in Section 15060
b. Welded Joints
1) See Part 3 of this Specification.
c. Flexible Couplings
1) Locate where shown on the Drawings or scheduled in Section 15060
2) Prepare pipe with plain ends per AWWA C200
3) Refer to Article 2.3 herein.
20
21
22
23
24
B. Fabricated Fittings:
1. Designed in accordance with AWWA C208 and AWWA M11.
2. Assure ratio of radius of bend to diameter of pipe equal to or greater than 1.0.
3. Smooth type for piping smaller than 24 IN DIA
4. Mitered type for piping 24 IN DIA and larger
25
26
27
28
29
C. Test Bulkheads
1. Furnish test bulkheads in accordance with the Drawings and as needed to perform field
hydrostatic tests.
2. Test plugs or bulkheads shall have a 30-inch diameter access manhole in one side of the
plug.
30
31
32
33
34
D. Outlets for Weld Leads.

1. The Contractor may use outlets for access for weld leads. Outlets shall be welded after use.
The maximum spacing for outlets for weld leads shall be 500 feet unless otherwise
approved. Outlets through manways, air valves, and blow offs shall be used for access for
weld leads, and shall be included in the calculation for 500 foot maximum spacing.
35
2.5
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
A. Pipe and Fitting Testing:

1. Shop hydrostatic test fabricated steel pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C200.
2. Test each joint of pipe prior to application of lining or coating.
3. All fittings welds shall be tested using hydrostatic test, ultrasonic test, air test, or magnetic
particle test. Air test shall be made by applying air to the welds at 40 psi and checking for
leaks per AWWA C206. In additional, 5 percent of manual welds on fittings shall be
checked with x-ray or ultrasonic testing by an independent NDE technician.
4. Perform Charpy V-notch testing accordance with ASTM A370.
5. Perform elongation testing in accordance with ASTM A370.
45
B. See Section 09910 for pipeline coating testing requirements.
46
C. See Section 02632 for cement mortar lining testing requirements.
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: STEEL
15061 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
B. Joining Methods - Flanges:

1. Facing method:
a. Insert slip-on flange on pipe.
b. Assure maximum tolerances for flange faces from normal with respect to axis of pipe is
0.005 IN per foot of flange diameter.
c. Test flanges after welding to pipe for true to face condition and reface, if necessary, to
bring to specified tolerance.
2. Joining method:
a. Leave 1/8 to 3/8 IN of flange bolts projecting beyond face of nut after tightening.
b. Coordinate dimensions and drillings of flanges with flanges for valves, pumps,
equipment, tank, and other interconnecting piping systems.
c. When bolting flange joints, exercise extreme care to assure that there is no restraint on
opposite end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket compression or
cause unnecessary stress, bending or torsional strains being applied to cast flanges or
flanged fittings.
1) Allow one flange free movement in any direction while bolts are being tightened.
d. Do not assemble adjoining flexible coupled, mechanical coupled or welded joints until
flanged joints in piping system have been tightened.
e. Gradually tighten flange bolts uniformly to permit even gasket compression.
f. Do not overstress bolts to compensate for poor installation.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
C. Joining Method - Welded Joints:

1. Perform welding in accordance with AWWA C206 and this Section. Weld after Backfill
shall be in accordance with Section 02634.
2. Welding for exposed service piping shall only be allowed where approved by the Engineer.
3. Cover coatings to protect from weld splatter.
4. Exterior Joint Protection
a. Buried pipe joints shall be field coated after assembly using heat shrink sleeves.
b. Follow general installation requirements of AWWA C216.
c. Width of sleeve shall overlap polyurethane or tape by a minimum of 3 IN.
d. Clean pipe, removing all rust, mud, and other debris.
e. Apply wrap using either propane fired infrared heaters or wrap around heaters.
5. For flange attachment perform in accordance with AWWA C207.
6. Have each welding operator affix an assigned symbol to all welds.
a. Mark each longitudinal joint at the extent of each operator's welding.
b. Mark each circumferential joint, nozzle, or other weld into places 180 degrees apart.
7. Provide caps, tees, elbows, reducers, etc., manufactured for welded applications.
8. Weldolets may be used for 5 IN and larger pipe provided all slag is removed from inside the
pipe.
9. Weld-in nozzles may be used for branch connections to mains and where approved by
Engineer.
10. Butt Strap Welds
a. Straps to be shipped loose in two pieces
b. Include tabs to accept all-thread for bolted connection to facilitate field line-up and
welding.
c. Maximum strap length: 12-inches.
d. Butt straps shall be welded on the interior and exterior of both ends.
e. Straps shall be used to bridge joints with minimum gap of 2 inches and maximum gap
of 7 inches. Minimum strap overlap on both side of the joint shall be 2.5 inches.
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: STEEL
15061 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
11. Lap Welds

a. Minimum lap distance of 2 inches.
b. Weld both interior and exterior of joint.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
D. Joining Method - Couplings:

1. Compression sleeve:
a. Install coupling to allow space of not less than 1/4 IN but not more than 1 IN.
b. Provide harnessed joint.
1) Use joint harness arrangements detailed in AWWA M11.
c. Design harness assembly with adequate number of tie rods for test pressures indicated
in Section 15060 and allow for expansion of pipe.
d. Provide ends to be joined or fitted with compression sleeve couplings of the plain end
type.
e. Grind smooth welds the length of one (1) coupling on either side of joint to be fitted
with any coupling.
f. Assure that outside diameter and out-of-round tolerances are within limits required by
coupling manufacturer.
2. Mechanical coupling:
a. Arrange piping so that pipe ends are in full contact.
b. Groove and shoulder ends of piping in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
c. Provide coupling and grooving technique assuring a connection which passes pressure
testing requirements.
3. Split-ring coupling:
a. Factory weld restraint rings to pipe ends per manufacturer requirements.
b. Install per manufacturers instructions.
c. Encase coupling in heat shrink wrap after installation.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
E. Joining Method - Threaded and Coupled (T/C):

1. Provide T/C end conditions that meet ASME B1.2 requirements.
2. Furnish pipe with factory-made T/C ends.
3. Field cut additional threads full and clean with sharp dies.
4. Leave not more than three (3) pipe threads exposed at each branch connection.
5. Ream ends of pipe after threading and before assembly to remove burrs.
6. Use Teflon thread tape on male thread in mating joints.
34
35
36
37
F. Joining Method Rubber Gasket Joints

1. Join in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
2. Clean bell and spigot of foreign materials.
3. Lubricate gaskets and engage spigot as far as possible in bell.
38
G. Support exposed piping in accordance with Section 15060.
39
H. Install buried piping per Section 15060.
40
41
I.
Coat buried ferrous metals such as bolts and flanges that cannot be protected with factory or
field applied coatings with two wraps of wax tape and encase in flowable fill.
42
J.
Install cathodic protection in accordance with 13115.
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: STEEL
15061 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.2
MANUFACTURERS TECHNICIAN FOR PIPE INSTALLATION
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A. During the construction period, the Pipe Manufacturer shall furnish the services of a factory
trained, qualified, job experience technician to advise and instruct as necessary in pipe handling
storage, joint assembly, lining and coating repair. The technician shall advise the Contractor in
his pipe laying operation and shall instruct construction personnel in proper joint assembly and
joint inspection procedures. The technician shall be n-site full time during the first two weeks of
pipe laying and thereafter as required by the Engineer, Owner, or Contractor at no additional
cost to Owner.
9
10
11
12
13
14
B. The Pipe Manufacturer shall provide services of the Costing Manufacturers representative and a
representative from the Heat Shrink Joint Manufacturer for a period of not less than two weeks
at the beginning of actual pipe laying operations to advise Contractor and Owner regarding
installation, including but not limited to, handling and storage, cleaning and inspecting, coating
repairs, field applied coating, heat shrink installation procedures and general construction
methods and how they may affect the pipe coating.
15
16
17
18
C. The manufacturers representatives shall be required to return if, in the opinion of the Engineer,
the coating, lining, or the Contractors construction methods do not comply with the
Specifications. Cost for the Coating, Lining, or Pipe Manufacturers representatives to return to
the Site shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
19
3.3
REPAIR
20
21
A. Coatings and Linings

1. See Sections 02632 and 09910.
22
23
B. Heat Tape
1. See Sections 09910 and 02634.
24
3.4
FIELD TESTING
25
26
27
28
29
30
A. Weld Testing
1. Dry penetrant test in accordance with ASTM E165, or a magnetic particle test in accordance
with AWWA C206 and set forth in AWS D.1.1. shall be performed by the Contractor under
the supervision of the Owners Representative or an independent testing laboratory, on all
full welded joints.
2. Defective welds will be replaced or repaired at the Contractors expense.
31
B. Hydrostatic test piping systems in accordance with Section 15060.
32
3.5
33
34
CLEANING AND DISINFECTION

A. Remove all rocks and debris from piping prior to commissioning. Disinfect potable water lines
per Section 15060.
END OF SECTION
35
36
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: STEEL
15061 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15062
PIPE: DUCTILE
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
1. Ductile iron piping, fittings, and appurtenances.
7
8
9
10
11

3. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements.
1.2
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. B1.1, Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form).
b. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125, and 250).
a. B695, Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and
Steel.
3. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C606, Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
4. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute
(AWWA/ANSI):
a. C105/A21.5, Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
b. C110/A21.10, Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.
c. C111/A21.11, Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings.
d. C115/A21.15, Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron
Threaded Flanges.
e. C150/A21.50, Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe.
f. C151/A21.51, Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.
5. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE):
a. AMS-QQ-P-416, Cadmium Plating - Electro-deposited.
1.3
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
process.
2. Copies of design calculations.
4. Certification of factory hydrostatic testing.
5. If mechanical coupling system is used, submit piping, fittings, and appurtenant items which
will be utilized to meet system requirements.
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: DUCTILE
15062 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
acceptable:
a. Smith Blair (Style 913 (steel)), (Style 912 (cast)).
b. Dresser (Style 128 (steel)), (Style 127 (cast)).
a. Smith Blair (Style 431 (cast)), (Style 411 (steel)).
b. Dresser (Style 153 (cast)), (Style 38 (steel)).
a. Victaulic (Style 31).
4. Glass lining:
a. Ceramic Coating (Non-Stick Glass Lining).
b. Permutit (SG-14 Glass Lining).
5. Insulating couplings:
6. Reducing couplings:
7. Transition coupling:
8. Polyethylene encasement tape:
a. Chase (Chasekote 750).
b. Kendall (Polyken 900).
c. 3 M (Scotchrap 50).
9. Locked Type Restrained joints:
a. American (Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring)
b. U.S. Pipe (TR-Flex) - 4 IN to 54 IN.
c. Clow Superlock.
10. Alternative Restraint Device:
a. EBAA Iron Megalug.
b. Star Pipe Products, Stargrip Series 3000.
c. Sigma.
d. Tyler Tuf-Grip.
38
39
2.2
MATERIALS
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
A. Ductile Iron Pipe:

1. AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15.
48
49
50
C. Flanges:
1. AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15
2. Flanges drilled and faced per ASME B16.1 for both 125 and 250 psi
B. Fittings:
1. AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 or,
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: DUCTILE
15062 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
D. Nuts and Bolts:

1. Buried: Cadmium-plated steel meeting SAE AMS-QQ-P-416, Type 1, Class 2 (Cor-Ten).
2. Exposed: Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Heads and dimensions per ASME B1.1.
4. Threaded per ASME B1.1.
E. Gaskets: See individual piping system requirements in Section 15060.
7
8
F. If mechanical coupling system is used, utilize pipe thickness and grade in accordance with
AWWA C606.
G. Polyethylene Encasement: AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5.
10
2.3
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Couplings:
a. Unit consisting of steel or carbon steel body sleeve, flange, followers, Grade 30 rubber
gaskets.
c. Supply flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges.
d. Rate entire assembly for test pressure specified on piping schedule for each respective
application.
a. Unit consisting of steel sleeve, followers, Grade 30 rubber gaskets.
c. Supply flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges.
d. Entire assembly to be rated for test pressure specified on piping schedule for each
3. Mechanical couplings:
a. Use of mechanical couplings and fittings in lieu of flanged joints is acceptable where
specifically specified in Section 15060 or indicated on the Drawings.
b. Utilize units defined in Article 2.1.
c. Couplings shall have ASTM A-536 ductile iron housings, EPDM gaskets, and Type
316 stainless steel hardware.
2.4
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

A. Buried Pipe
1. Ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi with a minimum yield
strength of 42,000 psi (per AWWA M-41). Design shall be done for external and internal
pressures separately using the larger of the two for the net design thickness. Additional
allowances shall be made for service allowance and casting tolerance per AWWA C150.
The pipe classes determined for various sizes and conditions shall provide the total
calculated thickness at a minimum.
2. Design for net thickness for external loading shall be based on the following:
a. Live Load: AASHTO HS-20
b. Trench Depth: As shown on the Drawings
c. Soil Density: 120 lbs/cubic foot
d. Laying Conditions: AWWA C150, Type 5.
e. Soil Reaction Modulus (E) < 1,000
3. Design for net thickness based on internal pressure conditions shall be based on the
following:
a. Working/operating pressure: As specified in Section 15060.
b. Surge (transient) pressure allowance: As specified in Section 15060.
c. Safety factor: 2
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: DUCTILE
15062 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
4.
End Treatments/Joint Types:

a. Unstrained Joints:
1) Push-on rubber gasket type per AWWA C11.
b. Restrained joints:
1) Positive locking joints manufactured by the pipe and fitting manufacturer that
utilize restraint independent of the joint gasket.
2) Alternatively, for piping diameters up to 48 IN, a restraint device utilizing a
follower gland and numerous individually activated gripping surfaces with torque
limiting twist-off nuts. Restraint device shall have a working pressure of at least
250 psi and a safety factor of 2:1. Glands and wedges shall be ASTM A536
ductile iron. T-bolts and nuts shall be high strength, low alloy steel. Wedges,
glands, T-bolts, and nuts shall be factory coated with manufacturers standard
fluoropolymer or thermoset epoxy coating.
3) Locations of restrained and unrestrained joints shall be as shown on the Drawings.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
B. Exposed Pipe
1. Ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi with a minimum yield
strength of 42,000 psi (per AWWA M-41).
2. Pipe diameter sizes 4 through 24 IN shall have a pressure rating of 350 psig. Pipe diameter
sizes 30 IN and larger shall have a pressure rating of 250 psig.
3. End Treatments/Joint Types:
a. Flange or mechanical coupling as scheduled in Section 15060.
22
23
24
25
C. Exterior Coatings:
1. Furnish and install outside coating of bituminous material for buried pipe and fittings..
2. Furnish cast parts with lacquer finish compatible with finish coat. Field finish paint per
Section 09905.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
D. Linings:
1. Glass Lining
a. Minimum two-coat process.
1) Base coat heated to solidly fuse glass to pipe surface.
2) Subsequent coat(s) heated to form integral bond with preceding coat.
b. Final finish parameters:
1) Thickness: 8-12 mils.
2) Hardness: Above 5 on MOHS scale.
3) Density: 2.5-3.0 grams per cubic centimeter.
4) Metal to lining bonding: Capable of withstanding strain of 0.0001 IN/IN without
damage to lining.
c. Complete compatibility between fittings and piping.
2. Polyethylene and Epoxy Lining (40 mils minimum).
a. Polyethylene, "Polybond" by American Pipe.
b. Polyurethane, "Polythane" by U.S. Pipe.
c. Ceramic epoxy, "Protecto 401" by U.S. Pipe.
d. Calcium aluminate, "Sewper Coat" by Griffin Pipe.
3. Cement Mortar
a. Single thickness cement mortar and asphaltic seal coat per AWWA C104.
45
2.5
46
47
48

A. Factory Test:
1. Subject pipe to hydrostatic test of not less than 500 psi with the pipe under the full test
pressure for at least 10 seconds.
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: DUCTILE
15062 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A. Joining Method - Push-On Mechanical (Gland-Type) Joints:

1. Install in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11.
2. Assemble mechanical joints carefully according to manufacturer's recommendations.
3. If effective sealing is not obtained, disassemble, thoroughly clean, and reassemble the joint.
4. Do not overstress bolts.
5. Where piping utilizes mechanical joints with tie rods, align joint holes to permit installation
of harness bolts.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
B. Joining Method - Push-On Joints:

2. Assemble push-on joints in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3. Bevel and lubricate spigot end of pipe to facilitate assembly without damage to gasket.
a. Use lubricant that is non-toxic, does not support the growth of bacteria, has no
deteriorating effects on the gasket material, and imparts no taste or odor to water in
pipe.
4. Assure the gasket groove is thoroughly clean.
5. For cold weather installation, warm gasket prior to placement in bell.
6. Taper of bevel shall be approximately 30 degrees with centerline of pipe and approximately
1/4 IN back.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
C. Joining Method - Flanged Joints:

2. Extend pipe completely through screwed-on flanged and machine flange face and pipe in
single operation.
3. Make flange faces flat and perpendicular to pipe centerline.
4. When bolting flange joints, exercise extreme care to ensure that there is no restraint on
opposite end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket compression or would
cause unnecessary stress, bending or torsional strains to be applied to cast flanges or flanged
fittings.
5. Allow one flange free movement in any direction while bolts are being tightened.
6. Do not assemble adjoining flexible joints until flanged joints in piping system have been
tightened.
7. Gradually tighten flange bolts uniformly to permit even gasket compression.
8. Project bolt ends 1/4 to 1/2 IN beyond nuts.
35
36
37
38
39
D. Joining Method - Mechanical Coupling Joint:

1. Arrange piping so that pipe ends are in full contact.
2. Groove and shoulder ends of piping in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Provide coupling and grooving technique assuring a connection which passes pressure
40
41
42
43
44
E. Cutting:
1. Do not damage interior lining material during cutting.
2. Use abrasive wheel cutters or saws.
3. Make square cuts.
4. Bevel and free cut ends of sharp edges after cutting.
45
F. Support exposed pipe in accordance with Section 15060.
46
G. Install buried piping in accordance with Section 15060.
47
H. Install restrained joint systems where specified in Section 15060 under specific piping system.
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: DUCTILE
15062 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.2
2
3
TESTING
A. Pressure test piping systems in accordance with Section 15060.
3.3
4
5
per Section 15060.
B.
END OF SECTION
7
8
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: DUCTILE
15062 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15064
PIPE: PLASTIC
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
1. Plastic pipe.
7
8
9
10
11
SUMMARY

1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
A. See Section 15060.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. Referenced Standards:
a. PVC (polyvinyl chloride) materials:
1) D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds
and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
2) D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) PVC Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80 and 120.
3) D2467, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80.
4) D3034, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer
Pipe and Fittings.
5) D3139, Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals.
6) D3212, Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
7) F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
8) F679, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter
Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
9) F794, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity
Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.
10) F949, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer
Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings.
b. Installation:
1) D2321, Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.
a. PVC (polyvinyl chloride) materials:
1) C900, Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated
Fittings, 4 IN Through 12 IN, for Water Distribution.
2) C905, Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated
Fittings, 14 IN through 48 IN, for Water Transmission and Distribution.
b. Polyethylene (PE) materials:
1) C901, Standard for Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 IN through
3 IN, for Water Service.
3. NSF International (NSF).
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: PLASTIC
15064 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.3
SUBMITTALS
2
3
A. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal
process.
B. See Section 15060.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PVC AND CPVC PRESSURE PIPING (EXPOSED)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A. General:
1. Provide Schedule 80 pipe with Schedule 80 fittings and appurtenances to locations shown
on Drawings.
2. Furnish materials in full compliance to following material specifications:
a. Manufacture pipe, fittings and appurtenances from polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound
which meets the requirements of Type 1, Grade 1 (12454-B) Polyvinyl Chloride as
outlined in ASTM D1784 or from chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) compound
which meets the requirements of ASTM D1784, Class 23447 in accordance with
ASTM F441, CPVC 4120.
b. Manufacture pipe, fittings and valves from materials that have been tested and
approved for conveying potable water by the NSF.
18
19
20
21
22
B. Pipe:
1. Furnish pipe meeting requirements of ASTM D1785.
2. Pipe 2 IN and less to be solvent welded.
3. Pipe larger than 2 IN may be either flanged or solvent welded unless shown otherwise on
Drawings.
23
24
C. Fittings: Provide ASTM D2467 (PVC) or ASTM F439 (CPVC) socket type fittings having the
same pressure and temperature rating as the pipe.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
D. Flanges/Unions:
1. Furnish flanges and unions at locations shown on Drawings.
2. Provide either flanges or unions at valves, penetrations through structures and equipment
connections.
3. For pipe larger than 2 IN, provide 150 LB socket type PVC or CPVC flange.
4. For pipe 2 IN and less, provide socket type PVC or CPVC union with Buna O-rings.
5. Use flat, full faced natural rubber gaskets at flanged connections.
a. Furnish heavy hex head bolts, each with one (1) heavy hex nut, ASTM F593 Type 316
stainless steel.
6. Use spacers supplied by pipe manufacturer when mating raised-faced flanges to other
flanges.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
E. Installation:
1. Field threading PVC or CPVC will not be permitted.
a. Perform required threaded connections or attachments by the use of factory molded
socket by threaded adapters.
b. Female adapters are not acceptable.
2. Employ installation and pipe support practices and solvent welding all in compliance to the
manufacturer's printed recommendation.
a. Solvent cement for sodium hypochlorite service shall be Weld-On CPVC 724 by IPS
Corp. or Oatey Industrial Grade Low VOC Heavy Duty Gray.
b. Continuously support PVC and CPVC piping at liquid operating temperatures in excess
of 100 DegF.
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: PLASTIC
15064 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
c.
d.
e.
2.2
For vertical piping, band the pipe at intervals to rigidly support load of twice vertical
load.
Support riser clamps on spring hangers.
Do not clamp PVC or CPVC tightly or restrict movement for expansion and
contraction.
PRESSURE PIPING (UNDERGROUND)
7
8
9
10
A. Materials: Furnish materials in full compliance with following requirements:

1. 1/2-3 IN: AWWA C901 PE with Pressure Class as noted in Section 15060
2. 4-12 IN: AWWA C900 PVC with Pressure Class as noted in Section 15060
3. 14-36 IN: AWWA C905 PVC (DR as noted in Section 15060).
11
12
B. Fittings
1. Cast or ductile iron conforming to AWWA C110 and C153 (See Section 15062).
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
C. Joints
1. Elastomeric-gasket type with a pressure rating not less than pipe pressure rating meeting
performance requirements of ASTM D3139.
2. Restrained fitting joints shall be made using EBAA Iron Series 2000 PV or equal
model by Star Pipe Products. Restraint of push-on joints shall be made using EBAA Iron
Series 1500/2800 or equal model by Star Pipe Products. Devices shall meet the
requirements of ASTM F1674. Wedges, glands, T-bolts, and nuts shall be factory coated
with manufacturers standard fluoropolymer or thermoset epoxy coating.
21
22
23
24
25
D. Installation:
1. Field threading of PVC pipe will not be permitted.
2. Perform installation procedures, handling, thrust blocking, connections, and other
appurtenant operations in full compliance to the manufacturer's printed recommendations
and in full observance to plan details when more stringent.
26
2.3
PVC DRAINAGE, SEWER PIPING AND UNDERGROUND AIR DUCTS
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
A. Materials:
1. Furnish materials in full compliance to the following material specification.
2. PVC pipe shall be rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) made of PVC plastic
having a cell classification of 12454-B or 12454-C as described in specification ASTM
D1784.
3. The requirements of this Specification are intended to provide for pipe and fittings suitable
for non-pressure drainage of wastewater and surface water.
4. Joining systems shall consist of an elastomeric gasket joint meeting requirements of
ASTM D3212.
5. Supply to the Engineer all information and sample of joining method for his evaluation.
a. Only jointing methods acceptable to the Engineer will be permitted.
6. Provide pipe and fittings meeting or exceeding the following requirements:
a. 4-27 IN DIA: ASTM D3034 and ASTM F679, SDR 21.
b. 8-30 IN DIA: ASTM F794.
c. 4-18 IN DIA: ASTM F949.
7. Ensure impact strengths and pipe stiffnesses in full compliance to these Specifications.
43
44
45
B. Installation: Install pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D2321 and as recommended by
the manufacturer.
1. Provide for a maximum deflection of not more than 3 percent.
46
47
48
C. Infiltration and Exfiltration:

1. The maximum allowable infiltration measured by test shall not exceed 100 GAL per inch of
pipe diameter per mile per 24 HRS.
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: PLASTIC
15064 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2.
3.
4.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
For exfiltration, all the pipe and fittings shall exceed performance requirements by an air
test procedure as specified in Section 15060.
Observe full instructions of the Engineer for carrying of testing procedures.
a. Perform tests only during presence of the Engineer or his authorized representative.
Should any test on any section of pipe line disclose either infiltration rates greater than
allowed or disclose air loss rate greater than that permitted, locate and repair the defective
joints or pipes at no cost to Owner and retest until requirements stated are met.
D. Deflection:
1. After backfilling, each section of pipe shall be checked for deflection by pulling a mandrel
through the pipe.
2. Pipe with deflection exceeding 5 percent of the inside diameter shall have backfill removed
and replaced to provide a deflection of less than 5 percent.
3. Any repaired pipe shall be retested.
2.4
PVC TUBING
15
A. General: Provide nylon tubing with fittings and appurtenances as shown on Drawings.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
B. Materials:
1. Furnish clear outer braided tubing with braid outside the walls.
2. Have tubing manufactured of nylon with working temperatures from 5 to 180 DegF.
3. Design tubing with a minimum safety factor of 4 to 1 ratio of burst pressure to working
pressure at maximum temperature.
4. Provide tubing with working pressure of 75 psi at 180 DegF.
5. Ensure that tubing is self-extinguishing and fire resistant.
23
24
25
26
27
C. Fittings:
1. Install tubing with nylon fittings and connectors.
2. Use barbed type adapters with stainless steel clamps.
3. Provide fittings capable of withstanding temperatures from a -70 to 250 DegF.
4. Ensure fittings have the same pressure and temperature rating as the tubing.
28
PART 3 - EXECUTION
29
3.1
30
31
32
33
34
35
A. Identify each length of pipe clearly at intervals of 5 FT or less.

1. Include manufacturer's name and trademark.
2. Nominal size of pipe, appurtenant information regarding polymer cell classification and
critical identifications regarding performance specifications and NSF approvals when
applicable.
3.2
36
37
38
39
40
41
IDENTIFICATION
PRESSURE PIPING (UNDERGROUND)

A. Installation:
1. Field threading of PVC pipe will not be permitted.
2. Perform installation procedures, handling, thrust blocking, connections, and other
appurtenant operations in full compliance to the manufacturer's printed recommendations
and in full observance to plan details when more stringent.
3.3
PVC DRAINAGE, SEWER PIPING AND UNDERGROUND AIR DUCTS
42
43
44
A. Installation: Install pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D2321 and as recommended by
the manufacturer.
1. Provide for a maximum deflection of not more than 3 percent.
45
B. Infiltration and Exfiltration:

165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: PLASTIC
15064 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.
2.
3.
4.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The maximum allowable infiltration measured by test shall not exceed 100 GAL per inch of
pipe diameter per mile per 24 HRS.
For exfiltration, all the pipe and fittings shall exceed performance requirements by an air
test procedure as specified in Section 15060.
Observe full instructions of the Engineer for carrying of testing procedures.
a. Perform tests only during presence of the Engineer or his authorized representative.
Should any test on any section of pipe line disclose either infiltration rates greater than
allowed or disclose air loss rate greater than that permitted, locate and repair the defective
joints or pipes at no cost to Owner and retest until requirements stated are met.
C. Deflection:
1. After backfilling, each section of pipe shall be checked for deflection by pulling a mandrel
through the pipe.
2. Pipe with deflection exceeding 5 percent of the inside diameter shall have backfill removed
and replaced to provide a deflection of less than 5 percent.
3. Any repaired pipe shall be retested.
3.4
17
18
19
20
21
PVC TUBING
A. Fittings:
1. Install tubing with nylon fittings and connectors.
2. Use barbed type adapters with stainless steel clamps.
3. Provide fittings capable of withstanding temperatures from a -70 to 250 DegF.
4. Ensure fittings have the same pressure and temperature rating as the tubing.
END OF SECTION
22
23
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: PLASTIC
15064 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
165477
City of Dallas
PIPE: PLASTIC
15064 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15065
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
1. Stainless steel piping, fittings, and appurtenances.
7
8
9
10
11
SUMMARY

1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
A. Referenced Standards
1. ASTM International (ASTM)
a. A774: Standard Specification for Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings.
b. A778: Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel
tubular Products.
2. American Water Works Associations (AWWA).
a. AWWA C220: Stainless Steel Pipe, 1/2 IN and Larger.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
B. Qualifications
1. Use only certified welders meeting procedures and performance outlined in ASME Section
IX and other codes and requirements per local building and utility requirements.
2. Manufacturers shall be certified under S.P.F.A. or I.S.O. quality certification program for
stainless steel pipe and accessory manufacturing.
3. Finished pipe shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Piping manufacturing
operations shall be performed under the control of the pipe manufacturer.
4. The pipe manufacturer shall not have less than 5 years successful experience manufacturing
pipe of the particular size and type indicated.
28
1.3
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
process.
3. Factory test reports.
4. If mechanical grooved type coupling system is used, submit piping, fittings, and appurtenant
items which will be utilized.
5. Welders certificates.
1.4
165477

1. See Section 01600
City of Dallas
15065 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
acceptable:
1. Mechanical couplings:
a. Victaulic Style 07 (rigid)
b. Victualic Style 77 (flexible)
2. Split-Ring couplings
a. Victualic Depend-o-Lok, Model F x F, Type 1 or 2 based on pipe diameter (rigid)
b. Victualic Depend-o-Lok, Model F x E Type 2 (expansion)
3. Pressed connection piping:
a. Press-fit by Victaulic.
b. ProPress by Viega.
2.2
MATERIAL
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A. Pipe Steel
1. Be of continuous casting
2. Be suitable for field welding
3. Be homogeneous
4. Be fully kilned
5. Be fine austenitic grain size
6. Fabricated from steel sheet conforming to ASTM A778 Type 304L or 316L (as
scheduled in Section 15060).
7. Carbon content shall be 0.35 percent maximum.
8. Finish shall No. 1 or No. 2B or polished as scheduled in Section 15060.
9. Meet requirements of AWWA C220.
26
27
28
B. Fittings
1. Fabricated from steel sheet conforming to ASTM A774 Type 304L or 316L (as scheduled in
Section 15060).
29
30
31
32
C. Flanges
1. Material type to match connecting piping.
2. Meet the requirements of AWWA C207.
3. AWWA Class as noted in the piping schedules in Section 15060.
33
D. Gaskets: See Section 15060 for schedule and material requirements.
34
35
36
37
38
39
E. Tubing Steel
1. Stainless steel tubing shall be seamless type fabricated from stainless steel ingots,
conforming to ASTM A269. Tubing shall be Type 316L stainless steel with carbon content
not exceeding 0.035 percent. Tubing shall have scale free interior and exterior through
appropriate pickling or bright annealing process. Exterior surface finish shall be polished in
accordance with finish R requirements of ASTM A270.
40
2.3
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Couplings:
a. Steel or carbon steel body sleeve, flange, followers and Grade 30 rubber gaskets.
165477
City of Dallas
15065 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Steel sleeve, followers Grade 30 and rubber gaskets.

Provide units specified in Article 2.1.
Flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges.
Entire assembly to be rated for test pressure specified in Section 15060 for each
Mechanical coupling joint:
a. Use of mechanical grooved type couplings and fittings in lieu of flanged joints is
acceptable where specifically specified in Section 15060 or shown on the Drawings.
b. Utilize units defined in Article 2.1. Provide rigid type unless specified otherwise in
Section 15060 or shown on the Drawings.
c. Couplings shall have ASTM A-536 ductile iron housings with hot-dip galvanized
finish, EPDM gaskets, and Type 316 stainless steel hardware.
Split-ring couplings:
a. Use of split-ring couplings is allowed where scheduled in Section 15060.
b. Construction:
1) Gaskets shall be Viton.
2) Housing shall be double arch cross section manufactured from Type 316 stainless
steel.
3) Material thickness shall not be less than 0.12 IN.
c. Coupling shall be rigid or expansion type as scheduled or as noted on the Drawings
1) Rigid: Fixed x Fixed couplings with end rings shop-welded to the pipe ends.
2) Expansion: Fixed x Expansion couplings with end ring shop-welded on one pipe
end.
Pressed connection piping and couplings:
a. Piping shall be standard Schedule 10 or manufacturers standard required for the
operating conditions specified in Section 15060.
b. A manufacturers connection tool shall be provided to the Owner at the completion of
the project.
c. Piping and connections shall have a minimum pressure rating of 200 psig and vacuum
rating of 30 inches Hg.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
A. Pipe and Fittings

1. Pipe shall be die-formed or rolled true to dimension and round. Tolerances for length, inside
and outside diameter and straightness shall conform to ASTM A530. The two edges of sheet
shall be brought to line so as to not leave a shoulder on the inside of the pipe. Ends of pipe
and fittings shall be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. Longitudinal seams on pipe and
fittings shall be welded by either tungsten gas or metallic gas method. The interior welds
shall be smooth, even and not have an internal bead higher than 1/16 IN.
2. Wall thickness shall be designed for the working pressure and surge (transient) pressure
specified in Section 15060. Wall thickness shall not be less than the minimum pipe schedule
noted in Section 15060.
3. Inside pipe diameter, including lining, shall be a minimum of the nominal pipe diameter
specified, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
B. Pipe segments and assemblies shall be shop fabricated with end types as scheduled in Section
15060 and as specified herein.
1. Flanges:
a. Welded neck or slip-on, ANSI B16.1 125 lb
b. AWWA Class as indicated in Section 15060
2. Screwed Ends
a. NPT threads per ANSI/ASME B16.11.
3. Grooved Ends
165477
City of Dallas
15065 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
a.
2
3
4
5
Roll grooved to accommodate couplings.
C. Tubing
1. Joints for stainless steel tubing shall be double ferrule compression design. Fittings shall be
Type 316L stainless steel and field gaugeable.
2.5
6
7
8
9
10
SHOP WELDING
A. Shop welding of fabrications shall be done according to the procedures and by welders certified
per ASME Section IX. Welds shall be by an inert gas shielding process using only extra low
carbon filler metals. Welds shall have a bead height of no more than 1/16-inch. Butt welds shall
have 100 percent penetration to the interior or backside of the weld joint. Cross-sectional
thickness of welds shall be equal or greater than that of the parent metal.
11
12
13
2.6

Shop hydrostatic test pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C200. Test 5 percent of all fitting welds
using ultrasonic or radiography testing performed by an independent certified welding inspector.
14
2.7
SHOP CLEANING AND FINISHING
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
A. Cleaning
1. Remove all carbon deposits, greases, and oils by pickling and neutralization to aid the
regeneration of a uniform corrosion resistant chromium oxide film. Completely immerse all
stainless steel assemblies and parts after welding and brushing in a pickling solution as
described in Section 6.2.11 of ASTM A380-88. The solution shall be a nitric hydrofluoric
solution as defined in table A.2.1 of Annex a2 of ASTM A30.
2. Provide a final thorough rinse using ordinary industrial or potable water and dry in
conformance per Section 8.3 of ASTM A380. All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be
pickled at the point of manufacture.
24
25
26
B. Surface Finish
1. Where scheduled in Section 15060, provide polished finish on stainless steel pipe.
Electropolish the outer surface of the pipe until a homogenous, polished finish is attained.
27
PART 3 - EXECUTION
28
3.1
INSTALLATION
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
A. General
1. Stainless steel pipe shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly aligned
and cut from measurements taken at the Site to avoid interferences with structural members,
architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipe shall afford maximum
headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary all piping shall be installed with
sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points.
Installation shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER.
36
37
38
39
B. Threaded Joints
1. Pipe threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B 1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose
(inch), and shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than three threads shall
remain exposed after installation.
40
41
42
43
C. Flanged Joints:
1. Leave 1/8 to 3/8 IN of flange bolts projecting beyond face of nut after tightening.
2. Coordinate dimensions and drillings of flanges with flanges for valves, pumps, equipment,
tank, and other interconnecting piping systems.
165477
City of Dallas
15065 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3.
4.
5.
6.
When bolting flange joints, exercise extreme care to assure that there is no restraint on
opposite end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket compression or cause
unnecessary stress, bending or torsional strains being applied to cast flanges or flanged
fittings.
a. Allow one flange free movement in any direction while bolts are being tightened.
Do not assemble adjoining flexible coupled, mechanical coupled or welded joints until
flanged joints in piping system have been tightened.
Gradually tighten flange bolts uniformly to permit even gasket compression.
Do not overstress bolts to compensate for poor installation.
10
D. Field welding will not be allowed unless approved by the ENGINEER.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
E. Mechanical Couplings:
1. Compression sleeve:
a. Install coupling to allow space of not less than 1/4 IN but not more than 1 IN.
b. Provide harnessed joint.
1) Use joint harness arrangements detailed in AWWA M11.
c. Design harness assembly with adequate number of tie rods for test pressures indicated
in Section 15060 and allow for expansion of pipe.
d. Provide ends to be joined or fitted with compression sleeve couplings of the plain end
type.
e. Grind smooth welds the length of one (1) coupling on either side of joint to be fitted
with any coupling.
f. Assure that outside diameter and out-of-round tolerances are within limits required by
coupling manufacturer.
a. Arrange piping so that pipe ends are in full contact.
b. Groove and shoulder ends of piping in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
c. Provide coupling and grooving technique assuring a connection which passes pressure
30
31
F. Pressed Connection Piping

1. Follow manufacturers installation instructions.
32
33
34
35
36
G. Supports and Anchors

1. Piping shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers or supports in
accordance with Section 15090 - Pipe Support Systems. Where necessary to avoid stress on
equipment or structural members, the pipe shall be anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints
and guides shall compensate for pipe expansion due to temperature differences.
37
38
39
40
41
H. Valves and Unions

1. Unless otherwise indicated, connections to fixtures, groups of fixtures, and equipment shall
be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has flanged ends. Unions shall
be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other devices requiring occasional removal
or disconnection.
42
3.2
INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING
43
44
45
A. Inspection: The finished installation shall be carefully inspected for proper supports, anchoring,
interferences, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coating. Damage shall be repaired to the
satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
46
B. Pressure test piping in accordance with Section 15060.
165477
City of Dallas
15065 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.3
2
3

per Section 15060.
END OF SECTION
4
5
165477
City of Dallas
15065 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15070
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
1. Bar wrapped concrete cylinder pipe and special coatings, beveled or mitered-end pipe and
fittings for concrete cylinder pipe.
8
9
10
11
12
13

1. The Uniform General Conditions for City of Amarillo Civil Construction Contracts.
3. Division 2 - Site Work.
1.2
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. Reinforced concrete cylinder pipe:
1) C303, Reinforced Concrete Water Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, Bar-wrapped.
b. Installation and testing:
1) C651, Disinfecting Water Mains.
2) M9, Installation of concrete pipe.
1.3
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. All submittals shall be approved by the Engineer prior to delivery and/or fabrication for
specials.
2. Wall thickness design calculations sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in Texas
including:
a. Internal pressure
1) Working Pressure
2) Test Pressure
3) Surge pressure
b. External pressure
1) Deflection
2) Buckling
c. Special physical loading such as supports or joint design
d. Thermal expansion and/or contraction, if applicable for the proposed installation
3. Thrust restraint calculations for all fittings, deflections, and valves including the minimum
restraint length sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in Texas to verify the restraint
lengths shown in the Drawings. In no case shall the length of joint restraint be less than the
distances indicated on the Drawings. Design criteria are provided in Section 2.2 of this
specification section.
4. Fabrication and lay drawings showing a schematic location with profile and a tabulated
layout schedule that is sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in Texas and includes:
a. Pipe class
b. Joint types
c. Fittings
165477
City of Dallas
15070 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
5.
6.
7.
8.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
d. Thrust Restraint
e. Stationing (in accordance with the Drawings)
f. Transitions
g. Joint deflection
h. Outlet locations for welding, ventilation, and access
i. Welding requirements
Pipe within Casing
a. Pipe to be laid in casing shall have two (2) built up rings or mortar each approximately
2' long and slightly higher than the pipe bell to prevent pipe being supported by the bell.
Rings are to be located at the quarter points of the pipe section.
b. Provide drawings detailing how pipe is restrained to prevent floating within the casing.
Furnish full details of reinforcement, concrete, and joints for the straight pipe, specials, and
connections.
Prior to manufacture of pipe, specials or fittings, submit a tabulated layout schedule with
reference to stationing and grade line shown on Drawings.
a. Include on schedule identification of pressure zones, point of change from one (1) zone
to another and pipe diameter.
b. Include detailed Shop Drawings giving full information on amount, size, and nature of
reinforcement for each classification and size of pipe.
c. Show details of curves, fittings, specials, appurtenances, together with identification
marks or numbers by which location of each pipe, special or accessory is determined in
the pipeline.
d. Indicate elevation of each joint in vertical curves.
Indicate vertical and/or horizontal deflection of each joint where applicable.
B. Certificates and Test Reports

process.
2. Submitted information in accordance with Section 15060.
3. Report full results of the following test reports showing compliance with referenced
standard prior to shipment of pipe material:
a. Steel test reports.
b. Concrete test cylinder reports.
c. Rubber gasket test reports.
4. Prior to shipment of the pipe, the Pipe Manufacturer shall submit the following:
5. A Certificate stating that the pipe to be furnished complies with AWWA C303 and these
Specifications
6. Copies of results of factory hydrostatic tests shall be provided to the Engineer
7. Mill certificates, including chemical and physical test results for each heat of steel
8. The manufacturer shall perform the tests described in AWWA C303, for all pipe, fittings,
and specials, except that the absorption test detailed in this Specification shall supersede the
requirements of the applicable portion of AWWA C303.
9. Certified test reports for welder certification for factory and field welds in accordance with
AWWA C303, Section 5
10. Certified test reports for cement mortar tests
11. Certified test reports for steel cylinder tests
47
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
48
2.1
49
50
MATERIALS
A. Materials
1. General
165477
City of Dallas
15070 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
165477
All materials used in steel piping systems defined in Section 15060 shall meet or
exceed pressure test requirements specified.
b. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest revisions of AWWA C303,
AWWA M9, as well as the special requirements of this Specification.
c. All pipe shall meet the requirements of NSF 61.
Cement
a. Cement for use in concrete and mortar shall be Type I or II Portland Cement.
Aggregates
a. Aggregates for concrete lining and coating shall conform to ASTM C33.
Sand
a. Sand used for inside and outside joints shall be of silica base, conforming to ASTM
C144.
Exterior Pipe Coating: Including pumped heads, shall be coated with a 1-inch thick cementmortar coating over the rod wrap.
Interior Pipe Coating: Cement-Mortar Lining in Accordance with AWWA C303.
Other Protective Coatings:
Surfaces of steel joint rings exposed in finished pipe and all other exposed metal surfaces
shall be shop primed with manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer.
Mortar coating shall be used to protect all exposed steel surfaces after installation.
Cement mortar for coatings shall consist of 1 part cement to 3 parts of fine, sharp clean sand
mixed with water.
Special Coating (Mortar Rings)
a. Pipe to be installed in casing shall have 2 built-up mortar rings, each approximately 2
feet long and slightly higher than the pipe bell, to prevent the pipe from being supported
by the pipe bell.
b. Built-up mortar rings are to be applied at the quarter points of the pipe section.
Mixes
a. Cement Mortar
1) Cement mortar used for pouring joints shall consist of:
a) 1 part Portland Cement
b) 2 parts clean, fine, sharp silica sand
c) Mixed with water
d) No manufactured sand shall be permitted.
e) Exterior joint mortar shall be mixed to the consistency of thick cream.
f) Interior joint mortar shall be mixed with as little water as possible so that the
mortar is very stiff, but workable.
g) Cement shall be ASTM C150, Type I or Type II.
h) Sand shall conform to ASTM C144.
2) Cement mortar used for patching shall be mixed as per cement mortar for inside
joints.
Bushings, Couplings and Plugs
a. Where outlets or taps are threaded, furnish and install brass reducing bushings in larger
steel half couplings for the outlet size indicated.
b. Threaded plugs shall be brass.
Joint Wrappers
a. Joint wrappers shall be manufactured by Mar-Mac Manufacturing Company, or
approved equal.
b. For pipe within casing, Flex Protex joint filler, or approved equal, may be used for
pipes that can be welded from the interior.
Flexible Joint Couplings
a. Flexible Joint Couplings shall be Dresser Style 38, Smith-Blair Style 411 or approved
equal.
City of Dallas
15070 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
16. Pipe Ends

a. The standard pipe end shall include steel joint ring and a continuous solid rubber ring
gasket as per AWWA M9.
17. Flanges
a. Flanges shall conform to AWWA C207 with laying dimensions and drilling in
accordance with ASME B16.1, Class 125.
b. Flanges shall be Flange Class D.
c. In no case shall the working or test pressure of the pipe exceed the working pressure of
the flange.
d. Drilling shall match class of valves or appurtenances which are attached.
e. When Isolation Flanges are required by the Drawings, Drillings shall accommodate the
required spacing for mylar sleeves.
18. Flange Coatings
a. Coatings for buried flanges shall be Densyl Tape system manufactured by Carboline,
consisting of Densyl Mastic, Densyl Paste, and Densyl Tape, or approved equal.
19. Gaskets
a. Isolation Flanges
1) Flanges which are required by the drawings to be Isolation Flanges shall conform
to Section15060.
b. Class D Flanges
1) Full face
2) Manufactured true to shape from minimum 80 durometer SBR rubber stock of a
thickness not less than 1/8 inch
3) Virgin stock
4) Conforming to the physical and test requirements specified in AWWA/ANSI
C111/A21.11
5) Finished gaskets shall have holes punched by the manufacturer and shall match the
flange pattern in every respect.
6) Frayed cut edges resulting from job site gasket fabrication are not acceptable.
7) Furnish Viton Rubber gaskets hydrocarbon restraint gaskets, when required.
20. Bolts and Nuts
a. Flanged Ends
1) Meet requirements of AWWA C207.
2) Class D and E Flanges
a) For buried and non-buried applications, provide ASTM A193 Grade B7 Bolts
and ASTM 194 grade 2H Nuts.
21. Threaded Outlets
a. Where outlets or taps are threaded, Threaded with CC Threads and furnish and install
brass bushings for the outlet size indicated.
22. Weld Lead Outlets (if applicable)
a. Use of threaded outlets for access for weld leads is permitted.
b. Additional outlet configurations shall be approved by the Engineer.
c. Outlets shall be welded after use.
23. Snap Rings
a. Snap rings shall be manufactured by Hanson, or approved equal.
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
B. Performance / Design Criteria

1. Pipe Design
a. Pipe shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest revisions
of AWWA C303, AWWA M9, as well as the special requirements of this Specification.
b. Sizes and pressure classes (working pressure) shall be as specified in the Drawings.
c. For the purposes of pipe design, working pressure plus transient pressure shall be as
indicated below.
165477
City of Dallas
15070 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
d.
2.
165477
Pipe design shall be based on trench conditions and design pressure class specified in
the Drawings.
e. Pipe shall be designed according to the methods indicated in AWWA C303 and
AWWA M9 for trench construction, using the following parameters:
1) Unit Weight of Fill (w) = 130 pounds per cubic foot
2) Live Load = AASHTO H-20 truck for unpaved conditions
3) Live Load = Cooper E-80 loading for railroad crossings
4) Trench Depth = As indicated on Drawings
5) Coefficient Ku' = 0.150
6) Trench Width (Bd) as indicated on Drawings
7) Bedding Conditions = as indicated on Drawings
8) Deflection Lag Factor = 1.0
9) Soil Reaction Modulus (E) < 1,500
10) Working Pressure = 100 psi
a) Test Pressure =
(1) No less than 1.25 minimum times the stated working pressure (125 psi
minimum) of the pipeline measured at the highest elevation along the test
section.
(2) No less than 1.5 times the stated working pressure (150 psi minimum) at
the lowest elevation of the test section.
11) Surge Allowance = 50 psi, minimum for positive transients.
a) Where Total positive transient Pressure (including surge) = 100 psi + 50 psi =
150 psi
12) Minimum negative pressure shall be full vacuum, -14.7 psi.
f. Trench depths indicated on Drawings shall be verified after existing utilities are
located.
1) Vertical alignment changes required because of existing utility or other conflicts
shall be accommodated by an appropriate change in pipe design depth.
2) In no case shall pipe be installed deeper than its design allows.
Provisions for Thrust
a. Thrust at bends, tees or other fittings shall be resisted by welded joints, or restrained
joint snap rings.
1) Thrust at bends adjacent to casing shall be restrained by welding joints through the
casing and a sufficient distance each side of the casing.
2) The distance for thrust restraint shown on the Drawings is the minimum restraint
and does not relieve the manufacturer from calculating the restraint needs as
specified herein.
a) In no case shall the restrained distance be less than indicated on the Drawings.
b. Restrained joints shall be used a sufficient distance from each side of the bend, tee, plug
or other fitting to resist thrust which develops at the design pressure of the pipe.
1) The distance for thrust restraint shown on the Drawings is the minimum restraint
and does not relieve the manufacturer from calculating the restraint needs as
specified herein.
a) In no case shall the restrained distance be less than indicated on the Drawings.
b) Restrained joints shall consist of welded joints or snap rings.
c) The pipe shall have adequate cylinder thickness to transmit the thrust forces.
d) The length of pipe with restrained joints to resist thrust forces shall be verified
by the pipe manufacturer in accordance with AWWA M9 and the following:
(1) The Weight of Earth (We) shall be calculated as the weight of the
projected soil prism above the pipe.
(2) Soil Density = 110 pounds per cubic foot (maximum value to be used for
unsaturated soil).
(3) Coefficient of friction = 0.5 (maximum value to be used).
c. Thrust collars will only be permitted for temporary plugs.
City of Dallas
15070 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
1) Thrust collars may not be used for any other application, unless approved in
writing by the Engineer.
Inside Diameter
a. The inside diameter, of the cement mortar lining shall be the nominal diameter
specified, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
Joint Bonds, Insulated Connections and Flange Gaskets
a. Joint Bonds, Insulated Connection and Flange Gaskets shall be in accordance with
Section 15060.
Bend Fittings
a. All bend fittings shall be long radius to permit passage of pipeline pigs.
Fittings with Flanges
1) Flanged joints shall be provided at connections to valves and where indicated on
the Drawings.
2) Ends to be fitted with slip-on flanges shall have the longitudinal or spiral welds
ground flush to accommodate the type of flanges provided.
3) Pipe flanges and welding of flanges to Concrete Pressure Pipe shall conform to the
requirements of AWWA C207 and AWWA C206.
4) Pipe flanges shall be of rated pressure equal to or greater than the adjacent pipe
class.
5) Flanges shall match the fittings or appurtenances which are to be attached.
6) Flanges shall be Class D with 150 psi working pressure in accordance with
AWWA C207 and in accordance with ASME B16.1 Class 125.
FABRICATION
A. Bar Wrapped Concrete Cylinder Pipe (AWWA C303):
1. Provide bar wrapped concrete cylinder pipe meeting or exceeding AWWA C303
requirement.
2. Provide piping consisting of a welded steel cylinder with steel joint rings welded to its ends,
formed and tested in accordance with prescribed methods.
a. Centrifugally cast a mortar or concrete lining inside cylinder.
b. Helically wind reinforcing rod under measured tension around the cylinder and secure
by welding to steel joint rings at each end.
c. Apply outside coating of dense mortar covering the cylinder and rods except for the
necessarily exposed surfaces of the spigot joint ring and a self-centering joint with a
preformed gasket of rubber, so designed that the joint will be watertight under all
conditions of service.
2.3
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

A. Hydrostatic Pressure Testing
1. Hydrostatic pressure testing shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C303 Section
4.6 Fabrication.
a. Each pipe cylinder, with rings welded to its ends, shall be hydrostatically tested prior to
application of lining or coating.
b. The internal test pressure shall be that which results in a fiber stress equal to 75 percent
of the minimum yield strength of the steel used.
c. Each pipe cylinder tested shall be completely watertight under maximum test pressure.
d. Test pressure shall be held for sufficient time to observe the weld seams.
e. Pipe manufacturer shall maintain a recording of the pressure gauge report and provide
to the Engineer.
2. Fittings shall be fabricated from hydrostatically tested pipe or fabricated of welded steel
sheets or plates.
a. Fittings shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C303.
165477
City of Dallas
15070 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
3.
Factory Testing
a. Cement Mortar Coating - Absorption Test
1) A water absorption test shall be performed on samples of cured mortar coating
taken from each working shift.
a) The mortar coating samples shall have been cured in the same manner as the
pipe.
b) A test value shall consist of the average of a minimum of 3 samples taken
from the same working shift.
c) The test method shall be in accordance with ASTM C497, Method A.
d) The average absorption value for any test shall not exceed 9 percent and no
individual sample shall have an absorption exceeding 11 percent.
e) Tests for each working shift shall be performed on a daily basis until
conformance to the absorption requirements has been established by 10
consecutive passing test results, at which time testing may be performed on a
weekly basis for each working shift.
(1) Daily testing shall be resumed for each working shift with failing
absorption test results and shall be maintained until conformance to the
absorption requirements is re-established by 10 consecutive passing test
results.
20
21
B. Cement Mortar Lining

1. Shop-applied cement mortar linings shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C303.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
C. City Testing and Inspection

1. The City reserves the option to have an independent testing laboratory, at the City's expense,
inspect pipe and fittings at the pipe manufacturer's plant.
a. The City's testing laboratory and Engineer shall have free access to the manufacturer's
plant.
b. The pipe manufacturer shall notify the City, in writing, at least 2 weeks prior to pipe
fabrication as to start of fabrication and fabricating schedule. The City will then advise
the manufacturer as to City's decision regarding tests to be performed by an
independent testing laboratory.
c. In the event the City elects to retain an independent testing laboratory to make material
tests and weld tests, it is the intent that the tests be limited to 1 spot testing of each
category unless the tests do not show compliance with the standard.
1) If these tests do not show compliance, the City reserves the right to have the
laboratory make additional tests and observations.
2. The inspection and testing by the independent testing laboratory anticipates that production
of pipe shall be done over a normal period of time and without "slow downs" or other
abnormal delays.
a. In the event that an abnormal production time is required, and the City is required to
pay excessive costs for inspection, then the Contractor shall be required to reimburse
the City for such costs over and above those which would have been incurred under a
normal schedule of production as determined by the Engineer.
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
D. Provide each pipe, fittings, special appurtenance with a plainly and permanently waterproofed,
marked identification.
1. Include but not necessarily limit markings to the following:
a. Size and class of pipe, pressure rating in compliance with referenced standards.
b. Date of manufacturer.
c. Manufacturer's trademark or name.
d. On bends, the angle turned.
e. On beveled pipe, amount of bevel and point of maximum bevel, marked on the bevel
end.
f. Special notations and tagging of special items in regard to line location.
165477
City of Dallas
15070 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
4
5
6
7
8
INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Refer to Section 15060.
3. Observe all recommendations in accord with AWWA M9 for installation, delivery and
storage of pipe materials.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
B. Manufacturers Technician for Pipe Installation

1. Pipe Manufacturers Representative
a. During the construction period, the pipe manufacturer shall furnish the services of a
factory trained, qualified, job experienced technician to advise and instruct, as
necessary, in pipe laying and pipe jointing.
b. The technician shall assist and advise the Contractor in his pipe laying operations and
shall instruct construction personnel in proper joint assembly and joint inspection
procedures.
c. The technician is not required to be on-site full time; however, the technician shall be
regularly on-site (at least 5 working days) during the first 2 weeks of pipe laying and
thereafter as requested by the Engineer, City or Contractor.
20
21
22
23
24
25
C. Pipe Handling:
1. Haul and distribute pipe and fittings to the project site. Handle piping with care to avoid
damage. Before lowering into the trench, inspect each joint of pipe, and reject or repair any
damaged pipe.
2. Keep the pipe clean during and after the laying operation and free of sticks, dirt, animals,
and trash, and at the close of each operating day, effectively seal the open end of the pipe.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
D. Joints, Curves, and Fittings:

1. Joints:
a. Install sealed joints using continuous steel end ring with spigot groove and O-ring
gasket.
1) Ensure rubber gasket serves as the sole element to make the joint watertight.
2) O-ring to have a smooth surface, free from pitting, blisters, porosity and other
imperfections.
3) Cement mortar or plastic materials used to finish joints shall not be depended upon
for watertightness.
2. Curves:
a. Observe Drawings for details regarding changes in direction.
b. Where changes of direction by curvature is acceptable, perform curve by deflecting
pipe at each joint within the permissible joint deflection allowance recommended by the
manufacturer.
c. Employ the use of special radius (beveled or mitered) pipe where deflected straight pipe
will not provide a short enough change in radius.
3. Fittings:
a. In addition to straight pipe or radius pipe, furnish bends, tees, adapters, closures pieces,
and other fittings or specials shown on Drawings or required to complete the work.
b. Provide specials and fittings in accordance with AWWA C303 and construct in
accordance with stated design pressures equal to or greater than that of the adjacent
pipe.
c. Fittings may be smooth or mitered providing mitered angles do not exceed 22-1/2
degrees and fitting has an R/d greater or equal to 1, where:
165477
City of Dallas
15070 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
1) R = radius of bend, IN.

2) d = diameter of pipe, IN.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
E. Pipe Jointing:
1. General:
a. Thoroughly clean the bell and spigot rings before laying each joint of pipe by brushing
and wiping. If any damage to the protective coating on the metal has occurred, repair
the damage before laying the pipe. Lubricate the gasket and the inside surface of the
bell with an approved lubricant (flax soap) which will facilitate the telescoping of the
joint. Tightly fit together sections of pipe and exercise care to secure true alignment
and grade. When a joint of pipe is being laid, place the gasket on the spigot ring and
enter the spigot end of the pipe into the bell of the adjoining pipe and force into
position. The inside joint space between ends of the pipe sections shall have an
opening within the tolerances as recommended by the Pipe Manufacturer. No
"blocking up" of pipe or joints will be permitted, and if the pipe is not uniformly
supported or the joint not made up properly, remove the joint and properly prepare the
trench. After joining, check the position of the gasket with a feeler gauge. If the gasket
is out of position, disassemble the joint and repeat the joint laying procedure.
2. Inside Joint:
a. The inside joint recess of 18 IN and smaller pipe shall be filled immediately prior to
placing the pipe together by buttering the bell end of the pipe with mortar.
a) After the joint is engaged, the joint mortar shall be smoothed and cleaned with
a swab.
b. The inside joint recessed of 36 IN and smaller pipe shall be coated with a self-curing
inorganic zinc coating, Carbo Zinc 11 as manufactured by Carboline or approved equal,
to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
1) The coating shall be applied by the manufacturer of the pipe at the factory.
2) The steel shall be prepared before the coating is applied as recommended by the
coating manufacturer.
c. The inside joint recess of pipe larger than 36 IN shall be filled with mortar and finished
smooth by hand trowel after the joint is engaged.
3. Exterior Joint:
a. After the joint is engaged and the joint is checked and found satisfactory, a typar (nonwoven fabric) wrapper with steel bands shall be placed around the pipe covering the
joint.
1) The steel bands shall be used to secure the wrapper around the pipe by means of a
stretcher and sealer.
2) The entire joint shall be poured with a cement mortar and consolidated and rodded
or agitated to eliminate voids.
4. Welded Joints
a. Weld joints in accordance with the AWWA M9.
1) Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation for welders and for the City to
observe welds.
2) Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, welds shall be full circle fillet welds.
b. Adequate provisions for reducing temperature stresses shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
c. Before welding:
1) Thoroughly clean pipe ends.
2) Weld pipe by machine or by the manual shielded electric arc process.
d. Welding shall be performed so as not to damage lining or coating.
e. Furnish labor, equipment, tools and supplies, including shielded type welding rod.
1) Protect welding rod from any deterioration prior to its use.
2) If any portion of a box or carton is damaged, reject the entire box or carton.
165477
City of Dallas
15070 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
In all hand welding:

1) The metal shall be deposited in successive layers.
2) Not more than 1/8 inch of metal shall be deposited in each pass.
3) Each pass except the final 1, whether in butt or fillet welds, shall be thoroughly
bobbed or peened to relieve shrinkage stresses and to remove dirt, slag or flux
before the succeeding bead is applied.
4) Each pass shall be thoroughly fused into the plates at each side of the welding
groove or fillet and shall not be permitted to pile up in the center of the weld.
5) Undercutting along the side shall not be permitted.
Welds shall be free from pin holes, non-metallic inclusions, air pockets, undercutting
and/or any other defects.
If the ends of the pipe are laminated, split or damaged to the extent that satisfactory
welding contact cannot be obtained, remove the pipe from the line.
Furnish each welder employed with a steel stencil for marking the welds so that the
work of each welder may be identified.
1) Have each welder stencil the pipe adjacent to the weld with the stencil assigned to
him.
a) In the event any welder leaves the job, his stencil shall be voided and not
duplicated if another welder is employed.
Welders
1) Each welder employed by the Contractor shall be required to satisfactorily pass a
welding test in accordance with AWWA C206 before being allowed to weld on the
line.
2) After each welder has qualified in the preliminary tests referred to above,
inspections shall be made of joints in the line.
a) The inspection will be done by a Certified Welding Inspector retained by the
City.
3) Any welder making defective welds shall not be allowed to continue to weld.
Weld Testing
1) Dye penetrant tests in accordance with ASTM E165, or magnetic particle test in
accordance with AWWA C206 and set forth in AWS D.1.1. shall be performed by
the Contractor under the supervision and inspection of the Citys Representative or
an independent testing laboratory, on all full welded joints.
a) Welds that are defective will be replaced or repaired, whichever is deemed
necessary by the Engineer, at the Contractor's expense.
b) If the Contractor disagrees with the Engineer's interpretation of welding tests,
test sections may be cut from the joint for physical testing. The Contractor
shall bear the expense of repairing the joint, regardless of the results of
physical testing.
c) The procedure for repairing the joint shall be approved by the Engineer before
proceeding.
42
43
44
F. Connections with Existing Work:

1. Refer to Section 15060.
2. Observe procedures outlined in AWWA C651 for cutting into or repairing existing mains.
45
46
G. Thrust Restraint:
1. Refer to Section 15060 and Contract Drawings.
47
48
49
50
H. Protection of Exposed Metal:

1. Protect exposed ferrous metal by a minimum of 1" coating of cement mortar as previously
specified for inside joints. Exposed large flat surfaces such as, flanges, bolts, caulked joints,
threaded outlets, closures, etc., shall have coating reinforced with galvanized wire mesh.
165477
City of Dallas
15070 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
2.
Thoroughly clean and wet the surface receiving a cement mortar coating with water just
prior to placing the cement mortar coating. After placing, take care to prevent cement
mortar from drying out too rapidly by covering with damp earth or burlap. Cement mortar
coating shall not be applied during freezing weather.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
I.
Patching:
1. Excessive field patching of lining or coating shall not be permitted. Patching of lining or
coating will be allowed where area to be repaired does not exceed 100 square inches and has
no dimensions greater than 12". In general, there shall not be more than one patch on either
the lining or the coating of any one joint of pipe.
2. Wherever necessary to patch the pipe, make patch with cement mortar as previously
specified for interior joints. Do not install patched pipe until the patch has been properly
and adequately cured and approved for laying by the Engineer. Promptly remove rejected
pipe from the site.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
J.
Pipe Bedding and Backfill:

1. Pipe bedding and backfill shall be as specified in Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling,
and Compacting for Utilities. Remove sheeting and shoring in a manner such that a good
bond is achieved between the backfill material and the undisturbed trench walls.
2. If required by the Pipe manufacturer, C303 pipe buried under deep cover must be backfilled
using flowable fill or cement stabilized sand as specified in Section 02221 and Division 3 of
these specifications. Pipe manufacturer must show on the layout drawings areas where
flowable fill or cement stabilized sand is required.
22
3.2
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42

A. General:
1. Subject pipe to the required in-place tests.
2. Deflection Testing
a. Prior to hydrostatic testing, the Contractor shall perform deflection testing at a
minimum rate of 1 measurement for every 2,500 linear feet of water line.
b. City may reject any areas not meeting the deflection requirements of this Specification.
3. Cleaning and Testing
a. Cleaning, disinfection, hydrostatic testing, and bacteriological testing of water mains:
1) Clean, flush, pig, disinfect, hydrostatic test, and bacteriological test the water main
as specified in Section 15060.
b. Per AWWA M-9 except the allowable leakage for C303 pipe shall be less than10
gal/in-dia/mile/day.
c. If leakage rate is excessive, perform necessary surveys for defect or damage and repair
damage and defects immediately.
d. Conduct testing procedures in the presence of Engineer or his authorized representative.
e. Safeguard the entire piping system from damage prior to and during all test procedures.
f. Perform all repair and replacement work in accordance with Engineer's directions.
g. Undertake repairs immediately after the test period.
h. Repairs, replacement of defective materials, additional retesting and all costs incurred
shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION
43
44
45
165477
City of Dallas
15070 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
15070 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15090
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
1. Pipe, duct and conduit support and anchor systems.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings.
4. Section 11005 - Equipment Basic Requirements
5. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements
6. Section 15890 - HVAC Ductwork
7. Section 16010 Electrical: Basic Requirements
8. Section 16130 - Raceways and Boxes
1.2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. B31.1, Power Piping.
b. B31.3, Process Piping.
a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A510, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse
Round Wire, Carbon Steel.
c. A575, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades.
d. A576, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality.
3. American Welding Society (AWS):
a. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
4. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS):
a. SP-58, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.
b. SP-69, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
5. Building code:
a. International Code Conference (ICC):
1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2009 Edition including all
City and State of Washington amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
6. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual:
a. Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, with Seismic Hazard Level (SHL) of A.
1.3
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
process.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
c. Itemized list of wall sleeves, anchors, support devices and all other items related to pipe
support system.
165477
City of Dallas
15090 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
d.
Scale drawings showing guides, hangers, supports, anchors, structural members

and appurtenances to describe the pipe support system. Scale drawings showing
guides, hangers, supports, anchors, structural members and appurtenances to describe
the pipe support system stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of
Oklahoma.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
8
9
10
11
A. Model numbers listed in the specifications and on the drawings for pipe support components are
intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Actual model numbers will vary
with materials of construction. Materials shall comply with those listed in the specifications and
at specific locations of the drawings.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
B. Materials
1. Exterior and above or within a tank, box, compartment or channel that has liquid or
transports liquid from one unit to another; highly corrosive; inside of vaults; or areas
designated as Class I , Division 1 or 2 areas: Type 316 stainless steel or FRP construction.
a. Low carbon, "L" Grade stainless when welded.
b. All weld areas: Passivate/pickle.
2. Chemical storage areas requiring chemical type supports: FRP.
3. All other interior areas: Hot dip galvanized after fabrication
20
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
21
22
23
24
25
A. Hanger Rods:
1. Minimum allowable tensile stress of 12,000 psi at 650 DegF per MSS SP-58.
2. Continuously threaded.
3. Load limit:
NOMINAL ROD DIAMETER
3/8 IN DIA (min)
1/2 IN DIA
5/8 IN DIA
3/4 IN DIA
7/8 IN DIA
1 IN DIA
MAXIMUM SAFE LOAD, (LBS)

610
1,130
1,810
2,710
3,770
4,960
26
27
28
29
B. Hangers:
1. Hanger type schedule:
APPLICATION
All except noted
All except noted
Steam, condensate and hot water
PIPE SIZE
4 IN and less
Over 4 IN
All
HANGER TYPE
ANVIL Figure 108 with Figure 114
ANVIL Figure 590
ANVIL Figure 181 Figure 82 or equal
30
31
32
33
34
C. Concrete Inserts for Hanger Rods:

1. Continuous slots: Unistrut #P1000.
2. Individual inserts: ANVIL Figure 281.
3. Self-drilling expansion anchors: Phillips flush-end or snap-off end type.
35
36
D. Beam Clamps for Hanger Rods:

1. Heavy duty.
165477
City of Dallas
15090 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
ADD#1
2.
ANVIL Figure 134.
2
3
4
E. Trapeze Hangers for Suspended Piping:

1. Angles, channels, or other structural shapes.
2. Curved roller surfaces at support point corresponding with type of hanger required.
5
6
7
F. Vertical Pipe Supports:

1. At base of riser.
2. Lateral movement for clamps or brackets: ANVIL Figure 259.
8
9
10
G. Expanding Pipe Supports:

1. Spring hanger type.
2. MSS SP-58.
11
12
13
14
H. Pipe Support Saddle:

1. For pipe located 3 FT or less from floor elevation, except as otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
2. ANVIL Figure 264.
15
16
17
I.
Pipe Support Risers:

1. Minimum Schedule 40 pipe.
2. As recommended by saddle manufacturer.
18
19
J.
Pipe Support Base Plate:

1. As shown on Standard Details
20
21
22
K. Pipe Covering Protection Saddle:

1. For insulated pipe at point of support.
2. ANVIL Figure 167, Type B.
23
24
25
26
L. Wall Brackets:
1. For pipe located near walls and 8 FT or more above floor elevation or as otherwise indicated
on the Drawings.
2. ANVIL Figure 199.
27
28
29
M. Pipe Anchors:
1. 1/4 IN plate construction.
2. Designed to prevent movement of pipe at point of attachment.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
N. Seismic Restraints:
1. Aircraft cables or angles or channels.
2. Aircraft cables shall be prestretched to establish a certified minimum modulus of elasticity.
Cable restraints shall be designed to resist seismic tension loads and restraints shall be
designed to resist both tension and compression loads with a minimum safety factor of 2.
3. Restraint and connections shall be assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle.
4. Do not mix cable and angle restraints to brace the same system.
5. Angles shall be clamped to the threaded hanger rods at the seismic sway restraint locations
utilizing a minimum of two (2) clamps.
6. Transverse bracing shall be provided at 40 FT-0 IN maximum spacing unless noted
otherwise.
7. Longitudinal bracing shall be provided at 80 FT-0 IN maximum spacing unless noted
otherwise.
8. Fuel gas piping shall have transverse bracing 20 FT-0 IN OC maximum and longitudinal
bracing 40 FT-0 IN OC maximum.
9. At vertical pipe risers, wherever possible, support the weight of the riser at a point or points
above the center of gravity of the riser. Provide lateral guides at the top and bottom of the
riser, and at intermediate points not to exceed 30 FT-0 IN OC.
48
O. Pipe Guides:
165477
City of Dallas
15090 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
For locations on both sides on each expansion joint or loop.

To ensure proper alignment of expanding or contracting pipe.
ANVIL Figure 256.
Sway Strut: ANVIL Figure 640.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
P. Modular Framing Systems

1. Manufacturers
a. Unistrut Corp, Tyco International Ltd.
b. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries Power-Strut Div, International
Ltd.
c. Anvil Power Strut
d. Kindorf.
e. Metal Products Div., USG Industries, Inc.
f. Mono-Systems, Inc.
g. Superstrut.
2. Materials:
a. Struts: AISI 316 Stainless Steel.
b. Fasteners: Stainless Steel.
18
19
Q. Substitutions:
1. Submit request for substitutions in accordance with Specification Section 01640.
20
2.3
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
21
22
23
A. Supports are shown on Drawings only for the purpose of identifying the type of support to be
provided and key locations of supports. Contractor shall size and locate all pipe supports and
submit stamped drawings for approval prior to commencing any pipe installation work.
24
25
B. Supports capable of supporting the pipe for all service and testing conditions.
1. Provide 5 to 1 safety factor.
26
27
C. Allow free expansion and contraction of the piping to prevent excessive stress resulting from
service and testing conditions or from weight transferred from the piping or attached equipment.
28
D. Design supports and hangers to allow for proper pitch of pipes.
29
30
E. Check all physical clearances between piping, support system and structure.
1. Provide for vertical adjustment after erection.
31
32
F. Support vertical pipe runs in pipe chases at base of riser.

1. Support pipes for lateral movement with clamps or brackets.
33
34
35
36
37
38
G. Place hangers on outside of pipe insulation.

1. Use a pipe covering protection saddle for insulated pipe at support point.
2. Insulated piping 1-1/2 IN and less: Provide a 9 IN length of 9 LB density fiberglass
insulation at saddle.
3. Insulated piping over 1-1/2 IN: Provide a 12 IN length of 9 LB density fiberglass insulation
on saddle.
39
40
H. Provide 20 GA galvanized steel pipe saddle for fiberglass and plastic support points to ensure
minimum contact width of 4 IN.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
I.
165477
ADD#1
Pipe Support Spacing:

1. General:
a. Factor loads by specific weight of liquid conveyed if specific weight is greater than
water.
b. Locate pipe supports at maximum spacing scheduled unless indicated otherwise on the
Drawings.
c. Provide at least one (1) support for each length of pipe at each change of direction and
at each valve.
City of Dallas
15090 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
2.
d. Connections at equipment: Support pipes with pipe support and not equipment.
e. Provide additional supports at pipe couplings and/or flexible joints.
Steel, stainless steel, cast-iron pipe support schedule:
PIPE SIZES - IN
1-1/2 and less
2 thru 4
5 thru 8
10 and greater
5
6
7
3.
Copper pipe support schedule:

PIPE SIZES - IN
2-1/2 and less
3 thru 6
8 and greater
8
9
10
4.
MAXIMUM SPAN - FT
5
10
15
20
MAXIMUM SPAN - FT
5
10
15
PVC pipe support schedule:

PIPE SIZES - IN
MAXIMUM SPAN - FT
1-1/4 and less
3
1-1/2 thru 3
4
4 and greater
5
* Maximum fluid temperature of 120 DegF.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
5.
6.
7.
8.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
J.
165477
Support each length and every fitting:

a. Bell and spigot piping:
1) At least one (1) hanger.
2) Applied at bell.
b. Mechanical coupling joints:
1) Place hanger within 2 FT of each side of fittings to keep pipes in alignment.
Space supports for soil and waste pipe and other piping systems not included above every
5 FT.
Provide continuous support for nylon tubing located in the horizontal plane. Locate
supports in the vertical plane at a maximum of 3 FT.
Accessories for PVC, FRP and copper pipe
a. Unistruct unicushion or equal.
Modular Framing Systems

1. Size per manufacturers recommendations for pipe size and spacing specified or shown.
2. Strut shall be minimum of 1-5/8 IN wide and in varying heights and welded combinations
as required to meet the load capacities and designs indicated on the Drawings.
a. Stainless steel:
1) Strut and fittings shall be made from 12 gauge minimum.
2) 0.66 times the yield stress of the stainless steel alloy.
3) Maximum Deflection: 1/240 of span.
3. Allowable Column Loads: As recommended by manufacturer in published instruction for
column's unsupported height and "K" value for calculating effective column length of not
less than 1.0.
4. Hardware:
a. Stainless steel.
b. Hardware shall include, but not be limited to, hex head bolts, nuts, washers, split lock
washers, hex head lag bolts, treaded rod, rod couplings, eye bolts, and u-bolts.
5. Anchors:
City of Dallas
15090 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
6.
a. Per Section 05500

Plastic End Caps:
a. Plastic end caps for strut manufactured by the strut manufacturer in soft white PVC and
appropriately sized for strut utilized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
A. Provide piping systems exhibiting pulsation, vibration, swaying, or impact with suitable
constraints to correct the condition.
1. Included in this requirement are movements from:
a. Trap discharge.
b. Water hammer.
c. Similar internal forces.
2. Seismic Restraints:
a. Provide seismic restraints on all piping with the exception of the following:
1) Piping less than 1 IN DIA when used for gas and compressed air.
2) Piping less than 2-1/2 IN DIA for all other cases.
3) Piping suspended by individual hangers where the distance from the top of the pipe
to the bottom of the support for the hanger is 12 IN or less.
4) These restraints shall be capable of resisting seismic loads as defined in the
International Building Code.
21
22
23
B. Weld Supports:
1. AWS D1.1.
2. Weld anchors to pipe in accordance with ASME B31.3.
24
25
C. Locate piping and pipe supports as to not interfere with open accesses, walkways, platforms, and
with maintenance or disassembly of equipment.
26
27
28
29
30
D. Inspect hangers for:

1. Design offset.
2. Adequacy of clearance for piping and supports in the hot and cold positions.
3. Guides to permit movement without binding.
4. Adequacy of anchors.
31
E. Inspect hangers after erection of piping systems and prior to pipe testing and flushing.
32
33
34
F. Install individual or continuous slot concrete inserts for use with hangers for piping and
equipment.
1. Install concrete inserts as concrete forms are installed.
35
36
37
38
39
40
G. Welding:
1. Welding rods: ASTM and AWS standards.
2. Integral attachments:
a. Include welded-on ears, shoes, plates and angle clips.
b. Ensure material for integral attachments is of good weldable quality.
3. Preheating, welding and post-heat treating: ASME B31.3, Chapter V.
41
42
H. Field Painting:
1. Comply with Section 09905.
43
44
I.
Modular Framing Systems:

1. Install plastic caps on all strut ends in vertical or horizontal positions.
END OF SECTION
45
165477
City of Dallas
15090 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15100
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
SUMMARY
1. Valves, actuators, and valve appurtenances.
7
8
9
10
11
12
3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings.
13
14
C. Contractor shall utilize the Valve Schedule at the end of this Section, in addition to the Drawings
and Specifications, to determine the work of the project.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
1.2
165477
QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose.
b. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125, and 250).
c. B16.18, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
a. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe
Fittings.
b. D256, Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of
Plastics.
c. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
d. D648, Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural
Load in the Edgewise Position.
e. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
f. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness.
a. C207, Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 IN through
144 IN.
b. C500, Standard for Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
c. C504, Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.
d. C507, Standard for Ball Valves, 6 IN through 48 IN (150 MM through 1200 MM).
e. C509, Standard for Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
f. C550, Standard for Protective Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.
g. C606, Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
4. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute
(AWWA/ANSI):
a. C111/A21.11, Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings.
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b. MG 1, Motors and Generators.
City of Dallas
15100 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DEFINITIONS
A. The following are definitions of abbreviations used in this Specification Section or one (1) of the
individual valve sections:
1. CWP: Cold water working pressure.
2. SWP: Steam working pressure.
3. WOG: Water, oil, gas working pressure.
4. WWP: Water working pressure.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. Shop Drawings:
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
c. Valve pressure and temperature rating.
d. Valve material of construction.
e. Special linings.
f. Valve dimensions and weight.
g. Valve flow coefficient.
h. Wiring and control diagrams for electric or cylinder actuators.
3. Test reports.
22
23
24
25

26
27
28
29
C. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Verification from valve actuator manufacturer that actuators have been installed properly,
that all limit switches and position potentiometers have been properly adjusted, and that the
valve actuator responds correctly to the valve position command.
30
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
31
2.1
32
33
34
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, refer to individual valve Specification
Sections for acceptable manufacturers.
2.2
35
36
MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual valve Specification Sections.
2.3
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
VALVE ACTUATORS
A. Valve Actuators - General:
1. Provide actuators as shown on Drawings or specified.
2. Counter clockwise opening as viewed from the top.
3. Direction of opening and the word OPEN to be cast in handwheel or valve bonnet.
4. Size actuator to produce required torque with a maximum pull of 80 LB at the maximum
pressure rating of the valve provided and withstand without damage a pull of 200 LB on
handwheel or chainwheel or 300 foot-pounds torque on the operating nut.
5. Unless otherwise specified, actuators for valves to be buried, submerged or installed in
vaults or manholes shall be sealed to withstand at least 20 FT of submergence.
165477
City of Dallas
15100 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
6.
Extension stem:
a. Install where shown or specified.
b. Solid steel with actuator key and nut, diameter not less than stem of valve actuator
shaft.
c. Pin all stem connections.
d. Center in valve box or grating opening band with guide bushing.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B. Buried Valve Actuators:

1. Provide screw or slide type adjustable cast iron valve box, 5 IN minimum diameter, 3/16 IN
minimum thickness, and identifying cast iron cover rated for traffic load.
2. Box base to enclose buried valve gear box or bonnet.
3. Provide 2 IN standard actuator nuts complying with AWWA C500, Section 3.16.
4. Provide at least two (2) tee handle keys for actuator nuts, with 5 FT extension between key
and handle.
5. Extension stem:
a. Provide for buried valves greater than 4 FT below finish grade.
b. Extend to within 6 IN of finish grade.
6. Provide concrete pad encasement of valve box as shown for all buried valves unless shown
otherwise.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
C. Plastic Valve Vault:

1. Provide in non-traffic areas only on valve applications 3-1/2 IN and less.
2. Nominal 7-1/2 IN DIA top section.
3. Design unit for screw type extension section having nominal 9 IN DIA bell.
4. Cast iron ring and lid.
5. Constructed of injection molded polyolefin compound with fibrous inorganic component
reinforcing and UV stabilization.
6. Armor Access Boxes.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
D. Exposed Valve Manual Actuators:

1. Provide for all exposed valves not having electric or cylinder actuators.
2. Provide handwheels for gate and globe valves.
a. Size handwheels for valves in accordance with AWWA C500.
3. Provide lever actuators for plug valves, butterfly valves and ball valves 3 IN DIA and
smaller.
a. Lever actuators for butterfly valves shall have a minimum of 5 intermediate lock
positions between full open and full close.
b. Provide at least two (2) levers for each type and size of valve furnished.
4. Gear actuators required for plug valves, butterfly valves, and ball valves 4 IN DIA and
larger.
5. Provide gearing for gate valves 20 IN and larger in accordance with AWWA C500.
6. Gear actuators to be totally enclosed, permanently lubricated and with sealed bearings.
7. Provide chain actuators for valves 6 FT or higher from finish floor to valve centerline.
a. Cadmium-plated chain looped to within 3 FT of finish floor.
b. Equip chain wheels with chain guides to permit rapid operation with reasonable side
pull without "gagging" the wheel.
8. Provide cast iron floor stands where shown on Drawings.
a. Stands to be furnished by valve manufacturer with actuator.
b. Stands or actuator to include thrust bearings for valve operation and weight of
accessories.
48
49
50
51
52
E. Submerged Actuators:
1. Mount the valve actuator on top of an extension bonnet 3 FT above any adjacent personnel
access.
2. The valve and bonnet connection shall be flanged and watertight.
3. Provide a top brace support for the bonnet.
165477
City of Dallas
15100 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
4.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
a. Mount the brace 6 IN below the top of the wall as shown.

Materials:
a. Extension bonnet: Cast iron ASTM A126 or steel.
b. Brace and anchor bolts: Type 304 stainless steel.
F. Electric Actuators (480 V, 3 PH):

1. Provide electric valve actuators a local or remote (See Valve Schedule) control station.
2. Furnish electric actuator integral with valve consisting of:
a. Motor.
b. Gearing.
c. Handwheel.
d. Limit and torque switches.
e. Lubricants.
f. Heating elements.
g. Wiring.
h. Terminals for motor power and controls.
i. Drive nut.
3. Housing/enclosure:
a. Provide cast iron gear housing and cast iron load bearing enclosure.
b. Non load bearing enclosure and housing: Aluminum or cast iron.
c. Rated for area classification shown on Drawings or shown on the Valve Schedule.
d. Provide O-ring seals for covers and entries.
e. Terminal and limit switch compartment covers are to be fastened to gear housing by
stainless steel fasteners with capture device to prevent loss.
4. Motors:
a. Provide motors that are totally enclosed, high torque design made expressly for valve
actuator service and capable of operating the valve under full differential pressure for
complete open-close and reverse cycle of travel at least twice in immediate succession
without overheating.
b. Design motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 standards, with Class B insulation, and
to operate successfully at any voltage within 10 percent above or below rated voltage.
c. Provide positive method to ensure motor bearings are permanently lubricated.
d. Provide three (3) thermal switches imbedded in windings:
1) 120 degrees apart.
2) Provide motor shutdown at high temperature.
e. Motor housing:
1) Aluminum or cast iron.
2) Totally enclosed non-ventilated with cooling fins.
f. Provide motor capable of operating in any position.
g. Provide motor sealed from gearcase to allow any mounting position.
h. Provide motors suitable for 480 V, 3 PH, 60 Hz.
5. Gearing:
a. Provide power gearing consisting of heat treated steel helical gears, carburized and
hardened alloy steel worm, and alloy bronze worm gear, all grease or oil bath
lubricated, designed for 100 percent overload, and effectively sealed against entrance of
foreign matter.
b. Provide gearing mechanism constructed to permit field changes of reduction gear ratio.
c. Design actuators so that motor comes up to speed before stem load is encountered in
either opening or closing operation.
d. Limit switch gearings and feedback device reduction gearing:
1) Steel or bronze.
e. Support rotating shafts with anti-friction bearings.
f. Provide separate drive nut/thrust bearing assembly:
1) Mounted to base of actuator.
2) High tensile bronze.
165477
City of Dallas
15100 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
3) Quarter turn actuator: Provide 90 degree mounting intervals.

4) Provide grease fitting on drive assembly.
6. Handwheel:
a. Permanently attached for manual operation.
b. Positive declutch mechanism to engage and disengage handwheel.
c. Handwheel shall not rotate during motor operation.
d. Inoperable motor shall not prevent manual operation.
7. Limit torque and thrust loads in both closing and opening directions by torque limit
switches.
a. Provide torque switches with micrometer adjustment and reference setting indicator.
1) Assure adjustment variation of approximately 40 percent in torque setting.
b. Provide switches having rating of not less than 6 A at 120 Vac and 2.2 A at 115 Vdc.
c. Limit and torque switches shall have totally sealed contacts.
8. Furnish electric actuator with two (2) geared limit switch assemblies with each switch
assembly having four (4) separate limit switches:
a. Assure each limit switch assembly is geared to driving mechanism and is independently
adjustable to trip at any point at and between the fully open and fully closed valve
position.
b. Provide minimum of two (2) normally open contacts and two (2) normally closed
contacts at each end of valve travel.
c. Provide switches with inductive contact rating of not less than 6 A at 120 Vac, 3 A at
240 Vac, 1.5 A at 480 Vac, 2.2 A at 115 Vdc and 1.1 A at 230 Vdc.
d. Limit switches shall be fully adjustable when power is applied to actuator.
9. Provide space heating elements sized to prevent condensation in both motor and geared
limit switch compartment(s).
a. Furnish heating elements rated at 120 Vac with heaters continuously energized.
10. Open-close actuator controls:
a. Provide control assembly with necessary holding relays, reversing starter, control
transformers of sufficient capacity to provide control power, space heating element
power and valve position transmitter.
b. Provide control assembly in an enclosure rated for the defined area classification.
c. Controls for open/close actuator:
1) Provide remote pushbutton station with enclosure rated for area classification
shown on Drawings with:
a) Open pushbutton.
b) Close pushbutton.
c) Stop pushbutton.
d) Remote/local switch.
e) Full open light.
f) Full close light.
g) Open and close relays as required.
2) Provide control enclosure to accept:
a) Remote open/close switches.
3) Provide contacts in control enclosure:
a) Remote/local contact.
b) Full open contact.
c) Full close contact.
4) Wire all components to an internal terminal strip and include mounted wiring
diagram inside enclosure.
11. Additional requirements for modulating valve actuators:
a. Suitable for continuous duty.
b. Proportional position servo-amplifier mounted integral with the actuator control
compartment.
165477
City of Dallas
15100 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Positioning of valve shall be proportional to a 4-20 mA signal input to the position

servo-amplifier when remote control has been selected.
d. Servo-amplifier adjustments shall include zero, span, gain, and dead-band.
e. Provide 4-20 mA signal position control as shown on the Drawings that interfaces with
the position control/position feedback instrumentation wiring to and from RIO or PLC
as shown on the Drawings.
12. Manufacturers:
a. Rotork Series IQ
b. Limitorque Model L120
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
G. Cylinder Actuators:
1. General:
a. Self contained unit including actuator and controls.
b. Electrical enclosure to meet area classification shown on Drawings.
c. Factory assembled requiring field supply connection and control wires.
d. Spring to open or close or double acting as noted in the Valve Schedule.
e. Provide with de-clutchable manual override where noted in the Valve Schedule.
2. Cylinders:
a. Materials:
1) Body: Hard anodized PTFE coated steel, iron, or aluminum body.
2) End caps: Polyester coated steel, iron or aluminum.
3) Fasteners: Stainless steel.
4) Springs: Epoxy coated steel.
b. Cylinder rated for 100 psig minimum.
c. Any hoses between control and cylinder to be oil resistant and arranged to avoid sharp
bending from hose weight.
d. Provide supply filter.
e. Position cylinder above valve; provide valve position indicator or exterior or cylinder.
3. Controls:
a. Provide pre-piped, pre-wired control:
1) Pipe with corrosion-resistant metal.
2) Provide four-way, two-position, 110 V solenoid valve in weatherproof enclosure.
3) Provide open-closed signal limit switches.
4) Speed control valves, to independently control opening and closing speed between
10 and 60 SEC.
5) Manual-automatic selector valve on supply to solenoid.
4. Manufacturers
a. Jamesbury Value-Line.
b. Approved equal.
39
c.
2.4
FABRICATION
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
A. End Connections:
1. Provide the type of end connections for valves as required in the Piping Schedules presented
in Specification Section 15060 or as shown on the Drawings.
2. Comply with the following standards:
a. Threaded: ASME B1.20.1.
b. Flanged: ASME B16.1 Class 125 unless otherwise noted or AWWA C207.
c. Bell and spigot or mechanical (gland) type: AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11.
d. Soldered: ASME B16.18.
e. Grooved: Rigid joints per Table 5 of AWWA C606.
49
50
B. Refer to individual valve Specification Sections for specifications of each type of valve used on
Project.
51
C. Nuts, Bolts, and Washers:
165477
City of Dallas
15100 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
1.
2.
Wetted or internal to be bronze or stainless steel.

Exposed to be Type 316 stainless steel.
3
4
D. On Insulated Piping: Provide valves with extended stems to permit proper insulation application
without interference from handle.
5
6
E. Epoxy Interior Coating: Provide epoxy interior coating for all ferrous surfaces in accordance
with AWWA C550.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
10
11
B. Painting Requirements: Comply with Specification Section 09905 for painting and protective
coatings.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
C. Setting Buried Valves:

1. Locate valves installed in pipe trenches where buried pipe indicated on Drawings.
2. Set valves and valve boxes plumb.
3. Place valve boxes directly over valves with top of box being brought to surface of finished
grade.
4. Install in closed position.
5. Place valve on firm footing in trench to prevent settling and excessive strain on connection
to pipe.
6. After installation, backfill up to top of box for a minimum distance of 4 FT on each side of
box.
22
23
D. Support exposed valves and piping adjacent to valves independently to eliminate pipe loads
being transferred to valve and valve loads being transferred to the piping.
24
25
E. For grooved coupling valves, install rigid type couplings {or provide separate support to prevent
rotation of valve from installed position}.
26
27
F. Install electric or cylinder actuators above or horizontally adjacent to valve and gear box to
optimize access to controls and external handwheel.
28
G. For threaded valves, provide union on one (1) side within 2 FT of valve to allow valve removal.
29
H. Install valves accessible for operation, inspection, and maintenance.
30
3.2
ADJUSTING
31
32
A. Adjust valves, actuators and appurtenant equipment to comply with Specification Section 01650.
1. Operate valve, open and close at system pressures.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
B. For all 120 VAC and 480 VAC electric actuators, employ and pay for services of valve actuator
manufacturer's field service representative to:
1. Inspect valve actuators covered by this Specification Section.
2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks:
a. Open and close valves electrically under local manual and demonstrate that all limit
switches are properly adjusted and that switch contacts are functioning properly by
verifying the inputs are received at the remote input/output (RIO) panels or local
control panel as appropriate.
b. Position modulating valves electrically under local manual control and demonstrate that
the valve position feedback potentiometer is properly adjusted and that the feedback
signal is received at the RIO panels or local control panel as appropriate.
165477
City of Dallas
15100 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
c.
3.
Simulate a valve position command signal at the RIO panel or local control panel as
appropriate and demonstrate that the valve is controlled to the desired position without
excessive hunting.
Provide Owner with a written statement that the valve actuator manufacturer has verified
that the actuators have been installed properly, that all limit switches and position
potentiometers have been properly adjusted and that the valve actuator responds correctly to
the valve position command.
8
9
10
3.3
Location /
Description
Main PW Pipe
Header
Potable Water
Isolation
PI-6000 and PI6001 Isolation
VALVE SCHEDULE
Valve
Cycle
Time
(sec)
Joint
Type3
Pressure
Reducing
10
Provide with
anti-cavitation
trim
N/a
N/a
Flg
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
0.5
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
Stainless Body
Ball
1.5
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
SV-6003
Solenoid
1.5
Fail to open
N/a
Per
manufacturer
NPT
BV-6001,
BV-6004
GV-6000,
GV-6001
Stainless Body
Ball
0.5
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
Gate
12
None
MGH
N/a
Flg
GV-6002
Gate
None
MHW
N/a
Flg
Gate
None.
MHW
N/a
Flg
Spring to close
upon valve
power failure;
POC with
declutch
lever and
hand wheel
Per
manufacturer
Flg
PRV-6000
BV-6000
Seal Water
Isolation
PIT Isolation
Main PW Header
Fire Water
Supply Isolation
165477
Operator
Type2
Main Storm
Water Pump
Utility Water
Supply
Special
Requirements/
Notes
Valve Tag
No(s).
Seal Water
Isolation
Main Storm
Water Pump
Utility Water
Supply
Valve Type
Valve
Size
(in)
No. of
Valves
12
BV-6002,
BV-6003
BV-6005,
BV-6006,
BV-6007
GV-7201,
GV-7202,
GV-7203,
GV-8201,
GV-8202,
GV-8203,
GV-9201,
GV-9202,
GV-9203,
GV-10201,
GV-10202,
GV-10203
BV-7201,
BV-8201,
BV-9201,
BV-10201
Stainless Body
Bal1
Stainless Body
Ball
Stainless Body
Ball
City of Dallas
15100 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
Location /
Description
No. of
Valves
Motor Cooling
Water Isolation
Seal Water
Isolation
Thrust Bearing
Cooling Water
Isolation
Gear Reducer
Lubrication Skid
Cooling Water
Isolation
VFD Cooling
Water Isolation
VFD Cooling
Water Isolation
and Bypass
VFD Cooling
Water Flow
Control (4)
VFD Cooling
Water Drain
Main Storm
Water Pump
VFD Cooling
Water Supply
165477
Valve Tag
No(s).
BV-7201,
BV-8201,
BV-9201,
BV-10201
BV-7202,
BV-8202,
BV-9202,
BV-10202
BV-7203,
BV-8203,
BV-9203,
BV-10203
BV-7204,
BV-8204,
BV-9204,
BV-10204
Valve Type
Valve
Size
(in)
Special
Requirements/
Notes
Operator
Type2
Valve
Cycle
Time
(sec)
Joint
Type3
Stainless Body
Ball
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
Stainless Body
Ball
3/4
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
Stainless Body
Ball
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
Stainless Body
Ball
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
GV-6003
Gate
None
MGH
N/a
Flg
16
BV-7221,
BV-7222,
BV-7223,
BV-7224,
BV-8221,
BV-8222,
BV-8223,
BV-8224,
BV-9221,
BV-9222,
BV-9223,
BV-9224,
BV-10221,
BV-10222,
BV-10223,
BV-10224
Stainless Body
Ball
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
Rate of flow
control, globe
body
Flow range =
130 to 140 gpm;
Max. Inlet
pressure = 60.0
psig;
Outlet pressure =
0.0 psig
MHW
N/a
Flg
Metal Body
Dual Disc
None
N/a
N/a
Flg
None
POC with
declutch
lever and
hand wheel
Per
manufacturer
Flg
FCV-7200,
FCV-8200,
FCV-9200,
FCV-10200
CV-7200,
CV-8200,
CV-9200,
CV-10200
BV-7220,
BV-8220,
BV-9220,
BV-10220
Stainless Body
Ball
City of Dallas
15100 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
Location /
Description
Main Storm
Water Pump
Motor Cooling
Water (4)
Main Storm
Water Pump Seal
Flush Water (4)
No. of
Valves
Joint
Type3
MHW
N/a
Flg
MHW
N/a
NPT
FCV-7202,
FCV-8202,
FCV-9202,
FCV-10202,
Rate of flow
control, globe
body
3/4
Stainless Body
Ball
3/4
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
Stainless Body
Check
3/4
None
N/a
N/a
NPT
MHW
N/a
NPT
MHW
N/a
Flg
BV-7205,
BV-8205,
BV-9205,
BV-10205
CV-7201,
CV-8201,
CV-9201,
CV-10201
Flow range: 8 to
12 gpm; Max.
Inlet pressure =
60.0 psig;
Outlet pressure =
0.0 psig
Flow range: 70
to 135 gpm;
Max. Inlet
pressure = 60.0
psig;
Outlet pressure =
0.0 psig
FCV-7203,
FCV-8203,
FCV-9203,
FCV-10203,
Rate of flow
control, globe
body
FCV-7204,
FCV-8204,
FCV-9204,
FCV-10204,
Rate of flow
control, globe
body
PV-11100,
PV-11200
Plug
24
None
MGH
N/a
Flg
CV-11100,
CV-11200
Rubber Flapper
Check
24
None
N/a
N/a
Flg
6 IN Vacuum
Relief Valve
(Water Type)
with 2 IN Air
Release Valve,
0.5 IN orifice
(Sewage Type)
N/a
N/a
Flg
(4)
(4)
165477
Valve
Cycle
Time
(sec)
Low Flow
Pumps 11100
and 11200
Discharge
Flow range: 120

to 150 gpm;
Max. Inlet
pressure = 60.0
psig;
Outlet pressure =
0.0 psig
Flow range: 5 to
6 gpm; Max.
Inlet pressure =
60.0 psig;
Outlet pressure =
0.0 psig
Operator
Type2
Rate of flow
control, globe
body
Main Storm
Water Pump Seal
Water
Low Flow
Pumps 11100
and 11200
Discharge
Low Flow
Pumps 11100
and 11200
Discharge
Special
Requirements/
Notes
Main Storm
Water Pump
Gearbox
Lubrication Skid
Valve Type
Valve
Size
(in)
FCV-7201,
FCV-8201,
FCV-9201,
FCV-10201,
Main Storm
Water Pump Seal
Water Isolation
Main Storm
Water Pump
Thrust Bearing
Valve Tag
No(s).
AVV11100,
AVV-11200
Air/Vacuum
Valve
City of Dallas
15100 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
Location /
Description
Low Flow
Pumps 11100
and 11200 AVV
Isolation
Air Compressor
Isolation
Operator
Type2
Valve
Cycle
Time
(sec)
Joint
Type3
Plug
None
MGH
N/a
Flg
BV-3001,
BV-3002
PRV-3701,
PRV-3801,
PRV-3901,
PRV-31001
Stainless Body
Ball
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
Pressure
Regulating
1/2
Pump supplier to
confirm valve
size and design
criteria
N/a
N/a
NPT
SV-3010
Solenoid
1/2
None
N/a
Per
manufacturer
NPT
Stainless Body
Ball
1/2
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
Stainless Body
Ball
1/2
None
MW
N/a
NPT
Automatic Drip
1/2
None
N/a
N/a
NPT
Stainless Body
Ball
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
Stainless Body
Ball
1/2
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
Three Way
Solenoid
1/2
None
N/a
Per
manufacturer
NPT
PV-11101,
PV-11201
Air Receiver
Drain
Air Powered
Tool Isolation
10
Drip Leg
Isolation
Drip Leg Drain

Valve
Compressed Air
System Isolation
Inflatable Seal
Isolation
165477
Special
Requirements/
Notes
Valve Tag
No(s).
Inflatable Seal
Pressure
Regulation
Main Storm
Water Pump
Inflatable Seal
Air Supply and
Bleed
Valve Type
Valve
Size
(in)
No. of
Valves
BV-3006,
BV-3007,
BV-3008,
BV-3009,
BV-3012,
BV-3013,
BV-3014,
BV-3015,
BV-3018,
BV-3020
BV-3005,
BV-1010,
BV-3016,
BV-3019
DLV-3001,
DLV-3002,
DLV-3003,
DLV-3004
BV-3003,
BV-3004,
BV-3011,
BV-3017
BV-3701,
BV-3801,
BV-3901,
BV-31001
SV-3701,
SV-3801,
SV-3901,
SV-31001
City of Dallas
15100 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
Location /
Description
No. of
Valves
Sump Pump
Discharge
Sump Pump
Discharge
Valve Tag
No(s).
BV-2102,
BV-2112,
BV-2402,
BV-2412,
BV-2202,
BV-2212,
BV-2302,
BV-2312
CV-2101,
CV-2111,
CV-2201,
CV-2211,
CV-2401,
CV-2411,
CV-2301,
CV-2311
Valve Type
Valve
Size
(in)
Special
Requirements/
Notes
Operator
Type2
Valve
Cycle
Time
(sec)
Joint
Type3
Plastic Ball
1.5
None
MQ
N/a
NPT
Plastic Ball
Check
1.5
None
N/a
N/a
NPT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Notes:
1. Schedule includes all valves including those with electric, hydraulic, or pneumatic operators,
miscellaneous air and vacuum valves, specialty flow control valves with manual operators, and
solenoid valves.
2. Valve operator types:
a. MQ = Manual, quarter turn lever
b. MGH = Manual , gear operator with handwheel
c. MHW = Manual, hand wheel
d. MTB = Manual, gear operator and torque tube
e. MGB = Manual, buried gear operator
f. EOC = Electric open/close service
g. EOCR = Electric open/close service with remote control station
h. EM = Electric modulating service
i. EMR = Electric modulating service with remote control station
j. POC = Pneumatic open/close service
k. HYD = Hydraulically actuated
l. MB = Manual, buried (direct actuated with 2 IN operating nut)
3. Joint Types (general), see narrow scope valve specification for exact requirements).
a. MJ = Mechanical Joint
b. FLG = Flange
c. LUG = Lug body
d. NPT = Threaded
4. Flow control valve sizing shall be confirmed by the pump manufacturer/supplier. Valves sizes noted
are preliminary and are based on flow conditions provided by Flowserve. These valves are highlighted
in the Schedule.
28
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15100 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15101
GATE VALVES
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
1. Gate valves.
7
8
9
10
11
3. Section 15100 - Valves: Basic Requirements.
1.2
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe
Fittings.
a. C500, Standard for Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
b. C504, Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.
c. C509, Standard for Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
d. C515, Standards for Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply
Systems.
e. C550, Standard for Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.
3. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. (MSS):
a. SP-9, Spot Facing for Bronze, Iron and Steel Flanges.
b. SP-70, Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
c. SP-80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
28
A. OS&Y: Outside Screw and Yoke.
29
B. NRS: Non-rising Stem.
30
C. RS: Rising Stem.
31
1.4
SUBMITTALS
32
33
34
35
A. Shop Drawings:
36
37
38
39

165477
City of Dallas
GATE VALVES
15101 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
3
4
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed in the applicable
Articles below are acceptable.
6
7
2.2
VALVES: WATER, STEAM CONDENSATE, STEAM TO 125 PSI, AIR; 2-1/2 IN AND
SMALLER
A. Class 125 bronze gate valve.
B. Comply with MSS SP-80.
10
11
12
13
C. Materials:
1. Body, bonnet, wedge: Bronze.
2. Stem: Silicon bronze.
3. Packing: Aramid fibers with graphite (Kevlar).
14
15
16
D. Design Requirements:
1. 125 psi steam, 200 psi nonshock WOG.
2. Screw in bonnet, non-rising stem, solid wedge.
17
18
19
E. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Nibco.
2. Stockham.
20
2.3
VALVES: STEAM CONDENSATE, STEAM TO 125 PSI, AIR; 3 IN AND LARGER
21
A. Class 125 iron body gate valve.
22
B. Comply with MSS SP-70.
23
24
25
C. Materials:
1. Body, bonnet, wedge: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B.
2. Stem: Brass, bronze, or copper silicon alloy.
26
27
28
1. 125 psi steam to 400 DegF, 200 psi WOG.
2. Bolted bonnet, OS&Y, solid wedge, bronze mounted.
29
30
31
E. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Nibco.
2. Stockham.
32
33
2.4
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
VALVES: WATER (HOT, COLD, HEATING, COOLING, SERVICE, PROCESS,

POTABLE, NON-POTABLE, AND WASTEWATER)
A. Double Disc Gate Valve, 3 to 12 IN:
1. Comply with AWWA C500.
2. Materials:
a. Seating surfaces, stems, stem nut: Bronze.
b. Body, disc: Cast iron.
3. Design requirements:
a. 200 psi working pressure.
b. Buried: NRS, O-ring stem seal, 2 IN operation nut.
c. Exposed: NRS, O-ring stem seal, handwheel .
4. Acceptable manufacturers:
1) American Flow Control.
165477
City of Dallas
GATE VALVES
15101 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
2) Clow.
3) M&H.
4) Mueller.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
B. Resilient Wedge Gate Valves, 2 to 48 IN:

1. Comply with AWWA C509 or AWWA C515; NSF 61
2. Materials:
a. Stem and stem nut: Bronze.
1) Wetted bronze parts in low zinc bronze.
2) Aluminum bronze components: Heat treated per AWWA C504.
b. Body, gate: Cast or ductile iron.
c. Resilient wedge: Fully encapsulated SBR or EPDM rubber wedge.
a. Minimum 250 working pressure. (See Valve Schedule for additional requirements.)
b. Buried: NRS, O-ring stem seal, 2 IN square operating nut (See Valve Schedule)
c. Exposed: NRS, O-ring, stem seal, handwheel (See Valve Schedule)
d. Counter clockwise open rotation.
e. Fusion bonded epoxy coating interior and exterior except stainless steel and bearing
surfaces.
1) Comply with AWWA C550.
2) Wetted bronze parts in low zinc bronze.
3) Aluminum bronze components: Heat treated per AWWA C504.
a. Clow.
b. Mueller.
c. American Flow Control.
d. M & H.
e. J&S.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
C. Double Disc Gate Valves, 14 to 48 IN:

2. Materials:
a. Seating surfaces, stem, stem nut: Bronze.
b. Body, discs: Cast iron.
a. 150 psi working pressure.
b. NRS O-ring stem seal.
c. Provide gear actuator, 20 IN and larger valves.
d. Provide roller tracks and scrapers for horizontal valves size 16 IN and larger.
e. Provide bypass valve sized per AWWA C500.
a. Clow.
b. Mueller.
c. American Flow Control.
d. M & H.
44
2.5
ACCESSORIES
45
46
A. Refer to Drawings and valve schedule for type of actuators.

1. Furnish actuator integral with valve.
47
B. Refer to Specification Section 15100 for actuator requirements.
48
2.6
49
50
FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Provide valves with clear waterways the full diameter of the valve.
165477
City of Dallas
GATE VALVES
15101 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
B. Spot valves in accordance with MSS SP-9.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. See Specification Section 15100.
5
6
B. Where larger buried valves utilize smaller bypass valves, provide a second valve box installed
over the bypass valve operating nut.
7
8
C. Do not install gate valves inverted or with the stems sloped more than 45 degrees from the
upright unless the valve was ordered and manufactured specifically for this orientation.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
GATE VALVES
15101 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15104
BALL VALVES
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
1. Ball valves.
7
8
9
10
11

1.2
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
b. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe
Fittings.
c. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
a. C507, Standard for Ball Valves, 6 IN through 48 IN.
3. Federal Specification (FS):
a. WW-V-35C, Valve, Ball.
a. SP-72, Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service.
b. SP-110, Ball Valves; Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared
Ends.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
28
29
30
31
32
A. Shop Drawings:
process.
3. Test results for AWWA valves.
33
34
35
36

37
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
38
2.1
39
40
41
165477
City of Dallas
BALL VALVES
15104 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.2
METALLIC BALL VALVES 1/4 TO 2 IN DIA
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A. Bronze Body Valves

1. Comply with MSS SP-72 or MSS SP-110.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Apollo.
b. Jamesbury.
c. Watts.
d. Stockham.
e. Nibco.
3. Materials:
a. Body: Bronze.
b. Stem, stem gland nut: Brass.
c. Ball: Brass, chrome plated.
d. Seats, stuffing box ring, and thrust washer: Reinforced Teflon.
e. Handle: Vinyl coated or zinc- or cadmium-plated steel.
4. Design Requirements:
a. Rated for 400 psi and 250 DegF, WOG for threaded end applications and 285 psi WOG
and 150 psi saturated steam service for flanged end applications.
b. Handles showing direction of opening.
c. Stuffing boxes capable of being repacked under pressure and adjustable for wear.
d. Stem with reinforced Teflon stuffing box ring and blowout-proof design.
e. Renewable reinforced Teflon seats.
f. Ball design which does not allow media contact with stem.
g. Balancing stop for all applications.
h. Bodies with mounting pad for applications requiring actuators.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
B. Stainless Body Valves

1. Comply with MSS SP-100.
a. Jamesbury.
b. Watts.
c. Nibco.
3. Materials:
a. Body: Type 316 stainless steel.
b. Stem, stem gland nut: Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Ball: Type 316 stainless steel.
d. Seats, stuffing box ring, and thrust washer: Reinforced Teflon.
e. Handle: Type 316 stainless steel, vinyl coated.
4. Design Requirements:
a. Rated for 400 psi and 250 Deg F, WOG for threaded end applications and 285 psi
WOG and 150 psi saturated steam service for flanged end applications.
b. Handles showing direction of opening.
h. Bodies with mounting pad for applications requiring actuators.
i. Three piece bodies.
49
2.3
50
51
52
METALLIC BALL VALVES 3 IN DIA AND LARGER

A. Stainless Body Valves
1. Full-bore design, Class 150 pressure rating.
165477
City of Dallas
BALL VALVES
15104 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
3.
4.
2.4
a. Jamesbury Series 9000.

b. Equal model by Watts.
c. Equal model by Nibco.
Materials:
a. Body: C8FM stainless steel.
b. Stem, stem gland nut: Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Ball: Type 316 stainless steel.
d. Seats, stuffing box ring, and thrust washer: PTFE.
e. Handle: Type 316 stainless steel, vinyl coated.
Design Requirements:
a. Rated for 400 psi and 250 Deg F, WOG for threaded end applications and 285 psi
WOG and 150 psi saturated steam service for flanged end applications.
b. Manual, electric, or pneumatic operator as shown in the Valve Schedule. For electric
motor operated and pneumatic valves, provide declutch lever and hand wheel to allow
for manual operation. Bodies with mounting pad for actuator. Operators shall be as
specified in Section 15100.
PLASTIC BALL VALVES: 1/2 IN TO 4 IN DIA
24
25
26
27
28
29
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Chemtrol.
2. Spears.
3. ASAHI/America.
4. Hayward.
5. George Fisher.
30
31
32
33
34
B. Materials:
1. Body, stem, ball, handle, end connectors: PVC ASTM D1784-12454B or CPVC ASTM
D1784-23477-B (material to match connecting piping).
2. Ball Seat: Teflon.
3. O-rings: Viton.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
C. Design Requirements:
1. Rated at 150 psi at 75 DegF.
2. Double or "true union" design.
3. Blocks both directions, upstream and downstream.
4. Union nut capable of compensating for seat wear.
5. Body with mounting pad for actuators where required.
6. Capable of being disconnected at downstream end under full line pressure.
42
2.5
ACCESSORIES
43
A. Refer to Drawings and valve schedule for type of actuators.
44
B. Refer to Section 15100 for actuator requirements.
45
2.6
46
A. Shop test ball valves in accordance with applicable standards.
47
B. Furnish record of test.
165477
City of Dallas
BALL VALVES
15104 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3
4
INSTALLATION
3.2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

A. For metallic body ball valve 3 IN diameter and larger with electric motor or pneumatic operators
and in accordance with Section 01650, employ and pay for services of equipment
manufacturer's field service representative(s) to:
1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications.
2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks.
3. Provide test equipment, tools, and instruments necessary to accomplish equipment testing.
4. Conduct startup of equipment and perform operational checks.
5. Provide Owner with a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed
properly, has been started up, and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel.
END OF SECTION
14
15
165477
City of Dallas
BALL VALVES
15104 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15106
CHECK VALVES
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
1. Check valves.
7
8
9
10
11
1.2
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125, and 250).
a. C508, Standard for Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 IN through 24 IN
NPS.
a. SP-71, Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
b. SP-80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
22
23
24
25
A. Shop Drawings:
26
27
28
29

30
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
31
2.1
32
33
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, manufacturers listed under the valve with
types are acceptable.
34
35
2.2
36
37
38
39
40
CHECK VALVES: METAL BODY, 2.5 IN AND SMALLER

A. Class 125 Bronze Swing Check Valves (Fuel Oil, Compressed Air, Water, Wastewater):
a. Nibco T413-Y.
b. Stockham B-319Y.
165477
City of Dallas
CHECK VALVES
15106 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
3.
4.
Materials:
a. Body, bonnet, disc: Bronze.
Design requirements:
a. 125 psi steam to 406 DegF, 200 psi WOG.
b. Horizontal swing, renewable disc.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
B. Class 150 Bronze Lift Check Valves (Fuel Oil, Compressed Air):
a. Stockham B-322B.
b. Powell 158B.
3. Materials:
a. Body, cap, disc holder: Bronze.
b. Disc: Buna-N.
a. 150 psi to 150 DegF, 300 psi WOG.
b. Lift check, union cap.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
C. Class 200 Bronze Swing Check Valves (Steam 125 to 200 psi):
a. Nibco T473B.
b. Stockham B345.
3. Materials:
a. Body, bonnet, disc: Bronze.
b. Horizontal swing, Y-pattern.
c. Renewable disc.
28
2.3
SWING CHECK VALVES: METAL BODY, 3 IN TO 24 IN
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
A. Swing Check Valves (Water, Wastewater, Sludge):

a. Clow.
b. Val-Matic.
c. Golden Anderson.
3. Materials:
a. Body and cover: Cast iron.
b. Seat ring, hinge: Bronze or stainless steel.
c. Disc:
1) 3 to 4 IN: Bronze or cast iron with rubber face.
2) 6 to 24 IN: Cast iron with bronze face.
3) 6 to 24 IN: Cast iron with rubber face.
d. Hinge shaft: Stainless steel.
e. Bearings, connecting hardware: Bronze.
a. 175 psi working pressure (3 to 12 IN).
b. 150 psi working pressure (14 to 24 IN).
c. Furnish with outside weight and lever or lever and spring.
48
49
50
51
B. Class 125 Iron Check Valves (Steam to 125 psi, Fuel Oil):
a. Nibco F-918B.
165477
City of Dallas
CHECK VALVES
15106 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3.
4.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
b. Stockham 373 1/2.

Materials:
a. Iron body, bronze mounted.
b. Seat ring, disc face: Bronze.
c. Hinge pin: Bronze or stainless steel.
d. Connecting hardware: Bronze or plated steel.
b. Bolted cap.
C. Class 250 Iron Check Valves (Steam 125 to 250 psi):

1. Comply with MSS SP-71, Type 1.
a. Nibco F-968-B.
b. Stockham F-947.
3. Materials:
a. Iron body, bronze mounted.
b. Seat ring, disc face: Bronze.
c. Hinge pin: Brass.
d. Connecting hardware: Bronze.
b. Bolted cap.
2.4
CUSHIONED SWING CHECK VALVES: METAL BODY, 2 IN TO 24 IN
24
A. Class 125 or 250 as noted in the Valve Schedule.
25
B. Comply with AWWA C508.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Air:
a. Golden Anderson Figure 250D (Class 125)
b. APCO Series 6000.
c. Val-Matic.
2. Oil:
a. APCO Series 6100.
b. Golden Anderson Figure 250-DOC.
c. Val-Matic.
35
36
37
38
39
40
D. Materials:
1. Body, cover, disc, levers: Cast iron or cast steel.
2. Seat: Bronze or stainless steel.
3. Seat ring: Bronze or rubber (Buna-N).
4. Hinge: Stainless steel.
5. Cushion cylinder: Metallic corrosion resistant material.
41
42
43
44
E. Design Requirements:
1. Seat ring: Replaceable.
2. Hinge: Extend out both sides with lever and weight.
3. Cushion: Air or oil type with adjustable speed control, type as noted in the Valve Schedule.
45
2.5
46
47
48
49
BALL CHECK VALVES PLASTIC BODY, IN TO 4 IN

A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Spears.
2. Chemtrol.
3. Hayward.
165477
City of Dallas
CHECK VALVES
15106 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
4.
5.
3
4
5
6
7
B. Materials:
1. Body: CPVC or PVC to match connecting piping.
2. Disc: CPVC or PVC to match body
3. Disc: O-ring Viton
4. Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel.
8
9
10
11
12
13
George Fisher.
Asahi/America.
C. Design requirements/Options:
1. Pressure rating:
a. 3/4 to 4IN: 150 psig
b. 6IN: 100 psig
c. 8 IN: 70 psig
2.6
BALL CHECK VALVES METAL BODY, 1/4 IN TO 2 IN
14
15
16
1. Apollo.
2. Approved equal.
17
18
19
20
B. Materials:
1. Body: CF8M stainless steel.
2. Ball check: reinforced Teflon
3. Guide and retainer: ASTM A276 Type 316 stainless steel.
21
22
1. 400 psig CWP
23
2.7
RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVES METAL BODY, 2 IN TO 36 IN
24
A. AWWA C508, ANSI B16.1, Class 125 flanges.
25
26
27
28
29
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Val-Matic Surgebuster
2. Pratt RD Series
3. Equal model by APCO
4. Equal model by GA Industries
30
31
32
33
C. Materials:
1. Body and cover: ASTM A536 ductile iron
2. Flapper: Buna-N, steel reinforced
3. Cover bolts: Type 316 stainless steel
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
D. Design:
1. Full body flow design
2. Full size top access port to allow disc removal without removing valve body from
connecting piping.
3. 250 psig working pressure for valves up to 30-inch diameter
4. Fusion bonded epoxy coating on interior and exterior, NSF 61 approved.
5. Non-slam closing characteristics with 35 degree disc stroke.
41
2.8
42
43
44
45
46
RUBBER DUCKBILL STYLE CHECK VALVES

1. Red Valve
2. Cla-Val
3. Proco Products
4. General Rubber Corp.
165477
City of Dallas
CHECK VALVES
15106 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
5.
Approved equal
2
3
4
5
B. Materials:
1. Body: Neoprene
2. Flange Back-up Ring: Galvanized steel
3. Mounting Bands: Type 361 stainless steel
6
7
8
1. Slip-on or flange style as shown on the Drawings.
2. Flange shall meet ANSI B16.5, Class 150.
2.9
FLAP VALVES
10
11
12
13
1. Rodney Hunt Series FV-AR
2. Waterman
3. Approved equal
14
15
16
17
18
B. Materials:
1. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B.
2. Resilient seat: Neoprene or Buna-N
3. Hinge pin: Type 304 stainless steel
4. Hinge arms: Manganese bronze
19
20
21
22
23
1. Single pivot style.
2. Resilient seated.
3. Hinge arms shall have two pivot points, adjustable lower pivot and threaded upper hinge
post.
24
PART 3 - EXECUTION
25
3.1
INSTALLATION
26
A. See Specification Section 15100.
27
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
28
29
165477
City of Dallas
CHECK VALVES
15106 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
CHECK VALVES
15106 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15114
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1. Air release and vacuum relief valves.
2. Automatic control valves:
a. Pressure relief and pressure-sustaining valves.
b. Pressure-reducing valves.
c. Surge arrester valves.
d. Altitude valves.
e. Electric check valves.
f. Float-controlled valves.
3. Pressure-reducing valves (2 IN and smaller).
4. Pressure relief valves (1 IN and smaller).
5. Solenoid valves.
6. Rate of flow control valves.
18
19
20
21
22

23
1.2
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. American Gas Association (AGA).
a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125, and 250).
a. C512, Standard for Air-Release, Air-Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for
Waterworks Service.
b. C550, Standard for Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
35
36
37
38
A. Shop Drawings:
process.
39
40
41
42

165477
City of Dallas
15114 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
3
4
5
6
2.2
AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES

A. General: Conform to AWWA C512.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
B. Alternate 1:
1. Water
a. Air Release Valve:
1) Acceptable manufacturers:
a) APCO 200A (1 IN and larger); APCO 50 (1/2 and IN).
b) GA Industries, Figure 920.
c) Val-Matic.
2) Materials:
a) Body and cover: Cast iron or semi-steel.
b) Float: Stainless steel.
c) Linkage and trim: Bronze or stainless steel.
3) Design requirements:
a) Inlet and orifice size: As shown in the Valve Schedule or shown on the
Drawings.
b) Working pressure: Equal to that or greater than that of connecting piping (See
Section 15060).
c) Provide isolation valve, type as shown on the Drawings.
b. Air and Vacuum Valve:
a) APCO Series 1900.
2) Materials:
a) Body and cover: Cast iron.
c) Seat: Buna-N.
Drawings.
Section 15060).
c) Venting capacity: See Valve Schedule.
d) Provide isolation valve, type as shown on the Drawings.
c. Combination Air Release and Vacuum Valve:
a) APCO Series 1500C.
b) GA Industries, equal model.
c) Val-Matic 1800 VB/38.
2) Materials:
b) Float, linkage and hardware: Stainless steel.
c) Seat: Buna-N.
165477
City of Dallas
15114 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
a)
2.
3.
165477
Inlet and orifice size: As shown in the Valve Schedule or shown on the
Drawings.
Section 15060).
Wastewater:
a. Air Release Valve:
a) GA Industries, Figure 925 or 927.
b) APCO S-400.
c) Val-Matic.
2) Materials:
a) Body and cover: Cast iron or semi-steel.
b) Float and linkage: Stainless steel.
c) Seat: Viton or Buna-N.
Drawings.
Section 15060).
e) Flush accessories:
(1) Inlet shut-off valve.
(2) Blow-off valve.
(3) Clear water inlet valve.
(4) Hose and quick disconnect coupling.
b. Air and Vacuum Valve:
a) APCO Series S-401 or S-404.
c) Val-Matic.
2) Materials:
c) Seat: Buna-N.
Drawings.
Section 15060).
e) Flush accessories:
(1) Blow-off valve.
(2) Clean water inlet valve.
(3) Hose and quick connect coupling.
Combination Air Release and Vacuum Valve:
a. Acceptable manufacturers:
1) APCO S-440.
2) GA Industries, Figure 942.
3) Crispin USL20B.
b. Materials:
City of Dallas
15114 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
c.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
1) Body and cover: Cast iron.

2) Float: Stainless steel.
3) Seat: Buna-N.
Drawings.
Section 15060).
2) Flush accessories:
a) Blow off valve.
b) Clear water inlet valve.
c) Hose and quick connect coupling.
C. Alternate 2:
1. Water:
a. Air Release and Vacuum Valve:
1) Acceptable manufacturer:
a) Vent-O-Mat RBXb Air Release and Vacuum Break Anti-shock air valve.
2) Materials:
a) Top and lower flange: Mild steel, fusion bond epoxy coated.
b) Barrel: 304 stainless steel.
c) Floats: High density polyethylene.
d) Float seats and seals: Nitrile or EPDM.
e) Nozzle seat: Natural rubber.
f) All wetted internal metal parts: 304 stainless steel
1) Inlet and orifice size: As shown in the Valve Schedule or shown on the Drawings.
2) Working pressure: Equal to that or greater than that of connecting piping (See
Section 15060).
3) Venting capacity: See Valve Schedule.
4) Provide isolation valve, type as shown on the Drawings.
5) Provide control for slow release of air through valve to prevent valve slamming
shut from excessive air or water velocity through the valve.
6) End connection:
a) 2 IN and smaller: Threaded.
b) 3 IN and larger: Flanged.
2. Wastewater:
a. Air Release and Vacuum Valve:
1) Acceptable manufacturers
a) Vent-O-Mat RGXb Air Release and Vacuum Break Anti-shock air valve.
2) Materials:
a) Top and lower flange: 304 stainless steel.
b) Barrel: 304 stainless steel.
c) Floats: High density polyethylene.
d) Float seats and seals: Nitrile or EPDM.
e) Nozzle seat: EPDM.
f) All wetted internal metal parts: 304 stainless steel.
g) Flange studs: 304L stainless steel.
1) Inlet and orifice size: As shown in the Valve Schedule or shown on the Drawings.
2) Working pressure: Equal to that or greater than that of connecting piping (See
Section 15060).
3) Venting capacity: See Valve Schedule.
165477
City of Dallas
15114 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4) Provide isolation valve, type as shown on the Drawings.

5) Provide control for slow release of air through valve to prevent valve slamming
shut from excessive air or water velocity through the valve.
6) End connection:
a) 2 IN and smaller: Threaded or flanged.
b) 3 IN and larger: Flanged.
7) Provide isolation valve, type as shown.
2.3
AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
A. Basic Valve:
1. Type:
a. Diaphragm-actuated hydraulically operated.
1) Acceptable manufacturers (Model as shown for specific valve):
a) Cla-Val
b) Singer.
2) Materials:
a) Body: Ductile iron.
b) Seat insert, disc guide, cover bearing: Stainless steel.
c) Disc: Buna-N.
d) Diaphragm: Nylon fabric bonded with synthetic rubber.
3) Design requirements: Do not use diaphragm as seating surface.
b. Differential piston hydraulically operated:
1) Acceptable manufacturer:
a) GA Industries.
2) Materials:
a) Body: Cast iron.
b) Piston, liner and seat crown: Bronze.
c) Piston cup and liner cup: Leather or Buna-N.
3) Design requirements: Valve liner with vee-port openings.
a. See Valve Schedule.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
B. Control:
1. Type:
a. Pressure relief or pressure-sustaining control:
a) Cla-Val, Model 50-01.
b) GA Industries, Figure 4800D (relief), 6700DR (sustaining).
c) Watts ACV 116 Series.
d) Singer, Model 106-RPS
2) Design requirements: Modulate basic valve to maintain constant upstream
pressure by bypassing or relieving excess pressure.
b. Pressure-reducing control:
a) Cla-Val, Model 90-01 or Model 90-01KO as required.
b) GA Industries, Figure 4500D.
d) Singer 106-PR
2) Design requirements: Modulate basic valve to maintain a uniform downstream
pressure as set on control pilots.
3) Provide anti-cavitation trim where noted in the Valve Schedule.
c. Surge arrester control (hydraulic):
165477
City of Dallas
15114 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
d.
e.
f.
g.
165477
a) GA Industries, Figure 500-A-ABCDE.

b) Cal-Val, Model 52-03.
c) Watts ACV 116-S2.
d) Singer, Model 106-RPS-L&H
a) Open basic valve rapidly at predetermined overpressure and close slowly after
restoration of normal pressure.
b) Open rapidly at predetermined under pressure, remain open to dissipate surge
and then slowly close.
c) Open rapidly on electric power failure, remain open to dissipate surge and then
slowly close.
Surge anticipator valve:
a) GA Industries; Figure EA 5001 BD "Surge Sentinal."
b) Singer, Model A106-RPS-L&H-ET
a) Sense down surge during and immediately after pump operation to open valve.
b) Respond to over pressure independent of electronic controls.
c) Open valve on down surge or over pressure and close slowly.
d) Open valve on power failure and close slowly.
e) Control system to be 24 V battery powered, assembled in a NEMA 12
enclosure.
f) Valve to be flanged angle or globe body type as shown in the Valve Schedule ,
150 LB, ASME B16.1.
g) Pipeline parameters: See Valve Schedule.
Altitude control:
a) Cal-Val.
b) GA Industries.
d) Singer Model 106-A-2
a) Modulate basic valve to control high water level in the reservoir.
b) Close valve at high water level and open when water level lowers.
Electric check control:
a) GA Industries, Figure 1730-D.
b) Cal-Val, Model 60-31.
c) Watts ACV 413-21.
d) Singer, Model 106-PG-BPC.
a) Control opening and closing speed of basic valve to minimize surge associated
with starting and stopping of a pump.
b) Design normal opening and closing to be concurrent with pump operation.
c) Provide for a more rapid valve closure in event of power outage.
d) Provide adjustable controlled rates for all opening and closing speeds.
Float controlled:
a) Cal-Val, Model CFI.
b) GA Industries, Figure 5600-D.
c) Watts ACV 110-14.
d) Singer, Model 106-F-5.
a) Float-operated pilot valve to open or close basic valve at a controlled rate.
City of Dallas
15114 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
2.
2.4
b) Connect float to pilot with parallel linkage to provide vertical float travel.
c) Design float to move freely on float rod between adjustable collars to allow
18 IN of float travel before activating pilot valve.
a. Assembles all control features and hardware on basic valve at factory.
b. Use corrosion-resistant metal for all exposed portions of the control.
c. Include with valve control:
1) Stop valves.
2) Strainer.
3) Valves for opening and closing speed control.
4) Pilot valves.
5) Solenoid valves.
6) Pressure switches as necessary to provide control function.
d. Electric components:
1) 110 V, 1 PH.
2) In weatherproof enclosure unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES (2 IN AND SMALLER)
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A. Water Pressure Regulators:

a. Fisher, Type 75A.
b. Watts Series 25AUB-Z3.
2. Materials:
a. Body: Bronze.
b. Strainer body: Bronze.
c. Strainer screen: Stainless steel.
a. Self-contained diaphragm operated.
1) Spring loaded.
2) Field adjustable.
b. Strainer: Y-type on supply.
c. Size as shown in Schedule or size equal to connecting line size with 125 psi inlet and
50 psi outlet pressure.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
B. Air or Gas Pressure Regulators:

a. Air service:
1) Fisher 64 Series.
b. Gas service:
1) Fisher.
a. Self-contained, diaphragm operated.
1) Spring loaded.
2) Field adjustable.
b. Natural or LP gas service, AGA approved.
c. Size for conditions listed in pressure regulator schedule.
46
2.5
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (1 IN AND SMALLER)
47
48
A. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Fisher 98 Series.
49
50
51
B. Materials:
1. Body: Cast iron or stainless steel.
2. Spring: Steel.
165477
City of Dallas
15114 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
3.
4.
5
6
7
8
C. Design Requirements:
1. Pipe relief to discharge at non-hazardous location.
2. See Valve Schedule.
2.6
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Diaphragm :
a. Water neoprene
b. Air stream - 302 stainless steel.
Trim: 416 stainless steel.
SOLENOID VALVES (2.5 IN AND SMALLER)

A. General Service (Air - Water):
1. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Burkert.
b. Approved equal.
2. Materials:
a. Body: Stainless steel.
b. Seat: Buna-N.
c. Insulation: Class F.
a. 110 Vac.
b. Two-way or three-way as noted in the valve schedule, normally closed.
c. Enclosure: Compatible with area classifications indicated on Drawings.
d. Working pressure, air and water: 125 psig.
4. Accessories: Provide strainer on supply.
2.7
RATE OF FLOW CONTROL VALVES
24
25
A. General:
1. Single port, globe body rate of flow control valves.
26
27
28
B. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Fisher, Easy-E Model ED or ES with Type 1008 actuator
2. Approved equal.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
C. Materials:
1. Body: Cast iron or WCC steel.
2. Packing: PTFE, V-type
3. Stem: Type 316 stainless steel.
4. Seat Ring: Type 410 stainless steel.
5. Plug: Type 416 stainless steel.
6. Cage: 17-4PH stainless steel.
7. Operator (Manual):
a. Handwheel: Ductile iron.
b. Yoke: Ductile iron.
c. Nut and screw: Stainless steel.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
1. Valve characteristic: equal percentage
2. Provide with operator type as noted in the Valve Schedule.
3. End connections as scheduled in Section 1500.
4. Cage guided plug.
5. Class 150 rating minimum.
6. Lockable handwheel operator.
165477
City of Dallas
15114 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.8
FABRICATION
2
3
A. Completely shop assemble unit including any interconnecting piping, speed control valves,
control isolation valves and electrical components.
4
5
B. Provide internal epoxy coating suitable for potable water for all iron body valves in accordance
with AWWA C550.
2.9
7
8

A. Shop hydrostatically test to unit test pressure.
2.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
9
10
A. Provide one set of any special tools or wrenches required for operation or maintenance for each
type valve.
11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
12
3.1
INSTALLATION
13
A. General: See Section 11005 and Section 15100.
14
15
16
B. Air Release, Vacuum Relief, and Pressure Relief Valves:

1. Pipe exhaust to a suitable disposal point.
2. Where exhausted to a trapped floor drain, terminate exhaust line 6 IN minimum above floor.
17
C. Float-Operated Valves: Install baffle around float to minimize turbulence adjacent to float.
18
3.2
19
A. Clean, inspect, and operate valve to ensure all parts are operable and valve seats properly.
20
21
B. Check and adjust valves and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
place into operation.
22
23
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15114 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
15114 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15115
WATER CONTROL GATES
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
1. Sluice gates.
7
8
9
10
11
1.2
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. A126, Gray Iron Castings for Valves Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
a. C560, Standard for Cast-Iron Slide Gates.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
A. Shop Drawings:
a. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet the requirements of standards
referenced.
27
28
29
30

31
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
32
2.1
33
34
35
36
37
38
acceptable:
1. Water control gates:
a. Rodney Hunt/Fontaine
b. Waterman
c. Hydrogate
39
40
2.2
41
42
43
SLUICE GATES
A. General:
1. Provide gates, stems, lifts and other appurtenances of size, type, material and construction
shown on the Contract Drawings and specified.
165477
City of Dallas
WATER CONTROL GATES
15115 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Gates shall meet requirements of AWWA C560 as modified per this Specification Section.
B. Material:
1. Seating faces: Bronze, ASTM B139
2. Seals: Provide resilient seals for flush bottom gates of neoprene.
3. Wedges: Bronze, ASTM B584, C86500
4. Anchor bolts, assembly bolts and nuts: Type 316 stainless steel
5. Stems and stem couplings: Type 316 stainless steel
2.3
GATE OPERATORS AND LIFTS
9
10
11
A. General:
1. Provide lifts in accordance with AWWA C561 or as modified in this Specification Section.
2. Provide all lifts with clear butyrate plastic stem cover with Mylar open-close indicator.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B. Manual Operators:
1. Centerline of crank or handwheel approximately 36 IN above operating floor unless
otherwise shown.
2. Maximum effort of 40 LBS on crank or handwheel shall operate gate after unseating gate
from wedges bored upon seating head specified.
3. Provided with adjustable stop collars to prevent over-closing of the slide.
4. Shall be suitable for use with portable electric operator.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
C. Electric Motor Operators (480 V, 3 PH):

1. Provide electric gate operators with local or remote (See Valve Schedule) control station.
2. Furnish electric motor operator consisting of:
a. Motor.
b. Gearing.
c. Handwheel.
d. Limit and torque switches.
e. Lubricants.
f. Heating elements.
g. Wiring.
h. Terminals for motor power and controls.
i. Drive nut.
3. Housing/enclosure:
a. Provide cast iron gear housing and cast iron load bearing enclosure.
b. Non load bearing enclosure and housing: Aluminum or cast iron.
c. NEMA 4X rated.
d. Provide O-ring seals for covers and entries.
e. Terminal and limit switch compartment covers are to be fastened to gear housing by
stainless steel fasteners with capture device to prevent loss.
4. Motors:
a. Provide motors that are totally enclosed, high torque design made expressly for valve
actuator service and capable of operating the valve under full differential pressure for
complete open-close and reverse cycle of travel at least twice in immediate succession
b. Design motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 standards, with Class B insulation, and
to operate successfully at any voltage within 10 percent above or below rated voltage.
c. Provide positive method to ensure motor bearings are permanently lubricated.
d. Provide three (3) thermal switches imbedded in windings:
1) 120 degrees apart.
2) Provide motor shutdown at high temperature.
e. Motor housing:
1) Aluminum or cast iron.
2) Totally enclosed non-ventilated with cooling fins.
f. Provide motor capable of operating in any position.
165477
City of Dallas
WATER CONTROL GATES
15115 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
g. Provide motor sealed from gearcase to allow any mounting position.

h. Provide motors suitable for 480 V, 3 PH, 60 Hz.
5. Gearing:
a. Provide power gearing consisting of heat treated steel helical gears, carburized and
hardened alloy steel worm, and alloy bronze worm gear, all grease or oil bath
lubricated, designed for 100 percent overload, and effectively sealed against entrance of
foreign matter.
b. Provide gearing mechanism constructed to permit field changes of reduction gear ratio.
c. Design actuators so that motor comes up to speed before stem load is encountered in
either opening or closing operation.
d. Limit switch gearings and feedback device reduction gearing:
1) Steel or bronze.
e. Support rotating shafts with anti-friction bearings.
f. Provide separate drive nut/thrust bearing assembly:
1) Mounted to base of actuator.
2) High tensile bronze.
3) Quarter turn actuator: Provide 90 degree mounting intervals.
4) Provide grease fitting on drive assembly.
6. Handwheel:
a. Permanently attached for manual operation.
b. Positive declutch mechanism to engage and disengage handwheel.
c. Handwheel shall not rotate during motor operation.
d. Inoperable motor shall not prevent manual operation.
7. Limit torque and thrust loads in both closing and opening directions by torque limit
switches.
a. Provide torque switches with micrometer adjustment and reference setting indicator.
1) Assure adjustment variation of approximately 40 percent in torque setting.
b. Provide switches having rating of not less than 6 A at 120 Vac and 2.2 A at 115 Vdc.
c. Limit and torque switches shall have totally sealed contacts.
8. Furnish electric actuator with two (2) geared limit switch assemblies with each switch
assembly having four (4) separate limit switches:
a. Assure each limit switch assembly is geared to driving mechanism and is independently
adjustable to trip at any point at and between the fully open and fully closed valve
position.
b. Provide minimum of two (2) normally open contacts and two (2) normally closed
contacts at each end of valve travel.
c. Provide switches with inductive contact rating of not less than 6 A at 120 Vac, 3 A at
240 Vac, 1.5 A at 480 Vac, 2.2 A at 115 Vdc and 1.1 A at 230 Vdc.
d. Limit switches shall be fully adjustable when power is applied to actuator.
9. Provide space heating elements sized to prevent condensation in both motor and geared
limit switch compartment(s).
a. Furnish heating elements rated at 120 Vac with heaters continuously energized.
10. Open-close actuator controls:
a. Provide control assembly with necessary holding relays, reversing starter, control
transformers of sufficient capacity to provide control power, space heating element
power and valve position transmitter.
b. Provide control assembly in an enclosure rated for the defined area classification.
c. Controls for open/close actuator:
1) Provide remote pushbutton station with enclosure rated for area classification
shown on Drawings with:
a) Open pushbutton.
b) Close pushbutton.
c) Stop pushbutton.
d) Remote/local switch.
e) Full open light.
165477
City of Dallas
WATER CONTROL GATES
15115 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
f) Full close light.

g) Open and close relays as required.
2) Provide control enclosure to accept:
a) Remote open/close switches.
3) Provide contacts in control enclosure:
a) Remote/local contact.
b) Full open contact.
c) Full close contact.
4) Wire all components to an internal terminal strip and include mounted wiring
diagram inside enclosure.
11. Additional requirements for modulating valve actuators:
a. Suitable for continuous duty.
b. Proportional position servo-amplifier mounted integral with the actuator control
compartment.
c. Positioning of valve shall be proportional to a 4-20 mA signal input to the position
servo-amplifier when remote control has been selected.
d. Servo-amplifier adjustments shall include zero, span, gain, and dead-band.
e. Provide 4-20 mA signal position control as shown on the Drawings that interfaces with
the position control/position feedback instrumentation wiring to and from RIO or PLC
as shown on the Drawings.
12. Manufacturers:
a. Rotork Series IQ.
b. Limitorque Model L120
24
PART 3 - EXECUTION
25
3.1
26
27

3.2
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
INSTALLATION

A. Employ and pay for services of the equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) fully
commissioned and authorized by manufacturers to do the following:
1. Inspect equipment covered by this Specification Section.
2. Supervise adjustments, calibrations and installation checks and full commissioning.
3. Perform basic operational checks.
4. Provide Owner with a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed
properly, lubricated, and calibrated and is ready for operation by the Owner.
3.3
36
37
SCHEDULE
A. The following is a schedule of the water control gates required:
Tag No.
SG-1000-1,
SG-1000-2
SIZE
WXH
(IN)
48x48
OPERATING
FLOOR
ELEVATION
402.00
GATE
INVERT
ELEVATION
MAX
SEATING /
UNSEATING
HEAD (FT)
375.00
FRAME/GATE/
OPENING TYPE
OPERATOR
TYPE
Face-mounted, non
self-contained w/Ftype wall thimble;
floor pedestal
w/rising stem;
submerged opening
Electric
Open/Close
Local control
station
38
END OF SECTION
40
165477
City of Dallas
WATER CONTROL GATES
15115 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15120
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
5
6
A. The General Requirements for Mechanical Work are intended to be complementary to the General
Requirements of the Construction Contract.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
B. Work Included: Provide complete mechanical systems where shown on the drawings, as specified
herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily
limited to the following summary of work:
1. The monitoring room area of the pump station will be air-conditioned and heated by a DX
heat pump air handler with electric heater and a remote heat pump condensing unit. A roof
mounted exhaust fan is required for the restrooms. All ductwork, dampers, grilles, diffusers,
controls, etc. as outlined within the construction documents are within the contractors scope
of work.
2. The electrical room of the pump station will utilize (2) DX air handlers without electric
heaters and remote condensing units for cooling only. Ductwork is manifolded together with
motorized dampers normally closed. Upon activation of each air handling unit, the motorized
damper shall open. Secondary condensate drain pans will be required to ensure keeping
condensate drain out of electrical equipment.
3. The switchgear room will utilize (1) DX air handler without electric heater and remote
condensing unit for cooling only. Ductwork is utilized to provide even air distribution in the
area. Secondary condensate drain pans will be required to ensure keeping condensate drain out
of electrical equipment.
4. The control room is air conditioned and heated by (1) ductless split heat pump system.
5. The pump room will be ventilated by (4) inline centrifugal fans located in the attic area. The
make-up air will be introduced in the space through (8) wall mounted air intake louvers with
motorized dampers. Upon activation of any exhaust fans, all motorized dampers shall open.
(13) electric space heaters will be utilized for anti-freeze heating.
6. The second floor storage area will utilize (1) electric space heater for anti-freeze heating. The
space will also be utilize (1) roof mounted exhaust fan also serving the elevator room exhaust
and the first floor janitors closet.
7. The switch gear room basement space will utilize (1) inline centrifugal exhaust fan to ventilate
the area.
8. The electrical room basement and the pump room basement utilize (5) inline centrifugal fans
for air circulations.
9. The attic area is ventilated with one propeller type wall mounted exhaust fan. The make-up air
will be through air intake louvers with motorized dampers.
10. Test & Balance will be provided by the Owner and paid by the Owner in accordance with spec
15950. Contractor responsibilities to support the Test & Balance effort are contained in spec
15950.
11. Provide new plumbing fixtures and piping as indicated on drawings.
12. Provide hose bibs as indicated on drawings including (1) fire hose type connection for deck
wash-down and (1) on lower roof for condensing unit coil cleaning.
13. Other items and services required to complete the systems.
45
1.2
46
47
48
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS

A. Use adequate numbers killed workers that are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary
crafts and are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for
proper performance of the work of this Section.
165477
City of Dallas
15120 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
B. Without additional cost to the Architect/Engineer/Owner, provide such other labor and materials as
are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of
governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated
labor are called for elsewhere in these contract documents.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
C. Codes: Perform all work in accordance with the latest edition of the following codes:
1. State and city building, fire, plumbing, and mechanical codes
2. National Electrical Code (NEC)
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
4. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
5. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS)
6. Texas State Energy Code
7. All authorities having jurisdiction
13
14
D. Where conflicts occur between drawings, specifications, and code requirements, the most stringent
requirement shall take precedence.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
E. Standards: The specifications and standards of the following organizations are by reference made
a part of these specifications. All work, unless otherwise indicated, shall comply with the
requirements and recommendations wherever applicable:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
31
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.3
32
33
34
35
American Gas Association (AGA)

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
American Society of Refrigeration, Heating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL)
National Bureau of Standards (NBS)
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA)
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. The requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) Act are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work shall
comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable.
1.4
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
36
A. All Other Sections of Divisions 15 and 16.
37
38
B. All other divisions of the contract documents. Refer to each division's specifications and drawings
for all requirements.
39
1.5
SUBMITTALS
40
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1.
41
B. Provide Specifications per Division 1 for all submitted alternate equipment.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Product Data: Submit the following:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 15.
2. Manufacturers specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified
requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that
the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that
do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in the
following paragraph.
165477
City of Dallas
15120 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with
enough detail so that the Architect/Engineer/ Owner can easily determine that the item
complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed
item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and pictures and diagrams to
support and clarify. Organize in a clear and concise format. All substitutions shall be
approved in writing by Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineers decision shall be final.
Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the review of submittals and each re-submittal.
Compliance with the Contract documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
Items on equipment that are were not accepted by the Architect/Engineer in writing as an
approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with the contract documents at the
Contractor's expense.
Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by the
Architect/Engineer, shall become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation
procedures used on the work.
Sign the submittal as an indication of compliance with the contract documents. Any
deviations from the contract documents, shall be indicated on the submittal prior to signing.
Any deviations not indicated shall be cause for rejection and removal of the non-complying
equipment at the Contractors expense.
C. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this section include the following:
1. Piping and Accessories Materials
a. Clearly marked up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the specifications for:
1.
Piping material proposed for each system.
2.
Valves, cocks, and specialties.
3.
Test and measuring devices.
4.
Flexible connectors for piping.
5.
Flanges.
b. 1/8 scale (minimum) sanitary sewer, domestic hot and cold water, natural gas, and
refrigerant piping shop drawings showing coordinated piping routing and arrangements
with all equipment, accessories and system expansion and contraction compensation
methods.
2. Vibration Isolation and Sound Control Materials
a. Submit shop drawings showing the structural design and details of inertia bases, steel
beam bases, and other custom-fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's submitted
data.
b. Furnish layouts of templates to be furnished to fabricators of equipment bases,
foundations, and other support systems, as needed for coordination of vibration isolation
units with other work.
c. Submit shop drawings indicating the scope of vibration isolation work, locations of units
and flexible connections. Include support isolation points for piping, air handling units,
inertia bases, etc.
d. Include schedule of isolation units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, the
weight supported and resulting deflection of each unit.
e. For spring isolation units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid-compression
height, operating height, fatigue characteristics and ratio of horizontal to vertical
stiffness.
f. For spring-and-pad type isolation units, show the basis of spring rate selection for the
range of loading weights.
3. Mechanical Identification Materials
a. Clearly marked-up product literature or samples showing compliance with specified
materials for:
1.
Valve tagging.
2.
Pipe marking.
3.
Equipment marking.
4. Insulation
165477
City of Dallas
15120 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Manufacturer's certified data on thermal performance.

Details, when required, of methods to be used in providing for unusual piping expansion
and contraction.
c. Manufacturer's product data and application information on heat tracing system including
all electrical requirements.
d. Manufacturer's data on any alternate insulation material of reduced thickness, including
pre-insulated pipe.
e. Manufacturer's data on all jacketing materials, sealants, and fasteners.
5. Refrigeration
a. Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled
values and specifications for:
1.
D-X condensing units & cooling coils.
2.
Heat pump condensing units & indoor coils.
b. Provide all electrical characteristics.
6. Air Distribution Materials
a. Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled
values and specifications for:
1.
Air devices.
2.
scale ductwork shop drawings for all systems showing equipment locations,
detailed data such as bottom of duct elevations, airstream sizes, all duct
accessories, and duct construction details showing compliance with SMACNA
requirements for the specified duct pressure of each system.
7. Controls and Instrumentation
a. Provide detailed shop drawings showing all components, wiring, and accessories.
b. Provide comprehensive sequence of operation description of each control system.
c. Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the
specifications for all products proposed.
33
34
35
36
37
38
D. Resubmittals of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing
subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's
disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the
Contractor.
Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their
current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing,
and photocopies at
direct cost plus fifteen percent (15%).
39
40
41
42
E. Shop Drawings: Upon written request of the Contractor, the Architect/Engineer will provide
directly to the Contractor electronic backgrounds of drawings required to produce shop
drawings. The requirements to secure electronic files for shop drawing purposes are the same as
for record
drawing purposes. See 15010, Paragraph 1.13.H.2.
43
a.
b.
8.
9.
1.6
d. Provide all electrical characteristics of components.

Record Documents: Reference the requirements detailed in this section.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Reference the requirements detailed in this section.
SUBSTITUTIONS
44
45
46
A. The use of manufacturers' names and catalog numbers followed by the phrase "or equal" is
generally used to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide
a dimensional reference for construction documents that are drawn to scale.
47
48
49
50
51
52
B. Submittals for equal items shall, where applicable, include the following data that are not
necessarily required for specified items:
1. Performance characteristics.
2. Materials
3. Finish
4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards.
165477
City of Dallas
15120 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
5.
6.
Manufacturers specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified
requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that
the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that
do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in Paragraph
6 below.
Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with
enough detail so that the Architect/ Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item
complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed
item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and pictures and diagrams to
support and clarify. Include shop drawings for all piping and ductwork equipment per
Paragraph 1.5 Submittals. Organize in a clear and concise format.
12
13
14
15
16
C. Submittals of "equal" components or systems may be rejected if:

1. The material or equipment would necessitate the alteration of any portion of the mechanical,
electrical, architectural or structural design.
2. Dimensions vary from the specified material or equipment in such a manner that accessibility
or clearances are impaired or the work of other trades is adversely affected.
17
18
19
20
21
D. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment as or equal must be submitted ten (10) days
prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, such substitutions will
not be permitted. Only Prime Bidders are allowed to make proposals for substitutions.
Manufacturers, distributors, and sub-contractors shall not make proposals to the
Architect/Engineer for
substitutions.
22
23
24
25
26
E. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Architect/ Engineer. Should a
substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise
unsatisfactory for the service intended, and within the guarantee period, replace this material or
equipment with material or equipment specified, at no additional cost to the
Architect/Engineer/Owner, and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.
27
28
29
F.
30
1.7
Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide a written
performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the
specified effects and meet the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
ORDINANCES, PERMITS, METERS, UTILITIES, AND ROYALTIES
31
32
33
34
A. Procure all permits and licenses necessary for completion of this project and pay all lawful fees
required and necessary pursuant in obtaining said permits and licenses. All required certificates
of approvals and inspections by local governing and regulating authorities shall be obtained and
paid for by the Contractor.
35
36
B. Pay all fees required for the connection of water, gas and sewer to utility mains, and any meter fees
if required.
37
38
39
C. Pay any royalty payments required or fees for the use of patented equipment or systems. Defend
all law suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold the Owner and
Architect/Engineer harmless from loss as a result of said suits or claims.
40
1.8
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
COMPATIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT
A. Assume full responsibility for satisfactory operation of all component parts of the mechanical
systems to assure compatibility of all equipment and performance of the integrated systems in
accordance with the requirements of the specifications. Should the Contractor consider any part
of the specifications or drawings as rendering his acceptance of such responsibility impossible,
prohibitive, or restrictive, he shall notify the Architect/Engineer before submitting his bid,
and the bid shall be accompanied by a written statement of any objections or exceptions to the
specifications and drawings.
165477
City of Dallas
15120 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.9
EXISTING UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION
2
3
4
A. Verify the location and capacity of existing utility services pertaining to work of Division 15.
Relocate existing utilities unearthed by excavation as directed by the utility service companies
affected.
5
6
B. Temporary Services for Construction

1. Provide temporary services in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
1.10 JOBSITE CONDITIONS
8
9
10
11
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Include
required work to correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of all
Division 15 Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1.11 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A. Perform coordination work in strict accordance with provisions of these specifications and the
following:
1. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate interface with all
work.
2. Where ducts, pipes other mechanical items are shown in conflict with locations of structural
members and other equipment, include labor and materials required for extensions, offsets and
supports to clear the encroachment.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, provide all supplementary or miscellaneous
items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete
installation
4. Coordinate accepted equipment changes from those scheduled or specified with other trades
affected. Additional compensation to other trades for equipment changes is the responsibility
of the Contractor making the change.
25
26
27
28
29
B. Mechanical Drawings are diagrammatic. Follow the drawings as closely as actual construction and
work of other trades will permit. Duct and piping arrangement have been designed for maximum
economy consistent with good practice and other considerations. Install the systems arranged
as
shown on the drawings, except as otherwise approved in advance by the Architect/Engineer.
30
31
32
33
C. Data indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications are as exact as could be secured, but
their absolute accuracy is not warranted. The exact locations, distances, levels, and other
conditions will be governed by actual construction and the Drawings and Specifications should
be used only for guidance in such regard.
34
35
36
37
38
D. Where items such as diffusers, thermostats, switches, and control panels are not specifically
located on the Drawings, provide an RFI to the Architect/Engineer, and locate as determined in
the field by the Architect/Engineer. Where such items are installed without such specific
direction,
relocate as directed by the Architect/Engineer, and at no additional cost to the
Architect/Engineer/Owner.
39
40
41
E. Verify all dimensions and distances. No additional compensation will be allowed because of
differences between work shown on the Drawings and actual dimensions and distances at the
jobsite.
42
1.12 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
43
44
45
46
47
A. The drawings show the arrangements of work. Should project conditions necessitate
rearrangement, or if the materials or equipment can be installed to a better advantage in a
different manner, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five copies of Drawings
of the
proposed arrangement for the Architect/Engineers review. Allow a minimum of ten
(10) working days for review.
165477
City of Dallas
15120 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
B. Should the Contractor propose to install equipment requiring space conditions other than those
shown, or rearrange the equipment, he shall assume responsibility for the rearrangement of the
space and shall have the Architect/Engineer review the change before proceeding with the work.
The request for such changes shall be accompanied by contractor-generated detailed shop
drawings of the space in question. Identify monetary credits proposed or other benefits of the
change. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review.
7
8
9
C. Properly locate and size all slots, holes, and openings in the building structure pertaining to the
work and for the correct location of pipe sleeves, duct sleeves, fire dampers, etc., as applicable to
the work.
10
1.13 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
11
12
A. Provide the record documents associated with the work of Division 15 in strict accordance with the
provisions of these specifications.
13
14
15
16
B. Throughout progress of the Division 15 Work, maintain an accurate record of changes in the
Contract Documents that apply to work of Division 15. Changes shall include all addendums
issued during bidding. Maintain an accurate record of the location of mechanical service lines
and outlets and all outside utilities.
17
18
19
20
C. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the
Contractor's staff as approved by the Architect/Engineer. Submit in writing at the pre-construction
conference the name and credentials of the person responsible for record mark-ups and
maintenance.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
D. Accuracy of Records
1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper
entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of drawings and other documents where
such entry is required to show the change properly. Match the symbology and format of the
base documents.
2. Accuracy of records shall be such that a future verification of items shown in the Contract
Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record
Documents.
29
30
31
E. Maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss
and damage until completion of the work and transfer of all recorded data to the final Project
Record Documents.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
F.
43
44
45
46
47
48
G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts

1. In some cases on the drawings, arrangements of ductwork and piping and similar items are
shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Determine final
physical arrangement subject to the Architect/Engineer's approval. However, design of future
modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical layout of
items that are shown only schematically on the drawings.
Making Entries on Drawings

1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by
graphic line and note as required.
2. Date all entries.
3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected.
4.
5.
6.
7.
165477
In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes.
Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred.
Maintain the base drawing format and use the same symbology.
Convert field mark-ups to finished CADD record drawings when required in this section.
City of Dallas
15120 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Show on the job set of record drawings, by dimension accurate to within one inch, the
centerline of each run of items such as all sleeves and piping, etc., below grade, in walls, or in
the concrete slab. A surface mounted device indicates the exact location:
a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "Sanitary Sewer" and the like.
b. Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item "under slab," "in ceiling
plenum," "exposed," and the like.
c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the
specifications.
H. Final Project Record Documents

1. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information
regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification
of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and
examination.
2. Provide CADD electronic files in .dwg Format using AutoCAD Release 2000 (or higher)
software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineers
standard fee of $250 plus applicable sales tax for a set-up charge and $25 per drawing plus
applicable sales tax for copies of such files, the Engineer will provide AutoCAD Release 2004
electronic files of base Contract Drawings in .dwg format on electronic compact discs (CD).
The Engineer will also provide a list of drawing layers and names that shall be maintained.
3. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements.
4. Provide completed record drawings on electronic CD and one Mylar film reproducible of each
drawing.
1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
25
26
27
A. Well before substantial completion, submit two copies of a preliminary draft of the proposed
manual(s) to the Architect/Engineer for review and comments. Allow a minimum of ten (10)
working days for review.
28
29
B. Submit specified number copies of the approved manual to the Architect/Engineer prior to
indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel.
30
C. Prepare in accordance with the following standards:

Format:
Size:
Paper:
Text:
Drawings:
8" x 11"
White bond, at least 20 lb. weight
Neatly written or printed
11" in height preferable; bind in with text; foldouts acceptable; larger
drawings are acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a
drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text.
Flysheets:
Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets

briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in
color.
Binding:
Use heavy-duty plastic or fiberboard covers with binding mechanism

concealed inside the manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; all
binding is subject to the Architect/ Engineer's approval.
31
32
Measurements:
165477
Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as

feet-and-inches, lbs, and cfm. Where items may be expected to be
City of Dallas
15120 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae,

provide additional measurements in the "International System of
Units" (SI).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the
Architect/Engineer, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following
information:
1. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
a. Name and Address of Work
b. Name of Contractor
c. General subject of this manual
d. Space for approval signature of the Architect/Engineer and approval date.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
E. Contents: Include at least the following:

1. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual, giving immediate information as to
location within the manual of all emergency information regarding the installation.
2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment provided
including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly.
3. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment.
4. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name and address of nearest
vendor, and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures.
5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued.
6. Manufacturers bulletins, drawings, and descriptive data, clearly indicating the precise items
included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, all manufacturers'
data with which this installation is not concerned.
7. Such other data as required in other sections of these specifications.
1.15 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS
24
25
A. Provide equipment foundations associated with the work in accordance with the provisions of these
specifications.
26
27
28
29
30
B. Provide concrete bases for all pad or floor mounted equipment. Bases shall be four inches (4")
high above finished floors or grades (unless otherwise noted) and shall protrude two inches (2")
beyond all sides of equipment and shall have exposed chamfered edges. Construct bases from
ready-mixed hardrock concrete, ASTM C94, reinforced with #3 rebar, ASTM A615, Grade 40, at
18" on center each way.
31
32
C. Field verify exact location of outdoor pad mounted equipment with the Architect/ Engineer. Supply
necessary fill and grade site to provide natural drainage away from equipment.
33
1.16 PAINTING
34
35
36
37
38
A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the finish be
damaged in transit or during the installation, it shall be finished to match appearance of original
finish. All work shall be subject to approval by Architect/Engineer.
1.17 TESTING AND INSPECTION
39
40
A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals from the
Architect/Engineer and governmental agencies having jurisdiction
41
42
43
44
45
B. Make written notice to the Architect/Engineer, adequately in advance, of each of the following
stages of construction:
1. When all rough-in is complete, but not covered.
2. As specified in all Division 15 sections.
3. At the completion of the work of Division 15.
165477
City of Dallas
15120 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with the specified requirements, remove the
noncomplying items from the job site and replace them with items complying with the specified
requirements at no additional cost to the Architect/Engineer/Owner. This shall be performed
within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance.
1.18 WARRANTY
6
7
8
9
A. Warranty all equipment and workmanship for a period of one year after date of substantial
completion or beneficial occupancy, whichever comes first, and replace or repair any faulty
equipment or installation at no cost to the Architect/Engineer/Owner for such service during this
period, all in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
10
11
B. Provide full material warranty on all compressors for a period of five years after date of warranty
start.
12
13
C. This warranty shall not void specific warranties issued by manufacturers for greater periods of
time. Nor shall it void any rights guaranteed to the Owner by law.
14
15
D. Warranties shall be in writing in a form satisfactory to the Owner, and shall be delivered to the
Owner before final payment is made.
16
1.19 PROJECT COMPLETION
17
18
19
A. Upon completion of the work of Division 15, thoroughly clean all exposed portions of the
mechanical installation, removing all traces of soil, labels, grease, oil, and other foreign material,
and using only the type cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the item being cleaned.
20
END OF SECTION
21
22
165477
City of Dallas
15120 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15150
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Mechanical sleeve seals.
5. Sleeves.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Grout.
8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
9. Painting and finishing.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
19
20
21
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
22
23
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
24
25
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
26
27
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
28
29
30
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
31
32
33
F. Industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
34
1.4
SUBMITTALS
35
36
37
38
39
A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons.
40
B. Reference specification Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical Systems.
41
1.5
165477
QUALITY ASSURANCE
City of Dallas
15150 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
A. See specification Section 15010, paragraph 1.2.
2
3
B. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or
exceed minimum requirements as specified.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
5
6
7
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Ship, handle, and unload all equipment and materials according to manufacturers instructions.
9
10
11
C. Store and protect all equipment and materials from damage until installation. Factory shipping
covers must remain in place until installation. Replace all equipment or materials damaged prior
to installation.
12
13
D. Contractor is responsible for acceptance, storage, and handling at the site of all Owner provided
equipment and materials.
14
1.7
COORDINATION
15
16
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
17
18
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
19
20
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces.
21
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
22
2.1
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
23
24
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
25
B. Pipe Threads: ASMEB1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
26
2.2
JOINING MATERIALS
27
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
36
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
37
38
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
39
40
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
165477
City of Dallas
15150 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BcuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
4
5
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.3
TRANSITION FITTINGS
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.
d. JCM Industries.
e. Smith-Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.
4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173
with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal
band on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Fernco, Inc.
c. Mission Rubber Company.
d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.
27
2.4
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
28
29
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
30
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
31
32
33
34
35
36
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at 180 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
c. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
37
38
39
40
41
42
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure as applicable to suit system pressures.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Epco Sales, Inc.
c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
43
44
45
46
47
48
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, fullface- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Central Plastics Company.
165477
City of Dallas
15150 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
2.
4
5
6
7
8
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig min. working pressure at 225 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Perfection Corp.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Victaulic Co. of America.
2.5
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts having 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Metraflex Co.
c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required
to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.6
SLEEVES
28
29
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
30
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
31
32
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
33
34
35
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
36
2.7
ESCUTCHEONS
37
38
39
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
40
41
B. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
42
43
C. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, set screw or spring
clips, and chrome-plated finish.
44
D. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
45
2.8
165477
GROUT
City of Dallas
15150 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous,
and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
8
9
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying
piping systems.
10
11
12
13
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved.
14
15
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
16
17
18
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
19
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
20
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
21
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
22
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
23
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
24
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
25
26
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
27
L. Install escutcheons for piping with fittings with penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
28
29
30
31
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
slabs.
1. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required
for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure
plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
39
40
O. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
41
P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
165477
City of Dallas
15150 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.
3.2
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
4
5
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
8
9
10
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
11
12
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
20
21
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
22
23
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
24
3.3
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.4
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
35
36
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
37
38
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
39
40
41
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
42
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
43
3.5
165477
PAINTING
City of Dallas
15150 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
A. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.6
GROUTING
4
5
A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as applicable for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
10
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
11
G. Place grout around anchors.
12
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION
13
14
165477
City of Dallas
15150 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
15150 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15160
1
2
3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
6
7
8
A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply
to the Work in this Section.
1.2
9
10
11
RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and
drawings for all requirements.
1.3
SCOPE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
A. Provide items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system
in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated
or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are
diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may be
required to be offset, lowered, or raised as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site.
This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping
systems.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
B. Work Included:
1. Refer to work included in Section 15400, Plumbing for work under that section, specified
herein.
a. Sanitary drain, waste, Roof Drain, and vent piping.
b. Domestic hot and cold water piping.
c. Equipment drain piping.
d. Process cooling water supply piping.
2. Mechanical Work:
a. Refrigerant piping and accessories.
28
29
30
C. Submittals: Provide submittals per Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical
Systems.
1. Show grooved mechanical products on submittals and drawings.
31
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
32
33
34
35
exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and
AWWA and all other applicable standards.
36
37
C. Furnish copies of each welder's certification documents to the Architect prior to them
performing work.
38
39
40
41
D. A single manufacturer provides all grooved joint couplings and fittings. The same manufacturer
of the grooved components provides the grooving tools.
165477
City of Dallas
15160 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A. Sanitary Drain, Waste, Roof Drain, and Vent Piping:

1. Piping underground: service weight hub and spigot cast iron pipe, extending to above the
floor. Provide positive double seal elastomeric compression joints.
2. Piping above grade, 1 1/2" or smaller and vent piping, may be threaded galvanized schedule
40 steel or DWV copper. Provide service weight cast iron hub and spigot or "No Hub" for
all 2 and larger pipe.
3. Provide galvanized cast iron drainage fittings for threaded piping, cast iron soil fittings for
hub and spigot piping and "No Hub" piping, DWV copper for DWV copper piping.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
B. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping:

1. Piping below grade: 2 1/2" and smaller - provide Type K copper with wrought copper
fittings or copper grooved mechanical couplings and standard grooved fittings, Victaulic
Style 606 or equivalent; piping 3" and larger - provide cast iron AWWA class 150 water
main with mechanical joint fittings, Victaulic Style 31 or equivalent.
2. Piping above grade: 2-1/2 and smaller - provide Type L copper with wrought copper
fittings or copper grooved mechanical couplings and standard grooved fittings, Victaulic
Style 606 or equivalent; piping 3 and larger - provide schedule 40 galvanized pipe with
threaded or grooved couplings and fittings. Where pipe sizes reduce, do not use sharp edged
orifice type reducers in grooved pipe systems.
3. Provide lead-free solder joints for all fittings.
22
23
24
25
C. Equipment Drain Piping:

1. Provide Type L hard drawn copper, not less than connection size, for all drain piping from
air handling units. Trap Condensate drains. Extend all equipment drain piping to a suitable
drain.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
D. Refrigerant Piping:
1. Provide seamless ACR copper tubing, Type L, hard drawn with wrought or bronze solder
joint fittings.
2. For above ground installation of suction line exterior to building, provide closed-cell
urethane insulation with aluminum shield.
3. For below grade installation of suction line, provide closed-cell urethane insulation with
hard-shell vapor barrier coating guaranteed to sustain soil and moisture elements for 20
years. Provide submittal for approval to meet requirements.
34
2.2
VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES
35
36
A. Materials: Bronze or cast iron per local codes with screwed or flanged ends for steel pipe and
solder ends for copper pipe.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
B. Valve Location:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a valve on each branch serving a restroom.
2. Provide a valve on inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment as per manufacturers
recommendations.
3. Provide valves to isolate individual or group of fixtures and equipment on branch runouts
from piping mains. This is in addition to valves at each fixture and equipment.
4. Provide interior shut-off and drain valves on each branch to wall hydrant and hose bibb.
5. Provide valves at the base of domestic water pipe risers.
6. Provide valves as indicated and where required to adequately service parts of systems and
equipment.
47
C. Gate Valves: Rated for 200 PSIG WOG:
165477
City of Dallas
15160 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
1.
2.
4
5
6
2-1/2" and below Nibco T-113 for steel pipe, and Nibco S-113 for copper pipe, or
equivalent.
3 and above Nibco F-619 or equivalent.
D. Ball Valves: Rated for 200 psig WOG:

1. 2-1/2" and below Nibco T-595-Y for steel pipe and Nibco S-595-Y for copper pipe or
equivalent.
7
8
9
10
11
E. Check Valves (Domestic Water System)

1. Swing check valve with bronze or composition disc rated for 200 psig WOG.
2. 2 1/2" and below Nibco T-413-B or equivalent.
3. 3" and above Nibco F-918-B, Victaulic Series 716 for IPS, Victaulic Series 317 for
AWWA, or equivalent.
12
13
14
15
16
F.
17
18
G. Water Balancing Cocks:

1. Provide cocks with memory stop, Dezurik 100 or equivalent.
19
20
21
22
23
H. Backflow Preventer:
1. RPZ Backflow Preventer assembly consisting of two independently operating, spring loaded
check valves, two gate valves, and four test cocks for field-testing, Wilkins Model 975 or
equivalent.
2. Provide reduced pressure type if required by local codes.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
I.
Water Hammer Arrestors:

1. Provide arrestors sized in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201, UPC-2003, ANSI/ASSE
1010-1966 Standard, and IPC-2003, permanently sealed, pre-charged to 60 PSIG, suitable
for temperatures up to 250 Deg F and maximum 350 PSIG working pressure: Model 650 or
660 Series as manufactured by Sioux Chief Mfg. Co. or equivalent.
a. Provide at each branch run-off to fixtures or as applicable by manufacturer and PDI
Standard WH-201.
b. For laundry applications, Series 660-H or equivalent.
32
33
34
35
36
37
J.
Butterfly Valves:
1. Butterfly valves may be used above 3 in lieu of gate valves on chilled water and hot water
heating lines rated to 150 psig: 3" 12" Crane 21 BRZ (21 BRB under 150 Deg. F),
Victaulic Vic-300 Masterseal, or Victaulic Series 608 for copper; 14" 24" Crane 22F BRZ
(22F BRB under 150 Deg. F), Victaulic Series W709 AGS valve; or equivalent as
manufactured by Jenkins, Centerline, or Victaulic.
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
K. Refrigerant Valves:
1. Globe and Angle Valves: Forged brass or bronze alloy with packed stem and seal cap.
2. Check Valves: Springloaded, forged brass or bronze alloy body with solder connections.
3. Relief Valves: Forged brass bodies with nonferrous corrosion resistant internal working
parts. Provide valves in accordance with ANSI B9.1.
4. Solenoid Valves: Two position, direct acting or pilot operated type, UL listed, with manual
opening stem and constructed for servicing without removal from lines. Provide valves
with coil housing, stainless steel enclosing tube, replaceable seat, and proper inlet and outlet
connections for the type of pipe containing the valve.
47
L. Dielectric Unions and Waterway Fittings:
165477
Check Valves: Rated for 200 psig OUG:

1. 2 and below Nibco T-413 for steel pipe and Nibco S-413 for copper pipe or equivalent.
2. 2 and above Nibco F-918 or equivalent. At Contractors option, spring assisted single
disc check valve factory tested to 300 psi. Install in accordance with manufacturers
recommendation.
City of Dallas
15160 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
1.
Provide dielectric unions or waterway fittings at all piping connections (except to valves)
between dissimilar metals, Watts No. 3000 union, Victaulic Style 47 waterway fitting, or
equivalent.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M. Trap Primers:
1. Trap primer valve, 1/2 inch bronze, with vacuum breaker, solder or threaded connections.
a. "Prime-Rite" PR-500 as manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. or
equivalent.
b. Where primer serves multiple drains use distribution units, use Model DU Series.
c. Provide trap primers on all floor drains, except shower drains. Verify with authority
having jurisdiction.
11
12
13
N. Backwater Valves:
1. Bronze swing check assembly, offset type, with sheargate and removable handle, Josam
67300 Series or equivalent.
14
15
16
O. Air Chambers:
1. Provide field fabricated 18 long air chambers at all fixtures and as shown on drawings.
Provide air chambers of the same size and material as the connecting pipe.
17
2.3
18
19
20
TEST AND MEASURING DEVICES

A. Provide test and measuring devices as per refrigeration and air conditioning equipment
manufacturers recommendations.
2.4
FLANGES AND GROOVED COMPONENTS
21
22
A. Flanges: 150 pound, A.S.A. forged steel, raised face, weld neck or slip-on. Weld slip-on
flanges both inside and outside.
23
24
25
B. Flange adapters for use with grooved and pipe, fittings, and valves: flat face, ASTM A536
ductile iron, with pressure responsive EPDM gasket, suitable for direct connection to ANSI
Class 125 or Class 150 flanged components. Victaulic Style 741 or equivalent.
26
27
28
29
30
31
C. Grooved mechanical components: provide with gaskets of pressure-responsive synthetic rubber

and grade to suit intended service, and conforming to ASTM D-2000. Gaskets used for potable
water applications shall be UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF-61 for hot and cold
potable water service. Use zero-flex rigid coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt
pads to provide system rigidity, support, and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1, B31.9,
and NFPA 13.
32
2.5
33
34
35
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS

A. Corrugated inner tube of Type 321 stainless steel with outer braided cover of Type 304 stainless
steel, flanged, of the following minimum overall lengths:
PIPE SIZE
MINIMUM LENGTH
5" and less
18"
6" and 8"
22"
36
37
B. Minimum working pressure at 70F shall be 200 psig.
38
C. Flexible connectors shall be Metraflex Model MLP or equivalent.
39
40
41
D. Three flexible type grooved joint couplings may be used in lieu of a flexible connector at
equipment connections for vibration attenuation and stress relief. Place couplings in close
proximity to the source of the vibration. Victaulic Style 77 or equivalent.
165477
City of Dallas
15160 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3
4
5
6
GENERAL
A. Perform all work by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. Install all materials and
equipment in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best
practices of the trade in conformance with the contract documents.
3.2
EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPING
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
A. Excavation: Excavate trenching for underground piping to the required depth to insure sufficient
cover over the pipe
1. Cut the bottom of the trench or excavation to uniform grade so that pipe will bear on
undisturbed soil.
2. Should rock be encountered, excavate 6" below pipe, fill with pea gravel, and tamp well.
3. Carefully lay out alignment of pipe trenches to avoid obstructions. Secure approval of
proposed route of pipe before any cutting is begun.
14
15
16
B. Backfill: After pipe lines have been inspected, tested, and approved, backfill trenches or
excavation with material as recommended by the manufacturer of the type of pipe used. Backfill
under buildings and driveways in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
17
18
19
20
C. Restoration: Compact backfill where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas such
as pavements, walks, lawns, and similar areas, to a condition equal to undisturbed earth, and
restore surface of the area to the condition existing prior to the trenching or excavating
operation.
21
3.3
GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
A. Installation of Underground Pipe:

1. Shape the bottom of the trench to give substantially uniform support to the lower third of
each pipe. Lay each pipe true to line and grade and in such manner as to form a concentric
joint with adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets to flow line. As work progresses,
clean the interior of the pipe of dirt and foreign materials of any kind. Where cleaning after
laying is difficult, keep a suitable swab or drag in the pipe and pull forward past each joint
immediately after joining has been completed. Keep trenches free from water until pipe
joining is complete. Pipe will not be laid when condition of trench or weather is unsuitable
for such work.
2. At all times when work is not in progress, securely close all open ends of pipe fittings to the
satisfaction of the Architect so that no water, earth, or other substance will enter pipe or
fittings.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
B. Erection of Pipe above Grade:

1. Properly support piping and include adequate provisions for flashing, expansion,
contraction, slope, and anchorage. Cut all piping accurately for fabrication to measurements
established at the construction site. Work pipe into place without springing and forcing,
properly clearing all structural elements, finished rooms, windows, doors, and other
openings and equipment. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate
installation will not be permitted.
2. Make all changes in direction with fittings. Use long radius welded elbows for all piping
over 2 size, except where otherwise specified on Drawings or approved by Architect where
space will not permit. Use eccentric reducing fittings or eccentric reducing couplings where
required by Drawings or where required to prevent pocketing of liquid or non-condensibles.
3. Join copper tubing by the following method:
a. Ream tubing to remove all burrs from the inside diameter of the pipe.
b. Sand or brush tubing and fitting to a uniform bright finish.
c. Apply a paste flux to both tubing and fitting.
165477
City of Dallas
15160 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
d.
e.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fully heat the joined parts and apply solder to the joint.
Completely fill the joint with solder, wiping any excess solder outside the joint while
still liquid
Join steel pipe by the following method:
a. Remove all cutting slag from pipes having been flame cut.
b. Grind pipe end perpendicular to pipe surface, then bevel.
c. Accurately align pipes or pipe and fitting to be joined.
d. Join by welding with arc welder in three passes.
e. All welding shall be by a certified welder. Submit Welder's Certificates to the
Architect prior to commencing work.
Mitering of pipe to form elbows or notching straight runs to form tees will not be permitted
unless shop fabricated by a certified welder. Weldolet or Threadolet fittings may be used in
lieu of welding tees.
Use rolled grooves for all piping joined by grooved fittings/mechanical couplings. Cut
grooves are not permitted.
Installation of Grooved Joint Piping System: Install all grooved joint couplings, fittings,
valves, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturers latest installation instructions.
Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the
area from pipe end to groove. Grooving of copper pipe must maintain the pipe end OD of
the copper schedule piping to eliminate flaring. Verify gaskets as suitable for the intended
service prior to installation. Provide molded gaskets produced by the coupling
manufacturer. Provide on-site training, by the grooved coupling manufacturers factory
trained representative for contractors field personnel in the use of grooving tools,
application of groove, and installation of grooved joint products. The manufacturers
representative must periodically visit the jobsite and review installation. Remove and
replace any joints deemed improperly installed.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
C. Arrangement:
1. Run all piping parallel to building lines and arrange so as not to interfere with removal of
other equipment or devices, nor to block access to doors, windows, manholes, or other
access openings.
2. Arrange piping so as to facilitate removal of tube bundles.
3. Place and install piping so that there will be no interference with the installation of the
equipment, ducts, etc.
4. Install all piping to ensure noiseless circulation.
5. Place all valves and specialties to permit easy operation and access.
6. Erect and pitch all piping ensure proper draining. Install piping so as to avoid liquid or air
pockets throughout the piping system.
7. Use eccentric reducers with flat side up wherever changes in pipe size would cause an air
trap.
8. Provide manual air vents at all high points in chilled water and hot water heating systems
with piping to drains. Provide automatic air vents in condenser water piping.
9. Provide drain valves in all low points or traps in the piping system.
10. Provide expansion and contraction of piping by expansion loops, bends, or expansion joints
to prevent injury to connections, piping, equipment, or the building.
45
46
47
48
49
D. Slope:
1. At a minimum, slope piping in accordance with the following unless otherwise specifically
shown on the drawings or specified.
165477
City of Dallas
15160 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
Type of Piping or Fluid

Conveyed
System
Component
Length for 1"

Fall
Direction of Fall
Sewer, Sanitary through 3
Main or Branch
4 feet
Direction of Flow
Sewer, Sanitary through 4 and

above
Main or Branch
4 feet
Direction of Flow
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
E. Connections for Removal:

1. Provide flanged connections or unions on all bypasses, ahead of all traps, and at all
connections to equipment, where shown on the drawings and where required to facilitate
convenient removal of equipment. Include valves on piping connections to equipment to
allow isolating equipment for easy removal.
2. Where grooved joint couplings and fittings are used, flanged connections or unions are not
required. The couplings serve as unions and disconnect points.
9
10
11
12
F.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
G. Refrigerant Piping:
1. Do not conceal refrigerant piping in walls or partitions, nor underground or under the floor
except as indicated on the drawings. Where pipe passes through building structure, do not
conceal pipe joints, and locate joints where they may be readily inspected.
2. Provide brazed with silver solder refrigerant piping complying with AWS A5.0 or "Sil Fos".
The inside of tubing and fittings shall be free of flux. Parts to be joined: clean bright with
emery cloth; heat to a temperature slightly greater than the solder flow point; keep hot until
the solder has penetrated the full depth of the fitting. Cool joints in the air, after which
remove flame marks and traces of flux. During the brazing operation, protect the tubing
from forming an oxide film on the inside by slowly flowing dry nitrogen to expel the air.
Installation of the piping shall comply with ANSI B31.5.
3. Install refrigerant lines so that the gas velocity in the evaporator suction line is sufficient to
move the oil along with the gas to the compressor. Where equipment location requires a
vertical riser, provide the line size as shown and installed to provide sufficient gas velocity
or install a double riser as shown on the drawings. Provide a trap on the larger riser, of
minimum volume, formed by the use of 90 degree and 45 degree ells. Locate the small riser
with its inlet just upstream of the trap, and connect to the top of the horizontal line. Do not
install valves in risers except as shown on the drawings.
4. Provide refrigerant driers, sight glass liquid and moisture indicators, and strainers in
refrigerant piping for remote installations when not furnished by the manufacturer as part of
the equipment. Install driers in liquid line with service valves and a valved bypass line,
which are the same size as liquid line in which the drier is installed. Install driers of 50
cubic inches and larger with the cover and the full cartridge being easily removable.
5. Install sight glass liquid and moisture indicators in the liquid line downstream of the drier.
Provide connections of the same size as the liquid line in which it is installed, up to 7/8"; on
1 1/8" and larger, provide a 1/4" indicator installed in the "By pass" position.
6. Locate strainers close to equipment they are to protect. Provide a strainer in the refrigerant
liquid supply to expansion valves. Install strainers with screen down and in direction of
flow as indicated on the strainer's body.
165477
Sleeves:
1. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural
members, or other building parts. Provide sleeves per Section 15070 Mechanical
Vibration Isolation and Sound Control.
City of Dallas
15160 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
7.
8.
Refrigerant Charging Valve: Provide a valved refrigerant charging connection for each
field piped refrigeration system when not provided as part of the condensing unit. Locate
the valve on the reducing outlet of a full size tee in the liquid line, upstream from the
refrigerant drier and sight glass moisture indicator. Provide seal cap type valves, 1/2" min.
port size.
Provide solenoid valves in horizontal lines with the stem vertical and with flow in direction
indicated on the valve. If not incorporated as an integral part of the valve, provide
strainers upstream of each solenoid valve, with a service valve upstream of the solenoid
valve. Disassemble the solenoid valve according to the manufacturers' recommendations
when brazing the valve into the piping.
11
12
13
14
15
H. Plates:
1. Provide spring clamp plates (escutcheons) where pipes are exposed in finished locations of
the building and run through walls, floors, or ceilings. Provide chrome-plated brass plates,
set tight on the pipe and to the building surface.
16
17
I.
Flashing:
1. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Specifications for flashing requirements.
18
19
20
21
J.
Protection:
1. Propery cap or plug all open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign
materials out of the system.
22
3.4
HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES
23
24
25
26
27
A. Provide supports, hangers, anchors, and guides for all horizontal and vertical piping.
1. Reference Section 15070 Mechanical Vibration Isolation and Sound Control for other
hanger requirements.
2. All hangers and supports must comply with Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS)
standards.
28
29
B. The Contractor is responsible for structural integrity of all supports. All structural hanging
materials shall have a factor of safety of 5.
30
31
32
C. Locate and construct anchor points and pipe guides as shown on drawings or as applicable to
permit the piping system to take up its expansion and contraction freely in opposite directions
away from the anchored points.
33
34
35
36
D. Locate and construct guide points for expansion joints wherever required or shown on drawings
and at each side of an expansion joint or loop, to permit only free axial movement in piping
systems but located no further than 3 pipe diameters on each side of joint. Provide roller type
guides securely welded to structural steel for pipe with expansion joints.
37
38
39
E. Provide maximum spacing between pipe supports for steel, cast iron, plastic, or copper pipe per
local code to prevent excessive stress: this does not apply where there are concentrated loads
between supports.
40
F.
41
42
G. For copper tubing, provide supports especially designed for copper tubing and of exact O.D.
diameter of tubing. Provide copper plated supports.
43
44
H. Use roller type supports pipes subject to axial movement. Brace supports so that movement
occurs in roller rather than support rods.
45
46
I.
165477
Provide double bolt riser clamps by F & S, F & M, Grinnell, or equivalent.
Provide miscellaneous steel required for support of pipes other than steel shown on the structural
Drawings.
City of Dallas
15160 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
J.
3.5
6
7
8
9
In general, support all piping from only structural building members or approved steel inserts
embedded in concrete. Where structural members must be increased in strength and additional
members added to provide for piping support, the mechanical contractor will include such
anticipated costs in his pricing.
SUPPORT OF VERTICAL RISERS

A. Install vertical piping in such manner that its weight plus the weight of its contents, covering,
and appurtenances cannot be concentrated at locations on slabs, beams, and other structural
elements to exceed the carrying capacity of those members as approved by the structural
Engineer.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
B. Riser clamps at each floor may be used only for risers, which are constructed in segments, with
joints capable of taking up longitudinal expansion and contraction, such as cast iron soil piping
and storm drainage risers. Steel or copper water risers 2 1/2" and smaller may also be supported
on riser clamps at each floor when provided with expansion loops or expansion joints such that
no straight rise exceeds 10 floors in height. Securely support clamps by structural members,
which in turn are supported directly from the building structure.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
C. All risers having solid joints must be capable of standing on the lowest available support when
expanded and hanging from the highest available support when contracted. The weight of liquid
content of a riser shall rest on a vertical "stiff leg" support at the bottom of the riser. Support all
such risers 3" and larger by one of the following methods:
1. If the riser turns upward at a single elbow and rises straight from that point, and if the elbow
is so located that it can be supported by a pipe "stiff leg" to a foundation on grade or from a
suitably designed structural element, use this preferred method of riser support. Such risers
shall be guided only, not clamped, at floor penetrations above the support point. Support
horizontal piping connected to each such riser 3 hangers distant from the riser on spring
hangers to take up vertical riser movement.
2. Where risers are offset horizontally above the first turn up and then rise again, each rise
must be supported as a separate riser, either at its turned up elbow or at a single anchor point
at some level of the riser. The building structure at the point of support shall be designed to
support the weight of the riser and its contents. Support horizontal piping connected to each
such riser 3 hangers distant from the riser on spring hangers to take up vertical riser
movement, as determined by the location of the main riser support.
3. For tall pipe risers, each riser may be broken into segments by expansion joints and
anchored to suitably designed building structure individually. The weight of liquid content,
however, can only be supported at the segment which includes the turned-up elbow.
4. In buildings where added structural supports for large riser weights cannot be provided
economically, the support each riser with welded clamps resting on springs at sufficient
numbers of floors so that weight distribution is not concentrated by expansion or
contraction.
40
41
42
43
44
D. In all cases, coordinate the riser support design with the Architect. Submit drawings showing
weights, points of support, and details of support or anchoring for approval. The Architect must
approve the proposed method of support before work is started. The Contractor bears all
responsibility for materials and workmanship described in this section and ensures that all
hangers and supports are properly installed.
45
3.6
46
47
48
CLEANING AND FLUSHING

A. Remove all labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from all piping and accessories installed under
this Contract. Flush and treat piping systems per Section 15180 Water Treatment Systems,
and Section 15950 Testing and Balancing.
165477
City of Dallas
15160 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
B. Arrange a temporary flushing connection for each section of piping. Furnish all water required
for flushing. Furnish, install, and subsequently remove all temporary cross connections for
flushing and drainage connections.
4
5
6
7
C. In filling the systems, be sure to vent in such a manner that the control valves cannot backfill,
thus causing foreign matter to be introduced into the valve body.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15160 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15170
1
2
3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
6
7
8
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply
to the work specified in this Section.
1.2
9
10
11
RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.3
SCOPE
12
13
A. Provide a complete, properly adjusted, and effective system of vibration isolation and sound
control as indicated on the drawings and as specified.
14
15
16
17
18
19
B. Work Included:
1. Support isolation for motor driven mechanical equipment.
2. Rails or beams for distribution of equipment loading to isolation units.
3. Flexible pipe connectors.
4. Pipe sleeves.
5. Flexible ductwork connectors.
20
21
Systems.
22
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
23
24
25
26
B. Product Qualifications: Provide each type of vibration unit and duct sound attenuator produced
by a specialized manufacturer, with not less than 5 years successful experience in the production
of units similar to those for the project.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
C. Supply all isolation materials by a single supplier to ensure total responsibility. The isolation
supplier shall be capable of furnishing necessary drawings and installation instructions required
for the project, and possess the necessary instruments to verify vibration and sound levels. Prior
to acceptance of the work by the Architect, the isolation supplier inspects the work and furnishes
the Architect with written certification that all isolation materials furnished by him are installed
in a proper manner. Any deviations from specifications must be approved in writing by the
Architect. Any deviations not approved by the Architect will be corrected at the contractor's
expense.
35
1.5
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
36
37
A. The walls, floors, ceilings, furniture, and fixtures of finished spaces shall have no vibration
perceptible to the occupants.
38
39
40
B. Objectionable sounds associated with structural borne vibration shall not be perceptible to the
occupants of finished spaces.
165477
City of Dallas
15170 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
C. Sound levels within finished spaces shall not exceed the values set forth in the Table of Sound
Criteria included in this section.
3
4
5
6
D. Measure sound levels four feet above the finished floor with normal occupancy of the space and
with all equipment operating at full capacity or its normal point of operation which creates the
highest noise level. Verify, when required, that all equipment noise levels meet the NC
requirement specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ISOLATION MATERIALS
9
10
11
A. Catalog numbers, types, etc., listed are Kinetics unless indicated otherwise. Equivalent items by
Amber Booth, Korfund, Mason Industries, or equivalent will be acceptable. Refer to Table 1 at
the end of this Section for specific requirements of each piece of equipment.
12
13
14
15
16
B. Fiberglass Pads and Shapes: Glass fiber of not more than 0.18 mil diameter produced by a
multiple frame attenuation process, molded with manufacturer's standard fillers and binders
through 10 compression cycles at 3 times rated load bearing capacity, to achieve a natural
frequency of not more than 12 Hertz, in the thicknesses and shapes required for use in vibration
isolation units.
17
18
19
C.
20
21
D. Cork/Neoprene Pads: Close grained composition cork sheet, laminated between 2 sheets of
ribbed, oil resistant neoprene, in the thicknesses required.
22
23
24
25
E. Vibration Isolation Springs: Wound steel compression springs, of high strength, heat treated,
spring alloy steel; with outside diameter not less than 0.8 times operating height; with lateral
stiffness not less than vertical stiffness; and designed to reach the solid height before exceeding
the rated fatigue point of the steel.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
F. Isolators and Bases: (Reference Table 1.) Part 3

1. Type 1 Isolators: Model KIP Q precompressed molded fiberglass isolation pads, neoprene
jacketed and stabilized during manufacturing. Size pads for 40 to 60 psi loading and made
of glass fibers produced by a multiple flame attenuation process which generates nominal
fiber diameters not to exceed .00018 inches. Where the equipment base does not provide a
uniform load surface, provide steel plates bonded to the top of the pads. Model RD
neoprene mounts, incorporating completely enclosed metal inserts to permit bolting to the
support unit.
2. Type 2 Isolators: Model FDS, freestanding unhoused, laterally stable spring mounts,
incorporating leveling bolts and 1/4" thick noise isolation pads. To assure stability, the
outside spring diameter shall be equal to or greater than the designed spring operating
height, and the horizontal stiffness shall be at least 30% greater than the vertical stiffness.
Provide springs having a minimum additional travel of 50% between the designed operating
height and the solid height.
3. Type 3 Isolators: Model FLS, freestanding, stable spring mounts, similar to Type FDS
incorporating vertical limit stops to assure a constant height if the supported weight is
removed, and to reduce movement due to wind loads. Isolate the limit stops.
4. Type 2 Hangers: Model SFH combination spring and fiberglass hangers, incorporating 2"
thick neoprene jacketed precompressed molded fiberglass inserts in series with springs, all
encased in welded steel brackets. The outside spring diameter shall have a minimum of 0.8
times the designed spring operating height, and a minimum additional travel of 50%
between the design height and solid weight. Use Model SH for isolating ductwork.
165477
Neoprene Pads: Oil resistant neoprene sheets, of manufacturer's standard hardness and cross
ribbed pattern, designed for neoprene in shear type vibration isolation, and in the thicknesses
required.
City of Dallas
15170 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
19
20
Type 4 Base: Equipment manufacturers base required, isolators directly attached to

equipment.
Type 5 & 6 Bases: Model SFRB or SBB structural steel bases, designed and supplied by
the isolator manufacturer. The bases are designed with isolator brackets to reduce the
mounting height of the equipment. To assure adequate stiffness, the height of the members
shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span between isolators, or at least 6".
Type 7 Bases: Model CIB reinforced concrete inertia bases, the steel members of which are
designed and supplied by the isolator manufacturer. Pour the concrete into a welded steel
channel frame, incorporating prelocated equipment anchor bolts, 1/2" diameter reinforcing
bars on 8" centers each way, and isolator mounting brackets to reduce the mounting height
of the equipment but yet remain within the confines of the base. Provide bases with a
minimum thickness of 8% of the largest span between isolators, at least 6", or as indicated
on the drawings. Where the inertia bases are used to mount pumps, provide bases large
enough to support the pipe elbow(s).
Type 8 Base: Isolation Rail System: Two parallel aluminum rail systems with a continuous
neoprene seal shall provide up to 1" static deflection. Mount over roof curb on free standing
stable springs.
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS

A. Refer to Section 15060 - Piping and Accessories.
2.3
PIPE SLEEVES
21
22
A. Provide sleeves formed of 24 gauge sheet metal. Pack void areas with 3 PCF density fiberglass
and seal ends with resilient mastic. Sleeves shall be 3" larger in diameter than pipe.
23
B. Maintain fire resistance rating for all walls and floors.
24
2.4
25
26
27
28
FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

A. Provide laminated flexible sheet of cotton and elastomer (butyl, neoprene or vinyl), reinforced
with steel wire mesh where required for strength to withstand maximum fan pressure possible.
Form connections with fullfaced flanges for airtight connection. Provide Duro Dyne "Econ O
Fab" or equal.
29
PART 3 - EXECUTION
30
3.1
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection
and application of vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not
exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short circuited
by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any)
intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation.
2. Anchor and attach units to subbases and equipment for secure operation and to prevent
displacement by normal forces.
3. Adjust leveling devices to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units where
leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly.
4. Install inertia base frames on isolator units as indicated, so that a minimum of 2" clearance
below base will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been
installed and loaded for operation.
5. Locate isolation hangers as near the overhead support structure as possible.
6. Bond flanges of flexible duct collars to ducts and housings to provide airtight connections.
Seal seams and penetrations to prevent air leakage.
165477
City of Dallas
15170 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
7.
8.
3.2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.

Install piping to be concentric with sleeve. Maintain fire resistance rating for all walls and
floors.
EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK

A. Observe the installation of other work related to the vibration isolation work, including other
work connected to vibration/isolation work, and, after completion of other related work, but
before equipment start up, furnish a written report to the Architect listing any observed
inadequacies for proper operation and performance of vibration isolation materials. The
equipment shall not be started until inadequacies have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the Architect. The report shall cover, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1. Equipment installation (performed as work of other sections) on vibration isolators.
2. Piping connections including flexible connections.
3. Ductwork connections including flexible connections.
4. Passage of piping and ductwork which is to be isolated through walls and floors.
3.3
DUCTWORK TREATMENT
16
17
A. Satisfactorily control noise within the ductwork of the air handling system by the installation of
prefabricated duct sound attenuators as recommended by the manufacturer.
18
19
B. Install flexible connections in the ductwork adjacent to all air moving equipment such that when
the unit deflects, the inside edges of the connections do not touch.
20
C. Install duct sound attenuators as recommended by the manufacturer.
21
3.4
22
23
24
25
26
27
A. All piping up to five supports away from spring isolated mechanical equipment and all air
conditioning units mounted on isolators shall be isolated from the structure by means of spring
hangers in the supporting rods. Provide hangers as specified. Incorporate flexible connectors in
the piping adjacent to all isolated equipment where piping swing arm lengths do not provide
required freedom of movement.
3.5
28
29
30
31
32
3.6
DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS
A. Upon completion of vibration isolation work, prepare and submit to the Architect a report
showing measured equipment deflections for each major item of equipment as indicated.
3.7
36
37
38
39
40
EQUIPMENT ROOM PENETRATIONS

A. All piping, conduit, ductwork, etc., penetrating floors, ceiling, or partitions of equipment rooms
shall be isolated using sleeves as specified herein. All penetrations shall be airtight. Extend
sleeves through floors 3" above the floor in mechanical rooms and in rooms where water piping
is installed.
33
34
35
PIPING TREATMENT
SOUND SURVEY
A. When requested by the Architect, provide the Architect with a written sound analysis of each
equipment room and each area adjacent to mechanical equipment rooms. The readings for this
survey shall be taken when all furnishings are in place. Submit the written analysis on standard
"NC" curve forms with readings taken in eight primary octave bands affected.
3.8
41
42
43
44
TABLE OF SOUND CRITERIA

A. Type of Area
1. Offices
a. Private
b. Open Plan Areas
165477
N.C. Criteria Range

30 to 35
35 to 40
City of Dallas
15170 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
c.
d.
Computer/Business
Machine Areas
40 to 45
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15170 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
15170 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15175
1
2
3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
6
7
8
to the Work specified in this Section.
1.2
9
10
11
RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.3
SCOPE
12
13
14
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to
the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as
specified.
15
16
17
18
19
B. Work included:
1. Valve tagging
2. Pipe marking
3. Equipment marking
4. Ductwork marking.
20
21
C. Submittals: Provide submittals per in Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical
Systems.
22
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
23
24
25
26
exceed minimum requirements as specified. Marking system shall conform to ASME 13.1
1981 requirements.
27
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28
2.1
29
30
31
32
33
34
VALVE TAGS
A. Provide a tag for each valve in main and branch piping of hot and chilled water, condenser
water, natural gas, and domestic water piping systems.
1. Provide 1 1/2" diameter solid brass tags with blacked filled stamped characters of 1/4"
height above and 1/2" height below.
2. Provide 8" long meter seals for use with valve tags.
2.2
35
36
37
38
39
PIPE MARKERS
A. Provide pipe markers for pipes that provide 360 deg. visibility with ANSI approved color coded
background, color of legend in relation to background color, legend letter size, and length of
color field. Additionally, print direction of flow arrows on the same markers, and repeat and
reverse words for use with flow in either direction.
1. Form each marker with a clear acrylic covering suitable for use outdoors.
165477
City of Dallas
15175 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
2.
2.3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Form marker in order to snap on and completely surround the pipe. For diameters 6" and
larger, provide radius formed markers of same material.
EQUIPMENT PLATES
A. Provide engraved plates for all HVAC and plumbing equipment.
1. Provide black plates with white letters that appear when the plate is engraved.
2. Plate material shall be specifically suited for conditions surrounding the equipment.
Outdoor equipment requires special plate material for outdoor use.
3. Size plates with lettering size appropriate for the information shown but in no case less than
1/8" high. Lettering plates in Gothic Normal style.
4. Base nomenclature for plates on the equipment designations shown on the equipment
schedules and as approved by the Architect.
2.4
CONCEALED DEVICES
13
14
15
A. Mark all air terminals valves, fire dampers, control dampers, splitter dampers, and other operable
devices and equipment located above ceilings with color coded W. H. Brady "Tack" type
markers.
16
B. Provide marking system as manufactured by W. H. Brady Company, Seton or equivalent.
17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
18
3.1
19
20
21
A. Place all markers and plates in such locations that they are easily read by a person without
assuming awkward or hazardous positions.
3.2
22
23
GENERAL
VALVE TAGS
A. Secure one valve tag to each valve.
3.3
PIPE MARKERS
24
25
26
27
A. For diameters 3/4" to 6", markers snap around the pipe, completely surrounding the pipe.
Markers shall not require taping or the use of any adhesive material or fasteners to permanently
secure them to the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, secure markers with stainless steel spring
fasteners.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
B. Install sufficient quantities of markers that tracing of pipe systems can be readily accomplished.
Install within three feet before and after penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings,
underground, or other non-accessible enclosures; at access doors, manholes, or other access
points which permit view of concealed piping; and when there is a change in direction of the
concealed pipe. Label locations in major mechanical rooms at a maximum spacing of every 20
feet. Label other piping at a maximum spacing of every 30 feet and at least once in every area
that the pipe passes over or through. Install additional markers where directed by the Architect.
35
3.4
36
37
38
39
EQUIPMENT PLATES
A. Secure all plates with two self tapping stainless steel screws with round heads. Alternately,
plates may be fastened with "pop" stainless steel rivets provided no cracking or injury occurs to
the plate. Plates attached with adhesives will not be permitted.
3.5
40
41
DUCTWORK MARKING
A. Label ductwork to identify the function, source, and flow direction. Install the ductwork
identification markings on the ductwork as follows:
165477
City of Dallas
15175 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Permanent labels or signage. Label consists of black lettering a minimum of 2 1/2" in

height on a white background or a tan background when duct is painted tan.
Label at a maximum of 50 feet intervals or where there is a change in direction of the duct.
Label at least once in each room or space the duct passes over or through.
Label round ducts located above or below the normal site line of vision with the lettering
placed below or above the horizontal centerline of the duct. Lettering shall be clearly
visible from access locations.
Label rectangular ducts about the centerline on vertical sides. Label both sides of the duct
when accessible.
Label within three (3) feet before and after penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or
other non-accessible enclosures.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15175 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
15175 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15180
2
3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
6
7
8
1.2
9
10
11
RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.3
SCOPE
12
13
14
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for, or incidental to,
the insulation of the mechanical and plumbing systems as indicated on the drawings and as
specified herein.
15
16
17
B. Factory insulated equipment is excluded from this section of the specifications except that the
insulating material characteristics shall equal or exceed those of specified materials for similar
service.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
C. Work Included:
1. Piping:
a. All above ground and below ground domestic hot and cold water piping.
b. All horizontal sanitary drains handling cooling coil condensate.
c. All plumbing items requiring insulation due to rules and regulations for the
handicapped.
d. Cooling coil condensate drain lines.
e. Refrigerant suction lines.
2. Ductwork:
a. Supply air:
1) Insulate externally with thermal duct wrap.
2) Where shown in the drawings, line with acoustic insulation.
b. Return air:
1) Insulate externally with thermal duct wrap.
2) Where shown on the drawings, line with acoustic insulation.
c. Make-up air duct:
1) Insulated externally.
35
36
37
D. Provide the heat tracing system for freeze protection of the external piping and piping exposed to
ambient conditions. The piping lines to be protected include domestic hot and cold water, and
associated valves.
38
39
E. Submittals: Provide submittals per Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical
Systems.
40
1.4
41
QUALITY ASSURANCE
165477
City of Dallas
15180 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
5
6
7
A. Fire rating of all above ground insulation including jackets, adhesives, coatings, mastics, etc.,
not to exceed 25 flame spread or 50 smoke developed under ASTM Specification E 84 75
procedure. Fire resistance rating shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
B. Provide vermin resistant insulation.
9
10
11
12
13
14
C. Pipe Insulation: Above ground-Johns Manville AP-T preformed one-piece fiberglass with
reinforced craft paper and aluminum foil jacket. Include vapor barrier where required. Provide
a 0.016 smooth or corrugated aluminum jacket with vapor barrier for piping exposed to weather.
Attach with 1/2" 0.020 aluminum bands with approved closure system. Other manufacturers are
Owens Corning, Knauf, or equivalent. Armstrong Armaflex or equal may be used, in thermally
equivalent thicknesses, but only for refrigerant suction lines where codes permit.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
D. Duct Insulation:
1. External insulation for metal ductwork (flexible blanket): Johns Manville Microlite
fiberglass duct wrap with FSK reinforced craft paper and aluminum foil facing, conforming
to the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
2. Internal thermal duct liner for rectangular metal ductwork: Johns Manville Permacote
Linacoustic Standard fiberglass duct liner with a black acrylic polymer fire-resistant antimicrobial coating, conforming to the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B. Maximum kvalve shall be 0.25 Btu in/hr ft F at a mean temperature of 75F.
3. Internal acoustical duct liner for rectangular metal ductwork: Johns Manville Permacote
Linacoustic Standard with a black acrylic polymer fire-resistant anti-microbial coating,
conforming to the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B. Maximum k-valve shall be 0.25 Btu
in/hr ft F at a mean temperature of 75F. Minimum noise reduction coefficient shall be
0.70 for 1 thick liner 0.90 for 1 thick liner and 1.00 for 2 thick liner.
4. Internal acoustical duct liner for rectangular metal ductwork, 2 lb/cu ft density minimum:
Johns Manville Permacote Linacoustic HP fiberglass duct liner with a black arulic polymer
fire-resistant anti-microbial coating, conforming to the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
Maximum k-value shall be 0.24 Btu in/hr ft F at a mean temperature of 75 F. Minimum
noise reduction coefficient shall be 0.75 for 1 thick liner.
5. Internal acoustical duct liner for rectangular metal ductwork, 3 lb/cu ft. Johns Manville
Permacote Linacoustic R-300 with a black acrylic polymer fire-resistant anti-microbial
coating, conforming to the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B. Maximum k-value shall be
0.23 Btu in/hr ft F at mean temperature of 75F. Minimum noise reduction coefficient
shall be 0.80 for 1 thick liner, 0.95 for 1 thick liner and 1.05 for 2 thick liner.
6. Internal acoustical duct liner for round metal ductwork: Johns Manville Spiracoustic
preformed fiberglass duct liner with black acrylic polymer fire-resistant anti-microbial
coating, conforming to the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B. Maximum k-value shall be
0.23 Btu in/hr ft F at a mean temperature of 75F. Minimum noise reduction coefficient
shall be 0.80 for 1 thick liner and 0.95 for 1 thick liner.
7. Provide all duct liner products that avoid air erosion up to velocities of 4,000 feet per
minute.
8. Other manufacturers are Certainteed, Knauf, Owens Corning or equivalent.
46
2.2
47
48
INSULATION THICKNESS
A. Piping insulation thickness based on a maximum k value of 0.23 Btu in/hr ft
temperature of 75 F.
165477
City of Dallas
15180 - 2
F at a mean
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
Pipe Sizes
System
Runouts
To 12 ft.
Max.
1" and
Less
1-1/4"
to 2"
2-1/2"
&4
6" and
Up
Domestic hot water
1"
1"
1"
11/2"
11/2"
Domestic cold water.
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
Horizontal storm piping and drain bodies.

EWC traps and tailpieces. Condensate drain
piping.
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
2
3
4
B. Internal Duct Insulation: 1 thick, unless noted otherwise, for any supply and return thermal
duct liner and acoustic duct liner.
5
6
C. Exterior Duct Insulation: 2 thick, with a minimum installed R value of 5.0, for all supply,
return and outside air ductwork.
2.3
HEAT TRACE
8
9
10
A. Provide Nelson Limitrace Type LT or equivalent electric heating cable. Provide a parallel, selfregulating heater cable such that it can be cut to length in the field without affecting power
output per unit length.
11
12
13
B. Provide a self-regulated heat tracing system that will keep the chilled water lines from freezing
and maintain a minimum 40 degree F (for chilled water) to 60 degree F (for heating water) liquid
viscosity within the traced pipelines.
14
15
C. Contractor shall coordinate with electrical sub-contractor for 120 VAC power supply for heat
trace at no additional cost to the Owner/Architect/Engineer.
16
PART 3 - EXECUTION
17
3.1
GENERAL
18
19
20
A. Provide experienced craftsmen to install all insulation in a neat, workmanlike manner and in
accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations for service intended, as
interpreted by the Architect.
21
22
23
B. Provide adhesives, used in conjunction with insulation, compatible with the insulation and vapor
barrier used, vermin proof, and mildew resistant.
24
3.2
PIPE INSULATION
25
26
27
A. Provide insulation of full specified thickness, continuous through walls, floors, ceilings, etc.
Reducing thickness or cutting back of insulation to pass obstructions or through sleeves will not
be permitted.
28
29
B. Provide valve and fitting insulation built up to the thickness of the adjacent pipe insulation, or
provide factory prefabricated units at the Contractor's option.
165477
City of Dallas
15180 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
C. Accomplish any painting of pipe insulation under the Painting Section. After finish painting,
replace any insulation showing splits or other signs of poor workmanship.
D. No part of any system will be insulated until all required tests have been completed.
4
5
6
E. Install all insulation so that it does not interfere with the functions of thermometer wells, gage
connections and cocks, unions, access panels, hand holes, manholes, sight glasses, etc., or
obscure serial numbers or other nameplate data.
F. Extend insulation to include stiff leg supports as required to prevent sweating.
8
9
10
11
12
G. Install complete vapor barriers to prevent sweating all cold systems and equipment. If a single
tape adhesive system or staples are used for closure of the longitudinal lap, a apor barrier mastic
must be used to ensure a vaporproof closure. Seal, waterproof, and vaporproof all edges and
abutments. Supplier of jacket materials shall certify that the material proposed is approved for
use in return air plenums, where applicable.
13
14
H. Where necessary, arrange the application of insulation to accommodate movement of piping due
to thermal expansion and contraction.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
I.
Exterior Piping: Insulate all pipe and fittings specified herein to be insulated, when installed
exposed to weather, coated with mastic and then spirally wrapped with open mesh glass tape,
avoiding wrinkles, and then completely covered with a second coat of mastic so as to make a
waterproof assembly. Provide 0.016" smooth or corrugated aluminum jacket with proper
closure system positioned to shed water. Insulate fittings with molded insulation fittings or pipe
insulation carved and mitered to fit properly. Do no conceal any portion of this insulation prior
to approval by the Architect.
22
23
24
25
26
27
J.
Below Grade Piping: Insulate all pipe and fittings specified herein to be insulated, when
installed below grade, and spirally wrap with open mesh glass tape embedded in asphaltic mastic
and then completely covered with waterproof asphaltic mastic so as to make a waterproof
assembly. Insulate fittings with molded insulation fittings or pipe insulation carved and mitered
to fit properly. Do not conceal any portion of this insulation before the Architect has checked
and approved same.
28
29
30
31
32
K. Provide piping supports passing completely around the exterior of the finished insulation.
Provide rigid blocks of insulation material at all support points. In addition, provide sheet metal
saddles at support points in accordance with the following table:
Pipe Size
Gauge Metal
Saddle Length
Up to 2-1/2"
18
6"
3" - 5"
16
10"
6" - 8"
16
14"
10" and Over
16
18"
33
34
35
L. Provide saddles covering the bottom of the insulation, and saddle edges hemmed or suitably
covered to prevent damage to the insulation material.
36
M. Provide continuous vapor barrier and finish at all support points.
37
38
N. Provide an aluminum jacket, as specified herein, for all exposed piping lower than 8' 0" above
the finished floor that is subject to injury by personnel traffic.
165477
City of Dallas
15180 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
O. Properly freeze protect all piping exposed to the weather, or possible freezing temperatures, for
local conditions using electric resistance cable.
3.3
4
5
6
A. External Duct Insulation: Install all external duct insulation without sagging or loose fitting
sections. Seal outer jacket with mastic to form a continuous vapor barrier. Install as
recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DUCT INSULATION
B. Internal Duct Liner: Install all insulation such that it does not interfere with access panels,
damper quadrants, or any other movable component of the ductwork. Apply the duct liner to the
inside of the duct with the faced side to the airstream and secured to the duct with adhesive, pins,
and washers. Completely coat the metal with adhesives. Firmly butt joints together. Install duct
liner in accordance with the requirements of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's
National Association (SMACNA), Duct Liner Application Standard. Increase sheet metal
dimensions to accommodate addition of liner. Ductwork sizes shown are net free area.
3.4
HEAT TRACE INSTALLATION
15
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
16
17
B. Notify Architect fourteen days in advance of installation. Architect reserves the right to witness
installation activities.
18
C. Protect cable from moisture, contamination, and mechanical damage.
19
D. Locate cable between the 4 and 8 oclock position on the pipe.
20
E. Secure cable to pipe at one foot intervals.
21
22
23
F. Ambient-Sensing Thermostats:
1. Mount above roof level and out of sunlight.
2. Mount so that thermostat will be exposed to coldest temperature and highest wind.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
G. Line Sensing Thermostats:

1. Mount pipe temperature sensors at a 90-degree angle from the cable.
2. Locate sensor a minimum of 3 feet from any heat sinks and ideally at the end of the cable
circuit.
3. Seal the insulation where capillary tube exits the insulation to prevent moisture entry.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15180 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
15180 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15400
1
2
3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
6
7
8
1.2
9
10
11
RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.3
SCOPE
12
13
14
a complete and operational installation of plumbing systems inside the building and to points
outside the building as indicated on the drawings and as specified.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
B. Work Included:
1. Plumbing fixtures and accessories for office/administrative area.
2. Plumbing equipment.
3. Sanitary drain, waste, and vent system (Ref. Section 15060).
4. Domestic hot and cold water systems (Ref. Section 15060).
5. Equipment drain piping (Ref. Section 15060).
6. Process cooling water system supply piping (Ref. Section 15060).
22
23
Systems.
24
1.4
25
QUALITY ASSURANCE
26
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
27
2.1
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES
28
29
A. Provide plumbing fixtures and accessories complete with trim and all other appurtenances
required to connect to rough in piping at floor and wall.
30
31
B. Provide fixtures, trim, drain bodies, hydrants, valves, grates, and all accessories as specified, as
scheduled, or an approved equivalent.
32
C. Provide carriers with all wall-mounted fixtures.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
D. Flush Valve Handicapped Water Closets (W-1H)

1. Bowl
a. Manufacturer: See schedule on sheet 10M-12.
b. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products:
1) Kohler
2) Crane
3) Zurn
165477
City of Dallas
15400 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
c.
2.
3.
4.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
ASME A112.19.2; wall hung, siphon jet vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim,
1-1/2 inch (38 mm) top spud, china bolt caps.
d. Mount toilet bowl at handicapped height as dictated by the latest edition of Texas
Accessibility Standards and Americans with Disabilities Act.
Exposed Flush Valve
1) Zurn
c. ASME A112.19.6; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle,
escutcheon, seat bumper, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker; maximum 1.6
gallon (6 L) flush volume.
d. Mount at height as dictated by the latest edition of Texas Accessibility Standards and
Americans with Disabilities Act. Handle position to be on clear space side of water
closet.
Seat
1) Olsonite
2) Bemis
3) American Standard
c. Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, stainless steel self-sustaining and
external check hinges, stainless steel posts, without cover.
Wall Mounted Carrier
a. Manufacturer: J.R. Smith Model 230.
1) Wade
2) Josam
3) Zurn
c. ASME A112.6.1; adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable
spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers.
E. Lavatories - Handicapped (L-1H)

1. Vitreous China Wall Hang Wheelchair Lavatory
1) Kohler
2) Crane
c. ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china self rimming countertop lavatory 27 x 20 inch (508 x
686 mm) minimum, faucet ledge with drillings on 4 inch (102 mm) centers, front
overflow.
2. Faucets
1) Chicago Faucet
2) Kohler
c. Model 7402.002 Heritage Combination faucet with 172H chrome indexed wrist blade
handles, 5" swivel gooseneck spout, aerator with 2.2 GPM (0.14 L/S) flow.
3. Accessories
a. Chrome plated 17 gage (1.3 mm) brass adjustable P-trap with clean-out plug and arm
with escutcheon.
b. Loose key stops.
c. Rigid supplies.
d. Offset supply pipes. Cast grid drain assembly.
165477
City of Dallas
15400 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
e.
4.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
F.
2.2
Insulate lavatory P-trap and angle valve assemblies with fully molded, "Truebro",
HandiLav-Guard insulation kit, with 3-piece interlocking trap assembly and 2-piece
interlocking angle valve assemblies. Provide nylon-type fasteners supplied with kit.
Mount at height as dictated by the latest edition of the Americans with Disabilities Act and
the Texas Accessibility Standards.
Shower - Handicapped (SH-1H)

1. Shower enclosure under another Division
2. Faucet: See schedule on sheet 10M-12.
3. Acceptable alternative manufacturers: Symmons, by approval only. Manufacturer must
equal specification.
4. Basin: Precast terrazzo marble chips in white Portland cement, reinforced, ground and
polished exposed surfaces, with galvanized tiling flange, drain and tailpiece.
a. Compressive strength (7 day): 3000 PSI, min.
b. Reinforcing: 4 x 4 IN galvanized steel mesh.
c. Drain: Stainless steel or chrome plated brass cast integrally, with removable strainer
plate.
d. Tailpiece: Provide for minimum 1 inch deep caulked lead connection.
e. Size and shape: As indicated on architectural drawings.
f. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard line by Architect.
g. Basin: Model WTR 5000 series wheelchair ADA compliant shower floor or
equivalent.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
23
24
25
26
A. Floor Drains (FD)

1. Galvanized cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible
clamping collar and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer; Model: See schedule on sheet
10M-12.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
B. Clan-outs
1. Provide drainage lines with properly specified clean-outs. Locate clean-outs in runs at not
more than 75' on center or as dictated by local codes. Provide clean-outs at base of each soil
and waste stack and whenever necessary to make accessible all parts of drainage soil and
waste systems whether or not indicated on drawings. Extend clean-outs within chases to
near wall and provide access cover compatible with wall construction. Provide clean-outs of
required size with flashing flange where installed with membrane water proofing.
2. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and vandal proof non skid
cover; Model : See schedule on sheet 10M-12.
3. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Ferrule type with coated cast iron body and round tapered
thread bronze cover; Model 58190 22 as manufactured by Josam or equivalent.
4. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Coated cast iron body, round with scoriated cover Model
56000 in service areas, square with bronze foot traffic cover Model 56020 compatible with
floor finish in finished floor areas or carpet clean-out cover where required; provide cleanouts as manufactured by Josam or equivalent.
5. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Cast iron body, cast iron plug, and round flat stainless steel
access cover secured with machine screw; Model 58710 Series as manufactured by Josam or
equivalent.
6. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Cast iron tee with threaded plug. Provide bolted
stack clean-outs on vertical rainwater leaders.
47
48
49
50
C. Access Boxes (Coordinate all locations with Architect prior to installation): Provide 18 gauge
steel frame and door with heavy duty piano hinge and keyed cam-lock.
1. Walls:
a. Provide square frame and secured cover with brushed chrome plate finish in tile walls.
165477
City of Dallas
15400 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
b.
2.
3.
4.
Provide square frame and cover with bonderized prime coated steel face and lock in
walls of other finished rooms.
Ceilings:
a. Provide square frame and cover with bonderized prime coated steel face and lock.
Floors:
a. Provide plain steel frame with plain nickel bronze scoriated cover.
Yard Boxes:
a. Provide cast concrete boxes with cast iron rim and hinged self closing cast iron lid
marked for appropriate service, size as required.
b. Set flush with finished grades with 4" thick concrete pad under perimeter (but not under
interior) of box.
12
13
14
D. Hose Bibb (HB-1):

1. Outside sill faucet with vacuum breaker, 3/4" hose thread outlet, removable tee handle,
rough chrome plated finish. No 998 by Chicago Faucet or equivalent.
15
16
17
18
19
E. Hose Bibb (HB-2):

1. Provide HB-2 with 1-1/2 ball valve inside of the pump room to separate and drain the
piping to HB-2 outside. Provide building mounted HB-2 equal to Potter Roemer No. 5862,
4" x 2 1/2" x 2 1/2" polished chrome plated with caps and chains. Provide threads
conforming to the local fire protection district standards.
20
21
22
23
24
25
F.
26
2.3
27
28
2.4
DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS

2.5
31
32
SANITARY DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT SYSTEM

29
30
Hose Bibb (HB-3):

1. Outside encased non-freeze, flush wall hydrant with bronze casing, 3/4" hose thread outlet,
non-turning operating rod with free floating compression closure valve, replaceable bronze
seat and seat washer, Nickel bronze box and hinged cover with operating key lock. Z1305
by Zurn or equivalent.
EQUIPMENT DRAIN PIPING

2.6
33
PROCESS COOLING WATER SYSTEM SUPPLY PIPING

34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
35
3.1
INSPECTION
36
37
A. Review millwork and other related shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixture and
opening before rough in and installation.
38
B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough in and finish work of this Section.
39
3.2
40
41
INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING PIPING

A. Install the plumbing piping system as specified in Section 15060, "Piping and Accessories", and
as specified herein.
165477
City of Dallas
15400 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
B. Lubricate thraded clean-out plugs. Provide clearance at clean-out for rodding of drainage
system.
3
4
C. Encase exterior clean-outs in concrete flush with grade.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
7
8
B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and
escutcheons to make a watertight finished connection.
C. Install components level and plumb.
10
D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts.
11
E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as directed by the Architect.
12
13
14
F.
Install fixtures per the following schedules:
ROUGH-IN CONNECTION SCHEDULE

Hot Water
Lavatory
1/2 inch
Shower
1/2 inch
Water Closet
-
Cold Water
1/2 inch
1/2 inch
1 inch
Waste
1 inch
3 inch
4 inch
Vent
1 inch
2 inch
2 inch
15
FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHT SCHEDULE
VERIFY WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
(Dimensions are from finished floor elevation)
Description
Adult
Water Closet:
Standard
Handicapped
Handicapped
Lavatory:
15
17-19
28-44
inches to top of bowl rim

inches to top of seat
inches to top of flush valve
Standard
Handicapped
Handicapped
Handicapped
31
29
27
9
inches to top of basin rim

inches to bottom of basin rim (min.)
inches to bottom of basin bowl (min.)
inches to bottom of lowest obstruction (min.)
inches from front of lavatory to faucet
Handicapped
20
16
17
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
18
19
A. Adjust stops and regulating valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing,
noise, or overflow.
20
21
22
23
24
B. At completion, clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15400 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
15400 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15480
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
1.2
8
9
10
RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.3
SCOPE
11
12
13
a complete and operational installation of the heating system as indicated on the drawings and as
specified. Provide factory trained start-up service for all equipment.
14
15
B. Work Included:
1. Domestic hot water heaters
16
17
C. Submittals: Provide submittals per in Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical
Systems.
18
1.4
19
QUALITY ASSURANCE
20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21
2.1
INSTANTANEOUS ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
22
A. Provide tankless, instantaneous type heater.
23
24
25
B. Provide heater in compliance with the applicable provisions and recommendations of ASME
code and bearing appropriate symbol and listed with National Board as required, and be UL
listed.
26
27
28
29
30
C. Provide heater complete with but not limited to:

1. Celcon water ways and stainless steel heating coils.
2. ASME temperature and pressure relief valve, if required by local code.
3. Flow switch to activate heating coils.
4. Unit controls suitable for water pressure between 20 and 45 psig.
31
32
D. Provide heaters as manufactured by Chronomite Laboratories Model SR-40-208VAC-40AMPS

or equivalent.
33
PART 3 - EXECUTION
34
3.1
35
INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
165477
City of Dallas
15480 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.2
EQUIPMENT START-UP
2
3
4
A. Prior to operation, the factory start-up representative, in the presence of the Architect's
representative performs all system and equipment checks as prescribed by the manufacturer in
his written start-up procedures.
5
6
7
8
B. The factory start-up representative places the equipment in operation and records all start-up
data. Give three copies of all data to the Architect.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15480 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15500
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
1.2
8
9
10
RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.3
SCOPE
11
12
13
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to
the installation a complete and operable heating system as indicated on the drawings and as
specified. Provide factory trained start-up service for all equipment.
14
15
B. Work Included:
1. Unit heaters
16
17
Systems.
18
1.4
19
QUALITY ASSURANCE
20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21
2.1
22
23
24
25
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS

A. Provide unit heaters having steel housing, adjustable discharge louvers, mounting bracket, fan
and motor with guard, enclosed finned tube type heating element, safety controls, and wiring per
NEC. Provide unit mounted 24 volt thermostat. Provide capacity as scheduled on the drawings.
Provide UL listed heaters as manufactured by Markel, Berco, or QMark.
26
PART 3 - EXECUTION
27
3.1
28
29
INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2
EQUIPMENT START-UP
30
31
32
A. Prior to operation, the factory start-up representative, in the presence of the Architect's
representative, performs all system and equipment checks as prescribed by the manufacturer in
his written start-up procedures.
33
34
35
B. The factory start-up representative places the equipment in operation and records all start-up
data. Give three copies of all data to the Architect.
165477
City of Dallas
15500 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15500 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15600
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
8
A.
1.2
9
10
11
12
RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.
1.3
The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions,
apply to the Work specified in this Section.
All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and
SCOPE
13
14
15
A.
Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for, or incidental to,
the installation of a complete and operating refrigeration system as indicated on the drawings
and as specified.
16
17
B.
Work included:
1. Direct expansion condensing units.
18
19
Systems.
20
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
21
22
23
B. Provide equipment having a minimum EER in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1-unless specified
otherwise.
24
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
25
2.1
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
26
27
28
A. Provide an air cooled condensing unit in the location and manner shown on the drawings.
Provide unit properly assembled and tested at the factory. Provide unit designed for use with
Refrigerant 410a only.
29
30
31
32
B. Performance: Provide capacity as scheduled on drawings. Provide unit that operates down to 45
deg. F outdoor air temperature entering condenser with standard controls. Provide units
complying with ARI Standard 2l0 8l, 270 82 and ASHRAE Standard 90A 1989 for unit
efficiency.
33
34
C. Provide condenser coil of nonferrous construction. Provide coil having aluminum plate fins,
mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes.
35
36
37
D. Condenser Fans and Motors: Provide unit furnished with a direct driven, propeller type fan
arranged for vertical discharge. Provide condenser fan motor having inherent protection, and of
the permanently lubricated type, resiliently mounted. Each fan will have a safety guard.
165477
City of Dallas
15600 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
E. Compressor: Provide unit having one (1) compressor with contactor and of hermetic design
with internal vibration isolation. Provide unit having short cycling protection and carrying a
minimum five (5) year warranty from the manufacturer.
4
5
F. Controls: Provide factory wired controls and locate in an accessible enclosure. Provide unit that
operates with a 24 volt control circuit.
6
7
G. Provide unit with fully weatherproof casing for outdoor installation. Provide casing of
galvanized steel, zinc phosphatized, and finished with manufacturer's standard baked enamel.
8
9
H. Provide unit with external connections for power and refrigerant lines. Provide removable top
panel to provide access for servicing.
10
11
I.
All units provided in this Section will be of one manufacturer, make and model as scheduled on
drawings or equivalent.
12
13
J.
Provide unit as manufactured by Lennox, Carrier, York.
14
PART 3 - EXECUTION
15
3.1
16
17
18
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
19
20
21
22
23
Install equipment as shown or indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the

manufacturer.
EQUIPMENT START-UP
A. Provide start-up service by factory certified technician.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15600 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15700
HVAC: EQUIPMENT
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
1.2
8
9
10
RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.3
SCOPE
11
12
13
a complete and operational installation of all necessary air handling items as shown on the
drawings and specified.
14
15
16
B. Work Included:
1. DX air handling units
2. Filters
17
18
Systems.
19
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
20
21
22
B. When requested, provide Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials

23
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24
2.1
meet or
DX AIR HANDLING UNITS
25
A. Provide each unit complete with casing, coils, fan, drive, motor, and filter section.
26
27
28
B. Provide minimum 3 speed, tap wound type motors with thermal overload protection. Provide
sleeve type motor bearings with oil tubes and oil reservoirs. Provide permanent split capacitor
motors.
29
30
C. Provide centrifugal, forward curved type fans. Provide statically and dynamically balanced fan
wheels. Fan wheels and housing shall be steel.
31
D. Provide units with drain pans lined with 1/2" fire retardant closed cell foam.
32
33
E. Provide cabinets of 18 ga. galvanized steel acoustically and thermally insulated with 1/2" coated
glass fiber insulation. Panels shall be removable for access.
34
F. Provide units with necessary transformers and wiring to allow single point electrical connection.
35
G. Provide DX-coil units as manufactured by Lennox, Carrier, York.
165477
City of Dallas
HVAC: EQUIPMENT
15700 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.2
FILTERS
2
3
A. Provide 2, medium efficiency, pleated, disposable type air filters for air handlers. Provide filters
consisting of a non-woven cotton fabric media, media support grid, and enclosing frame.
B. Provide filter media of the non-woven cotton fabric type, reinforced by a woven screen backing.
5
6
7
C. Provide filter media having an average efficiency of 25-30% and an average arrestance of not
less than 90% in accordance with ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76. Provide filters listed by
Underwriters Laboratories as Class 2.
8
9
10
D. The effective filter media shall be not less than 4.5 square feet of media per 1.0 square foot of
filter face area and contain not less than 16 pleats per linear foot. Initial resistance at 500 FPM
approach velocity shall not exceed 0.30 w.g.
11
12
E. Provide 1 thick throwaway fiberglass media type filters for fan coil units and other air moving
equipment, except fan powered boxes.
13
14
15
F. Install filters in the factory fabricated boxes furnished by the unit manufacturer. Provide, for
each unit, the size and number of filters that are standard with the manufacturer for that size unit
and of the thickness specified.
16
G. Provide filters as manufactured by American Air Filter or Farr.
17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
18
3.1
INSTALLATION
19
20
A. Install all equipment as shown or indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer
21
22
23
24
25
26
B. At the time of construction and until final acceptance by Owner, load all filter sections with
filters to fully protect all coils and air distribution systems from dirt and debris. Roll media pre
filters may be used to protect the unit filters during the construction period. Also, replace such
filters as directed by the Architect during construction period. Provide clean specified filters for
final acceptance at a time as directed by the Architect, and remove all used filter media from
premises.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
C. Install air distribution duct smoke detectors required by NFPA 72 and NFPA 90. If there is a
complete building fire detection system required by the contract documents of this project, the
fire detection system provider furnishes the duct detectors to the HVAC installer for HVAC
installation of the duct detector in the proper location of the ducts required by the NFPA code
and the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). The fire detection installer shall then install,
connect, activate, test, and prove all power and control wiring for the AHU duct smoke
detector(s).
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
HVAC: EQUIPMENT
15700 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15741
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
1.2
8
9
10
RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Divisions specifications and
1.3
SCOPE
11
12
a complete and operational installation of direct expansion, air-to-air split system heat pumps.
13
14
B. Work included:
1. Direct expansion, air-to-air split system heat pumps.
15
16
Systems.
17
1.4
18
QUALITY ASSURANCE
19
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
20
2.1
21
22
A. Provide units as manufactured by Lennox Industries Inc., Carrier, or equivalent.

2.2
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
MANUFACTURERS
EQUIPMENT
A. General:
1. Direct expansion, air-to-air mechanical outdoor electric split system heat pump unit with
vertical airflow. Match all factory installed wiring, piping, refrigerant holding charge, and
options with a suitable air-handling unit for proper operation.
2. Unit sound rating shall not exceed values when tested in accordance with ARI Standard
270-95.
2.3
30
COMPONENTS
A. Exterior Heat Pump Unit:
165477
City of Dallas
15741 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Provide units complying with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE standards and with the
NEC. Provide exterior panels constructed of G90 or G60 post-painted galvanized steel with
a 0.20-0.30 mils urethane primer and 0.70 0.80 mils polyester coat on the topside and a
0.15 0.25 mils urethane primer and 0.20 to 0.30 mils polyester coat on the backside.
Panels may also be constructed of galvanized steel treated with a layer of zinc phosphate
primer and coated with a modified polyester powder and baked on to a hard smooth finish.
Provide coating resistant to 1,000 hours of salt spray per ASTM B-117; 500 hours of
humidity exposure per ASTM D2247; and 168 hours of heat resistance per ASTM D3454;
or capable of withstanding 500 hours salt spray when tested to the Federal Method Standard
No. 141 (Method 6061).
Provide cabinet top panel of not more than two pieces.
Provide openings for side electrical connections.
Locate the control box in a separate compartment to provide protection from the weather
and keep sound transmissions to a minimum.
Provide a steel wire fan guard coated with corrosion-resistant PVC (polyvinyl chloride).
Provide steel wire coil guards coated with a non-corrosive PVC (polyvinyl chloride)
coating.
Provide hail guards for condenser coil.
19
20
21
B. Wiring
1. May not touch any hot-gas refrigerant lines.
2. May not touch any sharp metal edges.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
C. Heating/Cooling System:
1. Provide a cooling system capable of operating from 55F (13C) to 125F (52C) ambient
without the installation of additional controls.
2. Provide a heating system capable of operating from 30F (-1.1C) to 75F (24C) without
the installation of additional controls.
3. Provide with one independent compressor circuit.
4. Provide compressor circuit having a self-sealing liquid line access port for reading
refrigerant pressures.
5. Provide compressor circuit having a suction valve that can be fully shut off, while liquid
valve may be front seating to manage refrigerant charge while servicing system.
6. Locate refrigerant access ports inside the cabinet.
7. Provide compressor circuit having an automatic reset high-pressure switch or a highpressure relief valve to protect the compressor from extreme refrigerant pressures.
8. Provide compressor circuit having a hi-capacity liquid line filter-drier to protect the
compressor and thermostatic expansion valve from moisture and dirt.
9. Provide compressor circuit having a R-410a refrigerant system charge as applicable.
10. Copper tubing may not touch sharp metal surfaces.
11. Provide with a 4-way interchange-reversing valve that switches unit from cooling to
heating. Reversing valve operates on pressure differential between outdoor unit and indoor
unit of the system.
12. Provide nickel-chrome electric-resistance elements for auxiliary electrical heat as scheduled.
Provide elements factory wired for single-point wiring connection; with time delay for
element staging, and overcurrent and overheat protective devices.
45
46
47
48
49
D. Outdoor coils:
1. Constructed with enhanced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes and be
pressure leak tested to 500 psig (3477 kPa).
2. Use a maximum fin per inch count of 22 for cleanability.
3. Spiral-wound fins are not acceptable.
50
51
52
E. Compressors:
1. Provide scroll type compressors with sweat connections for the suction and discharge lines.
2. Provide with two-stage operation.
165477
City of Dallas
15741 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Provide resiliently mounted compressors.

Provide with thermal overload protection for all windings with automatic reset.
Provide with crankcase heaters.
Provide with a voltage application range of + 10%/-5% of unit nameplate voltage without
reduction in service factor.
Refrigerant cooled.
Isolated from the outdoor fan air stream to allow system operation check without disrupting
airflow.
Provide with reverse rotation protection.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
F. Heating/Cooling Controls:
1. Support up to two stages of cooling or heating from a thermostat or an external DDC
controller.
2. Have a high-pressure internal relief valve to protect the compressor from extreme pressures.
3. Have a low pressure switch with automatic reset to protect the compressor from loss of
charge and the evaporator coil freezing.
4. Have a solid-state Defrost Control with anti-short cycle (5 minutes) incorporated into the
board. Provide a demand defrost cycle whenever the system heating performance falls
below optimum levels.
5. Provide complete service access for controls.
20
21
22
23
24
G. Outdoor Fan Motor:

1. Direct drive type with permanently lubricated sleeve bearings.
2. Provide with thermal overload protection with automatic reset and be watertight.
3. Provide with motor mount isolated from the fan safety guard.
4. Include a rain shield to provide additional protection from moisture.
25
26
27
H. Outdoor Fans
1. Propeller type, constructed of corrosion resistant material and discharge vertically with a
finger safety guard.
28
2.4
REQUIRED ACCESSORIES
29
30
31
A. Hail Guards:
1. Constructed of galvanized steel, with powder paint finish metal salt spray tested for 1,000
hours ASTM B117.
32
33
34
B. Mounting Base:
1. Constructed of high-density polyethylene structural material or galvanized steel treated with
a layer of zinc phosphate and a baked polyester powder paint coat.
35
36
C. Freezestat
1. Cycles the compressor off when suction line temperature falls below the desired set point.
37
38
D. Time Delay Relay

1. Delays the indoor blower-off time during the cooling cycle.
39
2.5
40
41

A. Tests, Inspections:
1. Run test unit in the factory.
42
PART 3 - EXECUTION
43
3.1
44
INSTALLERS
A. Installers shall be trained in installation of R-410A equipment.
165477
City of Dallas
15741 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.2
2
3
EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation, installers examine units and deem them acceptable to receive.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. Install units per manufacturers instructions.
B. See architectural for exterior unit foundation.
3.4
7
8
9
10
11
CONSTRUCTION
A. Sequences of Operation
1. Unit shall have two stages of heating and cooling.
2. Refrigeration system and outdoor fan operate when a demand for cooling is received.
3. Refrigeration system and outdoor fan operate when a demand for heating is received.
3.5
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

A. Site Tests, Inspection:
1. Equipment Operation Test shall be conducted by manufacturer-trained contractor to verify
proper operation.
2. Provide test sheets, verifying proper system commissioning, to the Owner as a submittal for
final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15741 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15800
1
2
3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
6
7
8
1.2
9
10
11
RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.3
SCOPE
12
13
14
a complete and operational installation of all air distribution items as indicated on the drawings
and as specified.
15
16
17
B. Work Included:
1. Diffuser, grilles, and registers.
2. Ductwork.
18
19
Systems.
20
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
21
22
23
B. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials and
methods meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
24
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
25
2.1
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
26
27
A. Provide all ceiling mounted devices with frames compatible with the ceiling type. Coordinate
required frame style with architectural reflected ceiling plans.
28
B. All adjustable pattern lay in type-ceiling diffusers shall be adjustable without the use of tools.
29
30
C. Provide all ceiling devices mounted in non accessible or limited access ceilings with opposed
blade volume dampers, operated from the front without removing the face.
31
D. Provide all sidewall devices with a gasketed frame for sealing at the wall.
32
33
E. Provide aluminum frame drum louver with aluminum drum air supply grille for Type C air
device.
34
35
36
37
F.
165477
Provide all devices as scheduled or noted. Provide devices of the type, size, capacity,
performance, and by the manufacturer scheduled. Coordinate air device frame type and color
with Architect's room finish schedule to match adjacent surface in which the device will be
installed.
City of Dallas
15800 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
G. Provide devices as manufactured by Titus, Carnes, or Krueger.

2.2
SHEET METAL DUCTWORK IN AIR-CONDITIONED SPACES
3
4
5
A. Construct ducts out of new galvanized steel sheets and erected in a first class manner, straight
and smooth, with joints neatly finished, anchored securely to the building and free from
vibration.
6
7
8
9
B. Construct curved elbows to have a centerline radius equal to 1 1/2 times the width of the duct.
Install air turns in square elbows consisting of curved metal vanes, arranged to permit the air to
follow abrupt turns without appreciable turbulence. Air turns shall be the manufacturer's
standard products, and be quiet and free from vibration.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
C. Fabricate all primary and secondary ductwork of variable air volume systems in accordance with
the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA)
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Second Edition, 1998" and the
ASHRAE Guide. Fabricate all primary ductwork upstream of air terminals to withstand static
pressures, which the system fan is capable of producing at zero airflow, with no credit for coil,
filters, or other system dynamic losses. Fabricate all secondary ductwork downstream of air
terminals to withstand the maximum static pressure that can be developed downstream of any
wide open terminal unit with the system air handling unit fan operating at its maximum external
static pressure. Meet the requirements for the seal class corresponding to the above static
pressures.
20
21
22
23
24
25
D. Fabricate all primary and secondary ductwork of constant volume systems in accordance with
the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. (SMACNA)
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Second Edition, 1998". The duct
static pressure rating for this duct shall be equal to or greater than the external static pressure of
the system fan as scheduled plus 0.35" w.c. or 2 w.c. whichever is the greater. Meet the
requirements for the seal class corresponding to the above static pressure.
26
27
E. Provide Pittsburgh lock or Acme grooved seam longitudinal joints. Cross-break side panels
greater than 10 inches in depth for added stiffness.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
F.
35
36
37
G. Equip each individual air supply duct tap with a volume control device for the manual
adjustment of airflow in each tap. Face bars, blanks, and equalizing grids may not be used to
regulate airflow.
38
39
40
41
42
H. Install volume dampers within ducts or plenums where shown on the drawings and where
required for balancing. Volume dampers shall have end bearings and be multi blade type with
opposed acting blades linked together and controlled by a single operator. Multi blade dampers
shall be not less than No. 16 gauge galvanized steel mounted to plenum or ductwork per
SMACNA requirements.
43
44
45
46
I.
165477
At each major branch from a primary rectangular or square trunk duct, and where shown on the
drawings, install a splitter damper or multiblade adjustable air pickup. Provide splitter dampers
having end bearings and consisting of a blade constructed of 20 gauge-galvanized steel securely
riveted or welded to a square operating rod. The length of the splitter blade shall be 1 1/2 times
the width of the split in the main duct, but in no case less than 12". Provide multi blade
adjustable pickups as manufactured by Titus Model AG 45 or equivalent with the operator
adjustable from the duct exterior.
Fasten round or oval ductwork together with a minimum of three sheet metal screws equally
spaced around the perimeter of the duct and taped with an approved duct sealing tape. Furnish
ductwork complete with all factory fabricated starting collars, Y shaped branch takeoffs,
adjustable elbows, etc.
City of Dallas
15800 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J.
Where ducts are in mechanical rooms or unfinished areas, or where dampers occur above lift out
ceilings, provide regulators of stamped galvanized steel, lever type with locking screw mounted
on face of ductwork. For all other areas, where damper adjustments cannot be accessed through
the ceiling, provide concealed type regulators with adjustable cover plate as manufactured by
Young Regulator Model No. 315 with 2 1/4" diameter cover plate or equivalent. Provide
damper quadrants, volume dampers, and other duct flow control quadrants as manufactured by
Young Regulator or equivalent.
8
9
10
K. On the inlet and outlet of each piece of air moving equipment or terminal unit, unless noted
otherwise, install a flexible connection made with sufficient slack to render it flexible. Refer to
Section 15070 Mechanical Vibration Isolation and Sound Control.
11
12
13
L. Where air intakes and discharges are indicated on the drawings and no air device is indicated,
install 1/4" bird screens over each duct opening set in galvanized steel frames and securely
attach to the openings.
14
15
M. Provide 26 gauge galvanized steel counterflashings for all ducts penetrating roofs and for all roof
mounted equipment unless directed otherwise by the Architect.
16
2.3
METAL DUCTWORK IN NON AIR-CONDITIONED SPACES.
17
A. Construct exhaust ductwork systems of Aluminum sheet metal.
18
19
B. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with standard, one-side
bright finish where ducts are exposed to view, and mill finish for concealed ducts.
20
2.4
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
21
22
23
A. Flexible ductwork: provide insulated type, UL 181 Class I with airtight inner core and steel wire
helix, fiberglass insulation, and aluminized vapor barrier. Provide ductwork suitable for a
maximum velocity of 5000 fpm minimum, and a pressure rating of 2 w.g. positive.
24
B. Secure duct with metal bands.
25
C. Duct shall be ATCO Rubber Products, UPC #030, Flexible Technologies, or M-KF.
26
PART 3 - EXECUTION
27
3.1
INSTALLATION
28
29
A. Install all ductwork as recommended by SMACNA and as shown or indicated on the drawings.
Coordinate ductwork with all other trades and elements of the building construction.
30
31
B. Provide all ductwork accessories as specified, shown, or indicated on the drawings. Install as
recommended by SMACNA and the manufacturer.
32
33
34
C. Install ductwork in a neat, workmanlike manner with ducts generally parallel to structure and
tops of ducts as high as possible against building construction. Provide offsets accordingly to
avoid obstructions, piping, or structural members.
35
D. Install and support flexible ductwork as recommended by SMACNA and the manufacturer.
36
37
E. Install all kitchen exhaust ductwork in accordance with the requirements of all governing code
authorities.
165477
City of Dallas
15800 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
F.
Install air distribution duct smoke detectors required by NFPA 72 and NFPA 90. If there is a
complete building fire detection system required by the contract documents of this project, the
fire detection system provider furnishes the duct detectors to the HVAC installer for HVAC
installation of the duct detector in the proper location of the ducts required by the NFPA code
and the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). The fire detection installer shall then install,
connect, activate, test, and prove all power and control wiring for the AHU duct smoke
detector(s).
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15800 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15830
1
2
3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
6
7
8
1.2
9
10
11
RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.3
SCOPE
12
13
14
a complete and operational installation of all air handling items as shown on the drawings and
specified.
15
16
17
B. Work Included:
1. Ventilation/ Exhaust fans
2. Wall louvers
18
19
Systems.
20
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
21
22
23
B. When requested, provide Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials

24
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
25
2.1
meet or
VENTILATING & EXHAUST FANS
26
A. Provide fans of all types, sizes, capacities, and with accessories as scheduled on the drawings.
27
B. Provide fans carrying the certified rating seal authorized by AMCA.
28
29
C. Provide statically and dynamically balanced fan wheels, selected to operate within the stable
range on its performance curve.
30
31
D. Provide all roof mounted fans with 14 high factory fabricated, galvanized, Insulated curbs as
applicable.
32
E. Provide wall mounted fans with wall collar and safety screen.
33
34
F. Unless scheduled or specified otherwise elsewhere, provide each fan with an automatic
backdraft damper.
35
G. Provide fans as manufactured by Acme, Greenheck, Loren Cook, Penn Ventilator, or equivalent.
165477
City of Dallas
15830 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.2
WALL LOUVERS
2
3
A. Provide extruded aluminum drainable blade type louvers per the drawings manufactured from
0.125 "material minimum". Provide minimum free area as noted on the drawings.
B. Provide factory installed bird screen.
C. Coordinate actual dimensions of louvers with Architect prior to submittals.
D. Provide finish and color as directed by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
9
10
11
12
13
INSTALLATION
A. Install all equipment as shown or indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15830 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15900
1
2
3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
6
7
8
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
9
10
A. All other Sections of Division 15, including but not limited to the following:
1. Section 15010 - General Requirements for Mechanical Systems
11
12
13
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and
drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following:
1. Section 16411 Disconnect Switches
14
1.3
SCOPE
15
A. Provide 7-day programmable industrial grade digital thermostats for each Air Handling Unit.
16
17
B. Work Included:
1. Control of HVAC systems
18
19
C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 15010, General Requirements for

Mechanical Systems.
20
1.4
21
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. See specification 15010, paragraph 1.2.
22
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23
2.1
24
25
26
27
MANUFACTURERS
A. All temperature controls, except those installed on the various items of equipment by the
equipment manufacturer or specified otherwise herein, shall be the product of one manufacturer
and shall be TAC, Entech, or Honeywell.
2.2
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
MATERIALS
A. Thermostats: Provide industrial type 7-day programmable industrial grade digital thermostats.
Thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type with adjustable sensitivity. They shall have a
sensing element capable of responding to a temperature change of one tenth of one degree, and
shall control the space temperature to plus or minus 1 deg. F, set for 75 deg. F.
1. Covers for the thermostats shall include tamperproof socket head screws.
2. Calibration shall be possible from the front of the thermostat without removing the
thermostat body from the wall mounting plate.
3. Temperature setpoint adjustment shall be concealed.
4. For zones with heating and cooling capacity provide a thermostat dead band of at least 3
deg. F.
5. All thermostats shall have a setback/set-up feature.
165477
City of Dallas
15900 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3
4
A. Provide all control wiring required to interconnect all thermostats and AHUs.
3.2
5
6
WIRING
INSTALLATION
A. Mount thermostats for all AHUs on wall where shown on drawings at 4 AFF.
3.3
COMPLETION
7
8
9
10
A. Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall start-up the system and perform all
applicable testing and debugging operations. Provide temporary power to test non-power-wired
equipment. Perform an acceptance test in the presence of the Owner's representative, the
Architect, and the Engineer.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
B. Owner's Instruction: Provide the specified copies of an operator's manual describing all
operating and routine maintenance service procedures for the system. Provide instruction of the
Owner's designated representatives in these procedures during the start-up and test period. The
duration of the instruction period shall be no less than three (2) hours. These instructions are to
be conducted during normal working hours. The instructions shall consist of both hands-on and
classroom type training at the jobsite.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15900 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15950
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL:
5
6
A. This specification contains requirements for the construction contractor, as well as for the
independently contracted Test and Balance (T&B) contractor, as separately delineated herein.
7
8
9
10
B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of the air conditioning systems and related ancillary
equipment will be performed by an impartial technically qualified TAB firm selected by the
Owner and paid by the Contractor. Contractor shall include the enough allowance in their bid
amount for the TAB services.
11
1.2
12
A. All other Sections of Division 15.
13
14
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and
15
1.3
SUMMARY OF WORK
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
A. Testing and Balancing Agency Qualifications

1. Perform the TAB of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems by a
technical firm or balancing agency certified in Air and Hydronic TAB and sound and
vibration measurement by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National
Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). The T&B agency will also employ a permanent
full time Registered Professional Engineer on staff with a minimum of five years specialized
experience in testing and balancing. The testing and balancing agency must possess
calibrated instruments, qualified Engineers, and skilled technicians to perform required tests
in accordance with the AABC National Standards or NEBB Procedural Standards for TAB.
2. The T&B agency shall be an independent firm separate and distinct from; not to be
associated with, or be subsidiary of a firm performing work under other Sections of Division
15.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
B. Testing and Balancing Agency Responsibilities

1. Submittals
a. Engineer and Technicians Data: Submit proof that the agency, the Test and Balance
Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform
the procedures meet the qualifications specified.
b. Sample Form: Submit sample forms, proposed for use on this project, for approval.
c. Certified Reports: Submit TAB reports bearing the seal and signature of the Certified
Agency.
2. Review the construction documents, submittal, and shop drawings for balanceability.
Submit a list of suggestions or recommendations to the Architect for consideration.
3. Perform a job site observation prior to the ceiling installation to verify that ductwork,
piping, dampers, valves, and air terminal devices have been installed per the contract
documents. Submit in writing to the Architect a list of any discrepancies noted.
4. TAB the HVAC systems in accordance with AABC National Standards for field
measurement or NEBB Procedural Standards for TAB.
5. Verify the operation, calibration, and set points of all HVAC systems controls.
165477
City of Dallas
15950 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
6.
Submit in writing to the Architect a list of deficiencies for correction by the installing
contractor. In the event a deficiency remains after being reported as corrected, the
balancing agency may submit an itemized request for its lost time for payment by the
installing contractor. Correct all deficiencies that prevent proper TAB work from being
completed prior to submittal of the Final TAB Report.
7. Measure and record space temperature readings after occupancy for a period of two
consecutive eight hour periods. Make adjustments if necessary to achieve an even
temperature distribution.
8. Submit six copies of a certified, bound, typewritten report for approval by the Owner and
Architect including all test report data, instrument calibration, and schematic drawings of
the HVAC layout.
9. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure
that satisfactory conditions are being maintained. Submit a report of the findings to the
Owner and Architect.
10. Provide post substantial visit(s) to make inspection(s) in the building during the opposite
season from which the initial adjustments were made. At that time, make any necessary
modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the
system for all seasons. Submit a report of the findings to the Owner and Engineer.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
C. Contractor Responsibilities
1. Mechanical
a. Provide the T&B firm with copies of all Drawings, Specifications, Shop Drawings,
Submittal Data, Up-to-Date Revisions, Change Orders, and other data required for
planning, preparation, and execution of the TAB work.
b. Coordinate the HVAC installation and start up schedule with the T&B Agency and
General Contractor to allow sufficient time prior to the completion date for testing and
balancing to be conducted and deficiency items corrected and retested. Provide
sufficient personnel and utilities to operate the HVAC systems during normal and
overtime hours to meet the completion date and testing and balancing schedule.
c. Install all systems complete and provide balancing valves, test plugs, thermometer
wells, flow measurement orifices, volume dampers, splitter dampers, etc. necessary for
TAB work. Operate all equipment at the Contractors expense for a minimum of three
consecutive days prior to balancing in order to make certain the equipment is free from
mechanical defects, runs smoothly and quietly, and performs satisfactorily to meet the
requirements set forth in the contract documents.
d. Provide written notification to the T&B agency and General Contractor the systems are
ready for balancing. This Contractor is responsible for compensating the T&B Agency
for time lost should the systems not be ready for balancing.
e. Correct any deficiency items noted during testing and balancing including controls
calibration, installation of balancing devices, sheave replacements, and motor
replacements at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide written notification to the
T&B Agency and General Contractor when systems are ready for retesting. This
Contractor is responsible for compensating the T&B Agency for time lost should the
systems not be ready for retesting.
f. Install all valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices in a manner that will leave
them accessible and readily adjustable.
g. Promptly correct deficiencies of materials and workmanship, if any, identified as
delaying completion of TAB work.
h. The Control Contractor provides and installs the control system, complete with all
temperature, pressure, and humidity sensors installed and calibrated for accurate
control.
165477
City of Dallas
15950 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
3
4
A. The T&B agency must have a complete set of instruments as dictated by AABC or NEBB
standards.
5
6
7
B. Make all calibration histories, for each instrument used for measurement, available for
examination. Calibration, accuracy, and maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance
with AABC or NEBB standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
T&B AGENCY
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A. General: The T&B firm tests all HVAC equipment and systems and makes final adjustments
and corrections necessary to place the systems in proper operating condition.
1. After TAB, patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those
removed. Seal air test drilled openings with plastic plugs to allow future access. Seal
insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.
2. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed
control levers, and similar controls and devices to show final settings.
17
18
19
20
21
B. Air Distribution Devices:

1. Proportion each air handling unit, air terminal, damper, register, diffuser, and grille so that
air distribution will be as scheduled, with tests showing air quantities indicated for each inlet
and outlet that do not vary by more than plus or minus 10 percent from those indicated on
the drawings.
22
3.2
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES T&B AGENCY

A. Perform the following testing and balancing functions in accordance with the AABC National
Standards or NEBB Procedural Standards for TAB.
1. Diffusers and Grilles - Determine air velocity at outlets with a velometer or anemometer
and, using air device manufacturer's data, calculate the delivery CFM, or determine CFM
flow with a test hood.
2. Fans - Test supply, return, and exhaust fans and adjust fan blower speeds to achieve
specified CFM.
3. Current and Voltage - Measure and record motor full load amperage and voltage. Actual
amperages higher than nameplate full load amps are not acceptable. Verify heater sizes.
4. Pitot-tube Traverse - Perform a Pitot-tube traverse (minimum of 16 points) on main supply
and return ducts to obtain design CFM. If a Pitot-tube traverse is not practical, the
summation of the outlets or inlets may be used with an explanation of why a traverse was
not conducted.
5. Outside Air - Test and adjust system minimum outside air by Pitot-tube traverse. If a Pitottube traverse is not practical, the percentage of outside air may be determined by
calculations from the return air, outside air, and mixed air temperatures when the
temperature differential between the return and outside air is greater than 20oF.
6. Static Pressure - Test and record system static pressures, including entering and leaving
static pressures of each fan, coil section, and filter section. For VAV systems, establish and
record the minimum operating static pressure setpoint required for the air handling unit to
achieve design airflow at the last terminal box in the system.
7. Air Temperature - Take wet bulb and dry bulb air temperatures on the entering and leaving
side of each cooling coil. Take wet bulb and dry bulb temperatures for outside air. Take
dry bulb temperature on the entering and leaving side of each heating coil.
165477
City of Dallas
15950 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Main Ducts - Adjust main ducts to within design CFM requirements and traverse for total
CFM quantities.
9. Branch Ducts - Adjust branch ducts to within design CFM requirements. Multi-diffuser
branch ducts shall have at least one volume damper completely open.
10. Tolerances
a. Test and balance each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10% of design
requirements.
b. Test and balance each zone and air terminal to within plus 10% and minus 5% of design
requirements.
c. Test and balance each fan and air-handling unit to within plus 10% and minus 5% of
design requirements. Test and balance units having filters with clean filters in place.
11. Minimizing Drafts - Adjust all diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts in all areas.
13
14
B. Balance constant volume air systems to provide the scheduled CFM of air flow at each air device
with the supply fan operating at the specified air flow volume.
15
8.
3.3
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
VERIFICATION OF TEMPERATURE CONTROL T&B AGENCY

A. With the assistance of the building control systems contractor, verify the operation and
calibration of all temperature control systems. Conduct the following tests:
1. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and
are functional, including all electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water reset, and
fire and freeze stats.
2. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for design operating conditions.
3. Verify the accuracy of the final settings by taking temperature readings in a typical
conditioned space for each separately controlled zone.
3.4
TEST AND BALANCE REPORT T&B AGENCY
25
26
27
28
A. Provide typewritten Final TAB Report on 8.5 x 11 inch white bond paper, in bound form with an
index and tabs to segregate the data into logical sections. Include in the summary information
on special testing conditions and results. Include a listing of the T&B Agency, Contractor,
Owner, Architect, and Engineer.
29
30
B. Present data entered on AABC or NEBB standard forms (modified as necessary to include
additional data hereinafter required) or pre-approved acceptable equivalent thereof.
31
32
C. The report shall contain copies of pump curves, fan curves, field test reports and as-built plans
(size 11 x 17 inches) of the HVAC systems.
33
34
D. Include a certification sheet containing the seal and name, corporate address, telephone number,
and signature of the Certified T&B Engineer.
35
36
E. Include a listing of the instrumentations used for the procedures along with the proof of
calibration.
37
38
39
F.
40
41
42
G. Air Outlet Test Report Forms Identify each grille, diffuser, register, and terminal box as to
location (room number) and area served. Record the size, type, and manufacturer of each
diffuser, grille, and register.
43
44
45
46
H. DX Air Handling Unit/ Heat Pump Test Report Forms - Record the manufacturer, model
number, and motor nameplate data and all design and manufacturer-rated data including supply,
return, and outside airflows, fan rpm, static pressures, and break horsepower. Report the
following:
165477
System Identification Identify and number each supply, return, and exhaust opening on
reduced plans no larger than 11 x 17 inches to correspond to the numbers used on the report data
sheets.
City of Dallas
15950 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
I.
3.5
Total actual CFM by traverse. Include duct traverse form. If not practical, the sum of the
outlets may be used, or a combination of each of these procedures.
Inlet and outlet static pressures at the fan, coil, and filter sections.
Actual outside air and return air total CFM and CO2 readings at minimum outside air
conditions.
Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor.
Final RPM of the fan and motor.
Fan and motor sheave sizes and center distance. Belt size and quantity.
Coil entering air dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures, leaving air dry bulb and wet bulb
temperatures, and air pressure drops.
Outside air entering dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures.
Fan Test Report Forms - Record the manufacturer, model number, motor nameplate data, and all
design and manufacturer-rated data. Report the following:
1. Total actual CFM by traverse. Include duct traverse form. If not practical, the sum of the
outlets may be used, or a combination of each of these procedures.
2. Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan.
3. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor.
4. Final RPM of the fan and motor.
5. Fan and motor sheave sizes and center distance. Belt size and quantity.
DUCTWORK AND CONTROLS TESTS CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
A. Ductwork:
1. Perform duct leakage testing on all supply, return, and exhaust ductwork in accordance with
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Seal any ductwork not meeting the
following acceptable leakage rates and retest until test is successful.
31
32
33
34
B. Controls:
1. The Contractor calibrates and adjusts all thermostats, air terminal controllers, static pressure
sensors, and other controlling devices. Replace defective controllers at no cost to the
Owner.
35
Leakage Rates:
Low Pressure Supply
Low Pres. Return/Exhaust
Medium Pressure Supply
3.6
36
37
38
39
40
41
Allowable %
4% @
4% @
2% @
Static Pressure
2" w.g.
2" w.g.
4" w.g.
SYSTEM OPERATING TESTS CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. After the successful completion of all equipment start up and test requirements, perform the
following formal testing and balancing on the complete mechanical system:
1. Final Operating Test: Perform an operating test to the satisfaction of the Architect and the
Owner for a period of not less than 8 hours. Should any element of the system not perform
properly, make all required corrections, and repeat the test until successfully performed.
3.7
FINAL JOB MEETING
42
43
44
A. At job completion, all Division 15 and 16 representatives meet at the job site and demonstrate
the operation of all equipment and systems. Advise the Architect and Owner in writing 10 days
prior to the time and date of this inspection.
45
46
47
48
49
B. System Performance Verification: T&B Agency

1. At the time of final inspection, the T&B Agency may be required to recheck, in the presence
of the Owner's representative, specific and random selections of data, air quantities, and air
motion recorded in the Certified Report.
2. The Owners representative selects the points and areas for recheck.
165477
City of Dallas
15950 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3.
4.
Measurement and test procedures will be the same as approved for work forming basis of
Certified Report.
If random tests elicit a measured flow deviation of 10% or more from that recorded in the
Certified Report: the report will be rejected, all systems will be retested, new data recorded,
new Certified Report submitted, and new inspection tests made, at no additional cost to
Owner.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15950 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 15995
2
3
4
PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A.
Commissioning. Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems

perform interactively according to the Owners Project Requirements (OPR). Commissioning
during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific objectives according to
the Contract Documents:
1. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the manufacturers
recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and that they receive adequate
operational checkout by installing contractors.
2. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems.
3. Verify that O&M documentation is complete.
4. Verify that the Owners operating personnel are adequately trained
17
18
B.
The systems to be commissioned include domestic hot water, mechanical (HVAC) equipment and
related controls.
19
20
21
22
C.
Commissioning requires the participation of Division 15 and 16 contractors to ensure that all
systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. Division 15 shall be
familiar with all parts of the commissioning plan issued by the CxA (Commissioning Authority)
and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents.
23
24
25
26
27
28
D.
Commissioning Team. The members of the commissioning team consist of the Commissioning
Authority (CxA), the designated representative of the Owner, the General Contractor (GC or
Contractor), the architect and design Engineers (particularly the mechanical Engineer), the
Mechanical Contractor (MC), the Electrical Contractor (EC), the TAB representative, any other
installing subcontractors or suppliers of equipment. The Owners building or plant
operator/Engineer is also a member of the commissioning team.
29
1.2
30
31
32
33
COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY
A.
1.3
The commissioning authority and/or agency shall be selected by the building Owner and paid by
the general contractor. Contractor shall include the enough allowance in their bid amount for this
commissioning services.
COMMISSIONING PLAN
34
35
36
37
A.
Commissioning Plan. The commissioning plan provides guidance in the execution of the
commissioning process. Just after the initial commissioning scoping meeting the CxA will provide
the plan, which will continue to evolve and expand as the project progresses. The Specifications
will take precedence over the Commissioning Plan.
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
B.
Commissioning Process. The following narrative provides a brief overview of the typical
commissioning tasks during construction and the general order in which they occur.
1. Commissioning during design begins at the initiation of the Owners Project Requirements
development and documentation, and proceeds through commissioning specification
development, preliminary commissioning plan development and plans and specifications
review.
2. Commissioning during construction begins with a scoping meeting conducted by the CxA
where the commissioning process is reviewed with the commissioning team members.
165477
City of Dallas
15995 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
1.4
Additional meetings will be required throughout construction, scheduled by the CxA with
necessary parties attending, to plan, scope, coordinate, schedule future activities and resolve
problems.
Equipment documentation is submitted to the CxA during normal submittals, including
detailed start-up procedures.
The CxA works with the Subcontractors in developing startup plans and startup
documentation formats, including construction/verification checklists to be completed, during
the startup process.
In general, the checkout and performance verification proceeds from simple to complex; from
component level to equipment to systems and intersystem levels with
construction/verification checklists being completed before functional testing.
The Subcontractors, under their own direction, execute and document the
construction/verification checklists and perform startup and initial checkout. The CxA
documents that the checklists and startup were completed according to the approved plans.
This may include the CxA witnessing start-up of selected equipment.
The Subcontractors develop specific equipment and system functional performance test
(FPT) procedures. The CxA assists and reviews the procedures.
The procedures are executed by the Subcontractors, under the observation of the CxA.
Items of non-compliance in material, installation or setup are corrected at the Subcontractors
expense and the system retested.
The CxA reviews the O&M documentation for completeness.
Commissioning is completed before Substantial Completion.
The CxA reviews, pre-approves and coordinates the training provided by the Subcontractors
and verifies that it was completed.
Deferred testing is conducted, as specified or required.
RESPONSIBILITIES
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
A.
49
50
51
B.
General Contractor (GC)

1. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the CxA, and with the CxA ensure
that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master schedule.
2. Include the cost of commissioning planning, coordination and execution in the contract price.
3. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders and approved
submittals and shop drawings related to commissioned equipment to the CxA in electronic
PDF format.
4. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, O&M
data, commissioning tasks and training.
5. Ensure that all Subcontractors execute their commissioning responsibilities according to the
Contract Documents and schedule.
6. A representative shall attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary meetings
scheduled by the CxA to facilitate the Cx process.
7. Coordinate the training of Owner personnel.
8. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and
updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.
Warranty Period
1. Ensure that Subcontractors execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing,
witnessed by the CxA, according to the specifications.
2. Ensure that Subs correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and
as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
165477
Mechanical Contractors
The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the mechanical contractors of Division 15 are as
follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only):
City of Dallas
15995 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Construction and Acceptance Phases

1. Include the cost of commissioning planning, coordination and execution in the contract price.
2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data,
commissioning documentation, O&M data and training.
3. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the
Commissioning process.
4. Contractors shall provide the CxA with normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals of
commissioned equipment in electronic PDF format.
5. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual submittals, to the
CxA for development of start-up and functional testing procedures.
a.
Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, operating,
troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any Owner-contracted
tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty
information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force
clearly identified. In addition, the installation, start-up and checkout materials that are
actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be
used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning
Agent.
b.
The Commissioning Agent may request further documentation necessary for the
commissioning process.
6. Provide a copy of the O&M manuals and submittals of commissioned equipment, through
normal channels, to the CxA for review and approval.
7. Contractors shall assist (along with the design Engineers) in clarifying the operation and
control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or
equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.
8. Preparing the specific functional performance test procedures with the assistance of the CxA.
Subs shall review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and equipment protection and
provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during the tests.
9. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturers start-up procedures
and/or the prefunctional checklists from the CxA for all commissioned equipment. Submit to
CxA for review and approval prior to startup.
10. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the mechanical-related portions of
the prefunctional checklists for all commissioned equipment.
11. Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational checkout
procedures, providing a copy to the CxA.
12. Address current A/E punch list items before functional testing. Air and water TAB shall be
completed with discrepancies and problems remedied before functional testing of the
respective air- or water-related systems.
13. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the functional
performance tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon
schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and
problem solving.
14. Perform functional performance testing under the direction of the CxA for specified
equipment. Assist the CxA in interpreting the monitoring data, as necessary.
15. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as interpreted
by the CxA, and A/E and retest the equipment.
17. Prepare redline record drawings for all drawings and final records for contractor-generated
coordination drawings.
18. Provide training of the Owners operating personnel as specified.
165477
City of Dallas
15995 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
19. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the
validity of the warranty.
Warranty Period
1. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witnessed by the CxA,
according to the specifications.
2. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built drawings
for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
C.
Mechanical Contractor.
The responsibilities of the HVAC mechanical contractor, during construction and acceptance
phases in addition to those listed in (B) are:
1. Provide startup for all HVAC equipment.
2. Assist and cooperate with the Test, Adjust and Balance (TAB) contractor and CxA by:
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
D.
Teas Adjust and Balance Contractor. The duties of the TAB contractor, in addition to those listed
in (B) are:
1. Submit the outline of the TAB plan and approach for each system and component to the CxA
prior to starting the TAB. This plan will be developed after the TAB has some familiarity
with the control system.
2. The submitted plan will include:
a.
Reviewed the construction documents and the systems to sufficiently understand the
design intent for each system.
b.
All field checkout sheets and logs to be used that list each piece of equipment to be
tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.
c.
Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue.
d.
Plan for formal deficiency reports (scope, frequency and distribution) and final report.
4. Submit reports of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others, contract
interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CxA as required.
5. Communicate to the mechanical contractor all setpoint and parameter changes made or
problems and discrepancies identified during TAB, which affect the control system setup and
operation.
6. Provide a draft TAB report to the CxA. The report should follow the latest reporting
recommendations by the Associated Air Balance Council.
7. Provide the CxA with any requested data, gathered, but not shown on the draft reports.
8. Provide final TAB reports in the number required.
49
50
51
52
F.
Equipment Suppliers
1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific
responsibilities of the Owner to keep warranties in force.
2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with Subcontractors.
a.
3.
4.
5.
165477
Putting all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continuing the operation
during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as required.
b.
Including cost of sheaves and belts replacement that may be required by TAB.
c.
Providing temperature and pressure taps in piping and equipment according to the
Construction Documents for TAB and commissioning testing. Verify locations for
taps with the CxA before installation.
Install a P/T plug at each water sensor, which is an input point at each coil and heat
exchanger (chiller, boiler, pump, etc.).
Prepare a schedule for Division 15000 pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning,
equipment start-up and TAB start and completion for use by the CxA. Update the schedule
as appropriate.
Be proactive in seeing that commissioning processes are executed and that the CxA has the
scheduling information needed to efficiently execute the commissioning process.
City of Dallas
15995 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3.
4.
5.
1.5
10
11
12
13
14
Include all special tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of
equipment) required for testing equipment according to these Contract Documents in the base
bid price to the Contractor, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used
by the CxA.
Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and
testing procedures.
Review test procedures for equipment installed by factory representatives.
SCHEDULING
A.
The CxA will work with the GC according to established protocols to schedule the commissioning
activities. The CxA will provide sufficient notice to the CM and GC for scheduling commissioning
activities. The GC will integrate all commissioning activities into the master schedule. All parties
will address scheduling problems and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to
expedite the commissioning process.
15
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
16
2.1
TEST EQUIPMENT
17
18
19
20
21
A.
All standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required
functional performance testing shall be provided by the Division contractor for the equipment
being tested. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 15000 shall ultimately be
responsible for all standard testing equipment for the HVAC system in Division 15000, except for
equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities.
22
23
24
B.
Special equipment, tools and instruments, wiring, connectors and software (only available from
vendor, specific to a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these
Contract Documents shall be included in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
C.
All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system
performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the
following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have
a certified calibration within the past year and a resolution of + or - 0.5F. Pressure sensors shall
have an accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and
have been calibrated within the last year. All equipment shall be calibrated according to the
manufacturers recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be
affixed or certificates readily available.
33
PART 3 EXECUTION
34
3.1
MEETINGS
35
36
A.
Scoping Meeting. Within 90 days of commencement of construction, the CxA will schedule, plan
and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting with the entire commissioning team in attendance.
37
38
39
40
B.
Miscellaneous Meetings. Other meetings will be planned and conducted by the CxA as
construction progresses. These meetings will cover coordination, deficiency resolution and
planning issues with particular Subcontractors. The CxA will plan these meetings and will
minimize unnecessary time being spent by Subcontractors.
41
3.2
REPORTING
165477
City of Dallas
15995 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
A.
The CxA will regularly communicate with all members of the commissioning team, keeping them
apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling changes through memos, progress reports, etc.
3
4
B.
Testing or review approvals and non-conformance and deficiency reports are made regularly with
the review and testing as described in later sections.
5
6
7
8
C.
A final summary report by the CxA will be provided focusing on evaluating commissioning
process issues and identifying areas where the process could be improved. All acquired
documentation, logs, minutes, reports, deficiency lists, communications, findings, unresolved
issues, etc., will be compiled in appendices and provided with the summary report.
3.3
SUBMITTALS
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A.
The CxA will provide appropriate contractors with a specific request for the type of submittal
documentation the CxA requires to facilitate the commissioning work. These requests will be
integrated into the normal submittal process and protocol of the construction team. At minimum,
the request will include the manufacturer and model number, the manufacturers printed
installation and detailed start-up procedures, full sequences of operation, O&M data, performance
data, any performance test procedures, control drawings and details of Owner contracted tests. In
addition, the installation and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and
the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be
submitted to the Commissioning Authority. All documentation requested by the CxA will be
included by the Subcontractors in their O&M manual contributions.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
B.
The Commissioning Authority will review and approve submittals related to the commissioned
equipment for conformance to the Contract Documents as it relates to the commissioning process,
to the functional performance of the equipment and adequacy for developing test procedures. This
review is intended primarily to aid in the development of functional testing procedures and only
secondarily to verify compliance with equipment specifications. The Commissioning Authority
will notify the appropriate persons as requested, of items missing or areas that are not in
conformance with Contract Documents and which require resubmission.
27
28
29
C.
The CxA may request additional design narrative from the Mechanical Contractor, depending on
the completeness of the design intent documentation and sequences provided with the
Specifications.
30
31
D.
These submittals to the CxA do not constitute compliance for O&M manual documentation. The
O&M manuals are the responsibility of the Contractor, though the CxA will review them.
32
3.4
START-UP, CONSTRUCTION/VERIFICATION CHECKLISTS AND INITIAL CHECKOUT
33
34
A.
The following procedures apply to all equipment to be commissioned. Some systems that are not
comprised so much of actual dynamic machinery may have very simplified PCs and startup.
35
36
37
38
39
40
B.
General. Construction/verification checklists are important to ensure that the equipment and
systems are hooked up and operational. It ensures that functional performance testing (FPT) (indepth system checkout) may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece of equipment
receives full prefunctional checkout. No sampling strategies are used by the contractors. The
prefunctional testing for a given system must be successfully completed prior to formal functional
performance testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C.
Start-up and Initial Checkout Plan. The CxA shall assist the commissioning team members
responsible for startup of any equipment in developing detailed start-up plans for all equipment.
The primary role of the CxA in this process is to ensure that there is written documentation that
each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have been completed. Parties responsible for
construction/verification checklists and startup are identified in the commissioning scoping
meeting and in the checklist forms. Parties responsible for executing functional performance tests
are identified in the testing requirements.
165477
City of Dallas
15995 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1.
2.
3.
The checklists indicate required procedures to be executed as part of startup and initial
checkout of the systems and the party responsible for their execution.
The Contractor determines which trade is responsible for executing and documenting each of
the line item tasks and notes that trade on the form. Each form may have more than one trade
responsible for its execution.
The subcontractor responsible for the purchase of the equipment develops the full start-up
plan by combining (or adding to) the CxAs checklists with the manufacturers detailed startup and checkout procedures from the O&M manual and the normally used field checkout
sheets. The plan will include checklists and procedures with specific boxes or lines for
recording and documenting the checking and inspections of each procedure and a summary
statement with a signature block at the end of the plan.
The full start-up plan could consist of something as simple as:
a.
The prefunctional checklists developed jointly by the CxA and the subcontractors.
b.
The manufacturers standard written start-up procedures copied from the installation
manuals with check boxes by each procedure and a signature block added by hand at
the end.
c.
The manufacturers normally used field checkout sheets.
4.
5.
6.
The subcontractor submits the full startup plan to the CxA for review and approval.
The CxA reviews and approves the procedures and the format for documenting them, noting
any procedures that need to be added.
The full start-up procedures and the approval form may be provided to the CM for review
and approval, depending on management protocol.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
D.
Execution of Prefunctional Checklists and Startup.

1. Four weeks prior to startup, the Subcontractors and vendors schedule startup and checkout
with the GC and CxA. The performance of the construction/verification checklists, startup
and checkout are directed and executed by the Sub or vendor. When checking off
construction/verification checklists, signatures may be required of other Subcontractors for
verification of completion of their work.
2. The CxA shall observe, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of primary equipment,
unless there are multiple units, (in which case a sampling strategy may be used by the CxA).
3. For lower-level components of equipment, (e.g., VAV boxes, sensors, controllers), the CxA
shall observe a sampling of the construction/verification and start-up procedures. The
sampling procedures are identified in the commissioning plan.
4. The Subcontractors and vendors shall execute startup and provide the CxA with a signed and
dated copy of the completed start-up and construction/verification tests and checklists.
5. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task on the
construction/verification checklist was actually performed shall initial or check that item off.
It is not acceptable for supervisors to fill out these forms if they have not witnessed the test.
41
42
43
44
45
F.
Deficiencies, Non-Conformance and Approval in Checklists and Startup.

1. The Subcontractors shall clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and
prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the
procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding
deficiencies are provided to the CxA within two days of test completion.
165477
City of Dallas
15995 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.
3.5
The CxA reviews the report and submits either a non-compliance report or an approval form
to the Subcontractor or GC. The CxA shall work with the Subcontractors and vendors to
correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. The CxA will involve the GC and
others as necessary. The installing Subcontractors or vendors shall correct all areas that are
deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the
CxA as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up
report and a Statement of Correction on the original non-compliance report. When
satisfactorily completed, the CxA recommends approval of the execution of the checklists
and startup of each system using a standard form.
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
11
A.
This sub-section applies to all commissioning functional performance testing for all divisions.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
B.
Objectives and Scope. The objective of functional testing is to demonstrate that each system is
operating according to the documented design intent and Contract Documents. Functional testing
facilitates bringing the systems from a state of substantial completion to full dynamic operation.
Additionally, during the testing process, areas of deficient performance are identified and
corrected, improving the operation and functioning of the systems.
In general, each system should be operated through all modes of operation (seasonal, occupied,
unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part- and full-load) where there is a specified system response.
Verifying each sequence in the sequences of operation is required. Proper responses to such
modes and conditions as power failure, freeze condition, no flow, equipment failure, etc. shall also
be tested.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
C.
Development of Test Procedures. Before test procedures are written, the CxA shall obtain all
requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems,
including an updated points list, program code, control sequences and parameters. The CxA shall
assist the contractor in developing specific test procedures and forms to verify and document
proper operation of each piece of equipment and system. Each Sub or vendor responsible to
execute a test, shall provide assistance to the CxA in developing the procedures review (answering
questions about equipment, operation, sequences, etc.). Prior to execution, the Sub(s) shall review
the tests for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection. The CxA may submit the tests
to the A/E for review, if requested.
The purpose of any given specific test is to verify and document compliance with the stated criteria
of acceptance given on the test form.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
D.
Test Methods.
1. Functional testing and verification may be achieved by manual testing (persons manipulate
the equipment and observe performance) or by monitoring the performance and analyzing the
results using the control systems trend log capabilities or by stand-alone data loggers. The
CxA will determine which method is most appropriate for tests that do not have a method
specified.
2. Setup. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions that simulate actual
conditions as close as is practically possible. The Sub executing the test shall provide all
necessary materials, system modifications, etc. to produce the necessary flows, pressures,
temperatures, etc. necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At
completion of the test, the Sub shall return all affected building equipment and systems, due
to these temporary modifications, to their pre-test condition.
45
46
47
48
49
E.
Coordination and Scheduling. The Subcontractors shall provide sufficient notice to the CxA
regarding their completion schedule for the prefunctional checklists and startup of all equipment
and systems. The CxA will schedule functional tests through the GC and affected Subcontractors.
The CxA shall direct, witness and document the functional testing of all equipment and systems.
The Subcontractors shall execute the tests.
165477
City of Dallas
15995 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
In general, functional testing is conducted after construction/verification testing and startup has
been satisfactorily completed. The control system is sufficiently tested and approved by the CxA
before it is used for TAB or to verify performance of other components or systems. The air
balancing and water balancing is completed and debugged before functional testing of air-related
or water-related equipment or systems. Testing proceeds from components to subsystems to
systems. When the proper performance of all interacting individual systems has been achieved, the
interface or coordinated responses between systems is checked.
3.6
DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL OF TESTS
9
10
11
A.
Documentation. The CxA shall witness and document the results of all functional tests using the
specific procedural forms developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, these forms are provided to
the GC for review. The CxA will include the filled out forms in the Commissioning Report.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B.
Non-Conformance.
1.
All deficiencies or non-conformance issues shall be noted and reported on a standard noncompliance form.
2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the discretion of
the CxA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution will be documented on the procedure
form.
2. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays,
while not compromising the integrity of the procedures.
4. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified, the CxA discusses the issue with the
executing contractor.
a.
When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the Sub accepts responsibility to
correct it:
1)
The CxA documents the deficiency and the Subcontractors response and
intentions and they go on to another test or sequence
b.
If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is
responsible:
1)
The deficiency shall be documented on the non-compliance form with the
Subcontractors response and a copy given to the GC and to the Subcontractor
representative assumed to be responsible.
2)
Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties
are brought into the discussions as needed. Final interpretive authority is with
the A/E. Final acceptance authority is with the Owner.
3)
The CxA documents the resolution process.
4)
Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party
corrects the deficiency, signs the statement of correction on the non-compliance
form and provides it to the CxA. The CxA reschedules the test and the test is
repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved.
5. Cost of Retesting.
The cost for the Subcontractor to retest a prefunctional or functional test, if they are
responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If they are not responsible, any cost recovery
for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the GC.
6. The Contractor shall respond in writing to the CxA at least as often as commissioning
meetings are being scheduled concerning the status of each apparent outstanding discrepancy
identified during commissioning. Discussion shall cover explanations of any disagreements
and proposals for their resolution.
7. The CxA retains the original non-conformance forms until the end of the project.
48
49
3.7
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS
165477
City of Dallas
15995 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
A.
The following requirements do not replace O&M manual documentation requirements elsewhere in
these specifications.
3
4
5
B.
Division 15000 shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and systems covered in
Division 15000 and deliver this documentation to the GC for inclusion in the O&M Manuals,
according to this section, prior to the training of Owner personnel.
C.
The CxA shall receive a copy of the O&M manuals for review.
7
8
D.
Review and Approvals. Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M manuals shall
be made by the A/E and by the CxA.
3.8
TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
10
11
A.
The GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure that
training is completed.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
B.
Mechanical Contractor. The mechanical contractor shall have the following training
responsibilities:
1. Provide the CxA with a training plan two weeks before the planned training.
2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the
understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of HVAC
equipment including, but not limited to, pumps, chillers, heat rejection equipment.
3. Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on training on each
piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup,
shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc.
4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the
requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or
adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.
5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each
major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of
equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturers representative. Practical building
operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific
piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be required to execute the
training.
6. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and
maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for
reference.
7. Training shall include:
a.
Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material
included in the O&M manuals.
b.
A review of the O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating
requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory
suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible,
shutdown, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures.
c.
Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns.
d.
Discussion of warranties and guarantees.
e.
Common troubleshooting problems and solutions.
f.
Explanatory information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans
and manuals in the facility.
g.
Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
h.
The format and training agenda in The HVAC Commissioning Process, ASHRAE
Guideline 0-2005 and Guideline1- 2007 is recommended.
i.
Classroom sessions shall include the use of overhead projections, slides, and
video/audio-taped material as might be appropriate.
165477
City of Dallas
15995 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
8.
Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual,
shutdown and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all pieces of
equipment.
9. The mechanical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and
overrides of any locally packaged controls.
10. Duration of Training. The mechanical contractor shall provide training on each piece of
equipment according to the requirements of the preceding specification sections. If not listed
in the equipment sections, the following schedule shall be used.
Hours
System
___4__
Air Handler Units
___2 __
Variable Speed Drives
___2__
Heater/chiller systems
___2__
Air Terminal Units
___1_
Specialty Exhaust Fans
___1 _
Restroom Central Exhaust Fans
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
D.
3.9
TAB - The TAB contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:
1. TAB shall meet for 2 hours with facility staff after completion of TAB and instruct them on
the following:
a)
Go over the final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of each data type.
b)
Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that may affect
the proper delivery of air or water.
c)
Identify and discuss any terminal units, duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps that
are close to or are not meeting their design capacity.
d)
Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas that are not
finished.
e)
Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations, relative to TAB.
WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS

A.
Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout plan
described and the filled out start-up, initial checkout, pre-functional, and functional checklists,
O&M Manuals, training plans and records of training. These work products will be supplied to the
CxA to be included in the final commissioning report.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
15995 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
15995 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16000
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to install, test and provide an operational,
electrical system as specified and as shown on the Drawings.
7
8
B. The work shall include furnishing, installing and testing the equipment and materials detailed in
Division 16.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
C. The work shall include furnishing and installing the following:

1. Conduit, wire and field connections for all motors, motor controllers, control devices,
control panels and electrical equipment furnished under other Divisions. The
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the supplier of electrical equipment specified under
other Divisions.
2. Conduit, wiring and terminations for all field-mounted instruments furnished and mounted
under other Divisions, including process instrumentation primary elements, transmitters,
local indicators and control panels. Lightning and surge protection equipment wiring at
process instrumentation transmitters. Install vendor furnished cables specified under other
Divisions.
3. A complete raceway system for the Data Highway Cables and specialty cable systems.
Install the Data Highway Cables and other specialty cable systems in accordance with the
system manufacturers' installation instructions. Review the raceway layout, prior to
installation, with the computer system supplier and the cable manufacturer to ensure
raceway compatibility with the systems and materials being furnished. Where redundant
cables are furnished, install cables in separate raceways.
4. Conduit, wiring and terminations for variable frequency drives, harmonic filters,
transformers and power factor correction capacitors furnished and mounted under other
related Divisions.
5. Power wiring for all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment furnished under
other related Divisions, including power wiring for 120 Volt unit heater motors and
thermostats. Refer to HVAC Drawings for the locations of 120 Volt unit heater thermostats
and provide a 3/4-in C, 2 No. 12 and 1 No. 12 GRD between each heater and its respective
control thermostat.
6. Furnish and install precast electrical and instrumentation manholes, handholes and light pole
bases.
7. Furnish and install electrical and instrumentation manhole and handhole frames and covers.
8. Coordinate incoming power with the power company.
9. Coordinate with other disciplines the sequence of demolition with the sequence of
construction to maintain existing pump station operation. Remove and demolish equipment
and materials in such a sequence that the existing and proposed pump station will function
properly with no disruption of operation.
10. All bidders shall visit the site of the project, prior to submitting a bid, and satisfy themselves
as to any question that they might have, relating to existing equipment, condition or
construction.
44
45
46
D. Provide all electrical relocation work associated with the relocation of equipment for the existing
and new facilities, including disconnecting all existing wiring and conduits and providing new
wiring and conduit to the relocated equipment.
165477
City of Dallas
16000 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
E. Contractor shall coordinate with other disciplines the installation of facilities to accommodate
the work being done by Oncor in this area. This work includes:
1. Installation of underground duct bank for Oncor primary lines. This includes:
a. Two sets of circuits (two conduits per circuit) under the Houston Street Viaduct. One
of these will originate at an existing Oncor manhole on the east side of Houston Street
Viaduct. The other will originate at an Oncor 13.2kV primary overhead line pole on
the east side of Houston Street Viaduct. Both of these will terminate at new Oncor
13.2kV primary overhead line poles on the west side of Houston Street Viaduct.
b. Two sets of circuits (two conduits per circuit) from new Oncor 13.2kV primary
overhead line poles into the south side of the new Oncor Equipment Yard.
c. Once circuit (two conduits) from the new Oncor Equipment Yard to an existing Oncor
manhole along side Riverfront Blvd.
d. Cabling for all such underground ductbanks being constructed for Oncor facilities shall
be provided and installed by Oncor.
e. All such underground ductbank being constructed for Oncor facilities to be coordinated
directly with Oncor and shall be performed by a Oncor approved subcontractor.
2. Equipment pads for all Oncor equipment being installed in the Oncor Equipment Yard.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
19
20
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340 for equipment, materials and other
items furnished under Division 16, and as indicated in the individual specification sections.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
B. The Contractor shall check shop drawings for accuracy and contract requirements prior to
submittal. Shop drawings shall be stamped with the date checked and a statement indicating that
the shop drawings conform to Specifications and Drawings. Shop Drawings shall be organized
by specification section, with one specification section per transmittal. Each submittal shall be
complete, contain all of the items listed in the specification section, and shall be clearly marked
to indicate which items are applicable on each cut sheet page. This statement shall also list all
exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings, not so checked and noted, will be
returned unreviewed.
29
30
31
32
33
C. If however, in the opinion of the Contractor, a hardship of equipment delay or delivery of a

specific item would delay the project through no fault of the Contractor, the Contractor may
request an early review of that equipment or material, clearly stating the reason for separate
approval. The approval of such material or equipment must not be dependent upon the approval
of other equipment or materials to be submitted later, such as the Power System Study, etc.
34
35
36
37
D. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to check for conformance with the Specifications and
Drawings, all as contained within the Contract Documents. Errors and omissions on approved
shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of providing materials and
workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings.
38
39
E. All dimensions shall be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all other
trades.
40
41
42
F. Material shall not be ordered or shipped until the shop drawings have been approved. No
material shall be ordered or shop work started if shop drawings are marked "APPROVED AS
NOTED CONFIRM", "APPROVED AS NOTED RESUBMIT" or "NOT APPROVED".
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
G. Shop Drawings, O&M Manuals, and other documentation, shall be submitted as listed in each of
the Electrical Specification Sections.
1. Submit operations and maintenance data for equipment furnished under this Division, in
accordance with Section 01340. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this
installation and shall include catalog data sheets, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions,
parts lists, etc, to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such
equipment.
2. Manuals shall include the following as a minimum:
165477
City of Dallas
16000 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
A comprehensive index.
A complete "As-Built" set of approved shop drawings.
A complete list of the equipment supplied, including serial numbers, ranges and
pertinent data.
A table listing of the "as left" settings for all timing relays and alarm and trip set points.
System schematic drawings "As-Built", illustrating all components, piping and electric
connections of the systems supplied under this Section.
Detailed service, maintenance and operation instructions for each item supplied.
Special maintenance requirements particular to this system shall be clearly defined,
along with special calibration and test procedures.
The operating instructions shall also incorporate a functional description of the entire
system, with references to the systems schematic drawings and instructions.
Complete parts list with stock numbers, including spare parts.
14
15
H. Record Drawings shall be promptly furnished when the equipment installation is complete.
Payment will be withheld until Record Drawings have been furnished and approved.
16
17
I.
At the time of delivery of the equipment, the Contractor shall have an approved shop drawing in
his possession for the Owners Inspector, and Owners Engineer, for verification.
18
J.
Contractor shall submit an as built point to point instrumentation diagram.
19
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
A. Electric equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code
(NEC) and with the latest edition of the following codes and standards:
1. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
7. Instrument Society of America (ISA)
8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
9. Factory Mutual (FM)
10. Institute of Electrical Engineers (IEEE)
32
33
B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid
opening shall apply.
34
35
C. All material and equipment, for which a UL standard exists, shall bear a UL label. No such
material or equipment shall be brought onsite without the UL label affixed.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
D. If the issue of priority is due to a conflict or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract
Documents and any referenced standard, or code of any technical society, organization or
association, the provisions of the Contract Documents will take precedence if they are more
stringent or presumptively cause a higher level of performance. If there is any conflict or
discrepancy between standard specifications, or codes of any technical society, organization or
association, or between Laws and Regulations, the higher performance requirement shall be
binding on the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Owner/Engineer.
43
44
45
46
E. In accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor accepts the fact that
compliance with the priority order specified shall not justify an increase in Contract Price or an
extension in Contract Time nor limit in any way, the Contractor's responsibility to comply with
all Laws and Regulations at all times.
165477
City of Dallas
16000 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AREA CLASSIFICATION AND ENCLOSURE TYPES

A. Unless otherwise specified herein, elsewhere in the specifications, or shown on the Drawings,
electrical enclosures and associated installations shall have the following ratings:
1. NEMA 1 for dry, non-process indoor above grade locations (i.e. administration areas,
control rooms, storage rooms).
2. NEMA 4X, 316 Stainless Steel enclosures, suitable for corrosive areas, shall be provided for
all other locations on the project.
1.5
HAZARDOUS AREAS
9
10
A. Equipment, materials and installation in areas designated as hazardous on the Drawings shall
comply with NEC Articles 500, 501, 502 and 503.
11
12
B. Equipment and materials installed in hazardous areas shall be UL listed for the appropriate
hazardous area classification.
13
1.6
CODES, INSPECTION AND FEES
14
15
A. Equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local authority
having jurisdiction.
16
B. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees required for permits and inspections.
17
1.7
TESTS AND SETTINGS
18
19
20
A. Test systems and equipment furnished under Division 16 and repair or replace all defective
work. Make adjustments to the systems and instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper
operation of the systems.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
B. Make the following minimum tests and checks prior to energizing electrical equipment:
1. Mechanical inspection, testing and setting of circuit breakers, disconnect switches, motor
starters, control equipment, etc for proper operation.
2. Test grounding system as specified in Section 16660.
3. Test motor control centers as specified in Section 16000.
4. Test 600 volt wires and cables as specified in Section 16120.
5. Check wire and cable terminations for tightness.
6. Check motor nameplates for correct phase and voltage. Check bearings for proper
lubrication.
7. Check the ampere rating of thermal overloads for motors and submit a typed record to the
Owner/Engineer of same, including MCC cubicle location and load designation, motor
service factor, horsepower, full load current and starting code letter. If inconsistencies are
found, new thermal elements shall be supplied and installed.
8. Check rotation of motors prior to energization. Disconnect driven equipment if damage
could occur due to wrong rotation. If it rotates in the wrong direction, correct it.
9. Check interlocking, control and instrument wiring for each system and/or part of a system to
prove that the system will function properly as indicated by schematic and wiring diagrams.
10. Verify all terminations at transformers, equipment, capacitor connections, panels, and
enclosures by producing a 1 2 3 rotation on a phase sequenced motor when connected to
"A", "B" and "C" phases.
11. Verify motor power factor capacitor ratings.
42
43
C. Testing shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner/Engineer at least two weeks in
advance. Provide qualified test personnel, instruments and test equipment.
44
D. Refer to the individual equipment sections for additional specific testing requirements.
45
46
E. Make adjustments to the systems and instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation of
the systems.
165477
City of Dallas
16000 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.8
INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
2
3
A. The Drawings are not intended to show exact locations of conduit runs. Coordinate the conduit
installation with other trades and the actual supplied equipment.
B. Install each 3 phase circuit in a separate conduit unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
5
6
C. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner/Engineer, conduit shown exposed shall be installed
exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be installed concealed.
7
8
D. Where circuits are shown as "home-runs" all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a
complete raceway installation.
9
10
E. Verify the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles
prior to installation.
11
12
13
14
15
16
F. Except where dimensions are shown, the locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets and similar
devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be determined by
the Contractor and approved by the Owner/Engineer during construction. Obtain information
relevant to the placing of electrical work and in case of any interference with other work,
proceed as directed by the Owner/Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to
complete the work in an approved manner.
17
18
19
G. Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details.
Furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation all power,
lighting and other electrical systems shown.
20
21
22
23
24
H. Redesign of electrical or mechanical work, which is required due to the Contractor's use of an
alternate item, arrangement of equipment and/or layout other than specified herein, shall be done
by the Contractor at his/her own expense. Redesign and detailed plans shall be submitted to the
Owner/Engineer for approval. No additional compensation will be provided for changes in the
work, either his/her own or others, caused by such redesign.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
I.
Raceways and conductors for lighting, switches, receptacles and other miscellaneous low
voltage power and signal systems as specified are not shown on the Drawings. Raceways and
conductors shall be provided as required for a complete and operating system. Refer to riser
diagrams for signal system wiring. Homeruns, as shown on the Drawings, are to assist the
Contractor in identifying raceways to be run exposed and raceways to be run concealed.
Raceways installed exposed shall be near the ceiling or along walls of the areas through which
they pass and shall be routed to avoid conflicts with HVAC ducts, cranes hoists, monorails,
equipment hatches, doors, windows, etc. Raceways installed concealed shall be run in the center
of concrete floor slabs, above suspended ceilings, or in partitions as required.
34
35
36
J.
The Contractor shall run all conduit and wire to PLC termination cabinets, where designated on
the drawings. The conduit and wire as shown on the interface drawings may not necessarily be
shown on the floor plan.
37
38
39
K. Install conductors carrying low voltage signals (typically twisted shielded pair cables) in
raceways totally separate from all other raceways containing power or 120 volt control
conductors.
40
41
42
43
44
45
L. Raceways and conductors for low voltage (120 Volts) thermostats controlling HVAC unit
heaters, exhaust fans and similar equipment are not shown on the Drawings. Provide raceways
and conductors between the thermostats, the HVAC equipment and the motor starters for a
complete and operating system. Raceways shall be installed concealed in all finished space and
may be installed concealed or exposed in process spaces. Refer to the HVAC drawings for the
locations of the thermostats.
46
47
M. Raceways and conductors for the security and access control systems are not shown on the
Drawings. Provide raceways and conductors as required by the system manufacturer for a
165477
City of Dallas
16000 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
complete and operating system. Raceways shall be installed concealed in all finished spaces and
may be installed exposed or concealed in process spaces.
1.9
PHASE BALANCING
4
5
6
A. The Drawings do not attempt to balance the electrical loads across the phases. Circuits on motor
control centers and panelboards shall be field connected to result in evenly balanced loads across
all phases.
7
8
B. Field balancing of circuits shall not alter the conductor color coding requirements as specified in
Section 16120.
1.10 SIZE OF EQUIPMENT
10
11
12
A. Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to reach its final
location. Coordinate shipping splits with the manufacturer to permit safe handling and passage
through restricted areas in the structure.
13
14
15
B. The equipment shall be kept upright at all times during storage and handling. When equipment
must be tilted for passage through restricted areas, brace the equipment to ensure that the tilting
does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment.
16
1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS
17
18
19
A. As the work progresses, legibly record all field changes on a set of Project Contract Drawings,
hereinafter called the "Record Drawings". The Record Drawings and Specifications shall be kept
up to date throughout the project.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
B. Record Drawings shall accurately show the installed condition of the following items:
1. One-line Diagram(s).
2. Raceways and pullboxes.
3. Conductor sizes and conduit fills.
4. Panel Schedule(s).
5. Control Wiring Diagram(s).
6. Lighting Fixture Schedule(s).
7. Lighting fixture, receptacle and switch outlet locations.
8. Underground raceway and duct bank routing.
9. Plan view, sizes and locations of switchgear, distribution transformers, substations, motor
control centers, panelboards, variable frequency drive and other electrical equipment.
31
32
33
34
C. Submit a typical example of a schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers, including
the following information:
1. Circuit origin, destination and wire numbers.
2. Field wiring terminal strip names and numbers.
35
36
37
D. As an alternate, submit a typical example of point-to-point connection diagrams showing the

same information, may be submitted in place of the schedule of control wiring raceways and
wire numbers.
38
39
E. Submit the record drawings and the schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers (or
the point-to-point connection diagram) to the Owner/Engineer.
40
1.12 EQUIPMENT INTERCONNECTIONS
41
42
43
A. Review shop drawings of equipment furnished under other related Divisions and prepare
coordinated wiring interconnection diagrams or wiring tables. Submit copies of wiring diagrams
or tables with Record Drawings.
44
B. Furnish and install all equipment interconnections.
165477
City of Dallas
16000 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.13 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
2
3
A. Materials and equipment shall be new, except where specifically identified on the Drawings to
be re-used.
4
5
B. Material and equipment of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall be
UL listed.
6
7
C. All hardware for mounting boxes and equipment, such as racks, brackets, washers, springs, nuts,
etc, shall be of 316 stainless steel.
8
9
10
D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all material, product, equipment and workmanship
being furnished by him for the duration of the project. He shall replace the equipment if it does
not meet the Contract Documents.
11
12
E. Warrant all equipment furnished under Division 16. Refer to individual equipment sections for
additional warranty items.
13
1.14 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
14
15
16
17
A. Identify equipment (disconnect switches, separately mounted motor starters, control stations,
etc) furnished under Division 16 with the name of the equipment it serves. Motor control
centers, control panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, junction or terminal boxes,
transfer switches, etc, shall have nameplate designations as shown on the Drawings.
18
19
B. Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated plastic, not less than 1/16-in thick by 3/4-in by
2-1/2-in.
20
21
C. Nameplates shall be 316 SS screw mounted to all enclosures. Screws on NEMA 4 enclosures
shall be epoxy sealant coated. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable.
22
PART 2 - EXECUTION
23
2.1
SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS
24
25
A. Provide and place all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. Locate all
necessary slots for electrical work and form before concrete is poured.
26
27
28
B. Exact locations are required for stubbing-up and terminating concealed conduit. Obtain shop
drawings and templates from equipment vendors or other subcontractors and locate the
concealed conduit before the floor slab is poured.
29
30
31
32
C. Where setting drawings are not available in time to avoid delay in scheduled floor slab pours, the
Owner/Engineer may allow the installations of such conduit to be exposed. Requests for this
deviation must be submitted in writing. No additional compensation for such change will be
allowed.
33
D. Seal all openings, sleeves, penetration and slots as specified in Section 16110.
34
2.2
CUTTING AND PATCHING
35
36
37
A. Cutting and patching shall be done in a thoroughly workmanlike manner and be in compliance
with modifications and repair to concrete as specified in Section 01800. Saw cut all concrete and
masonry prior to breaking out sections.
38
B. Core drill holes in concrete floors and walls as required.
39
C. Install work at such time as to require the minimum amount of cutting and patching.
40
D. Do not cut joists, beams, girders, columns or any other structural members.
41
E. Cut opening only large enough to allow easy installation of the conduit.
165477
City of Dallas
16000 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
F. Patching to be of the same kind and quality of material as was removed.
G. The completed patching work shall restore the surface to its original appearance or better.
H. Patching of waterproofed surfaces shall render the area of the patching completely waterproofed.
I.
Remove rubble and excess patching materials from the premises.
5
6
J.
When existing conduits are cut at the floor line of wall line, they shall be filled with grout of
suitable patching material.
2.3
INSTALLATION
8
9
10
A. Any work not installed according to the Drawings and this Section shall be subject to change as
directed by the Owner/Engineer. No extra compensation will be allowed for making these
changes.
11
12
13
14
15
16
B. Electrical equipment shall be protected at all times against mechanical injury or damage by
water. Electrical equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Electrical equipment shall be stored in
dry permanent shelters. Do not install electrical equipment in its permanent location until
structures are weather-tight. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall
be thoroughly dried out and tested as directed by the Owner/Engineer, or shall be replaced at no
additional cost at the Owner/Engineer's discretion.
17
18
C. Equipment that has been damaged shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer,
at the Owner/Engineer's discretion.
19
20
21
D. Repaint any damage to the factory applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by the
equipment manufacturer. If the metallic portion of the panel or section is damaged, the entire
panel or section shall be replaced, at no additional cost to the Owner.
22
2.4
MANUFACTURERS SERVICE
23
24
A. Provide manufacturer's services for testing and start-up of the equipment as listed in each
individual Specification Section.
25
26
B. Testing and startup shall not be combined with training. Testing and start-up time shall not be
used for manufacturers warranty repairs.
27
2.5
TESTING
28
29
30
A. Test systems and equipment furnished under Division 16 and repair or replace all defective
work. Make adjustments to the systems and instruct the Owners personnel in the proper
operation of the systems.
31
32
B. Make the tests and checks prior to energizing electrical equipment in accordance with the
paragraph on Test and Settings, and the individual Specification sections.
33
34
35
C. Testing shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner/Engineer at least two weeks in
advance. Provide qualified test personnel, instruments and test equipment, including
manufacturers services, as specified in the individual Specification sections.
36
37
38
D. Where test reports show unsatisfactory results, the Owner/Engineer may require the removal of
all defective or suspected materials, equipment and/or apparatus, and their replacement with new
items, all at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall bear all cost for any retesting.
39
2.6
40
41
TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall provide manufacturers training as specified in each individual section of
the Specifications.
165477
City of Dallas
16000 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
2
3
4
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16000 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
16000 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16045
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
A. Furnish and install electrical support hardware, as shown on the Drawings and as specified
herein.
7
8
B. Hardware shall include anchor systems, adhesive anchor systems, metal framing systems, and
other electrical support systems, as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
10
11
12
A. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, the manufacturers names and
product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the
Drawings.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
B. The submittal information, for anchor systems, shall contain manufacturers specifications and
technical data including:
1. Acceptable base material conditions (i.e. cracked, un-cracked concrete)
2. Acceptable drilling methods
3. Acceptable bore hole conditions (dry, water saturated, water filled, under water)
4. Manufacturers installation instructions including bore hole cleaning procedures and
adhesive injection.
5. Cure and gel time tables
6. Temperature ranges (storage, installation and in-service)
22
1.3
REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be
designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless
otherwise noted)
1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
2. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
3. ASTM E 488-96 (2003), Standard Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and
Masonry Elements; ASTM International.
4. ASTM E 1512-93, Standard Test Methods for Testing Bond Performance of AdhesiveBonded Anchors, ASTM International
5. AC308, Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Anchors in Concrete Elements, Latest
revision.
6. SAE 316 Stainless Steel Grades
35
36
37
B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the
Specifications, having a UL standard, shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters
Laboratories.
38
1.4
39
40
41
42
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials and
equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an
acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance
with this requirement.
165477
City of Dallas
16045 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.5
DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
B. Adhesive Anchor System.

1. Deliver materials undamaged in Manufacturers clearly labeled, unopened containers,
identified with brand, type, and ICC-ES Evaluation Report number.
2. Coordinated delivery of materials with scheduled installation date, minimizing storage time
at job-site.
3. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with
Manufacturers requirements, including temperature restrictions.
4. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material
safety data sheets as applicable.
5. Do not use damaged or expired materials.
6. Storage restrictions (temperature range) and expiration date must be supplied with product.
14
15
C. Metal framing Systems

1. Material shall be new and unused, with no signs of damage from handling.
16
1.6
17
18
19
20
21
WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and
workmanship for a minimum of 2 years from Owners final acceptance beginning after completion
of the initial operation period as defined in Section 01650 STARTING SYSTEMS. Within such
period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to
return the equipment to new operating condition.
22
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23
2.1
ANCHORING SYSTEMS
24
25
26
27
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
a. HILTI Kwik Bolt 3
28
29
30
31
32
B. Product Description
1. Torque controlled expansion anchor consisting of anchor body, expansion element
(wedges), washer and nut.
2. All parts shall be manufactured of 316 stainless steel conforming to SAE 316.
3. UL 203 Rated.
33
2.2
ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEMS NOT TO BE USED OVERHEAD
34
35
36
37
A. Acceptable Manufactures
acceptable:
a. HILTI HIT RTZ with HIT-HY 150 MAX-SD.
38
39
40
41
1. Anchor body with helical cone shaped thread on the embedded end and standard threads on
the exposed end, with washer and nut, inserted into injection adhesive.
2. All parts shall be manufactured of 316 stainless steel conforming to SAE 316.
42
2.3
43
UNDERCUT ANCHORING SYSTEM USED OVERHEAD

A. Acceptable Manufactures
165477
City of Dallas
16045 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
1.
4
5
6
Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
a. HDA Undercut Anchors, as manufactured by Hilti, Incorporated.
1. Provide type 316 stainless steel anchors complete with nuts and washers.
2.4
STRUT SUPPORT SYSTEMS
7
8
9
10
11
acceptable:
a. Tyco Unistrut
b. Cooper B-Line
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
1. Metal framing system for use in the mounting or support of electrical systems, panels and
enclosures, and including lighting fixture supports, trapeze hangers and conduit supports.
2. Components shall consist of telescoping channels, slotted back-to-back channels, end
clamps allthreads and conduit clamps.
3. Minimum sizes shall be 13/16 through 3-1/4
4. Components shall be assembled by means of flat plate fittings, 90 degree angle fittings,
braces, clevis fittings, U-fittings, Z-fittings, Wing-fittings, Post Bases, channel nuts,
washers, etc.
5. Field welding of components will not be permitted.
6. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, all parts shall be manufactured of
316 stainless steel conforming to SAE 316.
24
PART 3 - EXECUTION
25
3.1
INSTALLATION
26
27
A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturers recommendations and Contract
Drawings.
28
29
30
31
B. The location of all devices is shown, in general, on the Drawings and may be varied within
reasonable limits so as to avoid any piping or other obstruction without extra cost, subject to the
approval of the Owner. Coordinate the installation of the devices for piping and equipment
clearance.
32
C. Install required safety labels.
33
3.2
34
A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage.
35
36
B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are
specified in manufacturers instructions.
37
3.3
38
39
40
CLEANING
A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the installation. Remove dirt, dust, or
concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or
clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air.
41
42
43
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16045 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
16045 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16060
1
2
3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
6
7
8
A. Furnish, install and test all equipment, wiring and appurtenances as may be required to perform
the electrical demolition shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.2
9
10
11
SCHEDULES
A. Schedule with the Owner/Engineer for required shutdowns to accommodate system demolition
and installation of temporary facilities.
1.3
12
13
14
15
16
17
SCOPE OF WORK
STANDARDS
A. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications
and demolition shall be provided in accordance with:
1. American National Standards Institute / National Fire Protection Association
(ANSI/NFPA), No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC), Article No. 590 Temporary
Wiring.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
18
A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on the Drawings.
19
B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
20
21
C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
Discrepancies shall be reported to the Owner/Engineer before disturbing the existing installation.
22
23
D. By beginning demolition, the Contractor accepts the existing conditions and warrants that he
will maintain service to equipment and items not scheduled or indicated for removal.
24
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
25
2.1
26
27
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections.
2.2
28
29
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

A. If temporary electrical wiring and facilities are required, the Contractor shall provide such wiring
and facilities to comply with the NEC.
30
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31
3.1
PREPARATION
32
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors and ceilings scheduled for removal.
33
34
B. Coordinate utility service outages with the Utility Company to provide continuous service to
operating equipment.
165477
City of Dallas
16060 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel
experienced in such operations.
4
5
6
7
D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete
and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain
permission from the Owner/Engineer at least one week in advance, before partially or
completely disabling system.
3.2
DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Remove, relocate and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
10
B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
11
12
C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling
finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
13
14
15
D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit serving
them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not
removed.
16
E. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
17
F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment that has been removed.
18
G. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
19
20
H. Maintain access to existing installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide
access to panels as appropriate.
21
22
23
24
25
I.
Where the demolition or revision of any portion of a raceway or box in the raceway system, in
an area, causes the raceway system of the area to no longer comply with the classification or
specification requirements of the area, the Contractor shall provide and install such boxes,
fittings, etc. as may be necessary to return the raceway system to compliance with
Specifications.
26
J.
Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified for new work.
27
28
29
30
K. Carry out the work in an orderly and careful manner. Hold noise, dust, and vibration to a
minimum and conduct the Work so as to avoid any damage to the surroundings. Remove all
items and parts as shown and noted on the Drawings and as otherwise may be required to be
removed to carry out the Work.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
L. Salvaged Equipment and Materials

1. The Owner shall have the right to retain any or all electrical and instrumentation equipment
shown or specified to be removed from the site.
2. Prior to starting demolition, the Contractor and Owner/Engineer shall jointly visit the areas
of demolition and the Owner/Engineer will designate those items that are to remain the
property of the Owner.
3. Equipment and material designated by the Owner, as remaining the property of the Owner,
shall be removed from the structure and hauled to a designated location on the site and
stored for the Owners use. Store on wood runners raised above the surrounding grade and
cover with weather resistant covering and tie securely or store inside Owner furnished
storage as directed by the Owner/Engineer.
4. Take necessary precautions in removing Owner designated property to prevent damage
during the demolition process. Remove steel structural members by unbolting, cutting
welds, or cutting rivet heads and punching shanks through holes. Do not use a cutting torch
to separate the Owners equipment or material unless approved by the Owner/Engineer.
165477
City of Dallas
16060 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
5.
Generally, items to be salvaged, shall be removed in one piece or in a manner that does not
impact their reuse. Loose components may be removed separately. Controls and electrical
equipment may be removed from the equipment and handled separately. Large units may be
handled separately. Salvaged piping shall be taken apart at flanges or fittings and removed
in sections.
6
7
8
9
M. Material removed from the construction site during demolition, and any equipment not otherwise
designated to remain the property of the Owner in accordance with the pre-demolition
identification process shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be promptly
removed from the construction site.
10
11
12
N. The Contractor shall refurbish and replace any existing facility to be left in place which is
damaged by the demolition operations at no additional expense to the Owner. The repair of such
damage shall leave the parts in a condition at least equal to that found at the start of the Work.
13
3.3
CLEANING AND REPAIR
14
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
15
16
17
18
19
20
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace
damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit
directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
END SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16060 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
16060 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16105
POWER SYSTEM STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
7
8
A. The Contractor shall provide a Power System Study for the electrical power system, including a
Short Circuit Study, Coordination Study, Arc Flash Hazard Study, Motor Starting Voltage Drop
Study and additional studies as listed below. A Load Flow Study shall be supplemented with
appropriate load factors, by the Study Engineer, in consultation with the Owner/Engineer.
9
10
11
12
13
B. The Study shall include all equipment shown in the contract one line diagrams. The short circuit
and coordination study reports shall provide an evaluation of the electrical power systems and
the model numbers and settings of the protective relays or devices and metering or motor
monitoring devices for setting by the Contractor. The Study shall include settings for all motor
protective relays and electric system monitoring devices.
14
15
16
17
18
19
C. The Contractor shall include the use of his own forces to obtain all pertinent data necessary for
the successful completion of the Power System Studies, including information on all equipment
and wiring pertinent to the Study. This shall be interpreted to include all cable and raceway data,
data for motors, data from all switchgear, motor control centers, panel boards, and separately
mounted fuses, starters and circuit breakers. The Contractor shall obtain any needed data or
information from Contract Documents, various suppliers, the Electric Utility.
20
1.2
RELATED WORK
21
22
A. The related work, associated with this Section, shall include all Sections of the Specifications,
and the Contract Drawings.
23
24
25
B. The Contractor shall diligently prosecute the work of providing the information required, to the
Study Engineer, particularly that information required from the Contractors electrical
equipment suppliers.
26
1.3
SUBMITTALS
27
28
A. The Contractor shall, not later than three (3) weeks after Contract Award, provide a submittal of
the name and qualifications of the Study Engineer, for approval.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
B. The Contractor shall provide two individual submittals:

1. The first submittal shall be considered a Preliminary Submittal, in that it shall consist only
of the Short Circuit Study results, based upon sound Engineering reasonable assumptions,
where known values are not available. This submittal shall be used by the Study Engineer to
ascertain the short circuit current rating of the related equipment. This submittal shall be
made for approved prior to any shop drawing submittal being reviewed for electrical
equipment for which the results of this preliminary study are required.
2. The final submittal shall be the Final Submittal as defined in this Section. The Contractor is
hereby advised that, no electrical equipment for which the results of the final study are
required, shall be energized until such results have been applied to such electrical
equipment, and certified as Settings Complete by the manufacturers field representative.
165477
City of Dallas
POWER SYSTEM STUDY
16105 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C. The Contractor shall, upon completion of the studies, submit the studies for approval to the
Owner/Engineer. The study submittal shall include all of the input and output data files in
electronic format for use directly with the specified study software. The Study shall include an
actual size sample of an Arc Flash and Shock Hazard label with typical information shown. The
Contractor shall allow not less than three (3) calendar weeks for review of the studies by the
Owner/Engineer. The submittal shall not contain unresolved questions, conflicts or selective
device coordination conflicts. A submittal containing such questions or conflicts will be returned
unreviewed, and shall not be resubmitted until such questions or conflicts have been resolved.
9
10
11
12
13
D. The completed, sealed, and signed studies, with all known issues resolved, shall be submitted to
the Owner/Engineer for approval, not less than thirty (30) days prior to site delivery of any
equipment containing protective devices requiring selections and settings for certification by the
manufacturer. Final copies shall be in electronic form (Adobe PDF formatted files). SKM data
files shall be provided at the same time in electronic format.
14
1.4
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

A. The specified studies shall be in accordance with the latest versions of the following codes and
standards.
1. IEEE Standard 1584 IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations,
Including Amendment 1584a-2004.
2. NFPA-70E 2004 - Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.
3. ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical C B.
The studies shall be performed using SKM
Power Tools Electrical Engineering Analysis Software for Windows.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
23
24
25
26
27
A. The studies shall be performed by an Electrical Engineering Services firm, who is regularly
engaged in power system studies. The studies shall be performed by a Licensed Professional
Electrical Engineer of the firm with proficiency in electrical power systems Engineering and
shall seal and sign the final completed power system studies. The Study Engineer shall be
licensed to practice Engineering in the state where the electric equipment is to be installed.
28
29
B. The studies shall be performed using SKM Power Tools Electrical Engineering Analysis
Software for Windows.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
C. Computer Model Revision Control

1. The Study Engineer shall check out and receive from Owner, prior to executing the Study,
the base model computer file to be used with the SKM System Analysis computer program.
The Study Engineer shall be responsible for the return of this computer file to Owner upon
completion of the Study and acceptance of the Report by the Owner/Engineer.
2. The Study Engineer shall incorporate the Study conducted for this Contract into the overall
base model computer file. The updated file shall be returned to the Engineer for review
along with the Report Submittal.
3. The Study Engineer shall forward the updated base model computer file to the Owner upon
approval of the Report Submittal. This shall constitute checking this file back in to the
Owner. Should the Report Submittal be rejected for any reason, the base model computer
file shall be returned to the Study Engineer for further use.
42
1.6
SCHEDULE OF WORK
43
44
A. The selection of the Study Engineer shall be performed in a timely manner, in accordance with
the time specified, and the Study performed and submitted as specified above.
45
46
B. The completed studies, with all known issues resolved, shall be submitted to the
Owner/Engineer for approval, as specified above.
165477
City of Dallas
POWER SYSTEM STUDY
16105 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 2 - STUDIES
2.1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES FIRMS

A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following services firms are acceptable:
1. Cutler Hammer Engineering Services
2. General Electric Co. Engineering Services
3. Schneider Electric Engineering Services
4. Allen Bradley Co. Engineering Services
5. Siemens Electric Co.
2.2
SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
A. Provide a complete short circuit study. Include three phase, phase-to-ground calculations and
X/R ratios. Provide an equipment interrupting or withstand evaluation based on the actual
equipment and model numbers provided on this project. Generic devices are not acceptable.
Normal system operating method, alternate operation, and operations that could result in
maximum fault conditions, shall be thoroughly addressed in the study. Provide single phase to
ground and three phase to ground fault information. The study shall assume all motors are
operating at rated voltage with the exception that motors, identified as "standby," shall not be
included. Electrical equipment bus impedances shall be assumed as zero. Short circuit
momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis of maximum available
fault current at the switchgear busses, switchboard busses, motor control centers and
panelboards. The study shall be performed using actual available short circuit currents as
obtained from the Electric Utility. An assumption of infinite bus for the purposes of the study is
not acceptable.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
B. Provide a protective device coordination study. The study shall include all electrical equipment
provided under this Contract, including Control Panels containing power and protection
equipment lighting panels and power panels. The Study shall include any upstream or
downstream equipment that has an impact on the Coordination Study. The study shall show
transformer damage curves, cable short circuit-withstand curves and motor curves. The phase
overcurrent and ground fault protection shall be included, as well as settoings for all other
adjustable protective devices. All motor monitoring relays and protective or monitoring devices
that are a part of a suppliers equipment, such as soft starters or adjustable frequency drives shall
be included. Include the last protective device in the Electric Utilities system feeding each
facility being considered.Include all medium voltage switchgear, distribution switchboards,
motor control centers and 480 Volt panelboard main circuit breakers.Complete the short circuit
study down to the main breaker or largest feeder on all on all 480 Volt panelboards. Panelboard
branch circuit devices need not be consirded.The phase overcurrent and ground-fault protection
shall be included, as well as settings for all other adjustable protective devices. All motor
monitoring relays and protective or monitoring devices that are a part of a suppliers equipment,
such as soft starters or adjustable frequency drives, shall be included. Include the last protective
device in the Electric Utilities system feeding each facility being considered.
40
41
42
43
C. Provide an equipment evaluation study to determine the adequacy of the fault bracing of all bus
from the panel board level up to the main switchgear or protective device. Include circuit
breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busway, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing
the short circuit ratings of these devices with the available fault currents.
165477
City of Dallas
POWER SYSTEM STUDY
16105 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
D. Selective device coordination is required between protective devices in equipment specified in

each Section of the Electrical Specifications, and between each piece of electrical equipment,
including existing equipment, supplied for this project. If the Study Engineer, in the course of
his work, determines that selective coordination cannot be obtained in or between pieces of
existing and new equipment as specified, he shall immediately notify the Contractor, provide his
supporting information to the Contractor, who shall transmit the information to the
Owner/Engineer for resolution of the problem.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
E. As a minimum, each short circuit study shall include the following:

1. One-Line Diagram:
a. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays, directacting trips, fuses, etc.
b. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's style and catalog
number for all protective devices.
c. Power and voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections of all
transformers. Use the ratings of the actual transformers being provided where
available.
d. Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing each relay.
e. Nameplate ratings of all motors and generators with their sub transient reactance.
f. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, synchronous motors,
and induction motors. Provide short circuit studies using each source of power
separately. The study shall determine if there is sufficient short circuit current to
adequately cause interruption of a protective device using the weaker power source
(typically local generation), and shall determine if the equipment can safely interrupt
the fault if the greater power source is connected. Additional short circuit calculations
shall include emergency as well as normal switching conditions as well as normal and
emergency power sources described here in.
g. All significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers, fuses, reactors,
etc shall be included.
h. The time-current setting of existing adjustable relays and direct-acting trips, if
applicable.
2. Impedance Diagram:
a. Available MVA or impedance from the utility company.
b. Local generated capacity impedance.
c. Transformer and/or reactor impedances.
d. Cable impedances.
e. System voltages.
f. Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solid grounding, or no grounding).
3. Calculations:
a. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the greatest. Assume
bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-to-ground short circuits of each case.
b. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
F. Provide Time-Current Curves on 8-1/2 X 11 log-log paper. Do not put more than one branch of
protective devices on any one coordination curve. Include a one-line diagram and the names of
each protective device in the branch on the coordination curve drawing. Provide separate
drawings for ground fault coordination curves. Use the names designated in the Contract
Documents. Include motor and transformer damage curves, and cable short circuit withstand
curves.
49
2.3
50
51
52
ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY

A. The Power System Study shall include an Arc Flash Hazard Study that shall present the level of
arc flash hazard for each item of electrical equipment, and the appropriate level of protection
required per OSHA standards.
165477
City of Dallas
POWER SYSTEM STUDY
16105 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
B. The analysis shall be performed with the aid of computer software intended for the purpose, in
order to calculate Arc-Flash Incident Energy (AFIE) levels and flash protection boundary
distances.
4
5
C. The analysis shall be performed under worst-case Arc-Flash conditions, and the final report shall
describe, when applicable, how these conditions differ from worst-case bolted fault conditions.
6
7
D. The calculations shall be performed in accordance with IEEE 1584-2004 and safe approach
requirements determined in accordance with NFPA-70E-2004.
8
9
10
E. Results of the Analysis shall be submitted in tabular form, and shall include, device or bus name,
bolted fault and arcing fault current levels, flash protection boundary distances, personalprotective equipment and AFIE levels.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
F. After approval of the Study, The Study Engineer shall provide and affix labels as may be
required for each item of electrical equipment furnished on the project. A typical warning sign
shall be submitted with the Study for approval, and as shown below.
1. Flash Hazard Protection Boundary.
2. Limited Approach Boundary.
3. Restricted Boundary.
4. Prohibited Boundary.
5. Incident Energy Level.
6. Required Personal Protective Equipment Class.
7. Type of Fire Rated Clothing.
21
G.
Size of each label shall be not less than 8 inches wide and 6 inches tall.
22
23
24
25
2.4
MOTOR STARTING VOLTAGE DROP STUDY
26
A. The motor starting study shall be provided for motors over 100 HP, full voltage started.
27
28
29
30
B.
31
32
C. Where the Utility feeders are feeding the switchgear, the study shall be done for each feeder
based on the actual system impedance for each utility feeder.
165477
The study shall select the largest motor on a bus and shall assume all other motors on that bus
are running. Where a Main-Tie-Main bus configuration is present, the study shall be done with
both Main breakers closed and the Tie breaker open, and with one Main open and the Tie
breaker closed.
City of Dallas
POWER SYSTEM STUDY
16105 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
D. A motor starting analysis shall be made where on-site standby generation is available to power
the MCC using only the available power from the generator. If the generator has been sized to
run only part of the load, then the system shall be modeled with only that part of the load
running.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FIELD SERVICES
7
8
9
10
A. Sign Installation Certification

1. When the sign installation is complete, the Contractor and the Owner/Engineer shall jointly
inspect the locations and to provide to the Owner/Engineers satisfaction that signs are
installed in all of the recommended locations indicated in the Study.
11
12
13
14
B. The cost of Field Services shall be included in the Contract Price.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
POWER SYSTEM STUDY
16105 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16110
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install complete raceway systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
6
7
8
9
10
B. Conduits indicated to be run "exposed" on the drawings shall be run near the ceilings or along
the walls of the areas through which they pass and shall be routed to avoid conflicts with HVAC
ducts, cranes and hoists, lighting fixtures, doors and hatches, etc. Conduits indicated to be run
concealed shall be run in the center of concrete floor slabs, in partitions, or above hung ceilings,
as required.
11
1.2
12
13
14
A. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, the manufacturers' names and
product designation or catalog numbers of all materials specified.
1.3
15
16
17
SUBMITTALS
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Wiring devices shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and
shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labeled.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
18
19
20
21
acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating
compliance with this requirement.
22
23
B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the
assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer.
24
1.5
25
26
27
A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two (2)
copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment, and shall
be made available to the Contractor and Owner.
28
29
30
31
32
33
B. Equipment shall not be stored onsite without written approval of the Owner/Engineer.
Equipment must be installed in its permanent location shown on the Drawings within seven (7)
calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven (7) calendar
days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, in an air conditioned,
bonded, warehouse of the Contractors choice and at the Contractors expense, until such time
that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment.
34
35
36
C. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate
space heaters during jobsite storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until
equipment is placed in service.
37
1.6
38
39
40
WARRANTY
workmanship for a minimum of 2 years from Owners final acceptance beginning after
completion of the initial operation period as defined in Section 01650 STARTING SYSTEMS.
165477
City of Dallas
16110 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor
necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A. PVC Coated Rigid Aluminum Conduit

1. PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit shall have a minimum 0.040-in thick, polyvinyl
chloride coating permanently bonded to rigid aluminum conduit and an internal chemically
cured urethane or enamel coating. Rigid aluminum conduit shall be as manufactured by the
Allied Tube and Conduit Corp.; Wheatland Tube Co.; or Triangle PWC Inc. The ends of all
couplings, fittings, etc. shall have a minimum of one pipe diameter in length of PVC
overlap. PVC coated conduit and fittings shall be as manufactured by Perma-Cote, Robroy
Industries, Triangle PWC Inc. or Ocal.
2. Elbows and couplings shall be PVC coated by the same manufacturer supplying the conduit
PVC coating system. Elbows and couplings used with PVC coated conduit shall be
furnished with a PVC coating bonded to the aluminum, the same thickness as used on the
coated aluminum conduit.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
B. Liquidtight Aluminum Flexible Metal Conduit

1. Liquidtight aluminum flexible metal conduit shall have an interlocked aluminum core, PVC
jacket rated for 80 degrees C., meets NEC Article 351, UL 360 as manufactured by Ultratite
AEF by Southwire, the Anaconda Metal Hose Div.; Anaconda American Brass Co.;
American Flexible Conduit Co., Inc.; Universal Metal Hose Co.; or ALFLEX.
2. Fittings used with liquidtight flexible aluminum conduit shall be extruded from 6063 alloy
in temper designation T-1 with maximum 0.1% copper content and shall conform to
FEDSPEC WW-C-540C ANSI C80.5, and UL-6.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
C. Aluminum Flexible Metal Conduit

1. Aluminum flexible metal conduit shall have an interlocked aluminum core, meeting NEC
Article 348, UL 1and Federal Specification WW-C-566C, as manufactured by Southwire
Alflex, the Anaconda Metal Hose Div.; Anaconda American Brass Co.; American Flexible
Conduit Co., Inc.; or Universal Metal Hose Co.
2. Fittings used with aluminum flexible metal conduit shall be extruded from AA 6063 alloy in
temper designation T-1 and shall conform to FEDSPEC WW-C-540C ANSI C80.5, and
UL-6.
33
34
35
36
D. Rigid Aluminum Conduit

1. Rigid Aluminum conduit shall be extruded from AA 6063 alloy in temper designation T-1
and shall conform to FED Spec WW-C-540C, ANSI C80-5 and UL-6. Rigid aluminum
conduit shall be as manufactured by Wheatland Tube Company or Allied.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
E. Rigid PVC Schedule 40 Conduit

1. Schedule 40 PVC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC) shall be designed for use above ground
and underground as described in the NEC, resistant to sunlight. The conduits and fittings
shall be manufactured to NEMA TC-2, Federal Specification WC1094A and UL 651
specifications. Fittings shall be manufactured to NEMA TC-3, Federal Specification
WC1094A and UL 514B. Conduit shall have a UL Label. Conduit shall be Carlon or
Kraloy. Thin wall conduit designated for encased burial as (Type EB) is not acceptable for
any application.
45
F. Rigid PVC Schedule 80 Conduit
165477
City of Dallas
16110 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1.
2.2
Schedule 80 PVC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC) shall be designed for use above ground
and underground as described in the NEC, resistant to sunlight. The conduits and fittings
shall be manufactured to NEMA TC-2, Federal Specification WC1094A and UL 651
specifications. Fittings shall be manufactured to NEMA TC-3, Federal Specification
WC1094A and UL 514B. Conduit shall have a UL Label. Conduit shall be Carlon or
Kraloy.
BOXES
8
9
10
11
12
A. Boxes specified herein, including terminal boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes, are for use with
raceway systems only, but include switch, receptacle and lighting housings. Boxes used for
housing electrical and instrumentation equipment, other than terminal boxes, shall be as
described elsewhere in these Specifications. All raceway boxes shall be provided with a
common ground point.
13
14
15
16
17
B. Where shown on the Drawings, NEMA 12 Terminal boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc, shall
be NEMA Type 12 aluminum, with mounting lugs suitable for wall mounting. Box bodies shall
not have any factory installed holes or knockouts. Boxes shall not be less than .080 in. thick,
gauge. All boxes shall have continuous hinged, foam-in-place gasketed doors with quarter turn
latches. Boxes shall be Comline Series as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Co.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
C. Provide NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel enclosures for all other locations. Boxes shall be NEMA
Type 4X of 316 stainless steel with mounting lugs or brackets made on the box, suitable for wall
mounting, or have mounting feet where self-standing. Boxes manufactured with holes intended
for mounting will not be acceptable. Boxes shall not have factory holes or knockouts. All boxes
shall have continuously welded seams ground smooth, and shall have continuous hinged, foamin-place gasketed doors. Box bodies shall not be less than 16 gauge. Boxes shall have quarterturn type latches as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Co.
25
D. NEMA 1 or NEMA 1A boxes shall not be used.
26
2.3
CONDUIT HUBS
27
28
A. Conduit hubs for use on raceway system pull and junction boxes shall be watertight aluminum,
insulated throat, gasketed, with grounding screw, as manufactured by O.Z./Gedney or Red-Dot.
29
30
31
32
B. Conduit hubs for use on outlet boxes or boxes containing electrical or instrumentation equipment
shall be watertight, threaded aluminum, grounding screw type, insulated throat, hub of femalefemale type, with locking nipple of male construction. Hubs shall be T&B HTGZ. Hubs with
female locking nipples, where the hub projects into the box, will not be acceptable.
33
2.4
CONDUIT SEALS
34
A. Conduit wall seals for new concrete walls below grade shall be O.Z./Gedney Co. type WSK.
35
36
B. Conduit wall seals for cored holes shall be type CSML-XXXA as manufactured by the
O.Z./Gedney Co.
37
38
C. Conduit wall and floor seals for sleeved openings shall be type CSMI-XXXA as manufactured
by the O.Z./Gedney Co.
39
D. Conduit sealing bushings shall be aluminum O.Z./Gedney Type CSBA Series.
40
2.5
41
42
43
EXPANSION-DEFLECTION FITTINGS
A. Combination expansion-deflection fittings embedded in concrete, or exposed, with internal
grounding, 4 movement, shall be stainless steel/cast iron, Type XJGD as manufactured by the
Crouse-Hinds Co.
165477
City of Dallas
16110 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.6
2
3
4
A. Expansion fittings shall be aluminum, 8 movement, Type XJGSA as manufactured by CrouseHinds Co. with internal grounding.
2.7
5
6
7
2.8
KELLUMS GRIPS
A. Kellems grips to support cables shall be of 316 stainless steel.
2.9
10
11
12
EXPLOSION-PROOF FITTINGS
A. Explosion proof fittings shall be as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co.; Appleton Electric
Co.; O.Z./Gedney Co.
8
9
EXPANSION FITTINGS
CONDUIT MOUNTING EQUIPMENT

A. All pull and junction box supports, spacers, conduit support rods, clamps, hangers, channel, nut,
bolts, washers, etc. shall be of 316 stainless steel.
2.10 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION PLATES
13
14
A. Conduit identification plates shall be embossed stainless steel with stainless steel band,
permanently secured to the conduit without screws.
15
B. Identification plates shall be as manufactured by the Panduit Corp.
16
2.11 WALL AND FLOOR SLAB OPENING SEALS
17
18
A. Wall and floor slab openings shall be sealed with Fire Seal Poke Thru PTFS by OZ/Gedney.
2.12 WIREWAYS
19
20
21
22
23
A. All wireways shall be constructed of NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel, with gasketed hinged covers
and stainless steel latches. Wireway shall have two Breather/Drains for each 10ft of wireway.
Breather/Drain shall be located in the bottom, near the ends of the wireway. Wireway shall be as
manufactured by Industrial Enclosure Corporation or Cooper B Line. Breather/Drains shall be
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Type ECD18-316 stainless steel.
24
PART 3 - EXECUTION
25
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATIONS
26
27
A. Unless exact locations are shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall coordinate the placement
of conduit and related components with other trades and existing installations.
28
29
30
B. Unless shown on the drawings or specified otherwise, the conduit type installed with respect to
the location shall be as follows:
Conduit Type
1. Rigid Galvanized Conduit
2. PVC Coated Aluminum Conduit
3. Liquidtight Flexible Aluminum Conduit

4. Rigid Non-Metallic, Schedule 80.PVC
5. Flexible Aluminum Conduit
165477
Location
Not acceptable for use.
All embedded conduit bends (except underground
duct banks) and all conduit stub-ups to a minimum
of 6 above finished floor or grade.
Raceway connection to vibrating equipment only.
Maximum of 6 length.
Under ground in duct bank, encased in red dyed
reinforced concrete.
Fixture whip connection to lighting fixtures in
NEMA 12 areas (maximum 3-ft). BX or AC type
City of Dallas
16110 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
6. Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit
1
2
prefabricated cables are not permitted.

All above grade areas, except for concrete
embedded and those areas described in Location 2
through 5 above.
C. All conduit of a given type shall be the product of one manufacturer.

3.2
BOX APPLICATIONS
3
4
A. All boxes installed shall be 316 stainless steel unless specifically shown otherwise on the
Drawings.
B. Exposed switch, receptacle and lighting outlet boxes and conduit fittings shall be cast aluminum.
6
7
C. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall have NEMA ratings suitable for the location in which they
are installed, as specified in Section 16000.
8
9
D. Where the raceway system connects to junction and pull boxes in a NEMA 12 area, double
locknut (one outer and one inner) plus insulated bushing.
10
11
12
E. All boxes shall be provided with factory mounting lugs. Drilling through the back of any box or
enclosure is prohibited, and if so installed shall be removed and replaced, with no increase in the
Contract Price or Construction Schedule.
13
14
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for sizing all junction boxes and pull boxes in accordance
with the National Electrical Code, Article 314 and relevant sections of the NEC.
15
G. Penetrations into the top of NEMA 4X and NEMA 7 boxes shall not be allowed.
16
17
18
19
H. Exposed pull boxes or junction boxes installed outdoors in NEMA 4X areas, per NEMA 250
shall be 316 stainless steel weatherproof and shall be provided with watertight gasketed covers
fastened with stainless steel screws and be 316 stainless steel. All hardware shall be 316
stainless steel. Boxes shall be provided with integral mounting lugs.
20
21
I.
22
3.3
NEMA 12 boxes shall be provided for air conditioned spaces only, NEMA 7 Class 1, Group D,
Division 1 or 2 hazardous locations and NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel for all other locations.
FITTINGS APPLICATIONS
23
24
25
26
A. Combination expansion-deflection fittings shall be installed where conduits cross structure

expansion joints, on conduit transitions from underground to above ground, and where installed
in exposed conduit runs such that the distance between expansion-deflection fittings does not
exceed one hundred fifty (150) feet of conduit run.
27
28
29
30
B. Where combination expansion-deflection fittings with exposed non-metallic sections, are used
on the exterior, an aluminum wrap shall be installed loosely over the non-metallic portion,
extending at least 2 beyond the ends. The wrap shall be loosely secured, to permit movement,
with at least two 316 SS fasteners. Nylon tie-wraps are not acceptable.
31
32
33
34
C. On exposed conduit transitions from underground to above ground, where the earth has been
disturbed to a depth of more than ten (10) feet, an expansion fitting, with a minimum of 6
available movement, shall be installed on the exposed side of the transition, in lieu of a
combination expansion-deflection fitting.
35
3.4
CONDUIT SEALS APPLICATIONS
36
37
A. Conduit wall seals shall be used where underground conduits penetrate walls or at other
locations shown on the Drawings.
38
39
B. Conduit sealing bushings shall be used to seal conduit ends exposed to the weather and at other
locations shown on the Drawings.
165477
City of Dallas
16110 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.5
INSTALLATION
2
3
4
A. No conduit smaller than 3/4-in electrical trade size, shall be used, nor shall any have more than
the equivalent of three 90 degree bends in any one run. Pull boxes shall be provided as required
or as directed.
5
6
7
B. No wire shall be pulled until the conduit system is complete in all details; in the case of
concealed work, until all rough plastering or masonry has been completed; in the case of
exposed work, until the conduit system has been completed in every detail.
8
9
10
C. The ends of all conduits shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust and moisture during
construction. Duxseal or 3M seal spray shall be used in all applications. Plugging with tape is
prohibited, even for a temporary time.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
D. Where raceways enter or leave the raceway system where the raceway origin or termination,
could be subjected to the entry of moisture, rain or liquid of any type, particularly where the
termination of such raceways terminate in any equipment, new or existing at a lower elevation,
such raceways shall be tightly sealed at the higher elevation, both before and after the
installation of cables, such that there shall be no entry of water or moisture to the Raceway
System at any time. Any damage to new or existing equipment shall be corrected by complete
replacement of such equipment, at no cost to the OWNER. Cleaning or drying of such
equipment will not be acceptable.
19
20
E. Conduit supports, other than for underground raceways, shall be spaced at intervals of 8-ft or
less, as required to obtain rigid construction.
21
22
23
24
25
26
F. Single conduits shall be supported by means of one-hole pipe clamps in combination with
one-screw back plates, to raise conduits from the surface. Multiple runs of conduits shall be
supported on trapeze type hangers with horizontal members and threaded hanger rods. The rods
shall be not less than 3/8-in diameter. Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc
shall be supported by spacers to provide a minimum of 1/2-in clearance between wall and
equipment.
27
28
G. Conduit hangers shall be attached to structural steel by means of beam or channel clamps.
Where attached to concrete surfaces, concrete inserts of the spot type shall be provided.
29
30
31
H. All conduits on exposed work shall be run at right angles to and parallel with the surrounding
wall and shall conform to the form of the ceiling. No diagonal runs will be allowed. Bends in
parallel conduit runs shall be concentric. All conduits shall be run perfectly straight and true.
32
33
I.
Conduit terminating in boxes and enclosures, other than NEMA 1 type, shall be terminated with
conduit hubs.
34
35
36
J.
Conduits terminated into enclosures shall be perpendicular to the walls where flexible liquidtight
or rigid conduits are required. The use of short sealtight elbow fittings for such terminations will
not be permitted.
37
38
K. Conduits containing equipment grounding conductors and terminating in boxes shall have
insulated throat grounding bushings. The wire shall be grounded to the box.
39
L. Conduits shall be installed using threaded fittings. Running threads will not be permitted.
40
M. All conduit fittings on PVC conduit shall be of the glued type.
41
42
43
44
45
46
N. Liquidtight flexible aluminum conduit shall be used for the primary and secondary of
transformers, generator terminations and other equipment where vibration is present. Use in
other locations is not permitted. Liquidtight flexible aluminum conduit shall have a maximum
length not greater than that of a factory manufactured long radius elbow of the conduit size
being used. The maximum bending radius shall not be less than that shown in the NEC Chapter
9, Table 2, Other Bends. BX or AC type prefabricated cables will not be permitted.
165477
City of Dallas
16110 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
O. Where conduits pass through openings in walls or floor slabs, the remaining openings shall be
sealed against the passage of flame and smoke.
3
4
P. Conduit ends exposed to the weather or corrosive gases shall be sealed with conduit sealing
bushings.
5
6
7
Q. Raceways terminating in Control Panels, or boxes containing electrical equipment, shall not
enter from the top of the panel or box, and the raceway shall be sealed with a removable silicone
sealant.
8
9
10
11
R. All conduits from external sources entering or leaving a multiple compartment enclosure shall be
stubbed up into the bottom horizontal wireway or other manufacturer designated area, directly
below the vertical section in which the conductors are to be terminated. Conduits entering from
cable tray shall be stubbed into the upper section.
12
S. Conduit sealing and drain fittings shall be installed in areas designated as NEMA 4X or 7.
13
14
15
16
17
18
T. A conduit identification plate shall be installed on all power, instrumentation, alarm and control
conduits at each end of the run and at intermediate junction boxes, manholes, etc. Conduit plates
shall be installed before conductors are pulled into conduits. Exact identification plate location
shall be coordinated with the OWNER/ENGINEER at the time of installation to provide
uniformity of placement and ease of reading. Conduit numbers shall be exactly as shown on the
Drawings.
19
U. Conduits noted as spare shall be capped or plugged at both ends with easily removable fittings.
20
21
V. Mandrels shall be pulled through all existing conduits that will be reused and through all new
conduits 2-in in diameter and larger prior to installing conductors.
22
23
W. 3/16-in polypropylene pull lines shall be installed in all new conduits noted as spares or
designated for future equipment.
24
25
26
27
X. All conduit that may under any circumstance contain liquids such as water, condensation, liquid
chemicals, etc, shall be arranged to drain away from the equipment served. If conduit drainage
is not possible, conduit seals shall be used to plug the conduits at the point of attachment to the
equipment.
28
29
Y. Where no type or size is indicated for junction boxes, pull boxes or terminal cabinets, they shall
be sized in accordance with the requirements of the NEC.
30
31
Z. Conduits shall not cross pipe shafts, access hatches or vent duct openings. They shall be routed
to avoid such present or future openings in floor or ceiling construction.
32
33
AA. The use of running threads is prohibited. Where such threads are necessary, a 3-piece union shall
be used.
34
35
36
BB. Conduits passing from heated to unheated spaces, exterior spaces, refrigerated spaces, cold air
plenums, etc, shall be sealed with "Duxseal," as manufactured by Mansville or 3M, or seal
fitting to prevent the accumulation of condensation.
37
38
CC. Conduits shall be located a minimum of 3-in from steam or hot water piping. Where crossings
are unavoidable, the conduit shall be kept at least 1-in from the covering of the pipe crossed.
39
40
41
DD. Conduits terminating at a cable tray shall be supported independently from the cable tray.
Provide a conduit support within 1-ft of the cable tray. The weight of the conduit shall not bear
on the cable tray.
42
43
44
EE. Penetrations by conduit, raceways, cables, sleeves, etc., through rated walls, shafts, floors,
ceilings, etc., shall be sealed by closure foam, Dow Corning 3-6548 Silicone RTV or GE RTV
35D Silicone Foam.
165477
City of Dallas
16110 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
END OF SECTION
1
2
165477
City of Dallas
16110 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16115
CABLE TRAY
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
A. Furnish and install complete cable tray systems, with all accessories, fittings, supports, as shown
on the Drawings and as specified herein.
7
8
9
10
B. Cable tray runs outline the general routing of raceways. Select actual routing in the field to
follow Drawings as closely as possible and to avoid interfering with pipes, ducts, structural
members, or other equipment. Deviations in routing from that shown on the Drawings must be
approved by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner.
11
1.2
RELATED WORK
12
A. Section 16000 Electrical General Provisions
13
B. Section 16045 Electrical Support Hardware
14
C. Section 16120 Wires and Cables (600 Volt Maximum)
15
D. Section 16110 Raceways, Boxes and Fittings
16
E. Section 16121 Medium Voltage Cable
17
1.3
SUBMITTALS
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
A. Shop Drawings
1. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, a complete tray layout and
routing in a computer-aided format, fittings and hangers, with tray type, sizes, dimensions
and support points.
a. Submittal shall show tray routing, with elevations.
b. Drawings shall show locations of tray hangers and/or concrete inserts where concrete
inserts are to be used.
c. Contractor shall not use the Engineers Drawings as a base plan for the layout.
Calculations shall be provided for loading and deflections. Calculations shall be
submitted in a format which will permit hand calculation verification by the
Owner/Engineer.
29
B. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories.
30
31
32
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of product.
33
34
35
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals containing installation and maintenance
instructions for the cable tray and its components.
36
1.4
REFERENCE STANDARDS
37
38
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, Article 392 Cable Trays.
39
40
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1. NEMA VE-1 2002 Metal Cable Tray Systems
165477
City of Dallas
CABLE TRAY
16115 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.
NEMA VE-2 2001 Cable Tray Installation Guidelines
C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
3
4
D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70.
7
8
B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified herein and as
shown on the Drawings.
1.6
JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
10
11
12
13
A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal
requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved
copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which
failed any factory tests, will not be permitted.,
14
B. Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
15
C. Materials shall not be stored exposed to sunlight. Such materials shall be completely covered.
16
D. Materials showing signs of previous or jobsite exposure will be rejected.
17
1.7
18
19
20
21
WARRANTY
workmanship for 1 year from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of
warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the
equipment to new operating condition.
22
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
24
25
26
27
28
acceptable:
1. T.J. Cope Allied.
2. Cooper B-Line
3. Approved Equal
29
30
31
B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do
not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not
relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
32
2.2
LADDER-TYPE CABLE TRAY
33
A. Description: NEMA VE 1, Class 20C (minimum 100 lb./ft. load rating) ladder type tray.
34
B. Material: Aluminum
35
C. Finish: N/A.
36
D. Inside Width: As indicated on the Drawings.
37
E. Inside Depth: Minimum 5-in., unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
38
F. Straight section Rung Spacing: 9-in on center.
165477
City of Dallas
CABLE TRAY
16115 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
G. Each rung shall be capable of supporting a 200 lb. concentrated load at the center of the cable
tray span and width, over and above the specified cable load, with a safety factor of 1.5.
H. Inside Radius of Fittings: Minimum 24in, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
4
5
6
I.
Provide clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips,
connectors, nuts, bolts, washers, lock washers, all thread and grounding straps, all of 316
stainless steel.
7
8
J.
Dividers: Dividers shall be supplied to isolate cables of different voltage ratings that occupy the
same cable tray.
2.3
10
11
12
WARNING SIGNS
A. Permanent warning label shall appear on all straight sections and fittings and shall have the
following wording: WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS A WALKWAY, LADDER
OR SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS A MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES.
13
PART 3 - EXECUTION
14
3.1
INSTALLATION
15
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
16
17
B. Install metallic cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 2 Cable Tray Installation Guidelines,
and as specified herein.
18
19
C. Where conduits, containing wire or cables, enter or leave the cable tray, the conduits shall be
securely clamped to the cable tray.
20
21
D. Provide supports at each connection point, at the end of each run, and at other points to maintain
spacing between supports of 12-ft maximum.
22
23
E. Use expansion connectors where required. Use bonding jumpers at each at each expansion splice
plate. Bonding jumpers shall be rated for the cable tray ampacity.
24
25
26
27
28
F. Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of NEC Article 392.
1. Provide continuity between tray components.
2. Install a bare 1 AWG tinned copper cable through entire length of each tray (both medium
voltage power and low voltage power and control) and bond to each section and ground
connect to the electrical system ground grid at both ends.
29
30
31
32
G. Use anti-oxidant compound to prepare aluminum contact surfaces before assembly.

END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
CABLE TRAY
16115 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
CABLE TRAY
16115 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16120
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
7
A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install 600 volt wires and
cables. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 16000, ELECTRICAL - GENERAL
PROVISIONS.
8
9
B. Work shall include building wire, cable, wiring connections and terminations, and modular
wiring systems.
10
1.2
11
12
13
A. Megger test circuits for continuity and ground. Verify phasing at connection points. Torque test
conductor connections and terminations to the Manufacturer's recommended values.
1.3
14
15
16
17
SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340 and shall include:
1. Cut sheets clearly identifying cables being used
2. Field Test Reports
1.4
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
QUALITY ASSURANCE: TESTING
STANDARDS
A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their
entirety:
1. NEMA WC-3 Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy
2. NEMA WC-5 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy
1.5
25
26
DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver cable and wire to the project site in the original packages. Conductors with damaged
insulation or exposed nylon jacketing shall not be permitted.
27
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28
2.1
MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
29
30
31
A. Conductors: Soft-drawn, annealed copper with a conductivity of not less than that of 98% pure
copper bearing the U.L. label. The minimal size shall be #12. Conductors #8 or larger shall be
stranded. Utilize single conductors.
32
33
34
35
36
B. Single Conductors: Conductor with thermoplastic insulation rated at 600 volts and insulated with
type XHHW-2 insulation. Wire shall be water tank tested and approved as machine tool wire, in
accordance with National Machine Tool Builders Association. Wire in light fixture channels and
other special locations shall be as specifically noted for temperature in NEC Article 300. Wire
shall be manufactured by Okonite, Southwire, or General Cable.
37
38
C. Ground Wire: Bare Class B stranded conductor without insulation. Ground wire installed above
ground or below ground shall be bare copper.
165477
City of Dallas
16120 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
D. Paired Shielded Cable: 18 gauge, 7/28 stranded, bare copper conductors with .015" extruded
PVC; .004" nylon insulation twisted into pairs, stranded into a core and enclosed by a nonhygroscopic core tape, 100% coverage, helically wound, aluminum foil shield, drain wire, and
.045" minimum extruded PVC jacket. Pairs shall be black/red or black/white numbered. Cables
shall be 600 volts in accordance with NEC-725 and IEEE 383. Cables shall be manufactured by
Belden, Okonite, or General Cable.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
E. Triad Shielded Cable (RTD Cable): RTD cable shall have the following characteristics:
1. Eight (8) triads each with three (3) 18 AWG conductors.
2. Triads shall each have individual shield and overall shield.
3. Each conductor insulated for 600V and entire cable rated for 90 deg
a. Primary Insulation: 15 mils nominal; PVC; 4 mils nylon
b. Number of Conductors: 3
c. Color Code: Black and white and red
d. Group Identification: Each triad numbered
e. Pair Shield: 100% coverage; .35 mil aluminum x .5 mil Mylar tape and 20 gauge 7
strand bare copper drain wire; shield tape to be applied to give a total shield isolation
from all other triad shields.
f. Cable Shield: 100% coverage; 2.35 mil aluminum Mylar tape shield and an 18 gauge 7
strand bare copper drain wire.
g. Jacket: Black 90 deg C FR PVC
h. RTD cable shall be manufactured by Okonite, Belden, or General Cable.
22
23
24
25
26
27
F. Tray Cable: Type TC; multi-conductor cable specifically approved for the installation of cable
trays, in accordance with NEC Article 340. Cable shall be Okonite, Southwire, or General Cable.
Each cable conductor shall be insulated with XHHW-2 type insulation rated at 600 volts. The
individual conductors shall be twisted together and jacketed with a PVC outer covering
containing a U.L. label and necessary identification, including the Manufacturer, the number of
conductors, size, XHHW-2 conductors, sun-resistance, and other pertinent information.
28
PART 3 - EXECUTION
29
3.1
30
31
32
PREPARATION
A. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and
lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation.
3.2
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Unless necessary for pulling purposes, conductors shall be continuous from terminal block
to terminal block without splice. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. No splicing
of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure.
2. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment and
panelboards. Pull conductors into a raceway at the same time and use U.L. listed, wire
pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4AWG and larger wire. Install raceway first as a complete
system without conductors. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway
system is in place.
3. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures
as follows:
a. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers are not acceptable.
b. Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible permanent
sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS
sleeves.
165477
City of Dallas
16120 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
c.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger consisting of
permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate.
Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire wraps. Tags shall
be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers.
d. Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number (e.g. LA3-23)
for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags imprinted with
the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1).
e. Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an "S" suffix.
Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a "T" suffix.
f. Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be
applied to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each neutral
(e.g. HA-2, 4, 6).
Wire other than telephone station wire shall be stranded. The minimum size conductor
permitted is #12 AWG, except as specifically indicated on the plans. Wire shall bear the
approval of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Conductors terminated on a screw termination
shall have a crimp on type spade connector applied on the wire end, Panduit PanTerm.
Color coding of cables shall comply with the local city codes. In the absence of a local color
coding requirement, the following shall be used:
a. For 480Y/277V, 3-phase wiring:
1) Phase A - Brown
2) Phase B - Orange
3) Phase C - Yellow
4) Neutral - Gray
5) Equipment Grounding Conductor Green
b. For 208Y/120V or 240/120V, 3-phase wiring:
1) Phase A - Black
2) Phase B - Red
3) Phase C - Blue
4) Neutral - White
c. For 120/240V, 1-phase wiring:
1) Leg A - Black
2) Leg B - Red
3) Neutral - White
Colored, vinyl marking tape shall be allowed only on conductors greater than 8 AWG.
Under no condition shall conductors of a different color be spliced together.
Grouping conductors together into one conduit shall not be allowed where the plans indicate
the conductors to be placed in separate conduits. Each home run shown on the plans shall be
in its own conduit.
41
42
43
B. Single Conductors: Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be
made except at outlets. Sufficient wire shall be left at outlets to make connections to equipment
without straining.
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
C. Paired Shielded and Triad Shielded Cable: Ground paired shielded and triad shielded cables at
the instrument panel end only and insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be
continuous for the entire run. The paired shielded and triad shielded cable shall not be laced with
or placed in the same conduit with power cables. Each termination of paired shielded or triad
shielded cable shall be coated with silicone jelly after termination. The shield of pair shielded
cable and triad shielded cable shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on
terminal strips.
51
D. Ground Conductors
165477
City of Dallas
16120 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Conduits and other raceway shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the
raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets, and other equipment shall be
properly grounded in accordance with National Electric Code requirements. Where ground
wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid aluminum conduit. Make
connections to equipment with solderless connections. Wire connections to the ground rods
of the ground mat shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld process.
Ground metallic material, including but not limited to metallic raceway, metallic boxes and
metallic enclosures. Where metallic material is not connected by raceway to a solid ground,
connect the metallic material to the largest equipment grounding conductor which it houses.
Clean the metal surface under the grounding lug to bright metal. Connections to motors
shall be to the grounding stud which shall be threaded into the stationary frame; Burndy KC
Servit, and not an end bell. The ground wire shall not be lugged to a mounting bolt.
Ground wire shall be uninsulated bare copper sized as shown on the plans in all cases where
a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the
conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases,
insulate ground wire with insulation as specified for low voltage wire.
TESTING
18
A. The Manufacturer shall perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Tests and Inspections:
a. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
b. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
c. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3
AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so terminations are accessible to
portable scanner.
1) Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each termination
11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2) Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
3) Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that
describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and
observations after remedial action.
d. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1) Test procedures used.
2) Test results that comply with requirements.
3) Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
4) As a minimum the Manufacturer shall provide results for the following in the test report:
a) Visual and Mechanical Inspection.
b) Bolted Electrical Connection Resistance Measurements.
c) Thermographic Survey.
d) Insulation Resistance Test.
e) Continuity Test.
f) Uniform Resistance Test for Parallel Conductors.
2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION
50
165477
City of Dallas
16120 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16121
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
A. Furnish, install and test the medium voltage cables and accessories as shown on the Drawings
B. This Section shall apply to all temporary and permanent feeders used on the project.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
A. Shop Drawings
1. Medium Voltage Cables
2. Connectors
3. Stress Cones
4. Splice Kits
5. Dead Front Medium Voltage Elbows
6. Dead Front Lighting Arrester
7. Submit catalog data of all wire and cable and accessories specified under this Section with
all selections, options and exceptions clearly indicated. The date of manufacture for each
reel of cable shall be submitted. Cable manufactured 12 months or more prior to the date of
this Contract will not be acceptable.
8. Submit layouts and drawings as may be required, related to any problems in meeting the
requirement for no splices as specified in this Section.
9. Submit cable pulling calculations and dynamometer readings, Once cable is pulled,
Contractor shall submit to the cable manufacturer the recorded pulling tensions for their
approval. A letter from the cable manufacturer stating that the puling tensions are
acceptable shall be formally submitted to the Engineer. Installations without this letter will
not be approved.
27
28
29
30
31
B. Certified Tests
1. Submit certified test reports of manufacturers standard production testing and inspection as
specified.
2. Test reports must be submitted within five (5) days after testing is complete and prior to
energization. Cable will not be accepted without the appropriate test reports.
32
33
34
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals containing installation and maintenance
instructions for splice and termination kits.
35
36
37
D. Letter of Compliance with manufacturers installation standards stating that the cables are
installed correctly. This letter shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer prior to the energization
of the cable. Installations without this letter will not be approved.
38
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
39
40
41
A. Medium voltage cables shall meet or exceed the specifications and requirements of the latest
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) and the Association of Edison Illuminating
Companies (AEIC) publications, except as modified by this Section.
42
43
B. Ethylene-propylene rubber (EPR) insulated cable shall meet or exceed ICEA S-93-639(NEMA
WC-74).
165477
City of Dallas
16121 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
C. Cables shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 1072 and Standard 1685,
IEEE 383 and 1202 and AEIC Specification CS8 and Standards ICEA S-93-639 / NEMA
WC74.
4
5
D. Field testing and commissioning shall be done in accordance with the cable manufacturers
recommendations, unless otherwise modified by this Section.
E. National Electrical Code.
7
8
F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
10
11
A. Upon request, the manufacturer shall submit a copy of his Quality Assurance Manual detailing
the quality control and quality assurance measures in place at his facility.
12
13
14
15
16
B. The manufacturer shall have available for audit detailed descriptions of the method by which his
various manufacturing processes and production test are recorded, thus enabling the
"traceability" of the completed cable. All steps in the manufacturing process, from receipt of
raw material to the final tests, are to be included. Where multiple records are used, the method
for cross-referencing shall be noted.
17
C. Cable shall be UL listed as Type MV-105.
18
19
D. Cable with a manufacture date of greater than twelve (12) months previous will not be
acceptable.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
E. Before any 15 kV and 5 kV installations are made, the CONTRACTOR shall have Raychem,
DSG Canusa or 3M provide installation-training class, on site, to train all personnel in the
proper technique of installing stress cones. All personnel involved in the installation of stress
cones shall be Raychem, 3M, or DSG Canusa certified. Personnel involved in the installation of
stress cones shall have a minimum of five years making 15 kV and 5 kV installations. A
manufacturers trained representative shall inspect terminations prior to energization of the
conductors. Any terminations deemed to be incorrectly installed shall be replaced at no cost to
the OWNER. Provide in writing as a formal submittal a letter from the manufacturers trained
representative that the terminations are correctly installed. Terminations applied before training
is completed shall be removed and replaced at expense of the Contractor. If termination
replacement causes the cable to be too short, then the cable shall be remove and replaced at the
expense of the Contractor.
32
1.5
33
34
35
36
37
38
A. Equipment shall not be stored onsite without written approval of the OWNER/ENGINEER.
bonded, warehouse of the CONTRACTORs choice and at the CONTRACTORs expense, until
such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment.
39
40
B. Check for reels not completely restrained, reels with interlocking flanges or broken flanges,
damaged reel covering or any other indication of damage. Do not drop reels from any height.
41
42
C. Unload reels using a sling and spreader bar. Roll reels in the direction of the arrows shown on
the reel and on surfaces free of obstructions that could damage the cable.
43
44
D. Store cable on a solid, well drained location. Cover cable reels with plastic sheeting or tarpaulin.
Do not lay reels flat.
45
46
E. Seal cable ends with heat shrinkable end caps. Do not remove end caps until cables are ready to
be terminated.
165477
City of Dallas
16121 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
F. Cables shall not be laid on the ground during installation. Cables laid on the ground will be
rejected.
1.6
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARRANTY
A.
The Contractor shall warrant the cable against failures of cables from product failure or
installation damage for a minimum of 3 years from Owners final acceptance beginning after
completion of the initial operation period as defined in Section 01650 and shall remove and
replace the cables at his own expense during this warranty period. The Contractor shall furnish
an extended written warranty prior to acceptance of final construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
11
12
13
A.
The manufacturer's name, the voltage class, type of insulation, thickness of insulation,
conductor size, UL listing and date of manufacture shall be printed on the jacket. Cable
manufactured 12 months or more prior to the date of this Contract will not be acceptable.
14
15
B.
Cables shall be suitable for use in partially submerged wet locations, in non-metallic or metallic
conduits, underground duct systems and direct buried installation and cable tray.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
C.
Cables shall be furnished in reel lengths, each long enough to reach from connection point to
connection point without splice, utilizing the manufacturers published maximum reel length
capability for each type and size to be used on this Project. If any length capability is
insufficient to provide without splice, the Shop Drawing submittal shall clearly describe the
insufficiency, and explain the location required for such a splice. Such exception must be
described in detail, and approved by the Owner/Engineer before the cable is ordered. Installation
of such splices without such approval will require removal of such cable and replacement with
another manufacturers cable meeting the requirements of the location, all at no expense to the
Owner/Engineer.
25
26
27
28
D.
Cables shall be able to operate continuously at 105 degrees C conductor temperature, with an
emergency rating of 140 degrees C and a short circuit rating of 250 degrees C. Emergency
overloads shall be possible for periods of up to 100 hours. Five 100 hours emergency overload
operations within the life time of the cable shall be possible.
29
E.
Medium voltage cable shall be shielded unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
F.
Medium voltage cables shall have the following physical characteristics in accordance with
ICEA, AEIC and UL standards:
1. Conductors: Annealed uncoated copper, Class B concentric lay, stranded per ASTM B8.
2. Insulation: Thermosetting lead free ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) compound over an
extruded, non-conducting high dielectric stress control layer, with a semi-conducting shield
applied directly over the primary insulation. The base elastomer shall have a maximum
ethylene content of 72 percent by weight. The semiconducting layers and insulation shall be
applied using a triple extrusion process.
38
39
40
G.
Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Okonite Company, Inc.
2. Southwire
41
42
43
H.
The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do
44
2.2 CABLE RATINGS AND TYPE
45
A.
165477
5 kV Cable
City of Dallas
16121 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
1.
2.
3
4
5
6
B.
Cable type: Single conductor, EPR insulated, and Shielded

Insulation level: 5 kV - 133 percent / 8 kV - 100 percent, 95 kV BIL.
15 kV Cable
1. Cable type: Single conductor, EPR insulated and Shielded
2. Insulation level: 15 kV - 133 percent, 110 kV BIL.
2.3 CABLE SHIELDING SYSTEM
7
8
9
A.
Insulation Shield
1. The insulation shield shall consist of a layer of black semi-conducting material extruded
directly over the insulation.
10
11
B.
Metallic Shield
1. Five (5) mil copper tape helically applied with a nominal 25 percent overlap.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
C.
19
Cable Jacket
1. Provide an overall, moisture, heat, abrasion, UV and ozone resistant jacket over the metallic
shield. Jacket material shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
D. Armored Metal Clad Cable
1. Cable constructed per UL 1072 with a close fitting, impervious, continuous, corrugated
aluminum metal cladding usable in a wet location and Class 1, Divisions 1 and 2 locations.
Armored cable strippers shall be used when necessary to strip the cladding.
2.4 CABLE ACCESSORIES
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
A.
General
1. Cable termination and splicing material shall be as manufactured by Raychem; 3M Corp.;
or Elastimold. All material used in terminating and splicing medium voltage cables shall be
as recommended by the cable manufacturer. Cables shall be terminated and spliced in
accordance with the kit supplier's drawings.
2. Cable terminations shall meet or exceed IEEE Standard 48, Class I requirements.
3. EP insulated cable splices shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI C119.1 and IEEE
404.
4. Cable accessories shall be by one manufacturer to assure adequate installer training and
application assistance.
5. The manufacturer shall be able to document a minimum of 5 years successful field
experience as well as demonstrating technical life assessment as requested. The
manufacturer shall establish and document a Quality Assurance Program implementing
suitable procedures and controls for all activities affecting quality. The program shall
provide documentation that verifies the quality of production joint kits and traceability back
to inspection records, raw material and the original designs and design proof tested joints.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B.
Indoor/Outdoor Cable Termination (5 to 15 kV)

1. Single conductor shielded cable terminations for indoor or applications shall be coldapplied, pre-stretched body with molded skirts, solder-blocked ground braid and solder less
ground clamp.
2. Termination shall have a current rating equal to, or greater than the cable ampacity.
3. Termination shall accommodate any form of cable shielding or construction without the
need for special adapters.
4. Acceptable products:
a. Raychem TFT-XXXE-SG W/Sheds Series
b. Elastimold
c. Cooper Power Systems
d. 3M Corp.
48
C.
Medium Voltage Elbows
165477
City of Dallas
16121 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1.
2.
3.
Medium Voltage primary terminations shall be arranged for dead front radial feed and
conforms to ANSI C57.12.26 requirements. Provide one piece integrated bushings for use
with elbow terminators and parking stands for disengaged elbows. Bushings or wells shall
be externally clamped to allow external replacement. The Contractor shall furnish 200 Amp
load-break elbows (8.3 kV line-to-ground maximum) elbow terminators for each bushing in
accordance with ANSI C119.2 and conforming to ANSI/IEEE Std. 386 and ANSI C119.2
with copper current carrying parts. The bushings shall be provided with removable copper
studs. Elbows shall be manufactured with copper current carrying parts and shall be
furnished for each bushing.
For bushings rated 600 amperes continuous, the termination compartment shall be of an
adequate depth to accommodate encapsulated surge arresters mounted in 600-ampere
elbows having 200-ampere interfaces to accommodate Lightning Arresters.
For bushing wells rated 200 amperes continuous, the termination compartment shall be of
an adequate depth to accommodate 200-ampere elbows mounted on feed thru inserts.
15
16
17
18
19
D.
Dead Front Lighting Arresters

1. Furnish three arresters for radial-feed 5kV distribution class lightning arresters complying
with IEEE C62.11 mounted in the high voltage primary compartment for surge protection.
Primary overvoltage protection shall be provided by externally mounted Heavy-Duty
distribution M.O.V.E. deadfront primary elbow arresters for each phase rated at 5kV.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
E.
Tape Shielded Cable Splice

1. Single conductor shielded cable terminations for indoor, outdoor and buried applications
shall be cold-applied, pre-stretched body, shielding mesh, with spring clamp.
2. Splice all shielded cables rated 35,000 Volts or less with conductor sizes ranging from No.
4 to 1,000 Kcmil in accordance with the instructions provided with the splice.
3. Shielded cable splices shall be capable of normal continuous operations at the rated voltage
and current on the cable it is to be used on (35 kV maximum). The splice kit shall contain
all of the necessary materials required to make three splices including cold-applied, prestretched body, shielding mesh, with spring clamp. A comprehensive step-by-step
instruction sheet shall be included with each kit.
4. Acceptable products:
a. Raychem CAS-XXM-X Series
b. Elastimold.
c. Cooper Power Systems.
d. 3M Corp.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
F.
Heat Shrinkable Bus Connection Kits

1. Bus kits shall be capable of insulating bus bars 2-in to 6-in wide and for connection of 1 to
4 cables. Kits shall electrically insulate and environmentally seal the connection and be
easily re-enterable.
2. Cable-to-bus bar connection kits shall be rated up to 35 kV class and tested in accordance
with ANSI C37.20c, Section 5.2.1.4 Test for Bus Bar Insulation and Section 5.2.9 FlameRetardant Test for Applied Insulation. Kits shall be Raychem Corp., Type BBIT.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
G.
Lugs and Connectors

1. Copper lugs and connectors shall be crimped with standard industry tooling. All
connections of copper stranded wire in sized No. 6 AWG through 1000 kcmil shall be made
electrically and mechanically secured. The lugs and connectors shall have a current
carrying capacity equal to the conductors for which they are rated and meet UL 486
requirements. Lugs larger than 4/0 AWG shall be two-hole lugs with NEMA spacing. The
lugs and connectors shall be rated for operation through 35 kV. The lugs shall be of closed
end construction to exclude moisture migration into the cable conductor.
50
H.
Electrical Grounding Braid
165477
City of Dallas
16121 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
1.
4
5
6
7
8
9
I.
Conducting metal braid shall be woven from 240 strands of 30 AWG copper wires and be
capable of carrying fault current comparable to that of 6 AWG copper wire, 3M Corp.,
Scotchbrand 25.
Cable Marking Systems

1. A 7-mil, flame retardant, cold and weather-resistant vinyl plastic electrical tape shall be
used for phase identification, 3M Corp.; Scotch 35 Tape.
2. Cable tags shall be heat stamped nylon secured by polypropylene cable ties, Thomas &
Betts No. TC228-9.
2.5 PULLING COMPOUNDS
10
11
A.
Pulling compound shall be nontoxic, nonflammable, noncombustible and noncorrosive. The

material shall be UL listed and compatible with the cable insulation and jacket.
12
B.
Acceptable manufacturers are Ideal Company; Polywater, Inc.; or Cable Grip Co.
13
2.6 SHOP TESTING
14
15
16
A.
Perform manufacturers standard production testing and inspection in accordance with Section 6
of the referenced ICEA standards. If requested by the OWNER/ENGINEER, the manufacturer
shall submit certified proof of compliance with ICEA design and test standards.
17
18
19
B.
Provide certified test reports indicating that the cable has passed the following tests:
1. Partial Corona Discharge Test in accordance with ICEA S-97-682 Section 9.13.
2. Vertical tray flame test in accordance with IEEE 1202.
20
21
22
23
C.
After completion of the factory tests, individual pulling eyes shall be installed on single or
triplexes conductor length of cable. Pulling eyes shall be suitable for maximum allowable
pulling tension on the conductors and they shall be sealed against entrance of water. A common
pulling eye shall not be applied.
24
PART 3 - EXECUTION
25
3.1 GENERAL
26
27
28
A.
Determine the cutting lengths, reel arrangements and total lengths of cable required and shall
furnish this data to the cable manufacturer as soon as possible to assure on-time delivery of
cable.
29
B.
Make use of the field Engineering services available from the cable manufacturer.
30
C.
The Contractor shall provide a Certificate of Training issued within the last two years.
31
3.2 INSTALLATION
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
A.
165477
Cable Installation
1. Except for hand-pulled conductors into raceways, all wire and cable installation shall be
installed with tension-monitoring equipment. Where conductors are found to have been
installed without tensionmonitoring, the conductors and cables shall be immediately
removed from the raceways, permanently identified as rejected material, and removed from
the jobsite. New conductors and cables shall be reinstalled, tagged and raceways resealed,
all at no expense to the Owner.
2. When temperature is below 50 degrees F, cable reels shall be stored at 70 degrees F for at
least 24 hours before installation.
3. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and
minimum bending radii. The Contractor shall furnish such information to the
Owner/Engineer, and the information shall be available at the project site.
City of Dallas
16121 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
4.
5.
6.
7.
Where the cable pulling direction is selectable, pull cables from the direction that requires
the least tension, and fewer bends in the last 25% of pull.
Feed cables into raceway with zero tension and without cable crossover at raceway
entrance.
The Contractor shall use only approves means of pulling the cable. Cable shall not be
pulled using a bucket or crane.
The Contractor shall provide the services of the cable manufacturer to be present during the
installation of all sections of the cable. The manufacturer shall provide a report to the
Owner at the conclusion of the installation, that to his knowledge, he observed no
procedures that were contrary to the recommended installation procedures recommended by
the manufacturer.
12
13
B.
Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time using U.L. listed wire pulling lubricant
unless cable is specifically excluded from requiring lubricant by the manufacturer.
14
15
16
17
18
19
C.
When inserting conductors in raceways, comply with the following:

1. First, install raceways as a complete raceway system without conductors.
2. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place.
3. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the
conductors.
4. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
20
21
22
23
24
D.
Pulling tension calculations are required for all cable pulls that are too long to be done by hand.
All cable pulls done with measuring the pulling tension (dynamometer) shall have a resettable
maximum tension recorder. Any pulls done without approved calculations or done without a
specified pulling tension meter will be rejected. The cables shall be removed, discarded,
replaced, reinstalled, and re-terminated at the Contractors expense.
25
26
27
E.
All cable pulls shall be done using cable reels. No cables shall be laid on the ground for
installation. Cables laid on the ground will be rejected. The cables shall be removed, discarded,
replaced, reinstalled, and re-terminated at the Contractors expense.
28
F.
Splicing shall not be permitted except in manholes as described above.
29
30
G.
Identify each circuit with non-ferrous metal or fiber tags in manholes and junction boxes and at
terminations.
31
32
H.
Waste certain footage (3 6) of cable at each end to get a good piece of cable after the pull.
Verify with cable manufacturer for exact distance to waste.
33
34
I.
Cable terminations and splices shall have a voltage rating of not less than the phase to phase
voltage of the system.
35
36
J.
Remove and replace conductors with insulation showing deterioration within one (1) year after
final completion and acceptance of the work and at no cost to the OWNER.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
K.
Terminating
1. The work area shall be kept warm, dry and ventilated during terminating of the cables.
2. Terminating shall be performed by electricians having formal training and a minimum of 10
years field experience in this type of splicing work with 15KV cable.
3. Prepare cables in accordance with termination kit manufacturers installation details.
4. Bond cable shields at each terminal location.
5. Insulate and seal each cable-to-bus termination with heat shrinkable bus connector kits.
6. All terminating shall be performed by personnel trained by the terminations manufacturer.
The Contractor shall have a certificate of training in his possession.
7. The Contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer to inspect the terminations
and provide a letter to document his findings. Any deficiencies shall be corrected by the
Contractor to the satisfaction of the manufacturer.
165477
City of Dallas
16121 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
8.
3
4
5
6
L.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Splicing and terminating shall be performed by electricians having formal training and a
minimum of 10 years field experience in this type of splicing work with 15KV cable.
Electric Arc and Fire Proofing

1. In manholes, cable trays and exposed locations, wrap medium voltage cables with one halflapped layer of Scotch Brand 77 Electric Arc and Fireproofing Tape. Tape shall be secured
with a two-layer band of Scotch Brand 69 Glass Electrical Tape over the last wrap.
M. Marking and Identification

1. Plastic nameplates shall be installed in each manhole, pull box and at splice and terminating
points. These nameplates shall show the phase and feeder designations and the date when
the cable was installed or splice or termination was made. The feeder designation shall be
as indicated on the Drawings. Nameplates shall be tied to each cable with self-locking
nylon tie.
3.3 FIELD TESTING
14
15
A.
A third part testing agency Real Power shall perform tests and inspections and prepare test
reports.
16
B.
Notify the Owner/Engineer at least two weeks prior to scheduling any testing.
17
18
19
20
21
22
C.
Equipment testing and inspection for all new cables shall be performed in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations on a generic form, and shall include the following:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection.
2. Shield continuity test.
3. Insulation resistance test.
4. DC Hipot test per IEEE Standard 400.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
D.
Equipment testing and inspection for existing cables shall be performed in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations, and shall include the following:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection.
2. Shield continuity test.
3. Insulation resistance test.
4. Tests and Inspections:
a. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
b. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
c. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60
days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and
conductors No. 2 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so terminations
are accessible to portable scanner.
1) Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each termination 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2) Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
3) Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.
d. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1) Test procedures used.
2) Test results that comply with requirements.
3) Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
165477
City of Dallas
16121 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4) As a minimum the Manufacturer shall provide results for the following in the test
report:
a) Visual and Mechanical Inspection
b) Bolted Electrical Connection Resistance Measurements
c) Thermographic Survey
d) Insulation Resistance Test
e) Continuity Test
f) Shield Continuity Test
g) Uniform Resistance Test for Parallel Conductors
10
11
E.
Submit certified copies of the test results and leakage plots to the Owner/Engineer in accordance
with Section 01300 within 5 days of completion of the tests.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
F.
Immediately notify the Owner/Engineer and do not energize the cables if any of the following
conditions occur:
1. Cable damage.
2. Improper installation or grounding.
3. Shield discontinuity or high resistance.
4. Dielectric absorption ratio and polarization index below 1.5.
5. Abnormal plot of leakage current versus voltage.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
G.
Defective or Damaged Cables

1. The Owner/Engineer shall make sole determination of the acceptability of the cables based
on the submitted test reports. Do not energize cables until the test reports have been
reviewed and approved by the Owner/Engineer.
2. If, in the opinion of the Owner/Engineer, the cables, terminations or splices are determined
to be damaged or defective, provide the following remedial actions at no additional cost to
the Owner:
a. Remove splices and terminations and completely re-test the cables to determine
whether the cables are damaged or defective.
b. Remove and replace damaged or defective cables as directed by the Owner/Engineer.
c. Remake terminations and splices with new kits.
d. Completely re-test cable, splices and terminations as previously tested above.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16121 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
16121 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16140
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and install wiring devices as shown on the Drawings and
7
8
B. Provide all interconnecting conduit and branch circuit wiring for receptacle circuits in
accordance with the NEC.
1.2
10
11
12
13
A. Shop Drawings
1. Submit catalog data of all switches, receptacles and other specified items under this Section,
with all options, application locations and exceptions clearly indicated.
1.3
14
15
16
SUBMITTALS
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Wiring devices shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and
shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labeled.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
17
18
19
20
equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the
OWNER/ENGINEER, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be
provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.
21
22
23
1.5
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
B. Equipment shall not be stored onsite without written approval of the Owner/Engineer.
33
34
35
C. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate
36
1.6
37
38
39
40
41
WARRANTY
workmanship for a minimum 2 years from Owners final acceptance beginning after completion
of the initial operation period as defined in Section 01650 STARTING SYSTEMS. Within such
return the equipment to new operating condition.
165477
City of Dallas
16140 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
3
4
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the Manufacturers listed in each product
category are acceptable.
5
6
7
B. The listing of specific manufacturers does not imply acceptance of their products that do not
meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed are not relieved from
meeting these specifications in their entirety.
2.2
9
10
11
12
13
RATINGS
A. The service voltage, shall be as shown on the Drawings. The overall short circuit withstand and
interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be equal to or greater than the overall
short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the
equipment.
2.3
MATERIALS
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
A. Wall switches shall be heavy duty, industrial specification grade, toggle action, flush mounting
quiet type. All switches shall conform to the latest revision of Federal Specification WS 896.
Wall switches shall be of the following types and manufacturer:
1. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt - Cooper, Catalog No. 2221V, similar to Harvey
Hubbell, Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
2. Double pole, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt - Cooper, Catalog No. 2222V, similar by Hubbell, Inc.
or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
3. Three way, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt - Cooper, Catalog No. 2223V, similar by Harvey
Hubbell, Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
4. Four way, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt - Cooper, Catalog No. 2224V, similar by Harvey Hubbell,
Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
5. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt - key operated, Cooper Catalog No. AH1191N, similar
by Harvey Hubbell, Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
6. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120 Volt - red pilot-lighted handle, Cooper, Catalog No. 2221PL,
similar by Harvey Hubbell, Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
7. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120 Volt, clear lighted handle, Cooper, Catalog No. 2221LTV, similar
by Harvey Hubbell, Inc.
8. Momentary contact, three position, 2 circuit, center off - Cooper, Catalog No. 1995V,
similar by Harvey Hubbell Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
9. Motor rated, HP rated switches approved for motor control or disconnect service when
controlling or disconnecting motor loads in excess of 1/4 HP; 20 amp switches for loads
exceeding 10 amps as manufactured by Hubbell Inc., or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
36
37
38
39
B. Fluorescent wall box dimmer switch for 120/277 Volt control of rapid start fluorescent lamps
with a dimming range of 100 percent to .5 percent light for 120 Volt and 100 to 1 percent light
for 277 Volt. Dimmer switch controls shall be as manufactured by Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.,
similar by Lithonia Control Systems or Valmont Electric, Inc.
40
41
42
C. Explosion-proof single pole factory sealed switches shall be for 20 Amps, 120/277 volts,
mounted in copper free aluminum boxes and be Crouse-Hinds EDS Series, similar by Appleton
Electric Co. or Killark.
43
44
45
46
47
D. Receptacles shall be heavy duty, corrosion resistant, specification grade of the following types
and manufacturer. Receptacles shall conform to Fed Spec WC596.
1. Single, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire Grounding, high impact, arc and moisture
resistant yellow nylon construction, heavy nickel plating on metal parts; Cooper, Catalog
No. 5361CRGY, similar by Harvey Hubbell Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
165477
City of Dallas
16140 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire Grounding, high impact, arc and moisture
resistant yellow nylon construction, heavy nickel plating on metal parts; Cooper, Catalog
No. 5362CRGY, similar by Harvey Hubbell Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
Single, 20 Amp, 250 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire; Cooper, Catalog No. 5461V, similar by Harvey
Hubbell Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
Weatherproof/corrosion resistant single, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire Grounding
Receptacle, as specified above, with wet location spring door cover and gasket; CrouseHinds Co., Catalog No. WLRS-5-20, similar by Appleton Electric.
Weatherproof/corrosion resistant duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire Grounding
Receptacle, as specified above, with wet location spring door cover and gasket; CrouseHinds Co., Catalog No. WLRD-5-20, similar by Appleton Electric.
Ground fault interrupter, industrial grade, duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, GFCI
feed thru type with "test" and "reset" buttons. Cooper, Catalog No. XHGF20V, similar by
Harvey Hubbell Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
Duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, transient voltage surge suppressor and audio
alarm or indicating light to indicate bad ground or failed MOV. Cooper, Catalog No.
1210V, similar by Harvey Hubbell Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
Clock hanger single, 15 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, with hanging hook on device plate.
Cooper, Catalog No. 452, similar by Harvey Hubbell Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
Single, corrosion resistant locking, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire; Cooper, Catalog No.
CRL520R and plug Cooper, Catalog No. CRL520P, similar by Harvey Hubbell Inc. or Pass
& Seymour, Inc.
Single twist-lock, 30 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Phase, 3 Wire; Cooper, Catalog No. CRL530R;
plug: Cooper, Catalog No. CRL530P, similar by Harvey Hubbell Inc. or Pass & Seymour,
Inc.
plug: Cooper Catalog No. CRL620P, similar by Harvey Hubbell Inc. or Pass & Seymour,
Inc.
plug: Cooper, Catalog No. CRL630P, similar by Harvey Hubbell Inc. or Pass & Seymour,
Inc.
Explosion-proof single, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Phase, 3 Wire; Appleton Electric, Catalog No.
CPCI-2350 and plug, Appleton Electric Catalog No. CPP-2033 similar to Crouse-Hinds or
Harvey Hubbell Inc.
Explosion-proof duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Phase, 3 Wire; Appleton Electric, Catalog No.
CPC2-2350 and plug, Appleton Electric Catalog No. CPP-2023 similar by Crouse-Hinds or
Harvey Hubbell, Inc.
E. Device Plates
1. Plates for indoor flush mounted devices shall be of the required number of gangs for the
application involved and shall be as follows:
a. Administration type buildings: Smooth, high impact nylon of the same manufacturer
and color as the device. Final color to be as selected by the Architect.
b. Where permitted in other areas of the plant, flush mounted devices in cement block
construction shall be Type 302 high nickel (18-8) stainless steel of the same
manufacturer as the devices.
2. Plates for indoor surface mounted device boxes shall be cast metal of the same material as
the box, Crouse-Hinds No. DS23G and DS32G.
3. Oversized plates shall be installed where standard plates do not fully cover the wall opening.
4. Device plates for switches mounted outdoors or indicated as weatherproof shall be gasketed,
cast aluminum with provisions for padlocking switches "On" and "Off, Crouse Hinds No.
DS185.
5. Multiple surface mounted devices shall be ganged in a single, common box and provided
with an adapter, if necessary, to allow mounting of single gang device plates on multigang
cast boxes.
165477
City of Dallas
16140 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
6.
7.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Engraved device plates shall be provided where required.

Weatherproof, gasketed cover for GFI receptacle mounted in a FS/FD box shall be Cooper,
Catalog No. 4501-FS, similar by Harvey Hubbell Inc. or Pass & Seymour, Inc.
F. Poke-Thru Service Fittings

1. Poke-thru service fittings shall be installed in a 2-in core drilled hole, fit floor thicknesses of
2-1/2-in to 7-in and be fire rated.
2. Poke-thru service fittings shall be barriered to handle both high and low tension services and
be designed for both new construction and building retrofit.
3. Service fitting heads shall each contain a 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire duplex
receptacles on one side and provisions for up to 2-25 pair telephone cables on the remaining
side.
4. Complete poke-thru services fitting shall be as manufactured by Raceway Components
similar by Walker or Square D.
14
PART 3 - EXECUTION
15
3.1
INSTALLATION
16
17
18
A. Switch and receptacle outlets shall be installed flush with the finished wall surfaces in areas with
stud frame and gypboard construction, in dry areas with cement block construction or when
raceways are shown as concealed on the Drawings.
19
20
B. Do not install flush mounted devices in any process areas. Provide surface mounted devices in
these areas.
21
C. Provide weatherproof device covers in all process areas.
22
23
D. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, wall switches and other wall mounted controls shall
be installed at 4-6 AFF.
24
25
E. Convenience outlets shall be 18-in above floor or grade. Switches shall be ganged together under
one cover plate.
26
27
28
29
F. The location of all devices is shown, in general, on the Drawings and may be varied within
reasonable limits so as to avoid any piping or other obstruction without extra cost, subject to the
approval of the OWNER. Coordinate the installation of the devices for piping and equipment
clearance.
30
3.2
31
32

A. Test wiring devices to ensure electrical continuity of grounding. Energize the circuit to
demonstrate compliance with the requirements.
END OF SECTION
33
34
165477
City of Dallas
16140 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16150
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
7
A. Provide electric motors, accessories, and appurtenances complete and operable, in conformance
with the individual driven equipment specifications and other sections of the Contract
Documents.
8
9
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all low voltage NEMA Frame AC squirrel cage
induction motors, except as indicated otherwise.
10
1.2
RELATED WORK
11
12
B. Section 16105 Power System Study
13
14
D. Section 16475 Low Voltage Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Disconnect Switches
15
E. Section 16480 Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
16
F. Process Equipment Division
17
G. Mechanical Equipment Division
18
H. Instrumentation Equipment Division
19
1.3
SUBMITTALS
20
21
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the process equipment division
of these Specifications, and as specified herein.
22
23
24
B. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under
other Sections. Individual submittals for equipment specified herein will not be accepted and
will be returned unreviewed.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this
Specification and described in the related sections listed in Related Work above. If Section
16105 Power System Study is listed in the Related Work Sections listed above, a Certification
shall be provided as part of the submittal, certifying that all settings and adjustments have been
made on the accompanying Submittals. Incomplete submittals not containing the required
information on the related equipment will be returned as INCOMPLETE SUBMITTAL
REJECTED. No portion of an INCOMPLETE SUBMITTAL will be Approved or reviewed.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
D. The following information shall be submitted with the motor drawings for review.
1. Name of Drive
2. Horsepower of Motor
3. Phase
4. Full Load Efficiency
5. Voltage
6. Full Load Power Factor
7. Speed
8. NEMA Design Starting Torque
9. NEMA Frame and Dimensions
10. Full Load Current
165477
City of Dallas
16150 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Locked Rotor Current

Insulation Class
Temperature Rise at 1.15 SF
Enclosure
Bearing life design
Special features (i.e., space heaters, RTDs, oversize conduit box and corrosion resistant
features).
17. Nameplate Drawing with Information as listed herein.
18. Lugs and connectors.
10
11
E. Suppliers of fractional horsepower motors below frame 143T will not be required to submit
operational characteristics.
12
F. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests as specified above.
13
G. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information:
a. Manufacturers contact address and telephone number for parts and service.
b. Instruction books and/or leaflets
c. Recommended renewal parts list
d. Record Documents for the information required by the submitted motor information
above.
21
1.4
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Motors shall be designed, built, and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the following
standards:
1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association Inc. (NEMA)
a. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
b. NEMA MG2 - Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation
and Use of Electric Motors and Generators.
c. NEMA MG3 - Sound Level Prediction for Installed Rotating Electrical Machines.
a. NFPA-70 - National Electrical Code.
3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
a. UL-1004 - Electric Motors.
4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE)
a. IEEE Std 1 - General Principles for Temperature Limits in the Rating of Electric
Equipment.
b. IEEE Std 43 - Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating
Machinery.
c. IEEE Std 85 - Test Procedures for Airborne Sound Measurements on Rotating Electric
Machinery.
d. IEEE Std 112 Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators.
e. IEEE Std 275 - Recommended Practice for Thermal Evaluation of Insulation Systems
for AC Electric Machinery Employing Form-wound Pre-insulated Stator Coils,
Machines Rated 6,900 V and Below.
f. IEEE Std 429 - Standard Test Procedure for the Evaluation of Sealed Insulation
Systems for AC Electric Machinery Employing Form-wound Stator Coils.
g. IEEE Std 1349 Guide for the Application of Electric Motors in Class 1, Div 2
Hazardous Locations.
5. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association Inc. (AFBMA):
a. AFBMA-9 & 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
165477
City of Dallas
16150 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
1.5
4
5
6
DEFINITIONS
A. Motors specified herein are three-phase, squirrel cage induction type for HP and above, and
single phase for less than HP, except as specifically specified elsewhere in these
Specifications.
7
8
9
10
B. Exclusion: Any self contained portable appliance, which includes the motor with or without
control that is specifically referred to, by catalog number on the Drawings or in other sections of
the Specifications (more specifically fan coil unit motors, exhaust fan motors, unit heater
motors, and blower ventilation motors) are not covered by this Section of the Specifications.
11
12
C. The word "Drive" shall be construed to mean the driven equipment, i.e. pump, hoist, fan,
compressor, or adjustable frequency drive connected with the motor.
13
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14
15
16
17
18
19
A. Motor Compatibility. The CONTRACTOR shall satisfy himself that the motor included with the
drive is compatible with driven equipment and complies with these Specifications. In the event
that the motors described in these Specifications can not be applied to the application or
equipment offered, the CONTRACTOR may submit an exception, stating clearly the deviations
and the reasons for such deviations. The acceptance or rejection of such deviations shall be at the
sole discretion of the OWNER/ENGINEER.
20
21
22
23
B. When motors are furnished with driven equipment, the driven equipment supplier shall be
responsible for mounting the motor and driven equipment as a complete unit, correctly aligned
and coupled with the coupling or sheave specified on the driven equipment data sheet, and for
designing vibration, special, or unbalanced forces resulting from equipment operation.
24
25
C. Motors manufactured more than 24 months prior to the date of this Contract will not be
acceptable.
26
1.7
27
28
29
30
A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the CONTRACTOR shall have successfully completed all submittal
requirements, and present to the OWNER/ENGINEER upon delivery of the equipment, an
approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or
equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted.
31
32
B. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures.
Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry.
33
34
C. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint
damaged painted surfaces to the satisfaction of the OWNER/ENGINEER.
35
36
D. If motors are shipped as an integral part of the associated mechanical equipment, the motors
shall be stored and handled in accordance with the manufacturers instructions
37
38
39
40
41
E. If motors are shipped separately, the motor shall be installed in its permanent, finished location
shown on the Drawings within 14 calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be
installed within 14 calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored
offsite, at the CONTRACTORs expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent
installation of the equipment.
42
43
44
F. Where space heaters are provided in motors, provide temporary electrical power and operate
space heaters, during storage and after motors are installed in permanent location, until
165477
City of Dallas
16150 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
G. The motor shaft shall be rotated on a monthly basis, if such is recommended or required by the
motor manufacturer; the date recorded, and copies of the record provided to the
OWNER/ENGINEER and the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall confirm receipt of the
rotation record.
1.8
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
WARRANTY
workmanship for the same warranty period as specified for the associated mechanical
equipment, but not less than three years from date of Owners final acceptance. Within such
return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or
transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the
OWNER.
13
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
14
2.1
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Named Supplier
a. General Electric
2. Alternate Supplier
a. TECO Westinghouse
b. Baldor
22
23
24
25
2.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
26
27
A. Each motor provided shall have an Identification Tag Number, conforming to the numbering
system and equipment name shown on the Drawings.
28
29
B. Specific motor data such as HP, RPM, enclosure type, etc., is specified under the detailed
specification for the mechanical equipment with which the motor is supplied.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C. The motor manufacturers nameplates shall be engraved or embossed on stainless steel and
fastened to the motor frame with stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall indicate
clearly all of the items of information enumerated in NEMA Standard MGI, as applicable,
including but not limited to the following information:
1. Horsepower (output).
2. RPM at full load.
3. Time rating.
4. Frequency.
5. Number of phases.
6. Model number.
7. Rated voltage.
8. Service factor.
9. Full load amps.
10. Insulation class.
11. NEMA design letter.
12. NEMA code letter.
13. Temperature Rise at 1.15SF.
14. NEMA Frame size.
165477
City of Dallas
16150 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
15. Motor Weight

16. Date of manufacture.
17. Thermal protection (if supplied).
4
5
D. Where frequent starting occurs, the design for frequent starting duty shall be equal to the duty
service required by the driven equipment.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
E. Hazardous Environments
1. Motors located in hazardous classified areas shall be provided with a box for potting
compound to seal connections in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
2. Class I, Division 1: Totally-enclosed fan-cooled, explosion-proof, UL listed and labeled.
Motors shall be UL rated for operation with VFD units for VFD applications.
3. Class I, Division 2: Motors shall comply with IEEE 1349 for construction and temperature
rise.
13
14
F. Altitude: Under 3300 FT. For applications above 3300 FT, motors shall be specifically designed
and certified for operation at the specific altitude.
15
16
17
G. Motors shall have sufficient horsepower and torque capacity to drive the equipment without
overloading under all conditions, without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor and
without use of the service factor.
18
19
20
H. Motors shall have a breather drain in each end bracket of the TEFC motor enclosure. Stainless
steel automatic breather drains shall be provided in the lowest part of both end brackets to allow
drainage of condensation.
21
I.
Motors shall be slide rail mounted for all belt or chain-driven applications.
22
23
J.
Air inlets and outlets shall be protected by vermin-proof, corrosion resistant louvers. The air
inlets shall be located on end or side as required by the application.
24
25
26
27
28
29
K. Motors shall have an oversized, gasketed, cast iron conduit box, field adjustable in 90-degree
increments unless the box contains equipment, diagonally split with tapped NPT threaded
conduit entrance hole, and shall exceed the minimum volumes defined in IEEE 841-2001.
Neoprene conduit box cover gasket and neoprene lead seal gasket with flexible nipples to ensure
the seal is maintained as the leads are moved shall be furnished. Provision for grounding shall be
provided in the conduit box utilizing a mounted clamp-type lug.
30
31
32
L. Provide separate accessory lead conduit boxes. Minimum size entrance hub shall be C.
Resistance temperature detector leads shall not occupy the same box with any other type of
power or monitoring leads.
33
M. Motor frames, end brackets, and conduit box shall be of cast-iron.
34
N. Provide lifting lugs on the motor frame.
35
36
O. Motors shall be NEMA Design B standard, unless otherwise specified in the process equipment
division of these Specifications.
37
38
39
P. Service factor shall be 1.15 for all motors.

1. In sizing motors, no portion of a motors service factor above 1.0 shall be used in normal
continuous operation of the motor.
40
41
Q. Motors shall be of the Energy Efficient type, and shall meet or exceed efficiencies as listed in
the Table at the end of this Specification.
42
43
R. All motors shall be continuous time rated suitable for operation in a 40 degrees C ambient,
unless specified otherwise in the process equipment division of these Specifications.
44
45
46
S. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), for
all applications. See the process equipment division of these Specifications for pumps and other
equipment that require additional enclosure requirements.
165477
City of Dallas
16150 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
T. All TEFC Motors shall have corrosion resistant enclosures, fan, cover, epoxy paint, corrosion
resistant fittings and stainless steel or aluminum nameplates similar to Mill and Chemical,
Corro-Duty, Chemical Processing motors.
4
5
U. Motors are to be bi directional. If the fan must be unidirectional, it shall be the motor
manufacturer's responsibility to obtain the direction required from the drive manufacturer.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
V. Guards
1. Exposed moving parts shall be provided with guards in accordance with the requirements of
OSHA. Guards shall be fabricated of flattened expanded metal screen, 3/4 inch No. 10, to
provide visual inspection of moving parts without removal of the guard.
2. Guards shall be galvanized after fabrication and shall be designed to be readily removable to
facilitate maintenance of moving parts. Windows shall be provided in the guard for access
to the lubricating fittings.
2.3
FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS LESS THAN HP
14
A. Motor voltage shall be single phase, 115 V, 60 Hz, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
15
B. Enclosures shall be TEFC or TENV.
16
17
C. Motors shall have a built-in manual or automatic reset thermal protector, or an integrally
mounted, enclosed manual reset, motor overload switch.
18
2.4
MOTORS HP AND LARGER
19
20
A. Motor voltage shall be 3 phase, single voltage, as shown on the Drawings, and in compliance
with IEEE 841.
21
22
23
B. Motors shall have NEMA standard Class "F" insulation with a maximum temperature rise of 90
Deg C above a 40 degrees C ambient, on a continuous operation or intermittent duty, at
nameplate horsepower.
24
25
C. Motors shall have non-hygroscopic encapsulated windings. Motor leads shall be Class F rated,
with permanent identification.
26
D. Motor rotors and assembly, shall be dynamically balanced.
27
28
E. Motors less than 15 HP shall have a locked rotor inrush not exceeding MG 1. Motors 15HP and
larger shall have a locked rotor inrush kVA not exceeding Code G (6.29 KVA/HP).
29
30
F. Motors shall meet or exceed the Minimum Guaranteed Efficiencies, listed in the Table of Part 4
of this Section, at the approximate nameplate current values at 460 volts.
31
32
33
34
G. The motor insulation system for motors controlled with VFDs shall have full capability to
handle the common mode voltage conditions imposed by the VFD. Motor insulation system
shall conform to all of the requirements of the latest version of NEMA MG1, Part 31 for peak
voltage withstand capability.
35
H. All motors controlled with VFDs shall have 1600 Volt insulation systems.
36
37
I.
The critical speed of the shaft and rotor assembly shall exceed the operating speed by a
minimum of 10 percent.
38
39
J.
The no-load sound pressure level, based on the A-weighted scale at 3 feet, when measured in
accordance with IEEE Std. 85 shall not exceed 85 dBA.
40
K. Vibration limits shall not exceed 0.2-in/sec at any frequency.
41
42
L. Motors shall have a minimum of one grounding pad on each motor frame. Motors larger than
75 HP shall have a minimum of two brass grounding pads on each motor frame.
43
M. Bearings
165477
City of Dallas
16150 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Motors 1/2 through 5 HP shall have permanently lubricated sealed antifriction ball-bearings
with L10 lifetime of 50,000 HRS.
Motors larger than 5 HP shall have oil or grease-lubricated antifriction ball-bearings with
L10 lifetime of 50,000 HRS.
Vertical motor thrust and guide bearings shall conform to AFBMA standards and shall have
L10 lifetime ratings as specified for ball-bearings of the same horsepower range. Down
thrust information shall be provided to the motor manufacturer by the equipment supplier.
Anti friction motor bearings shall be designed to be regreasable and initially shall be filled
with grease suitable for the motor ambient temperature specified.
Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed and lubricated, shall
be fitted with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain and relief fittings. Extension tubes
shall be used when necessary. Grease supply fittings shall be standard hydraulic type as
manufactured by the Alemite Division of the Stewart Warner Corporation.
Sealed bearings shall be contact seal (lip) or non contact labyrinth type.
N. Space Heaters
1. Space heaters shall be supplied with all 3 phase motors and shall conform to the following:
a. Heaters shall be of the cartridge or flexible wrap around type installed within the motor
enclosure adjacent to core iron. Heaters shall be rated for 120 V, single phase with
wattage as required. The heater wattage and voltage shall be embossed on the motor
nameplate. Power leads for heaters shall be brought out at the motor accessory lead
junction box.
2.5
23
24
25
26
27
FACTORY TESTING
A. Motors rated 200 HP and larger shall be standard motor tested. Except where specific testing or
witnessed shop tests are required by the specifications for driven equipment, factory test reports
may be copies of routine test reports of electrically duplicate motors. Test report shall indicate
test procedure and instrumentation used to measure and record data. Test report shall be certified
by the motor manufacturer's test personnel and be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval.
28
PART 3 - EXECUTION
29
3.1
INSTALLATION
30
A. The CONTRACTOR shall install motors in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
31
B. Make a visual and mechanical inspection.
32
C. Check for physical damage.
33
34
D. Compare equipment nameplate information with single line diagram and report any
discrepancies.
35
E. Inspect for proper mounting, grounding, connection, and lubrication.
36
F. Inspect each motor for the proper installation, rated voltage, phase and speed.
37
38
G. Check for proper phase and ground connections, Check to see that multi-voltage motors are
connected for the proper voltage.
39
40
41
H. Motor connections shall be ring type compression terminations on the motor leads and secured
with bolt, nut and spring washer. Connections shall be rubber insulated, half lap and two layers
minimum of Scotch 33 tape.
42
43
44
45
I.
165477
All lugs and connectors shall be copper and shall be crimped type, with standard industry
tooling. Lugs and connectors shall match the wire size where used, and shall be clearly identified
and color coded on the connector. All connections shall be made for stranded wire and shall be
made electrically and mechanically secured. The lugs and connectors shall have a current
City of Dallas
16150 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
carrying capacity equal to the conductors for which they are rated and meet UL 486
requirements for 75 degrees C. Lugs larger than 4/0 AWG shall be two-hole lugs with NEMA
spacing. The lugs shall be of closed end construction to exclude moisture migration into the
cable conductor.
3.2
TESTS
A. Test for proper rotation prior to connection to the driven equipment.
7
8
B. Test the insulation (megger test) of all new motors, 10 hp and above, in accordance with NEMA
MG-1. Test voltage shall be 1000 VAC plus twice the rated voltage of the motor.
9
10
11
12
C. For motors 300 hp and larger, test duration shall be for 10 minutes with resistances tabulated
every 15 seconds for the first minute and then every minute for the next ten. The megohm rating
at the end of the 10 minutes shall be at least twice as high as the 1 minute reading. Dielectric
absorption ratio and polarization index shall be calculated.
13
D. Perform a rotation test to ensure proper shaft direction.
14
15
16
E. Where a motor is inverter fed, the direction of rotation shall be checked by momentary
application of voltage to the motor, to confirm that the phase sequence is the same as the
incoming power to the inverter.
17
18
F. Measure running current and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full load
amperes.
19
G. Inspect for unusual mechanical or electrical noise or signs of overheating during initial test run.
20
21
H. Monitor motors during startup and commissioning to record operating amps, voltage and
operating vibration levels.
22
23
24
25
I.
165477
Submit test report and all recorded field data. Submit copies of the raw data recorded in the field,
signed by the person recording the data, and typewritten reports certified by the
CONTRACTOR. The motors will not be accepted until the reports are submitted and approved.
City of Dallas
16150 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
PART 4 - TABLE OF MOTOR EFFICIENCIES

2-POLE (3600 RPM)
Min. Efficiency
4-POLE (1800 RPM)

Min. Efficiency
6-POLE (1200 RPM)

Min. Efficiency
8-POLE (900 RPM)

Min. Efficiency
1.0
72.0
80.0
77.0
70.0
1.5
80.0
81.5
82.5
74.0
2.0
81.5
81.5
84.0
80.0
3.0
82.5
85.5
85.5
81.5
5.0
85.5
85.5
85.5
82.5
7.5
87.5
87.5
87.5
82.5
10.0
88.5
87.5
87.5
86.5
15.0
89.5
89.5
88.5
87.5
20.0
88.5
89.5
88.5
87.5
25.0
89.5
91.0
90.2
87.5
30.0
89.5
91.0
90.2
89.5
40.0
90.2
91.7
91.7
89.5
50.0
91.0
91.7
91.7
90.2
60.0
91.7
92.4
92.4
90.2
75.0
91.7
93.0
92.4
91.7
100.0
92.4
93.6
93.0
91.7
125.0
93.6
93.6
93.0
92.4
150.0
93.6
94.1
94.1
92.4
200.0
94.1
94.1
94.1
93.0
250.0
94.5
94.1
94.1
93.6
300.0
994.5
94.5
94.1
--
350.0
94.5
94.5
94.1
--
400.0
94.5
94.5
--
450.0
94.5
94.5
--
500.0
94.5
95.0
--
HP
3
4
5
6
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16150 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
16150 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16151
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
7
8
A. The pump manufacturer shall furnish and supervise the installation of four medium voltage,
induction, totally enclosed water cooled type motors and accessories for use the concrete volute
pumps specified in Section 11210. Motors shall be used with medium voltage variable
frequency drives.
9
10
11
B. This Section specifies the requirements for custom-built, premium electric motors as specified.
Unless otherwise shown or specified, the motors shall be single speed, single winding, in strict
compliance with the requirements specified herein.
12
13
C. The motor manufacturer shall coordinate with the VFD manufacturer and shall provide letter
stating that the motor is suitable for VFDs being furnished under this project.
14
1.2
RELATED WORK
15
A. Section 11210 Concrete Volute Pumps
16
B. Section 11211 Parallel Shaft Gear Reducer
17
C. Section 16000 - Electrical General Provisions
18
D. Section 16120 - Wires and Cables (600 Volt Maximum)
19
E. Section 16121 - Medium Voltage Cables
20
F. Section 16195 - Power Metering and Protective Relays
21
G. Section 16483 - Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
22
1.3
SUBMITTALS
23
24
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 16000, and
25
26
27
B. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under
will be returned un-reviewed.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
C. Shop Drawings and Product Data. For each motor specified under this Section, submit the
following information:
1. Manufacturer.
2. Rated full load horsepower.
3. Rated volts.
4. Number of phases.
5. Frequency in hertz.
6. Full load amperes (FLA).
7. No load amperes.
8. Locked rotor amperes (LRA) at rated voltage or NEMA code letter.
9. Synchronous speed (srpm).
10. NEMA insulation system classification and description of manufacturer's method of
application.
11. Temperature rise at rated full load, by resistance temperature detector.
165477
City of Dallas
16151 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
12. Maximum ambient temperature for which motor is designed.

13. Service factor.
14. Frame size, outline dimensions, net weight, and weight of rotating element. Include surge
protection dimensions and weight.
15. NEMA machine type (ODP, WP-1, TEFC, etc.).
16. Bearing size and calculation, based on L10 life.
17. Lubrication (compatible with pump manufacture).
18. Safe stall time.
19. Maximum acceleration time with NEMA standard Wk2 value, at rated voltage and at 90%
of rated voltage.
20. Number of safe starts in succession when starting from a 40 degree Celsius ambient,
intermediate waiting periods and other conditions for driving equipment with a NEMA
standard wk2 value.
21. Efficiency at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, full load, and service factor.
22. Power factor at and full load.
23. Space heater voltage and wattage.
24. Surge protection information, including mounting details.
25. Platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD) literature with wiring diagram.
26. Motor Damage Curve and safe stall time at 100% and 80% of motor rated terminal voltage.
27. Data to be included on nameplate.
28. Dimensions and internal arrangements of terminal boxes.
29. Locations and sizes of lubrication connections, vents, drains, etc.
30. Speed-torque curve at 100% and 80% of rated voltage.
31. Speed-current curve at 100% and 80% of rated voltage.
32. Acceleration time at 100% and 80% of rated voltage.
33. Locked rotor withstand time.
34. Schematic and interconnection diagrams.
35. Instruction manual.
36. Maximum sound power per NEMA MG-1.
37. Date of Manufacture
38. Cable terminations
32
D. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein.
33
E. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1. Manufacturers contact address and telephone number for parts and service.
2. Project record drawings clearly indicating operating features and including as-built shop
drawings, outline drawings, and schematic and wiring diagrams.
3. Instructions for erection, alignment (including tolerances), and preparation for use.
4. Complete description of safety equipment, safety procedures, and safety precautions.
5. Normal starting, running and shutdown procedures, as well as emergency shutdown
procedures.
6. Recommended number of starts in any 24-hour period.
7. Normal maintenance, inspection, and lubrication procedures.
8. Recommended spare parts list.
9. Recommended renewal parts list
10. Record Documents for the information required by the submittals above.
47
1.4
48
49
50
51
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Motors shall be designed, built, and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the following
standards:
1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association Inc. (NEMA)
a. NEMA MG1 Part 20 Large Machines.
165477
City of Dallas
16151 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
b.
2.
3.
21
22
23
NEMA MG2 - Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation,
and Use of Electric Motors and Generators.
c. NEMA MG3 - Sound Level Prediction for Installed Rotating Electrical Machines.
a. NFPA-70 - National Electrical Code.
b. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE)
c. IEEE Std 1 - General Principles for Temperature Limits in the Rating of Electric
Equipment.
d. IEEE Std 43 - Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating
Machinery.
e. IEEE Std 85 - Test Procedures for Airbone Sound Measurements on Rotating Electric
Machinery.
f. IEEE Std 112 Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators.
g. IEEE Std 275 - Recommended Practice for Thermal Evaluation of Insulation Systems
for AC Electric Machinery Employing Form-wound Pre-insulated Stator Coils,
Machines Rated 6,900 V and Below.
h. IEEE Std 429 - Standard Test Procedure for the Evaluation of Sealed Insulation
Systems for AC Electric Machinery Employing Form-wound Stator Coils.
Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association Inc. (AFBMA):
1.5
DEFINITIONS
24
25
A. Motors specified herein are three-phase, squirrel cage induction type, except as specifically
specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
26
27
B. The word "Drive" shall be construed to mean the driven equipment, i.e. pump or variable
frequency drive connected with the motor.
28
29
30
C. If there is inconsistency of size on different Drawing sheets or between Drawings and other
sections of Specifications, relating to the horsepower designation, then the larger size shall be
required.
31
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
32
33
A. The electric motor shall be furnished guaranteed by the driven equipment manufacturer, to
assure single unit responsibility.
34
35
36
37
B. When motors are furnished with driven equipment, the driven equipment supplier shall be
responsible for mounting the motor and driven equipment as a complete unit, correctly aligned
and coupled with the coupling or sheave specified on the driven equipment data sheet, and for
designing vibration, special, or unbalanced forces resulting from equipment operation.
38
39
40
41
C. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall make structural, mechanical, and
electrical changes that are necessitated because the Contractor selects equipment with
dimensional, power or mechanical differences from that shown on the Drawings. All
Engineering costs associated with revisions shall also be borne by the Contractor.
42
43
44
45
46
D. The Contractor shall satisfy himself that the motor included with the drive is compatible with
driven equipment and complies with these Specifications. In the event that the motors described
in these Specifications cannot be applied to the application or equipment offered, the Contractor
may submit an exception, stating clearly the deviations and the reasons for such deviations. The
acceptance or rejection of such deviations shall be at the sole discretion of the Owner/Engineer.
47
E. Motors manufactured prior to the date of this Contract will not be acceptable.
165477
City of Dallas
16151 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
F. Motors furnished under this section of the specifications, for use with variable frequency drives,
shall be designed for use with variable frequency drives, and shall be suitable for this
application. A Certification shall be supplied by the motor manufacturer, stating such
compliance and submitted with the motor submittals.
1.7
6
7
8
9
JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

failed any factory tests, will not be permitted.
10
11
12
13
damaged painted surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer.
14
15
16
17
D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within 14
calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within 14 calendar days,
the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the Contractors expense,
until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment.
18
19
20
E. Where space heaters are provided in motors, provide temporary electrical power and operate
space heaters, during jobsite storage and after motors are installed in permanent location, until
21
22
23
F. The motor shaft shall be rotated on a monthly basis, if such is recommended or required by the
motor manufacturer; the date recorded, and copies of the record provided to the Owner/Engineer
and the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall confirm receipt of the rotation record.
24
1.8
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
WARRANTY
workmanship for the same warranty period as specified for the associated mechanical
equipment, but not less than three years from date of Owners final acceptance of the
equipment. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material
and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work
requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at
no expense to the Owner.
32
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
33
2.1
34
35
36
37
38
acceptable:
1. Hyundai-Ideal
2. TECO-Westinghouse
3. WEG
39
40
41
not meet the specified ratings, features, and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not
42
2.2
43
44
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Each motor provided shall have an Identification Tag Number, conforming to the numbering
system and equipment name shown on the Drawings.
165477
City of Dallas
16151 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
B. Specific motor data such as HP, RPM, enclosure type, etc., is specified under the detailed
specification for the mechanical equipment with which the motor is supplied.
3
4
5
C. Motors shall have sufficient horsepower and torque capacity to drive the equipment without
overloading under all conditions, without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor and
without use of the service factor.
D. Motors shall be NEMA Design B standard, unless otherwise specified.
7
8
E. All motors shall be continuous time rated suitable for operation in a 40 degrees C ambient,
unless specified otherwise.
9
10
F. Each motor shall have couplings keyed to shafts. Coordinate with the driven equipment
manufacturer with regard to finished product.
11
12
G. Where frequent starting occurs, the design for frequent starting duty shall be equal to the duty
service required by the driven equipment.
13
14
H. Altitude: Under 3300 FT. For applications above 3300 FT, motors shall be specifically designed
and certified for operation at the specific altitude.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
I.
The motor manufacturers nameplates shall be engraved or embossed on stainless steel and
fastened to the motor frame with stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall indicate
clearly all of the items of information enumerated in NEMA Standard MG1, as applicable,
including, but not limited to the following information:
1. Main Nameplate
a. Horsepower (output).
b. RPM at full load.
c. Time rating.
d. Frequency.
e. Number of phases.
f. Model number.
g. Rated voltage.
h. Service factor.
i. Full load amps.
j. Insulation class.
k. NEMA design letter.
l. NEMA code letter.
m. Temperature Rise.
n. Manufacturers Frame size
o. Date of manufacture.
p. Direction of rotation (if uni-directional).
q. Thermal protection.
r. Motor Weight
2. Heater Nameplate.
a. Voltage and wattage.
3. Bearings Nameplate.
a. Bearing manufacturers name, identification, and recommended lubricant.
4. Dynamic Balance Nameplate
a. Furnish and mounted on motor.
44
45
46
47
48
49
J.
Motors shall have an oversized, gasketed, steel conduit box, field adjustable in 90-degree
increments unless the box contains equipment, diagonally split with tapped NPT threaded
conduit entrance hole, and shall exceed the minimum volumes defined in IEEE 841-2001.
Neoprene conduit box cover gasket and neoprene lead seal gasket with flexible nipples to ensure
the seal is maintained as the leads are moved shall be furnished. Provision for grounding shall
be provided in the conduit box utilizing a mounted clamp-type lug.
165477
City of Dallas
16151 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
K. Provide separate accessory lead conduit boxes. Minimum size entrance hub shall be C.
Resistance temperature detector leads shall not occupy the same box with any other type of
power or monitoring leads.
L. Provide lifting lugs on the motor frame.
2.3
RATING
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
A. Motor Design Criteria

1. Number of Motors:
2. Motor Tag Numbers:
3. Motor HP:
4. Motor Speed (rpm):
5. Motor Enclosure Type:
6. Motor Power Supply:
13
14
15
16
B. Nameplate horsepower rating of motor shall be equal to or greater than the total horsepower
requirement for the driven equipment. Motor shall be designed in accordance with applicable
provisions of the latest NEMA Standard Publication for Motors and Generators, MG-1, Part 20,
subject to modifications and additions as herein set forth.
17
18
19
C. All motors shall have a service factor of 1.15.

1. In sizing motors, no portion of a motors service factor above 1.0 shall be used in normal
continuous operation of the motor.
20
21
22
23
24
25
D. All motors shall have Class F insulation and shall be rated at the following temperature rises:
1. For motors over 1,500 horsepower, the motor windings shall be capable of operating
continually, at 115% of nameplate horsepower, with rated voltage and frequency applied
and with a temperature rise by embedded detector not exceeding 85 C over a 40 C ambient
temperature.
2. The ambient air temperature shall be defined as air immediately surrounding the motor.
26
27
28
E. Power Factor: Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: 12 pole, at least 0.8; 10 pole or less, greater
than 0.85. The motor manufacturer shall not utilize correction capacitors to achieve this power
factor.
29
30
31
32
33
F. Starting Voltage: Each motor shall be capable of producing the required starting torque, as
required by the driven equipment manufacturer, utilizing the starting voltage as shown on the
Drawings and as specified for the associated motor controller. Motors shall be capable of
bringing the driven equipment up to speed, without motor overload, under the conditions
specified in the driven equipment specification.
34
35
36
G. Locked Rotor Current: The locked rotor current of the motor shall be limited in accordance with
the National Electrical Code and NEMA MG-1 standards, to a maximum of Code Letter G,
(6.29 kVA per horsepower). The code letter shall be clearly shown on the nameplate.
37
38
H. Acceleration Time: Provide calculated acceleration time of the combined motor and driven load
and rated voltage and at 90% of rated voltage, as specified in the Submittal paragraphs.
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
I.
Safe Stall Time: Safe stall time shall not be less than 4 seconds more than the acceleration time
when hot, unless approved by the Owner/Engineer. The motor manufacturer shall coordinate
with the supplier of the driven equipment to obtain inertia data, and shall calculate the
acceleration times when starting across the line. Include calculations with 100 % of the rated
name plate motor voltage, (I.E. 4000 volts for a motor on a 4160 volt system), 90%, and 80%
present at the motor terminals. The Contractor shall submit acceleration curves plotting time vs.
speed, and calculations to the Owner/Engineer for approval, as specified in the Submittal
requirements of this Section.
47
48
J.
Noise Measurement: The noise level as measured by IEEE Standard 85, shall be coordinated
with pump manufacturer, and submitted for approval.
165477
Four
MTR-7000, MTR-8000, MTR-9000, MTR-10000
3,750 (Final selection by manufacturer)
720
Totally enclosed water cooled (TEWAC)
4,160 VAC, 60 Hz, 3 phase
City of Dallas
16151 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
K. Slip: The full load RPM shall match or exceed the pump design RPM.
2
3
4
5
6
L. Efficiency: Motor efficiency shall be evaluated and determined by the pump manufacturer to
achieve and guarantee the overall wire-to-water efficiency of the pumping unit, for pumping
applications. All motors shall have the efficiency evaluated with pump. Motor efficiency shall
not be less than 95% and power factor not less than 85% when operating at maximum speed,
service factor load and rated voltage and frequency.
2.4
STATOR
8
9
10
11
A. The stator core shall be built up with high grade, non-aging laminated silicon steel, C5, or better.
Each lamination core shall be plated to minimize eddy current losses. The laminations shall be
adequately secured to the stator frame and securely held in place at each end. There shall be no
perceptible buzzing of laminations during operation. Provide slot wedges for rigidity.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
B. The motor stator winding shall be provided with premium grade full Class F insulation or better.
Silicone rubber insulation is not acceptable
1. A VPI insulation system shall be used to provide high resistance to moisture and other
contaminates.
2. All windings shall be copper; assembled using form wound coils of the same size and shape.
Random wound coils are not acceptable.
3. The form wound coils shall be constructed with copper wire. The stator construction method
shall accommodate VPI treatment. The coils shall be covered with strand insulation
consisting of Dacron polyester glass fiber film or other high temperature insulating film.
4. Provide full length slot liners rated 5000 volts minimum which extend beyond the stator
core iron to reduce the possibility of tracking to ground.
5. Coil insulation shall be tightly applied to eliminate all air voids.
6. Coils shall be tightly inserted into the stator slots without damage. Coils shall be secured to
surge ring or treated rope and securely laced to one another as necessary to prevent
distortion and expansion.
7. The end turns shall be blocked top, sides, and bottom. The surge ring shall be designed and
installed to prevent movement during starting and short circuit conditions.
8. The entire stator shall be oven cured to provide a completely sealed insulation system.
30
2.5
ROTOR
31
32
33
A. The shaft shall be steel, accurately machined, smoothly finished, with sufficient strength to
withstand all stresses resulting from normal operation at any speed up to and including a 25%
over-speed condition. Provide shaft end details coordinated with pump and shafting as specified.
34
35
36
B. The core shall be built up with high-grade non-aging silicon steel, each single piece lamination
core plated to minimize eddy current losses. Core mechanical integrity shall not rely on any
electrically active component.
37
38
39
40
41
42
C. Rotor bars and end ring shall be copper or copper alloy with uniform resistance characteristics so
as to equalize thermal stresses. The bars shall be rectangular or shaped to meet motor starting
and running torque requirements. Each copper rotor bar shall be mechanically locked or secured
in the rotor pole slots to minimize movement and vibration. Rotor end rings shall be free of
circumferential joints and shall be 100% swaged to the rotor bars by an induction or torch
brazing process.
43
44
45
46
D. Rotors shall be statically and dynamically balanced prior to assembly. Balancing shall be
checked after assembly with the motor running at rated speed. Run out on the shaft shall be
checked and in no case shall they exceed 0.001 inch measured with a precision indicator with
the reading taken at the end of the shaft.
165477
City of Dallas
16151 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
E. The cage bars shall be copper or a copper alloy with uniform resistance characteristics so as to
equalize thermal stresses. ALUMINUM ROTOR BARS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. Rotor bar
shall be in tension at all times and shall be brazed at the end ring connections. Fabricated
aluminum rotors are unacceptable.
2.6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
BEARINGS
A. Vertical Motors
1. Motor bearings shall be designed for the maximum load imposed by the driven equipment
and motor, and shall be selected for a L10 life of 100,000 hours. The thrust bearing on top
of the motor shall be insulated from shaft-bearing-frame current. Insulating means shall also
be provided for any oil-supply connections and monitoring equipment.
2. Thrust bearing on top of motor shall be the anti-friction type, be grease lubricated, and other
necessary accessories. Lower radial guide bearings shall be oil-lubricated, anti-friction or
sleeve type bearing with oil reservoir. The lower drive and bearing shall be supplied with a
shaft grounding brush. Thrust bearing shall be of the air cooled type or water cooled type (if
required).
2.7
MOTOR COOLING
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A. There shall be a heat exchanger for the TEWAC motor. The heat exchanger shall be designed for
86F inlet water at 250 psig, and 0.001 fouling factor with a maximum flow velocity of 7 feet
per second. Construction of the heat exchanger shall be: 90/10 Cu-Ni tubes with copper or
aluminum tins, 3/4-inch tube OD, and 316 stainless steel headers or water boxes with flanged
pipe connections. The headers or water boxes shall be constructed with removable cover plates
to permit access to all tubes for inspection and cleaning without disconnecting the piping.
Provide a condensation/drip plan with external drain connection and a leak detector for the heat
exchanger. Provide a stainless steel automatic air vent valve at the highest point of the heat
exchanger with external drain connection.
26
27
28
29
30
B. The internal cooling air of all motors shall circulate from both ends of the motor towards the
center of the rotor and stator lamination stacks, then through vents in the rotor and stator
laminations (symmetrical cooling) to the exhaust openings or heat exchanger. Under no
circumstances shall unidirectional (asymmetrical) cooling airflow be utilized due to the uneven
heat distribution caused particularly in the rotor and bearings.
31
C. All motors shall include corrosion-resistant hardware for screens and associated fasteners.
32
2.8
LEADS
33
A. Motor Leads. Use ASTM B 173, Class G, stranded copper.
34
35
36
37
B. Provide permanent identification numbers on leads according to NEMA MG 1-2.02. Provide

each lead with additional identification within six inches of the stator frame. Use crimp-on,
solder-less copper terminals on leads and place heat-shrink insulation sleeves or covers between
leads and terminals.
38
39
C. The motor leads shall have the same class of insulation as the motor stator windings. Leads shall
be numbered for clockwise rotation when facing the opposite the shaft end.
40
41
42
43
D. Cable termination and splicing material shall be as manufactured by Raychem; 3M Corp.;

Elastimold. All material used in terminating and splicing medium voltage cables shall be as
recommended by the cable manufacturer. Cables shall be terminated and spliced in accordance
with the kit supplier's drawings.
44
E. Cable terminations shall meet or exceed IEEE Standard 48, Class I requirements.
45
F. EP insulated cable splices shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI C119.1 and IEEE 404.
165477
City of Dallas
16151 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
G. Cable accessories shall be by one manufacturer to assure adequate installer training and
application assistance.
2.9
4
5
6
A. Motor enclosure shall be totally enclosed water cooled (TEWAC) and be in compliance with
NEMA MG-1.
2.10 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
A. A Motor Protection Relay shall be provided, for each motor, to monitor winding and bearing
temperature detectors. Motor Protection relays shall be as specified in Section 16195 Power
Metering and Protective Relays, and furnished with the controller, under other sections of these
specifications. Location of the Motor Protection Relays shall be as specified elsewhere or as
shown on the Drawings. A 100VA minimum UPS shall be provided, powered from the control
power transformer of the controller to provide control power to the Motor Protection Relays.
2.11 HARDWARE
14
15
16
ENCLOSURE
A. Use structural bolts, washers, nuts, pins, and similar items manufactured of high-strength
stainless steel. Use only hexagon-head bolts and hexagon nuts.
2.12 TERMINAL BOXES
17
18
19
20
21
A.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
B. The main terminal box shall be custom designed to accommodate all conductors and specified
accessories located in the Terminal Housing.
1. Provide NEMA multiple-hole pads with standoff insulators, as defined in NEMA MG 1
Table 20.3 to terminate the incoming motor leads.
2. The motor terminal box shall be sized to accommodate prefabricated shrink-on cable
terminators as manufactured by 3-M or RayChem.
3. Motor leads shall be marked for permanent identification.
4. Provide grounding lug in box for incoming equipment grounding conductor(s). The main
terminal box shall be installed integral with the motor.
5. Where lightning arrestors, and/or surge capacitors are shown or specified to be located in
the Terminal Housing, the size of the housing shall be increased to accommodate the
additional equipment.
34
35
C. Space Heater Terminal Box: Provide a separate terminal box on the motor for termination of the
wires on strap screw or tubular clamp terminal blocks.
36
37
38
D. RTD Terminal Box: Provide a separate terminal box on the motor for termination of motor,
bearing, and ambient RTD leads, for termination of the wires on tubular screw clamp terminal
blocks. Box shall accommodate a 2-1/2 C minimum.
39
40
E. Signal leads using low voltage or current shall not be housed in the same connection box as
leads carrying 120 volts or currents in excess of ampere.
41
F. Leads shall be suitably marked and identified with heat shrink markers.
42
43
G. Accessories boxes shall have stainless steel nameplates, attached with stainless steel screws. The
nameplates shall say SPACE HEATER, BEARING RTDs, WINDING RTDs, etc.
44
H. Accessories boxes shall be bottom entry.
45
I.
165477
Provide custom built, gasketed, oversized conduit boxes, and terminal housing cabinets for all
wiring connections to motor. The cable entrance to the boxes shall be from the bottom side.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, All terminal boxes shall be located on the same side
of the motor, where possible. Verify exact location of cable entry, before design, from the
Contract Drawings.
Use only corrosion-resistant materials.

City of Dallas
16151 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
J.
K. All wires and electrical connections shall be copper.
L. All wiring penetrating the motor frame shall be protected against chaffing with grommets.
4
5
M. Provide an Infrared (IR) port suitably constructed, located, and sized to allow viewing the cable
terminations.
2.13 GROUNDING MEANS
7
8
9
10
Permanently identify all leads and terminals.
A. Provide a grounding lug threaded into the motor frame within the motor terminal box and other
motor conduit boxes. Lug shall be Burndy KC Servit. Provide two NEMA 2-hole ground pads
located near the base of the motor mounted 180 apart.
2.14 SPACE HEATERS
11
12
A. Type. Electric resistance, 120 volts, silicon rubber clad or rubber epoxy or equivalent nonoxidizing exterior, with maximum surface temperature of 130C (266F).
13
14
B. Alternatively, provide two stainless-steel-sheathed conventional space heaters, each with rated
watts at the specified voltage equal to twice the required value, and connect in series.
15
16
C. Space heaters shall maintain the internal temperature above dew point when motor is not
operating.
17
18
D. Heaters shall not be located directly in access opening where they may pose a danger of burn or
shock to servicemen.
19
E. Space heater wiring shall be routed to prevent wire being between the frame and space heater.
20
2.15 RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS (RTDs)
21
A. Type: Platinum, 100 OHM at 0C
22
23
24
25
26
B. Quantity.
1. Six: Two per phase for the motor windings.
2. Two: One for each Motor Bearing. Each thrust bearing and lower radial guide bearing shall
have a 100-ohm platinum RTD installed for sensing bearing temperature.
3. One: Ambient RTD, adjacent to, or in the inlet air path, for WP1 and WP2 motors.
27
2.16 SPARE PARTS
28
29
30
31
A. Manufacturer's standard shop paints for prime and finish coats are acceptable. Include one pint
of finish paint for each motor. If environmental regulations prohibit paint shipment, the
Contractor may supply the same paint type and color from a local source.
2.17 SPECIAL TOOLS
32
33
A. Furnish with the equipment, one set of any special tools or devices required for the assembly,
operation, and maintenance of all equipment furnished.
34
35
B. Motor manufacturer shall furnish one Altek RTD calibrator Model 211 to check the proper
installation of RTDs prior to final acceptance.
36
2.18 LUBRICANT
37
38
A. Furnish with the equipment, oil of the recommended type and grade, in sufficient quantity for
initial filling and for operation during acceptance tests and installation.
39
40
41
B. The Manufacturer shall provide a list of lubricants available sources. In addition provide the
Owner with a sufficient quantity of lubricant for required service during the first 12 months after
start-up.
165477
City of Dallas
16151 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.19 FACTORY TESTS
2
3
4
5
A. Perform Routine Factory Tests for Polyphase Medium Induction Motors and the tests specified
herein: The method of testing shall be in accordance with IEEE Std 112, and shall be in
accordance with MG1-12.55. The following routine tests shall be done at the factory on the
motors provided, and certified test reports shall be submitted.
6
7
B. After successful completion of the VFD factory acceptance testing, and with the Owners
approval, the VFD units shall be shipped to the motor manufacturers facility for further testing.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
C. Tests to be performed on each motor, at the factory of manufacture, in the position of operation,
shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1. Winding Resistance Measurements. Reference Resistance per IEEE Std. 112, latest version.
2. Reference Ambient of 25C.
3. Efficiency per either of the following:
4. Efficiency at rated voltage and frequency, by dynamometer (IEEE Method B), 6 points
minimum. Dynamometer correction shall be applied or efficiency using an equivalent
circuit F with direct measurement of stray load loss per IEEE Method F.
5. Bearing Loss Stabilization.
6. Locked Rotor Test (two line method).
7. Core Losses and Friction and Windage Losses.
8. Power Factor
9. Load test at rated temperature rise (Stable to 1C within 30 minutes).
10. Speed-Torque and Speed-Current Curves using the Projects VFD units after taking receipt
of these VFD units from the VFD manufacturer.
11. Current input at rated frequency and voltage, with rotor at standstill for squirrel-cage motors
12. Stator Temperature Rise Measurements by embedded detector and resistance at rated load
per IEEE Std. 112, latest version.
13. High Potential Tests per NEMA MG-1 Part 20.18 and IEEE Std 43.
14. No-load readings of current and speed at normal voltage and frequency.
15. Bearing Insulation Tests.
16. Noise Measurements per NEMA MG1 Part 9 latest Version.
17. Vibration Measurements.
31
D. Substitutions for or waivers of the tests and methods listed above will not be permitted.
32
33
34
35
36
37
E. In addition, the motors shall receive a complete test in accordance with IEEE 112, and certified
copies of the test data recorded on appropriate forms of IEEE 112, together with a certified
statement of compliance with minimum specified power factor and efficiencies shall be
furnished to the Owner/Engineer. The recorded data on the forms shall be in sufficient clarity
and detail to permit third-party longhand validation and verification of any computer generated
results.
38
2.20 WITNESS TESTING
39
40
A. The Owner/Engineer will witness the Factory Tests for each of the motors with the
corresponding VFD provided under this specification.
41
B. The number of Owner/Engineer persons witnessing the tests will be four persons.
42
43
44
C. Under no circumstances, will the equipment be approved for shipment, nor will the equipment
be accepted by the Owner, if witness testing is specified, and the equipment is shipped without
the testing being witnessed.
45
46
47
D. If a test must be re-run due to failure in meeting the specified requirements, the witness expenses
for the re-test shall be borne by the Manufacturer or Vendor. Retesting on the same trip shall be
only at the option of the Owner/Engineer.
165477
City of Dallas
16151 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
E. The Owner/Engineer, who is witnessing the testing, shall approve all travel arrangements,
including the airline selected, flight times, hotel selected, testing agenda, etc.
3
4
F. The Owner/Engineer shall have direct communications with the person who is responsible for
local arrangements and has the authority to pay for those expenses prior to leaving Dallas.
5
6
7
G. The Contractor shall submit the testing agenda for approval at least 30 days prior to the test date,
or the test date shall be rescheduled, with no change in the Contract price or time. The agenda
shall include a detailed list of all tests to be done.
H. Where travel is over night, testing shall not start on the arrival day.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
I.
Owner/Engineer Persons Travel Expenses

1. Owner/Engineer representatives shall not have to provide for any out of pocket expenses
related to the trip, transportation, meals or incidentals that would require later
reimbursement.
2. The Contractor shall provide, and pay for, all air travel fare, including ground shuttle or taxi,
to and from the Owner/Engineers office or residence. Air fare inside the continental United
States shall be non-stop if available, First Class or better, from Dallas.
3. Ground transportation at any destination shall be provided by the host Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM). The Owner/Engineer persons shall not be required to drive in a
foreign country under any circumstances.
4. The Contractor shall provide for hotel, meals, travel and incidentals to be paid for by the
host OEM at the testing location, whose equipment is being tested. The host OEM shall
have the authority to resolve any expense problems. If the Hotel offers restaurants, those
charges shall be covered in the Hotel expenses. If meals are not offered at the Hotel,
transportation to restaurants and the cost of those meals shall be provided by the host OEM.
5. After successful testing and with Owners approval, motors shall be shipped to the pump
manufacturers test facility for complete testing of the pump, gear box, motor, and VFD
assembly. Refer to Concrete Volute Pumps (Specification 11210) for additional
information regarding factory testing.
28
PART 3 - EXECUTION
29
3.1
INSTALLATION
30
3.2
MOTOR MANUFACTURER SERVICE ENGINEER: FIELD TESTING
31
32
33
34
35
36
A. The motor manufacturer shall furnish the services of a competent service Engineer, who shall
have had a minimum of five years of experience in the installation, adjustment, and operation of
the equipment that is being furnished under this contract. This service is to ensure proper
installation and adjustment of the motor, instruct personnel in proper operation, maintenance,
and care of the equipment, for making operation tests of equipment, and recommendations for
obtaining the most efficient use thereof.
37
38
39
40
41
B. The service Engineer shall arrive at the site after the motor installation but prior to testing and
start-up. The service Engineer shall verify the proper installation, alignment, wiring, lubrication,
and connection of all appurtenances prior to start-up. He shall be present during testing and
start-up and shall certify to the Owner in writing that the motors have been properly installed
and operate satisfactorily.
42
43
44
45
46
C. The minimum time required for each motor, to be on-site, not including travel time, is as
follows:
1. Check motor installation
two days (2 trips minimum)
2. Pump start-up and testing
four days (2 trips minimum)
3. Troubleshooting
two days (3 trips minimum)
165477
City of Dallas
16151 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
D. Field-Testing: The following tests shall be performed on the motors after installation in the field.
1. Polarization Index Test: Measure and record the motors insulation resistance polarization
index (10 minute / 1 minute ratio), at 2500 VDC, per IEEE Standard 43. Minimum
acceptable polarization index ration shall be greater than 2.0.
2. Where a motor is inverter fed, the direction of rotation shall be checked by momentary
application of voltage to the motor, to confirm that the phase sequence is the same as the
incoming power to the inverter.
3. Motors shall have a one hour run-in while uncoupled from the driven load. The motor
temperatures shall be monitored and recorded, every five minutes from just before start to
the end of the hour test. Record operating amps, voltage, and vibration levels.
4. Monitor motors during startup and commissioning to record operating amps, voltage, and
operating vibration levels.
5. Submit test report and all recorded field data. Submit copies of the raw data recorded in the
field, signed by the person recording the data, and typewritten reports certified by the
Contractor. The motors will not be accepted until the reports are submitted and approved.
16
E. Inspect for unusual mechanical or electrical noise or signs of overheating during initial test run.
17
3.3
18
19
20
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION

A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the
damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced.
3.4
MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATION
21
22
A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's Engineer shall certify in writing that the equipment
has been installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
23
B. The Contractor shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's service Engineers certification.
24
3.5
TRAINING
25
26
A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of
the equipment furnished under this Section.
27
B. The training shall be for a period of not less than one eight hour day.
28
29
30
C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the
Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to
the equipment being supplied.
31
32
D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include
specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project.
33
E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative.
34
35
36
37
F. The Owner shall have the right to videotape the training for the Owners use.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16151 - 13
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
16151 - 14
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16195
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
7
A. This Section of the Specifications describes the requirements for power metering and protective
relays to be furnished under other Sections of the Specifications as listed in the Related Work
paragraph of this Section.
8
9
B. All equipment described herein shall be submitted and furnished as an integral part of equipment
specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
10
11
12
C. This specification is applicable to all power metering and protective relays shown on
contract drawings
1.2
13
14
RELATED WORK
1.3
SUBMITTALS
15
16
17
A. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under
18
19
20
21
B. Submit catalog data for all items supplied from this specification Section as applicable.
Submittal shall include catalog data, functions, ratings, inputs, outputs, displays, etc., sufficient
to confirm that the meter or relay provides every specified requirement. Any options or
exceptions shall be clearly indicated.
22
23
24
25
26
27
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall include the following information:
d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals above.
28
1.4
29
30
31
32
33
A. The equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest
revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted):
1. NEMA/ISCI 109 Transient Overvoltage Withstand Test
2. IEEE Std. 472/ANSI C37.90A Surge Withstand Capability Tests
3. IEC 255.4 Surge Withstand Capability Tests
34
35
B. All meters, relays and associated equipment shall comply with the requirements of the National
Electric Code and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) where applicable.
36
37
C. Each specified device shall also conform to the standards and codes listed in the individual
device paragraphs.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
2
3
4
5
A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a
minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of
installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this
requirement.
6
7
B. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space or location shown on the Drawings. Equipment
which does not fit within the space or location is not acceptable.
C. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified.
1.6
10
11
12
13
14
15
WARRANTY
workmanship for one year from date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items
specified in this Section. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly
furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any
warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the
Contractor at no expense to the Owner.
16
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
17
2.1
18
19
20
21
22
23
GENERAL
A. Metering and Protective Relay Enclosures.
1. Enclosures for meters and protective relays located within the associated equipment shall
have the same Enclosure Types as specified for the associated equipment. Meters and
relays, located remote from the associate equipment, shall have an enclosure type as
specified herein.
2.2
FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM (FP1)
24
25
26
27
acceptable:
1. GE/Multilin Model 750
2. Approved equal
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
C. General
1. Digital relay for management and primary protection of feeders, and management and
backup protection of buses, transformers and transmission lines.
2. The unit shall provide protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and
remote human interfaces.
3. The relay shall be of drawout construction.
4. All circuit boards shall have a harsh environment conformal coating to resist H2S gas and
other corrosive agents, including humidity.
5. All components, except terminating hardware, shall be mounted inside the relay.
6. The unit shall be suitable for semi-flush mounting in a panel.
7. It shall be equipped with a front panel display and keypad for programming and monitoring.
8. The relay shall comply with surge withstand capability standards ANSI C37.90 and IEC
255.4.
44
45
D. Protection
1. The relay shall have the following protective functions:
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
a.
b.
c.
d.
Time phase overcurrent elements for all phases with level detectors.
1) The phase time overcurrent element shall be capable of dynamic adjustment of the
pickup setting from manual close blocking, cold load pickup and voltage restrained
overcurrent features;
Time ground overcurrent elements with level detectors.
Directional control of both phase and ground overcurrent elements.
Two independent elements each for:
1) Undervoltage.
2) Overvoltage
3) Underfrequency
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
E. Control
1. The relay shall be able to trip and close an associated circuit breaker and track the breaker
position. The relay shall include a Red breaker closed LED.
2. Closing operations shall be supervised by a synchro-check scheme, with voltage source
level or manual override provisions.
3. The relay shall be able to control the overcurrent elements in a cold load pickup or manual
closing operating mode.
4. The relay shall have a minimum of 14 programmable logic inputs for manual commands or
feature control
a. Inputs shall be able to operate from internal and external dc power supplies.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
F. Metering
1. The unit shall be able to measure / calculate and display:
a. Line voltage
b. Differentials between bus and line voltages
c. Frequency
d. Current
e. Real, reactive and apparent power
f. Power factor
g. Watt-hour and var hour consumption
h. Demand for current and power measurements
2. The relay shall have an input channel for measuring a 0-1 mA, 0-5 mA, 0-20 mA, or 4-20
mA (programmable) signal from an external transducer.
3. The relay shall have eight internal transducers, with 4-20 mA output signals to represent
various measured / calculated parameters.
a. Output channels shall be programmable to represent, as a minimum:
1) Voltage
2) Frequency
3) Current
4) Power
5) Demand
6) The distance to the most recently detected overcurrent fault
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
G. Monitoring
1. The relay shall have measuring elements with programmable outputs to monitor:
a. Breaker trip and close coil continuity
b. Over frequency
c. Demand levels
d. Power factor
e. Summed breaker arcing current
2. The relay shall be able to display automatically at least 10 user-programmed protection
settings or measured / calculated parameters.
51
H. System/Relay Operations and Maintenance
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.
2.
3.
4.
The relay shall have a sequence of events record and oscillographic capture of important
events with a time base in 1 ms increments.
a. The event record shall store a minimum of 64 events.
b. The oscillograph shall capture a minimum of eight events.
The relay shall have a distance-to-fault feature that stores a minimum of eight faults.
The relay shall have a simulation feature to test the device without external injection of
voltage and current signals.
Device firmware shall be stored in non-volatile flash memory, so that relay upgrades can be
performed by downloading programs from a PC.
10
11
12
I.
Control Power - The relay shall be suitable for HI or LO ranges of available control power.
1. HI Range: DC: 88-300 VDC; AC: 70-265 VAC, 48 to 62 Hz.
2. LO Range: DC: 20-60 VDC; AC: 20-48 VAC, 48 to 62 Hz.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
J.
Communication
1. For remote monitoring, the following communication ports shall be provided:
a. One Industry Standard port for meter and relay programming using a laptop computer.
b. One RS-485 port.
c. One integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port . The connection shall support Modbus TCP,
Ethernet IP and SNMP.
d. The manufacturer shall factory enter the proper IP Address for such connection. Upon
request by the Contractor, the Owner/Engineer will provide the proper Internet Protocol
Address (IP Address), to be configured by the equipment manufacturer.
2. The protocol interface shall implement the following:
a. All data shall be available and/or mirrored within the Modbus 4x or "Holding Register"
memory area.
b. Register 4x00001 shall exist and be readable to allow simple, predictable "comm tests".
26
2.3
FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM (FP2)
27
28
29
30
acceptable:
2. Approved equal
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C. General
1. Digital relay for primary circuit protection of feeders and distribution networks, with backup
protection for transformers and transmission lines.
2. The unit shall provide protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and
3. The relay shall be of drawout construction.
5. All components, except terminating hardware, shall be mounted inside the relay.
6. The unit shall be suitable for semi-flush mounting in a panel.
7. It shall be equipped with a front panel display for monitoring and control.
8. The relay shall comply with surge withstand capability standards ANSI C37.90 and IEC
255.4.
47
48
49
50
D. Protection and Control

1. Phase Undervoltage (27P)
2. Auxiliary Undervoltage (27x)
3. Cable Thermal Model (49)
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Breaker Failure (50BF)

Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P)
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (50N)
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G)
Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (50_2)
Phase Time Overcurrent (51P)
Neutral Time Overcurrent (51N)
Ground Time Overcurrent (51G)
Phase Overvoltage (59P)
Auxiliary Overvoltage (59x)
Neutral Overvoltage (59N)
Negative Sequence Overvoltage (59_2)
Neutral Direction Overcurrent (67N)
Ground Direction Overcurrent (67G)
Four Shot Autorelcose (79)
Underfrequency (81U)
Overfrequency (81O)
Cold Load Pickup (CLP)
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
E. Monitoring and Metering

1. Current: Phasors, RMS Values of per Phase, Neutral Current, Negative Sequence Current
2. Voltage: Phase-to-Phase and Phase-to-Ground, Neutral Voltage, Negative Sequence
Voltage, Zero Sequence Voltage, Auxiliary Voltage
3. Power: Active, Reactive, Apparent and Power Factor
4. Frequency
5. An event recorder with a record of the last 256 events, time tagged with a resolution of 1ms.
6. The waveform capture (oscillography) feature similar to a transient/fault recorder. The
oscillography shall capture 32 samples per cycle and the digital states.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
F. Communication
b. One RS-485 port.
c. One integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. The connection shall support Modbus TCP,
memory area.
41
2.4
TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY (TP1)
42
43
44
45
acceptable:
2. Approved equal
46
47
48
49
50
C. General
1. Digital relay for primary protection of transformers
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The unit shall provide protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and
The relay shall be of draw out construction.
All circuit boards shall have a harsh environment conformal coating to resist H2S gas and
All components, except termination hardware, shall be mounted inside the relay.
The unit shall be suitable for semi-flush mounting in a panel.
It shall be equipped with a front panel display and keypad for programming and monitoring.
The relay shall comply with surge withstand capability standards ANSI C37.90 and IEC
255.4.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

1. The relay shall have the following protective functions:
a. Variable dual-slop percent differential protection
b. Magnetizing inrush and over excitation blocking
c. Phase and ground overcurrent elements
d. Adaptive time overcurrent using FlexCurves elements
e. Under frequency/over frequency Protection
f. Frequency rate-of-change detection
g. Over excitation (V/Hz) protection
h. Restricted ground fault protection
i. Transformer overload protection
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
E. Mounting and Metering

1. The unit shall be able to measure/ calculate and display:
a. Metering current, voltage, sequence components per winding, power, energy, voltage
b. THD and harmonics up to the 21st
c. Event recording 128 time tagged events
d. Tap position up to 50 tap positions
e. Ambient temperature/ analog transducer input
f. Analog transducer input
g. Oscillography and Data logger 10 records up to 32 power cycles
h. Simulation mode and playback capability.
2. The relay shall have an input channel for measuring a 0-1mA, 0-5mA, 0-20mA, or 4-20mA
(programmable) signal from an eternal transducer.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
F. System / Relay operation and maintenance

1. The relay shall have a sequence of events record and oscillographic capture of important
events with a time base in 1 ms increments
a. The event record shall store a minimum of 40 events.
b. The oscillograph shall capture a minimum of 12 events.
2. Device firmware shall be stored in non-volatile flash memory, so that relay upgrades can be
performed by downloading programs for a PC.
41
42
43
G. Control power The relay shall be suitable for HI or LO ranges of available control power.
1. HI range: DC: 88-300 VDC; AC: 70-265 VAC, 48 to 62 Hz
2. LO range: DC: 20-60 VDC; AC: 20-48 VAC, 48 to 62 Hz
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
H. Communication
b. One RS-485 port.
c. One integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. The connection shall support Modbus TCP,
Ethernet, IP and SNMP.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
2.
2.5
6
7
8
9
The protocol interface shall implement the following:

memory area.
POWER QUALITY METER (PM1)

acceptable:
1. GE Multilin PQMII Power Quality Meter
2. Approved Equal
10
11
12
13
14
15
C. General
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
D. Monitoring and Metering

1. Metering Functions with accuracy of 0.2 percent for A & V and 0.4 percent for power
parameters
a. A, V, VA, W, VAR, KWH, KVARH, KVAH, PF, Hz
b. W, VAR, A, VA Demand
c. A, V Unbalance
d. Power Analysis Functions.
e. Total Harmonic Distortion
f. Individual harmonics
g. Waveform capture
h. Historical data
i. Minimum and maximum metered values complete with time and date
j. Record of last 40 events
k. Two independent data logs
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
E. User Interface and Programming

1. Integrated keypad to access actual values and setpoints.
a. 2 - line, 40 characters illuminated display for use with keypad. The display shall have:
1) Variable scrolling rates.
2) Front mounted LEDs to display alarms, communication status, relay status,
simulation mode, self-test failure, and setpoint access status.
3) Relay reset button to clear alarm and auxiliary conditions.
2. The meter shall have one alarm output relay with Form C contacts.
3. Relay output shall be through alarm, auxiliary and pulse output functions.
4. The meter shall provide a user configurable pulse output based on kWH, kVARH or kVAH.
5. The meter shall provide a pulse input for demand synchronization.
6. The meter shall include a simulation mode capability for testing the functionality and meter
response to programmed conditions without the need for external inputs.
7. The relay shall include a power systems option consisting of harmonic analysis, triggered
trace memory waveform capture, event record and data logger functions.
45
46
47
F. Control Power:
1. Range of available control power: DC: 88-300 VDC; AC: 70-265 VAC, 48 to 62 Hz.
48
49
G. Communication
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
a.
2.
3.
2.6
One (1) Industry Standard port for meter and relay programming using a laptop
computer.
b. One (1) RS-485 port.
c. One (1) integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port . The connection shall support Modbus
TCP, Ethernet IP and SNMP. Where an integral port is not available, provide a media
protocol converter as specified herein.
memory area.
The media protocol converter shall meet the following criteria:
a. The converter shall support 10/100Base-T Ethernet. The serial port speed (baud rate)
shall support 230kbps. The protocol shall support Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP, DF1, and
Modbus RTU/ASCII. Protocol shall be Web Browser configurable.
b. Operating limits shall be 0-60 degrees C, with humidity range minimum of 5-90
percent. Shock capability on the serial port shall be ESD +15 kV air GAP meeting IEC
1000-4-2. Power requirements shall be 9-30VDC at 0.5A minimum.
c. The converter shall have LED status for serial, signals, power, and Ethernet.
d. The converter housing shall be UL 1604, Class 1 Div 2, DIN Rail mountable. The
converter shall have DB-9M port connection, with screw terminals, to the input.
e. Converter shall be Digi One IAP, or approved equal.
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM (MP4)
26
27
28
29
acceptable:
1. GE Multilin 469
2. Approved Equal
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
C. Minimum ANSI Functions

1. 14 Speed Switch
2. 27PUndervoltage
3. 37 Undercurrent/Underpower
4. 38 Bearing RTD
5. 46 Current Unbalance
6. 47 Phase Reversal
7. 49 Stator RTD
8. 49 Overload
9. 50 Short Circuit and Short Circuit Backup
10. 50G Ground Overcurrent
11. 51GGround Overcurrent Backup
12. 51RMechanical Jam
13. 55 Power Factor
14. 59P Overvoltage
15. 66Starts/Hour and Time Between Starts
16. 81O/U Frequency
17. 86 Overload Lockout
18. 87M Differential
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
D. General
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
E. Protection and Control

1. Thermal model biased with RTD and negative sequence current feedback
2. Phase short circuit
3. Undervoltage, overvoltage
4. Underfrequency
5. Thermal overload
6. Undercurrent for load loss
7. Locked rotor / mechanical jam
a. The relay shall protect the rotor during stall and acceleration. The stall/acceleration
curve shall be voltage compensated and a speed switch input shall be available. The
stator protective thermal model shall combine inputs from positive and negative
sequence currents and RTD winding feedback. The model shall be dynamic in nature in
order to follow the loading and temperature of the motor.
8. Variable lockout time
9. Current unbalance
10. Ground fault O/C
11. Phase reversal
12. Starts/hour, time between starts
13. Temperature monitoring 12 RTDs
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
F. Monitoring and Metering

1. Metering Functions
a. A, V, W, Var, VA, PF, Hz, Wh, varh, demand
b. The system shall include complete power metering. An event record shall store the last
40 events. Sixteen cycles of waveform data shall be stored each time a trip occurs. A
simulation feature shall be available for testing the function.
2. Fault diagnosis
3. Event record
4. Statistical information and learned motor data
5. Voltage/ frequency/power display
6. Four analog outputs
7. Oscillography and data logger
35
36
37
38
39
G. Inputs and Outputs

1. 12 RTDs, programmable
2. Five assignable digital inputs
3. Four output relays
4. Four programmable analog outputs
40
41
42
H. Memory
1. Memory shall be non-volatile and programming shall remain intact upon power failure.
2. Interface software shall be provided in a Windows format.
43
44
45
I.
User Interface
1. A 40 character LCD display and associated keypad to provide access to actual values and
set points.
46
47
48
J.
Control Power:
49
50
51
K. Communication
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
b.
c.
2.
2.7
One RS-485 port.

One integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. The connection shall support Modbus TCP,
memory area.
REMOTE RTD METERING AND PROTECTION (RRTD)
12
13
14
15
acceptable:
1. GE Multilin RRTD
2. Approved Equal
16
17
18
19
20
21
C. General
22
23

1. Overtemperature
24
25
E. Monitoring and Metering

1. Temperature
26
27
28
29
30
31
F. Inputs and Outputs

1. Inputs
a. 12 three wire shielded RTD inputs, configurable type.
b. Six dry contacts, optically isolated, programmable.
2. Outputs
a. Computer interface
32
33
34
G. Control Power:
35
36
37
38
39
H. Communications
1. Provide Remote RTD Module interface with rear RS485 port or Provide Remote RTD
Module interface with rear Fiber Optic port.
2. Relay shall have two independent communications ports, one RS 485 port, one front RS 232
port.
40
2.8
PHASE PROTECTIVE RELAY (PPR)
41
42
43
44
acceptable:
1. Taylor Phase-Guard Model P
2. Approved Equal
45
46
47
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
C. Protection
1. Indicators - LED
a. Normal Green.
b. Phase loss or Low Voltage Yellow.
c. Reverse Phase Red.
2. Enclosure
a. As required in accordance with the Area Classification and Enclosure Types specified
herein.
3. Functions.
a. Automatic Reset
b. Phase Loss.
1) 12% or more.
2) Delay 1-1/2 seconds.
c. Low Voltage Protection
1) Drop at 70% of normal
2) Reset at 90% of normal
d. Time Delays
1) Adjustable
e. Over Voltage Protection
1) Greater than 15%
2) Reset at 5% greater than normal]
2.9
PROGRAMMABLE LOAD MONITOR
23
24
25
26
acceptable:
1. Brunel Model PTM-3-4XL
2. Approved Equal
27
28
29
30
C. Display 3 LED digits, 14.2mm high, red.
31
32
33
34
35
D. Displayed Values
1. Load Calibrated to read 100 at normal running load.
2. Status messages start, stop, phase failure.
3. Setup values (i.e. trip levels).
4. Motor power, current and voltage.
36
37
E. Trip Relays - Three Form C Relays, contacts rated 10A @ 28VDC or 120VAC, 5A @ 240VAC
(May be switched to energize or de-energize on trip).
38
F. Trip Delays 0-25s in 0.1s increments.
39
G. Trip Hold ON/OFF select, pushbutton reset, terminals for external reset contacts.
40
H. Start Delay 0-250s (0-9.9s in 0.1s increments; > 10s in 1s increments.
41
42
I.
Phase Loss Output Opto-isolated NPN transistor, 100ma 24V max. (changes state if phase
failure, 10% voltage drop, or phase sequence changes).
43
44
J.
Enclosure
1. The same rating as that required for the associated equipment.
45
46
K. Environment
1. NEMA 4X / IP66, -4F to +140F (-20C to +60C)
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.10 ACCESSORIES
2
3
A. Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated on drawings. Color schemes shall be as
indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
6
7
8
9
10
INSTALLATION
A. All equipment specified herein shall be factory installed, field adjusted, tested and cleaned as an
integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16196
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
7
A. This Section of the Specifications describes the requirements for low voltage AC surge
protective devices (SPDs), to be furnished under other Sections of the Specifications as listed in
the Related Work paragraph of this Section.
8
9
B. All equipment described herein shall be submitted, and factory installed, as an integral part of
equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
10
1.2
SUBMITTALS
11
12
13
A. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under
14
15
16
17
18
19
B. Submit catalog data for all items supplied from this specification Section as applicable.
Submittal shall include catalog data, functions, ratings, inputs, outputs, displays, etc., sufficient
to confirm that the SPD provides every specified requirement. Any options or exceptions shall
be clearly indicated, with the reason for such deviations. Acceptance of any deviation will be at
the sole discretion of the OWNER/ENGINEER. Shop drawings, not so checked and noted, will
be returned unreviewed.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
C. The submittals shall include:

1. Dimensional drawing of each SPD type.
2. UL 1449 Third Edition Listing, Standard for Safety, Surge Protective Devices,
documentation. Provide verification that the SPD complies with the required ANSI/UL
1449 3rd Edition listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratory (NRTL).
3. UL 1283 Listing, Electromagnetic Interference Filters, documentation.
4. ANSI/IEEE C6241 and C6245, Category C3 (20kV-1.2/50, 10kA-8/20s waveform)
clamping voltage test results.
29
30
31
32
33
34
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall include the following information:
35
1.3
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46

A. The equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest
revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted):
1. UL 1449 Third Edition Surge Protective Devices
2. UL 1283 Electromagnetic Interference Filters
3. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2-2002 IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surge
Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits
4. ANSI/IEEE C62.45-2002 IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment
Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
5. NEC 2008, Article 285
6. NEMA/ISCI 109 Transient Overvoltage Withstand Test
7. IEEE Std. 472/ANSI C37.90A Surge Withstand Capability Tests
165477
City of Dallas
16196 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
8.
IEC 255.4 Surge Withstand Capability Tests
2
3
B. All SPDs and their installation shall comply with the requirements of the National Electric Code
and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) where applicable.
4
5
C. Each specified device shall also conform to the standards and codes listed in the individual
device paragraphs.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
7
8
9
10
minimum period of five years. When requested by the OWNER/ENGINEER, an acceptable list
of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this
requirement.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B. The manufacturer of the SPD shall be the same as the manufacturer of the service entrance and
distribution equipment in which the devices are installed and shipped. The protected electrical
equipment, after installation of the SPD, shall be fully tested and certified to the following UL
standards:
1. UL 67 - Panelboards.
2. UL 845 - Motor Control Centers.
3. UL 891 - Switchboards.
4. UL 1558 - Low Voltage Switchgear.
19
C. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.
20
1.5
21
22
23
24
25
26
WARRANTY
workmanship for 10 years from date of Owners final acceptance of the equipment containing
the items specified in this Section. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall
promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating
condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be
performed by the Manufacturer at no expense to the OWNER.
27
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
29
30
31
32
33
34
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable
(Type 1 and Type 2):
1. Named Supplier
a. General Electric Co.
2. Alternate Suppliers
a. Rockwell
35
36
37
38
39
B. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable
(Type 3):
1. Edco SLAC Series
2. Phoenix Contact
3. Brick Wall Model PWOM20
40
2.2
41
42
43
44
SERVICE ENTRANCE AND DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT

A. General
1. All SPDs shall be internal to the equipment being protected. Externally housed SPDs will
not be acceptable.
2. UL 1449 Usage Classifications.
165477
City of Dallas
16196 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
a.
3.
165477
Type 1 Permanently connected SPDs intended for installation between the secondary
of the service transformer and the line side of the service equipment overcurrent device,
and intended to be installed without an external overcurrent protective device.
b. Type 2 Permanently connected SPDs intended for installation on the load side of
service equipment overcurrent device; including SPDs located at the branch panel.
c. Type 3 Point of utilization SPDs, installed at a minimum conductor length of 10
meters (30 feet) from the electrical service panel to the point of utilization, for example
cord connected, direct plug-in, receptacle type and SPDs installed at the utilization
equipment being protected. The distance (10 meters) is exclusive of conductors
provided with or used to attach SPDs.
Construction of Type 1 and Type 2.
a. Fully Integrated Component Design: All of the SPDs components and diagnostics shall
be contained within one discrete assembly. SPDs or individual SPD modules that must
be ganged together in order to achieve higher surge current ratings or other
functionality will not be accepted.
b. Overcurrent Protection: The unit shall contain thermally protected MOVs. The
thermally protected MOVs shall have a thermal protection element packaged together
with the MOV in order to achieve overcurrent protection of the MOV. The thermal
protection element shall disconnect the MOV(s) from the system in a fail-safe manner
should a condition occur that would cause them to enter a thermal runaway condition.
c. Maintenance Free Design: The SPD shall be maintenance free and shall not require any
user intervention throughout its life. SPDs containing items such as replaceable
modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries are not acceptable. SPDs requiring
any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections are not
acceptable.
d. Balanced Suppression Platform: The surge current shall be equally distributed to all
MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge
suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV.
Designs incorporating replaceable SPD modules are not acceptable.
e. Electrical Noise Filter: Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise
rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be up to 50 dB from 10
kHz to 100 MHz using the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method.
f. Internal Connections: No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be
used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be soldered, hardwired
with connections utilizing low impedance conductors.
g. Power and ground connections shall be prewired within the protected equipment.
h. Local Monitoring: Visible indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be
provided. The indicator lights shall indicate which phase as well as which module is
fully operable. The status of each SPD module shall be monitored on the front cover of
the enclosure as well as on the module. A push-to-test button shall be provided to test
each phase indicator. Push-to-test button shall activate a state change of dry contacts for
testing purposes.
i. Surge Counter: The SPD shall indicate user how many surges have occurred at the
location. The surge counter shall trigger each time a surge event with a peak current
magnitude of a minimum of 50 20A occurs. A reset pushbutton shall also be standard,
allowing the surge counter to be zeroed. The reset button shall contain a mechanism to
prevent accidental resetting of the counter via a single, short-duration button press. To
prevent accidental resetting, the surge counter reset button shall be depressed for a
minimum of 2 seconds in order to clear the surge count total. The ongoing surge count
shall be stored in non-volatile memory or UPS backup.
City of Dallas
16196 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
j.
4.
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Remote Monitoring: For remote monitoring, the SPDs shall provide the same discrete
and analog signal and control functions as specified for local monitoring and the surge
counter, to a terminal strip for outgoing connection to a PLC as shown on the
Drawings. The functions shall be converted as specified for interface to the monitored
equipment.
k. The voltage surge suppression system shall incorporate thermally protected metal-oxide
varistors (MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the service entrance and
all other distribution levels. The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes,
selenium cells, air gaps, or other components that may crowbar the system voltage
leading to system upset or create any environmental hazards.
l. SPD shall be Listed in accordance with UL 1449 Third Edition and UL 1283,
Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
m. Integrated surge protective devices (SPD) shall be Component Recognized in
accordance with UL 1449 Third Edition, Section 37.3.2 and 37.4 at the standards
highest short circuit current rating (SCCR) of 200 kA, including intermediate level of
fault current testing.
n. SPD shall be tested with the ANSI/IEEE Category C High exposure waveform (20kV1.2/50s, 10kA-8/20s).
o. SPD shall provide suppression for all modes of protection: L-N, L-G, and N-G in WYE
systems (7 Mode).
Construction of Type 3.
a. Fully Integrated Component Design: All of the SPDs components and diagnostics shall
be contained within one discrete assembly. SPDs or individual SPD modules that must
be ganged together in order to achieve higher surge current ratings or other
functionality will not be accepted.
b. Maintenance Free Design: The SPD shall be maintenance free and shall not require any
user intervention throughout its life. SPDs containing items such as replaceable
modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries are not acceptable. SPDs requiring
any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections are not
acceptable.
c. Electrical Noise Filter: Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise
rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be up to 50 dB from 10
kHz to 100 MHz using the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method.
d. Internal Connections: No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be
used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be soldered, hardwired
with connections utilizing low impedance conductors.
e. Power and ground connections shall be prewired within the protected equipment.
f. Local Monitoring: Visible indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be
provided. The indicator light shall indicate that the module is fully operable. The status
of each SPD module shall be monitored on the front cover of the module.
g. SPD shall be Listed in accordance with UL 1449 Third Edition and UL 1283,
Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
h. SPD shall be tested with the ANSI/IEEE Category C High exposure waveform (20kV1.2/50s, 10kA-8/20s).
B. Applications.
1. Service Entrance Rated Equipment (Type 1).
a. This applies to switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and other
devices installed as service entrance equipment where the SPD is to be permanently
connected between the secondary of the service transformer and the line side of the
service equipment overcurrent device.
b. Where a Type 1 SPD is installed on service entrance equipment, it shall not be required
to install an additional Type 2 SPD unless specifically shown on the design drawings.
c. Service entrance located SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for
application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C environments.
165477
City of Dallas
16196 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
165477
The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the equipment

The SPD shall be factory installed inside the equipment, at the assembly point, by the
original equipment manufacturer
f. Locate the SPD on the load side of the main disconnect device, as close as possible to
the phase conductors and the ground/neutral bars.
g. The SPD shall be connected through a UL approved disconnecting means. The
disconnect shall be located in immediate proximity to the SPD. Connection shall be
made via bus, conductors, or other connections originating in the SPD and shall be kept
as short as possible.
h. The SPD shall be integral to the equipment as a factory standardized design.
i. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment.
Distribution Equipment Applications (Type 2).
a. This applies to switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and other
non-service entrance equipment where the SPD is to be permanently connected on the
load side of the equipment overcurrent device.
b. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the equipment.
c. The SPD shall be included and mounted within the equipment by the manufacturer.
d. The manufacturer shall size and provide the overcurrent and disconnecting means for
the SPD.
e. The SPD units shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category B environments.
f. The SPD shall be located within the panelboard, unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings. SPDs shall be installed immediately following the load side of the main
breaker. SPDs installed in main lug only panelboards shall be installed immediately
following the incoming main lugs.
g. The SPD shall not limit the use of through-feed lugs, sub-feed lugs, and sub-feed
breaker options.
h. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment.
Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3).
a. Locate the SPD on the load side of the ground and neutral connections.
b. The SPD shall be connected through a disconnect circuit breaker or fuse as shown on
the drawings. The disconnect shall be located in immediate proximity to the SPD.
Connection shall be made via bus, conductors, or other connections originating in the
SPD and shall be kept as short as possible.
c. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment.
Mechanical Equipment Manufacturers Provided Control Panels (MEMs) and Electrical
Manufacturers Provided Control Panels (OEMs) Applications (Type 1, Type 2, and Type
3)
a. Where any such panel is installed as service entrance equipment, a Type 1 SPD shall be
installed.
1) The same requirements for other service entrance equipment listed above apply to
this application except for the requirement that the Type 1 SPD shall not be
required to be of the same manufacturer as the panel.
b. Where any such panel is installed as non-service entrance equipment, but within 50 feet
of wire length of the incoming power line when that line is overhead.
1) The same requirements for other non-service entrance equipment listed above
apply to this application except for the requirement that the Type 2 SPD shall not
be required to be of the same manufacturer as the panel.
2) Where a Type 1 SPD is installed, a Type 2 SPD is not required on the same panel
unless otherwise specifically shown on the drawings.
c. Where any such panel includes a PLC, a Type 3 SPD shall be installed.
1) The same requirements for other individual control panel and related equipment
listed above apply to this application.
City of Dallas
16196 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
2) The SPD shall be integral to the MEM or OEM panel, as a factory standardized
design.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C. Ratings
1. Unit Operating Voltage: Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit configuration.
2. SPD shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of
not less than 115% of nominal RMS voltage.
3. Minimum surge current rating shall be 240 kA per phase (120 kA per mode) for service
entrance and 120 kA per phase (60 kA per mode) for distribution applications.
4. UL 1449 clamping voltage must not exceed the following: Voltage Protection Rating (VPR)
Voltage
240/120
208Y/120
480Y.277
600Y/347
11
12
13
14
15
16
5.
6.
2.3
17
18
L-N
1200/800V
800V
1200V
1500V
L-G
800V
800V
1200V
1500V
N-G
800V
800V
1200V
1500V
Pulse life test: Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSI/IEEE Category C
High transients without failure or degradation of clamping voltage by more than 10%.
Minimum UL 1449 3rd edition withstand Nominal Discharge Current (In) rating to be 20kA
per mode
ACCESSORIES
A. Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated on drawings. Color schemes shall be as
indicated on Drawings.
19
PART 3 - EXECUTION
20
3.1
INSTALLATION
21
22
A. All equipment specified herein shall be factory installed, field adjusted, tested and cleaned as an
integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in the individual equipment Specification.
23
24
25
26
27
28
B. Types 1 and 2 shall be grounded and bonded as a part of the individual equipment as specified in
the individual equipment Section. Type 3 shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the
SPD manufacturers instructions.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16196 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16200
EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET
1
2
PART 1 - GENERAL
3
4
1.1
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
A. Furnish and install Standby Generator Sets with all appurtenances as shown on the Drawings
and specified herein.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
B. Each generator size as shown on the drawings is a minimum size around which the electrical
conductors and circuit breakers have been sized. The Contractor shall provide each enginegenerator set that meets all the performance criteria, and shall increase the size of the engine
generator, if necessary, to meet the specified criteria. If the generator size increases, the
Contractor shall increase the breakers, conductors, and all associated equipment, including the
automatic transfer switch, to accommodate the larger generator size. All sizing of associated
equipment shall be in accordance with the NEC.
14
15
C. The Contractor shall provide fuel for startup and testing. At the completion of startup and
testing, the Contractor shall fill the respective generator tank.
16
1.2
1.2
RELATED WORK
17
18
B. Structural and Concrete Divisions Concrete pads
19
C. Section 16105 Power System Study
20
D. Section 16195 Power Metering and Protective Relays
21
E. Section 16196 Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices (SPDs)
22
F. Section 16345 Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switchgear
23
1.3
SUBMITTALS
24
25
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 16000, and
26
27
28
B. Provide systems Engineering with coordination curves, to demonstrate coordination between

proposed breakers and/or fuses submitted, such that protective device coordination is
accomplished. Such curves and settings shall be included as a part of these submittals.
29
30
31
32
Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above.
Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also
33
34
35
36
37
D. The original equipment manufacturer shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all
wiring diagrams, in the manufacturers Engineering Department. All equipment shop drawings
shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be
maintained on file in the original equipment manufacturers archive file system. Photocopies of
the Engineers ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings.
38
39
40
41
E. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the following:
1. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation and plan views, dimensions, weight, anchor
details, and required operating clearances.
2. Conduit entrance drawings.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Product data sheets and catalog numbers for the engine, AC generator, battery charger,
generator set control system, electronic governor system, control stations, meters, relays,
pilot lights, circuit breaker, etc. List all options and accessories furnished specifically for
this project. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that
do not apply.
Provide control systems Engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing
interwiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. Include
and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation
Remote Device will not be acceptable. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special
identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings.
Provide plan and elevation drawings of each Generator Set, with dimensions, exterior and
interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc.
Schematic diagram
Nameplate schedule
UL Listing of the completed assembly.
Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturers part
number.
Conduit entry/exit locations
Assembly ratings including:
a. Short-circuit rating
b. Voltage
c. Continuous current
Major component ratings including:
a. Voltage
b. Continuous current
c. Interrupting ratings
Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal sizes.
Service and feeder lugs and connectors.
Instruction and renewal parts books.
30
F. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

e. Operating instructions, including periodic generator set operational testing.
f. Automatic and manual startup and shutdown sequences.
40
41
42
I.
43
1.4
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
The manufacturer shall submit for approval, a training agenda for all training specified herein.
Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance
Manual.

otherwise noted):
1. NEMA Standard ICS 2 2000 Industrial Control and Systems
3. NFPA 70E Standard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace
4. NFPA 110 for Level 1 Systems.
5. OSHA for rotating parts.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
11
12
13
NEMA MG1 temperature limits.

UL508A
CSA282-M1989
IEC 8528 part 4
Mil Std 461C part 9
IEC Std 801.2, 801.3, 801.5
IEEE587
ASTM D2794-93
ASTM D2247-92
UL 142 Standard for steel Aboveground Fuel Tanks
Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14
15
16
A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum
period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with
similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.
17
18
19
assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a
third party and brand labeled shall not be acceptable.
20
21
22
C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current
production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall
not be used.
23
24
D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does
not fit within the space is not acceptable.
25
E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified.
26
27
F. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does
28
1.6
29
30
31
32
failed any factory tests, will not be permitted.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
D. Equipment shall be immediately installed in its permanent finished location shown on the
Drawings, upon delivery to the jobsite. If the equipment cannot be immediately installed, the
equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite at the Contractors expense, until
41
42
E. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be
bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately.
43
44
45
F. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate
space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.7
2
3
4
5
6
7
WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer of the engine shall assume Manufacturers responsibility for the Generator Set
in its entirety, and warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for
two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty the
Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to
new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment
shall be performed by the Manufacturer at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
8
9
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
10
11
12
13
acceptable:
1. Caterpillar
2. Cummins
14
15
16
not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved
from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
17
2.2 RATINGS
18
19
C. The generator set shall be Standby Duty rated at 1000 kW, 1250 kVA, 1800 RPM, 0.8 power
factor.
20
D. 480 V, 3- phase, 4-wire, 60 hertz, including radiator fan and all parasitic loads.
21
E. Set based on site elevation of 600 feet and ambient temperatures up to 50 degrees C.
22
F. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings.
23
2.3
PERFORMANCE
24
25
26
27
G. Voltage Regulation: Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 0.5 percent for any constant load
between no load and rated load for both parallel and non-parallel applications. Random voltage
variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.25
percent.
28
29
30
31
32
H. Frequency Regulation: Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to
steady state rated load. Random frequency variation with any steady load from no load to full load
shall not exceed plus or minus 0.25%. The AC voltage waveform shall have not more than 5%
total harmonic distortion at full linear load and with not more than 3% in any single harmonic.
Telephone influence factor shall be less than 50.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
I.
165477
Load Pick Up: The engine generator set shall be capable of picking up the loads indicated on
each step, in order, with starting and running voltage dips not exceeding 15% and frequency
variation not more than +/- 5%. Contractor shall submit calculations showing that the generator
sizing is correct for the voltage and frequency variations specified. If the minimum specified
generator size is unable to start the loads in the sequence specified, the manufacturer shall increase
the size of the generator set until the loads start in the load sequence specified with the specified
voltage and frequency limits specified.
City of Dallas
16195 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
ENGINE
A. Each engine shall be diesel, 4 stroke, water-cooled, with a minimum of 4 cylinders. The
horsepower rating of the engine at its minimum tolerance level shall be sufficient to drive the
alternator and all connected accessories. A minimum of 1860 cubic inches and a BMEP of a
maximum of 351 PSI is required. Two stroke engines are not acceptable. Engine accessories
and features shall include:
1. Governor System: An electronic governor system shall provide automatic isochronous
frequency regulation.
2. Radiator and Cooling System: Skid mounted radiator and cooling system rated for full load
operation in 122 degrees F (50 degrees C) ambient as measured at the generator air inlet.
Radiator shall be provided with a duct adapter flange. The equipment supplier shall fill the
cooling system with 50/50-ethylene glycol/water mixture. Rotating parts shall be guarded
against accidental contact per OSHA requirements.
3. Electric System: A Dual electric starter motors capable of three complete cranking cycles
4. Lubrication Oil Pump: Positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure, lubrication oil
pump.
5. Oil Filters: Full flow lubrication oil filters with replaceable spin on canister elements and
dipstick oil level indicator.
6. Air cleaner: Replaceable dry element air cleaner with restriction indicator.
7. Fuel Lines: Flexible fuel lines.
8. Battery Charging Alternator: Engine mounted battery charging alternator, 45-ampere
minimum, and solid state voltage regulator.
9. Provide two 6000 watts jacket water heaters, 208 Volts single phase.
2.5
AC GENERATOR
26
27
28
29
30
31
A. General: Each AC generator shall be; synchronous, four pole, revolving field, drip-proof
construction, single pre-lubricated sealed bearing, air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower
fan, and directly connected to the engine with flexible drive disc. All insulation system
components shall meet NEMA MG1 temperature limits for Class H insulation system. Actual
temperature rise measured by resistance method at full load shall not exceed 125 degrees
Centigrade over a 40-degree Centigrade ambient.
32
33
B. Power: Each generator shall be capable of delivering rated output (kVA) at rated frequency and
power factor, at any voltage not more than 5 percent above or below rated voltage.
34
35
36
37
C. Excitation: A permanent magnet generator (PMG) shall be included to provide a reliable source
of excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance. The PMG and
controls shall be capable of sustaining and regulating current supplied to a single phase or three
phase fault at approximately 300% of rated current for not more than 10 seconds.
38
D. Provide 120V, single-phase anti-condensation heater for each generator set.
39
2.6
CONTROL
40
41
42
43
A. General: The generator set shall be provided with a microprocessor-based control system that is
designed to provide automatic starting, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set.
The control system shall also be designed to allow local monitoring and control of the generator
set, and remote monitoring and control as described in this specification.
44
45
46
47
B. Provide a fully solid-state, microprocessor based, generator set control. The control panel shall
be designed and built by the engine manufacturer. The control shall provide all operating,
monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. The control panel shall provide real time
digital communications to all engine and regulator controls via SAE J1939.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
C. Mounting: The control shall be mounted on the generator set. The control shall be vibration
isolated and prototype tested to verify the durability of all components in the system under the
vibration conditions encountered.
4
5
6
7
8
D. Environmental: The generator set control shall be tested and certified to the following
environmental conditions: 40C to +70C Operating Range. 95% humidity non-condensing,
30C to 60C. IP22 protection, 5% salt spray, 48 hours, +38C, 36.8V system voltage,
Sinusoidal vibration 4.3G's RMS, 24-1000Hz. Electromagnetic Capability (89/336/EEC,
91/368/EEC, 93/44/EEC, 93/68/EEC, BS EN 50081-2, 50082-2). Shock: withstand 15G
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
E. Features:
1. Mode Select Switch: The AUTO-RUN-OFF Mode Selector Switch shall initiate the
following control modes. When in the OFF position, the generator set is disabled, and
cannot be started locally or from remote commands. If the generator set is running in the
RUN or AUTO positions, turning the the selector switch to OFF will cause the generator set
to go into the cool down mode, and stop after cool down. When the selector switch is in the
Run position, the generator set shall start, and remain running until turned to OFF. If the
selector switch is placed in AUTO, the generator set shall start upon a dry contact request
from a remote device, and remain running until the selector switch is placed in the OFF
position, causing a normal cool down and shutoff.
2. Emergency Stop Switch: Switch shall be Red "mushroom head," push to operate, pull to
reset. A protective cover shall be provided to prevent accidental operation. Depressing the
emergency stop switch shall cause the generator set to immediately shut down, and be
locked out until reset,
3. Reset Switch: The RESET switch shall be used to clear a fault and allow restarting the
generator set after it has shut down for any fault condition.
4. Panel Lamp Switch: Depressing the panel lamp switch shall cause the entire panel to be
lighted with DC control power. The panel lamps shall automatically be switched off 10
minutes after the switch is depressed, or after the switch is depressed a second time.
5. Digital Metering Set: Digital metering set, 0.5% accuracy, to indicate generator RMS
voltage and current, frequency, output current, output kW, kW hours, and power factor.
Generator output voltage shall be available in line to line and line to neutral voltages, and
shall display all three-phase voltages (line to neutral or line to line) simultaneously.
6. Generator Set Alarm Display: The generator set shall be provided with alarm and status
indicating lamps to indicate non automatic generator status, and existing alarm and
shutdown conditions. The lamps shall be high intensity LED type. The lamp condition
shall be clearly apparent under bright room lighting conditions. The generator set control
shall indicate the existence of the following alarm and shutdown conditions on a digital
display panel:
a. Low oil pressure (alarm)
b. Low oil pressure (shutdown)
c. Oil pressure sender failure (alarm)
d. Low coolant temperature (alarm)
e. High coolant temperature (alarm)
f. High coolant temperature (shutdown)
g. Engine temperature sender failure (alarm)
h. Low coolant level (alarm or shutdown selectable)
i. Fail to crank (shutdown)
j. Over crank (shutdown)
k. Over speed (shutdown)
l. Low DC voltage (alarm)
m. High DC voltage (alarm)
n. Weak battery (alarm)
o. Low fuel day tank (alarm)
p. High AC voltage (27/59) (shutdown)
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Low AC voltage (27/59) (shutdown)

Under frequency (81 O/U) (shutdown)
Over current (50/51) (warning)
Over current (50/51) (shutdown)
Short circuit (shutdown)
Over load (alarm)
Reverse Power (32,Kw) (Alarm)
Reverse Reactive Power (32RV, kVAr) (Alarm)
Emergency stop (shutdown)
Fuel leak (alarm)
7.
Special Alarm or Shutdown Conditions: Provisions shall be made for indication of up to 6

programmable, additional alarm or shutdown conditions. Labeling of the alarm or
shutdown conditions shall be of the same type of digital signals as the above-specified
conditions
8. Engine Status Monitoring: The following information shall be available from a digital status
panel on the generator set control:
a. Engine oil pressure (psi. or kPA.)
b. Engine coolant temperature (degrees F or C)
d. Engine speed (rpm)
e. Number of hours of operation (hours)
f. Number of start attempts
g. Battery voltage (DC volts)
9. The control system shall also incorporate a data logging and display provision to allow
logging of the last 40 warning or shutdown indications on the generator set, as well as total
time of operation at various loads, as a percent of the standby rating of the generator set.
10. A set of digital signals shall be provided for each genset remote conditions specified herein.
2.7
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
29
30
31
A. Cycle Cranking System: The control system provided shall include a cycle cranking system,
which allows for user selected crank time, rest time, and # of cycles. Initial settings shall be for 3
cranking periods of 15 seconds each, with 15-second rest period between cranking periods.
32
33
34
B. Idle Mode Control: The control system shall include an idle mode control, which allows the
engine to run in idle mode in the RUN position only. In this mode, the alternator excitation
system shall be disabled.
35
36
37
38
39
C. Engine Governor Control: The control system shall include an engine governor control, which
functions to provide steady state frequency regulation as noted elsewhere in this specification.
The governor control shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and a ramping function to
control engine speed and limit exhaust smoke while the unit is starting. The governor control shall
be suitable for use in paralleling applications without component changes.
40
41
42
D. Time Delay Start: The control system shall be able to receive a time delay start (adjustable 0-300
seconds) and time delay stop (adjustable 0-600 seconds) functions from the Emergency Power
System (EPS).
43
44
E. The control system shall include three levels of security protection to allow for configurable
operator privileges.
45
46
F. Controls shall have reduced power mode to lower power state to minimize battery power
requirements.
47
48
G. Set points and software shall be stored in non-volatile memory, preventing loss during a power
outage.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
H. Controls shall include the ability to view and reset diagnostics on optional modules via the
control panel, removing the need to use a separate device or service tool for troubleshooting.
3
4
5
I.
Real-time clock allowing for date and time stamping of diagnostics and events in the controls
logs as well as service maintenance reminders based upon engine operating hours or calendar
events.
6
7
8
J.
All controls functions and monitoring features are to be available for off skid communications
via Modbus RTU (RS-485 half duplex) for customer monitoring. Additionally the remote
annunciator is to also receive information via RS-485 data link.
2.8
ALTERNATOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS
10
A. Alternator Control Functions
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
B. Digital voltage Regulation: The generator set shall include an integrated automatic digital
voltage regulation system that is matched and prototype tested with the governing system
provided. It shall be immune from misoperation due to load induced voltage waveform distortion
and provide a pulse width modulated output to the alternator exciter. The voltage regulation
system shall be equipped with three phase RMS sensing and shall control buildup of AC generator
voltage to provide a linear rise and limit overshoot. The system shall include a torque matching
characteristic, which shall reduce output voltage in proportion to frequency as needed. The
voltage regulator shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and frequency roll off.
Adjustments shall be broad range, and made via digital raise-lower switches, with an alphanumeric LED readout to indicate setting level.
21
22
23
C. Output Current: Controls shall be provided to monitor the output current of the generator set and
initiate an alarm. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current
level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator.
24
25
26
27
28
29
D. Over/under Voltage Monitor: An AC over/under voltage monitoring system that responds only
to true RMS voltage conditions shall be provided. The system shall initiate shutdown of the
generator set when alternator output voltage exceeds 110% of the operator-set voltage level for
more than 10 seconds, or with no intentional delay when voltage exceeds 130%. Under voltage
shutdown shall occur when the output voltage of the alternator is less than 85% for more than 10
seconds.
30
31
32
33
E. Battery Monitoring System: A battery monitoring system shall be provided which initiates
alarms when the DC control and starting voltage is less than 25VDC or more than 32 VDC.
During engine starting, the low voltage limit shall be disabled, and if DC voltage drops to less than
24 volts for more than two seconds a "weak battery" alarm shall be initiated.
34
2.9
35
36
37
COMMUNICATIONS
A. Communication means are to be included with the Generator Control Panel and are to
communicate with the Owners SCADA System. Refer to the following table for a listing of
typical points to be included with communications:
38
ACRONYM
PX2-GEN-A-A
PX2-GEN-A-B
PX2-GEN-A-C
PX2-GEN-ALARM
PX2-GEN-AUTO
PX2-GEN-BAT-C
PX2-GEN-BAT-H
PX2-GEN-BAT-L
165477
NAME
AMPS A
AMPS B
AMPS C
IN ALARM
AUTO SWITCH
AC CHARGE FL
HIGH BATTERY
LOW BATTERY
REC TYP
ANA
ANA
ANA
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
City of Dallas
16195 - 8
VALUE
0
0
0
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
ENG UNITS
AMPS
AMPS
AMPS
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
ACRONYM
PX2-GEN-BATT
PX2-GEN-CHK
PX2-GEN-COOL
PX2-GEN-COOL-F
PX2-GEN-COOL-L
PX2-GEN-COOL-T
PX2-GEN-DEMAND
PX2-GEN-ENG-PT
PX2-GEN-ENG-T
PX2-GEN-ESTOP
PX2-GEN-F-CLOS
PX2-GEN-F-SYNC
PX2-GEN-FLT-CD
PX2-GEN-FREQ
PX2-GEN-FTYPE
PX2-GEN-FU-COM
PX2-GEN-FU-HI
PX2-GEN-FU-LO
PX2-GEN-FUEL-L
PX2-GEN-FUEL-R
PX2-GEN-GCB
PX2-GEN-GF
PX2-GEN-HAC
PX2-GEN-KVA
PX2-GEN-KVAR
PX2-GEN-KW
PX2-GEN-KW-COM
PX2-GEN-KW-HI
PX2-GEN-KW-LO
PX2-GEN-LAC
PX2-GEN-LOAD
PX2-GEN-OCNT
PX2-GEN-OIL-F
PX2-GEN-OIL-L
PX2-GEN-OIL-P
PX2-GEN-OIL-PL
PX2-GEN-OIL-T
PX2-GEN-OLX
PX2-GEN-OVRSPD
PX2-GEN-PCNT-A
PX2-GEN-PCNT-B
PX2-GEN-PCNT-C
PX2-GEN-PCNTKW
PX2-GEN-PF
PX2-GEN-R-KVAR
PX2-GEN-R-KW
PX2-GEN-RPM
PX2-GEN-RST
PX2-GEN-RT-COM
PX2-GEN-RT-HI
PX2-GEN-RT-LO
165477
NAME
BATTERY VOLT
CHECK GEN
COOLANT TEMP
COOLANT TEMP
LOW COOL LEV
COOL TEMP AL
LOAD DEMAND
PRE ENG TEMP
ENG TEMP ALA
EMER STOP
FAIL T CLOSE
FAIL T SYNC
FAULT CODE
FREQUENCY
FAULT TYPE
TOTAL FUEL
TOTAL FUEL
TOTAL FUEL
LOW FUEL LEV
FUEL RATE
GENERATOR CB
GROUND FAULT
HIGH AC
TOTAL kVA
TOTAL kVAR
TOTAL kW
TOTAL kWH
TOTAL kWH
TOTAL kWH
LOW AC
SUPPLY LOAD
OVER CURRENT
OIL TEMP
LOW OIL PRES
OIL PRESSURE
PRE OIL PRES
OIL TEMP
OVER LOAD
OVER SPEED
PERCENT AMPS
PERCENT AMPS
PERCENT AMPS
PERCENT KW
POWER FACTOR
REV KVAR
REV KW
RPM
RESET
RUN TIME
RUNTIME MSB
RUN TIME LSB
REC TYP
ANA
BIN
ANA
ANA
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
ANA
ANA
ANA
ANA
ANA
ANA
BIN
ANA
BIN
BIN
BIN
ANA
ANA
ANA
ANA
ANA
ANA
BIN
BIN
BIN
ANA
BIN
ANA
BIN
ANA
BIN
BIN
ANA
ANA
ANA
ANA
ANA
BIN
BIN
ANA
BIN
ANA
ANA
ANA
City of Dallas
16195 - 9
VALUE
27
NORMAL
327
128.9
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
0
0
0
0
-1
-1
NORMAL
0
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
0
0
0
0
0
3819
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
141.5
NORMAL
0
NORMAL
334
NORMAL
NORMAL
0
0
0
0
2
NORMAL
NORMAL
0
STOPPED
0
55
23416
ENG UNITS
V-DC
(ON=1)
KELVIN
DEGREES
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
CODE
Hz
CODE
GALLONS
GALLONS
GALLONS
(ON=1)
GPH
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
kVA
kVAR
kW
kWH
kWH
kWH
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
DEGREES
(ON=1)
PSI
(ON=1)
KELVIN
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
% AMPS
% AMPS
% AMPS
% KW
% AMPS
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
RPM
(ON=1)
HOURS
SECONDS
SECONDS
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
ACRONYM
PX2-GEN-RTN
PX2-GEN-SC
PX2-GEN-SS
PX2-GEN-SS-FL
PX2-GEN-STA
PX2-GEN-STARTS
PX2-GEN-STATE
PX2-GEN-UCB
PX2-GEN-UFR
PX2-GEN-V-A
PX2-GEN-V-AB
PX2-GEN-V-B
PX2-GEN-V-BC
PX2-GEN-V-C
PX2-GEN-V-CA
NAME
RTN 2 NORM
SHORT CKT
RUNNING
START FAIL
RUNNING
STARTS
STATE
UTIL CB
UNDER FREQU
VOLTS A
VOLTS AB
VOLTS B
VOLTS BC
VOLTS C
VOLTS CA
REC TYP
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
ANA
ANA
BIN
BIN
ANA
ANA
ANA
ANA
ANA
ANA
VALUE
OFF
NORMAL
STOPPED
NORMAL
OFF
126
0
NORMAL
NORMAL
0
0
0
0
0
0
ENG UNITS
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
KW
STATE
(ON=1)
(ON=1)
VOLTS
VOLTS
VOLTS
VOLTS
VOLTS
VOLTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B. For remote monitoring, one of the following communication capabilities shall be provided:
1. One integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP, and SNMP
protocols.
2. One media protocol converter, interfacing the provided equipment to a 10/100BaseT
Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP, and SNMP.
8
9
10
11
C. The protocol interface shall implement the following:

1. All data shall be available and/or mirrored within the Modbus 4x or "Holding Register"
memory area.
2. Register 4x00001 shall exist and be readable to allow simple, predictable "comm tests".
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
D. The media protocol converter, if needed, shall meet the following criteria:
1. The converter shall support 10/100Base-T Ethernet. The serial port speed (baud rate) shall
support 230kbps. The protocol shall support Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP, DF1, and Modbus
RTU/ASCII. Protocol shall be Web Browser configurable.
2. Operating limits shall be 0-60 degrees C, with humidity range minimum of 5-90 percent.
Shock capability on the serial port shall be ESD +15 kV air GAP meeting IEC 1000-4-2.
Power requirements shall be 9-30VDC at 0.5A minimum.
3. The converter shall have LED status for serial, signals, power, and Ethernet.
4. The converter housing shall be UL 1604, Class 1 Div 2, DIN Rail mountable. The converter
shall have DB-9M port connection, with screw terminals, to the input.
5. Converter shall be Digi One IAP, or approved equal.
23
2.10 BASE
24
25
26
A. The engine generator set shall be mounted on a heavy-duty steel base to maintain alignment
between components. The base shall incorporate a battery tray with hold-down clamps within the
rails.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.11 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A. Coolant Heater: Engine mounted, thermostatically controlled, coolant heater(s) for each engine,
with power from the panelboard. The coolant heater shall be installed on the engine with silicone
hose connections. Steel tubing shall be used for connections into the engine coolant system
wherever the length of pipe run exceeds 12 inches. The coolant heater installation shall be
specifically designed to provide proper venting of the system. The coolant heaters shall be
installed using quick disconnect couplers to isolate the heater for replacement of the heater
element. The quick disconnect/automatic sealing couplers shall allow the heater element to be
replaced without draining the engine cooling system or significant coolant loss. The coolant
heater shall be provided with a thermostat, installed at the engine thermostat housing. An AC
power connection box shall be provided for a single AC power connection to the coolant heater
system from the panelboard. The coolant heater(s) shall be sized as recommended by the engine
manufacturer to warm the engine to a minimum of 100F (40C) in a 40oF ambient, in compliance
with NFPA110 requirements. The heater shall additionally have an active circulation pump to
circulate the heated coolant through the engine during periods when the engine is not running to
assure the engine remains warm and ready to start and accept load without notice.
17
18
B. Vibration Isolators: Vibration isolators, spring type, and quantity as recommended by the
generator set manufacturer.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
C. Starting and Control Batteries: Starting battery bank, lead acid type, 24 volt DC, sized as
recommended by the generator set manufacturer, shall be supplied for each generator set with
battery cables and connectors. Batteries shall be a minimum of two 1300 CCA, 190 ampere
batteries to assure a positive start current under all conditions. Batteries are to be warranted by
the engine manufacturer and not be under a separate warranty. Additionally the batteries must be
stored in fiberglass boxes and include thermostatic heaters to assure safety and extended life
during low temperature seasons.
26
27
28
29
30
D. Exhaust Silencer: Exhaust muffler(s) shall be provided for each engine, size and type as
recommended by the generator set manufacturer. The mufflers shall be critical grade and meet
sound levels specified for the sound attenuated enclosure. Exhaust system shall be installed
according to the generator set manufacturers recommendations and applicable codes and
standards.
31
2.12 BATTERY CHARGER
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
A. UL listed/CSA certified 10-amp voltage regulated battery charger shall be provided in the engine
generator set enclosure. Input AC voltage and DC output voltage shall be as required. Chargers
shall be equipped with float, taper and equalize charge settings. Operational monitors shall
provide visual output along with individual form C contacts rated at 4 amps, 120 VAC from the
Panelboard, 30VDC for remote indication of:
1. Loss of AC power
red light
2. Low battery voltage
red light
3. High battery voltage
red light
4. Analog DC voltmeter and ammeter, 12 hour equalize charge timer, AC and DC fuses shall
also be provided on the charger.
2.13 OUTDOOR WEATHER-PROTECTIVE HOUSING
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
A. Enclosure design must meet the following criteria:

1. 125 mph horizontal wind loads
2. Rain resistant to 4 per hour
3. Maximum static pressure drop equal to or less than 0.5 inches of water through the
enclosure
4. Zone 2 earthquakes
5. Corrosion resistant up to 5500 hours of continuous salt spray conditions per ASTM B117
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
6.
7.
Water resistant up to 5500 hours of continuous 100% humidity exposure per ASTM D2247
Abrasion resistant per ASTM D4060
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
B. Frame:
1. Material: A-36 structural steel tubing and channel members
2. Construction: Full length channels on the bottom and rectangular tube frame
3. Remove Seismic Criteria if project is not in an area at high risk of an earthquake. Also edit
spectral acceleration or switch to any earthquake magnitude as needed.
4. Seismic Criteria: Structure must be capable of withstanding an earthquake with a spectral
acceleration of 1.94g.
5. Edit wind speed or remove Wind Load as needed.
6. Wind Load: Structure must be capable of withstanding horizontal winds of up to 200 mph.
7. The structure shall be completely seal welded at all connection points and steel end caps
welded at all open tube ends. The base channel shall be provided with mounting holes that
will allow the enclosure to be fastened directly to the base skid or foundation.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
C. Roof:
1. Construction: 14 gauge galvannealed steel skin with stiffeners and framing
2. Roof will camber 2 to aid in moisture run off.
3. Performance:
a. Roof shall withstand 42 lbs./sq. ft. loads.
b. Impact resistant up to 5 foot-pound at any point on the roof
c. Roof will not damage or deform when subjected to a single point force up to 25 lbf for
a time of up to 1 minute at any point on the roof.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
D. Walls:
1. Construction: 14 gauge galvannealed steel outer skin with stiffeners and 22 gauge
perforated galvanized steel inner skin.
2. Minimum wall thickness: 4 inches
3. Performance:
a. Impact resistant up to 5 foot-pound at any point on the walls
b. Walls will not damage or deform when subjected to a single point force up to 25 lbf for
a time of up to 1 minute at any point on any wall.
4. Panels shall be packed with 4 lbs./cu. ft. density mineral wool acoustical insulation which is
protected by a 2 mil Mylar liner installed between the perforated steel inner skin and the
thicker outer skin.
5. Side wall panel construction utilizing pop rivets and screw fasteners on the outside is not
acceptable.
6. Acoustical Performance: Typical Wall Construction
37
38
39
E. Sound Attenuation
1. Housing shall be sound attenuating type, producing a noise level not greater than 75 dBa at
7 meters.
40
2.14 ENCLOSURE ELECTRICAL PACKAGE
41
A. 30 KVA 480-208/120V, 3 phase mini power zone
42
B. Six interior fluorescent light fixtures with two 4 foot bulbs wired to AC panel
43
C. Two light switches
44
45
D. Four 100W emergency light fixtures powered from generator set batteries with one 0-60 minute
timer
46
47
E. Exterior 100W metal halide light fixture above each door with photocell and switch. One switch
per enclosure side
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
F. Break glass generator emergency stop station that positively prevents the startup and operation
of the generator assembly located on the outside of the enclosure at the main entrance door
3
4
G. Four 20 amp GFCI duplex receptacles provided with a self-closing enclosure, door, or hinged
cover that prevents wetting of live parts
H. Six spare breakers shall be provided
6
7
8
I.
All electrical devices including generator-set ancillary loads shall be pre-wired before shipment.
All generator auxiliary loads shall be wired to the AC load panel for the customer connection via
EMT galvanized conduit with EMT connections. All electrical shall be rated weather tight.
2.15 FUEL STORAGE TANK
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
A. Provide a dual-wall sub base fuel storage tank. The tank shall be sized to provide 24 hours
usable capacity at 100% load. The tank shall be constructed of corrosion resistant steel and shall
be UL listed. The tank shall also include an outer layer of light grade concrete and carry the
UL2085 listing for additional protection. The equipment, as installed, shall meet all local and
regional requirements for above ground tanks. Provide the fuel tank with a continuous level
transmitter, and a leak detector. The fuel tank shall be constructed to place the fill spout on the
generator end so to facilitate access from the generator enclosure entry door as shown on the
Drawings.
1. UL-2085 Listed
2. Capacity: 1700 Gallons for a minimum of 24 hour at 100% load service.
3. 2 hour fire rating
4. Vehicle and impact resistant
5. Ballistic resistant
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. Construction:
1. Built and tested in accordance with the following:
a. UL 142 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Steel Aboveground Tanks for
Flammable and Combustible Liquids
b. UL 2085 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Protected Aboveground Tanks for
Flammable and Combustible Liquids
c. NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids
d. NFPA 37 The Standard for Installation and Use of Stationary Combustible Engines
and Gas Turbines
e. NFPA 110 The Standard for Standby and Emergency Power Systems
2. Type: Double wall secondary containment fuel storage with concrete filling the interstitial
space. Closed top diked designs are not acceptable.
3. Tank exterior: minimum thick steel plate.
4. Internal baffles for additional structural support. The space between baffles should be no
more than 60.
5. Support I-beams shall be located internal to the tank at each generator-set isolator location
(tanks with exposed beams are not acceptable).
6. Rectangular - including reinforced steel box channel for generator support, with load rating
of 10,000 lbs. per generator-set mounting hole location.
7. A welded steel containment basin, sized at a minimum of 120% of the tank capacity to
prevent escape of fuel into the environment in the event of a tank rupture.
8. Oversized electrical stub up with removable side access plate.
9. All tank fittings shall be threaded NPT.
10. Integral lifting provisions to lift empty tank via overhead crane or as a packaged assembly
with generator-set.
48
49
50
C. Fittings:
1. Supply engine connection, appropriately sized NPT, with drop tube.
2. Return engine connection, appropriately sized NPT, with drop tube.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 13
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Low level dry contact float switch set to 35% of tank capacity.
High level dry contact float switch set to 90% of tank capacity.
Critical high level dry contact float switch set to 95% of tank capacity.
Leak detection float contact set in the lowest point in the secondary containment annular
space.
Fuel fill annunciator panel capable of providing audible and visual notification for critical
high level, high level, low level, and fuel leak. The panel shall include an On/Off switch, a
single 6 amp dry contact for each alarm condition, and an alarm silence switch. Annunciator
panel shall be located at the fuel fill port.
Direct site reading mechanical fuel level gauge located adjacent to the fill port.
Fuel fill port with UL listed overfill prevention valve (95%). Fill pipe shall terminate within
6 of the bottom of the tank.
Minimum five gallon spill containment constructed of non-combustible material with
lockable lid. Spill containment must be UL listed.
Two 2 ports with drop tubes for fuel polishing system. Return drop tube shall include
internal piping to opposing end of fuel tank.
Three 2 spare ports with plug.
Two 4 spare ports with plug.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
D. Venting:
1. Normal and emergency vents sized per NFPA 30, Table 2-8, based on wetted surface area of
the tank (calculated based on 100% of primary tank).
2. All vents shall be extended to a minimum of 12 above the enclosure roof line. All roof
penetrations must be water tight.
3. Cast iron pressure relief emergency vent caps.
4. Emergency vents are pressure operated.
a. Opening pressure is 0.5 psig.
b. Full opening pressure is 2.5 psig.
5. Limits marked on top of each emergency vent.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
E. Performance:
1. Primary tank shall withstand a gauge air pressure of 3 psi without leakage or permanent
deformation.
2. The annular space bounded by the primary and secondary tanks must withstand a gauge air
pressure of 3 psi without leakage or permanent deformation in the primary or the secondary
tank.
3. The primary tank must have enough hydrostatic strength to contain 25 psi of water pressure
for 2 minutes without rupture or leakage.
4. The secondary tank must have enough hydrostatic strength to contain 25 psi of water
pressure for two minutes without rupture or leakage.
5. The weakest part of the tank top must be able to support a 1000 lb. load, applied over a 12
inch by 12 inch area. The load is to be sustained for one minute without damage or
permanent deformation to the tank structure.
6. Each fitting or device intended to be used to lift and move the tank shall withstand a load
equal to twice that imposed by lifting the empty tank for one minute. When more than one
fitting is provided on a tank, the load is to be divided between the fittings in proportion to
the load to which they are subjected by lifting the tank as intended. Neither the fitting nor
the tank shall be damaged.
7. All exterior surfaces must be capable of withstanding an impact of 72 ftlbf without
showing any visible signs of damage.
8. Tank must be fire resistant for up to two hours of constant exposure to fire.
9. Tank must be vehicle impact resistant. Vehicle impact resistance being defined as
withstanding a 12,000 lb. force with an impact speed of 10 mph without the primary tank
showing signs of rupture or leakage.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 14
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
10. Tank must be projectile resistant. In order to be classified as projectile resistant, the tank
must be able to withstand five shots of 150-grain M-2 ball ammunition, having an initial
velocity of 2700 ft/s, fired from a .30 caliber rifle at a distance of 100 ft. The bullets are to
be fired perpendicular to the point of impact. The primary tank shall show no signs of
leakage after five bullet impacts to the same 8 inch by 8 inch area.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
F. Painting:
1. Carbon steel surfaces shall be power tool cleaned per SSPC-SP3 and painted as follows: one
(1) coat primer Ameron 370 Epoxy (2-3 mils DFT), one (1) intermediate coat of Ameron
370 Epoxy (3-5 mils DFT) and one finish coat of Ameron PSX 700 polyurethane texture (23 mils DFT).
2. This shall be an acceptable alternative to a 3 coat polyurethane paint system.
3. Paint Color: As selected by the Owner.
4. Performance:
a. Heat resistant up to 200 F during continuous exposure and 250 F during intermediate
exposure.
b. Abrasion resistant per ASTM D4060.
c. Corrosion resistant up to 5500 hours of continuous salt spray conditions per ASTM
B117.
d. Water resistant up to 5500 hours of continuous 100% humidity exposure per ASTM
D2247.
2.16 PLATFORM FOR ACCESS TO GENERATOR
23
24
25
26
Generator supplier to provide OSHA approved platform, railings, steps to access generator doors on
both sides of generator. The height shall be coordinated with fuel tank and the doors to generator.
2.17 VIBRATION ISOLATOR
27
28
29
30
A. Furnish and install spring type vibration-isolators between the sub-base tank and the
generator set. A minimum of six isolators shall be used, properly sized for the
generator set supplied.
2.18 SERVICE AND FEEDER LUGS AND CONNECTORS
31
A. Circuit Breaker Specifications
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
B. Provide a generator mounted 100% circuit breaker, molded case, 1600 amp trip, 3 pole,
NEMA 1/IP22. Breaker shall utilize a solid state trip unit. It shall include Long time,
short time, instantaneous and ground fault. It shall also include shunt trip and auxiliary
contacts. The breaker shall be UL/CSA Listed of IEC construction and connected to
engine/generator safety shutdowns. Breaker shall be housed in an extension terminal box
which is isolated from vibrations induced by the generator set. Mechanical type lugs,
sized for the circuit breaker feeders shown on drawing, shall be supplied on the load side
of breaker. A second circuit breaker shall also be included which will serve the radiator
mounted load bank described below. The circuit breaker shall be a long time, short time
and instantaneous breaker to provide 50% (800A) of the full rating of the generator set.
Conduit shall be supplied to span the distance between the load bank and the circuit
breaker. The controls of the load bank shall be provided and mounted to the side of the
load bank for ease of manual control.
45
C. Provide additional circuit breakers as shown in the Drawings.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 15
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.19
PERMANENTLY MOUNTED LOAD BANK
2
3
4
A. The total capacity of the load bank shall be rated 1000 kW at 480 Volts, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, 60
Hertz, 752 Amps per Phase at unity Power Factor. Load bank shall be suitable for outdoor
installation.
B. The load step resolution shall be a nominal 20% of the load bank rating.
C. The load bank shall be designed for continuous duty cycle operation with no limitations.
7
8
9
10
11
D. Include a load dump relay within the system which is to be wired to an automatic transfer switch
so that if a utility outage occurs while the generator set is under load testing with the load bank it
will trip the load bank off line so that the full capacity of the generator set is available to serve the
load.
2.20 FACTORY TESTING
12
13
14
A. The standby generator shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and
shall be given the manufacturers routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to
insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment.
15
16
B. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of
ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards.
17
18
19
20
21
C. Witnessed testing shall be conducted with the engine-generator set packaged on the fuel tank and
in the enclosure to demonstrate operation as it would naturally occur once it is placed into service
at the job site. Allow for a minimum of three Owners or Owners agent during the test. Expenses
for the three agents are to be included in the cost of the package and is to cover hotel and food
expenses.
22
23
24
25
26
A. The Owner/Engineer will witness the Factory Tests for each of the following Equipment Units:
1. Equipment Unit I.D. __________
27
B. The number of Owner/Engineer persons witnessing the tests will be four [4] persons.
28
29
30
C. Under no circumstances, will the equipment be approved for shipment, nor will the equipment be
accepted by the Owner, if witness testing is specified, and the equipment is shipped without the
testing being witnessed.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
I.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 16
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
1.
Owner/Engineer representatives shall not have to provide for any out of pocket expenses
reimbursement.
4
5
6
2.
The Contractor shall provide, and pay for, all air travel fare, including ground shuttle or taxi,
to and from the Owner/Engineers office or residence. Air fare inside the Continental United
States shall be nonstop if available, Coach Class or better, from Dallas.
7
8
9
3.
Ground transportation at any destination shall be provided by the host Original Equipment
10
11
12
13
14
4.
The Contractor shall provide for hotel, meals, travel and incidentals to be paid for by the host
OEM at the testing location, whose equipment is being tested. The host OEM shall have the
authority to resolve any expense problems. If the Hotel offers restaurants, those charges shall
be covered in the Hotel expenses. If meals are not offered at the Hotel, transportation to
restaurants and the cost of those meals, shall be provided by the host OEM.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
15
16
3.1
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
MANUFACTURERS REPRESENTATIVE
A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's field Engineer to assist the
Contractor in installation and start-up of each type of the equipment specified below for a period
of not less than two working days, with not less than one working day per standby generator. The
manufacturer's field Engineer shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in
general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and
components contained therein.
3.2
EXAMINATION
24
A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment.
25
B. Concrete pads shall be installed as shown on the Structural Drawings.
26
C. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface.
27
D. Verify that the equipment is ready to install.
28
E. Verify field measurements are in conformance with the manufacturers recommendations.
29
3.3
INSTALLATION
30
31
A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract
Drawings.
32
33
34
B. Install the generator set with sub base fuel tank on the concrete pad as shown on the drawings.
Install the vibro-isolators between the sub base fuel tank and the generator set. Installation shall
be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
35
36
3.4
37
38
39
specified in manufacturer's instructions.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 17
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.5
FIELD ADJUSTING
2
3
A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and
electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions.
4
5
6
7
8
B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Relays shall be set in the field by qualified personnel,
retained by the Contractor, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the
system as required in Section 16105 Power System Study. All such settings, including the
application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior
to energizing of the equipment.
3.6
EQUIPMENT START-UP
10
11
12
A. Operate unit to demonstrate ability to operate continuously without vibration, jamming, leakage
or overheating and to perform specified functions, after installation and after manufacturer's
Engineers check of installed equipment.
13
14
B. Comply with manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions during start up and
operation.
15
C. Promptly correct improper installation of equipment.
16
17
18
D. Cooperate with supplier of equipment at time of start-up and in making of all final adjustments
necessary to place equipment in satisfactory working order. Start-up shall not commence without
the presence of the manufacturer's Engineer.
19
3.7
FIELD TEST
20
21
22
23
24
A. Upon completion of the installation and as soon as conditions permit, the emergency power
supply system including the engine driven generator, electrical circuits, controls, transfer switch
and other devices shall be tested in the presence of the Owner/Engineer by the Contractor and the
service representative for the manufacturer of the engine driven generator unit to assure that the
system functions as specified.
25
26
27
28
B. Prior to scheduling the test, notify the Owner/Engineer in writing that all requirements and
provisions of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, that all apparatus shall be clean,
properly adjusted and ready for operation and that the Instruction Manuals, parts lists and record
drawings have been submitted.
29
30
31
C. The manufacturers' Engineer shall make such changes in wiring or connections and such
adjustments, repairs or replacements necessary to make the circuit, device or control system
function as specified and otherwise comply with the Contract Documents.
32
33
34
35
D. As part of the field test, the automatic shutdown devices shall be tested and the respective values
recorded at which the devices will stop the engine. Any adjustments required shall be made in the
devices to make the operating values correspond to those recommended by the engine
manufacturer and as recorded during the stop test.
36
37
38
39
E. Perform a four-hour resistive (1.0 Power Factor) load bank at 100% load. After the four-hour
test has been completed, additional testing shall be performed to demonstrate the emergency
power supply system's ability to meet the automatic starting, load transfer and motor starting
requirements.
40
41
42
43
F. If the emergency power supply system fails to fulfill the performance requirements of this
specification, corrective action shall be taken and the system retested to assure full compliance.
All expenses associated with the field tests, including any corrective action, shall be borne to the
Contractor.
44
45
G. Fuel for testing is the responsibility of the Owner or installing contractor. After testing the fuel
tanks shall be topped off by the Owner or installing contractor for in service use.
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 18
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.8
2
3
4
5
A. Installing contractor shall remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the motor
controllers. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment
using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air.
3.9
6
7
8
9
CLEANING

A. Installing contractor shall touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved
by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the
surface shall be replaced.
3.10 MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATION
10
11
12
13
A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall personally inspect the equipment

at the jobsite and shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and
tested, in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations, including all settings designated
in the Power System Study.
14
B. The Contractor shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification.
15
16
17
18
19

20
21
3.12 TRAINING
22
23
the Standby Generator Sets furnished under this Section.
24
B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one 8-hour day.
25
26
27
Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the
system being supplied.
28
29
30
31
32
E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training

program shall include instructions on the assembly, circuit breaker, engine, alternator, protective
devices, metering, and other major components.
33
34
35
36
F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training session for the Owners use.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 19
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
16195 - 20
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16261
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
8
9
SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install continuous-duty three-phase, solid-state, uninterruptible
power systems (UPSS). The UPSS shall provide high-quality AC power for sensitive electronic
equipment loads, together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as
shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.2
RELATED WORK
10
11
B. Section 16105 Power System Study
12
C. Section 16475 Low Voltage Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Disconnect Switches
13
D. Section 16470 Panelboard
14
1.3
SUBMITTALS
15
16
A.
17
18
19

20
21
22
23
Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will be
24
25
26
27
28
D. The original equipment manufacturer (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings,
including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturers Engineering department. All equipment
shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers, and
shall be maintained on file in the OEMs archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineers
ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
E. Shop Drawings and Product Data. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:
1. Master drawing index
2. Front view elevation
3. Floor plan
4. Top view
5. Single line
6. Schematic diagram
7. Nameplate schedule
8. UL Listing of the completed assembly.
9. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturers part
number.
10. Conduit entry/exit locations
11. Assembly ratings including:
b. Voltage
165477
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 16000 and
City of Dallas
16261 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12. Major component ratings including:
a. Voltage
13. Descriptive bulletins
14. Product data sheets.
15. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal sizes.
16. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above.
e. Field Test Reports
19
20
21
I.
22
1.4
Training agenda shall not be sumbitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
A. The UPSS assembly and all components in this specification shall be designed and manufactured
according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted):
3. ASME
4. CSA 22.2, No. 107.1
5. FCC Part 15, Class A
6. IEC 1000-4-5
7. ISO 9001
8. NEMA PE-1
9. OSHA
10. UL Standard 1778
11. NEMA ICS 6 Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures
36
37
38
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
39
40
41
period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with
42
43
44
assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by
a third party and brand labeled shall not be acceptable.
45
46
47
not be used.
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified
4
5
1.6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two (2)
14
15
C. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be
16
17
D. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available, equipment
shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower the groups.
18
19
20
21
22
E. Equipment must be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within
seven (7) calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven (7)
calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the
Contractors expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the
equipment.
23
24
25
26
1.7
WARRANTY
27
28
29
30
31
workmanship for 3 years from date of final acceptance of the UPSS. Within such period of
UPSS to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the
equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner.
32
33
B. There shall be 365/24 support available via a toll free phone number, with 20 minute response
on all issues.
34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
35
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
36
37
38
39
acceptable:
1. Liebert
2. Approved Equal
40
41
42
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.2
RATINGS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A. General
1. The UPSSs described in this specification shall be designed for operation on the voltage
systems as shown on the Drawings.
2. The equipment and protective devices shall be fully rated for a short circuit current of
65,000 rms symmetrical amperes (minimum) or greater if shown on the Drawings. Systems
employing series connected ratings shall not be used.
3. The output load shall be at 0.8 lagging power factor.
4. The manufacturer shall design the UPSS, including devices, for continuous operation at its
rated current in a 40 degree C ambient temperature.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
B. Environmental
1. The UPSS shall be able to withstand the following environmental conditions without
damage or degradation of operating characteristics:
a. Operating Ambient Temperature
1) UPSS Module: 32F to 1040F (00C to 400C).
2) Battery: 770F 920F (250C 50C).
b. Storage/Transport Ambient Temperature
1) UPSS Module: -40F to 1580F (-200C to 700C)
2) Battery: -40F to 920F (-200C to 330C).
c. Relative Humidity
1) 0 to 95%, non-condensing.
d. Altitude
1) Operating: to 3300 ft. (1000 meters) above Mean Sea Level. Derated for higher
altitude applications.
2) Storage/Transport: to 40,000 ft. (12,200 meters) above Mean Sea Level.
e. Noise generated by the UPSS under any condition of normal operation shall not exceed
54 dBA measured 1 meter from surface of the UPSS.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
C. Input
1. Voltage Configuration, as shown on the Drawings.
2. Voltage Range: +10%, -20% of nominal.
3. Frequency: Nominal frequency 5%.
4. Power Factor: Up to 0.99 lagging at nominal input voltage and full rated UPSS output load.
5. Inrush Current: 800% of full load current maximum.
6. Current Limit: 125% of nominal AC input current maximum.
7. Input Current Walk-In: 20 seconds to full rated input current maximum. Field selectable 5
through 20 seconds.
8. Current Distortion: 4% reflected THD maximum at full load.
9. Surge Protection: Sustains input surges without damage per criteria listed in IEC 1000-4-5.
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
D. Output
1. Voltage Configuration: As shown on the Drawings.
2. Voltage Regulation:
a. 1% three-phase RMS average for a balanced three-phase load for the combined
variation effects of input voltage, connected load, battery voltage, ambient temperature,
and load power factor.
b. 2% three-phase RMS average for a 100% unbalanced load for the combined variation
effects of input voltage, connected load, battery voltage, ambient temperature, and load
power factor.
3. Frequency: Nominal frequency 0.1%.
4. Frequency Slew Rate: 1.0 Hertz per second maximum. Field selectable from 0.1 to 1.0 Hz
per second.
5. Phase Displacement:
a. 0.5 degree for balanced load,
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
20
21
22
23
24
E. Battery
1. Battery Cells: Sealed, lead-acid, valve-regulated.
2. Reserve Time: 30 minutes at full load, 0.8 power factor, with ambient temperature of 25C.
3. Recharge Time: to 95% capacity within ten (10) times discharge time.
2.3
MODES OF OPERATION
A. The UPSS shall be designed to operate as an on-line, double-conversion, reverse-transfer system
in the following modes:
1. Normal - The critical AC load is continuously supplied by the UPSS inverter. The
rectifier/charger derives power from a utility AC source and supplies DC power to the
inverter while simultaneously float-charging the reserve battery.
2. Emergency - Upon failure of utility AC power, the critical AC load is supplied by the
inverter, which, without any switching, obtains power from the battery. There shall be no
interruption in power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the utility AC source.
3. Recharge - Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage, the
rectifier/charger shall automatically restart, walk-in, and gradually assume the inverter and
battery recharge loads.
4. Bypass - If the UPSS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair, or should the
inverter overload capacity be exceeded, the static transfer switch shall perform a reverse
transfer of the load from the inverter to the bypass source with no interruption in power to
the critical AC load.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
b. 1.0 degrees for 100% unbalanced load.

Bypass Line Sync Range:
a. 0.5 Hertz,
b. Field selectable 0.5 to 5.0 Hz.
Voltage Distortion:
a. 1% total harmonic distortion (THD) for linear loads.
b. <4% THD for 100% nonlinear loads (3:1 crest factor) without kVA/kW derating.
Load Power Factor Range: 0.7 lagging to 0.95 leading without derating.
Output Power Rating: Rated kVA at 0.8 lagging power factor.
Overload Capability:
a. 125% for ten minutes (without bypass source).
b. 150% for one minute (without bypass source).
Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment: 5% manual adjustment.
Voltage Transient Response:
a. 100% load step
4.0%.
b. Loss or return of AC input power
1.0%.
c. Manual transfer of 100% load
3.0%.
Transient Recovery Time: to within 1% of output voltage within one cycle.
Voltage Unbalance: 100% unbalanced load
1%.
2.4
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
CONSTRUCTION
A. General
1. Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components.
2. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached
with stainless steel screws. There shall be a master nameplate that indicates equipment
ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information.
3. The UPSS unit, comprised of an input circuit breaker, rectifier/charger, inverter, static
transfer switch and maintenance bypass switch, shall be housed in a single free-standing
NEMA type 12 enclosure. Cabinet doors/covers shall require a tool for gaining access.
Casters and stops shall be provided for ease of installation. Front access only shall be
required for expedient servicing and adjustments. The UPSS cabinet shall be structurally
adequate and have provisions for hoisting, jacking, and forklift handling.
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
The UPSS shall be furnished with a sign marked "DANGER (XXX) VOLTS KEEP OUT".
Letters shall be not less than 1 in high, 1/4 in stroke. Sign shall be laminated plastic with
black letters on a white background, fastened by 316 stainless steel screws and OSHA
approved.
The UPSS shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a
rigid assembly. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt-on covers. All
edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide adequate ventilation
within the enclosure.
All sections of the UPSS shall be front and rear aligned with depth. Devices shall be front
removable and load connections front and rear accessible. Rear access shall be provided.
Where UPSSs are shown installed against a wall or other location where the UPSS does not
have rear access, all sections of the UPSS shall be rear aligned with depth. Devices shall be
front removable and load connections front accessible.
The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means.
The UPSS shall be arranged so that the uppermost operating handle shall not exceed 6-ft-6in from the floor when the unit is mounted on a 4-in high equipment pad.
B. Enclosures
1. Indoor enclosures shall be indoor NEMA 12, freestanding, metal enclosed assemblies,
consisting of dead front, completely metal enclosed vertical sections.
2. The UPSS cabinet shall be cleaned, primed, and painted with the manufacturers standard
color. The UPSS shall be constructed of replaceable subassemblies. Printed circuit
assemblies shall be plug connections. Like assemblies and like components shall be
interchangeable.
3. Cooling of the UPSS shall be by forced air. Low-velocity fans shall be used to minimize
audible noise output. Fan power shall be provided by the UPSS output. There shall be
redundant fans.
4. The thermal design, along with all thermal and ambient sensors, shall be coordinated with
the protective devices before excessive component or internal cabinet temperatures are
exceeded.
2.5
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
COMPONENTS
A. Rectifier/Charger
1. General
a. The term rectifier/charger shall denote the solid-state equipment and controls necessary
to convert incoming AC power to regulated DC power for input to the inverter and for
battery charging. The rectifier/charger shall be a solid-state SCR/IGBT type with
constant voltage/current limiting control circuitry.
2. AC Input Current Limiting
a. The rectifier/charger unit shall be provided with AC input current limiting whereby the
maximum input current shall be limited to 125% of the full input current rating. The
rectifier/charger shall operate at a reduced current limit mode whenever the critical load
is powered from the UPSS static bypass circuit such that the maximum UPSS input
current will not exceed 125% of full load input current. In addition, the rectifier/charger
shall have a battery current limit, adjustable from 0 to 25% of the full load input
current.
3. Input Current Walk-In
a. The rectifier/charger shall contain a timed walk-in circuit that causes the unit to
gradually assume the load over a 20-second time interval after input voltage is applied.
Walk-in time shall be field selectable for 5 through 20 seconds.
4. DC Filter
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
a.
5.
6.
7.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
The rectifier/charger shall have a filter to minimize ripple voltage into the battery.
Under no conditions shall ripple voltage into the battery exceed 1% RMS. The filter
shall be adequate to ensure that the DC output of the rectifier/charger will meet the
input requirements of the inverter. The inverter shall be able to operate from the
rectifier/charger with the battery disconnected.
Automatic Rectifier Restart
a. Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage and prior to a
UPSS automatic end-of-discharge shutdown, the rectifier/charger shall automatically
restart, walk-in, and gradually assume the inverter and battery recharge loads.
Battery Recharge
a. In addition to supplying power for the inverter load, the rectifier/charger shall be
capable of producing battery charging current sufficient to replace 95% of the battery
discharge power within ten (10) times the discharge time. After the battery is recharged,
the rectifier/charger shall maintain the battery at full charge until the next emergency
operation.
Overvoltage Protection
a. There shall be DC over-voltage protection so that if the DC voltage rises to the pre-set
limit, the UPSS is to shut down automatically and initiate an uninterrupted load transfer
to the static bypass line.
B. Inverter
1. General
a. The term inverter shall denote the solid-state equipment and controls to convert DC
power from the rectifier/charger or battery to regulated AC power for supporting the
critical load. The inverter shall use Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) in a
phase-controlled, pulse width modulated (PWM) design capable of providing the
specified AC output.
2. Overload Capability
a. The inverter shall be capable of supplying current and voltage for overloads exceeding
100%. The inverter is to provide 150% of full load for 1 minute and 125% of full load
for 10 minutes. A status indicator and audible alarm shall indicate overload operation.
The UPSS shall transfer the load to bypass when overload capacity is exceeded.
3. Fault Clearing and Current Limit
a. The inverter shall be capable of supplying an overload current of 150% of its full-load
rating for one minute. For greater currents or longer time duration, the inverter shall
have electronic current-limiting protection to prevent damage to components. The
critical load will be transferred to the static bypass automatically and uninterrupted. The
inverter shall be self-protecting against any magnitude of connected output overload.
Inverter control logic shall sense and disconnect the inverter from the critical AC load
without the requirement to clear protective fuses.
4. Step Load Response
a. The output voltage shall be maintained to within 4% with a 0-to-100% step load
change or a 100%-to-0 step load change. The output voltage shall recover to within 1%
of nominal voltage within 1 cycle.
5. Voltage Distortion
a. For linear loads, the output voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) shall not be greater
than 1%. For 100% rated load of 3:1 crest factor nonlinear loads, the output voltage
total harmonic distortion shall not be greater than 4%. The output rating is not to be
derated in kVA nor kW due to the 100% nonlinear load with 3:1 crest factor.
6. Phase Balance
a. Electronic controls shall be provided to regulate each phase so that an unbalanced
loading will not cause the output voltage to go outside the specified voltage unbalance
or phase displacement. With 100% load on one phase and 0% load on the other 2
phases or 100% load on 2 phases and 0% load on the other phase, the voltage balance is
to be within 2% and the phase displacement is to be 120 degrees within 1 degree.
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
7.
Fuse Failure Protection

a. Power semiconductors in the inverter unit shall be fused with fast-acting fuses, so that
loss of any one power semiconductor will not cause cascading failures.
8. Inverter Shutdown
a. For rapid removal of the inverter from the critical load, the inverter control electronics
shall instantaneously turn off the inverter transistors. Simultaneously, the static transfer
switch shall be turned on to maintain continuous power to the critical load.
9. Inverter DC Protection
a. The inverter shall be protected by the following disconnect levels:
1) DC Overvoltage Shutdown
2) DC Undervoltage Warning (Low Battery Reserve), adjustable
3) DC Undervoltage Shutdown (End of Discharge)
10. Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment
a. The inverter shall use a software control to adjust the output voltage from 5% of the
nominal value.
11. Output Frequency
a. The output frequency of the inverter shall be controlled by an oscillator. The oscillator
shall be temperature compensated and hold the inverter output frequency to 0.1% for
steady state and transient conditions. Drift shall not exceed 0.1% during a 24-hour
period. Total frequency deviation, including short time fluctuations and drift, shall not
exceed 0.1% from the rated frequency.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
C. Display and Controls

1. Monitoring and Control
a. The UPSS shall be provided with a microprocessor based unit status display and
controls section designed for convenient and reliable user operation. A graphical
display shall be used to show a single-line diagram of the UPSS, and shall be provided
as part of the monitoring and controls sections of the UPSS. All of the operator controls
and monitors shall be located on the front of the UPSS cabinet. The monitoring
functions such as metering, status and alarms shall be displayed on the graphical LCD
display. Additional features of the monitoring system shall include:
1) Menu-driven display with pushbutton navigation
2) Real time clock (time and date)
3) Alarm history with time and date stamp
4) Battery backed-up memory
2. Metering
a. The following parameters shall be displayed:
1) Input AC voltage line-to-line
2) Input AC current for each phase
3) Input frequency
4) Battery voltage
5) Battery charge/discharge current
6) Output AC voltage line-to-line and line-to-neutral for each phase
7) Output AC current for each phase
8) Output frequency
9) Apparent power
10) Active power
11) Battery time left during battery operation
3. Alarm Messages
a. The following alarm messages shall be displayed:
1) Input power out of tolerance
2) Battery charger problem
3) Battery failed test
4) Low battery warning
5) Low battery shutdown
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4.
5.
6.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
6) DC bus overvoltage
7) Bypass frequency out of range
8) Load transferred to bypass
9) Excessive retransfers attempted
10) Static switch failure
11) UPSS output not synchronized to bypass power
12) Output undervoltage
13) Output overvoltage
14) Output overcurrent
15) System output overloaded
16) Load transferred to bypass due to overload
17) Overload shutdown
18) Control error
19) Critical power supply failure
20) Load transferred due to internal protection
21) External shutdown (remote EPO activated)
22) Fan failure
23) Overtemperature shutdown impending
24) Overtemperature shutdown
b. An audible alarm shall be provided and activated by any of the above alarm conditions.
Status Messages
a. The following UPSS status messages shall be displayed:
1) Normal operation
2) Load on maintenance bypass
3) Load on UPSS
4) Load on static bypass
5) System shutdown
6) UPSS on battery
Controls
a. UPSS start-up, shutdown, and maintenance bypass operations shall be accomplished
through the front-panel pushbutton controls. Menu-driven user prompts shall be
provided to guide the operator through system operation without the use of additional
manuals. Pushbuttons shall be provided to display the status of the UPSS and to test and
reset visual and audible alarms. A mimic screen shall be available on the LCD screen to
depict a single-line diagram of the UPSS, with switch positions and power flow.
On-Line Battery Test
a. The UPSS shall be provided with a menu-driven On-Line Battery Test feature. The test
shall ensure the capability of the battery to supply power to the inverter while the load
is supplied power in the normal mode.
D. Static Transfer Switch

1. General
a. A static transfer switch and bypass circuit shall be provided as an integral part of the
UPSS. The static switch shall be a naturally commutated high-speed static (SCR-type)
device rated to conduct full load current continuously. The switch shall have an
overload rating to clear a 20-ampere load branch circuit breaker.
b. The static transfer switch control logic shall contain an automatic transfer control
circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals, and operating and alarm
conditions. This control circuit shall provide an uninterrupted transfer of the load to an
alternate bypass source, without exceeding the transient limits specified herein, when
an overload or malfunction occurs within the UPSS, or for bypassing the UPSS for
maintenance.
2. Uninterrupted Transfer
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
a.
3.
The transfer control logic shall automatically turn on the static transfer switch,
transferring the critical AC load to the bypass source, after the transfer logic senses any
of the following conditions:
1) Inverter overload capacity exceeded
2) Critical AC load overvoltage or undervoltage
3) Battery protection period expired
4) UPSS fault condition
b. The transfer control logic shall inhibit an automatic transfer of the critical load to the
bypass source if any of the following conditions are present:
1) Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits
2) Bypass frequency out of limits
3) Bypass out-of-synchronization range with inverter output
Uninterrupted Retransfer
a. Retransfer of the critical AC load from the bypass source to the inverter output shall be
automatically initiated unless inhibited by manual control. The transfer control logic
shall inhibit an automatic retransfer of the critical load to the inverter if one of the
following conditions exists:
1) Bypass out of synchronization range with inverter output
2) Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits
3) Overload condition exists in excess of inverter full load rating
4) UPSS fault condition present
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
E. Maintenance Bypass Switch

1. General
a. A manually operated maintenance bypass switch shall be incorporated into the UPSS
cabinet to directly connect the critical load to the bypass AC input power source,
bypassing the rectifier/charger, inverter, and static transfer switch.
2. Isolation
a. All energized terminals shall be shielded to ensure that maintenance personnel do not
inadvertently come in contact with energized parts or terminals. A means to de-energize
the static switch shall be provided when the UPSS is in the maintenance bypass mode
of operation.
3. Maintenance Capability
a. With the critical load powered from the maintenance bypass circuit, it shall be possible
to check out the operation of the rectifier/charger, inverter, battery, and static transfer
switch. When the application calls for the Maintenance Bypass Switch to be bolted to
the UPSS cabinet, the interconnecting cables are to be provided, precut and prelugged.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
F. Battery Power Pack

1. The battery power pack shall include sealed, lead-acid valve regulated battery cells housed
in a separate cabinet that matches the UPSS cabinet styling to form an integral system lineup. Battery cells shall be mounted on slide-out trays for ease of maintenance. A battery
disconnect circuit breaker shall be included for isolation of the battery pack from the UPSS
module. The UPSS shall automatically be disconnected from the battery when the battery
reaches the minimum discharge voltage level. Casters and leveling feet shall also be
provided with the battery power pack cabinet for ease of installation. When the application
calls for the battery cabinet to be bolted to the UPSS cabinet, the interconnecting cables are
to be provided, precut and prelugged.
47
48
G. Accessories
1. External Maintenance Bypass
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
a.
2.
3.
2.6
A matching external maintenance bypass shall be provided to enable the UPSS module
to be completely isolated from the electrical system while the critical load is powered
through the external maintenance bypass line. This optional cabinet shall provide makebefore-break operation for transfers to and from the external maintenance bypass line
with a single rotary switch. The following components shall be standard: input and
output circuit breakers, single rotary switch with auxiliary contacts, inter-cabinet
wiring, casters, and leveling feet. Optional voltage matching transformers and isolation
transformers are to be offered. This matching cabinet shall bolt to the side of the UPSS
module with a barrier shield to separate the two cabinets. Only front access shall be
required for installation and service.
Relay Board
a. Five sets of isolated contacts shall be provided to indicate a change of status of the
UPSS. Contacts are provided for:
1) On UPSS
2) On Battery
3) Low Battery
4) On Bypass
5) Summary
Optional Battery Circuit Breaker
a. A battery circuit breaker shall be provided to isolate the battery from the UPSS. This
breaker shall be in a separate wall mounted NEMA 1 enclosure. The battery breaker
provides a manual disconnecting means, short circuit protection, and overcurrent
protection for the battery system. When opened, there shall be no battery voltage in the
UPSS enclosure. The UPSS shall be automatically disconnected from the battery when
the battery reaches the minimum discharge voltage level.
REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROL INTERFACE
27
28
29
30
A. General: All control and interconnection points from the equipment to the plant control and
monitoring system shall be brought to a separate connection box. No field connections shall be
made directly to the equipment control devices. Functions to be brought out shall be as described
in the Control Strategies in Section 1317 400
31
32
B. Discrete control or status functions shall be form C relays with contacts rated at 120 volts AC.
Analog signals shall be isolated from each other.
33
34
C. Equipment functions to be directly interfaced to the Plant Control and Monitoring System, shall
be designed for operation with an Ethernet Connection.
35
36
37
D. The equipment manufacturer shall factory enter the proper IP Address for such connection.
Upon request by the Contractor, the Owner/Engineer will provide the proper Internet Protocol
38
E. Refer to Section 1317405Instrumentation Input Output List for monitored parameters.
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
F. Communication
1. For remote monitoring, one of the following communication capabilities shall be provided:
a. One (1) integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port supporting SNMP protocol.
b. One (1) media protocol converter, interfacing the provided equipment to a 10/100BaseT
Ethernet port supporting SNMP protocol.
2. The media protocol converter shall meet the following criteria:
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
c.
d.
e.
2.7
6
7
8
SPARE PARTS
A. Provide the following spare parts:
1. 3 Control fuses of type used.
2. 3 Power fuses of type used.
9
10
11
12
The converter shall have LED status for serial, signals, power, and Ethernet.
The converter housing shall be UL 1604, Class 1 Div 2, DIN Rail mountable. The
Converter shall be Digi One IAP, or approved equal.
B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage, vacuum sealed, and clearly
identified on the exterior of package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description
and part number
2.8
FACTORY TESTING
13
14
15
A. The UPSS shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given
the manufacturers routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the
workability and reliable operation of the equipment.
16
17
B. Prior to factory testing, the manufacturer shall check to see that all selections and settings
required by the Power System Study Engineer have been performed.
18
19
C. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of
20
21
22
D. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as far
as practical, a mockup of simulated control signals and control devices shall be fed into the
boards to check for proper operation.
23
PART 3 - EXECUTION
24
3.1
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
of not less than 2 working days, with not less than two working days per UPSS. The
manufacturer's field Engineer shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor
in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly
and components contained therein.
3.2
32
33
34
35
INSTALLERS QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer shall be specialized in installing UPSSs with minimum 5 years documented
experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work
on this project.
3.3
EXAMINATION
36
37
B. Verify that the equipment is ready to install.
38
C. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer.
39
3.4
40
41
INSTALLATION
Drawings.
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
B. Install required safety labels.

3.5
4
5
3.6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Relays shall be set in the field by a qualified
representative of the manufacturer, retained by the Contractor, in accordance with settings
designated in a coordinated study of the system as required in Section 16105 Power System
Study. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and
Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment.
3.7
15
16
17
18
3.8
CLEANING
A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the UPSS. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete
spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean,
lint free rags. Do not use compressed air.
3.9
23
24
25
FIELD TESTING
A. The UPSSs manufacturers field Engineer shall perform all electrical field tests recommended
by the manufacturer, and make all control adjustments required for the individual application of
the drive.
19
20
21
22
FIELD ADJUSTING

26
27
28
29

30
B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification.
31
3.11 TRAINING
32
33
the UPSSs furnished under this Section.
34
35
B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one (1) eight hour
day.
36
37
38
39
40
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 13
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3

program shall include instructions on the assembly, protective devices, metering, and other
major components.
4
5
6
F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owners use.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16261 - 14
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16345
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
8
SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install assemblies of medium voltage metal-clad
switchgear together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as
1.2
RELATED WORK
10
11
12
D. Section 16121 Medium Voltage Cables
13
E. Section 16195 Power Metering and Protective Relays
14
F. Section 16196 Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices (SPDs)
15
1.3
SUBMITTALS
16
17
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 16000 and
18
19
20
21
B. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this
Specification but described in the related sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above.
22
23
24
25
26
C. The original equipment manufacturer shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all
wiring diagrams, in the manufacturers Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings
the ENGINEERs ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
D. Submit to the OWNER/ENGINEER, shop drawings and product data, for the following:
1. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for overcurrent protective trip devices on circuit
breakers and switches, relaying, meters, pilot lights, etc. The manufacturers name shall be
clearly visible on the each cut sheet submitted. List all options, trip adjustments and
accessories furnished specifically for this project. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which
items apply and/or those items that do not apply.
2. Provide control systems Engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing
3. Provide plan and elevation drawings of each controller or enclosure, with dimensions,
exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc..
165477
City of Dallas
16345 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
number.
b. Voltage
a. Voltage
Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations
15
E. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein.
16
F. Field Test Reports.
17
18
19
20
21
22
G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

d.
Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above.
23
1.4
Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
A. The medium voltage pad mounted switchgear and protection devices in this specification shall
be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless
otherwise noted):
1. ANSI C37.06-2000, Switchgear - AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a
Symmetrical Current Basis - Preferred Ratings and Related Required Capabilities
2. ANSI/IEEE C37.04 and C 37.06, Standard ratings and Preferred Ratings for Indoor AC
Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers used in Metal-Clad Switchgear
3. ANSI / IEEE C37.09, Standard Design and Production Testing
4. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2, Standard for Metal-Clad Switchgear
5. ANSI/IEEE C37.11, Requirements for Electrical Control for AC High Voltage Circuit
Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis or Total Current Basis
6. ANSI/IEEE C57.13, Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
7. ANSI / Z55.1, Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment
8. NEMA SG 2, High Voltage Fuses
9. NEMA SG 4, Alternating - Current High Voltage Circuit Breaker
10. NEMA SG 5, Power Switchgear Assemblies
11. International Electrochemical Commission (IEC)
12. IEC 56, High Voltage Alternating Current Current Circuit Breakers
42
43
44
45
C. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the
46
1.5
47
48
49
QUALITY ASSURANCE
period of ten years. When requested by the ENGINEER, an acceptable list of installations with
165477
City of Dallas
16345 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
not be used.
7
8
10
11
12
1.6
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two
be made available to the CONTRACTOR and OWNER.
20
21
22
23
D. Switchgear shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available, switchgear
24
25
26
27
28
E. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within
seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven
calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite at the
CONTRACTORs expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the
equipment.
29
30
31
space heaters, during jobsite storage and after the equipment is installed in permanent location,
until equipment is placed in service.
32
1.7
33
34
35
36
37
WARRANTY
workmanship for three years from date of Owners final acceptance. Within such period of
equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of
the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the OWNER.
38
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
39
2.1
40
41
42
43
MANUFACTURERS
A. Named Supplier
1. General Electric Co.
2. Siemens
3. Eaton
165477
City of Dallas
16345 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
4.
2
3
4
5
2.2
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Square D
RATINGS
A. The switchgear described in this specification shall be designed for operation on the voltage
systems as shown on the Drawings. Each circuit breaker shall have the following ratings:
1. Maximum Voltage
5KV
2. BIL Rated
60kV
3. Continuous Current
As shown
4. Short-Circuit Current, at Rated Maximum kV
31.5kA
5. Closing and Latching Capability
82kA Peak
6. Rated Interrupting Time
Five cycles
2.3
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
CONSTRUCTION
A. General
1. The switchgear described in this specification shall contain factory assembled and
operational tested circuit breakers and accessories and be self-supporting in a manner to be
installed on a level concrete pad.
2. Refer to Drawings for actual layout and location of equipment and components; current
ratings of devices, bus bars, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices,
components and assemblies; and other required details.
3. Nameplates
a. External
1) Furnish nameplates for each device as specified herein and as indicated on the
Drawings. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a white
background, attached with stainless steel screws. There shall be a master
nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order
number and general information. Cubicle nameplates shall be mounted on the
front face, on the rear panel and inside the assembly, visible when the rear panel is
removed.
b. Internal
1) Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays,
pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification,
corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams.
c. Special
1) Identification nameplates shall be white with black letters, caution nameplates
shall be yellow with black letters, and warning nameplates shall be red with white
letters.
4. Control Devices and Indicators
a. All operating control devices, indicators, and instruments shall be securely mounted on
the panel door. All controls and indicators shall be 30mm, corrosion resistant,
reinforced plastic, NEMA 4/4X/13. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run
indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall
be provided as specified herein and as required by the detailed mechanical and
electrical equipment requirements.
b. Indicator lamps shall be LED type. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, lens
color shall be green for OPEN, red for CLOSED, and amber for FAIL or ALARM. For
all control applications, except NEMA 7, indicator lamps shall incorporate a push-totest feature.
c. Mode selector switches (HAND-OFF-AUTO, LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE, etc) shall be as
shown on the Drawings. Units shall have the number of positions and contact
165477
City of Dallas
16345 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
d.
e.
f.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
arrangements, as required. Each switch shall have an extra dry contact for remote
monitoring.
Pushbuttons, shall be red for CLOSE and black for OPEN, with momentary or
maintained contacts as required by the Drawings.
Furnish nameplates for each device. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black
lettering on a white background, attached with stainless steel screws. Device mounted
nameplates are not acceptable.
The manufacturer shall not remove, reuse, alter, or replace original equipment
nameplates or equipment tags associated with equipment or components supplied by
the manufacturers suppliers and sub-suppliers.
B. Enclosures
1. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
2. Enclosures shall be freestanding, metal clad medium voltage switchgear assemblies,
consisting of dead front, completely metal enclosed vertical sections. In each unit, major
primary circuit parts (breaker, buses and transformers) shall be completely enclosed by
grounded metal barriers, including a front barrier as part of the circuit breaker. Two rear
covers shall be furnished for each vertical section for circuit isolation and ease of handling.
Refer to drawings for any size limitations.
3. The manufacturer shall provide minimum room dimensions and other guidelines related to
the performance of the switchgear.
4. Cubicles designated as future on the one line diagram shall be furnished with vertical bus,
multiple-ratio current transformers, metering and relaying as shown on the one line diagram.
The cubicle shall be equipped for a future breaker element.
5. All the space heaters within each assembly shall be controlled by one thermostat and
furnished with a single pole circuit breaker for supply disconnect. The entire circuit shall be
wired to an accessible terminal block provided for a single connection for the external
power source.
6. All metal work shall be free from burrs and sharp edges.
7. Each front and rear compartment door shall be provided with a formed steel hinged door
with hand operated door latches. Each door shall have provisions for padlocking. The
door(s) shall be provided with provisions for padlocking and a view window for observing
the circuit breaker position. The door(s) shall be capable of withstanding the effects of an
internal arcing fault as proven by successful testing per IEEE C37.20.7.
8. Interlock(s) shall be provided to prevent racking a circuit breaker into a compartment with
the door in the open position. This interlock may be manually circumvented for
maintenance purposes by a deliberate act on the part of the operator. This override shall
require a minimum of two separate and distinct operations, neither of which is considered to
be part of normal operations.
9. Interlock(s) shall be provided to prevent opening the compartment door unless the circuit
breaker is in the disconnected position and safety shutters are closed. This interlock may be
manually circumvented for maintenance purposes by a deliberate act on the part of the
operator. This override shall require a minimum of two separate and distinct operations,
neither of which is considered to be part of normal operations. This interlock shall reset
should the compartment door be closed following maintenance after circumvention.
10. Instrument compartments shall have doors that have been tested per IEEE C37.20.7.
11. The switchgear shall be capable of extension from either end at a future date without
modification to existing structural members.
12. The depth of the finished equipment shall be sufficient to allow for entrance, bending, and
termination of power cables. Individual units shall be provided for top or bottom entrance
as specified. A minimum of 33 inches of clearance between terminal pads and the cable
entrance shall be provided.
13. Switchgear shall be weatherproof construction of basic indoor equipment enclosed in a
weatherproof enclosure. Gasket all covers, provide filters for ventilation louvers and a
sloped roof. Rear covers shall be hinged doors with padlocking provisions.
165477
City of Dallas
16345 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
14. A three-inch box frame shall be provided under each vertical section with the equipment
painted for outdoor service.
15. A 300-watt heating element, thermostat controlled, shall be located in each breaker or
auxiliary compartment. Heaters shall be applied at half-voltage for extended life and shall
be protected by perforated metal guards to prevent inadvertent contact with the heater
element. The heater shall guard against condensation caused by wide ambient temperature
excursions.
16. Provide a duplex grounding outlet, rated 120 volts ac, 20 amperes, mounted and wired
inside the switchgear weatherproof enclosure.
17. Provide an Infrared (IR) port suitably constructed, located, and sized to allow viewing the
overcurrent protective devices, cable terminations, busses, and bus supports.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
C. Finish
1. All steel structure members shall be cleaned, rinsed, and phosphatized prior to painting.
2. The switchgear shall be painted with an electrostatically applied polyester powder with final
baked on average thickness between 1.5 and 2.0 mils and meet ANSI requirements for
indoor equipment.
3. All exterior surfaces of the switchgear assembly shall be given final finish coats of ANSI 61
gray as standard.
4. Finish shall have a minimum pencil hardness of 2H as tested per ASTM D3363 and shall
pass the SATM B117 Salt spray test for a minimum of 500 hours.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
D. Busses and Bus Supports

1. Busses shall be insulated tin plated copper and rated as shown on the Drawings. Bus bars
shall have a continuous current rating, as shown on the Drawings, based on temperature rise
and documented by design tests. All joints shall be tin plated with at least two bolts per
joint. The switchgear shall be constructed so that all buses, bus supports and connections
shall withstand stresses that would be produced by currents equal to the momentary ratings
of the circuit breakers. Buses shall have provisions for future extension. All bus joints shall
be plated, bolted and insulated with easily installed boots. The bus shall be braced to
withstand fault currents equal to the close and latch rating of the breakers.
31
32
33
34
35
E. Ground Bus
1. A tin plated ground bus (1/4 by 2 inch copper) shall extend throughout assembly with
connections to each breaker grounding contact and cable compartment ground terminal.
Joints shall be made up as indicated in drawings. Station ground connection points shall be
located in each end section.
36
37
38
39
F. External Wiring Connections

1. Preparation for the incoming and outgoing cables, to be connected to the switchgear, the
lugs, terminators, etc., shall be in accordance with Section 16120 for 600 Volt cables and
Section 16121 for medium and high voltage cables.
40
41
42
G. Lightning Arrestors and Surge Capacitors

1. Where shown on the Drawings, station class lightning arrestors and surge capacitors shall be
provided in the incoming sections.
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
H. Wiring/Terminations
1. The switchgear manufacturer shall provide suitable terminal blocks for secondary wire
terminations and a minimum of 10% spare terminal connections shall be provided. One
control circuit cutout device shall be provided in each circuit breaker housing. Switchgear
secondary control wire shall be (minimum) #14 AWG (#12 for CT circuits) type SIS, 41
strand extra flexible, stranded copper or larger rated 600 volt, 90 degrees C, furnished with
wire markers at each termination. All control wiring shall be UL listed and have a VW-1
flame retardant rating. Wires shall terminate on terminal blocks with marker strips
numbered in agreement with detailed connection diagrams.
165477
City of Dallas
16345 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2.
3.
4.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
I.
165477
Exposed wiring shall be suitably protected against contact with sharp edges. Throughout
the assembly it shall be neatly bundled and secured with nylon wire ties. Where control
wiring passes from cubicle to door, it shall be wrapped with suitable protection to prevent
damage. Holes, cut to allow control wires to pass from cubicle to cubicle, shall have a
grommet for protection.
Each control wire shall be marked at both terminations to agree with wiring diagrams.
Plastic wire markers of either the slip on or heat shrink variety shall be provided.
4. Incoming line and feeder cable lugs of the type and size indicated elsewhere shall be
furnished.
Circuit Breakers
1. The circuit breakers shall be horizontal draw out type, capable of being withdrawn on rails.
The breakers shall be operated by a motor-charged stored energy spring mechanism,
charged normally by a universal electric motor and in an emergency by a manual handle.
The primary disconnecting contacts shall be silver-plated copper.
2. Each circuit breaker shall contain three vacuum interrupters separately mounted in a selfcontained, self-aligning pole unit, which can be removed easily. The vacuum interrupter
pole unit shall be mounted on glass polyester supports for 5 kV class. Provision shall be
made for checking contact wear gap on each vacuum interrupter, visible when the breaker is
removed from its compartment. The current transfer from the vacuum interrupter moving
stem to the breaker main conductor shall be a non-sliding design. The breaker front panel
shall be removable when the breaker is withdrawn for ease of inspection and maintenance.
3. Circuit breaker compartments shall be designed to house removable-element circuit
breakers. Stationary primary disconnect contacts shall be silver-plated copper. Grounded
metal safety shutters shall isolate all primary connections in compartment when breaker is
withdrawn from connected position.
4. Circuit breakers shall be rated as indicated in drawings. Circuit breakers of equal rating shall
be interchangeable. Circuit breakers shall be operated by an electrically charged,
mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy spring. A handle shall be used to
manually charge the spring for slow closing of contacts for inspection or adjustment.
5. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with secondary disconnecting contacts which shall
automatically engage in the connected position.
6. Each breaker compartment with breaker shall be designed to permit remote racking of the
breaker between the connected and disconnected positions. The compartment design shall
permit a control box to be connected to the operator with a minimum thirty-foot foot cable,
permitting control from a remote location. The operator attachment method shall provide for
racking of the breaker when the compartment door is fully closed. The remote racking
operator shall be portable with a 120 VAC power cord. It shall not be possible to install the
remote racking operator when the breaker is closed and the breaker cannot be closed with
the remote racking operator in place.
7. An indicator shall show breaker position when racking breakers in or out of their connected
positions
8. Interlocks shall prevent moving breaker to or from operating position unless main contacts
are open. Operating springs shall be discharged automatically when breaker is rolled fully
into connected or disconnected position. Rackout device shall have provisions to padlock in
connected or disconnected position. When locked in disconnected position, breaker shall be
removable from compartment using portable lifting device. Padlock shall not interfere with
breaker operation.
9. Automatic shutters shall cover primary disconnect stabs when breaker is withdrawn to
test/disconnect position. Shutters shall be positively driven by linkages connected to racking
mechanism. A stationary barrier shall be located in front of the shutters for additional safety.
10. Breaker control voltage shall be 120 VAC. Breaker tripping power shall be provided from a
120V A-C capacitor trip unit Control power source shall be from the CPT source as
specified herein.
City of Dallas
16345 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
J.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
K. Control Power Transformers

1. Control power transformers shall be as shown on the Drawings. Transformer mechanical
ratings shall equal the BIL and momentary rating of the circuit breakers. Transformers,
when mounted in switchgear assemblies, shall be rated for the full voltage of the switchgear.
2. All control power transformers shall have vacuum cast primary and secondary coils using
epoxy resin. Voltage and control power transformers of the quantity and ratings indicated.
Voltage transformers shall be mounted in drawout drawers contained in an enclosed
auxiliary compartment. The voltage transformer primary connections shall utilize epoxy
insulated bus bar. Rails shall be provided for each drawer to permit easy inspection, testing
and fuse replacement. Shutters shall isolate primary bus stabs when drawers are withdrawn.
A mechanical interlock shall be provided to require the secondary breaker to be open before
the CPT drawer or CPT primary fuse drawer can be withdrawn.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
L. Current Transformers
1. Current transformers shall be furnished as indicated on the contract drawings. The thermal
and mechanical ratings of the current transformers shall be coordinated with the circuit
breakers. Their accuracy rating shall be equal to or higher than ANSI standard requirements.
The standard location for the current transformers on the bus side and line side of the
breaker units shall be front accessible to permit adding or changing current transformers
without removing high-voltage insulation connections. Shorting terminal blocks shall be
furnished on the secondary of all the current transformers.
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
M. Instrument Transformers
1. All instrument transformers shall be vacuum cast using polyurethane resin.
2. Transformers shall be as shown on the Drawings. Transformer mechanical ratings shall
equal the BIL and momentary rating of the circuit breakers. Transformers, when mounted in
switchgear assemblies, shall be rated for the full voltage of the switchgear.
3. For rigidity during fault conditions all connections to roll-out potential transformer trays and
control power transformer trays shall be rigid bus bars insulated to full voltage rating of
switchgear assembly.
4. Voltage transformers shall be draw out type, with current-limiting fuses and with BIL rating
equal to the switchgear. Transformers shall be as shown on the Drawings.
165477
Circuit Breaker Control and Interlocking Functions

1. Control
a. Loss of normal service voltage as determined by the protective relaying on a main
circuit breaker shall not cause that circuit breaker to trip open.
b. Close and trip circuits shall be separately fused. Fuse blocks shall be dead front, pullout type.
c. Each breaker shall be complete with control switch and red and green indicating lights
to indicate breaker contact position.
d. Each breaker shall have a minimum of 4 normally open and 4 normally closed spare
auxiliary contacts wired to accessible terminal blocks.
2. Interlocking Functions
a. Key Interlock
1) Where a main bus tie breaker is shown, the main bus tie breaker cannot be closed
unless one of the main breakers is open. It shall not be possible to close both main
circuit breakers with the main bus tie breaker closed. The key-interlock (two keys
for three breakers) shall be provided.
2) Where Kirk-Key arrangements are used, the Kirk keyed interlocks shall be Kirk
HD Series (Heavy Duty) 316 Series of 316 stainless steel.
City of Dallas
16345 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5.
2.4
Secondary control wiring shall be No. 14, extra flexible, stranded, bare copper control wire,
Type SIS cross-linked polyethylene, rated 600 volts, except for specific circuits requiring
larger wire. Crimp-type, uninsulated spade terminals shall be furnished on all wire ends,
except where non-insulated ring terminals are used to connect to fuse blocks, and instrument
transformer studs. Secondary control wires shall be armored where they pass through
primary compartments.
FEEDER PROTECTION SYSTEM - MAIN BREAKERS AND FEEDER BREAKERS
8
9
10
A. Furnish where shown on the Drawings, a Feeder Protection System, for feeder monitoring and
protection, for each Main and Feeder Breaker as shown on the Drawings, and as specified in
Section 16195 Power Metering and Protective Relays.
11
12
B. Current and potential test blocks and plugs shall be provided for all metering and protection
circuits.
13
14
15
C. A 100VA minimum UPS shall be provided, powered from the control power transformer to
provide control power to the feeder management relays and power quality meters. Battery shall
be sized to supply rated load for 10 minutes.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
D. Where Type 86 relays are specified or shown on the Drawings, the relay shall be a door
mounted, high speed multicontact relay for trip and/or block close breaker control and contact
multiplication. Contacts shall be electrically separate. Relay shall be electrical trip and manually
reset. A black target shall indicate the Reset position and an orange target the Tripped position.
Where the relay is shown as an output of a Main or Feeder Breaker Protective System, the Type
86 Relay functions may be incorporated into the associated Breaker Protective System, if the
Protective System can provide all of the relay functions and capabilities specified above.
23
2.5
SPARE PARTS
24
25
26
27

1. 1 Complete breaker assembly for each type and size of breaker.
2. 3 Control fuses of each type used
3. 1 - quart of touch-up paint.
28
29
B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage and clearly identified on the
exterior of package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part number
30
2.6
FACTORY TESTING
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the circuit breaker element provided
under this Section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI standards.
1. Alignment test with master cell to verify all interfaces and interchangeability
2. Circuit breakers operated over the range of minimum to maximum control voltage
3. Factory setting of contact gap
4. One-minute dielectric test per ANSI standards
5. Final inspections and quality checks
38
39
40
41
42
B. The following production test shall be performed on each breaker housing:

1. Alignment test with master breaker to verify interfaces
2. One-minute dielectric test per ANSI standards on primary and secondary circuits
3. Operation of wiring, relays and other devices verified by an operational sequence test
4. Final inspection and quality check.
43
2.7
WITNESS TESTING
44
45
A. The Owner/Engineer will witness the Factory Tests for the switchgear provided under this
specification.
46
B. The number of Owner/Engineer persons witnessing the tests will be three persons.
165477
City of Dallas
16345 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
I.
30
2.8
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

reimbursement.
FACTORY TEST REPORTS

A. Following completion of factory tests, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the
OWNER/ENGINEER, for review and approval, four certified copies of all test data required by
the Specifications. The OWNER/ENGINEER will promptly review test data and, upon
determining that the equipment meets contract requirements, authorization will be given for
jobsite delivery. Incomplete equipment or equipment failing factory tests will not be accepted at
the jobsite. Only Jobsite delivery shall not be made, without written approval of test data by the
OWNER/ENGINEER, except at the risk of the Vendor.
38
PART 3 - EXECUTION
39
3.1
40
41
42
43
44
A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's field representative to assist the
CONTRACTOR in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this Section for a
period of not less than ten working days. The manufacturer's representative shall provide
technical direction and assistance to the CONTRACTOR in general assembly of the equipment,
connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein.
45
B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report.
165477
City of Dallas
16345 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.2
2
3
4
A. Installer shall be specialized in installing medium voltage metal clad switchgear with minimum
five years documented experience.
3.3
EXAMINATION
A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the switchgear.
B. Verify that medium voltage metal clad switchgear is ready to install.
3.4
INSTALLATION
9
10
A. The CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and
Contract Drawings.
11
12
B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for applying tape insulation to each cable termination at
each breaker section
13
C. Installed required safety labels.
14
3.5
15
A. Inspect installed switchgear for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage.
16
17
18
3.6
FIELD ADJUSTING
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
representative of the manufacturer, retained by the CONTRACTOR, in accordance with settings
Approved by the OWNER/ENGINEER, prior to energizing of the equipment.
26
3.7
FIELD TESTING
27
28
29
A. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance of each bus section.
Megger for 1 minute for each measurement at minimum voltage of 5000 VDC. Measured
Insulation resistance shall be at least 1000 megohms.
30
B. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning.
31
3.8
32
33
34
CLEANING
A. Clean interiors of switchgear, switchboards, panels, separate enclosures to remove construction
debris, dirt, shipping materials.
3.9
35
36

165477
City of Dallas
16345 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2
3
4
5

6
7
B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's

certification.
3.11 TRAINING
9
10
11
B. The training shall be for a period of not less than one eight hour day.
12
13
14
C. The cost of training program to be conducted with OWNER's personnel shall be included in the
15
16
17
18
19

program shall include instructions on the assembly, circuit breaker, protective devices, metering,
and other major components.
20
21
22
23
24
F. The OWNER shall have the right to record a videotape of the training for the OWNERs
instructional use.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16345 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16346
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
5
6
7
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install assemblies of medium voltage sealed outdoor deadfront
distribution switchgear, together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein
and as shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. The outdoor switchgear shall be with stainless steel tank with SF6 gas.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
10
11
12
13
14
B. Submittals for equipment and materials, furnished under this Section of the Specifications, will
not be accepted prior to approval of the Power System Study specified under Section 16105.
Submittals made prior to such approval will be returned unreviewed.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
D. The original equipment manufacturer (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings,
shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers, and
shall be maintained on file in the OEMs archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineers
ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
E. Shop Drawings and Product Data. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:
3. Floor plan
4. Top view
5. Single line
number.
a. Shirt-circuit rating
b. Voltage
d. Basic impulse level for equipment over 600 volts
a. Voltage
165477
City of Dallas
16346 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
F. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein, including witnessed
tests.
4
5
6
7
8
9

10
1.3
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

otherwise noted):
1. ANSI C57.12.28, Pad-Mounted Equipment --- Enclosure Integrity
2. IEEE/ANSI C37.71, C37.72, C37.73 Standard for Three Phase Manually Operated
Subsurface Load Interrupting Switches.
3. ANSI/IEEE Std. 386, Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution
Systems Above 600 Volts.
4. ASTM D-2472 Specification for Sulfur Hexafluoride, SF6.
5. IEC 298 Arc Resistant Switchgear
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
22
23
24
25
minimum period of five years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of
requirement.
26
27
28
29
C. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does
30
D. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified.
31
1.5
32
33
34
A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two
35
36
B. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be
37
38
C. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available, equipment
39
40
41
42
43
D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within
thirty (30) calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within thirty
(30) calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the
equipment.
44
45
46
E. Where space heaters are provided in the equipment, provide temporary electrical power and
operate space heaters, during jobsite storage and after the equipment is installed in permanent
location, until equipment is placed in service.
165477
City of Dallas
16346 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.6
2
3
4
5
6
WARRANTY
workmanship for 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. Within such period of warranty
the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment
to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the
equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
9
10
11
12
acceptable:
1. S & C Electric
2. No approved equal
13
14
15
16
2.2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
RATINGS
A. The ratings for the integrated pad-mounted gear shall be as designated below per ANSI
Standard. S&C Model #211
1. General
a. kV, Max.
15.5
b. Impulse Level (BIL), kV
95
c. Frequency, Hz
60
d. Short Circuit Rating, kA RMS Sym.
40
e. Main Bus, Continuous Amps.
600
f. Number of Ways
Two Ways
2. Three Pole Load Interrupter Switches
a. Continuous Amperes
600A Ways 1, 2 with VFI
b. Load Dropping Amps.
Same as continuous.
c. kV, Max.
15.5
d. Basic Impulse Level (KV)
95
e. Short Circuit Interrupting rating, Sym (kA)
40
f. Continuous and Load Break, Amps
Same as switch continuous rating
g. Fault-Close Current, Sym (kA)
3 times duty cycle
40
10 times duty cycle
16
Momentary and One Second Current
Sym (kA) 25
3. Three Pole Vacuum Fault Interrupters
a. Continuous Current (A)
600
b. Load Dropping current.
Same as continuous current
c. kV, Max.
15.5
d. Impulse level (BIL)
95
e. Symmetrical interrupting rating (kA)
40
Fault Closing Current, Sym. (kA)
(10 times duty cycle) 25
Fault Interrupting, Sym (kA)
(10 times duty cycle) 25
2.3
46
CONSTRUCTION
A. General
165477
City of Dallas
16346 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
1.
2.
Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components; current
Switchgear units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B. Enclosures
1. All enclosures shall be made of 304 stainless steel, single welded, sized as shown on the
Drawings, and manufactured to ANSI C37.72 and C57.12.28 standards.
2. Enclosures for switch tanks shall be mounted independent of the switch tank allowing
removal for ease of cable installation or future replacement, if required. All doors for
enclosures shall have tamper-resistant incorporating hinged access doors with penta-head
locking bolts and provisions for padlocking. The enclosure shall be provided with lifting
provisions and painted with a Munsell 7.0GY3.29/1.5 green finish.
3. Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated in drawings. All nameplates shall be
engraved stainless steel, attached with stainless steel screws. There shall be a master
nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and
general information.
overcurrent protective device terminations, cable terminations, busses, and bus supports.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
C. Switch Tanks (SF6)

1. Switch tanks shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel; single welded, sized for the switch
arrangement as shown on the Drawings, and manufactured to ANSI C37.72 and C57.12.28
standards. Construction shall be dead front. Switches shall be shipped filled with SF6 gas
conforming to ASTM D-2472. Switch tanks shall be made with manual operating
mechanisms and viewing windows.
2. Each tank shall contain the following:
a. Welded stainless steel tank with stainless steel fasteners.
b. Lifting provisions.
c. Door lifting handles.
d. Gas pressure gauge and fill valve.
e. Internal ground bus.
f. Deadbreak bushing for each cable, as shown on the Drawings.
g. Stainless steel three-line diagram and corrosion-resistant nameplates
h. Switch operating handles with padlock provision and end stops.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
D. Load Interrupter Switches

1. Switch Configuration. All switches shall be front access design; as indicated on the one-line
diagram.
2. Switch contacts and cable entrances shall be contained in a single welded, 304 stainless steel
tank as specified above.
3. Three phase, group operated load interrupter switches shall be manually operated.
a. Each switching way shall be equipped with an internally mounted operating
mechanism capable of providing quick-make, quick-break operation in either switching
direction. All switch positions shall be clearly identified, pad lockable, and adaptable to
key lock schemes.
b. Each switch where shown on the drawing, shall be provided with an integral ground
position that is readily visible through the viewing window. The switch handle shall be
capable of being padlocked to prevent inadvertent movement into the ground position.
Grounding position shall be blocked on source switches.
c. The open gaps of the switch shall be sized to allow cable testing through a feedthru
bushing or the back of the elbow, without disconnecting the cable.
165477
City of Dallas
16346 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4.
5.
Provide all required instrument transformers, and over current protection device 50/51 for
all VFI devices. Provide a SC-1000 protection package or equal for each Vista switchgear.
The contractor shall obtain the services of factory trained protective device calibration and
setting technician. All settings shall be as per the power system study as specified in Section
16105. Refer to the interconnect drawing provided to include additional components and
wiring as required.
Kirk Key Interlocks. Provide Kirk Key interlocks between switchgear lineups, or between a
switchgear lineup and other switchgear, where multiple sources of power are present, to
prevent paralleling sources of power, as shown on the Drawings.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
E. Fault Interrupters
1. Design Ratings and Standards
a. The fault interrupter shall be a non-reclosing, manual reset device incorporating
vacuum bottles. It shall be designed, tested, and built per applicable sections of ANSI
C37.72-1987. The vacuum interrupter assembly shall be rated as specified in this
Section.
b. Each vacuum interrupter shall have a load interrupter switch, as specified herein,
connected in series and operated via the same handle.
c. The fault interrupter, including the associated load-break switch, shall be a single
integrated design so that operation between the closed and open positions or the open
and grounded positions is accomplished with a single movement.
2. Operating Mechanisms
a. Load-interrupter switches and fault interrupters shall be operated by means of a quickmake, quick-break mechanism.
b. The manual handle shall charge the operating mechanism for closing, opening, and
grounding of the switches and fault interrupters.
c. A single, integrated operating mechanism shall fully operate each fault interrupter or
load interrupter switch in a continuous movement, so that additional operations are not
required to establish open or grounded positions.
d. Operating mechanisms shall be equipped with an operation selector to prevent
inadvertent operation from the closed position directly to the grounded position, or
from the grounded position directly to the closed position. The operation selector shall
require physical movement to the proper position to permit the next operation.
e. Operating shafts shall be padlockable in any position to prevent operation.
f. The operation selector shall be padlockable to prevent operation to the grounded
position.
g. The operating mechanism shall indicate switch position which shall be clearly visible
from the normal operating position.
3. Overcurrent Control
a. External trip provisions shall be provided to allow three-pole tripping of fault
interrupters via a trip signal from the Multilin 750 relay located in the switchgear or
from a remote location.
b. In lieu of standard overcurrent control, a Multilin 750 relay (FP1) shall be provided as
detailed in Power Metering and Protection Relay specification 16195.
c. All necessary current transformers and potential transformers shall be provided in the
switchgear
d. Control power for the relays shall be from the 36VDC battery packs.
e. The internal battery pack shall also supply 36V dc control power to the TP1
transformer protection relay located in the transformer control cabinet and as detailed
in specification 16195.
50
51
52
53
F. High-Voltage Bus
1. Bus and interconnections shall consist of copper bus bar, sized as shown on the Drawings.
2. Bus and interconnections shall withstand the stresses associated with short-circuit currents
up through the maximum rating of the pad-mounted switchgear.
165477
City of Dallas
16346 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
G. Ground-Connection Pads
1. A ground-connection pad shall be provided in each compartment of the pad-mounted gear.
2. The ground-connection pad shall be constructed of 3/8" thick steel, which shall be nickel
plated and welded to the enclosure, and shall have a short-circuit rating equal to that of the
integrated assembly.
3. Ground-connection pads shall be coated with a uniform coating of an oxide inhibitor and
sealant prior to shipment.
8
9
10
H. Viewing Windows
1. Each switch and vacuum interrupter shall be provided with a viewing window sufficient in
size to allow visual verification of the switch blade position.
11
12
13
I.
14
2.4
Internal control power shall include battery charger and battery packs. A voltage transformer is
to be mounted inside the Vista UDS tank and supplies control power to the battery charger and
battery packs.
REMOTE TRIP AND STATUS
15
16
A. Provide 3 sets of form C dry contacts from each Vista switchgear for each way for status
(switch position) output.
17
B. Provide input for remote VFI tripping for all positions equipped with vacuum fault interrupter.
18
2.5
19
20
21
22
23
FACTORY TESTS
A. The manufacturer shall perform tests which confirm that the switch meets applicable ANSI and
NEMA Standards. The tests shall verify not only the performance of the switch and interrupter
assembly, but also the suitability of the enclosure venting, rigidity and bus bracing. Certified test
results from switches of the same design shall be provided.
2.6
WITNESS TESTING
24
25
A. In addition to factory tests, as specified above, the Owner/Engineer will witness the factory tests
for all equipment.
26
27
28
29
30
31
for the re-test shall be borne by the Manufacturer or Vendor.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
I.
165477

reimbursement.
City of Dallas
16346 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
2.
3.
4.
The Contractor shall provide, and pay for, all air travel fare, including ground shuttle or taxi,
States shall be nonstop if available, Coach Class or better, from DFW Airport.
Ground transportation at any destination shall be provided by the host Original Equipment
The Contractor shall provide for hotel, meals, travel and incidentals to be paid for by the
12
PART 3 - EXECUTION
13
3.1
14
15
16
17
18
A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's Engineer to assist the

Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this Section for a period
of not less than seven [7] working days. The manufacturer's Engineer shall provide technical
direction and assistance to the contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and
adjustments, and shall perform all testing of the assembly and components contained therein.
19
B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report.
20
3.2
21
A. Installer's Certificate of ISO 9001 2000 Compliance.
22
23
B. Installer shall be specialized in installing medium voltage pad-mount switchgear with minimum
5 years documented experience.
24
3.3
EXAMINATION
25
A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the switchgear.
26
B. Check concrete pads for uniformity and level surface.
27
C. Verify that switchgear is ready to install.
28
D. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer.
29
3.4
INSTALLATION
30
31
Drawings.
32
33
34
B. The switches shall be mounted outdoors on a concrete pad. Cable entrance shall be through the
bottom of the switchgear. The contractor shall coordinate the required locations of the line side
and load side stub-outs.
35
C. Bond all conduits to the switchgear housing using grounding bushings.
36
D. Installed required safety labels.
37
3.5
38
A. Inspect installed switchgear for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage.
39
40
165477
City of Dallas
16346 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.6
FIELD ADJUSTING
2
3
A. Adjust all switches, access doors and operating handles for free mechanical and electrical
operation as described in manufacturer's instructions.
4
5
6
B. The monitoring and protective relays shall be set in the field by the manufacturers field
Engineer, retained by the Contractor, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated
study of the system as required in Section 16105 Power System Study.
C. The manufacturer shall provide curves, etc., as may be required for the Power System Study.
D. Return odd Kirk keys to the Owner before energizing equipment.
3.7
FIELD TESTING
10
A. All field testing shall be performed by the manufacturers field Engineer.
11
12
13
B. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance of each bus section.
14
C. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning.
15
3.8
16
17
18
A. Clean interiors of switchgear, switchboards, panels, separate enclosures to remove construction

debris, dirt, shipping materials.
3.9
19
20
21
CLEANING

22
23
24
A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that the

equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
25
26
3.11 TRAINING
27
28
29
B. The training shall be for a period of not less than one (1) eight hour day.
30
31
32
the equipment being supplied.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41

END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16346 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16430
3
4
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
A. The Contractor shall provide the primary substation transformer, complete and operable, as
specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.
7
8
9
10
11
B. The manufacturer of the primary substation transformer, as approved from the list of
manufacturers listed in Part 2.01 of this Specification, shall furnish composite drawings,
factory designed into sections of primary termination, transformer with appurtenances, and
secondary termination, with each section assembled onsite into a fully operational primary
substation.
12
13
C. Furnish and install medium voltage neutral grounding resistor on the cover of the transformers
as detailed in specification 16661
14
15
D. Install all CTs, PTs, relays, auxiliary relays and, shorting terminal blocks for a complete
operating system
16
E. The transformer shall be UL listed and filled with a FM approved FR-3 fluid.
17
1.02 RELATED WORK
18
19
20
21
D. Section 16120 Wires and Cables (600 Volt Maximum)
22
E. Section 16121 Medium Voltage Cables
23
1.03 SUBMITTALS
24
25
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 16000
26
27
28
29

existing and proposed breakers and/or fuses submitted, such that protective device
coordination is accomplished. Such curves and settings shall be included as a part of these
submittals.
30
31
32
33
34
35
C. The original equipment manufacturer (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings,
shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers,
and shall be maintained on file in the OEMs archive file system. All shop drawing shall be
submitted as one complete package. Partial submittals will not be accepted for review, and
36
37
38
39
D. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this
Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will
also be returned unreviewed.
165477
City of Dallas
16430 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
E. Shop Drawings and Product Data. The following information shall be submitted for approval.
All drawings, plans, elevations, schematics, etc. shall show the transformer as an integrated
package. Submittals of individual components only will not be acceptable:
1.
Master drawing index
2.
Front view elevation, outline drawing and weight.
3.
Floor plan with recommended pad dimensions
4.
Top view
5.
Single line diagram
6.
Schematics
10
7.
Diagrammatic nameplate-corrosion resistant.
11
8.
12
13
9.
Component list with detailed component information, including original

manufacturers part number.
14
15
11. Ratings including:
16
a.
KVA
17
b.
Primary & Secondary Voltage
18
c.
TAPS
19
d.
Basic impulse level (BIL)
20
e.
Primary & Secondary continuous current
21
f.
Impedance
22
g.
Insulation class and temperature rise
23
h.
Sound level
24
25
26
27
14. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal
sizes.
28
15. Seismic Certification
29
F. The following submittals for construction shall be submitted for record purposes.
30
1.
Descriptive bulletins
31
2.
Product data sheets.
32
3.
Cable terminal sizes.
33
4.
Certified factory test reports as specified herein.:
34
5.
Final as built drawings
35
6.
Installation Information
36
7.
Seismic Certification
37
165477
City of Dallas
16430 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.
Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information:
3
4
5
a.
Manufacturers contact address and telephone number for parts and

service.
b.
Instruction books and/or leaflets
c.
Recommended renewal parts list
8
9
d.
Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals

paragraph above.
10
11
12
e.
Project record drawings clearly indicating operating features and

including as- built shop drawings, outline drawings, schematics, and
wiring diagrams.
13
f.
Volume of cooling fluid.
14
15
16
H. The manufacturer shall submit for approval, a training agenda for all training specified herein.
Manual.
17
I.
18
Provide submittals for the medium voltage neutral grounding resistor per specification16661.
1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
19
20
21
22
23
24
A. All equipment furnished under this Specification shall be designed and manufactured
according to the latest revision of the following standards, unless otherwise noted. All work
specified herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the National
Electrical Code (NEC); provided, that where a local code or ordinance is in conflict with the
NEC, the provisions of said local code or ordinance shall take precedence. For additional
requirements, see Section 16000 Electrical General Provisions.
25
26
27
28
C. The power transformers in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to
the latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted).
29
30
1.
C57.12.00 ANSI/IEEE Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed

Distribution, Power and Regulating Transformers.
31
32
33
34
2.
C57.12.10 Safety Requirements 230 kV and Below 833/958 through 8333/10417

kVA, Single-Phase, and 750/862 through 60000/80000/100000kVA, Three-Phase
Without Load Tap Changing; and 3750/4687 Through 60000/80000/100000 kVA
with Load Tap Changing.
35
36
3.
C57.12.70 American National Standard Terminal Markings and Connections for

Distribution and Power Transformers.
37
4.
C57.12.80 IEEE Standard Terminology for Power and Distribution Transformers.
38
39
40
5.
C57.12.90 IEEE Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and
Regulating Transformers and IEEE Guide for Short-Circuit Testing of Distribution
and Power Transformers.
41
42
6.
C57.92 Guide for Loading FR3-Oil-Immersed Power Transformers Up to and

including 100 MVA with 65C or 55C Average Winding Rise.
43
7.
C57.98 Impulse Tests, Guide for Transformer (Appendix to ANSI/IEEE C57.12.90)
165477
City of Dallas
16430 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
8.
ASTM D877 Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids
Using Disk Electrodes.
9.
ANSI Z55.1 Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
5
6
7
8
9
10
B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within
the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is
manufactured by a third party and brand labeled shall not be acceptable.
11
12
13
production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation
shall not be used.
14
15
D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which
does not fit within the space is not acceptable.
16
17
18
F. Transformers manufactured more than 24 months prior to the date of this contract will not be
acceptable.
19
1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
20
21
22
23
requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an
equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted.,
24
25
26
(2) copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment, and
shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner.
27
28
bolted to skids.
29
30
31
D. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available,
equipment shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower the
groups.
32
33
34
35
E. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent, finished location shown on the Drawings within
14 calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within 14 calendar
days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the Contractors
expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment.
36
37
38
F. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and
operate space heaters during jobsite storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent
39
1.07 WARRANTY
165477
City of Dallas
16430 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such
Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable:
10
11
2. Square D
12
3. Cooper Power Systems
13
4. Virginia Transformers
14
15
16
17
B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not
meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved
2.02
18
RATINGS
A. The rating of the transformer shall be as follows or as shown on the drawings:
19
1.
kVA Rating:
Rating 55 C/65 C KNAN, 10,000/11,200kVA (KNAN)
20
2.
Impedance:
5.75% (ANSI Standard Tolerance )
21
3.
HV:
13.2kV Delta
22
4.
HV BIL:
110kV BIL for 15kV
23
5.
HV De-energized Taps:
+/- 2 2 % full capacity (FCBN and FCAN)
24
6.
LV:
4160 Volts Wye
25
7.
LV BIL:
75kV BIL for 5 KV
26
8.
Temperature Rating:
55C/65C
27
9.
Audible Sound:
68db (KNAN)
28
10. Cooling System:
29
2.03
30
EPA approved and FM approved FR-3 fluid
CONSTRUCTION
A. General
31
32
33
1.
The transformers described in this specification shall contain factory assembled and
operational tested, devices and accessories, and be self-supporting in a manner to be
34
35
36
2.
Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components;
current ratings of devices, bus bars, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of
devices, components and assemblies; and other required details.
37
3.
Nameplates
38
a.
165477
External
City of Dallas
16430 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1) Furnish nameplates for each device as specified herein and as

indicated on the Drawings. All nameplates shall be laminated
plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached with
stainless steel screws. There shall be a master diagrammatic
nameplate that shows kVA rating, operation temperature, power
circuit diagrams, and other data specified in ANSI standards. The
nameplate shall be anodized aluminum leaser engraved.
b.
Internal
9
10
11
12
1) Control components mounted within the assembly, such as

terminal blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be
suitably marked for identification, corresponding to appropriate
designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams.
13
c.
Special
14
15
16
1) Identification nameplates shall be white with black letters, caution

nameplates shall be yellow with black letters, and warning
nameplates shall be red with white letters.
17
B. Finish
18
19
20
1.
2.04
Substation shall be finished to manufacturer's standard except that finish color shall
be ANSI 61 gray, and thickness of finish system shall be 5 mils, minimum.
PRIMARY (INCOMING / LINE) SECTION
21
22
23
24
A. The transformer shall have an integrally mounted full height air-filled primary terminal
compartment with compression type terminals. Refer to the drawings for specific wire and
size. The terminals shall be radial feed. Access to the air terminal compartment shall be
through hinged doors on each side of the enclosure.
25
B. Busses
26
1.
Ground Bus
27
28
29
30
31
a.
A tin plated copper ground bus (1/4 by 2 inch copper) shall extend
throughout assembly with connections to each grounding contact and
cable compartment ground terminal. Station ground connection points
shall be located in each end section. Ground bus shall have sufficient
space and provisions for grounding all cables as shown on the Drawings.
32
C. Furnish one set of three station class lightning arresters rated 15kV.
33
34
D. Provide an Infrared (IR) port suitably constructed, located, and sized to allow viewing the
cable terminations.
35
2.05
36
TRANSFORMER SECTION
A. Transformer
37
38
1.
Transformers shall be of the type, voltage, and rating as shown. Askarel-insulated

transformers shall not be furnished.
39
40
2.
Transformers shall conform to ANSI C57.12.00, nominal 5.75% impedance, and

shall have all applicable standard accessories.
41
42
3.
Connections shall be Delta Grounded Wye. The transformer secondary neutral shall
be a fully insulated X0 bushing, to be connected to the neutral grounding resistor.
165477
City of Dallas
16430 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4.
The transformer shall be furnished with full capacity high-voltage taps. The tap
changer shall be clearly labeled to reflect that the transformer shall be de-energized
before operating the tap changer as required in Section 5.1.1 of ANSI C57.12.10.
Taps shall be provided on the higher voltage of dual voltage primary units. The tap
changer switch shall be an externally operated, snap action switch with a lever
handle. Padlocking provisions are available for lever handles. The units shall have
tap configurations of two - 2% taps above and two 2% taps below rated
voltage.
9
10
11
5.
The transformer shall have a 55/65C average winding temperature rise rating. The
above winding temperature rise shall not exceed 55C when loaded at base kVA
rating. The transformer shall provide an additional 12% capacity at the 65C rating.
12
6.
The secondary bushings shall be electrical grade wet process porcelain.
13
14
15
7.
The winding shall be of copper construction. The core and coil shall be vacuum
processed to ensure maximum penetration of insulating fluid into the coil insulation
system.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
8.
The dielectric coolant shall be listed less-flammable fluid meeting the requirements
of National Electrical Code Section 450-23 and the requirements of the National
Electrical Safety Code (IEEE C2-2002), Section 15. The dielectric coolant shall be
non-toxic, non-bioaccumulating and be readily and completely biodegradable per
EPA OPPTS 835.3100. The fluid shall be certified to comply with the US EPA
Environmental Technology Verification (ETV) requirements, and tested for
compatibility with transformer components. The fluid shall be Factory Mutual
Approved, UL Classified Dielectric Medium (UL-EOUV) and UL Classified
Transformer Fluid (UL-EOVK), Envirotemp FR3 fluid.
25
26
27
9.
The tank shall be of welded construction with extra-heavy duty, welded-in-place

lifting lugs and jacking pads. The tank base shall be designed to allow skidding or
rolling in any direction.
28
29
30
10. The transformer shall be of sealed tank construction of sufficient strength to

withstand a pressure of 7 psig without permanent distortion, and 15 psig without
rupturing.
31
32
33
11. The tank shall include a pressure relief valve as a means to relieve pressure in excess
of pressure resulting from normal operation. The venting and sealing characteristics
shall be as follows:
34
a.
Cracking Pressure: 10 psig +/-2 psig
35
b.
Resealing Pressure: 6-psig minimum
36
c.
Zero leakage from reseal pressure to -8 psig
37
d.
Flow at 15 psig: 35 SCFM minimum
38
12. The secondary bushings shall be electrical grade wet process porcelain.
39
40
13. The tank shall be complete with an anodized aluminum laser engraved nameplate.
This nameplate shall meet ANSI C57.12.00 for Nameplate B.
41
42
14. Provide a grounding pad on the transformer tank, sufficient in size to accommodate
the grounding conductors shown on the Drawings.
43
B. Accessories: The following standard accessories shall be provided:
44
1.
De-energized Tap Changer
45
2.
1.0 Upper Fill Plug with Filter Press Connection
165477
City of Dallas
16430 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.
1.0 Drain/Sampling Valve
4.
Automatic Pressure Relief Valve
5.
Welded Cover with Bolted Manhole
6.
Lifting Lugs (4)
7.
Liquid Level Gauge with alarm contacts
8.
Dial Type Thermometer with alarm contacts
9.
Pressure/Vacuum Gauge
10. SS Ground Pads (4)
11. Pressure Relief Device - 5000 cfm.
10
12. Touch-up Paint
11
13. Fault pressure relay
12
14. NEMA 4X SS control cabinet
13
a. Space heater for control cabinet
14
b. Short circuiting terminal blocks
15
c. Alarm contact terminal blocks
16
C. Special Requirements
17
18
19
20
1.
The transformer supplier is responsible to provide all current transformers (CTs) for a
complete operating system. All CT wiring shall be terminated in a terminal block in the
low voltage control cabinet and wired to relevant relays shown in the drawing. The CTs
shall be multi ration CTs. Provide shorting blocks for all CTS.
21
22
23
2.
Provide a Multilin 745 transformer protection relay with all the required functions as
shown in the drawings. The relays shall be installed in the low voltage control cabinet.
The relay shall have the following features:
24
a. Over current protection (50/51).
25
b. Ground fault CT connection from the grounding resistor (50/51G)
26
c. Differential protection (87T).
27
d. Digital inputs (For all transformer alarms).
28
e. Analog output part (4-20ma) for metering.
29
f. Metering feature.
30
g. Dry contacts (minimum 4) for trip outputs.
31
32
h. Provide an Ethernet port (10/100 baseT output) for remote communication of all
parameters including metering. The Ethernet protocol shall be Modbus TCP.
33
3.
Provide a detailed burden calculation and wiring diagrams for the complete assembly.
34
35
36
4.
Provide two multi ratio CTs on each primary and secondary bushing wired to short
circuiting terminal blocks in the control cabinet. CTs shall be connected to the Multilin
745 relay for differential protection.
37
38
39
40
5.
Provide separate relays with four dry contacts (form C), for temperature alarms and
sudden pressure tip functions. One set of relay contracts shall be wired to the digital input
function of the transformer relay Multilin 745. The other sets shall be wired directly to
the terminal board for customer use.
165477
City of Dallas
16430 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
6.
The 200/5A CT furnished with the neutral grounding resistor and shall be wired to a short
circuiting terminal block in the terminal cabinet and connected to the Multilin 745 relay.
3
4
7.
All accessories such as relays, auxiliary relays, main terminal block etc. shall be located
in the low voltage control cabinet.
5
6
8.
Control power for the Multilin 745 relay shall be 36VDC furnished from the primary pad
mounted switchgear switch.
2.06
SECONDARY (OUTGOING / LOAD) SECTION
8
9
10
A. The transformer shall have an integrally mounted full height secondary air terminal
compartment. Access to the air terminal compartment shall be through hinged doors on each
side of the enclosure.
11
12
13
B. Furnish NEMA pads suitable for termination of the cable sizes and qualities shown on the
drawings. Provide a ground bus sufficient to terminate all outgoing cable grounding
conductors.
14
15
C. Provide an Infrared (IR) port suitably constructed, located, and sized to allow viewing the
cable terminations.
16
2.07
CABINETS
17
18
19
A. For the equipment, connect all remote discrete and analog signal connections, (e.g. control,
statues, alarms, 4-20mA transmitters) to a terminal strip for outgoing wiring to a PLC as
shown on the drawings.
20
21
B. Only a single point of termination should be required for field wiring to the plant PLC
communication network.
22
2.08
FACTORY TESTS
23
24
A. General: All materials shall be tested and inspected in accordance with Section 16000 and the
following requirements.
25
B. Transformer
26
27
28
29
1.
Production tests at the rated voltage shall be conducted on each step-down

transformer supplied herein. Certificates for each test shall be submitted. The
production testing program shall conform to ANSI Test Code C57.12.90, and shall
include, but not be limited to, the following tests:
a.
30
31
32
33
34
Sound level measurements.

1) Sound level measurements shall be made only on one unit of each
rating. Sound level measurements previously performed on a
duplicate unit will be acceptable in lieu of the test on the units to
be supplied.
35
b.
Resistance measurements of all windings.
36
c.
Ratio tests on all tap connections.
37
d.
Polarity, and phase relation tests at rated voltage.
38
e.
No-load loss at rated voltage.
39
f.
Exciting current measurement at rated voltage.
40
g.
Impedance, and load loss measurements.
41
h.
Applied potential test.
42
i.
Induced potential test.
165477
City of Dallas
16430 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
j.
Insulation power factor test
k.
Basic impulse test on all windings
l.
Lightning impulse test
m. Short circuit withstand capability test per ANSI C57.1200 (Type Test).
n.
6
7
8
9
1) Temperature tests shall be made only on one unit of each rating.

Temperature tests previously performed on a duplicate unit will be
acceptable in lieu of the temperature test on the units to be
supplied.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Temperature tests at OA ratings.
2.
2.09
Following completion of factory tests, the vendor shall furnish to Owner/Engineer

for review and approval four certified copies of all test data and test for each
transformer. The Owner/Engineer wills promptly review test data and, upon
determining that the transformer meets contract requirements, authorization will be
given for shipment. Shipment shall not be made without written approval of test data
by the Owner/Engineer, except at the risk of the vendor.
WITNESS TESTING
17
18
A. In addition to factory tests, as specified above, the Owner/Engineer will witness the factory
tests for all equipment.
19
20
21
22
be accepted by the Owner, if witness testing is specified, and the equipment is shipped
without the testing being witnessed.
23
24
D. If a test must be re-run due to failure in meeting the specified requirements, the witness
expenses for the re-test shall be borne by the Manufacturer or Vendor.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
G. The Contractor shall submit the testing agenda for approval at least 30 days prior to the test
date, or the test date shall be rescheduled, with no change in the Contract price or time. The
agenda shall include a detailed list of all tests to be done.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
I.
165477

reimbursement.
2. The Contractor shall provide, and pay for, all air travel fare, including ground shuttle or
taxi, to and from the Owner/Engineers office or residence. Air fare inside the
Continental United States shall be nonstop if available, Coach Class or better, from DFW
Airport.
3. Ground transportation at any destination shall be provided by the host Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM). The Owner/Engineer persons shall not be required to
drive in a foreign country under any circumstances.
City of Dallas
16430 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
transportation to restaurants and the cost of those meals shall be provided by the host
OEM.
7
8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
10
11
12
13
14
A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative to assist the

Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this section for a
period of not less than two working days. The manufacturer's representative shall provide
technical direction and assistance to the contractor in general assembly of the equipment,
15
B. The Contractor shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report.
16
3.02
17
18
19
20
A. Installer shall be specialized in installing secondary unit substations with minimum 5 years
documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to
beginning work on this project.
3.03
EXAMINATION
21
A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the substations.
22
B. Check concrete pads for uniformity and level surface.
23
C. Verify that the substation is ready to install.
24
D. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer.
25
3.04
INSTALLATION
26
27
A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and
Contract Drawings.
28
29
B. The Contractor shall anchor the transformer in accordance with the instructions and details
provided in the manufacturers Installation Manual.
30
31
C. Contractor shall be responsible for terminating cables in accordance with Section 16121
Medium Voltage Cables.
32
D. The Contractor shall install and test all equipment and wiring for the secondary equipment.
33
E. Installed required safety labels.
34
3.05
35
A. Inspect installed substation for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage.
36
37
38
3.06
FIELD ADJUSTING
39
40
A. Adjust all switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical
operation as described in manufacturer's instructions.
41
B. Adjust TAPS to deliver appropriate secondary voltage
165477
City of Dallas
16430 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
C. Contactor to input settings into ML-745 relay

3.07
FIELD TESTING
3
4
5
A. Megger and record phase to phase and phase and neutral to ground insulation resistance of
each bus section. Megger for 1 minute for each measurement at minimum voltage of 1000
VDC. Measured Insulation resistance shall be at least 1 megohm.
6
7
B. The Contractor shall sample transformer insulating liquid and submit a test report on the
sample water content to the Engineer prior to energization.
8
9
C. Test dielectric liquid to ASTM D877, using 25,000 volts minimum breakdown voltage, after
installing transformer and before energizing it from system.
10
11
D. Inspect installed transformers for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage.
12
13
E. Check tightness of all accessible mechanical and electrical connections with calibrated torque
wrench. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions.
14
3.08
15
16
A. Clean interiors of separate enclosures to remove construction debris, dirt, shipping materials.
3.09
17
18
19
CLEANING

A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If
the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced.
3.10
20
21
22
23
A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall personally inspect the

equipment at the jobsite and shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed,
adjusted, and tested, in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations, including all
settings designated in the Power System Study.
24
25
3.11
TRAINING
26
27
A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance
of the equipment furnished under this Section.
28
29
B. The contractor shall provide a training session for up to there Owners representatives for half
normal work day at a job site location determined by the Owner.
30
31
32
the system being supplied.
33
34
35
36
37

program shall include instructions on the assembly, switches, transformers, protective
devices, metering, and other major components.
38
39
40
41
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16430 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16430B
2
3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
6
7
A. Furnish and install pad-mounted transformer(s) as specified herein and as shown on the
Drawings.
8
9
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all pad-mounted transformers, except as indicated
otherwise.
10
1.2
RELATED WORK
11
12
B. Section 16105 Power System Study.
13
1.3
SUBMITTALS
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
C. Submittals for equipment and materials, furnished under this Section of the Specifications, will
22
23
24
25
D. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
E. Shop Drawings and Product Data. For each transformer specified under this Section, submit the
2. Front view elevation or outline drawing and weight
3. Floor plan with recommended pad dimensions
5. Nameplate diagram
numbers.
8. Ratings including:
a. kVA
b. Primary and secondary voltage
c. Taps
d. Primary and secondary continuous current
e. Basic Impulse level
f. Impedance
g. Insulation class and temperature rise
165477
City of Dallas
16430B - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
h. Sound level
9. Cable terminal sizes or deadfront elbow information.
10. Seismic Certification
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
F.
1.4
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include the following information:
d. Drawings and information required by the Submittals part of this Section.
e. Project record drawings clearly indicating operating features and including as-built
shop drawings, outline drawings, and schematic and wiring diagrams.
f. Volume of oil.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The pad-mounted transformer(s) and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested
in accordance with the latest applicable NEMA and ANSI standards as follows;
1. ANSI C57. 12.26, Pad-Mounted, Compartmental- Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase
Distribution Transformers for Use with Separable Insulated High Voltage Connectors, High
Voltage, 34 500 Grd Y/19 920 Volts and Below; 2500 KVA and Smaller, Requirements
2. ANSI C57. 12.70, Terminal Markings and Connections for Distribution and Power
Transformers
3. ANSI C119.2, Separable Insulated Connectors
4. ANSI/IEEE C57.12.00 - 2000, General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed, Distribution,
Power, and Regulating Transformers,
5. ANSI/IEEE C57.12.80, Terminology for Power and Distribution Transformers
6. ANSI/IEEE C57.12.90, Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power and Regulating
Transformers and Guide for Short-Circuit Testing of Distribution and Power Transformers
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
not be used.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
G. Transformers manufactured more than 24 months prior to the date of this Contract will not be
acceptable.
165477
City of Dallas
16430B - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
fourteen (14) calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within
fourteen (14) calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at
the Contractors expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the
equipment.
18
19
20
21
1.7
22
23
24
25
26
WARRANTY
workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period
of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return
the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting
of the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner.
27
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28
2.1
MANUFACTURERES
29
30
31
32
33
34
1. General Electric
2. Cutler Hammer
3. Square D
4. Cooper Industries
5. Siemens
35
36
37
38
2.2
39
40
41
42
43
44
RATINGS
A. The ratings of the transformer shall be as follows:
1. kVA Rating:
As shown on the Drawings.
2. Impedance:
5.75% (ANSI Standard Tolerance)
3. HV:
As shown on the Drawings.(DeltaPrimary / grounded Wye secondary)
4. HV BIL:
95kV BIL for 15KV, 60KV BIL for 5 KV
5. HV de-energized Taps:
+/- 2 - 2-1/2% full capacity
165477
City of Dallas
16430B - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
6.
7.
2.3
4
5
LV:
LV BIL:

60 KV BIL for 5 KV, 30KV for 480 V
CONSTRUCTION
A. The unit shall be FR3 type, or equal, vegetable oil filled, and shall be in accordance with the
latest edition of the NEC. High fire point fluids shall be Factory Mutual and UL approved.
6
7
8
9
10
B. The transformer shall carry its continuous rating with average winding temperature rise by
resistance that shall not exceed 55 degrees C, based on average ambient of 30 degrees C over 24
hours with a maximum of 40 degrees C. The insulation system shall allow an additional 12%
kVA output at 65 degrees C average winding temperature rise by resistance, on a continuous
basis, without any decrease in normal transformer life.
11
12
C. The transformer shall be designed to meet the sound level standards for liquid transformers as
defined in NEMA and ANSI.
13
D. High-voltage and low-voltage windings shall be copper.
14
15
16
17
E. The main transformer tank and attached components shall be designed to withstand pressures
greater than the required operating design value without permanent deformation. Construction
shall consist of carbon steel plate reinforced with external sidewall braces. All seams and joints
shall be continuously welded.
18
19
20
F. Each radiator assembly shall be individually welded and receive a quality control pressurized
check for leaks. The entire tank assembly shall receive a similar leak test before tanking. A final
six-hour leak test shall be performed.
21
22
23
24
G. The transformers shall be compartmental-type, self-cooled and tamper-resistant for mounting on

a pad. The unit shall restrict the entry of water (other than flood water) into the compartments so
as not to impair its operation. There shall be no exposed screws, bolts or other fastening devices
which are externally removable.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
H. The transformers shall consist of a transformer tank, and full-height bolt-on high- and lowvoltage cable terminating compartments located side-by-side separated by a rigid metal barrier.
Each compartment shall have separate doors, designed to provide access to the high-voltage
compartment only after the low-voltage has been opened. There shall be at least one additional
fastening device accessible only after the low-voltage door has been opened, which shall be
removed to open the high-voltage door. Doors shall be mounted flush with the cabinet frame.
The low-voltage door shall have a handle-operated, three-point latching mechanism designed to
be secured with a single padlock. A hex-head bolt shall be incorporated into the low-voltage
door latching mechanism. Both high and low-voltage doors shall be incorporated into the lowvoltage door latching mechanism. Both high and low-voltage doors shall be equipped with liftoff type stainless steel hinges and door stops to secure them in the open position.
36
37
38
I.
Compartment sills, doors and covers shall be removable to facilitate cable pulling and
installation. The high-voltage door shall be on the left with the low-voltage door on the right.
Compartments shall be designed for cable entry from below.
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
J.
Transformers shall be supplied with a bolted main tank cover and be of a sealed-tank
construction designed to withstand a pressure of 7 psig without permanent distortion. The tank
cover shall be domed to shed water and be supplied with a tamper-resistant access handhole
sized to allow access to internal bushing and switch connections. Transformers supplied with
"less flammable" fluids, (high-molecular-weight hydrocarbon or silicone), shall be manufactured
to withstand 12 psig without rupture. The transformer shall remain effectively sealed for a topoil temperature of -5 degrees C to 105 degrees C. When necessary to meet the temperature rise
rating specified above, flat cooling panels of the common header type shall be provided.
165477
City of Dallas
16430B - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
K. The transformer manufacturer shall certify that the transformer is non-PCB containing no
detectable PCBs. Do not provide nonflammable transformer liquids including askarel and
insulating liquids containing tetrachloroethylene, perchloroethylene, chlorine compounds, or
halogenated compounds.
5
6
7
L. When high-voltage taps are specified above, full-capacity taps shall be provided with a tap
changing mechanism designed for de-energized operation. The tap changer operator shall be
located within one of the compartments.
8
9
10
M. The coil windings shall be of the two winding type, designed to reduce losses and manufactured
with the conductor material as specified above. All insulating materials shall be rated for 120
degrees C class.
11
12
13
14
15
N. The core material shall be high-grade, grain-oriented, non-aging silicon core steel with high
magnetic permeability, low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be
kept well below saturation to allow for a minimum of 10 percent overvoltage excitation. The
cores shall be properly annealed to reduce stresses induced during the manufacturing processes
and reduce core losses.
16
17
O. The core frame shall be designed to provide maximum support of the core and coil assembly.
The core frame shall be welded or bolted to ensure maximum short-circuit strength.
18
19
20
21
P. The core and coil assembly shall be designed and manufactured to meet the short-circuit
requirements of ANSI C57.12.90. The core and coil assembly shall be baked in an oven, prior to
tanking, to "set" the epoxy coating on the Kraft paper and remove moisture from the insulation
prior to vacuum filling.
22
23
24
25
Q. Transformer shall be vacuum-filled with the appropriate fluid as indicated above. The process
shall be of sufficient vacuum and duration to insure that the core and coil assembly is free of
moisture prior to filling the tank. Provide a description of the process and location to take oil
samples to avoid shutdown.
26
2.4
27
28
29
30
A. Transformer units shall include suitable outdoor paint finish. The paint shall be applied using an
electrostatically deposited dry powder system to a minimum of three (3) mils average thickness.
Units shall be painted padmount green, Munsell No.7GY3.29/1.5.
2.5
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
FINISH
ACCESSORIES
A. Transformer features and accessories shall include:
1. Dial-type thermometer
2. Liquid level gauge
3. Pressure-vacuum gauge
4. One (1) inch drain valve with sample valve
5. Pressure relief valve
6. Non-PCB label
7. One (1) inch upper fill/filter press connection
8. Additional accessories.
a. Alarm contacts.
b. Gas sampling valve
2.6
PRIMARY CONNECTIONS
43
44
A.
45
46
B. Transformer primary connections shall be live front bushings with NEMA spades or eyebolt
terminals suitable for cable sizes shown on the drawings.
165477
Transformer primary connections shall be dead front wells, inserts, cable parking supports, and
elbows for cable sizes shown on the drawings.
City of Dallas
16430B - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.7
2
3
A. Provide suitable lightning arrestors in the primary compartment.

2.8
4
5
6
2.9
PRIMARY FUSING
A. Provide Bayonet fuses.
2.10 PRIMARY AND SECONDARY TERMINAL COMPARTMENTS
10
11
12
13
14
HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHING

A. The feeder to the transformer shall be from medium voltage switchgera
7
8
9
LIGHTNING ARRESTORS
A. A ground bus shall be provided in each of the Primary and Secondary Terminal Compartments,
sufficient in size to terminate all incoming and outgoing cable grounding conductors, neutrals
and metallic raceways. Where a wye secondary is provided, the neutral of the secondary shall be
bonded to the secondary ground bus.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this
section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest applicable ANSI and NEMA standards.
1. Resistance measurements of all windings on the rated voltage connection of each unit and at
the tap extremes of one unit only of a given rating on this project
2. Ratio tests on the rated voltage connection and on all tap connections
3. Polarity and phase-relation tests on the rated voltage connections
4. No-load loss at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection
5. Exciting current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection
6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection of each unit and on
the tap extremes of one unit only of a given rating on this project
7. Applied potential test
8. Induced potential tests
27
B. The manufacturer shall provide three certified copies of factory test reports.
28
29
30
31
32
33
C. The following special factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this
Section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest applicable ANSI and NEMA standards.
1. Temperature tests shall be made on one unit only of a project covering one or more units of
a given kVA rating. Tests shall not be required when there is available a record of a
temperature test on an essentially duplicate unit.
2. Basic impulse test on all windings
34
35
36
A. The Owner/Engineer will witness the Factory Tests for each of the transformers provided under
this specification.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
165477
City of Dallas
16430B - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
I.

reimbursement.
24
PART 3 - EXECUTION
25
3.1
26
27
28
INSTALLATION
A. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations, NEC and
the Contract Drawings.
3.2
29
30
31
32
33
A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative to assist the

Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this Section for a period
of 2 working days.The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and
assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments,
and testing of the assembly and components contained herein.
34
B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report.
35
3.3
FIELD TESTING
36
A. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings.
37
B. Megger primary and secondary windings
38
C. Liquid transformers -- Test oil for dielectric strength
39
3.4
40
FIELD ADJUSTING
A. Adjust taps to deliver appropriate secondary voltage
165477
City of Dallas
16430B - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
3.5
7
8
9

recommendations.
10
11
3.6
TRAINING
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

program shall include instructions on the transformers auxiliary devices, protective devices and
other major components.
23
24
25
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16430B - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16461
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
7
A. Furnish and install single-phase and three-phase general purpose individually mounted dry-type
transformers of the two-winding type, self-cooled as specified herein, and as shown on the
Drawings.
8
9
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all dry-type distribution transformers, except as
indicated otherwise.
10
1.2
RELATED WORK
11
12
13
14
1.3
SUBMITTALS
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
D. All equipment supplied under this Section of the Specifications shall be products of the same
Manufacturer, and shall be contained in one single submittal. Partial submittals will be returned
unreviewed. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished
under this Specification but described in the related sections listed in the Related Work
paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related
equipment will also be returned unreviewed.
30
31
32
E. Equipment specified in Process Equipment and Mechanical Equipment Divisions, and supplied
as an integral part of a process equipment manufacturers package, but referred to this Section
for component details, shall be submitted with the manufacturers package in those Divisions.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
F. Shop Drawings and Product Data. For each transformer specified under this Section, submit the
1. Outline dimensions and weights
2. Technical certification sheet
3. Transformer ratings including:
a. kVA
b. Primary and secondary voltage
c. Taps
d. Basic impulse level (BIL) for equipment over 600 volts
e. Design impedance
f. Insulation class and temperature rise
165477
City of Dallas
16461 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
4.
5.
6.
7.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include the following information:
d. Record Drawings of information required by the Submittals part of this Section.
e. Project record drawings clearly indicating operating features and including as-built
shop drawings, outline drawings, and schematic and wiring diagrams.
1.4
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
g. Sound level.
Product data sheets
Connection diagrams
Installation information
Date of manufacture for each transformer
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The dry-type transformer(s) and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with the latest applicable NEMA and ANSI standards as follows;
1. NEMA TP1 2002 Standards for Energy Efficiency
2. ANSI C57.96 2004 Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers
3. ASTM D635 Standard Test Method for Insulation Materials
4. NEMA ST20
5. UL 1561
6. IEEE-519
7. IEEE-597
8. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
26
27
period of ten years.
28
29
30
31
32
33
not be used.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
G. Transformers manufactured more than 24 months prior to the date of this Contract will not be
acceptable.
41
1.6
42
43
44
45

165477
City of Dallas
16461 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
be made available to the CONTRACTOR and OWNER.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CONTRACTORs expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the
equipment.
13
14
15
16
1.7
17
18
19
20
21
WARRANTY
workmanship for one year from Owners final acceptance. Within such period of warranty the
Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to
new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment
shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the OWNER.
22
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
acceptable:
1. Named Supplier:
a. General Electric
b. Siemens
c. Eaton
d. Square D
31
32
33
34
2.2
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
RATINGS
A. The ratings of the transformer shall be as follows:
1. kVA Rating:
As shown on the Drawings
2. Impedance:
ANSI Standard Tolerance
3. HV:
4. LV:
5. LV:
2.3
42
43
44
CONSTRUCTION
A. Insulation Systems
1. Transformer insulation system shall be as follows:
a. Up to 15 kVA, three-phase and single-phase: encapsulated with 185 degrees C rise.
165477
City of Dallas
16461 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
2.
3.
b. 15kVA, and above, three-phase and single-phase: ventilated, with 115 degrees C rise.
Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature
rise in a 40 degrees C maximum ambient, and a 24-hour average ambient of 30 degrees C
All insulation materials shall be flame-retardant and shall not support combustion as defined
in ASTM Standard Test Method D635.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
B. Core and Coil Assemblies

1. Transformer core shall be constructed with high-grade, nonaging, silicon steel with high
magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Maximum magnetic flux
densities shall be substantially below the saturation point. The transformer core volume
shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10% above the nominal tap voltage. The core
laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed. Coils shall be wound of electrical
grade copper with continuous wound construction.
2. On single and three-phase units rated up to 15 kVA, the core and coil assembly shall be
completely encapsulated in a proportioned mixture of resin and aggregate to provide a
moisture proof, shock-resistant seal. The core and coil encapsulation system shall minimize
the sound level. Enclosure construction shall be encapsulated, non-ventilated, enclosure,
with lifting eyes.
3. On single and three-phase units, 15 kVA and above, the core and coil assembly shall be
impregnated with non-hydroscopic, thermosetting varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and
seal out moisture. Enclosure construction shall be ventilated, weatherproof enclosure. All
ventilation openings shall be protected against falling dirt. The assembly shall be installed
on vibration-absorbing pads.
23
24
25
26
27
C. Taps
1. Three-phase transformers rated 15 through 500 kVA shall be provided with six 2-1/2% taps,
two above and four below rated primary voltage
2. All single-phase transformers, and three-phase transformers rated below 15 kVA and above
500 kVA, shall be provided with the manufacturers standard tap configuration.
28
29
30
31
D. Isolation Pad
1. Each transformer, pad, bracket mounted, or suspended, shall utilize double deflecting
neoprene mounting vibration isolators as manufactured by Mason Industries Type ND, sized
according to rated capacities.
32
33
E. Finish
1. Enclosures shall be finished with ANSI Gray color, weather-resistant enamel.
34
35
36
F. Accessories
1. On ventilated outdoor units provide suitable weather shields over ventilation openings.
2. Lug kits shall be provided by the Manufacturer of the transformer.
37
2.4
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
FACTORY TESTING
A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this
section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest applicable ANSI and NEMA standards.
1. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connection and at all tap connections
2. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection
3. Applied potential tests
4. Induced potential test
5. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection
165477
City of Dallas
16461 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3
4
A. The CONTRACTORs shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and
the contract drawings.
B. Securely connect all neutrals and transformer enclosures to ground.
3.2
7
8
FIELD ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust taps to deliver appropriate secondary voltage.
3.3
9
10
11
12
13
FIELD TESTING
A. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16461 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
16461 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install panelboard(s) as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all panelboards, except as indicated otherwise.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
C. Shop Drawings and Product Data. The following information shall be submitted to the
ENGINEER:
2. Bill of Material
3. Front view elevation with dimensions
4. Top view
6. UL Listing
b. Voltage
a. Voltage
12. Cable terminal sizes.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

e. Field Test Reports
41
1.3
42
43
44
45

A. The low voltage panelboard assembly and all components in this specification shall be designed
and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise
noted):
1. UL 67 Panelboards
165477
City of Dallas
PANELBOARDS
16470 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes

NEMA PB-1 2006 Panelboards
NEMA AB1 molded case circuit breakers and their application
Fed. Spec. W-P-115C
Fed. Spec. W-C-375
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided in accordance with
Section 16000.
2. Instruction books and/or leaflets.
3. Recommended renewal parts list.
4. Drawings and information required by the SUBMITTALS part of this Section.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
13
A. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000/Six Sigma or later certified.
14
15
16
17
B. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a
minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the ENGINEER, an acceptable list of
requirement.
18
19
20
1.5
21
22
A. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures.
23
24
B. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint
damaged painted surfaces to the satisfaction of the OWNER/ENGINEER.
25
26
27
28
29
30
C. Equipment shall not be stored onsite without written approval of the OWNER/ENGINEER.
bonded, warehouse of the CONTRACTORs choice and at the CONTRACTORs expense, until
31
32
D. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be
33
34
35
E. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate
36
1.6
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
WARRANTY
necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring
shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to
the Owner.
165477
City of Dallas
PANELBOARDS
16470 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
3
4
5
6
7
8
acceptable.
1. General Electric
2. Siemens
3. Eaton
4. Square D
9
10
11
12
2.2
13
14
15
16
17
18
MANUFACTURERS
GENERAL
A. Rating
1. Panelboard ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. All panelboards shall be rated for the
intended voltage.
2. Circuit breaker panelboards shall be fully rated for the specified circuit breaker fault current
interrupting capacity. Series connected short circuit ratings will not be acceptable.
2.3
MATERIALS
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
A. Interiors
1. All interiors shall be completely factory assembled with circuit breakers, wire connectors,
etc. All wire connectors, except screw terminals, shall be have the anti turn solder less type
and all shall be suitable for copper wire of the sizes indicated.
2. Interiors shall be so designed that circuit breakers can be replaced without disturbing
adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors and shall be so designed that
circuits may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping.
3. Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction except when narrow
column panels are indicated. Branch circuits shall be numbered by the manufacturer.
4. A nameplate shall be provided listing manufacturer's name, panel type, and rating.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
B. Buses
1. All bus bars shall be aluminum. Full size neutral bars shall be included. Phase bussing shall
be full height without reduction. Cross connectors shall be aluminum.
2. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral
connection.
3. Spaces for future circuit breakers shall be bussed for the maximum device that can be fitted
into them.
4. Equipment ground bars, of tin-plated copper, shall be furnished.
37
38
39
40
41
C. Boxes
1. Boxes and trims shall be made from steel, unless otherwise noted. Boxes for use indoors
shall be of NEMA 12 steel construction, without knockouts. Boxes shall be of sufficient size
to provide a minimum gutter space of 4 in on all sides.
2. At least four studs for mounting the panelboard interior shall be furnished.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
D. Trim
1. Hinged doors covering all circuit breaker handles shall be included in all panel trims.
2. Doors shall have semi flush type cylinder lock and catch, except that doors over 48 in. in
height shall have a vault handle and 3 point catch complete with lock, arranged to fasten
door at top, bottom and center. Door hinges shall be concealed. Furnish two keys for each
lock. All locks shall be keyed alike; directory frame and card having a transparent cover
shall be furnished on each door.
165477
City of Dallas
PANELBOARDS
16470 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
3.
4.
2.4
Indoor NEMA 12 trims shall be factory painted in the manufacturers standard color.
Trims for flush panels shall overlap the box by at least 3/4 in all around. Surface trims shall
have the same width and height as the box.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
5
6
A. Panelboards shall be equipped with circuit breakers with frame size and trip settings as shown on
the Drawings.
B. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt in type.
8
9
C. Each circuit breaker used in 120/208 Volt panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not
less than 22,000 Amps, RMS symmetrical.
10
11
D. Each circuit breaker used in 277/480 Volt and 480 Volt panelboards shall have an interrupting
capacity of not less than 65,000 Amps, RMS symmetrical.
12
E. Circuit breakers shall be as manufactured by the panelboard manufacturer.
13
14
F. Single pole circuit breakers serving fluorescent lighting loads shall have the SWD marking.
Circuit breakers serving air conditioning branch loads shall be U.L. listed as type HACR.
15
2.5
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE
16
17
18
19
20
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Current Technology; a subsidiary of Danahar Corporation.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Allen Bradley
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in, solid-state,

parallel-connected with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second
edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating,
and with the following features and accessories:
1. Accessories:
a. Fuses rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
b. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
c. Redundant suppression circuits.
d. Redundant replaceable modules.
e. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
f. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
g. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
h. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally
closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on
failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device.
Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.
i. Six-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.
2. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase.
3. Minimum single-impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform described
inIEEE C62.41.2.
a. Line to Neutral: 70,000A.
b. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.
c. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
4. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges
with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.
5. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277; 208Y/120V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:
a. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120.
165477
City of Dallas
PANELBOARDS
16470 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
6.
b. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120

c. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120.
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 480-V, three-phase, three-wire, delta circuits shall
be as follows:
a. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V; 1000 V for 240 V
b. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
9
10
A. Mount boxes for surface mounted panelboards so there is at least 1/2 in air space between the
box and the wall.
11
12
B. Connect panelboard branch circuit loads so that the load is distributed as equally as possible
between the phase busses.
13
14
C. Type circuit directories giving location and nature of load served. Install laminated printed
circuit directories in each panelboard.
15
16
D. Install the panelboard in accordance with applicable codes at each location indicated on the
plans. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in the panelboard.
17
3.2
18
19
20
21
A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a manufacturers representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing
22
23
24
25
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so
joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment:
1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
40
D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
41
42
43
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken and observations after remedial action.
44
165477
City of Dallas
PANELBOARDS
16470 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
END OF SECTION
1
2
165477
City of Dallas
PANELBOARDS
16470 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
SECTION 16475
LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
8
SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install low voltage enclosed circuit breakers and
disconnect switches, together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein
and as shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.2
RELATED WORK
10
11
12
D. Process Equipment Division
13
E. Instrumentation Equipment Division
14
F. Mechanical Equipment Division
15
1.3
SUBMITTALS
16
17
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section and as
specified herein.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
the ENGINEERs ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
E. Submit to the OWNER/ENGINEER, shop drawings and product data, for the following:
accessories furnished specifically for this project.
exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc.
165477
City of Dallas
16475 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

number.
b. Voltage
a. Voltage
Busway connection and amperage rating.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

25
1.4
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
otherwise noted):
1. NEMA Standard AB1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and Circuit
Breaker Enclosures
4. IEEE 242 Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
5. IEEE 399 Power Systems Analysis
6. UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
7. UL 1066 Low Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures.
37
38
39
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
40
41
42
period of ten years. When requested by the ENGINEER, an acceptable list of installations with
43
44
45
46
47
48
not be used.
165477
City of Dallas
16475 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
4
5
1.6
7
8
9
10
11
B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
12
C. Equipment shall be stored indoors and protected from moisture, dust and other contaminants.
13
D. Equipment shall not be installed until the location is finished and protected from the elements.
14
1.7
15
16
17
18
19
20
WARRANTY
workmanship for one year from date of Owners final acceptance. Within such period of
the equipment or components shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the
OWNER.
21
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
22
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
acceptable:
1. Named Supplier:
a. General Electric Co.
b. Siemens
c. Eaton
d. Square D
30
31
32
33
C. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be of the same manufacturer.
34
2.2
RATINGS
35
36
37
38
39
interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be equal to or greater than the overall
short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the
circuit breaker or switch. Systems employing series connected ratings for main and feeder
devices shall not be used.
40
41
B. Circuit breakers, safety switches, and associated devices shall be designed for continuous
operation at rated current in a 40 degree C ambient temperature.
42
C. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings.
165477
City of Dallas
16475 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.3
CONSTRUCTION
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A. General
1. Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components; current
ratings of devices, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components
and assemblies; and other required details.
2. Furnish lugs for incoming wiring, sizes as shown on the Drawings. Allow adequate
clearance for bending and terminating of cable size and type specified.
3. Built in control stations and indicating lights shall be furnished where shown on the
Drawings.
4. Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated in Drawings. Nameplates shall be engraved,
laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, not less than 1/16 in thick by 3/4 in by 2 1/2 in,
Rowmark 322402. Nameplates shall be 316 SS screw mounted to all enclosures except for
NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached with double
faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X . Prior to installing the
nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until all residue
has been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
B. Enclosure
1. Provide NEMA 12 enclosures for dry, indoor above grade locations. Unless otherwise
specified or shown on the Drawings, these areas shall be limited to electrical rooms,
administration areas, control rooms, and storage rooms.
2. Provide NEMA 7/4X combination enclosures for either indoor or outdoor use in hazardous
(classified as Class 1, Division 1, and Class 1, Division 2, Groups B, C and D), as defined in
NFPA 70.
3. Provide NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel enclosures for outdoor, wet locations and process
areas. In addition NEMA 4X Aluminum enclosures will be allowed on an individual basis,
but only where specifically designated herein or specifically shown on the Drawings.
4. Provide non-metallic type NEMA 4X enclosures, of PVC or fiberglass reinforced polyester,
for Chlorine, Caustic, and other Chemical Rooms.
5. All enclosures shall be lockable.
6. Provide a flange mounted, or through the door, disconnect operating handle with
mechanical interlock having a bypass that will allow the enclosure door to open only when
the circuit breaker or switch is in the OFF position. The circuit breaker or switch shall have
the capability of being bypassed after the door has been opened.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
C. Internal Wiring
1. Wiring: Stranded copper, minimum size No. 14 AWG, with 600 Volt, 90 degree C, flame
retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation, NEMA Class II, Type B wiring. Line side
power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device.
2. All wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number as shown on the
Drawings. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end showing
origination and destination of each wire. The marking shall be permanent, non-smearing,
solvent-resistant type, Raychem TMS-SCE.
3. All wiring shall be neatly bundled with tie wraps and supported to wire way supports.
Control wiring shall be bundled separately from power wiring. In addition, low signal
wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control
wiring.
46
47
48
49
50
D. Field Installed Internal Wiring

1. Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie
wraps. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. In
addition, low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest
of the control wiring.
165477
City of Dallas
16475 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2.
3.
2.4
All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number. Coding shall be
typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end of the wire. The marking shall be a
permanent, non-smearing, solvent-resistant type, Raychem TMS-SCE.
In general, all conduit entering or leaving equipment shall be stubbed up into the bottom of
the enclosure directly below the area in which the conductors are to be terminated, or from
the top if shown on the Drawings. Conduits shall not enter the side unless approved in
writing by the OWNER/ENGINEER.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
A. Insulated Case Circuit Breakers (ICCBs)

1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, circuit breakers, larger than a 2000 ampere rating,
shall be insulated case (ICCB), 3 Pole, 600 Volt, fixed type, with stored energy closing
mechanism.
2. Breakers shall be manually operated unless indicated as electrically operated (EO) on the
Drawings.
3. All insulated case circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity
of 65,000 amperes, with individual interrupting capacity as shown on the Drawings. To
ensure a selective system, all circuit breakers shall have 30-cycle short-time withstand
ratings equal to 18 times their frame ratings. Insulated case circuit breakers without an
instantaneous trip element adjustment shall be equipped with a fixed internal instantaneous
override set at the upper limit.
4. All insulated case circuit breakers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with UL
1066. The circuit breakers shall carry a UL label.
5. All insulated case circuit breakers shall have an adjustable long time pickup, and delay;
adjustable short time pickup and delay; short time i2t switch; high range instantaneous
(fixed at the breakers short-time withstand rating), adjustable ground fault pickup and
delay; ground fault delay and pickup trips for selective tripping, and overload, short circuit,
and ground fault indicator lights.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs)

1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, circuit breakers 225 ampere frame rating and
larger, shall be molded case (MCCB), 3 Pole, 600 Volt, fixed type, with stored energy
closing mechanism. Breakers shall be manually operated unless indicated as electrically
operated (EO) on the Drawings. Trip device shall be solid state with adjustable long time
pickup, and delay; adjustable short time pickup and delay; short time i2t switch; adjustable
ground fault pickup and delay, and ground fault delay and pickup trips for selective tripping.
2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, circuit breakers less than 225 ampere frame
rating shall be molded case, 3 Pole, 600 Volt, fixed type, manually operated with stored
energy closing mechanism. Circuit breakers shall have inverse time and instantaneous
tripping characteristics.
3. Where shown on the Drawings, breakers shall be rated for 100% continuous duty, and shall
carry a UL 489 listing.
41
2.5
42
43
44
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Disconnect switches shall be heavy duty, quick make, quick break, visible blades, 600 Volt, 3
Pole with full cover interlock, interlock defeat and flange mounted operating handle.
2.6
FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES
45
46
A. Fused disconnect switches shall be heavy duty, quick make, quick break, visible blades, 600
Volt, 3 Pole with full cover interlock, interlock defeat and flange mounted operating handle.
47
48
B. Fuses shall be rejection type, 600 Volts, 200,000 A.I.C., dual element, time delay, Bussman
Fusetron, Class RK 5.
165477
City of Dallas
16475 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.7
MOTOR ISOLATION SWITCHES
2
3
4
5
A. For motors up to and including 100 HP, the isolating switch shall be a horsepower rated, quick
make, quick break, visible blades, 600 Volt, 3 pole motor circuit switch, in an enclosure as listed
above and sized for the motor as shown on the Drawings. The switch shall be plainly marked
Do not operate under load.
6
7
8
9
B. For motors greater than 100 HP, the isolating switch shall be a current rated, quick make, quick
break, visible blades, 600 Volt, 3 pole motor circuit switch, in an enclosure as listed above and
sized for the motor as shown on the Drawings. The switch shall be plainly marked Do not
operate under load.
10
2.8
SPARE PARTS
11
12
B. Three Fuses of each type used.
13
14
C. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage and clearly identified on the
15
2.9
FACTORY TESTING
16
17
18
A. The circuit breakers and disconnects shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the
factory and shall be given the manufacturers routine shop tests and any other additional
operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment.
19
20
21
ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards, and shall be subject to the OWNER/ENGINEERs
approval.
22
PART 3 - EXECUTION
23
3.1
24
25
26
27
A. Installer shall be specialized in installing low voltage circuit breakers and disconnect switches
with minimum five years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted
for approval prior to beginning work on this project.
3.2
EXAMINATION
28
29
30
31
3.3
INSTALLATION
32
33
A. The CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and
Contract Drawings.
34
35
3.4
36
A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding, and physical damage.
37
38
165477
City of Dallas
16475 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.5
FIELD ADJUSTING
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Devices shall be set in the field by a qualified
representative of the manufacturer, retained by the CONTRACTOR, in accordance with settings
Approved by the OWNER/ENGINEER, prior to energizing of the equipment.
3.6
FIELD TESTING
10
11
A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. Disconnect all connections
to solid-state equipment prior to testing.
12
13
14
B. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance. Megger, for 1
minute, at minimum voltage of 1000 VDC. Measured Insulation resistance shall be at least 100
megohms. In no case shall the manufacturers maximum test voltages be exceeded.
15
C.
16
D. Test the rating plug for correct rating.
17
3.7
18
19
20
21
Test the ground fault protection system using a high current injection method.
CLEANING
A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the equipment. Remove dirt, dust, or
concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner,
or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air.
3.8
22
23
24
25
26
27

END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16475 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
16475 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16476
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
7
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install low voltage enclosed automatic and manual transfer
switches (ATSs), together with appurtenances, complete and operable as specified herein and as
8
9
10
B. The items of equipment are for individual applications as separately enclosed items. Submittals
made under this Section, for components and electrical items specified under other Sections, will
11
1.2
RELATED WORK
12
13
14
15
D. Section 16196 Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices (SPDs)
16
1.3
SUBMITTALS
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc..
165477
City of Dallas
16476 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
5.
6.
7.
Nameplate schedule
number.
b. Voltage
a. Voltage
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

23
24
25
I.
26
1.4
Manual.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
otherwise noted):
3. UL 1008 Underwriters Laboratories standard for automatic transfer switches
4. CSA: C22.2 No. 178 certified at 600 VAC
5. NFPA 101: Life safety code
6. NFPA 110: Standard for emergency and standby power systems
7. IEEE 446: I.E.E.E. recommended practice for emergency and standby power systems
8. NEMA ICS10: AC automatic transfer switch equipment (supersedes ICS2-447)
9. UL 50/508: Enclosures
10. ANSI C33.76: Enclosures
11. NEMA 250: Enclosures
12. IEEE 472: (ANSI C37.90A): Ringing wave immunity
13. EN55022 (CISPR11): Conducted and radiated emissions
14. IEEE 242 Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
15. IEEE 399 Power Systems Analysis
16. UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
17. UL 1066 Low-Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures.
47
48
165477
City of Dallas
16476 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
2
3
4
period of ten (10) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with
5
6
7
8
9
10
not be used.
11
12
13
14
15
16
1.6
17
18
19
20
21
B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
22
C. Equipment shall be stored indoors and protected from moisture, dust and other contaminants.
23
D. Equipment shall not be installed until the location is finished and protected from the elements.
24
1.7
25
26
27
28
29
30
WARRANTY
workmanship for 2 years from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of
the equipment or components shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the
Owner.
31
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
32
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
33
34
35
36
37
38
acceptable:
1. ASCO
2. Zenith
3. Cummins
4. Caterpillar
39
40
41
42
C. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be of the same manufacturer.
165477
City of Dallas
16476 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.2
RATINGS
2
3
4
5
6
interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be equal to or greater than the overall short
circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the
automatic transfer switch. Systems employing series connected ratings for main and feeder
devices shall not be used.
7
8
9
B. The withstand current capacity of the main contacts shall not be less than 20 times the
continuous duty rating when coordinated with any molded case circuit breaker established by
certified test data. Refer to required withstand and close ratings as detailed in this specification.
10
11
12
C. Temperature rise tests in accordance with UL 1008 shall have been conducted after the overload
and endurance tests to confirm the ability of the units to carry their rated currents within the
allowable temperature limits.
13
D. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings.
14
2.3
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
CONSTRUCTION
A. General
1. The equipment described in this specification shall contain factory assembled and
operational tested circuit breakers and accessories and be self-supporting in a manner to be
2. Refer to Drawings for actual layout and location of equipment and components; current
3. Units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings.
4. Nameplates
a. External
1) Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, black letters
on white background, not less than 1/16 in thick by 3/4 in by 2 1/2 in, Rowmark
322402. Nameplates shall be 316 SS screw mounted to all enclosures except for
NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached
with double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X , or equal.
Prior to installing the nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned
with 70% alcohol until all residue has been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape
is not acceptable.
b. Internal
c. Special
1) Identification nameplates shall be white with black letters, caution nameplates shall
be yellow with black letters, and warning nameplates shall be red with white
letters.
the panel door. All controls and indicators shall be 30mm, corrosion resistant, NEMA
4X/13, anodized aluminum or reinforced plastic. Booted control devices are not
acceptable. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run indication and
indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as
specified herein and as required by the detailed mechanical and electrical equipment
requirements.
b. Indicator lamps shall be LED type. For all control applications, indicator lamps shall
incorporate a push-to-test feature. Lens colors shall be as follows:
1) Red for ON, Valve OPEN, and Breaker CLOSED.
165477
City of Dallas
16476 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
c.
d.
e.
f.
2) Green for OFF, Valve CLOSED and Breaker OPEN.

3) Amber for FAIL.
4) Blue for READY
5) White for POWER ON.
Mode selector switches (HAND-OFF-AUTO, LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE, etc) shall be as
monitoring.
Pushbuttons, shall be as follows:
1) Red for STOP, Valve OPEN, Breaker OPEN and mushroom Red for
EMERGENCY STOP.
2) Green for START, Valve CLOSE and Breaker CLOSE.
3) Black for RESET.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
B. Enclosures
1. General
a. Provide 316 SS hardware for all enclosures.
b. All enclosure doors shall have bonding studs. The enclosure interior shall have a
bonding stud.
c. Each enclosure shall be provided with a documentation pocket on the inner door.
d. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts.
e. All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final coat
of weatherproof white paint.
f. All enclosures shall be padlockable.
g. Provide an Infrared (IR) port suitably constructed, located, and sized to allow viewing
the cable terminations, busses, and bus supports.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
C. Internal Wiring
retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation, NEMA Class II, Type B wiring. Line side
power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device.
solvent-resistant type similar to Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal.
3. All wiring shall be neatly bundled with ty-raps and supported to wire way supports. Control
wiring shall be bundled separately from power wiring. In addition, low signal wiring
(millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control wiring.
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

2. All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number. Coding shall be
permanent, non-smearing, solvent-resistant type similar to Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal
165477
City of Dallas
16476 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
3.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
In general, all conduit entering or leaving equipment shall be stubbed up into the bottom of
writing by the Owner/Engineer.
E. Control and Instrument Power Transformers.

1. Control power transformers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. Transformer
shall be sized for the entire load, including space heaters, plus 25% spare capacity.
2. Control power transformers shall be 120 volt grounded secondary. Primary side of the
transformer shall be fused in both legs. One leg of the transformer secondary shall be solidly
grounded while the other leg shall be fused.
2.4
EQUIPMENT
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
A. General
1. Automatic transfer switches shall be designed for an emergency and normal source voltage
and current ratings as shown on the Drawings. Switches shall be listed under UL 1008.
2. The switches shall initiate transfer of the load to the emergency source when any phase of
the normal source drops below 90 percent of normal voltage.
3. The transfer switches shall be adequately constructed to carry full rated current on a
continuous 24 hour basis in all approved enclosures and shall not show excessive heating or
be subject to de rating. The transfer switches shall be capable of withstanding inrush
current values to 20 times full load current rating without mechanical distortion of main
contact poles or supports. The transfer switches shall be capable of withstanding all
available system fault currents without parting of or damage to contacts during the fault
clearing time of the system over current device.
4. The transfer switches shall be of inherently 4 Pole double throw construction and shall have
three position operation: closed to normal source, open, closed to emergency source.
Transfer switches with circuit breakers or contactors are not acceptable. Time delay
between opening of the closed contacts and closing of the open contacts shall be a minimum
of 400 milliseconds to allow for voltage decay before transfer is complete. The following
accessories shall be furnished:
a. Adjustable 0 to 30 second time delay to override normal source power outages.
b. Adjustable 1 to 300 second time delay before retransfer.
5. A maintained contact test auto switch and normal/emergency pilot lights shall be mounted
on the enclosure door.
6. Where Kirk-Key arrangements are used, the Kirk keyed interlocks shall be Kirk HD Series
(Heavy Duty) 316 Series of 316 stainless steel, or approved equal.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
B. Automatic Transfer Switch

1. Transfer switches shall be rated for the voltage and ampacity as shown on the plans and
shall have 600 volt insulation on all parts in accordance with NEMA standards.
2. The unit shall be rated based on all classes of loads, i.e., resistive, tungsten, ballast and
inductive loads. Switches rated 400 amperes or less shall be UL listed for 100% tungsten
lamp load.
3. Switches composed of molded case breakers, contactors or components thereof not
specifically designed as an automatic transfer switch will not be acceptable.
4. The automatic transfer switch shall be equipped with a solenoid protection scheme that
removes any attempts of operating the solenoids after (3) consecutive trials until manual
intervention by an operator.
5. The withstand current capacity of the main contacts shall not be less than 20 times the
continuous duty rating when coordinated with any molded case circuit breaker established
by certified test data.
6. The transfer switch manufacturer shall submit test data for each size switch, showing it can
withstand fault currents of the magnitude and the duration necessary to maintain the system
integrity. Minimum UL listed withstand and close into fault ratings shall be as follows:
165477
City of Dallas
16476 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
Any Molded Case Breaker

Size (Amps)
RMS Symmetrical)
Up to 150
10,000
151 - 260
30,000
261 - 400
35,000
401 - 1200
50,000
1201 - 4000
100,000
2
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
1.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Size (Amps)
Molded Case Breaker
Up to 150
30,000
151 - 260
42,000
261 - 400
50,000
*All values 480
401 - 800
65,000
volt, RMS symmetrical, less than
801 - 1200
85,000
20% power factor
1201 - 4000
100,000
C. Generator Controls
Size (Amps)
Current Limiting Fuse
Up to 4000
200,000
Where the emergency source is a standby generator, the following additional functions shall
be provided:
a. The ATS shall incorporate adjustable three phase under and over-voltage and three
phase under and over-frequency sensing on the normal source.
b. When the voltage of any phase of the normal source is reduced to 80% or exceeds
110% nominal voltage, or frequency is displaced 2 Hz from nominal, for a period of 010 seconds (programmable) a pilot contact shall close to initiate starting of the engine
generator.
c. The ATS shall incorporate adjustable three phase under and over-voltage and three
phase under and over-frequency sensing on the emergency source.
d. When the emergency source has reached a voltage value within +/- 10% of nominal and
achieved frequency within +/- 5% of the rated value, the load shall be transferred to the
emergency source after a programmable time delay.
e. When the normal source has been restored to not less than 90% of rated voltage on all
phases, the load shall be re-transferred to the normal source after a time delay of 0 to 30
minutes (programmable). The generator shall run unloaded for 5 minutes
(programmable) and then automatically shut down. The generator shall be ready for
automatic operation upon the next failure of the normal source.
f. If the engine generator should fail while carrying the load, retransfer to the normal
source shall be made instantaneously upon restoration of proper voltage (90%) on the
normal source.
D. Control Panel
1. The transfer switch shall be equipped with a microprocessor based control panel. The
control panel shall perform the operational and display functions of the transfer switch. The
display functions of the control panel shall include ATS position and source availability.
2. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization
Device (SPD), as specified in Section 16196, Individual Control Panel and Related
Equipment Protection (Type 3).
3. The digital display shall be accessible without opening the enclosure door and shall be
provided with an LCD display screen with touch pad function and display menus. The
programming functions shall be pass code protected.
4. The control panel shall be provided with menu driven display screens for transfer switch
monitoring, control and field changeable functions and settings.
5. The control panel shall be opto-isolated from electrical noise and provided with the
following inherent control functions and capabilities:
165477
City of Dallas
16476 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
a.
Multipurpose display for continuous monitoring and control of the ATS functions and
settings. All field changeable functions shall be pass code protected and accessible
through the keypad.
b. Built-in diagnostic display that includes the capturing of historical data, such as number
of transfers and time on emergency power source, for ease of troubleshooting.
c. Touch pad test switch with Fast Test/Load/No Load positions to simulate a normal
source failure.
d. Time delay to override momentary normal source failure prior to engine start. Field
programmable 0-10 seconds (adjustable by increments of 0.1 second) factory set at 3
seconds.
e. Time delay on retransfer to normal source, programmable 0-60 minutes (adjustable by
increments of 0.1 minute) factory set at 30 minutes. If the emergency source fails
during the retransfer time delay, the transfer switch controls shall automatically bypass
the time delay and immediately retransfer to the normal position.
f. Time delay on transfer to emergency, programmable 0-5 minutes, factory set at 1
second.
g. Terminals for remote test/peak shave operation and transfer inhibit to the emergency
source.
h. An in-phase monitor shall be provided. The monitor shall compare the phase angle
difference between the normal and emergency sources and be programmed to anticipate
the zero crossing point to minimize switching transients.
i. Auxiliary contacts (1 N.O each) shall be provided to indicate normal and emergency
source availability.
j. Auxiliary contacts (1 N.O each) shall be provided to indicate normal, open and
emergency position of the switch.
k. A load/no load clock exerciser shall be incorporated within the microprocessor and
shall be programmable to start the engine generator set and transfer the load (when
selected) for exercise purposes on a weekly basis. The exerciser shall contain a lithium
battery for memory retention during an outage.
l. A timed auxiliary contact (1 N.C.) adjustable 0-60 seconds shall be provided to allow
motor loads to be disconnected prior to transfer in either direction.
m. Provide a momentary pushbutton to bypass the time delays on transfer and retransfer
and programmable commit/no commit control logic.
E. Accessories
1. Provide the following accessories:
a. Selector and Disconnect Switches.
1) Three-position selector switch; Stop/ Test/Automatic.
2) Disconnect switch to disconnect engine starting circuit.
3) Combination auto/manual retransfer selector switch.
4) Automatic/manual operation for ATS.
5) Maintained Auto - Maintained Test.
6) Where neither source is a standby generator, provide a Source selector switch
circuit to select either source as primary.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
2.5
SPARE PARTS
45
46

1. 3 Fuses of each type used.
47
48
165477
City of Dallas
16476 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2.6
2
3
4
5
in the Control Strategies in Section 13400.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
E. Refer to Section 13405 Instrumentation Input Output List for monitored parameters.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
F. Communication
a. One (1) integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP and
SNMP protocols.
Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP and SNMP.
memory area.
e. Converter shall be Digi One IAP, or approved equal.
35
2.7
FACTORY TESTING
36
37
38
A. The ATS shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given
the manufacturers routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the
workability and reliable operation of the equipment.
39
40
ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards, and shall be subject to the Owner/Engineers approval.
41
2.8
WITNESS TESTING
42
43
44
45
A. The Owner/Engineer will witness the Factory Tests for each of the following Equipment Units:
46
B. The number of Owner/Engineer persons witnessing the tests will be four [4] persons.
165477
City of Dallas
16476 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
local arrangements and has the authority to pay for those expenses prior to leaving the [Owners
Project] location, or other designated location.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
I.

reimbursement..
States shall be non stop if available, Coach Class or better, from [XXX]. Air fare outside the
Continental United States shall be non stop if available, Business Class or better, from
[XXX].
transportation to restaurants and the cost of those meals, shall be provided by the host OEM.
33
PART 3 - EXECUTION
34
3.1
35
36
37
38
A. Installer shall be specialized in installing ATSs with minimum 5 years documented experience.
Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this
project.
3.2
EXAMINATION
39
40
41
42
3.3
INSTALLATION
43
44
Drawings.
45

165477
City of Dallas
16476 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.4
3
4
3.5
FIELD ADJUSTING
6
7
A. Adjust all ATSs for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's
instructions.
8
9
B. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and
10
11
12
13
14
15
C. The Power Monitoring and Protective Relays shall be set in the field by a qualified
3.6
FIELD TESTING
16
17
18
19
20
21
3.7
22
23
24
25
3.8
26
27
28
CLEANING

3.9
29
30
31

recommendations.
32
33
3.10 TRAINING
34
35
36
B. The training shall be for a period of not less than one-half (1/2) eight hour day.
37
38
39
40
41
165477
City of Dallas
16476 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3

4
5
6
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16476 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16480
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
7
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install assemblies of low voltage motor control centers
(MCCs), together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as shown
on the Contract Drawings.
8
9
B. Motor control centers shall be sized to include all equipment, spares and spaces shown on the
Drawings.
10
1.2
SUBMITTALS
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A. Pre-submittal meeting shall be held before any shop drawings are submitted. As a minimum the
following shall attend the meeting: General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, MCC
manufacturer and Engineer. Representatives from the MCC manufacturer shall include the
Project Manager who will be responsible for the project at the factory. Any shop drawings
submitted before the pre-submittal meeting will be rejected and sent back Not Approved, Revise
and Re-submit. The MCC manufacturer shall bring with them a detailed list of the items their
submittal will include for review by the Engineer or a bootleg copy of the actual submittal.
18
19
B. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 16000 and
20
21
22
Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related
equipment will be returned unreviewed.
23
24
25
26
27
D. The original MCC equipment manufacturer shall create all MCC shop drawings, including all
wiring diagrams, in the manufacturers Engineering department. All MCC shop drawings shall
bear the original equipment manufacturers MCC logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be
maintained on file in the manufacturers MCC archive file system. Photocopies of the
Engineers ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
1. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation and plan views, dimensions, weight,
shipping splits and metering layouts. Indicate all options, special features, ratings and
deviations from the Specifications.
2. Conduit entrance drawings, including floor penetrations.
3. Unit summary tables showing detailed equipment description and nameplate data for each
compartment.
4. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for overcurrent protective devices, motor starters,
control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. List all options, trip adjustments and
accessories furnished specifically for this project.
interwiring and interlocking between units and to remotely mounted devices. Show wire and
terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings.
7. Bill of Materials
9. Floor plan
10. Top view
11. Project Specific Schematic Diagrams
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Nameplate schedule
UL Listing
Component list with detailed component information
Conduit entry/exist locations
Assembly rating including:
b. Voltage
a. Voltage
Descriptive bulletins
Product data sheets
Cable terminal sizes
Itemized list of spare parts furnished specifically for this project, including quantities,
description and part numbers.
F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

e. Certified Factory Test Reports.
f. Field Test Reports
1.3
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
A. The low voltage motor control centers and all components in this specification shall be designed
and manufactured according to latest revision of the following applicable standards (unless
otherwise noted):
2. UL 845 Electric Motor Control Centers
3. NEMA Standard SG-3 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
6. IEEE 519-1992 Guide for harmonic content and control
7. UL508C Power Conversion Equipment)
8. UL 1449 Surge Protective Devices
9. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, C64.45 Guide in Surge Environment in 600V Power Circuits
10. NEMA LS-1 Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices
11. NEC Art. 285 Surge Protection Devices (SPDs)
12. UL 1008 Transfer Switches
13. UL 991 Tests for Safety-Related Controls Employing Solid-State Devices
45
46
B. All equipment specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of
Underwriters Laboratories.
47
1.4
48
49
50
51
QUALITY ASSURANCE
minimum period of ten (10) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of
requirement.
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
D. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 or Six Sigma
certified.
1.5
8
9
10
be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer.
11
12
bolted to skids.
13
14
C. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available, equipment
15
16
17
18
19
20
D. Equipment shall not be stored onsite without written approval of the Owner/Engineer.
21
22
23
24
1.6
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
WARRANTY
the Owner.
1.7
DESIGN CRITERIA
33
34
35
A. Primary parts of the equipment, including the contactors, instrument transformers, busses,
connections and insulators, shall be coordinated to withstand mechanical stress and to have
sufficient thermal capacity for use on the proposed system without artificial cooling.
36
37
38
39
40
B. CONTROL POWER: Control power shall be 120 VAC from a control transformer located in
each combination starter. Extra control transformer VA capacity shall be furnished for powering
the motor space heater in the motor which the combination starter serves. This extra VA
capacity shall be in addition to the VA required for the other control components powered by the
control transformer.
41
42
43
C. ALLOWABLE FAULT CURRENT: Combination starters, individual components of

combination starters and feeder circuit breakers in the MCC shall be rated for 65,000 Amperes
interrupting capacity (AIC).
44
D. Busses inside MCC shall all be braced for 65,000 Amperes of fault current.
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
E. ENCLOSURE: The equipment shall be installed in NEMA 1 enclosures with gasketed door for
indoor MCC's.
3
4
5
6
7
F. HORSEPOWER RATING: Horsepowers as indicated on the Plans are approximate. The

Contractor shall furnish properly sized motor control equipment when actual motor horsepowers
are determined. If actual motor horsepowers differ from the Plans, the Contractor shall obtain
assistance from the Engineer in determining whether or not hardware and wiring changes are
necessary. The Contractor shall provide components and wire of the proper size.
8
9
G. OPERATING VOLTAGE: The MCC shall be designed and rated for operation as shown on
drawing.
10
H. IEC rated equipment shall not be acceptable.
11
12
13
14
I.
FACTORY TESTING: Equipment shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted, and tested at
the factory. After complete assembly, each unit shall be tested for operating sequence to assure
accuracy of wiring, correctness of control scheme, and functioning of the equipment. Factory
tests shall include electrical tests as described by ANSI C 37.20.
15
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
16
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
17
18
19
20
21
22
acceptable:
2. Siemens
3. Eaton
4. Square D
23
24
25
26
2.2
RATINGS
27
28
29
30
31
A. The service voltage, overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the equipment and
devices shall be as shown on the Drawings. Main and feeder circuit protective devices shall be
fully rated for the specified short circuit duty. Systems employing series connected ratings for
main and feeder devices shall not be used. Motor starter units shall be tested and UL labeled for
the specified short circuit duty in combination with the motor branch circuit protective device.
32
33
34
B. The continuous current rating of the main horizontal bus shall be as shown on the Drawings.
Vertical busses shall be sized for the structure load and shall have a minimum rating of 300
Amps. Bus bracing shall equal or exceed the specified equipment short circuit rating.
35
36
C. Motor control centers, including devices, shall be designed for continuous operation at rated
current in a 40 degree C ambient temperature.
37
D. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings.
38
2.3
39
40
41
42
43
44
CONSTRUCTION
A. General
2. Furnish and install a weather-resistant non-conducting rubber floor mat, minimum inch
thick by 4 feet wide, and extending the full length of the equipment lineup.
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3.
4.
Controls and lights shall be heavy duty oiltight construction. Devices installed in the starter
or on the door of the starter, shall be completely factory wired with connections to external
devices brought to a terminal strip installed in the starter. No field wiring shall be permitted
except for connections to remote devices from the terminal strip. A physical wiring diagram
shall be provided on each enclosure door and shall be protected to remain intact and legible
for the service life of the equipment. Control devices shall be identified as to type and
manufacturer. Pilot lights, push buttons, etc. shall be as specified.
An MCC identification number nameplate shall be fastened on the vertical wireway door of
each vertical structure. Each MCC bucket shall have its own identification number
nameplate fastened to the bottom of the bucket so that it is visible from the front after
opening the compartment door. Each control center unit shall have an engraved plastic
nameplate fastened to the outside of the unit door. Engraved plastic nameplates shall have
.33" high white letters on a black background. Nameplates shall be fastened to the MCC
with a stainless steel screw and nut on each of the nameplate. Wiring diagrams shall be
provided on the inside of each compartment door and protected so that they remain attached
and legible for the service life of the equipment.
17
18
19
20
21
22
B. Enclosure.
1. Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1 Gasketed A unless noted otherwise on the
Drawings.
main overcurrent protective device terminations, cable terminations, busses, and bus
supports
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
C. Structure.
1. Motor control centers shall consist of a series of metal enclosed, free standing, dead front
vertical sections bolted together to form double wall construction between sections.
Individual vertical sections shall be nominally 90 in high, 20 in wide and 20 in deep unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings. Vertical sections shall be mounted on steel channel sills.
Bottom channel sills shall be mounted front and rear of the vertical sections extending the
full width of each shipping split. Top of each section shall have removable plates with
lifting angle. Make provisions for field installation of additional sections to each end and
provide full depth cover plates (rodent barriers) at each end of the motor control center
channel sills.
2. Provide continuous top and bottom horizontal wireways extending the full width of the
lineup, isolated from the horizontal bus. Provide a 4 in wide, full height, vertical wireway in
each section, equipped with a hinged door and cable supports. Vertical wireway shall be
isolated from the bus and device compartments. Wireways or other metal members
openings shall have rolled edges or protective grommets.
3. Provide individual, flange formed, pan type door with concealed hinges and quarter turn
latches for each device compartment and future space. Doors shall be removable. Door
removal shall not be required to withdraw starter units or feeder tap devices.
4. Motor control centers shall be designed for against the wall mounting. All wiring, bus joints
and other mechanical parts requiring tightening or other maintenance shall be accessible
from the front or top.
5. Vertical sections shall contain horizontal wire ways at top and bottom of the structure. The
design shall be such to permit a continuous wiring trough from end to end of the entire
width of the motor control center. End vertical sections shall have cover plates, which can
be easily removed to allow continuation of wire ways and horizontal bus extensions for
future addition of vertical sections.
6. The vertical section shall also have a continuous vertical raceway extending the full height
of the structure and shall intersect with the horizontal raceways. This wire way shall be
completely barriered from the bus compartments, the controller compartment, and the
adjacent vertical units, and shall have its own separate hinged door or bolted cover.
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
7.
Combination motor control units (Size 5 and smaller), as well as other electrical assemblies,
including feeder tap units (400 amp and smaller), shall be provided with appropriately rated
stab assemblies for draw out (plug-in) type construction.
8. Plug in provisions shall include a positive guide rail system and stab shrouds to insure
alignment of stabs with the vertical bus. The stab shall be designed to increase bus contact
pressure during a fault. The stab design shall assure a consistent low-resistance contact with
the vertical bus, even after repeated insertions and removals. The unit shall be equipped
with a latching mechanism to lock the drawer in an extended or stabbed position for
maintenance and testing. Each draw out compartment shall have a separate hinged
removable door.
9. Each unit compartment shall be provided with an individual front hinged door. Motor
control and feeder units shall be interlocked mechanically with a unit disconnect device to
prevent unintentional opening of the door while unit is energized. An interlock between the
unit disconnect and the structure shall prevent the removal or reinsertion of the unit when
the unit is in the "ON" position. Means shall be provided for releasing the interlock for
intentional access and/or application of power. Pad locking arrangements shall permit
locking the disconnect device in the "OFF" position.
10. The MCC shall be furnished as a completely factory assembled unit where transportation
facilities and installation requirements permit. Minimize shipping splits if required.
11. The primed metal parts shall be electrostatically coated powder paint consisting of ANSI-61
Acrylic Paint (Light Gray) with a thickness of 2.5 mils. The paint finish shall withstand a
minimum of 1000 hours salt spray test.
12. Furnish documentation with the equipment as follows: Compartments containing panel
boards shall have a card holder on the inside of the door with the branch circuits clearly
identified. Compartments containing motor starters shall each have an overload heater
section table posted inside the door. All control compartments shall have a pocket on the
inside of the door with a copy of the appropriate schematic and wiring diagram.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
D. Unit Compartments.
1. Provide individual compartments for each removable combination starter and feeder tap
device unit. Steel barriers shall isolate the top, bottom and sides of each compartment from
adjacent units and wireways. Removable units shall connect to the vertical bus in each
section with tin plated, self-aligning, pressure type copper plug connectors. Size 6 and larger
starter units may be wired directly to the bus. Removable units shall be aligned in the
structure on guide rails or shelves and secured with a cam latch mechanism or racking
screw.
2. Provide individual, isolated compartments for fixed mounted devices such as circuit
breakers, cable lugs, metering, relaying and control devices. Main and bus tie circuit
breakers shall be wired directly to the main horizontal bus. All bus connections shall be
fully rated.
3. Provide the following features:
a. Provision to padlock unit disconnect handles in the OFF position with up to three
padlocks.
b. Mechanical interlock with bypass to prevent opening unit door with disconnect in the
ON position, or moving disconnect to the ON position while the unit door is open.
c. Mechanical split type terminal blocks for disconnecting external control wiring.
d. Auxiliary contract on unit disconnect to isolate control power when fed from an
external source.
e. Disconnect operating handles and controls devices.
49
50
51
52
E. Bus Systems
1. All bussing shall be tin plated copper.
2. The bus support system shall be high dielectric strength, low moisture absorbing high
impact material.
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Bus bracing shall be 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical unless otherwise indicated on the
Contract Drawings.
Busses shall be of uniform cross sectional area throughout their length. Tapered bus will not
be acceptable.
All bolted bus mating surfaces and splicing material shall be of the same plated material as
the bus.
The main horizontal bus shall extend the entire length of the motor control center. The main
bus, bars shall be rated as shown on the Contract Drawings, but shall not be less than 600
amperes.
Main horizontal bus: Tin plated copper, bolted joints, accessible from the front of the
structure, fully rated throughout the lineup, and factory insulated by taping. All field
assembled joints shall be taped after installation, equal to the factory bus taping.
a. Vertical section bus: Tin plated copper, full height, totally insulated and isolated by
labyrinth design barrier of glass-reinforced polyester, or sandwich insulated/isolated
busses, with shutters to cover stab openings when units are withdrawn. Provide fishtape
barriers to isolate bottom wireways from lower ends of vertical bus. Bus shall be
provided in each vertical draw out section.
Vertical busses used for a tie circuit breaker or tie feeder lugs shall be rated for a continuous
capacity equivalent to the main horizontal bus rating.
Horizontal ground bus: Provide a 600A minimum, continuous tin plated copper ground bus
that runs the entire length of the motor control center and in each section equipped with lugs
for termination of feeder and branch circuit ground conductors. Connect to ground bus in
adjacent sections with splice plates. Provide ground bolted connectors for 2/0 AWG
minimum wire at each end of the bus.
F. Wiring.
1. Wiring: Stranded, minimum size No. 14 AWG, with 600 Volt, 90 degree C, flame retardant,
Type SIS with thermoplastic insulation, NEMA Class II, Type B. Line side power wiring
shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device.
2. Identification: Numbered sleeve type wire markers at each termination point, color coding
per NEMA standards and the NEC. Foreign voltage control wiring shall be yellow.
3. All control wiring to draw out units shall be run through split type terminal blocks (draw
out) which can be split to allow easy unit removal. Motor T leads shall bolt directly to
starter or overloads and shall not be split type. Terminal blocks shall be of the fully
shielded, tubular screw clamp type, resilient collar design to eliminate loose connections.
Terminal blocks shall be nickel or tin plated, and have exposed wire numbering
corresponding to the connected wires. Terminals shall have a maximum of two wires per
terminal.
5. Where shipping splits are required between the control compartments and the starter
cubicles, interconnecting jumper wires shall be provided for field re-connection.
7. In general, all conduit entering or leaving a motor control center shall be stubbed up into the
bottom horizontal wireway directly below the vertical section in which the conductors are to
be terminated, or shall enter the motor control center from the top. Conduits shall not enter
the motor control center from the side unless approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer.
8. All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number as shown on the
solvent-resistant type, Raychem TMS-SCE.
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
9.
Wiring in the MCC shall terminate on numbered terminal strips or power distribution
blocks. No other wire connecting devices, such as wirenuts or split bolts, shall be allowed in
the MCC. Each combination starter shall be provided with an individual terminal strip for
control wiring. This terminal strip shall be arranged so that it is not necessary to remove
control wiring from the terminal strip to remove any bucket from the MCC. This terminal
strip shall be completely accessible from the front.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
G. Main Section.
1. The MCC main sections shall include the main and tie breakers, metering and power feeder
entrance to the MCC. Where a power feeder entrance is shown on the Drawings, the power
feeder entrance section shall be provided. Provide bus extensions and compression lugs for
number and size of incoming cables as shown on the Drawings. Where main and tie
breakers are shown to be key interlocked, interlocks shall be of the Kirk-Key type.
2. The Motor Control Centers shall be arranged for top or bottom entry as indicated on the
Plans. Lugs sized as required for the Motor Control Center Service shall be provided in a
compartment within the Incoming Line Unit. Bus shall be provided between the incoming
line lugs and the main circuit breaker and between the main circuit breaker and the main
horizontal bus. This bus shall have the same ampacity and same fault current bracing as the
main horizontal bus. The main circuit breaker shall have the same interrupting rating as
required for feeder circuit breakers in the MCC.
3. Main lugs, main circuit breakers, ground fault sensing equipment, lightning arrestors, surge
capacitors, potential transformers, current transformers, switches and meters shall be
installed within the incoming line unit as indicated on the Plans.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
H. Main Circuit Protective Device.

1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, main and tie circuit breakers, larger than a1200
ampere rating shall be insulated case (ICCB), 3 Pole, 600 Volt, fixed type, electrically
charged with stored energy closing mechanism. Trip device shall be solid state with
adjustable long time pickup, and delay; adjustable short time pickup and delay; short time it
switch; high range instantaneous (fixed at the breakers short-time withstand rating),
adjustable ground fault pickup and delay; ground fault delay and pickup trips for selective
tripping, and overload, short circuit, and ground fault indicator lights,
2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, main breakers 1200 ampere rating and less shall
be molded case (MCCB), 3 Pole, 600 Volt, fixed type. Trip device shall be solid state with
adjustable long time pickup, and delay; adjustable short time pickup and delay; short time it
switch; adjustable ground fault pickup and delay, and ground fault delay and pickup trips for
selective tripping. Trip device of tie circuit breakers shall be digital, solid-state, rms sensing
trip with adjustable instantaneous and tracking short time function.
3. Main breakers shall be provided with GE microEntelliguard trip units. Trip units shall be
provided with the following integrated features:
a. Advanced Metering
b. Modbus Communication
c. Waveform capture
d. Arc Flash mitigation maintenance mode
4. Advanced Metering feature of the Trip unit consists of the following for 3 phases:
a. Current
b. Voltage
c. Real Power
d. Reactive Power
e. Apparent Power
f. Peak Power Demand
g. Energy
h. Frequency
i. Power Factor
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5.
6.
7.
Where shown on the Drawings, breakers shall be rated for 100% continuous duty, and shall
carry a UL 489 listing.
Main devices shall be equipped with contacts for remote status trip indication.
Device rating shall be as shown on the Drawings.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
I.
Feeder Protective Devices (Non-Motor Loads).

1. Circuit breakers 400 amp frame and larger units shall be provided with GE
microEntelliguard trip units. Trip units shall be provided with the following integrated
features:
a. Advanced Metering
b. Modbus Communication
c. Waveform capture
2. Advanced Metering feature of the Trip unit consists of the following for 3 phases:
a. Current
b. Voltage
c. Real Power
d. Reactive Power
e. Apparent Power
f. Peak Power Demand
g. Energy
h. Frequency
i. Power Factor
3. Circuit breakers less than 400 amp frame shall be digital, solid-state, rms sensing trip with
adjustable instantaneous and tracking short time function.
24
J.
All Main and Feeder circuit breakers shall have provision for padlocking in the OFF position.
25
26
27
K. Interlocks
1. Electrical, mechanical and Kirk-Key interlocks shall be provided on breakers where shown
on the Drawings.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
L. Control Power Transformers

1. Furnish control power transformers where shown on the Drawings. Transformer mechanical
ratings shall equal the short circuit rating of the circuit breakers. Transformers, when
mounted in motor control centers, shall be rated for the full voltage of the motor control
center.
epoxy resin.
3. CONTROL TRANSFORMER: Included in combination starter units and shall include
sufficient VA capacity for powering all the devices shown in the control schematic. Each
motor space heater shall be powered from the control transformer in its combination starter.
The control transformer shall be a 480 to 120 volt transformer with a fuse in each primary
leg and one fuse in the secondary leg. The un-fused secondary leg shall be grounded.
4. Control power shall be 120 VAC from a control transformer located in each combination
starter. Extra control transformer VA capacity shall be furnished for powering the motor
space heater in the motor which the combination starter serves. This extra VA capacity shall
be in addition to the VA required for the other control components powered by the control
transformer.
45
46
47
48
49
50
M. Instrument Transformers
2. Furnish current transformers with ratios as shown on the Drawings. Transformer mechanical
ratings shall equal the short circuit and momentary rating of the circuit breakers.
Transformers, when mounted in the motor control center, shall be rated for the full voltage
of the switchboard.
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
3.
4.
5.
Voltage transformers shall be fixed type, with primary and secondary fuses, transformer
mounted, with short circuit and momentary rating equal to the motor control center.
Transformer ratios shall be as shown on the Drawings.
INSTRUMENT CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: Capable of carrying continuously its rated
primary amperes under conditions of accidental open secondary circuit without damage to
the primary insulation. Burden capacity shall be adequate to supply the connected relays,
meters and accessories. Three (3) instrument current transformers shall be furnished at each
MCC incoming line unit.
INSTRUMENT POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS: insulation meeting the requirements of
the standards of ANSI. At normal ratings under usual service conditions, no part of the
transformer shall exceed the heating limits specified in the standards of ANSI when serving
its connected load. Where the Plans indicate an MCC to have voltage metering, two (2)
instrument potential transformers shall be furnished at the MCC metering point.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
N. Surge Protection Devices

1. Each motor control center shall contain a manufacturer provided and installed, Surge
Protection System (SPD Type 2), meeting the following specifications, and if indicated on
the drawings:
a. Maximum Surge Current - 150kA per mode, 300kA per phase.
b. UL Symmetrical Fault Current Withstand Rating 200,000 Amps.
c. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current capacity
1) 1.2x50s, 20kV, 8x20s, 10kA Category C3 20,000 Impulses.
2) 500V, 2kA, 10x1000s long duration 5000 impulses.
d. UL SVR Rating 1500 L-G.
e. MCOV 170%
2. Connection to the motor control center shall be with a surge rated disconnect, mounted
integral to the motor control center.
3. Noise attenuation shall not exceed 44db measured in accordance with the procedures
outlined in accordance in NEMA LS 1 1992/MIL 220A.
4. Fusing shall be a surge rated fuse, in combination with patented thermal fuse technology.
5. Monitoring devices shall include surge counter, indicating lights, audible alarm, Form C dry
contacts at 5 amp, 125V.
6. The SPD shall have a warranty of not less than 5 years.
33
34
35
O. Provide three valve type lightning arresters and surge capacitors on each incoming line where
shown on the Drawings. Arresters and capacitors shall be the product of the MCC manufacturer
and factory installed
36
37
P. Furnish lugs for incoming line feeders, sizes as shown on the Drawings. Allow adequate
38
2.4
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. General
1. The Drawings indicate the approximate horsepower and intended control scheme of the
motor driven equipment. Provide the NEMA size starter, circuit breaker trip ratings, control
power transformers and thermal overload heater element ratings matched to the motors and
control equipment actually supplied, in compliance with the NEC and the manufacturers
heater selection tables. All variations necessary to accommodate the motors and controls as
actually furnished shall be made without extra cost to the Owner.
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Motor starters shall be as shown on the Drawings. All motor starters shall be combination
units, full voltage non-reversing (FVNR), with adjustable instantaneous trip magnetic only
circuit breakers, or motor circuit protectors (MCP), unless otherwise specified or shown on
the Drawings. NEMA starter sizes and breaker trip ratings shall be as required for the
horsepower indicated, but shall be in no case less than NEMA Size 1. If the manufacturer of
the equipment utilizing the motor, supplies a motor horsepower larger than that shown on
the Drawings, the Contractor shall supply a motor starter sufficient in size to control the
motor supplied. International (IEC) starters shall not be acceptable.
Each motor starter shall have a 120 volt operating coil unless otherwise noted.
NEMA Size 5 and smaller shall be draw out design with stab-on connectors engaging the
vertical buses. Larger units shall be of the fixed (bolt-in) design.
Overload relays shall be standard Class 20, ambient compensated, manually reset by
pushbutton located on front of the compartment door. A normally closed contact shall be
directly used in the start circuit and a normally open contact shall be wire to a terminal
board for overload alarm.
Control power transformers shall be 120 volt grounded secondary. Primary shall be fused
with slow blow fuses in each phase. One leg of the transformer secondary shall be solidly
grounded while the other leg shall be fused. The transformer shall be oversized for auxiliary
loads as indicated on drawings, but in no case be smaller than 100 VA.
Combination starters shall include a motor circuit protector (MCP) in series with a motor
controller and an overload protective device. The MCP shall have an adjustable magnetic
trip range in percent of rated continuous current and a trip test feature. MCP's shall be
labeled in accordance with UL489.
B. Magnetic Motor Starters.

1. Motor starters shall be 2 or 3 pole, single or 3 phase as required, 60 Hertz, 600 volt,
magnetically operated, full voltage non reversing except as shown on the Drawings. NEMA
sizes shall be as required for the horsepower shown on the Drawings. IEC rated starters are
unacceptable.
2. Each motor starter shall have a 120 volt operating coil, and control power transformer.
Starters shall have motor overload protection in each phase. Auxiliary contacts shall be
provided as shown on the Drawings. A minimum of one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary
contacts shall be provided in addition to the contacts shown on the Drawings.
3. The magnetic starter shall have three (3) external manual reset thermal overload relays of
either the bimetallic type or the melting alloy type. Overload relays shall be either ambient
compensated or ambient insensitive. Overload relay heaters shall be Class 10 for
submersible pump motors and hermetically sealed motors and shall be Class 20 for all other
motors. Overload relay heaters shall be selected to produce an overload trip at no more than
the following percent of the motor nameplate full load current rating:
39
Motors with a marked service factory not less than 1.15
125%
40
Motors with a marked temperature rise of not over 40C
125%
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
4.
5.
6.
165477
All other motors

115%
Overload relays shall be adjustable, ambient compensated and manually reset. Overload
relays shall be resettable from outside the enclosure by means of an insulated bar or button.
Auxiliary contacts shall be furnished on the circuit breaker or MCP operating mechanism,
the starter contactor and on the overload sensing unit as shown on the Plans.
Control power transformers shall be sized for additional load of 150VA or an additional
10% whichever is larger. Transformer primary shall be equipped with slow blow fuses.
Control power transformers shall not be located behind other components and shall be
accessible for removal or replacement without removing any other component.
Built in control stations and indicating lights shall be furnished where shown on the
Drawings.
City of Dallas
16480 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
7.
8.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
All wires shall be terminated on terminal blocks and shall be tagged.

The control compartment shall have a pocket on the inside of the door with a copy of the
appropriate schematic and wiring diagram.
C. Combination Magnetic Motor Starters.

1. Motor starters shall be a combination motor circuit protector and contactor, 2 or 3 pole,
single or 3 phase as required, 60 Hertz, 600 volt, magnetically operated, full voltage non
reversing unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. NEMA starter frame sizes shall be as
shown on the Drawings. If the motor supplied by the equipment supplier is larger than that
shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall supply a larger frame size corresponding to the
motor supplied. Motor circuit protectors shall be molded case with adjustable magnetic trip
only. They shall be specifically designed for use with magnetic motor starters. Motor circuit
protectors shall be current limiting type, with additional current limiters if required. IEC
rated starters are unacceptable.
contacts shall be provided in addition to the contacts shown on the Drawings.
3. The magnetic starter shall have three (3) external manual reset thermal overload relays of
either the bimetallic type or the melting alloy type. Overload relays shall be either ambient
compensated or ambient insensitive. Overload relay heaters shall be Class 10 for
submersible pump motors and hermetically sealed motors and shall be Class 20 for all other
motors. Overload relay heaters shall be selected to produce an overload trip at no more than
the following percent of the motor nameplate full load current rating:
24
Motors with a marked service factory not less than 1.15
125%
25
Motors with a marked temperature rise of not over 40C
125%
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
All other motors

115%
Overload relays shall be adjustable, ambient compensated and manually reset. Overload
relays shall be resettable from outside the enclosure by means of an insulated bar or button.
Auxiliary contacts shall be furnished on the circuit breaker or MCP operating mechanism,
the starter contactor and on the overload sensing unit as shown on the Plans.
Control power transformers shall be sized for additional load of 150VA or an additional
10% whichever is larger. Transformer primary shall be equipped with time delay fuses.
Drawings.
The control compartment shall have a pocket on the inside of the door with a copy of the
appropriate schematic and wiring diagram.
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
D. Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights and Selector Switches.

1. Provide heavy-duty, 30mm, oil-tight type pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights
and stations, push-to-test, for these devices. Indicating lights shall be of the LED type.
2. Provide devices meeting the requirements of NEMA ICS 2, and having individual, extra
large nameplates indicating their specific function. Provide pushbutton stations with
laminated plastic nameplates indicating the drive they control, stainless steel screw attached.
Provide contacts with NEMA designation rating A600. Install provisions for locking
pushbuttons and selector switches in the OFF position wherever lockout provisions are
indicated.
47
E. Control Relays.
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
1.
Industrial-type; contacts rated for 10 amps at 600 VAC: Allen-Bradley 700 PK; capability
of having contact decks added in the field; field convertible to normally open or normally
closed. Coils and contacts shall each be replaceable without replacing any other part of the
relay. Industrial control relays shall be furnished whether the relay coil is operated with 120
VAC or 24 VDC.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
F. Timing Relays.
1. Solid-state, having the capability to be hand set by an external dial. Terminals shall be front
mounted and readily accessible. Ranges shall be as shown on the Plans. The timing relays
shall have both normally open and normally closed contacts by having two (2) sets of form
C contacts. Timing relays where shown on the plans shall be Allen- Bradley 700-HRM type
time delay relay, for operation on the control voltage of the equipment, etc. Timing relays
shall be provided with restraining strap.
13
14
15
16
17
G. Elapsed Time Meter.

1. Elapsed time meter shall be installed in each starter: Yokogawa Type 240, or approved. The
meter shall be of a non-reset type, for totalizing of hours and shall operate on 120 VAC, 60
Hertz. Starter shall be provided with an elapsed time meter; Yokogawa Model 240, 3
New Big Look type elapsed time meter. Digital time meters are not acceptable.
18
19
20
21
22
23
H. Terminal Strips.
1. Terminal strips shall be installed for wire terminations and shall be Allen-Bradley 1492 H1
or Allen-Bradley 1492-CA2. Each terminal strip shall have hinged marking surfaces which
snap on. Typewritten labels shall denote terminal strip numbers and shall match numbers
shown on shop drawings, O&M manuals and wiring diagrams. Marking surfaces shall be
Allen-Bradley 1492-N41 and labels shall be Allen-Bradley 1492-N43.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
I.
32
2.5
Phase Failure, Phase Reversal Relay.

1. 3-phase, phase voltage unbalance, phase reversal, phase failure and high-low voltage relay
PFR furnished and installed between the MCP or circuit breaker and the motor starter
contactor as shown on the Plans. The relay shall be factory wired to the necessary auxiliary
relays PFR with contacts which open in the event of high voltage-low voltage phase failure,
phase reversal or phase voltage unbalance. Auxiliary contacts shall be connected to control
circuits as shown on the Plans. Relay shall have on and off delays with automatic reset upon
return to normal operating conditions. The relay shall have two form C contacts.
SPARE PARTS
33
34
35

1. 3 Control fuses of type used.
2. One quart of touch-up paint.
36
37
exterior of package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part number.
38
2.6
FACTORY TESTING
39
40
41
A. The Motor Control Center shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and
42
43
B. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of
44
45
46
C. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as far
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 13
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
D. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports as specified in
Paragraph 1.03D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
5
6
7
8
9
10
A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's field representative to assist the
Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this section for a period
of not less than 2 working days, with not less than one working day per motor control center.
The manufacturer's field Engineer shall provide technical direction and assistance to the
Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of
the assembly and components contained therein.
11
B. The Contractor shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's field testing report.
12
3.2
13
14
15
16
A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a Multilin factory trained Contractor to make
changes to the existing plantwide Multilin based HMI system, as specified in Section 16000
Electrical General Provisions.
3.3
17
18
19
20
METERING AND PROTECTIVE RELAYS INSTALLATION
A. Installer shall be specialized in installing low voltage motor control centers with minimum 5
years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior
to beginning work on this project.
3.4
EXAMINATION
21
22
23
24
B. Housekeeping pads shall be included for the motor control centers as detailed on the Drawings
with the exception of motor control centers which are to be installed adjacent to an existing unit.
Housekeeping pads for these (if used) should match the existing installation.
25
26
27
E. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer.
28
3.5
INSTALLATION
29
30
Drawings.
31
32
3.6
33
34
35
36
3.7
37
38
FIELD ADJUSTING
A. Testing Agency: Engage a third party qualified testing and inspecting agency independent of the
manufacturer to perform field adjustment.
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 14
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
B. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and
3
4
5
C. The third party testing agency shall check to confirm that all settings, designated in a
coordinated study of the system as required in Section 16105 Power System Study, have been
made.
3.8
7
8
FIELD TESTING
A. Testing Agency: Engage a third party NETA Certified testing and inspecting agency
independent of the manufacturer to perform field testing and prepare test reports.
9
10
B. The manufacturers field Engineer shall make all electrical field tests recommended by the
manufacturer. Disconnect all connections to solid-state equipment prior to testing.
11
12
13
14
C. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance of each bus section.
Megger, for 1 minute, at minimum voltage of 1000 VDC. Measured Insulation resistance shall
be at least 100 megohms. In no case shall the manufacturers maximum test voltages be
exceeded.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
D. Complete the following test forms:

1. Motor Control Center Test Report: Before energizing the motor control center, the
Contractor shall perform megohm meter tests. The measurements shall be made on all phase
busing and the data checked for conformance with typical manufacturers data. The tests
must adhere to manufacturers testing recommendations for the proper testing methods and
test voltage levels for each piece of equipment. Readings that fall below manufacturers
recommended values will not be acceptable and the Contractor shall be required to perform
any necessary remedial action before the busing is energized. A data sheet shall be
submitted to the Owner/Engineer for the MCC. The test report shall include the following
equipment information:
a. MCC (SB OR PNL) NAME AND NUMBER:
b. MCC (SB OR PNL) MANUFACTURER
c. MCC (SB OR PNL) NAMEPLATE DATA:
1) VOLTS:
2) HORIZONTAL BUS AMPS:
3) MAIN BREAKER AMPS:
d. INSULATION TEST (MEASURED):
1) PHASE A-B:
2) PHASE B-C:
3) PHASE C-A:
4) PHASE A-G:
5) PHASE B-G:
6) PHASE C-G:
e. EQUIPMENT DISCONNECTED DURING TEST:
f. DATE OF TEST:
g. TESTED BY:
41
42
43
44
45
46
E. Testing Agency: Engage a third party NETA Certified testing and inspecting agency to perform
the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except for optional tests,
stated in NETA ATS "Motor Control Centers." Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
47
48
49
F. Where test reports show unsatisfactory results, the Owner/Engineer may require the removal of
items, all at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall bear all cost for any retesting.
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 15
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.9
2
3
4
5
3.10 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION
6
7
8
CLEANING
3.11 FIELD CERTIFICATION
9
10
11
A. The third party testing agency shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed,
adjusted, including all settings designated in the Power System Study, and tested in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
12
B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's certification.
13
3.12 TRAINING
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

program shall include instructions on the assembly, motor starters, protective devices, metering,
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16480 - 16
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16483
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
8
9
SCOPE OF WORK
A. The pump manufacturer shall furnish and supervise the installation and start-up of four medium
voltage variable frequency drives (VFDs) for use with the concrete volute pumps specified in
Section 11210, together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as
shown on the Contract Drawings. For the purpose of this Specification, the terms, VFD, ASD.
AFD and Inverter are synonymous.
10
11
B. The VFD manufacturer shall coordinate with the motor manufacturer for the motor being
furnished, and shall provide a certification that the VFD is suitable for the application.
12
C. The VFD manufacturer shall also coordinate with the pump and gear box manufacturers.
13
14
D. The cooling system for the VFD shall be with a liquid to liquid heat exchanger built into the
VFD cabinet.
15
16
E. The VFD manufacturer shall be responsible to program the station PLC as defined in the
instrumentation section.
17
1.2
RELATED WORK
18
A. Section 11210 Concrete Volute Pumps
19
B. Section 11211 Parallel Shaft Gear Reducers
20
C. Section 16000 Electrical General Provisions
21
D. Section 16045 - Electrical Support Hardware
22
E. Section 16105 - Power System Study
23
F. Section 16151- Large Induction Motors
24
G. Section 16195 - Power Metering and Protective Relays
25
1.3
SUBMITTALS
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
wiring diagrams, in the manufacturers Engineering Department. All equipment shop drawings
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
1. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for all components of the drives, including motor
contactors, drive components, control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. The
manufacturers name shall be clearly visible on the each cut sheet submitted. List all
options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project. Clearly mark
each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that do not apply.
2. Harmonic analysis, as specified herein.
3. Provide drive performance specifications.
4. Heat loss data for each typical unit.
5. Drive system efficiency, including the effects of transformers, fans and other devices.
exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc.
8. Schematic diagram, including manufacturers selections of component ratings, and CT and
PT ratios.
number.
b. Voltage
14. Provide data for the built-in heat exchanger mounted inside the VFD for a glycol cooled
VFD with a water cooled heat exchanger system. The data shall include maximum and
minimum flow rates, pressures, and temperatures for water. The system shall include fully
redundant pumps and automatic switchover in the event of a pump failure.
a. Voltage
16. Controls
17. Protection
18. Operation
19. Software Programming Manual
20. Diagnostics
22. Instruction and renewal parts books.
23. Provide mechanical key interlocks on all doors.
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
F. A Preliminary Harmonic study shall include the following.

1. The point of common coupling will be main bus of 4160V switchgear
2. The individual harmonic content shall be provided for up to 50th harmonic
3. Expected RMS total harmonic voltage and current distortion expected.
4. The study shall evaluate all VFDs operating at the lowest operating speed as specified in
pump specification, all VFDs operating at full speed condition and at 10% speed
increments between these points.
52
53
G. The reference voltage for motor starting analysis to be provided by vendor is steady state
condition at the 4160V bus.
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
1.
The motor starting study shall be for the last motor starting with all other motors and loads
on the bus shall not result in more than 10% voltage dip
H. Certification that the VFD being supplied is suitable for the application.
I.
Factory Tests: Submittals shall be made for factory tests plan and final results.
J.
Field Test Reports: Submittals shall be made for field tests plan and final results.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
K. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the
1. Manufacturers contact address and telephone number for parts and service.
2. Instruction books and/or leaflets
3. Recommended renewal parts list
4. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above.
1.4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
otherwise noted):
4. IEEE 519 (latest revision) - Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of
Static Power Converters
5. IEEE 1100 Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment (Emerald Book)
6. UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment
7. NEMA ICS 6 Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures
8. NEMA ICS 7.0 Industrial Controls & Systems for VFD.
9. IEC 61800-02 and -3. EN 50082-1 and -2
a. Fulfill all EMC immunity requirements
10. UL 347A Medium Voltage Power Conversion Equipment
28
29
B. In the case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed
documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.
30
31
C. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the
32
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for discontinuation within the next
seven years shall not be used.
42
D. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified.
43
44
E. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does
45
46
F. The VFD manufacturer shall be able to provide start-up service, 24-hour/day emergency call
service, repair work, maintenance and troubleshooting training of customer personnel.
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
G. A factory authorized service and parts organization shall be located within 400 miles of the
project location. Provide the name and address of the factory authorized service and parts
organization nearest to the project location as a submittal.
1.6
5
6
7
8
copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work,
or failed factory tests will not be permitted.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
equipment.
21
22
23
space heaters, during onsite storage and after the equipment is installed in its permanent location,
24
1.7
RELIABILITY
25
26
A. The VFD shall be designed with a Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of at least ten years. All
components of the VFD shall be considered for MTBF calculations.
27
28
29
B. The manufacturer shall list any control or power components that require recommended
maintenance or replacement before 50,000 hours of operation. Information must be available in
the manufacturers maintenance and included in the submittals, at no cost to the Owner.
30
1.8
31
32
33
34
35
36
WARRANTY
workmanship for five years from the date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such
Owner.
37
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
38
2.1
39
40
41
42
MANUFACTURERS
acceptable:
1. Rockwell Automation
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturer listed above is not relieved
2.2
RATINGS
5
6
7
8
9
interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be not less than 40KAIC. Systems of
motor controllers employing series connected ratings for main and feeder devices shall not be
used. Variable frequency drives shall be tested and UL labeled for the specified short circuit
duty in combination with the motor branch circuit protective device.
10
11
12
B. The VFD shall be capable of providing rated output for continuous input voltage deviations of
10% from the nominal rating with transformer taps adjusted accordingly for continuous
operation matching the average system voltage.
13
14
C. The VFD shall be capable of continuous operation (ride-through) in the event of a power loss of
up to five cycles.
15
16
D. The VFD shall be able to safely operate, without tripping, with up to 30% voltage sag on the
rated input voltage.
17
18
E. The VFD one-minute overload current rating shall be 110% of rated current for variable torque
applications, and 150% of rated current for constant torque applications.
19
20
F. The VFD output voltage shall not cause insulation stress to the motor or exceed the peak voltage
insulation level of the motor. Output filters, if required, shall be integral to the drive cabinet.
21
22
23
24
G. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a harmonic analysis showing that the drives meet
IEEE 519 at the Point of common Coupling. The Point of Common coupling shall be defined as
the 4160V bus. The harmonic analysis shall include all voltage and current harmonics through
the 50th. This analysis shall be included as a part of the equipment submittal.
25
26
H. VFDs, including associated devices, shall be designed for continuous operation at rated current
in a 40 degree C ambient temperature and Relative Humidity of 5% to 90%
27
28
I.
The maximum noise level of the unit shall not exceed 80 dBA at a distance of 1 meter from the
unit and at a height of 1.5 meters from the floor.
29
J.
For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings.
30
31
K. The predicted speed torque characteristic of a combination of VFD, motor, gear drive , and the
pump shall meet the speed- torque characteristic requirement of the pump manufacturer .
32
33
L. The safe stable operating region shall be shown in the VFD data, with gear box and motor
included.
34
2.3
VFD PERFORMANCE
35
36
A. The VFD shall be capable of operating with variable torque load having a speed range of 10% to
100%
37
B. The speed accuracy shall be plus/ minus 0.5%
38
39
C. The VFD shall be capable of providing breakaway and accelerating torque for the pump with
gear box
40
D. The VFD system shall maintain a true power factor of 95% from 10 to 100% of speed range.
41
42
E. The VFD shall provide a output wave form such that the driven motor will not require derating,
or any special insulation.
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
F. A minimum of 90% of heat generated by the VFD shall be removed by liquid to liquid heat
exchanger
3
4
G. Each power device shall have a bypass option. A fault shall be shunted allowing the VFD to
resume operation at a reduced capacity.
2.4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
CONSTRUCTION
A. General
ratings of devices, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components
and assemblies; and other required details.
2. Control units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings.
3. Except for VFD equipment, where the equipment contains a programmable logic controller
(PLC) or a uninterruptible power supply (UPS), the equipment manufacturer shall furnish
factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section
16196, Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3).
4. The VFD shall be a glycol cooled VFD with a water cooled heat exchanger system with a
built-in heat exchanger.
overcurrent protective devices, cable terminations, busses, and bus supports
6. Nameplates
a. External
1) Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, not less than
1/16-in thick by 3/4-in by 2-1/2-in, Rowmark 322402. Nameplates shall be 316 SS
screw mounted to all enclosures except for NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates for
NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached with double faced adhesive strips,
TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X , or equal. Prior to installing the nameplates,
the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until all residue
has been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable.
b. Internal
c. Special
letters.
b. Indicator lamps shall be LED type. Lens color shall be Red for ON (e.g. motors) or
CLOSED (e.g. valves), Green for OFF (e.g. motors) or OPEN (e.g. valves), Amber for
FAIL or ALARM. And White for POWER ON. For all control applications, indicator
lamps shall incorporate a push-to-test feature.
c. Mode selector switches (HAND-OFF-AUTO, LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE, etc.) shall be
as shown on the Drawings. Units shall have the number of positions and contact
monitoring.
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
d.
e.
f.
Pushbuttons, shall be Red for START (e.g. motors) or CLOSE (e.g. valves), Green for
STOP (e.g. motors) or OPEN (e.g. valves), mushroom Red for EMERGENCY STOP
(Pull to Reset), and Black for RESET.
10
11
12
13
14
15
B. Control and Instrument Power Transformers

1. Control power transformers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. Transformer
shall be sized for the entire load, including space heaters, plus 25% spare capacity.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
C. Internal Wiring
1. Bus bar with standard NEMA four-hole pattern shall be supplied for input and output
connection of external wiring and shall be conveniently located, clearly numbered, and
identified.
2. Control wire terminal blocks for external wiring terminations shall be compression screw
type, designed to accommodate stripped insulation bare wire ends, and shall accept a
minimum of two No. 14 AWG wires.
3. Connection points for inputs and outputs of different voltage levels shall be segregated to
reduce possibility of electrical noise.
4. Where wiring is run through sheet metal or any barrier, bushings, grommets or other
mechanical protection around the sheet or barrier opening shall be provided.
5. All internal wiring shall be terminated with no more than two conductors per terminal point.
6. The VFD shall have an internal mechanical ground connection suitable for terminating a
stranded copper ground conductor of the same size as the incoming phase conductors.
Ground connections shall be near the incoming and outgoing power cable termination points
and control wiring connections.
7. Enclosures shall be designed to accommodate power and control cable entries from the
direction shown on the Drawings.
8. Minimum wire bending space shall meet or exceed the value shown in the NEC for
termination of the power cable.
retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation, NEMA Class II, Type B. Line side power
wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device.
10. Identification: Numbered sleeve type wire markers at each termination point, color coding
per NEMA standards and the NEC. Foreign voltage control wiring shall be yellow.
11. All wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number as shown on drawings.
The marking shall be permanent, non-smearing, solvent-resistant type similar to Raychem
TMS-SCE, or equal.
12. Control wire terminal blocks for external wiring terminations shall be compression screw
type, designed to accommodate stripped insulation bare wire ends, and shall accept a
minimum of two No. 14 AWG wires.
50
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie
All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number. The marking shall
be a permanent, non-smearing, solvent-resistant type similar to Raychem TMS-SCE, or
equal
In general, all conduit entering or leaving a motor control center shall be stubbed up into the
bottom horizontal wireway directly below the vertical section in which the conductors are to
be terminated, or shall enter the motor control center from the top. Conduits shall not enter
the motor control center from the side unless approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer.
POWER DISCONNECTING DEVICES
13
14
15
16
17
A. The VFD Manufacturer shall include an integral main disconnect device with an interlocked and
padlockable handle mechanism. The disconnecting device shall be a medium voltage vacuum
contactor with a bolted pressure disconnect switch whose blades are externally visible from
outside the enclosure. The disconnect device and associated fuses shall have a minimum rating
of 350 MVA.
18
19
B. The incoming line shall have distribution class lightning arrestors to protect from transient
voltages. The transformer and rectifier shall be an integral part of the VFD assembly.
20
21
22
C. When multiple inverter enclosure doors are supplied, all doors shall be electrically interlocked
with the disconnect device. The interlocks shall include a provision to manually override for test
and repair.
23
2.6
POWER BUS
24
A. All power bus bars and other high current carrying parts shall be tin-plated copper.
25
B. Bus bars shall be braced to withstand short circuit currents with a minimum of 40KAIC.
26
C. Input and output connections shall be either top or bottom access in the standard design.
27
28
D. Provide an Infrared (IR) port suitably constructed, located, and sized to allow viewing the cable
terminations, busses, and bus supports.
29
2.7
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS)

A. General
motor driven equipment. Provide the VFD, auxiliary components and equipment where
shown or specified, and matched to the motors and control equipment actually supplied, in
compliance with the NEC. All variations necessary to accommodate the motors and controls
as actually furnished shall be made without extra cost to the Owner.
2. For variable torque applications the overload capacity shall be 110% of rated current for one
minute repeated every ten minutes. For constant torque applications the overload capacity
shall be 150% of rated current for one minute repeated every ten minutes.
3. Each VFD shall have an AC input isolation contactor to provide a means for positive
disconnection of the drive output from the power supply.
4. The VFD output voltage shall not cause insulation stress to the motor or exceed the peak
voltage insulation level of the motor. Output filters, if required, shall be integral to the drive
cabinet. Any capacitors supplied shall be oil filled.
5. The VFD shall be suitable for use with a new standard squirrel cage motor with 1.15 service
factor and standard medium-voltage insulation.
6. Furnish a drive main disconnect with AC input line current limiting fuses and disconnect to
provide a means of disconnecting the VFD from the line under fault conditions.
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
7.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Where shown on the Drawings, furnish a 120 VAC control to allow VFD to interface with
remote dry contacts.
B. Construction
1. The VFD shall be of the Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) design converting the utility input
voltage and frequency to a variable voltage and frequency output via a two-step operation.
The VFD inverter/chopper shall be of the pulse width modulated (PWM) type. The output
devices shall be of the pulse width modulated (PWM) type, with a PIV rating of not less
than 125 percent of the system voltage.
2. Each cell shall communicate to the controller through optical communications. No other
isolation method is permitted.
3. A high resistance ground detection circuit at the neutral point shall be included for alarm or
warning in the event the load develops a ground leakage current or fault.
4. The output of the inverter shall produce harmonic current of not more than 3% over a speed
range of 10% to 100% regardless of load.
5. The VFD shall be provided with an integral phase shifting isolation transformer for a
minimum 18-pulse rectification or an integral line reactor for use with an active front end
rectifier to reduce harmonic currents and voltages reflected to the primary power system.
6. Transformers shall have an electrostatic shield for protection from voltage transients.
7. VFD shall provide microprocessor-based control, with no less than a 3.6kHZ switching
frequency.
8. Drives shall have, as a minimum, input line fuses and Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV).
9. Service Conditions
a. Input power: Motor voltage, plus 10 percent, minus 5 percent, 3 Phase, 60 Hz.
b. Input frequency: 57 to 63 Hz.
c. Ambient temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C (Enclosed).
d. Elevation: Up to 3300 feet above mean sea level.
e. Relative humidity: Up to 90 percent non-condensing.
10. Minimum Drive Efficiency: The complete drive, from input to output, shall have an
efficiency at full load and speed that exceeds 97%. The efficiency shall exceed 90% at 50%
speed and load.
11. The VFD fundamental power factor shall be > 0.97. The total power factor at the VFD
input shall be > 0.95, for the load range of 20 to 100%. The VFD manufacturer shall provide
a power factor correction filter if the VFD does not meet this requirement. The VFD
including power factor correction and/or harmonic filter shall never have a leading power
factor.
12. Drive Output: 100 percent rated current continuous, suitable for operation of the driven
equipment over a 30:1 speed range without overloading or low speed cogging. Drives shall
be capable of a continuous overload up to 110 percent rated current and a maximum 150
percent overload for 1 minute. Starting torque shall be matched to the load.
13. Voltage Regulation: plus or minus 1 percent of rated value, no load to full load.
14. Output Frequency Drift: No more than plus or minus 0.5 percent from setpoint.
15. Drives shall withstand five cycle transient voltage dips of up to 15 percent of rated voltage
without an undervoltage trip or fault shutdown, while operating a variable torque load.
16. Output waveform switching transients and harmonic content shall have a negligible
contribution to motor heating, acoustical noise in the motor, torsional stress in the power
train, and motor insulation.
17. Common mode voltages on the VFD output shall be isolated from the motor.
18. Motor cable voltage reflections and the resulting restrictions on motor cable length shall be
eliminated.
19. The VFD output shall produce sinusoidal voltage output waveform with less than 3%
voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) throughout the speed range of 30% 100% speed.
20. The audible motor noise shall not increase while powered by the VFDs.
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21. The VFD shall be able to start into a spinning motor. The VFD shall be able to determine
the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. If the motor is
spinning in the reverse direction, the VFD shall start the motor in the reverse direction,
bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor to the preset speed.
22. The VFD shall have an integral EMI/RFI filter as standard.
23. Protection of power semiconductor components shall be accomplished without the use of
fast acting semiconductor output fuses. Subjecting the controller to any of the following
conditions shall not result in component failure or the need for fuse replacement.
a. Short circuit at controller output
b. Ground fault at controller output
c. Open circuit at controller output
d. Input undervoltage
e. DC bus overvoltage
f. Loss of input phase
g. AC line switching transients
h. Instantaneous overload
i. Sustained overload exceeding 115 percent of controller rated current
j. Overtemperature responsive to a thermal switch in the motor or an overload relay
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
C. Control Functions
1. Frequently accessed VFD programmable parameters shall be adjustable from a digital
operator keypad located on the front of the VFD. The VFD shall have a multiline
alphanumeric programmable display with status indicators. Keypads must use plain English
words for parameters, status, and diagnostic messages. Keypads that are difficult to read or
understand are not acceptable, and particularly those that use alphanumeric code and tables.
Keypads shall be adjustable for contrast with large characters easily visible in normal
ambient light.
2. The keypad shall include a Local/Remote selection. Both start/ stop source and speed
reference shall be independently programmable for Keypad or Remote I/O.
3. Upon initial power-up of the VFD, the keypad shall display a startup guide that will
sequence all the necessary parameter adjustments for general start up.
4. Standard advanced programming and trouble-shooting functions shall be available by using
a personal computers RS-232 port and Windows 7 based software. In addition the
software shall permit control and monitoring via a VFD RJ-45 port using TCP/IP protocol.
Manufacturer shall provide, and license (to the City) advanced programming and troubleshooting software. Manufacturer shall also install and set-up this software on the Owners,
Windows 7 computer. TCP/IP shall be used for communication between the Computer
and the controllers. An easily understood instruction manual and software help screens
shall also be provided. The computer software shall be used for modifying the drive setup
and reviewing diagnostic and trend information as specified in this Section.
5. The operator shall be able to scroll through the keypad menu to choose between the
following:
a. Monitor
b. Operate
c. Parameter setup
d. Actual parameter values
e. Active faults
f. Fault history
g. LCD contrast adjustment
h. Information to indicate the standard software and optional features software loaded.
6. The following setups and adjustments, at a minimum, are to be available:
a. Start command from keypad, remote or communications port
b. Speed command from keypad, remote or communications port
c. Motor direction selection
d. Maximum and minimum speed limits
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
7.
165477
e. Acceleration and deceleration times, two settable ranges

f. Critical (skip) frequency avoidance
g. Torque limit
h. Multiple attempt restart function
i. Multiple preset speeds adjustment
j. Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection
k. Programmable analog output
l. PID process controller
System Interfaces
a. Inputs A minimum of six programmable digital inputs, two analog inputs and serial
communications interface shall be provided with the following available as a
minimum:
1) Remote manual/auto
2) Remote start/stop
3) Remote forward/reverse
4) Remote preset speeds
5) Remote external trip
6) Remote fault reset
7) Process control speed reference interface, 4-20mA DC
8) Potentiometer and 0-10VDC speed reference interface
9) RS-232 programming and operation interface port
10) RS485 communications port
11) Make provisions to accept a remote dry contact closure to start and stop the
drive(s) with the drive control system in the AUTO mode.
b. Outputs A minimum of two discrete programmable digital outputs, one
programmable open collector output, and one programmable analog output shall be
provided, with the following available as a minimum.
1) Programmable relay outputs with one set of Form C contacts for each, selectable
with the following available at minimum:
a)
Fault
b)
Run
c)
Ready
d)
Reversing
e)
Jogging
f)
At speed
g)
In torque limit
h)
Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded
i)
Over-temperature
j)
Auto output enable
2) Programmable open collector output with available 24VDC power supply and
selectable with the following available at minimum:
a)
Fault
b)
Run
c)
Ready
d)
Reversing
e)
Jogging
f)
At speed
g)
In torque limit
h)
Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded
i)
Over-temperature
3) Programmable analog output signal, selectable with the following available at
minimum:
a)
Motor current
b)
Output frequency
City of Dallas
16483 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Frequency reference
Motor speed
Motor torque
Motor power
Motor voltage
DC link voltage
RS485 communications port
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
D. Monitoring and Displays

1. Displays
a. The VFD display shall be a LCD type capable of displaying multiple lines of text and
the following status indicators:
1) Run
2) Forward
3) Reverse
4) Stop
5) Ready
6) Alarm
7) Fault
8) Local
9) Panel
10) Remote
11) Hand
12) Auto
13) Off
2. Keypad
a. The VFD keypad shall be capable of displaying the following monitoring functions at a
minimum:
1) Output frequency
2) Motor speed
3) Motor current
4) Motor torque
5) Motor power
6) Motor voltage
7) DC-link voltage
8) Heatsink temperature
9) Total operating days counter
10) Operating hours (with reset function)
11) Total megawatt hours
12) Megawatt hours (with reset function)
13) Motor temperature rise, percentage of allowable
14) Voltage level of analog input
15) Current level of analog input
16) Digital inputs status
17) Digital and relay outputs status
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
E. Protective Functions
1. The VFD shall include the following protective features at minimum:
a. Over-current
b. Over-voltage
c. Inverter fault
d. Under-voltage
e. Input phase loss
f. Output phase loss
g. Under-temperature
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2.
10
11
12
13
14
h. Over-temperature
i. Motor stalled
j. Motor over-temperature
k. Motor under-load
l. Logic voltage failure
m. Microprocessor failure
n. DC injection braking
The VFD shall provide ground fault protection during power-up, starting, and running. VFD
with no ground fault protection during running is not acceptable.
F. Diagnostic Features
1. Fault history
a. Record and log faults
b. Indicate the most recent first, and store up to a minimum of nine faults
2.8
METERING AND PROTECTIVE RELAYS
15
16
A. A 100VA minimum UPS shall be provided, powered from the control power transformer to
provide control power to the feeder management relays and power quality meters.
17
18
B. Furnish where shown on the Drawings, a Phase Protective Relay (PPR), as shown on the
Drawings, and as specified in Section 16195 Power Metering and Protective Relays.
19
20
C. Furnish where shown on the Drawings, a Motor Protection System (MP4) as specified in Section
16195 Power Metering and Protective Relays.
21
22
D. Furnish a Remote RTD Metering and Protection (RRTD), as shown on the Drawings, and as
specified in Section 16195 Power Metering and Protective Relays.
23
24
E. Furnish where shown on the Drawings, a Power Quality Meter (PM1), for each VFD, as shown
on the Drawings and as specified in Section 16195 Power Metering and Protective Relays.
25
2.9
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
F. Communication
1. For remote monitoring, the following communication capabilities shall be provided:
SNMP protocols.
b. One (1) media protocol converter, interfacing the provided equipment to a
10/100BaseT Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP and SNMP.
a. All data must be available and/or mirrored within the Modbus 4x or "Holding Register"
memory area.
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 13
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
b.
Register 4x00001 must exist and be readable to allow simple, predictable "comm
tests".
2.10 SPARE PARTS
4
5
6

1. 3 Control fuses of each type used.
2. 3 Power fuses of each type used.
7
8
2.11 ACCESSORIES
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A. Provide the following accessories:

1. 1 Breaker test equipment.
2. 1 Breaker remote racking assembly.
3. Furnish and install a non-conducting switchboard floor mat, minimum 3/8 inch thick by 3
feet wide, meeting ANSI/ASTM D-178-01 Type 2 Class 3, Wearwell 702 or equal, and
extending the full length of the equipment lineup.
17
A. The motor controllers shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
B. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this
Section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards.
Minimum testing shall include the following:
1. Power semiconductors shall be thermally cycled prior to final assembly into the VFD.
2. Printed circuit boards shall be given a manufacturers burn-in test prior to assembly into the
VFD.
3. Individual power cell shall undergo a visual inspection, an electrical inspection, and a
complete full load test prior to final assembly into the VFD.
4. Mechanical operation tests shall be performed for each VFD to verify satisfactory operation.
These tests shall include checking operating mechanisms and interlock devices.
5. Electrical function tests shall be performed to ensure proper operation of all devices and
components including operation of the VFD at full load conditions. Instrumentation,
software, and monitoring tests shall be included.
6. The final assembly, including any input transformer, shall be tested at full voltage and full
current, via an induction motor test stand, or dynamometer, for no less than 12 hours,
cycling at 110% for variable torque and 150% for constant torque applications.
34
35
36
37
38
C. Following completion of factory tests, the Vendor shall furnish to the Owner/Engineer for
review and approval four certified copies of all test data and test curves for each drive. The
Owner/Engineer will promptly review test data and, upon determining that the drive meets
contract requirements, authorization will be given for shipment. Shipment shall not be made
without written approval of test data by the Owner/Engineer, except at the risk of the Vendor.
39
40
41
A. The Owner/Engineer will witness the factory tests defined above for all VFDs supplied under
this Specification.
42
43
44
45
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 14
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
E. Provide actual speed torque measured at test site.
F. The cooling system performance shall also be evaluated.
6
7
G. The Owner/Engineer, who is witnessing the testing, shall approve all travel arrangements,
8
9
H. The Owner/Engineer shall have direct communications with the person who is responsible for
local arrangements.
10
11
12
I.
The Contractor shall submit the testing agenda for approval at least 30 days prior to the test date,
13
J.
Where travel is over night, testing shall not start on the arrival day.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
K. Owner/Engineer Personal Travel Expenses

reimbursement.
States shall be nonstop if available, Coach Class or better.
transportation to restaurants and the cost of those meals, shall be provided by the host OEM.
29
30
31
32
L. After successful testing and with Owners approval, all VFD units shall be shipped to the motor
manufacturers test facility for complete testing of the motor, and VFD assembly. Refer to
Large Induction Motors (Specification 16151) for additional information regarding factory
testing.
33
PART 3 - EXECUTION
34
3.1
35
36
37
38
39
40
of not less than 4 working days per drive. The manufacturer's field Engineer shall provide
technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment,
3.2
41
42
43
A. Installer shall be specialized in installing medium voltage variable frequency drives with
minimum five years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for
approval prior to beginning work on this project.
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 15
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.3
EXAMINATION
3
4
5
B. Housekeeping pads shall be included for the floor mounted VFDs as detailed on the Drawings
with the exception of VFDs which are to be installed adjacent to an existing unit. Housekeeping
pads for these (if used) should match the existing installation.
3.4
INSTALLATION
10
11
Drawings.
12
13
3.5
14
15
16
specified in Manufacturer's instructions.
17
18
19
20
21
22
C. The Contractor under the technical direction of the manufacturers field Engineer shall perform
the following minimum work:
1. Inspection and final adjustments.
2. Operational and functional checks of VFD and spare parts.
3. The Contractor shall certify that he has read the drive manufacturers installation
instructions and has installed the equipment in accordance with those instructions.
23
D. The Contractor shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report.
24
3.6
FIELD ADJUSTING
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
3.7
FIELD TESTING
34
35
A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the Manufacturer. Disconnect all connections
36
37
38
B. The VFD manufacturers field Engineer shall perform field measurements, of both the voltage
and current harmonic distortion at the point of common coupling with operating conditions to
determine compliance with the Specifications.
39
40
C. The VFD manufacturers field Engineer shall perform field measurements to confirm that any
resonant frequencies are satisfactorily blocked.
41
D. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning.
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 16
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.8
2
3
4
5
3.9
6
7
8
CLEANING

9
10
11
A. The manufacturers field Engineer shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed,
adjusted, including all settings designated in the Power System Study, and tested in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
12
13
3.11 TRAINING
14
15
the variable frequency drives furnished under this Section.
16
B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one 8-hour day.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

25
26
27
28
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 17
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
16483 - 18
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16487
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install functional control panels to manually or automatically operate control
systems as specified in the detailed requirements of this Section, and logic and schematics as
shown on the Electrical Drawings.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B. Submittals for Electrical Control Panels, not clearly specified as Control Panels by the Electrical
or Mechanical equipment manufacturer, shall be submitted under this Section of the
Specifications. Control panels specified in the Process Equipment Division or Mechanical
Equipment Division shall not be submitted under this Section. Control Panels for those
Divisions, shall meet the requirements of Section 16486 Mechanical Equipment Manufacturers
Control Panels, and shall be submitted as a part of the Mechanical Equipment manufacturers
submittals or Process Equipment Division Submittals. Control panels specified for the
Instrumentation Division shall be submitted as a part of the Instrumentation Division submittals.
16
17
18
19
C. Enclosures for control devices containing but not limited to pushbuttons, selector switches, and
indicator lights that are to be placed in a Class 1, Division 2, Group D location shall be placed in
a NEMA 4X box instead of a NEMA 7 box with factory sealed and encapsulated (hermetically
sealed) devices rated for a Class 1, Division 2 location. Refer for enclosure types herein.
20
1.2
RELATED WORK
21
22
23
C. Section 16327 Panel Mounted Equipment
24
D. Section 16196 Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices (SPDs)
25
E. Section 13500 Programmable Logic Controller System
26
F. Section 13327 Panel Mounted Equipment
27
G. Section 13505 Operation Interface Terminal (OIT)
28
H. Section 16033 Cast-In-Place Concrete for Electrical Applications
29
I.
Section 16105 Power System Study
30
J.
Section 16195 Power Metering and Protective Relays
31
1.3
SUBMITTALS
32
33
34
35
36
B. Provide systems Engineering to produce coordination curves, showing coordination between

existing and breakers and/or fuses submitted, such that protective device coordination is
37
38
39
40
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
1. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for overcurrent protective devices, motor starters,
control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. The manufacturers name shall be
3. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation, plan and interior views, front panel
arrangement, dimensions, weight, shipping splits, conduit entrances and anchor bolt pattern.
Indicate all options, special features, ratings and deviations from this Section.
4. Power and control schematics including external connections. Show wire and terminal
numbers, and color-coding.
5. Instruction and replacement parts books.
6. As-built final drawings.
7. Documentation that the panel assembly facility is a UL-508 certified panel shop.
8. Facsimile of the UL label that is to be applied to the completed panel.
9. Furnish complete Bill of Materials indicating manufacturer's name and part numbers.
10. Manufacturers cut sheets for every component used in the panel assembly adequately
marked to show the items being included. The manufacturers name shall be clearly visible
on the each cut sheet submitted.
b. Voltage
a. Voltage
13. Cable terminal sizes.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48
1.4
49
50
51

otherwise noted):
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6
7
8
NEMA Standard ICS 2 2000 Industrial Control and Systems

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
NFPA 70E Standard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace
NFPA 79 Electrical Standard for Industrical Machinery
UL 508/508A Industrial Control Enclosures
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
9
10
11
12
period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of
requirement.
13
14
15
B. The control panels shall be assembled in a UL-508 certified facility. A submittal of

documentation certifying that the panel fabrication facility is a UL-508 certified facility, is
required.
16
17
18
not be used.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
F. Equipment components and devices shall be UL labeled wherever UL standards exist for such
equipment. The completed control panel shall be UL Labeled in accordance with UL 508 and
508A and other applicable UL standards. The panel shall also be UL labeled for the
environment in which it is to be placed. A UL label shall be affixed to the inside of the external
door by the panel fabrication assembly. Submit a facsimile of the UL label in the submittal
information.
28
1.6
29
30
31
32
copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work,
or failed factory tests will not be permitted.
33
34
35
B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two (2)
be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within
seven (7) calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven (7)
equipment.
43
44
45
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.7
2
3
4
5
6
WARRANTY
workmanship for 1 year from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of
the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS
9
10
11
12
13
14
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following material Manufacturers are
acceptable:
2. Eaton / Cutler-Hammer
3. Square D Co.
4. Allen Bradley
15
16
17
not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Materials listed above are not relieved
from meeting these Specifications in their entirety.
18
2.2
RATINGS
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
A. The service voltage shall be as specified and as shown on the Drawings. The overall short circuit
withstand and interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be equal to or greater than
the overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately
upstream of the Control Panel, but not less than 22,000 amperes RMS symmetrical at 480/277
Volts, This includes all circuit breakers and combination motor starters. Systems of motor
controllers employing series connected ratings for main and feeder devices shall not be used.
Motor starter units shall be tested and UL 508A labeled for the specified short circuit duty in
combination with the motor branch circuit protective device.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
B. There shall be selective device coordination between the Main Breaker, Feeder Breakers and
control circuit protective devices. When using a circuit breaker or fuses as a main protective
device, the instantaneous trip levels of the main protective device shall be higher than the
available fault current to the control panel. If fuses are utilized in the control panel design, the
protective devices for 3 phase loads shall contain single phase protection of such equipment. If a
fault occurs in the circuit of one load of a design with a backup load, the feeder protective device
shall not remove both loads from the control system.
34
C. Use ground fault sensing on grounded wye systems.
35
36
D. The complete control panel assembly shall be UL certified or carry a UL listing for "Industrial
Control Panels".
37
E. The control panel shall meet all applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code.
38
39
F. The control panel enclosure shall be NEMA rated as indicated in Section 16000 of the Electrical
Specifications.
40
41
G. Motor controllers, including associated devices, shall be designed for continuous operation at
rated current in a 40 degree C ambient temperature.
42
H. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings.
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I.
The Manufacturer shall produce and install on each panel, an Arc Flash Warning Label listing
the various Flash Hazard Protection Boundaries, calculated from NFPA 70E, Annexes, as listed
below:
1. Flash Hazard Protection Boundary.
2. Limited Approach Boundary.
3. Restricted Boundary.
4. Prohibited Boundary.
5. Incident Energy Level.
6. Required Personal Protective Equipment Class.
7. Type of Fire Rated Clothing.
11
12
J.
Provide an Arc Flash Warning Label, printed in color and affixed to the front of each panel
provided.
13
14
K. Shown below is a typical label. Size of each label shall be not less than 8 inches wide and 6
inches tall.
15
16
17
2.3
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
CONSTRUCTION
A. General
2. Control units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings.
3. Except for VFD equipment, where the equipment contains a programmable logic controller
(PLC) or a uninterruptible power supply (UPS), the equipment manufacturer shall furnish
factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section
16196 ,Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3).
4. Where Kirk-Key arrangements are used, the Kirk keyed interlocks shall be Kirk HD Series
(Heavy Duty) 316 Series of 316 stainless steel.
5. Nameplates
a. External
1) Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, not less than
1/16-in thick by 3/4-in by 2-1/2-in, Rowmark 322402. Nameplates shall be 316 SS
screw mounted to all enclosures except for NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates for
NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached with double faced adhesive strips,
TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X . Prior to installing the adhesive nameplates,
the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until all residue has
been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable.
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
6.
7.
8.
165477
2) There shall be a master nameplate that indicates supply voltage equipment ratings,
short circuit current rating, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general
information. Cubicle nameplates shall be mounted on the front face, on the rear
panel and inside the assembly, visible when the rear panel is removed.
3) Provide permanent warning signs as follows:
a) "Danger- High Voltage- Keep Out" on all doors.
b) "Warning- Hazard of Electric Shock - Disconnect Power Before Opening or
Working On This Unit" on main power disconnect or disconnects.
b. Internal
1) Provide the panel with a UL 508A label.
c. Special
1) Identification nameplates shall be white with black letters, caution nameplates shall
be yellow with black letters, and warning nameplates shall be red with white
letters.
Control Devices and Indicators
b. Indicator lamps shall be LED type. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, lens color
shall be red for ON or running and green for OFF or stopped and amber for FAIL or
ALARM. For all control applications, indicator lamps shall incorporate a push-to-test
feature.
c. Mode selector switches (HAND-OFF-AUTO, LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE, etc) shall be as
monitoring.
d. Pushbuttons shall be mushroom red for Stop or Open the circuit, and Green or Black for
Start the device or Close the circuit.
e. Furnish nameplates for each device. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black
f. The manufacturer shall not remove, reuse, alter, or replace original equipment
g. Control and Instrument Power Transformers
1) Control power transformers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings.
Transformer shall be sized for the entire load, including space heaters, plus 25%
spare capacity.
2) Control power transformers shall be 120 volt grounded secondary. Primary side of
the transformer shall be fused in both legs. One leg of the transformer secondary
shall be solidly grounded while the other leg shall be fused.
A failure alarm with horn and beacon light shall be provided when required or specified.
Silence and reset buttons shall be furnished. Alarm horn and beacon shall be by Federal
Signal; Crouse-Hinds, NEMA 4X for all areas except for NEMA 7/4X areas, which shall be
NEMA 7 cast aluminum.
Where specified or shown on the Drawings, a six digit, non-resettable elapsed time meter
shall be installed on the face of each motor starter. Meter shall be as specified in Section
16195.
City of Dallas
16487 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
B. Equipment Enclosure Types for Area Classifications

1. Provide NEMA 7/4X, cast aluminum enclosures for indoor/outdoor use in hazardous
(classified as Class 1, Division 1, Groups B, C and D), as defined in NFPA 70.
2. Provide Non-metallic type NEMA 4X enclosures, of PVC or fiberglass reinforced polyester,
for Chlorine, Caustic and other Chemical Rooms. Fiberglass enclosures shall not be used in
the presence of sodium hypochlorite.
3. Provide NEMA 12 enclosures, unless otherwise specified herein, or shown on the Drawings,
for all dry, indoor above grade locations. These areas shall be limited to electrical rooms,
administration areas, control rooms and storage rooms.
4. Provide NEMA 4X Aluminum Enclosures where specifically designated herein or shown on
the Drawings.
5. Provide NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel enclosures for all other areas, unless specifically
stated otherwise, or shown on the Drawings.
6. NEMA Types 1 or 1A enclosures will not be permitted, unless specifically stated in the
Specification for the equipment, or shown on the Drawings.
7. All enclosures installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final coat
of weather-proof white paint.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
C. Panel Specifications
1. NEMA 12 Areas
a. Wall Mounted
1) Enclosures shall be of factory gray painted aluminum, with mounting lugs suitable
for wall mounting. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts. Enclosures shall
not be less than .080 in. thick, gauge metal. All enclosures shall have continuous
hinged, foam-in-place gasketed doors with handle latch, 3-point above 20 x 20.
All enclosures shall have bonding provisions on door. Enclosures shall be Comline
Series with Hoffman APWKXXXXNFSS Window Kit, where shown on the
Drawings, as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Free Standing
1) Enclosures shall be of factory gray painted steel, with lifting eyes, without
knockouts or holes. Enclosures shall not be less than 12 gauge metal. All
enclosures shall have continuous hinged, foam-in-place gasketed doors with handle
latch, 3-point. All enclosures shall have bonding provisions on door. Enclosures
shall be AXXXXXXFS Series with Hoffman APWKXXXXNFSS Window
Kit,where shown on the Drawings, as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Co.
2. NEMA 4X Areas
a. Wall Mounted
1) Enclosures shall be NEMA Type 4X of 316 stainless steel with mounting lugs or
brackets made on the enclosure suitable for wall mounting. Enclosures shall not
have holes or knockouts. Enclosures shall not be less than .080 in. thick, gauge
metal. All enclosures shall have continuous hinged, foam-in-place gasketed doors
with handle latch, 3-point above 20 x 20. All enclosures shall have bonding
provisions on door. Enclosures shall be LHCXXXXXXSS6 Series with Hoffman
APWKXXXXNFSS Window Kit, where shown on the Drawings, as manufactured
by Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Free Standing
1) Enclosures shall be NEMA Type 4X of 316 stainless steel, with lifting eyes,
without knockouts or holes. Enclosures shall not be less than 12 gauge metal. All
enclosures shall have continuous hinged, foam-in-place gasketed doors with handle
latch, 3-point. All enclosures shall have bonding provisions on door. Enclosures
shall be AXXXXXXFSSS6 Series with Hoffman APWKXXXXNFSS Window
Kit, where shown on the Drawings, as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Co.
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
NEMA 7/4x Areas: Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use in hazardous
(classified as Class 1, Division 1 or 2, Groups A, B, C, or as defined in NFPA 70. Boxes
shall be copper-free aluminum, with stainless steel hinged cover, watertight neoprene cover
gasket, with stainless steel bolts. All penetrations shall be factory drilled and tapped.
Enclosures shall be Type EJB Style C as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co. or
Appleton Electric Co.
Chemical Areas: Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X, non-metallic, made of PVC or fiberglass
reinforced polyester. Construction shall be the same as specified for NEMA 4X boxes as
specified above. Non-metallic boxes shall have UV inhibitors, but not mounted in direct
sunlight. Where clamp type latches are required, provide quick- release luggage type
latches.
All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final coat of
weather-proof white paint.
Each enclosure shall incorporate a removable back panel, and side panels, on which control
components shall be mounted. Back panel shall be secured to the enclosure with collar studs
for wall mounted enclosures, and 316 SS hardware for free standing enclosures. The
enclosure door shall be interlocked with the main circuit breaker by a door mounted
operating mechanism. Back panel shall be tapped to accept all mounting screws. Selftapping screws shall not be used to mount any components.
All enclosures shall be padlockable.
The enclosure outer door shall have a rear mounted pocket, containing laminated copies of
the Control schematics.
Overload tables shall be laminated and adhered to the inside of the door.
D. Environmental Conditioning
1. Condensation Control
a. A self-contained enclosure condensation heater with thermostat and fan shall be
mounted inside the control panel, if panel is mounted outdoors or in a non-airconditioned space.
1) Enclosure heaters shall be energized from 120 volt, single-phase power supply and
sized to prevent condensation within the enclosure.
2) Locate enclosure heaters to avoid overheating electronic hardware or producing
large temperature fluctuations on the hardware.
3) Enclosure heaters shall have an internal fan for heat distribution and shall be
controlled with adjustable thermostats. The thermostat shall have an adjustment
range of 40 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide a circuit breaker
or fused disconnect switch within the enclosure.
4) Enclosure heaters shall be Hoffman type DAH.
b. Strip heaters may be provided if they are 240 volt rated, powered at 120 volts AC and
do not have a surface temperature higher than 60C. Strip heaters and thermostats shall
be as manufactured by Chromolox.
1) Strip heaters shall be Chromalox, Type OT, 1.5-in wide, 240 Volts, single phase,
150 watts, energized at 120 volts, with rust resisting iron sheath, Catalog No. OT715, Product Code No. 129314. Provide sufficient wattage in heaters to prevent
condensation should the interior temperature of the enclosure drop below the dew
point.
2) A control thermostat mounted inside the control Panel shall be Chromalox, Type
WR, single stage, Catalog No. WR-80, Product Code No.263177.
3) The strip heater terminals shall be guarded by a protective terminal cover.
4) High temperature connecting lead wire shall be used between the thermostat and
the heater terminals. Wire shall be No. 12 AWG stranded, nickel-plated copper
with Teflon glass insulation and shall be the product of Chromalox, Catalog No. 6CFI-12, Product Code No. 263783.
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
165477
Each panel shall have a stainless steel condensate drain, installed on a stainless steel
conduit hub, HGTZ Series, or T&B, in the bottom of the enclosure. Drain shall be O-Z
GedneyDBB-50SS.
Corrosion Control
a. Provide corrosion protection in each control panel with a corrosion-Inhibiting vapor
capsule as manufactured by Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC, or Hoffman
Engineering; Model A-HCI.
Panel Interior Ambient Control
a. The manufacturer shall provide ambient temperature control within the panel to
maintain internal temperatures below the maximum operating temperatures of the panel
components. an ambient temperature range of -20 C to 40C.
b. The manufacturer shall provide panel internal heat rise calculations to show that the
panel internal temperatures will be maintained below the maximum operating
temperatures of the panel components.
c. The calculation shall show all the internal and external heat gain loads, the expected
internal temperature rise in degrees C above the specified ambient, If the specified
temperature range connot be met, an air conditioning system shall be provided with
sufficient capacity to maintain the temperature within the specified limits. Panels, for
which the calculated heat rise exceeds 40 C., shall have an air conditioning system,
sized as required to reduce the heat rise to 40 C. or less, without violating the NEMA
rating of the enclosure.
d. The air conditioner shall have the following features:
1) Use CFC-free R134a refrigerant.
2) Have fully gasketed flanges on all four mounting edges for a watertight seal that
maintains NEMA 4X rating of the panel.
3) Thermostatic low temperature control to provide energy efficient operation and
prevents over-cooling.
4) EMI/RFI suppressor to minimize transient spikes during compressor on/off
cycling.
5) Separated blower-driven evaporator and condenser air systems for closed loop
cooling.
6) UL listed.
7) Stainless steel enclosure.
8) Internal corrosion resistant coating.
9) Low ambient kit.
10) Short cycle protector.
11) The air conditioning unit shall be Hoffman or Thermo Electric.
Enclosure Fans
a. Fans shall be furnished for soft start starters and VFDs, as required by the
manufacturer, to provide air circulation and cooling. . Fans shall be controlled by a
temperature switch. The fan shall operate only when the drive is ON and for a cooldown period after the drive has stopped Otherwise the fan shall not run when the drive
is OFF. Louvers, if provided, shall have externally removable filters. The filter shall
be metallic and washable.
b. Fan motors shall be protected by an input circuit breaker. Metal squirrel cage ball
bearing, three phase fan motors with 10-year design life shall be used in the drive
design. Plastic muffin fans are not acceptable. Fan power shall be obtained from a tap
on the main control power transformer.
c. A loss of cooling fault shall be furnished. In the event of clogged filters or fan failure,
the drive shall produce an alarm and then, in a predetermined time, be shut down safely
without electronic component failure by the temperature switch.
d. Redundant fans shall be provided in the drive design as backup in the event of fan
failure.
Corrosion Protection
City of Dallas
16487 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
a.
Provide corrosion protection in each control panel with a corrosion-Inhibiting vapor

capsule as manufactured by Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC or Hoffman
Engineering; Model A-HCI.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
E. Internal Wiring
1. Power and control wiring shall be tinned stranded copper, minimum size No. 14 AWG, with
600 Volt, 90 degree C, flame retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation. Line side
power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device, and as
shown on the Drawings.
2. Analog signal wires shall be 600 Volt Class, insulated stranded tinned copper, twisted
shielded #16 AWG pair.
3. All interconnecting wires between panel mounted equipment and external equipment shall
be terminated at numbered terminal blocks. Field wiring shall not be terminated directly on
any panel-mounted device.
solvent-resistant type similar to Raychem TMS-SCE.
5. All wiring shall be enclosed in PVC wire trough with slotted side openings and removable
cover. Plan wire routing such that no low twisted shielded pair cable conducting analog 420 mA signals or low voltage analog signals are routed in the same wire trough as
conductors carrying discrete signals or power.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
F. Field Installed Internal Wiring

2. All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number. Coding shall be
permanent, non-smearing, solvent-resistant type similar to Raychem TMS-SCE.
3. In general, all conduit entering or leaving equipment shall be stubbed up into the bottom of
writing by the Owner/Engineer.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
G. Terminal Blocks
1. Terminal blocks shall be DIN-rail-mounted one-piece molded plastic blocks with tubularclamp-screw type and end barriers. Terminal blocks shall be rated for 600 volts except for
control and instrumentation circuits, or 4-20 mA analog signal conductors.
2. Provide 600 volt rated terminal blocks for any conductor carrying any voltage over 120
volts to ground.
3. Provide 600 volt rated strap screw terminal blocks for any power conductors carrying over
20 amps, at any voltage. Terminals shall be double sided and supplied with removable
covers to prevent accidental contact with live circuits.
4. Power conductors carrying over 20 amps, at any voltage shall be terminated to strap-screw
type terminal blocks with crimp type, pre-insulated, ring-tongue lugs. Lugs shall be of the
appropriate size for the terminal block screws and for the number and size of the wires
terminated. Do not terminate more than one conductor in any lug, and do not land more
than two conductors under any strap-screw terminal point.
5. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, clearly visible with the protective
cover removed. Each terminal block shall have 20 percent spare terminals, but not less than
two spare terminals.
6. Use the manufacturers provided bridge connectors to interconnect terminal blocks
terminating common or ground conductors.
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7.
Twisted shielded pair or triad cables shall have each individual conductor and shield drain
wire landed on individual terminal blocks. Use the manufacturers provided bridge
connectors to interconnect terminal blocks terminating the shield drain wire conductors.
8. Control circuits, 120 volts and below, and 4-20 mA analog signal conductors shall be
terminated with manufacturers recommended insulated connectors.
9. Provide an AC ground bar bonded to the panel enclosure (if metal) with 20 percent spare
terminals.
10. Provided ground terminal blocks for each twisted-shielded pair drain wire.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
H. Control Power Transformers

1. Control power transformers shall be provided where required. Transformer shall be sized for
all of the load, including space heaters, plus 25% spare capacity, and shall be not less than
100VA.
2. Transformer mechanical ratings shall equal the short circuit rating of the circuit breaker or
MCP.
epoxy resin.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
I.
27
2.4
28
29
30
31
32
Instrument Transformers
2. Current transformers shall be provided where required. Transformer mechanical ratings
shall equal the short circuit and momentary rating of the circuit breakers. Transformers,
when mounted in the motor controller, shall be rated for the full voltage of the equipment.
3. Voltage transformers shall be fixed type, with primary and secondary fuses, transformer
mounted, with short circuit and momentary rating equal to the motor controller.
SERVICE ENTRANCE DEVICE

A. Where the Control Panel is rated and used as a service entrance panel, the manufacturer shall
furnish factory installed in the Control Panel, a dedicated (SPD) (Type 2), permanently
connected, Surge Protective Device on the load side of the service entrance panel, as specified in
Section 16196 Low Voltage AC Surge Protective Devices (SPDs).
2.5
MAIN CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICE
33
34
35
36
37
A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the main circuit protective device shall be a molded
case (MCCB), 3 Pole, 600 Volt, fixed type, manually operated with stored energy closing
mechanism. Trip device shall be solid state with adjustable long time pickup, and delay;
adjustable short time pickup and delay; short time i2t switch; adjustable ground fault pickup and
delay, and ground fault delay and pickup trips for selective tripping.
38
39
40
41
B. Provide a flange mounted main power disconnect operating handle with mechanical interlock
having a bypass that will allow the panel door to open only when the switch is in the OFF
position. Where panels are shown or specified with inner and outer doors, disconnecting handles
and controls shall be located on the inner door.
42
2.6
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)
43
44
45
A. Where the control panel contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) for programming of the
control logic, the manufacturer shall provide the address list, and an Ethernet interface to
connect to the Owners plant monitoring system for monitoring of the PLCs operation.
46
B. Provide a scripted program file for all PLCs.
47
48
C. Where the control panel contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) or a uninterruptible
power supply (UPS), the equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 11
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section 16196 Individual Control Panel and
Related Equipment Protection (Type 3).
3
4
5
D. The manufacturer shall provide the address list and an Ethernet interface to connect to the
Owners plant monitoring system for monitoring of the PLCs operation.
2.7
OPERATION INTERFACE TERMINAL (OIT)
6
7
8
A. Where the control panel contains an Operation Interface Terminal for interfacing to the control
logic, the manufacturer shall provide the address list, and an Ethernet and serial interface to
connect to the related PLC for monitoring and control of the PLCs operation.
B. Provide a scripted application and fully documented setup for all OITs.
10
11
12
C. Where the control panel contains an Operation Interface Terminal (OIT), the equipment
manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as
specified in Section 16196 Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3).
13
14
D. The manufacturer shall provide the address list and an Ethernet interface to connect to the
Owners plant monitoring system for monitoring of the PLCs OIT interface.
15
2.8
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
F. Communication
SNMP protocols.
Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP and SNMP.
memory area.
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 12
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
e.
2.9
Converter shall be Digi One IAP.
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
A. Manufacturers
acceptable:
a. Cutler Hammer
b. General Electric Company
c. Allen Bradley
d. Square D
2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that
do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
B. General
motor driven equipment. Provide the NEMA size starter, circuit breaker trip ratings, control
power transformers and thermal overload heater element ratings matched to the motors and
control equipment actually supplied, in compliance with the NEC and the manufacturers
heater selection tables. All variations necessary to accommodate the motors and controls as
actually furnished shall be made without extra cost to the Owner.
2. Furnish lugs for incoming wiring, sizes as shown on the Drawings. Allow adequate
3. A NEMA rated magnetic motor starter shall be furnished for each motor. Each motor starter
shall be provided with a motor circuit protector, or circuit breaker, and equipped to provide
undervoltage release and overload protection on all three phases. The short circuuit
protective device shall have an adjustable magnetic trip range up to 1400 percent of rated
continuous current and a trip test feature. MCP's shall be labeled in accordance with
UL489. NEMA starter sizes and breaker trip ratings shall be as required for the horsepower
indicated, but shall be in no case less than NEMA Size 1. If the manufacturer of the
equipment utilizing the motor, supplies a motor horsepower larger than that shown on the
Drawings, the Contractor shall supply a motor starter sufficient in size to control the motor
supplied.
4. A mechanical disconnect mechanism, with bypass, shall be installed on each motor circuit
protector, capable of being locked in the "OFF" position to provide a means of
disconnecting power to each motor. Disconnects mechanisms shall be located inside the
enclosure such that the main circuit breaker handle is the only device interlocked with the
panel door.
5. Each motor starter shall have a 120 volt operating coil unless otherwise noted.
6. Overload relays shall be standard Class 20, ambient compensated, manually reset by
pushbutton located on front of the starter door. A normally closed contact shall be directly
used in the start circuit and a normally open contact shall be wire to a terminal board for
overload alarm.
7. All interfaces between control panel and remote devices shall be isolated via an interposing
relay. Interposing relays shall have contacts rated for 250 VAC and 10 Amps continuous.
Relays shall be Control Relays as specified herein.
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
C. Magnetic Motor Starters

1. Motor starters shall be 2 or 3 pole, single or 3 phase as required, 60 Hertz, 600 volt,
magnetically operated, full voltage non reversing. NEMA sizes shall be as required for the
horsepower shown on the Drawings.
contacts shall be provided in addition to the contacts required.
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 13
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
3.
4.
5.
6.
Overload relays shall be adjustable, ambient compensated and manually reset.

Drawings.
Provide as built wiring diagram and post it in a protective cover inside the cell.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
D. Contactors
1. Contactors shall be a circuit breaker and contactor, 600 Volt, 3 Pole, 60 Hz, magnetically
operated. NEMA size shall be as required for the kilowatt ratings required for the equipment
provided, but shall be not less than NEMA size 1.
2. Contactors shall have a 120 Volt operating coil and control power transformer. Furnish the
control power transformer with extra capacity for the unit heater fan.
3. Combination Contactors used for lighting control shall be as specified herein, magnetically
operated, with the number of channels and poles as shown on the Drawings. Each contactor
shall be controlled by an Astronomic Time Clock Tyco Model TC-100, 3000VA photo
control Precision Controls Model T-368-AL, or a combination of both clock and photo
control, all as shown on the Drawings. The photocell shall be separately located as shown
on the Drawings. The photocell enclosure shall be as required by the area classification.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
E. Control Relays
1. Control relays shall be 300 volt, industrial rated, plug-in socket type, housed in a transparent
polycarbonate dust cover, designed in accordance with UL Standard 508 for motor
controller duty. Continuous contact rating shall be 10 amperes resistive, HP at 120 VAC,
operating temperature minus 10 to plus 55 degrees C. Provide spare N.O. & N.C. contacts.
Relays shall be Potter & Brumfield KRP Series with neon coil indicator light. Timing relays
shall be 300 Volt, solid state type, with rotary switch to select the timing range.
25
26
27
28
F. Elapsed Time Meter

1. Where a elapsed time meter is specified or shown on the Drawings, a six digit, nonresettable elapsed time meter shall be installed on the face of each motor starter. Meter shall
be as specified in Section 16195.
29
2.10 SPARE PARTS
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
A. Provide the following spare parts for each control panel in the quantities specified:
1. One-half dozen replacement fuses, all types and sizes
2. One replacement lamp, of each color, for pilot lights
3. One of each color replacement lens caps for pilot lights
4. One starter coil for each NEMA size furnished
5. One, 3-pole set of replacement overload heaters of each size range used
6. One, 3-pole set of starter contacts of each [NEMA] size used.
7. One can of aerosol touch-up paint.
38
39
B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage. Identify each item with
manufacturers name, description and part number on the exterior of the package.
40
41
42
43
A. The entire control panel shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and
44
45
46
47
48
C. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as far
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 14
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
D. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of
ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards, and shall be subject to the Owner/Engineers approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
5
6
7
8
A. Installer shall be specialized in installing this type of equipment with minimum 5 years
documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to
beginning work on this project.
3.2
EXAMINATION
10
11
12
B. Housekeeping pads shall be included for the floor mounted motor controllers as detailed on the
Drawings with the exception of motor controllers which are to be installed adjacent to an
existing unit. Housekeeping pads for these (if used) should match the existing installation.
13
14
15
16
3.3
INSTALLATION
17
18
Drawings.
19
20
21
B. Conduit hubs for use on raceway system pull and junction boxes shall be watertight, threaded
aluminum, insulated throat, stainless steel grounding screw, as manufactured by T&B
H150GRA Series.
22
23
C. Conduits entering a control Panel or box containing electrical equipment, shall not enter the
enclosure through the top.
24
D. Install required safety labels.
25
3.4
RACEWAY SEALING
26
27
A. Where raceways enter junction boxes or control panels containing electrical or instrumentation
equipment, all entrances shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant.
28
B. This requirement shall be strictly adhered to for all raceways in the conduit system.
29
3.5
30
31
32
33
3.6
FIELD ADJUSTING
34
35
36
37
38
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 15
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
3.7
FIELD TESTING
4
5
6
7
8
C. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning.
10
11
D. Test all control logic before energizing the motor or equipment.

3.8
12
13
14
15
A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the motor controllers. Remove dirt, dust,
or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum
cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air.
3.9
16
17
18
CLEANING

19
20
21

equipment has been installed, adjusted, including all settings designated in the Power System
Study, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
22
23
3.11 TRAINING
24
25
the soft start starters furnished under this Section.
26
27
B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one (1) eight hour
day.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

36
37
38
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16487 - 16
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
7
8
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install light fixtures,
complete with lamps, ballasts and other incidentals. Electrical work shall be in accordance with
Section 16010, General Electrical Requirements.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
10
11
12
B. Lamps shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following Manufacturers:
1. Sylvania
2. General Electric
13
C. Fixtures and Lamps shall be UL Listed.
14
1.3
STANDARDS
15
A. NFPA 70
16
B. UL 1570
17
C. UL 844
18
D. UL 1029
19
E. ANSI C82.4
20
F. UL924
21
1.4
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340 and shall include:

1. Product data sheets: Product data sheets shall be marked for each fixture type, arranged in
the order of the fixture designation. Product data shall describe fixtures, lamps, ballasts and
emergency lighting units and shall include the following:
a. Outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of the fixture.
b. Electrical ratings and photometric data provided by certified laboratory tests for the
fixture and lamps.
1.5
DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Ship light fixtures inside protective cartons and keep packaged until installed. Deliver lamps to
the job site in the original packing cases and sleeves.
30
31
32
SUBMITTALS
1.6
JOB CONDITIONS
33
A. Provide cold weather ballasts in fixtures which are subject to temperatures below 32 degrees F.
34
35
B. Provide special mounting, enclosures and fire-safing, as required by the authorities having
jurisdiction so that the integrity of the U.L. listed ceiling assembles is maintained.
36
37
C. Provide U.L. labels where fixtures are subject to moisture. Provide DL or Wl label on fixtures
required for the location
165477
City of Dallas
LIGHTING SYSTEM
16500 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.7
2
3
4
5
6
WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the system and equipment to be free from defects in material
and workmanship for 1 year from date of Owners final acceptance of the equipment. Within
such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary
to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or
transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
9
10
11
A. PLASTIC LENS: Lens for fluorescent fixtures shall be 100% virgin acrylic with a minimum
thickness of 0.125". Lens shall have high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging,
exposure to heat and UV radiation.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
B. FLUORESCENT BALLASTS:
1. Electronic integrated circuit, solid-state, full-light-output, energy-efficient type compatible
with the lamps and lamp combinations to which connected. Linear fluorescent ballasts shall
be programmed start electronic ballasts.
2. Type: Class P, high power factor, except as otherwise indicated.
3. Sound rating: A rating, except as otherwise indicated
4. Normal ballast factor.
5. Electrical Testing Laboratory certified.
6. Voltage shall match the connected circuits.
7. Minimum Power Factor 90%
8. Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of Ballast Current: 10 Percent unless
otherwise indicated.
9. Conform to FCC regulations Part 15, Subpart J for electromagnetic Interference.
10. Use 2, 3, or 4 lamp ballasts for multilamp fixtures where possible.
11. Lamp-ballast connection method shall not reduce the normal rated life of the lamps.
12. Low temperature ballast shall be used for fixtures not in a controlled environment. Starting
temperature shall be minus (-) 20 degrees C or colder.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
C. HID BALLAST:
1. Constant Wattage Autotransformer, regulating high-power factor type, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Operating voltage shall match the system.
3. Ballast shall be single-lamp.
4. Ballast shall be lower temperature start to minus (-) 30 deg C.
5. Normal ambient operating temperature shall be rated for 40 deg C.
6. Open circuit operation shall not reduce average life.
37
38
39
D. Metal Halide Instant On Quartz type system with automatically switch quartz lamp when
fixture is initially energized and when momentary peak outages occur. Turns lamp off
automatically when HID lamp reaches approximately 60% light output.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E. LAMPS
1. FLUORESCENT: Cool white; rapid start. Non-compact lamps shall have a rated average
life of 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start when used on rapid start circuits. All fluorescent
lamps shall have the same color unless specifically noted otherwise.
a. Use 51 watt high efficiency T5HO lamps in place of standard 54 watt T5HO lamps
when possible.
2. INCANDESCENT: Inside frosted; 130 volt general service, unless otherwise specified or
indicated.
165477
City of Dallas
LIGHTING SYSTEM
16500 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3.
METAL HALIDE: Phosphor-coated, unless otherwise specified or indicated; selfextinguishing type when the outer lamp envelope is broken.
3
4
5
6
7
8
F. EXIT LIGHTS: Single or double face unit as required for each location, with arrows to clearly
define the path of egress and which flash at a rate not exceeding five (5) hertz. Provide batterypowered exit lights if the exits lights are not served with an emergency power source. Minimum
Height of Letters shall conform to local code. Lamps shall be Incandescent, 2 for each fixture
with 50,000 rated lamp life; Fluorescent, 2 for each fixture with 20,000 hours rated lamp life;
Light-emitting diodes (LED), 70,000 hours minimum rated life.
9
10
G. HAZARDOUS LOCATION: Fixtures for hazardous locations shall conform to UL844. Provide
Factory Mutual certification for indicated class and division of hazard.
11
12
13
14
15
H. Emergency Lighting Units shall include a battery and charger integral to the fixture. Relay shall
automatically turn lamps on when supply voltage drops to 80% of nominal voltage or below.
Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep- discharge level.
Relay disconnects lamps and battery and automatically recharges and floats on trickle charger
when normal voltage is restored.
16
PART 3 - EXECUTION
17
3.1
INSTALLATION
18
19
A. Provide the lighting fixtures, as specified and scheduled on the plans. If a type designation is
omitted, verify the fixture selection with the Engineer before installation.
20
21
22
B. Check the architectural finishes and provide fixtures with proper trim, frames, support hangers
and other hardware required to coordinate with the proper finishes, regardless of the specified or
scheduled catalog number, prefixes and suffixes.
23
24
C. Fixtures which are tandem-mounted and recessed in gypboard or plaster ceilings shall be yokemounted.
25
26
27
D. Test and aim flood lights, when dark outside to provide a uniform and widespread, illuminated
area. Direct units as indicated or instructed by the Owners Representative to prevent
objectionable glare.
28
E. Furnish and install photocells where indicated on the plans. Cells shall face a northerly direction.
29
30
31
32
F. Furnish and install exit lights where scheduled and indicated on the plans. Locate fixtures on the
ceiling or wall, as required by the Engineer. Provide relays and the necessary wiring to provide a
flashing exit light system upon the activation of a fire alarm. Install exit lights in accordance
with Paragraph (Q) (2) of the Handicapped Accessibility Act of Texas.
33
34
35
G. Furnish and install a complete exterior lighting control system, as indicated on the plans. Provide
materials and equipment to properly interface timing devices and photocells with relays and
contactors so that a complete and satisfactory operating system is rendered.
36
37
38
39
H. Fixtures containing emergency ballast shall be wired such that a line voltage conductor shall
keep the ballast energized at all times. If the fixture is also switched, the operation shall turn off
the emergency ballast with the fixture as long as normal power is available. If normal power is
lost, the emergency ballasts will operate the lamp.
40
3.2
41
42
43
CLEAN AND ADJUST

A. Immediately before final inspection, clean all fixtures, inside and out, including plastics and
glassware. Adjust all trim to properly fit adjacent surfaces, replace broken or damaged parts.
Lamp and test all fixtures for electrical, as well as, mechanical operation.
165477
City of Dallas
LIGHTING SYSTEM
16500 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.3
SPARE PARTS
2
3
A. Lamps: Provide 10 lamps for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
4
5
B. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
C. Ballast: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
7
8
D. Globes and Guards: 5 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
9
10
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
LIGHTING SYSTEM
16500 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16600
UNDERGROUND SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
5
6
A. Furnish and install a complete underground system of raceways, manholes, and handholes as
shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
SCOPE OF WORK
B. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of facilities to accommodate the work being done by
Oncor in this area. This work includes:
1. Installation of underground duct bank for Oncor primary lines. This includes:
a. Two sets of circuits (two conduits per circuit) under the Houston Street Viaduct. One
of these will originate at an existing Oncor manhole on the east side of Houston Street
Viaduct. The other will originate at an Oncor 13.2kV primary overhead line pole on
the east side of Houston Street Viaduct. Both of these will terminate at new Oncor
13.2kV primary overhead line poles on the west side of Houston Street Viaduct.
b. Two sets of circuits (two conduits per circuit) from new Oncor 13.2kV primary
overhead line poles into the south side of the new Oncor Equipment Yard.
c. Once circuit (two conduits) from the new Oncor Equipment Yard to an existing Oncor
manhole along side Riverfront Blvd.
d. Cabling for all such underground ductbanks being constructed for Oncor facilities shall
be provided and installed by Oncor.
e. All such underground ductbank being constructed for Oncor facilities to be coordinated
directly with Oncor and shall be performed by a Oncor approved subcontractor.
2. Equipment pads for all Oncor equipment being installed in the Oncor Equipment Yard.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
25
26
27
28
A. Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340 and 16000, shop drawings and
product data, for the following:
1. Manholes, handholes, and associated hardware.
2. Plastic duct spacers
29
30
31
32
33
34
C. Provide manhole and handhole NEC sizing calculations for all manholes and handholes used on
the project. Sizing calculations shall be provided with initial submittal.
35
1.3
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46

otherwise noted):
3. ASTM A615/A615M-06a Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel
Bars for concrete Reinforcement
4. ASTM A48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
5. ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
6. AASHTO M306-04/ ASTM A48 Drainage Structure Castings, Section 7.0 Proof Load
Testing
165477
City of Dallas
UNDERGROUND SYSTEM
16600 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
7.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B. All excavation, trenching, and related sheeting, bracing, etc., as shown on the Drawings and
listed in these Specifications, shall comply with the following standards (unless otherwise
noted):
1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
a. Excavation safety standards (29 CFR Part 1926.650 Subpart P) - Excavation.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM D 698a Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600kN-m/m3)).
10
11
12
ASTM C-850 Specifications for underground precast concrete utility structures
C. All equipment specified in this section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
13
14
15
16
17
18
B. The precast manholes shall be manufactured in a NPCA (National Precast Concrete Association)
Certified Plant.
19
1.5
20
A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
21
22
B. Protect equipment and materials from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly clean and
dry until installation.
23
1.6
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
WARRANTY
the Owner.
31
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
32
2.1
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
MATERIALS
A. Raceways
1. Raceways shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit Schedule 40, encased in concrete, as
manufactured by Carlon; An Indian Head Co.; Kraloy Products Co., Inc.; or Highland
Plastics Inc. Thin wall conduit designated for encased burial as (Type EB) is not acceptable
for any application.
2. All underground raceways of the underground system, terminating in manholes or
handholes shall use bell end fittings of the same size and type as the raceway. Bell ends and
duct spacers shall be as manufactured by Carlon.
3. Reinforcing steel shall comply with ASTM A615 Grade 60 as specified in Section 16033,
and of a size and installation as shown on the Drawings.
4. Where raceways terminate into existing and new manholes, handholes or structures which
have flanged threaded couplers in the wall of the manhole or structure, threaded splice bars
24 inches in length shall be installed in all of the existing threaded couplers for that bank,
165477
City of Dallas
UNDERGROUND SYSTEM
16600 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
5.
6.
7.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
and the threaded splice bars lapped into the duct bank steel for the last 24 inches length of
the duct bank, and tied to the duct bank reinforcing steel at the end for that length.
Where raceways terminate into existing manholes, handholes, or structures which do not
have flanged threaded couplers in the wall of the manhole or structure, the bank duct
reinforcing steel shall be dowelled into the existing structure, manhole, or handhole wall at
least of the wall thickness, and secured with epoxy compound. The last 10 of the duct
bank reinforcing shall be one bar size larger than shown for the encasement reinforcing.
All new manholes and handholes shall be provided with threaded splice bars, setting bars,
and threaded rebar couplers, as manufactured by Meadow Burke Inc., Tampa, FL. For
overlapping the duct bank reinforcing steel with screwlock couplers, as shown on the
Drawings.
Concrete encasement for raceways and duct banks shall be normal weight concrete
weighing not more than 145 pcf with compressive strength, a minimum of 3000 psi, or
greater if required by other Divisions of the Specifications, at 28 days, Concrete shall have
crushed aggregate with a maximum size of -inch, a slump of 4 6 In. and flow freely
without the use of vibrators. Install red dye of 40 lbs per 10 cy. of concrete, installed in the
truck at the concrete plant.
B. Manholes and Handholes

1. General
a. Manholes and handholes shall be of the precast concrete type, designed for a Class H20
load with sizes as shown on the Drawings, and as manufactured by Oldcastle Precast,
Mansfield, TX.
2. Construction
a. Concrete for manholes and handholes shall have a 28-day compressive strength of 5000
PSI. Cement shall be Type 1 or III. Reinforcing steel shall be Grade 60 with yield
strength of 60,000 P.S. Design loadings shall be H-20-44 w/impact.
b. Ductbank entries into the manhole or handhole shall be centered on the entering wall.
c. Where present or future duct banks are shown to terminate at a manhole or handhole,
the terminating area of the manhole wall within the confines of the duct bank steel
reinforcing shall be recessed approximately 1-1/2 for shear support, all as shown on
the Drawings.
d. Each manhole and handhole shall have an 18 x 18 x 24 deep concrete sump in one
corner of the manhole or handhole.
3. Manhole Covers
a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, manhole and handhole covers shall be heavy
duty 36 in. machined gray iron, and AASHTO M306-04/ ASTM A48 CL35B Min.,
40,000-pound proof load value (Class H20 X 2.5) True Traffic load covers, complete
with frame, and Electric or Communication raised lettering recessed flush, as
required, on the cover. Covers shall be V-1600-5, with drop handles as manufactured
by East Jordan Iron Works, Ardmore, OK.
b. All castings shall be made In the USA, cast with the foundrys name, part number,
Made in USA, and production date (example: mm/dd/yy). Castings without proper
markings will be rejected. Manufacturer shall certify that all castings conform to the
ASTM and AASHTO Designations as specified herein. All casting shall be true to
pattern in form and dimension, free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes
and other defects in positions affecting strength and value for the service intended.
Angles shall be filleted, and arises shall be sharp and true.
4. Hardware
a. Cable racks shall be of the heavy duty non-metallic type with arm lengths of 8, 14,
and 20, each supporting a load of not less than 250 lbs. at the outer end. Racks shall be
molded in one piece of U.L. listed glass reinforced nylon, Catalog CR36N with
RA08N, RA14N, and RA20N arms as manufactured by Underground Devices Inc.
Northbrook, IL. Cable racks shall have reinforced nylon inserts cast flush in the
165477
City of Dallas
UNDERGROUND SYSTEM
16600 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
b.
c.
d.
manhole and handhole walls and the rack secured by 316 stainless steel bolts. Arms for
racks shall be vertically spaced not greater than 24 on centers. Furnish inserts for all
present and future cable racks as shown on the Drawings.
Pulling irons shall be of copolymer polypropylene coated dia. cable, tensile strength
rated at 270,000 psi, with polyethylene pulling iron pocket, all recessed in the manhole
wall opposite each duct entry. Pulling irons for handholes shall have the pulling iron
located in the floor of the handhole near the center of the handhole opposite the duct
entry. Pulling irons shall be as manufactured by M.A. Industries, Inc. Peachtree, GA. or
Bowco Industries, Portland OR.
Each manhole shall have a x 10 copper clad ground rod inserted through the floor of
the manhole or handhole, and epoxy sealed. Provide a #4/0 bare copper conductor ring
around the inside perimeter of the manhole. Connect the access hatch, ladder, etc. with
a #6 AWG bare copper conductor.
Manhole and handhole ladders shall be constructed of fiberglass reinforced plastic,
safety yellow, 18 rung width with 12 rung spacings, Safrail as manufactured by
Strongwell Corp., Bristol, VA. Furnish a total of two ladders, each of a length 4 greater
than the deepest manhole in the underground system.
18
PART 3 - EXECUTION
19
3.1
GENERAL
20
21
22
23
24
A. The Contractor shall field verify the routing of all underground duct banks before placement. He
shall modify the routing as necessary to avoid underground utilities or above ground objects.
Modification or rerouting for the convenience of the Contractor, or to reduce the length of duct
run as designed, will not be permitted. The Contractor shall provide any alternate routing of the
duct banks to the Owner/Engineer and, after approval, shall proceed with the installation.
25
26
27
B. The Contractor shall saw cut and repair existing pavements above new and modified existing
duct banks. The Contractor shall provide the alternate routing of the duct banks to the
Owner/Engineer and after approval shall proceed with the installation.
28
29
C. Install raceways to drain away from buildings. Raceways between manholes or handholes shall
drain toward the manholes or handholes. Raceway slopes shall not be less than 3 in per 100 ft.
30
D. Reinforce raceway banks as shown on the Drawings.
31
32
33
34
E. A #4/0 stranded bare copper ground conductor shall be threaded through the lower tier of duct
spacers, as shown on the Drawings, for the full length of each duct run between manholes and
handholes, entering the duct bank opening at each manhole, and bonded to the ground rod in the
floor of each manhole and handhole.
35
F. Lay raceway lines in trenches on compacted earth as specified in Section 16022.
36
37
G. Use plastic spacers located not more than 4 ft apart to hold raceways in place. Spacers shall
provide not less than 2 in clearance between raceways.
38
39
H. The minimum cover for raceway banks shall be 24 in unless otherwise permitted by the
OWNER/ENGINEER.
40
41
I.
Raceway terminations at all manholes, existing and new, shall be with end bells for PVC
conduit.
42
43
44
J.
Where bends in raceways greater than 15 degrees are required, use long radius elbows, sweeps,
and offsets of PVC coated aluminum conduit. Tape unions and transitions of PVC coated
aluminum conduit such that the aluminum does not come into contact with the concrete.
165477
City of Dallas
UNDERGROUND SYSTEM
16600 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
K. The ends of all ducts shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust and moisture during construction.
Duxseal shall be used in all applications. Plugging with tape is prohibited, even for a temporary
time.
4
5
6
7
L. Where raceways enter or exit the Underground System, and the raceways rise to a higher
elevation upon entering or leaving the System, such raceways shall be tightly sealed at the
higher elevation, both before and after the installation of cables, such that there shall be no entry
of water or moisture to the Underground System at any time.
M. No wire shall be pulled until the duct system has been completed in every detail.
N. Swab all raceways clean before installing cable.
10
11
12
O. Train cables in manholes and handholes and support and restrain them on cable racks. All cables
passing manhole duct entrances in the manhole or handhole shall pass above all duct entrances.
No cable shall pass in front of or below duct bank entrances.
13
14
15
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
UNDERGROUND SYSTEM
16600 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
UNDERGROUND SYSTEM
16600 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16660
GROUNDING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
7
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install a complete grounding
system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), as shown on
the Drawings and as specified herein.
8
9
B. All raceways, conduits, and ducts shall contain equipment grounding conductors sized in
accordance with the NEC. Minimum sizes shall be No. 12 AWG.
10
1.2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340 and 16000, shop drawings and
product data, for the following:
1. Ground rods.
2. Grounding conduit hubs.
3. Waterpipe ground clamps.
4. Buried grounding connections.
5. Compression lugs.
6. Field quality-control test reports
7. Ground resistance test report.
1.3
21
22
23
24
25
otherwise noted):
26
27
B. All equipment specified in this section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of
28
1.4
29
30
31
32
33
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
34
35
A. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures.
36
37
B. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint
38
39
40
41
C. Equipment shall not be stored onsite without written approval of the Owner/Engineer.
165477
City of Dallas
GROUNDING SYSTEM
16660 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
D. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be
1.6
6
7
8
9
10
WARRANTY
workmanship for 1 year from date of Owners final acceptance of the equipment. Within such
transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.
11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
12
2.1
MATERIALS
13
A. Conduit shall be as specified under Section 16110.
14
15
B. Wire shall be as specified under section 16120 and 16121. Ground cables: stranded, bare copper
of 98% conductivity and as specified in section 16120.
16
17
18
19
C. Ground wire shall be uninsulated copper sized as shown on the Drawings, in all cases where a
single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the
conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases,
insulate the ground wire with insulation as specified for low voltage wire.
20
21
D. Ground rods shall be 3/4 in by 10 ft copper clad steel and constructed in accordance with UL
467. The minimum copper thickness shall be 0.25 mm. Ground rods shall be Copperweld.
22
23
24
E. Grounding conduit hubs shall be malleable iron type, manufactured by Thomas & Betts Co.;
Catalog No. 3940 (3/4 in conduit size), similar to Burndy; O.Z. Gedney Co., and of the correct
size for the conduit.
25
26
27
F. Ground rod boxes: precast box with cast iron lid. Lid shall read ground rod on lid. Neenah
model. r-1978-b. Ground rod boxes located in driveway areas shall have an aashto hs-20
rating.
28
29
30
G. Waterpipe ground clamps shall be cast bronze saddle type, manufactured by Thomas & Betts
Co. Cat. No. 2 (1/2 in, 3/4 in, or 1 in size), similar by Burndy; O.Z. Gedney Co., and of the
correct size for the pipe.
31
2.2
PROCESSES
32
33
A. All grounding system connections to building steel and ground rods shall be exothermically
welded including all cable connections, and cable steel terminations.
34
35
36
B. All materials involved must be from the same sources to insure compatibility. Connections made
from this process shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standards 80 and 837 and as listed in MIL
419 and other standards, National Electrical Code, etc.
37
38
C. All welding materials used shall be CADWELD MATERIALS as manufactured by ERICO

Products, Inc.
165477
City of Dallas
GROUNDING SYSTEM
16660 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3
4
5
6
7
8
A. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted/clamp type connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Exothermically welded connectors except at test wells and as
otherwise indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Exothermically welded connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermically welded connectors.
B. Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250 and local codes.
10
11
12
C. Run grounding electrode conductors in rigid steel conduits. Bond the protecting conduits to the
grounding electrode conductors at both ends. Do not allow water pipe connections to be painted.
If the connections are painted, disassemble them and re make them with new fittings.
13
D. Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
14
15
16
17
18
19
E. Conduits and other raceways shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the
raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets and other equipment shall be
properly grounded in accordance with NEC requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to
mechanical damage, install wire in rigid aluminum conduit. Make connections to equipment
with solder less connections. Wire connected to the ground rods of the ground mat shall be of
the fused type equal to the Cadweld process.
20
21
F. Bond all steel building columns in new structures together with ground wire in rigid conduit and
connect to the distribution equipment ground bus, as shown on the Drawings.
22
23
24
25
G. Metal conduits stubbed into a motor control center shall be terminated with insulated grounding
bushings and connect to the motor control center ground bus. Bond boxes mounted below motor
control centers to the motor control center ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance
with NEC Table 250 95, except that a minimum No. 12 AWG shall be used.
26
27
H. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1 1/2 in and larger shall have bonding jumpers.
Bonding jumpers shall be external, run parallel (not spiraled) and fastened with plastic tie wraps.
28
29
I.
Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a conductor sized
in accordance with NEC Article 250 96.
30
31
J.
Drive grounding electrodes as shown on the Drawings. Ground rod shall be installed such that
the top of the ground rod is 6 below grade and enclosed by a ground rod box.
32
33
34
K. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduits systems, cable armor,
exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the NEC to be
grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the NEC.
35
L. Seal exposed connections between different metals with No Oxide Paint Grade A.
36
37
38
M. Lay all underground grounding conductors slack and, where exposed to mechanical injury,
protect by pipes or other substantial guards. If guards are iron pipe, or other magnetic material,
electrically connect conductors to both ends of the guard. Make connections as specified herein.
39
40
N. Care shall be taken to ensure good ground continuity, in particular between the conduit system
and equipment frames and enclosures. Where necessary, jumper wires shall be installed.
41
42
43
O. All grounding type receptacles shall be grounded to the outlet boxes with a No. 12 THWN green
conductor connected to the ground terminal of the receptacle and fastened to the outlet box by
means of a grounding screw.
165477
City of Dallas
GROUNDING SYSTEM
16660 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
P. Install ground cables continuously between connections. Splices shall not be permitted, except
where indicated on the plans. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs. buildings, etc., and
when not in metallic enclosures, provide a sleeve of approved, non- metallic materials.
4
5
Q. Install a green-colored, equipment grounding conductor in raceways. Size conductors in

accordance with NEC Article 250.
6
7
8
9
R. Where ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete, use standard bare copper cable, in all
other cases install a green-colored insulation, equipment grounding conductor in accordance
with Section 16120, 600 VOLT WIRES AND CABLES. Size conductors in accordance with
NEC Article 250. Provide grounding conductors as required per the NEC.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
S. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC.
2. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
3. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Installso
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
4. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
T. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated bare copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes,
using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using
one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff
valve.
31
32
33
U. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install a bare copper bonding jumper
to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
34
35
36
V. Install ground cables in conduits above grade, ground cables directly buried in earth shall be to a
depth of not less than 30" below grade. Installation to provide sufficient mechanical protection
so as not to break ground cables or connections.
37
38
W. Run a grounding cable the full length of each cable tray section and bond to each cable tray
section. Provide #4/0 bare copper in cable tray.
39
40
X. Where exothermic bonding is used, molds shall be of the appropriate size for the wire and rod
used. All bonds shall remain exposed for inspection of the Owners Representative.
41
3.2
INSPECTION AND TESTING
42
43
A. Inspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper
installation.
44
45
46
B. Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent test instrument to measure
resistance to ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument
manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method.
47
C. All test equipment shall be provided under this Section and approved by the Owner/Engineer.
165477
City of Dallas
GROUNDING SYSTEM
16660 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
D. Resistance to ground testing shall be performed during dry season. Submit test results in the
form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical
resistance to ground.
E. Testing shall be performed before energizing the distribution system.
F. A separate test shall be conducted for each building or system.
G. Perform a resistance measurement through all connections with a low resistance ohmmeter.
7
8
9
10
H. Perform point-to-point test to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and
all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral and derived neutrals. Point-to- point
resistance values shall not exceed 0.5 ohms. Provide additional ground rods and conductors as
required to bring the resistance to 0.5 ohms.
11
12
13
I.
14
15
16
Notify the Engineer immediately if the resistance to ground for any building or system is greater
than five ohms. Provide additional ground rods and conductors as required to bring the
resistance to five ohms.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
GROUNDING SYSTEM
16660 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
GROUNDING SYSTEM
16660 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16661
1
2
3
Part 1 -
1.1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
GENERAL
SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install medium voltage Neutral Grounding Resistor (NGR)
complete with mounting insulators structure, and all assemblies. The resistor shall be with all
accessories and appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as shown on the
Contract Drawings. The Neutral Grounding Resistor shall be low resistance type for installation
outdoors and mounted on the cover of the primary unit substation transformer referenced in
specification 16430. The transformer manufacturer shall supply the neutral grounding resistor,
1.2
SUBMITTALS
12
13
14
15
16
not be accepted prior to approval of the Power System Study specified under Section 16105
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
maintained on file in the original equipment manufacturers archive file system.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
1. Product data sheets and catalog numbers etc. The manufacturers name shall be clearly
visible on the each cut sheet submitted. List all options and accessories furnished
specifically for this project. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or
those items that do not apply.
interwiring, Include and identify all connecting equipment. Show wire and terminal
numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings.
3. Provide plan and elevation drawings of each enclosure, with dimensions, exterior and
interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc..
numbers.
b. Voltage;
c. Continuous current:
a. Voltage
165477
City of Dallas
16661 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
11. Number and size of cable, ground and cable terminal sizes.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

1.3
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
otherwise noted):
1. IEE C2, Door Safety Barrier, Hazardous Voltage sign
2. IEEE -32
5. UL 508- Industrial Control equipment
6. UL-50 Enclosures for electrical equipment
22
23
24
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
25
26
27
minimum period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations
with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.
28
29
30
1.5
31
32
33
A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two
34
35
36
37
bolted to skids. Each switching or terminating station shall be bolted to a solid top wood pallet to
prevent the forks of a forklift truck from entering the open bottom of the equipment to prevent
hidden damage. The equipment shall be wrapped to prevent finish damage.
38
39
40
41
C. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within 30
calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within 30 calendar days,
the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the Contractors expense,
until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment.
165477
City of Dallas
16661 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.6
2
3
4
5
6
WARRANTY
workmanship for two years from date of Substantial Completion. Within such period of
the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner.
Part 2 -
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
9
10
11
12
13
acceptable:
1. Post Glover
2. Avtron
3. I-Gard
14
15
16
17
2.2
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
RATINGS
A. The equipment described in this specification shall be designed for operation on the voltage
systems as shown on the Drawings. Each shall have the following ratings:
1. Maximum Voltage (L-N) 2400 V,for use on a 4160V system
2. Rated 200A for 10 seconds.
3. Continuous current rating 20A
4. Short-Circuit Current, At Rated Maximum kV 25 kA
5. Temperature rating (1 minute) over 30 deg C ambient 760 deg C
6. Temperature rating steady state over 30 deg C ambient 385 deg C
2.3
CONSTRUCTION
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
A. Resistors
1. The resistor shall be low temperature coefficient, resistor grade stainless steel to withstand
the rated current and fault duty
2. Resistors shall be mounted on the top cover of the transformers specified in specification
16430B.
3. The resistors shall be mounted on corrosion resistant support frames using stainless steel
hardware.
4. The resistors assembly shall be mounted on insulators rated for system voltage.
5. All resistor terminals and interconnections between resistor units shall be stainless steel
using stainless steel hardware including lock washers. High current connections shall be
spot or TIG welded.
6. The connections between resistors and bushings or current transformers shall be solid
copper or stainless steel bus or copper cables.
40
41
42
43
44
45
B. Enclosure
1. The manufacturer shall supply a braced and welded or bolted stainless steel self support
system for mounting on the transformer cover. The structure shall withstand the
mechanical forces resulting from the short circuit condition specified herein.
2. The enclosure shall be stainless steel (316) suitable for outdoor environment in a corrosive
environment.
165477
City of Dallas
16661 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
The cable entries and exit for the system shall be at the bottom of the enclosure, entrance
and exit bushing shall be provided.
The top of the enclosure shall be solid, slightly overhung to prevent any water entry.
Provide necessary eyebolts on the top of the unit for lifting.
The bottom of the enclosure shall be screened with perforated permanent metal openings.
Bolt on side covers are required on all four sides for accessibility. Stainless steel hardware
shall be used.
Louvered or screened openings shall not exceed .
C. Current transformers:
1. Provide a 200/5 amp CT rated 5kv in the neutral circuit to match the burden for wiring and
input impedance of Multilin 745 transformer relay. The relay shall be located in the low
voltage control cabinet. A short circuiting terminal block shall be provided.
2. Nameplates
a. External
1) Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated in drawings. All nameplates shall
be laminated durable plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached with
stainless steel screws. There shall be a master nameplate that indicates equipment
ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information.
b. Special
letters.
c. The manufacturer shall not remove, reuse, alter, or replace original equipment
2.4
FACTORY TESTING
27
28
29
30
31
A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the assembled unit. All tests shall be
in accordance with the latest version of IEEE standard 32.
1. Hi-Pot test shall 2.25 times rated voltage plus 2000 V
4. Resistance tolerance test be performed and shall not vary by plus/ minus 5% of rated value.
5. Results of Short circuit test (type test) on identical equipment
32
33
B. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of
34
C. The manufacturer shall provide three certified copies of factory test reports as specified herein.
35
Part 3 -
36
3.1
EXECUTION
37
38
39
40
41
A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's trained representative to assist

the Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this Section for a
period of 1 working day. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction
and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and
adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein.
42
B. The Contractor shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report.
43
3.2
44
45
A. Installer shall be specialized in installing medium voltage equipment with minimum 5 years
documented experience.
165477
City of Dallas
16661 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.3
EXAMINATION
B. Verify that medium voltage equipment is ready to install.
3.4
INSTALLATION
6
7
Drawings.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for applying tape insulation to each cable termination.
10
3.5
11
12
13
14
3.6
15
16
17
FIELD ADJUSTING
A. Adjust all access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as
described in manufacturer's instructions.
3.7
FIELD TESTING
18
19
20
A. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance of each bus section.
21
22
23
B. Where test reports show unsatisfactory results, the Owner/Engineer may require the removal of
items, all at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall bear all costs for any retesting.
24
3.8
25
26
A. Clean interiors of enclosures to remove construction debris, dirt, shipping materials.

3.9

27
28
29
CLEANING
30
31
32

recommendations.
33
34
35
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16661 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
165477
City of Dallas
16661 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16670
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
7
8
9
A. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified, and
required to furnish and install a lightning protection system that fully meets the UL Standards
listed herein. The Contractor shall provide an inspection of each new structure, or modified
existing structure, by Underwriters Laboratories and shall obtain a Master Label for each new or
modified structure
10
11
12
13
14
15
B. The Contractor shall employ the services of a licensed lightning protection systems Engineering
company to design and install the lightning protection system and prepare detailed installation
drawings and material specifications. The system shall include ground wires, ground rods,
exothermic connections, mechanical connectors, structural steel connections, all as shown on the
Drawings, and as specified herein, to provide a bonding to earth ground of all metallic materials
likely to become energized.
16
17
C. The Franklin Rod system shall be used. Other systems such as the early stream emissions (EME)
are not acceptable
18
1.2
RELATED WORK
19
20
B. Section 16196 Low Voltage AC Surge Protective Devices (SPDs)
21
C. Section 16660 Grounding System
22
1.3
23
24
25
26
27
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Complete design drawings, for each structure and the site,showing the type, size, and
locations of all grounding, down conductors, through roof/through wall wall assemblies,
roof conductors and air terminals, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
1.4
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
designed, manufactured, and installed according to latest revision of the following standards
(unless otherwise noted):
2. NFPA 780 Lightning Protection Code
3. LPI 175 - Lightning Protection Institute Installation Standard
4. UL 96A Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems
35
36
37
1.5
38
39
40
QUALITY ASSURANCE
period of five years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with
165477
City of Dallas
16670 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
B. The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements and standards for lightning
protection systema of the LPI, UL and NFPA. standard requirements
3
4
5
not be used.
1.6
7
8
9

requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment and materials,
an approved copy of all such submittals.
10
11
B. Protect equipment and materials during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete
enclosures. Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry.
12
13
14
1.7
15
16
17
18
19
WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the system and equipment to be free from defects in material
and workmanship for 1 year from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period
of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return
the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting
of the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner.
20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21
2.1
SUPPLIERS
22
23
24
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Suppliers are acceptable:
1. Advanced Lightning Technology, Argyle, Texas
2. VFC, Inc. Grapevine, TX
25
26
27
B. The listing of specific suppliers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not
meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved
28
2.2
GENERAL
29
30
31
A. The system to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection equipment and shall
be the manufacturers latest approved design.
32
33
34
B. All equipment shall be new and of a design and construction to suit the application where it is
used in accordance with accepted industry standards and LPI, UL, and NFPA standard
requirements.
35
36
37
38
39
C. At the point where an electrical service of 1000 Volts or less is generated, a surge protection
device shall be provided and installed, complying with UL96A, for a UL Master Label
Certificate of Inspection. The surge protection device shall comply with UL Standard 1449 Third
Edition, as a Type 1 or Type 2 lightning rated unit of 20ka or more, as specified in Section
16196 Low Voltage AC Surge Protective Devices (SPDs)
40
2.3
41
42
MATERIALS
A. Class I Class II materials may be utilized for Class I structures, not exceeding 75 feet above
grade. All other structures shall utilize Class II materials.
165477
City of Dallas
16670 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
B. Unless otherwise specified herein, all materials shall be tin plated copper with bolts of 316
stainless steel, and used in accordance with LPI, UL and NFPA code requirements.
3
4
5
6
7
8
C. Aluminum materials, with bolts of 316 stainless steel, shall be used only on aluminum,
galvalume or galvanized metal structures. Where aluminum, galvalume or galvanized metal
parapet caps are used, the entire roof lightning protection equipment shall utilize aluminum
components. Approved transitional components shall be used for transitions to aluminum
materials. Down leads and grounding shall utilize tinned copper with the bimetal transition
occurring at the bi-metal through roof assembly.
D. All air terminal bases for flat roof areas shall be or the adhesive type.
10
11
E. Conductors shall be tinned copper, (aluminum where installed on aluminum roofs0, consisting
of wire size, stranding, and weight in accordance with NFPA 780.
12
13
F. Conductor fasteners shall be an approved type of non corrosive metal, and have ample strencth
to support conductors. Cable fasteners shall be of the adhesive type.
14
15
G. All cable connecters shall be tin coated copper cast bronze with screw pressure type 316
stainless steel bolts and nuts.
16
17
H. Where any part of a protection system is exposed to potential mechanical injury, protect it by
covering it with PVC conduit.
18
PART 3 - EXECUTION
19
3.1
INSTALLATION
20
21
22
A. All materials shall be installed by experienced workmen that specialize in this type of work. The
lightning protection system shall be installed per approved shop drawings and UL and NFPA
recommended practices.
23
24
25
26
B. Install air terminals on structure steel framework bonded to the downcoming cables.Unless
otherwise specified herein, all materials shall be tin plated copper with bolts of 316 stainless
steel, and used in accordance with LPI, UL and NFPA code requirements.Conduit shall be as
specified under Section 16110 .
27
C. Bond structure steel framework to the down-comer cables.
28
D. Bond all metal pipes and metal structures to the down-comer cables.
29
E. All concealed conductors shall be installed in Schedule 40 PVC conduit.
30
F. All components of the system, on or above the roof, shall be connected to the system ground.
31
3.2
TESTING
32
33
34
35
36
A. The Contractor shall employ the services of a UL field inspector, for inspection of the system
upon completion of the installation. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the
correctness of the installation and shall make any and all corrections and additions deemed
necessary by the UL inspector. The Contractor shall pay for all costs of the UL inspection and
any subsequent re-inspections as required.
37
38
B. Inspection and testing to be performed by personnel regularly engaged in the installation and
testing of Master Labeled lightning protection systems.
39
C. Inspect the system for proper installation.
40
D. Test the complete system for continuity to the electrical grounding system.
165477
City of Dallas
16670 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
E. An application shall be made to the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for inspection and
certification, and shall be delivered to the Engineer, confirming that all concealed components
have been monitored during job construction.
4
5
6
7
8
F. A UL Certification shall be provided for each and every new structure, including all parts of
existing structures that are expanded, as defined by NFPA 780 and UL 96A. A Master Label
shall be obtained for all structures where the service voltage is less than 1000 VAC.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16670 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16720
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
1
2
3
PART 1 GENERAL
4
5
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
6
7
8
9
10
11
A. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as specified, and
required to furnish, install, calibrate and test, adjust and place into satisfactory operation, a
fire alarm system including mechanical and elevator control systems. This is a
performance specification. The Fire Alarm Contractor is responsible for all fire alarm
system design to meet all authority having jurisdiction. The buildings on this project are all
non sprinkled buildings.
12
13
14
15
B. The Contractor shall employ the services of a licensed fire alarm Engineering company or
NICET Certified Engineer employed by the company to design and supervise the
installation of the fire alarm system, and prepare detailed installation drawings and
material specifications.
16
1.02
RELATED WORK
17
18
B. Section 16045 Electrical Support Hardware.
19
C. Section 16110 Raceways, Boxes and Fittings.
20
D. Section 16120 Wires and Cables (600 Volt Maximum)
21
E. Section 16475 Low Voltage Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Disconnect Switches
22
1.03
SUBMITTALS
23
24
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section

16000 and as specified herein.
25
26
27
28
Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph
above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related
equipment will be returned unreviewed.
29
30
31
32
33
C. The original equipment manufacturer shall create all equipment shop drawings, including
all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturers Engineering department. All equipment shop
drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers, and
shall be maintained on file in the original equipment manufacturers archive file system.
Photocopies of the Engineers ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings.
34
D. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the following:
35
36
37
38
39
1.
165477
Product data sheets and catalog numbers for overcurrent protective devices, control
relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. The manufacturers name shall be
accessories furnished specifically for this project. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate
which items apply and/or those items that do not apply.
City of Dallas
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

JUNE 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
2.
Provide control systems Engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings

showing interwiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted
devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the
schematics. The notation Remote Device will not be acceptable. Show wire and
terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the
Drawings.
7
8
9
3.
Provide plan and elevation drawings of each controller or enclosure, with dimensions,
exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks,
etc..
10
4.
Schematic diagram
11
5.
Nameplate schedule
12
6.
UL Listing of the completed assembly
13
14
7.
Component list with detailed component information, including original

manufacturers part number.
15
8.
16
9.
17
a.
Short-circuit rating
18
b.
Voltage
19
c.
Continuous current
20
21
a.
Voltage
22
b.
Continuous current
23
c.
Interrupting ratings
24
25
11. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal
sizes.
26
27
E. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein.
28
F.
29
30
Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein.
1.
Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information:
31
a.
Manufacturers contact address and telephone number for parts and service.
32
b.
Instruction books and/or leaflets
33
c.
Recommended renewal parts list
34
35
d.
Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph

above.
36
37
38
39
H. The manufacturer shall submit for approval, a training agenda for all training specified
herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
1.04
165477
City of Dallas
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
A. All products and components listed in this specification shall be designed and
manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise
noted):
NOTE: Edit as required.
1.
Factory Mutual
2.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
3.
NFPA 70E Standard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace
4.
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
5.
NFPA 90 Standard for the installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating System
10
6.
IBC, IFC and IMC
11
12
13
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14
15
16
17
period of ten (10) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of
requirement.
18
19
20
B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components
within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is
manufactured by a third party and brand labeled will not be acceptable.
21
22
23
C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in
current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate
discontinuation shall not be used.
24
25
D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space. Equipment which does not fit within the
space is not acceptable.
26
27
28
29
F.
30
G. All items of equipment including wire and cable shall be compatible.
31
32
33
H. Supplier shall have and maintain an adequate service organization or service

representatives located within 200 miles of the project site knowledgeable in the
maintenance and installation of equipment required.
34
35
36
I.
37
1.06
38
39
40
41
In order to insure standardization, proper interfacing and compatibility, it is required that

all equipment offered under this Section, shall be furnished by a single supplier who shall
furnish all equipment required for a proper installation and coordinate all shop drawings.
All references to model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to
establish the standards of performance, quality and appearance, and is based upon
equipment already designed and manufactured.

requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an
approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment,
onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted.
165477
City of Dallas
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings
within thirty (30) calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed
within seven thirty(30) calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but
stored offsite, at the Contractors expense, until such time that the site is ready for
permanent installation of the equipment.
10
11
E. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall
be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately.
12
13
14
F.
15
1.07
16
17
18
19
20
21
Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and
operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent
WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the system and equipment to be free from defects in
material and workmanship for 1 year from date of final acceptance of the equipment.
Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and
labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work
requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor
at no expense to the Owner.
22
PART 2 PRODUCTS
23
2.01
24
25
MANUFACTURERS
acceptable:
26
1.
Siemens
27
2.
Simplex
28
3.
Approved Equal
29
30
31
32
B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products
that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above
are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
2.02
GENERAL
33
34
35
A. System Operation: A network of detectors shall sense the presence of heat, smoke and/or
fire and initiate alarm status at the control panel while activating audio-visual indication at
the affected area .
36
B. Enclosures
37
1.
38
39
40
41
General
a. Each enclosure shall incorporate a removable back panel, and side
panels, on which control components shall be mounted. Back panel
shall be secured to the enclosure with collar studs for wall mounted
enclosures, and 316 SS hardware for free standing enclosures.
165477
City of Dallas
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
b. All free standing enclosures shall be provided with feet of the same
construction as the enclosure.
3
4
c. The enclosure door shall be interlocked with the main circuit breaker by
a panel mounted cable driven operating mechanism.
5
6
d. Back panel shall be tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self-tapping

screws shall not be used to mount any components.
7
8
e. All enclosure doors shall have bonding studs. The enclosure interior
shall have a bonding stud.
9
10
f. Each enclosure shall be provided with a documentation pocket on the

inner door.
11
g. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts.
12
h. Provide manufacturers window kits where shown on the Drawings.
13
14
i. All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer
and final coat of weatherproof white paint.
15
j. All enclosures shall be padlockable.
16
2.
17
ALUMINUM
a. NEMA 4X Aluminum
18
1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door
19
2) Stainless steel continuous hinge
20
3) Foam in-place gasket
21
22
4) Single point quarter turn latches (20x24 and below). All

others 3-point latch
23
b. Manufacturers
24
1) Hoffman Comline
25
2) EMF Company
26
3) NEMA Enclosures Company
27
4) Hammond Company
28
5) Approved Equal
29
3.
30
Not Defined
a. Where an enclosure is not otherwise defined or shown on the Drawing
31
1) NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel
32
2) Type 316 stainless steel, body and door
33
3) Stainless steel continuous hinge
34
4) Foam in-place gasket
35
36
5) Single point quarter turn latches (20x24 and below). All

others 3-point latch
37
b. Manufacturers
38
1) Hoffman Concept Series
165477
City of Dallas
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
2) EMF Company
3) NEMA Enclosures Company
4) Hammond Company
5) Approved Equal
5
6
4.
NEMA 1 or NEMA 1A boxes are for back of house, offices and similar type
areas.
5.
Malleable iron boxes shall not be used.
C. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP):
1.
Manufacturer: Provide FACP of one of the following:
10
a. Siemens
11
b. Simplex
12
c. Approved equal.
13
14
15
16
2.
The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their
products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions.
Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in
their entirety.
17
3.
Addressable Control Unit
18
19
20
21
22
23
a. Control unit shall provide power and necessary components for the
operation of the basic zones of supervised detector circuits and
supervised audible signal circuit utilizing 24 Vd-c devices. Detector
circuit shall accommodate ionization, photoelectric, flame or thermal
detectors as well as shorting type contact devices intermixed as
desired on the same zone.
24
25
26
27
28
b. Control unit shall be equipped with a power supply capable of operating

from a three-wire 120 Vac 60 Hz power supply. Each input shall be
separately fused within the panel. It shall include LED's for system
power, alarm, and trouble as well as LED indicators for zone alarm,
zone trouble and audible signal circuit trouble.
29
30
31
c. Momentary contact switches shall be provided for "Reset/Lamp Test"

and "Trouble Silence" which shall silence the internal trouble signal
sounding device. Alarm receipt shall override trouble.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
d. Control unit shall be capable of powering early warning detectors and

audible signal circuits. Additional circuitry and visual signaling for
this capability shall be provided by add-on modules and enclosures as
are necessary. Interconnection of these modules to the control unit
shall be by ten-pin plug and harness assemblies which shall provide
system power, supervision, lamp-testing functions, and such other
circuitry as is necessary for an operable system.
165477
City of Dallas
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
e. Control unit shall have two sets of normally open and normally closed
alarm operated relay contacts and one set of normally open and
normally closed trouble operated relay contacts. All contacts shall be
rated at 120 va-c, 3 amp. The alarm relay coil shall be supervised.
Control unit shall have built-in ground detection and plug-in
connectors for emergency power. It shall be arranged so that alarm
signal annunciation shall take precedence over a trouble signal.
Terminals shall be provided such that the trouble indicators and
controls can be located remotely. Control unit shall permit expansion
of system capability to incorporate any combination of compatible
modules not exceeding the maximum current demand.
12
f. Unit shall be UL listed.
13
4.
14
15
16
17
Auto Dialer:
An off-site dialer shall be provided. The dialer shall be listed with the system and
shall have a minimum of four channels. The dialer shall be mounted externally.
The off-site dialer shall report to an authorized 24 hour security station or facility
approved by the AHJ.
18
5.
19
20
SCADA system signals:

Provide two dry contact signals one for system alarm and one for system trouble
for the plants SCADA system to monitor the building fire alarm system.
21
6.
Power Supply:
22
23
a. Unit shall provide a full wave rectified 24 vd-c output rated at 10 amps
full load.
24
25
26
27
b. Rated output shall be completely fused and provided at a plug

receptacle. A second output, rated at 24 vd-c, 2 amps shall be
provided to power modules internally housed and wired within the
control unit enclosure.
28
29
30
31
c. Power supply shall be of deadfront construction and housed in a steel

enclosure compatible with the modularized alarm system. Externally
mounted 120 va-c/24 vd-c transformers do not meet the intent of this
specification.
32
d. Unit shall be UL listed.
33
7.
Dual Zone Module:
34
35
36
a. Dual initiating circuit line monitoring shall be provided by a dual zone

module. This module shall be system interconnected by a ten-pin plug
and harness and shall be operable with the control unit.
37
38
39
40
41
42
b. Each detection circuit shall consist of a two wire Class B circuit or a four
wire Class A circuit. Class B wiring shall be terminated with an end
of line device. Each circuit shall accommodate up to thirty standard
ionization, flame or photoelectric detectors and any quantity of
shorting type contact devices such as manual stations and thermal
detectors intermixed on that circuit.
165477
City of Dallas
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
c. Upon operation of any initiating device installed in the circuit, the

system shall lock into alarm and the red LED alarm indicating device
(one for each circuit) mounted on the face of the module shall
illuminate. A yellow LED trouble indicator (one for each circuit) also
on the face of the module shall illuminate should a break occur in the
initiating circuit wiring, initiating circuit wiring leak current
excessively to ground, or a detector be removed from the circuit.
8
9
d. Receipt of alarm conditions shall have priority over trouble conditions

and shall be annunciated over any trouble conditions.
10
e. All LED indicators shall be lamp tested from the system control panel.
11
f. Provide one spare module.
12
g. Module shall be UL listed.
13
8.
Supplementary Relay Module:
14
15
16
17
18
19
a. For repeating signals there shall be provided adequate supplementary

relay modules. Each zone shall be provided with a supplementary
relay. These modules shall each contain eight independent 24 vd-c
relays fitted with SPDT contacts with a rating of 2 amps each. Power
to operate the relays shall be 24 vd-c furnished by the system power
supply.
20
21
22
b. A separate terminal shall be provided for individual actuation of each

relay. All terminals shall be of the clamp type which shall
accommodate 2 wires of up to No. 12 gage.
23
c. Unit shall be UL listed.
24
9.
Audible Alarm Module:
25
26
27
28
a. An audible signal circuit for operating 24 vd-c polarized audible alarm

devices shall be provided by audible alarm modules. Modules shall be
system interconnected by a ten-pin plug and harness assembly and
shall be operable with the control panel.
29
30
31
32
33
b. Upon receipt of a high-going d-c actuating signal, the solid state

circuitry shall supply operating power to a maximum of either twenty
24 vd-c bells or ten 24 vd-c, cast aluminumm horns, Maximum output
current shall be limited to 1.5 amps. Audible devices shall require a
four wire fused, supervised circuit.
34
35
36
c. Module shall contain a yellow LED indicator lamp to indicate an open

or a shorted alarm line when the system is in the normal condition.
LED shall be lamp tested from the control panel.
37
38
10. Emergency Standby Power:
39
40
41
a. Standby power to the system in an emergency shall be provided by a 24

volt sealed lead-acid battery system comprised of a sealed gelled
electrolyte, capable of providing 24-hour standby operation.
42
43
44
b. System shall be complete with support bracketing and screw type

terminals and shall be installed in the same standard system enclosure
that houses the operating modules.
45
c. Units shall be UL listed.
165477
City of Dallas
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
11. Battery Charger/Transfer Module:
2
3
4
5
6
a. Battery charging capability shall be provided by a battery

charger/transfer module. Module shall be system interconnected by a
harness assembly and designed for use with 24 vd-c audible signals.
Capability shall be provided to recharge sealed lead acid batteries to
their full capacity.
7
8
9
10
11
12
b. Loss of main operating power to the system shall automatically cause the
system to transfer to battery power. After main power has been
restored and the emergency batteries have been fully recharged, the
system shall continue to float charge the batteries. Module shall be
fitted with a fuse to protect against the battery overcurrent and
accidental reversal of polarity.
13
14
15
16
c. Battery shall be protected against overcharge and deep discharge.

Failure of the charging system shall be identified by an indicator on
the primary charging module, and also by the system trouble indicator,
if a-c power is functioning.
17
18
D. Smoke Detector Light scattering type.
19
1.
Operate (LED and light sensing photodiode).
20
2.
Field cleanable photo chamber.
21
3.
Simple twist motion, locks detector to included mounting base.
22
4.
Remote function output.
23
5.
Alarm indicating LED.
24
6.
Operate from 24 vd-c power supply.
25
7.
UL listed.
26
8.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
27
a. Model HFP-11, as manufactured by Siemens.
28
b. Or equal.
29
E. Strobe Bell:
30
1.
Aluminum shell.
31
2.
Low power consumption at operating voltage of 24 vd-c.
32
3.
Carbon brush motor and integral RFI suppression.
33
34
4.
Semi-flush mounting (with standard 4 inch square backbox); Surface mounting

(with SB backbox).
35
5.
UL listed.
36
6.
White polycarbonate lens - front mounted with Red "FIRE" lettering.
37
7.
38
a. Series MBDC, as manufacturered by Siemens.
39
b. Or equal.
40
F.
165477
Strobe Horn:
City of Dallas
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1.
Operates from 24 vd-c power supply.
2.
Die cast aluminum housing.
3.
Textured red enamel finish.
4.
Polarized.
5.
Sound output 92 dBA at 10 feet.
6.
UL listed.
7.
White polycarbonate lens, with red "FIRE" lettering, to protect strobe circuitry.
8.
Strobe shall produce 8000 peak candlepower at approximately 1 flash per second.
9.
10
a. Series H/HS, as manufactured by Siemens.
11
b. Or equal.
12
G. Audio/Visual Annunciator:
13
1.
Operates from 24 vd-c power supply.
14
2.
Red molded phenolic cover plate.
15
3.
Polarized vibration-resistant illuminating lamp.
16
4.
Polarized cast aluminum horn.
17
5.
Solid state flasher
18
6.
Thermoplastic reflective lens.
19
7.
Metal back box (finished in red enamel if surface mounted).
20
8.
UL listed.
21
9.
22
a. Model SSD, as manufactured by Siemens.
23
b. Or equal.
24
H. Audible Signal Device:
25
1.
Solid state.
26
2.
Spun aluminum speaker cone and projector.
27
28
3.
Internal amplification circuitry, tone module and gain control in die-cast

aluminum housing.
29
4.
Dust and moisture proof seals.
30
5.
Gray enamel finish on all external surfaces.
31
6.
Maximum output 110 dBA.
32
7.
33
a. Model 300GC, as manufactured by Federal Signal.
34
b. Or equal.
35
I.
165477
Manual Pull Station:
City of Dallas
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
1.
Molded polycarbonate with red matte finish. Raised molded lettering highlighted
in white.
3
4
2.
Alarm switch resetting requires opening front cover. Cover shall be hinged to
backplate assembly and locked by allen head screw.
3.
Normally open SPST switch.
4.
Weather proof gasket.
5.
a. Series MMS-D, as manufactured by Siemens.
b. Or equal.
10
J.
Spare Parts:Furnish the following:
11
1.
Ten percent of each type of sensor. (Minimum of 1).
12
13
2.
Ten percent of each type of module in FACP (power supply, supplementary relay,
input, output; minimum of one).
14
PART 3 EXECUTION
15
3.01
16
17
18
19
20
21
GENERAL
A. Raceways and conductors for the fire alarm, sound and page party systems are not shown
on the Drawings. Provide raceways and conductors as required by the system
manufacturer for a complete and operating system. All raceways and power conductors
shall be in accordance with Division 16. Raceways shall be installed concealed in all
finished spaces and may be installed exposed or concealed in process spaces.
3.02
INSTALLATION
22
23
A. Install fire alarm system including conduit and cable in accordance with approved Shop
Drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations.
24
25
B. Install all conduit and cable required for the complete system, including 120 volt power
requirements for fire alarm control panels. Provide pull and junction boxes as required.
26
27
C. Bond metallic conduits entering non metallic enclosures to a ground terminal within the
enclosure.
28
3.03
29
30

A. The Contractor shall retain a qualified factory trained serviceman to perform the following
services:
31
1.
Inspect and adjust the equipment after installation and insure that it operates properly.
32
2.
Instruct Owners personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment.
33
B. Field Tests:
34
1.
Field testing to be supervised by a factory trained serviceman.
35
36
2.
Verify that the entire installation has been made in accordance with the approved shop
drawings, and that the fire alarm system is ready for total operation.
37
3.
Adjust and leave equipment in proper working order.
38
3.04
165477
TRAINING
City of Dallas
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and

maintenance of the Fire Alarm System furnished under this Section.
4
5
6
C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in
the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly
related to the system being supplied.
7
8
D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall
include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project.
9
10
11
E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative.

Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, controls,, and other major
components.
12
13
14
F.
The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owners use.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16859
1
2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
5
6
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to design, furnish and install
electrical heat trace systems on the piping as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
7
8
9
B. The manufacturer shall design and supply the entire heating system, including the schematic
arrangements, heating cable, junction boxes, thermostats and other equipment necessary to
complete the system, as shown on the Drawings, and as specified herein.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
C. The Engineer's piping drawings, piping line list, equipment list, instrument list and insulation
schedule constitute, in conjunction with this Section, the design parameters of the heat tracing
system. The Drawings are intended only to give a general layout of the heat tracing system.
Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details.
Furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation, a
complete electric heat tracing system, based on the actual piping installation, the manufactures
installation drawings, and recommendations for operating temperature settings.
1.2
RELATED WORK
18
A. Section 16000 ElectricalGeneral Provisions
19
20
C. Section 16110 Raceways, Boxes and Fittings.
21
D. Section 16120 Wires and Cables (600 Volt Maximum).
22
E. Mechanical Division Piping
23
F.
24
1.3
Mechanical Division Pipe hangers and Supports.
SUBMITTALS
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, Section 16000 and as specified herein,
the following calculations and information:
1. Heat loss and operating power calculations.
2. Heat tracing circuit design and loading schedule (if different from that which is shown on
the Drawings).
3. Bill of materials.
4. Catalog data sheets for all components.
5. Typical installation details.
33
34
35
B. Submit the heat tracing system's power requirements for the design condition (extreme
minimum ambient at required maintain temperature) and for the normal operating temperature
(normally expected minimum ambient).
36
1.4
37
38
39
40
41
42

otherwise noted):
165477
City of Dallas
16859 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
National Electric Code (NEC)
Factory Mutual (FM)
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
9
10
B. Furnish copies of the necessary approvals for the heat tracing system and shall verify that the
approvals are current.
11
12
C. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this section of the
13
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14
15
16
period of five years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with
17
18
B. All heat tracing equipment furnished under this Section, shall be supplied by a single
manufacturer,
19
20
21
production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation
shall not be used.
22
1.6
23
24
25
26
copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory
work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
D. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and
operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location,
34
1.7
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment and design, to be free from defects in material
and workmanship for 1 year from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such
transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the
Owner.
1.8
42
43
44
WARRANTY
AREA CLASSIFICATION
A. Supply a heating system that is suitable for the specified industrial and electrical classification
and shall be designed and installed in accordance with the latest local and/or NEC regulations.
1.9
165477
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
City of Dallas
16859 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
A. Provide a heating system capable of maintaining the specified temperature during the lowest
extreme of ambient temperature.
3
4
5
6
7
B. Design Parameters
1. Maintain a minimum temperature as recommended and/or specified within other
Divisions.
2. Refer to the piping Drawings and equipment lists for insulation types and thicknesses in
the Mechanical Division and on the Drawings.
8
9
10
11
C. Heat losses shall be calculated using the manufacturer's standard procedure in conjunction with
the insulation requirements and equipment schedules. The design heat output of the tracing
shall include a 10 percent factor of safety. Contractor is encouraged to suggest changes in
insulation thickness to optimize total system economy.
12
D. Heating cables shall be of the parallel design type.
13
14
E. Instrumentation sample and sensing lines located in outdoor or non-conditioned spaces shall be
heat traced.
15
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
16
2.1
MATERIALS
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
A. Parallel Resistance Self Regulating Cable

1. The heater design shall be such that it can vary its output in response to temperature
variations along a pipe due to heat sinks such as fittings or pipe supports, or changes in
ambient conditions such as those occurring on pipes passing into or out of buildings or
process areas. This variable output feature shall apply to each increment of the heater
independent of each other increment.
2. Heat tracing shall be of a type which can be field cut to length without any cold spots and
can be overlapped at all power outputs without burning out.
3. The heat tracing shall be capable of continuous reliable operation when hanging loose in
free air during equipment removal or replacement.
4. The cable shall not require the use of heat transfer cement or compounds.
5. The cable shall operate on standard voltages without the use of special transformers. Line
voltage fluctuations shall not appreciably affect the cable wattage output.
6. Heat tracing shall be a type which can be field designed to accommodate changes in field
piping without compromising its FM or UL approvals.
32
33
34
35
36
B. Control Thermostats
1. Control thermostats shall be UL listed, heavy duty, industrial ambient type housed in a
watertight, NEMA 4 cast aluminum enclosure. The thermostat shall be provided with
independently adjustable dual switches for control and low temperature alarm. Contact
rating shall be 22 Amps, 480 Volts, resistive.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
C. Individual Circuit Heat Tracing

1. Where single circuit heat tapes are shown on the Drawings, the following equipment shall
be as specified herein.
acceptable:
a. Chemelex, Catalog No. 5BTV1 with tinned copper overbraid and fluoropolymer outer
jacket with thermostat adjustable from 15 to 150 degrees F, mounted in NEMA 4X
enclosure, Catalog No. AMC 1A,
b. Approved Equal.
3. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products
that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above
are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
4. Heat trace tape shall be temperature self limiting type.
165477
City of Dallas
16859 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
D. Power connection kits and junction boxes shall be watertight cast aluminum.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
E. Signal Light Kit

1. Each cable shall have attached at the outer end of the cable, a signal light kit, LED type,
rated for the cable voltage, and installed such that light shall indicate voltage present at
the end of the cable.
2. Enclosures for the thermostat and signal light shall be in accordance with the Area
Classification and Enclosure Types as specified in Section 16000 Electrical General
Provisions.
3. The enclosure supports for the thermostat and signal light enclosures shall be in
accordance with the Strut Support Systems of Section 16045 Electrical Support Hardware.
11
12
13
F.
Instrumentation sample and sensing lines

1. Provide pre-insulated and heat traced 316 stainless steel tubing systems as manufactured
by Raychem, Thermon, or Obrien TRACEPAK.
14
PART 3 - EXECUTION
15
3.1
INSTALLATION
16
17
A. Heat tracing system shall be installed where shown on the Drawings and in accordance with
manufacturer's approved shop drawings and recommendations.
18
19
B. Heating cables shall be run parallel to the pipe only. Spiral wrapping of the heat cables around
the pipes will not be permitted.
20
21
22
23
24
25
C. Power cables for heat tracing circuits running from the supply panel to circuit junction boxes
located on each pipe shall be run in conduit. The heat tracing cable shall connect to the power
cable in a junction box and be routed onto the pipe through a cable feeder connector with gland
nut. The connector shall be two piece construction with a tapered neoprene bushing and
recessed flame resistant interior gland. The connector shall be attached to the pipe with
aluminum J.B. support and pipe strap.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
D. At each point where the junction box is attached to the piping for heating cable entry to the
pipe or device being protected and after the heating cable has been installed, the junction box
stand off shall be filled with clear Dow Corning TRV 732 compound or equal rated 500
degrees F, to provide a waterproof connection. The sealant compound shall also be forced into
the voids in the insulation which were created during installation of the conduit hub. The
sealant compound shall be placed to position all cables away from standoff sides and to
separate cables away from one another. The sealant compound shall be applied in a clean, neat
manner and in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions for the sealant. When the
installation is complete, check that none of the compound has been left on other than the
prescribed areas.
36
37
E. Install "electrically traced line" warning signs every 25-ft along the outer pipe insulation
jacket, Chemelex catalog number "ETL".
38
3.2
TESTING
39
A. Measure the resistance of heating cable system before and after pipe insulation.
40
41
B. Adjust and seal control thermostats to Owner's and Engineer's satisfaction after installation is
complete.
42
43
44
45
46
C. Confirm that the End of Cable light functions upon application of voltage to the tracing.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16859 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
SECTION 16995
1
2
3
4
5
6
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A.
Commissioning. Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems

perform interactively according to the Owners Project Requirements (OPR). Commissioning
during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific objectives
according to the Contract Documents:
1. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the
manufacturers recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and that
they receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors.
2. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems.
3. Verify that O&M documentation is complete.
4. Verify that the Owners operating personnel are adequately trained
18
19
B.
The electrical systems to be commissioned are the lighting and respective controls, and
renewable energy systems (if used).
20
21
22
23
24
C.
Commissioning requires the participation of affected Division contractors to ensure that all
systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. All affected
Division contractors shall be familiar with all parts of the commissioning plan issued by the
CxA (Commissioning Authority) and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities
assigned to them in the Contract Documents.
25
26
27
28
29
30
D.
Commissioning Team. The members of the commissioning team consist of the

Commissioning Authority (CxA), the designated representative of the Owner, the General
Contractor (GC or Contractor), the Architect and Design Engineers, the Mechanical
Contractor (MC), the Electrical Contractor (EC), the Controls Contractor (CC), the Fire
Alarm Contractor, and any other installing subcontractors or suppliers of equipment. The
Owners building or plant operator/Engineer is also a member of the commissioning team.
31
1.2
32
33
34
COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY
A.
1.3
The commissioning authority and/or agency shall be selected and employed by the building
Owner.
COMMISSIONING PLAN
35
36
37
38
A.
Commissioning Plan. The commissioning plan provides guidance in the execution of the
commissioning process. Just after the initial commissioning scoping meeting the CxA will
provide the plan, which will continue to evolve and expand as the project progresses. The
Specifications will take precedence over the Commissioning Plan.
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B.
Commissioning Process. The following narrative provides a brief overview of the typical
commissioning tasks during construction and the general order in which they occur.
1. Commissioning during design begins at the initiation of the Owners Project
Requirements development and documentation, and proceeds through commissioning
specification development, preliminary commissioning plan development and plans and
specifications review.
2. Commissioning during construction begins with a scoping meeting conducted by the
CxA where the commissioning process is reviewed with the commissioning team
members.
165477
City of Dallas
16995 - 1
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
1.4
Additional meetings will be required throughout construction, scheduled by the CxA

with necessary parties attending, to plan, scope, coordinate, schedule future activities
and resolve problems. Generally, these meetings will be included with or will be
sequential with regular subcontractor meetings.
Equipment documentation is submitted to the CxA during normal submittals, including
detailed start-up procedures.
The CxA works with the Subs in developing startup plans and startup documentation
formats, including prefunctional checklists to be completed, during the startup process.
In general, the checkout and performance verification proceeds from simple to complex;
from component level to equipment to systems and intersystem levels with prefunctional
checklists being completed before functional testing.
The Subcontractors, under their own direction, execute and document the prefunctional
checklists and perform startup and initial checkout. The CxA documents that the
checklists and startup were completed according to the approved plans. This may
include the CxA witnessing start-up of selected equipment and systems.
The installing contractors, suppliers and manufacturers, develop specific equipment and
system functional performance test procedures with the assistance of the CxA.
The procedures are executed by the Subcontractors, under the observation of the CxA.
Items of non-compliance in material, installation or setup are corrected at the
Subcontractors expense and the system retested.
The CxA reviews the O&M documentation for completeness. All O&M documentation
must be submitted and approved before the start of training.
Commissioning shall be completed before Substantial Completion.
The CxA reviews, pre-approves and coordinates the training provided by the Subs and
verifies that it was completed.
Deferred testing is conducted, as specified or required.
RESPONSIBILITIES
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
A.
51
52
53
54
B.
General Contractor (GC)

1. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the CxA, and with the CxA
ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master schedule.
2. Include the cost of commissioning planning, coordination and execution in the contract
price.
3. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders and approved
submittals and shop drawings related to commissioned equipment to the CxA in
electronic PDF form.
Systems/O&M data, commissioning tasks and training.
5. Ensure that all Subs execute their commissioning responsibilities according to the
Contract Documents and schedule.
6. A representative shall attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary
meetings scheduled by the CxA to facilitate the Commissioning process.
7. Coordinate the training of Owner personnel.
8. Prepare O&M manuals, according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and
Warranty Period
1. Ensure that Subcontractors execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing,
witnessed by the CxA, according to the specifications.
2. Ensure that Subs correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals
and record drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
165477
Electrical Contractors and Sub-Contractors

The commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of the subcontractors are generally as
follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only). Specific requirements are
shown in the appropriate Divisions.
City of Dallas
16995 - 2
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Construction and Acceptance Phases

1. Include the cost of commissioning planning, coordination and execution in the contract
price.
commissioning documentation, O&M data and training.
3. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the
Commissioning process.
4. Contractors shall provide the CxA with normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals
of commissioned equipment as part of the normal submittal process.
5. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual submittals,
to the CxA for development of start-up and functional testing procedures.
a.
Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up,
operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any
Owner-contracted tests, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty
information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in
force clearly identified. In addition, the installation, start-up and checkout
materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field
checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be
submitted to the Commissioning Authority.
b.
The Commissioning Authority may request further documentation necessary for
the commissioning process.
6. Provide a copy of the O&M manuals and submittals of commissioned equipment,
through normal channels, to the CxA for review and approval.
7. Contractors shall assist (along with the design Engineers) in clarifying the operation and
control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings
or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.
8. Provide assistance to the CxA in preparing the specific functional performance test
procedures. Subs shall review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and
equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during the
tests.
9. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturers start-up
procedures and the prefunctional checklists from the CxA for all commissioned
equipment. Submit to CxA for review and approval prior to startup.
10. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the construction/verification
checklists for all commissioned equipment.
11. Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational checkout
procedures, providing a copy to the CxA.
12. Address current A/E punch list items before functional testing
13. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the
functional performance tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the
agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests,
adjustments and problem solving.
14. Perform functional performance testing under the observation of the CxA for specified
equipment. Assist the CxA in interpreting the monitoring data, as necessary.
15. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as
interpreted by the CxA, and A/E and retest the equipment.
17. Prepare redline as-built drawings for all drawings and final as-builds for contractorgenerated coordination drawings.
18. Provide training of the Owners operating personnel as specified.
19. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to
maintain the validity of the warranty.
165477
City of Dallas
16995 - 3
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
Warranty Period
1. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witnessed by the CxA,
according to the specifications.
2. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built
drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
C.
Equipment Suppliers
1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific
responsibilities of the Owner to keep warranties in force.
2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with Subs.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
23
24
25
26
27
Include all special tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece
of equipment) required for testing equipment according to these Contract Documents in
the base bid price to the Contractor, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that
may be used by the CxA.
Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and
testing procedures.
Review test procedures for equipment installed by factory representatives.
SCHEDULING
A.
The CxA will work with the GC according to established protocols to schedule the
commissioning activities. The CxA will provide sufficient notice to the CM and GC for
scheduling commissioning activities. The GC will integrate all commissioning activities into
the master schedule. All parties will address scheduling problems and make necessary
notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the commissioning process.
28
29
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
30
2.1
TEST EQUIPMENT
31
32
33
A.
All standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required
functional performance testing shall be provided by the Division contractor for the equipment
being tested
34
35
36
B.
Special equipment, tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of
equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract Documents shall be
included in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site.
37
38
C.
All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system
performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications
39
40
PART 3 EXECUTION
41
3.1
MEETINGS
42
43
44
A.
Scoping Meeting. Within 90 days of commencement of construction or when all

subcontractors have been selected, the CxA will schedule, plan and conduct a commissioning
scoping meeting with the entire commissioning team in attendance.
45
46
47
48
B.
Miscellaneous Meetings. Other meetings will be planned and conducted by the CxA as
construction progresses. These meetings will cover coordination, deficiency resolution and
planning issues with particular subcontractor. The CxA will plan these meetings and will
minimize unnecessary time being spent by Subs.
165477
City of Dallas
16995 - 4
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
3.2
REPORTING
2
3
4
A.
The CxA will regularly communicate with all members of the commissioning team, keeping
them apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling changes through memos, progress
reports, etc.
5
6
B.
Testing or review approvals and non-conformance and deficiency reports are made regularly
with the review and testing as described in later sections.
7
8
9
10
C.
A final summary report by the CxA will be provided focusing on evaluating commissioning
process issues and identifying areas where the process could be improved. All acquired
documentation, logs, minutes, reports, deficiency lists, communications, findings, unresolved
issues, etc., will be compiled in appendices and provided with the summary report.
11
3.3
12
13
SUBMITTALS
A.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
These requests will be integrated into the normal submittal process and protocol of the
construction team. At minimum, the request will include the manufacturer and model
number, the manufacturers printed installation and detailed start-up procedures, full
sequences of operation, Systems Manuals and O&M data, performance data, any performance
test procedures, control drawings and details of Owner contracted tests. In addition, the
installation and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the
actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be
submitted to the Commissioning Authority. All documentation requested by the CxA will be
included by the Subcontractors in their O&M manual contributions.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
The CxA will provide appropriate contractors with a specific request for the type of submittal
documentation the CxA requires to facilitate the commissioning work.
B.
3.4
The Commissioning Authority will review and approve submittals related to the
commissioned equipment for conformance to the Contract Documents as it relates to the
commissioning process, to the functional performance of the equipment and adequacy for
developing test procedures. This review is intended primarily to aid in the development of
functional testing procedures and only secondarily to verify compliance with equipment
specifications. The Commissioning Agent will notify the appropriate persons as requested, of
items missing or areas that are not in conformance with Contract Documents and which
require resubmission.
START-UP, CONSTRUCTION/VERIFICATION CHECKLISTS AND INITIAL

CHECKOUT
33
34
35
A.
The following procedures apply to all equipment to be commissioned. Some systems that are
not comprised so much of actual dynamic machinery may have very simplified PCs and
startup.
36
37
38
39
40
41
B.
General. Construction/verification checklists are important to ensure that the equipment and
systems are hooked up and operational. It ensures that functional performance testing (indepth system checkout) may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece of equipment
receives full construction/verification checkout. No sampling strategies are used by the
contractor. The prefunctional testing for a given system must be successfully completed prior
to formal functional performance testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
C.
Start-up and Initial Checkout Plan. The CxA shall assist the commissioning team members
responsible for startup of any equipment in developing detailed start-up plans for all
equipment. The primary role of the CxA in this process is to ensure that there is written
documentation that each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have been
completed. Parties responsible for construction/verification checklists and startup are
identified in the commissioning scoping meeting and in the checklist forms. Parties
responsible for executing functional performance tests are identified in the testing
requirements.
165477
City of Dallas
16995 - 5
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The CxA assist in the development of checklists that indicate required procedures to be
executed as part of startup and initial checkout of the systems and the party responsible
for their execution.
The Contractor determines which trade is responsible for executing and documenting
each of the line item tasks and notes that trade on the form. Each form may have more
than one trade responsible for its execution.
The subcontractor responsible for the purchase of the equipment develops the full startup plan by combining (or adding to) the CxAs checklists with the manufacturers
detailed start-up and checkout procedures from the O&M manual and the normally used
field checkout sheets. The plan will include checklists and procedures with specific
boxes or lines for recording and documenting the checking and inspections of each
procedure and a summary statement with a signature block at the end of the plan.
The full start-up plan could consist of something as simple as:
a.
The contractor and CxA construction/verification checklists.
b.
The manufacturers standard written start-up procedures copied from the
installation manuals with check boxes by each procedure and a signature block
added by hand at the end.
c.
The manufacturers normally used field checkout sheets.
The subcontractor submits the full startup plan to the CxA for review and approval.
The CxA reviews and approves the procedures and the format for documenting them,
noting any procedures that need to be added.
The full start-up procedures and the approval form may be provided to the CM for
review and approval, depending on management protocol.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
D.
Execution of Construction/verification Checklists and Startup.

1. Four weeks prior to startup, the Subs and vendors schedule startup and checkout with
the GC and CxA. The performance of the construction/verification checklists, startup
and checkout are directed and executed by the Sub or vendor. When checking off
construction/verification checklists, signatures may be required of other Subcontractors
for verification of completion of their work.
2. The CxA shall observe, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of primary
equipment, unless there are multiple units, (in which case a sampling strategy may be
used as approved).
3. For lower-level components of equipment the CxA shall observe a sampling of the
prefunctional and start-up procedures.
4. The Subcontractors and vendors shall execute startup and provide the CxA with a
signed and dated copy of the completed start-up and construction/verification tests and
checklists.
5. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task on the
prefunctional checklist was actually performed shall initial or check that item off.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
E.
Deficiencies, Non-Conformance and Approval in Checklists and Startup.

1. The Subcontractors shall clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and
construction/verification procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom
of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any
outstanding deficiencies are provided to the CxA within two days of test completion.
2. The CxA shall work with the Subcontractors and vendors to correct and retest
deficiencies or uncompleted items. The CxA will involve the CM or GC and others as
necessary. The installing Subcontractors or vendors shall correct all areas that are
deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify
the CxA as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated
start-up report and a Statement of Correction on the original non-compliance report.
When satisfactorily completed, the CxA recommends approval of the execution of the
checklists and startup of each system using a standard form.
53
3.5
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
165477
City of Dallas
16995 - 6
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
A.
This sub-section applies to all commissioning functional performance testing for all divisions.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
B.
Objectives and Scope. The objective of functional performance testing is to demonstrate that
each system is operating according to the documented design intent and Contract Documents.
Functional testing facilitates bringing the systems from a state of substantial completion to
full dynamic operation. Additionally, during the testing process, areas of deficient
performance are identified and corrected, improving the operation and functioning of the
systems.
In general, each system should be operated through all modes of operation where there is a
specified system response. Verifying each sequence in the sequences of operation is
required.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
C.
Development of Test Procedures. Before test procedures are written, the CxA shall obtain all
requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems,
including an updated points list, program code, control sequences and parameters. Each Sub
or vendor responsible to execute a test, shall provide assistance to the CxA in developing the
procedures review (answering questions about equipment, operation, sequences, etc.). Prior
to execution, the CxA shall provide a copy of the test procedures to the Sub(s) who shall
review the tests for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection. The CxA may
submit the tests to the A/E for review, if requested.
The purpose of any given specific test is to verify and document compliance with the stated
criteria of acceptance given on the test form.
21
22
23
24
25
D.
Test Methods.
1. Functional performance testing may be achieved by manual testing (persons manipulate
the equipment and observe performance) or by monitoring the performance and
analyzing the results. The CxA will determine which method is most appropriate for
tests that do not have a method specified.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
E.
Coordination and Scheduling. The Subcontractors shall provide sufficient notice to the CxA
regarding their
completion schedule for the construction/verification checklists and startup of all
equipment and systems. The CxA will schedule functional tests through the GC and affected
Subcontractors. The CxA shall direct, witness and document the functional testing of all equipment
and systems. The Subs shall execute the tests.
In general, functional testing is conducted after construction/verification testing and startup
has been satisfactorily completed. Testing proceeds from components to subsystems to
systems. When the proper performance of all interacting individual systems has been
achieved, the interface or coordinated responses between systems is checked.
35
3.6
DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL OF TESTS
36
37
38
39
A.
Documentation. The CxA shall witness and document the results of all functional tests using
the specific procedural forms developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, these forms are
provided to the GC for review and approval and to the Subs for review. The CxA will
include the filled out forms in the Commissioning Report.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
B.
Non-Conformance.
1. All deficiencies or non-conformance issues shall be noted and reported on a standard
non-compliance form.
2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the
discretion of the CxA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution will be documented
on the procedure form.
3. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary
delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures.
4. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified, the CxA discusses the issue with the
executing contractor.
a.
When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the Sub accepts responsibility to
correct it:
165477
City of Dallas
16995 - 7
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
1)
5.
6.
7.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
C.
3.7
The CxA documents the deficiency and the Subs response and intentions
and they go on to another test or sequence
b.
If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or
who is responsible:
1)
The deficiency shall be documented on the non-compliance form with the
Subcontractors response and a copy given to the GC and to the
Subcontractor representative assumed to be responsible.
2)
Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other
parties are brought into the discussions as needed. Final interpretive
authority is with the A/E. Final acceptance authority is with the Owner.
3)
Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate
party corrects the deficiency, signs the statement of correction on the noncompliance form and provides it to the CxA. The CxA reschedules the
test and the test is repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved.
Cost of Retesting.
The cost for the Subcontractor to retest a construction/verification or functional test, if
they are responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If they are not responsible, any
cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the GC.
The Contractor shall respond in writing to the CxA at least as often as commissioning
meetings are being scheduled concerning the status of each apparent outstanding
discrepancy identified during commissioning. Discussion shall cover explanations of
any disagreements and proposals for their resolution.
The CxA retains the original non-conformance forms until the end of the project.
Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect. If 10%, or three, whichever is greater, of identical

pieces (size alone does not constitute a difference) of equipment fail to perform to the
Contract Documents (mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing defect, not
allowing it to meet its submitted performance spec, all identical units may be considered
unacceptable. In such case, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with the following:
a.
Within one week of notification, the Contractor or manufacturers representative shall
examine all other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings shall be
provided within two weeks of the original notice.
b. Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or manufacturer shall
provide a signed and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc.
and all proposed solutions which shall include full equipment submittals. The proposed
solutions shall not significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original
installation.
c.
The Owner will determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a repair is
acceptable.
d. Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair all
identical items, at their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original
equipment warranty had begun. The replacement/repair work shall proceed with
reasonable speed beginning within one week from when parts can be obtained.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS
44
45
A.
The following O&M manual requirements do not replace O&M manual documentation
requirements elsewhere in these specifications.
46
47
48
B.
Each Division shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and systems
covered in that Division and deliver this documentation to the GC for inclusion in the O&M
manuals, according to this section, prior to the training of Owner personnel.
49
C.
The CxA shall receive a copy of the O&M manuals for review.
50
51
D.
Field checkout sheets and logs should be provided to the CxA for inclusion in the
Commissioning Record Book.
165477
City of Dallas
16995 - 8
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
3
E.
3.8
Review and Approvals. Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M manuals
shall be made by the A/E and by the CxA.
TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
4
5
A.
The GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure
that training is completed.
6
7
B.
The CxA shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of the
training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3.9
WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS

A.
Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout plan
described and the filled out start-up, initial checkout and prefunctional checklists,
manufacturers factory and field testing and inspection forms, contractors inspection and
functional testing forms, O&M Manuals, /training plans and training records. These work
products will be supplied to the CxA to be included in the final commissioning report.
END OF SECTION
165477
City of Dallas
16995 - 9
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014
1
2
165477
City of Dallas
16995 - 10
ISSUED FOR BID

June 11, 2014

City of Dallas PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

City of Dallas PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SPECIAL PROVISIONS

ABLE NO. 3 STORM WATER PUMPING STATION

TRINITY WATERSHED MANAGEMENT DEPARTMENT

CONTRACT NO. ________

CONTRACT NO. ________

CONTRACT NO. ________

DIVISION 02 - SITE WORK

DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING

ISSUED FOR BID

COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

ISSUED FOR BID

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS

ISSUED FOR BID

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

GALVANIC ANODE CATHODIC PROTECTION

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: BASIC REQUIREMENTS

ISSUED FOR BID

HVAC: HEAT PUMP AIR TO AIR

ELECTRICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS

ISSUED FOR BID

ISSUED FOR BID

The following specifications were prepared under my direction:

ALBERT CHARLES PETRASEK, JR.

The following specifications were prepared under my direction:

ABLE No. 3 Storm Water Pumping Station

The following specifications in were prepared under my direction:

REBECCA CAYE COOK

The following specifications in were prepared under my direction:

ABLE No. 3 Storm Water Pumping Station

The following specifications in were prepared under my direction:

ABLE No. 3 Storm Water Pumping Station

ISSUED FOR BID

The following specifications in were prepared under my direction:

SEOK MIN KIM

ABLE No. 3 Storm Water Pumping Station

A. Section includes electric traction passenger elevators.

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to

ISSUED FOR BID

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

ISSUED FOR BID

12. Additional Requirements:

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation systems as required to

DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

ISSUED FOR BID

A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame

B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car-control stations. Mount in

ISSUED FOR BID

D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in

H. Standby Power Elevator Selector Switches: Provide switches, as required by

2.10 FINISH MATERIALS

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.

A. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to